:

Digitized

by Microsoft

PA

(ffowiell

Utttowitg

ptarg

BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME "*FROM THE ,

SAGE

ENDOWMENT FUND
THE GIFT OF

Henrn W. Sage
1891
J\*..)U.$
\\

K3j.&\mi..

Digitized

by Microsoft

PA

ne

367.T47

"

Un

'

Versi,y Ubrary

M^SX un^lun nff...

AtMc Gre ek

All

books are subject

to recall after

two weeks

Olin/Kroch Library

DATE DUE
8 iTnTR "*

This book

was

digitized

by Microsoft Corporation

in

cooperation with Cornell University Libraries, 2007.

You may use and print

this

copy in

limited quantity

for your personal purposes, but

may not distribute

or

provide access to

it

(or modified or partial versions of it)

for revenue-generating or other

commercial purposes.

Digitized

by Microsoft

A SYNTAX
OF

ATTIC GREEK
BY
F. E.

THOMPSON,
'
",

M.A.

LATE ASSISTANT MASTER AT MARLBOROUGH COLLEGE AUTHOR OF HOMERIC GRAMMAR ELEMENTARY GREEK SYNTAX,' ETC
'
'

NEW IMPRESSION

LONGMANS,- GREEN, AND

39

CO.

PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON

NEW YORK AND BOMBAY
1898
Digitized

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft

CONTENTS:
I-13.
Introduction
to the

Simple and Compoumd Sentence,

and Definitions of Terms.

The Statement, Question, and Petition, Subject, Copula, and Predicate, page 1 The Predicate and its Supplementary Adjuncts, or Supplementary Predicates, 2 The Object, Direct and Remote, 5 The Predicate, Attributive or Epithet, and Apposition, 5 Simple and Compound Sentences, 5 Principal and Subordinate Sentences,

6 Co-ordinate Sentences, 7 Classification of Subordinate Sentences into A. Substantival. B. Adverbial. 0. Relative, 7 Oratio Recta, 10 Oratio Obliqua, 10 Sub-direct and Sub-oblique, 11
:

Virtually Oblique, 11.

PAKT

I.

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.

CHAPTER
14-34.

I.

Subject

and

Predicate

Attributive and

Apposition.

The

Subject, page 12 The Copula, 12 Omission of the Copula, 12 Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive in the Accusative, and in the Nominative, 13 Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive in the Genitive and Dative, 13 Omission of the Subject, 13 The PrediPeculiarities in the Agreement of Subject and Predicate, cate, 14 15Neuter Plural and Verb Singular, 15Neuter Plural and Verb Plural, 15 Adjective-Predicate in Neuter Singular with

Plural Subject,
Predicate,

15 Schema

Pindaricum,
Sde,

16Agreement
iKeivos,

of Predi-

cate with several subjects, 16

Digitized

oStos,

as Subject and

18 Peculiarities of Number,

Singular, Dual,

and

Plural,

by Microsoft


CONTENTS.

The
23

18The Dual Number, 19The

of

Plural used for the Singular, 21

of

First Person Plural used

Peculiarities

Person,

22

Supplementary

a Singular Subject, 22 Predicates, 22

Peculiarities in the construction of the Attributive or Epithet,

Peculiarities of Apposition, 24.

CHAPTER
35-66.

II.

The

Article.

Origin and Development of the Article, page 27 Survivals of the older usages of 6, r), t6, and 8s, ij, 8 in Attic Greek, 28 The Article in Attic Greek, 29 The Article with Participles, 31 The Article

with Numerals, 31 Fluctuating Use and Omission of the Article, 31 With Objects of external nature, 32 With material objects, 32 With familiar places, things, and persons, 32 With abstract and other words, 32With names of arts, trades, and sciences, 33 The Article with proper names of persons and places, 33 With geographical names, 33 The noun-making power of the Article, 34 The Article distinguishes the Subject from the Predicate, 36 The Article with the Predicate, 37 Position of the Article A. The Predicative Position. B. The Attributive Position, 37 Position when a Genitive follows, 39 Predicative Position when used, 40 Attributive Position when used, 41 Words which
:

vary their meaning according to the position of the Article, 41 Oblique or Dependent Predicates, 43 Idiomatic Phrases with the

Article, 46.

CHAPTER

III.

67 _ 77-

Pronouns.

Personal Pronouns, page 47 Possessive Pronouns, 48 Reflexive Pronouns, 49 Demonstrative Pronouns, 51 The Pronoun airbs, 53 Interrogative Pronouns, 56 Relative Pronouns and Attraction, 57 Attraction, 58 Miscellaneous instances of Attraction, 59 Indefinite Pronouns, 61. Digitized by Microsoft

CONTENTS.

CHAPTER
78-126.

IV.

The

Cases.

Preliminary note on the cases, page S4rTT!ie Nominative, 65 The Vocative, 66 The Accusative. Preliminary Note, 66 1. The Internal Accusative, 67 2. The External Accusative, 67 Conspectus of

the Internal Accusative, 67 The Internal Accusative, 68, including: [a.) Accusative of Respect, 69 (5.) Accusative of Space and Time, 70 (c.) Accusative of Motion, 71 [d.) Accusative of

the Object and Predicate in agreement or in apposition with the Object, 71 Double Accusative, 71 The External Accusative, 74 Verbs which take an External Accusative, 75 The Genitive 78 Preliminary Note on the Genitive, 78 Possessive Genitive, 79 Genitive of Material or Contents, 80 Genitive of Amount, 81 Genitive of Plenty or Want, 82 The Partitive Genitive (so called), 83 Genitive of Connection, 86 Subjective and Objective

Genitive of Time and Place, 91 Genitive of Value, 92Causal Genitive, 93 Genitive with Verbs of Judicial Proceedings, 95 Genitive Absolute, 96 Genitive with Comparatives, 97 Genitive with Verbs containing a Comparative Notion, 97
Genitive, 90

Genitive of Separation, 98 Free and Miscellaneous Uses, 100 Genitive with Compound Verbs, 100 Double Genitive, 100 The Epexegetical Genitive, 100 Genitive of the Agent (so called), 101 Free use of the Genitive of Connection, 101 The Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs, 102 Free use of the Genitive with Substantives, 104 Preliminary Note on the Dative Case, 104 Dative of the Indirect or Remoter Object, 105 Miscellaneous

examples of the Dative of the Indirect or Remoter Object, 105 Dative of Interest, 106 Free use of the Dative of Interest, 106Dative of the Possessor, 108-^Ethic Dative, 108Dative of Community or Contact, 108 Dative of the Instrument or Means, Agent, Cause, Measure of Difference, 110 Dative of Circumstance, 113 Dative of Time and Place, 114 List of Verbs which take a Dative, 116 List of Adjectives and Adverbs which take
'

a Dative, 119.

CHAPTER
127.
Digitized

V.

Comparative and Superlative.

by Microsoft

Page 120


CONTENTS.

CHAPTER

VI.

128-134.

Voices

and Moods.

The Active Voice, page 124 The Middle Voice, 125 The Passive Voice, 130 The Mood, 132 Introductory Note on the Subjunctive and Optative, 132 The Subjunctive in Independent Sentences, 134 The Optative in Independent Sentences, 135 The Imperative, 136.

CHAPTER
135-143.
Classifications

VII.

The

Tenses.

of Greek Tenses, page 138 Time how far observed throughout the Moods, 139 The Kind of Act or State denoted by the Tenses, 140 Ideal division of Tenses, 141 The Present and Imperfect Indicative, 142 The Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative, 144 The Aorist, 143Note on the Aorist, 148The Future, 149 Gnomic and Iterative Tenses, 151 The Tenses in the Moods, 152.

CHAPTER
144-162.

VIII.

The Three Verbal Nouns.

2.

1.

The

page 153 The Participle (an Adjec153 Note on The Verbal Adjectives in tos and the Infinitive, 153 The Infinitive, 153 The Supplementary Infini154The Subject before and the Predicate after the Infinitive (commonly called the Accusative with the Infinitive), 157 The Infinitive as a Noun, 160 The Participle, 162 The Participle as an Attributive, 163 The Genitive Absolute, 165 The Genitive Absolute in Greek and Latin, 166 The Accusative Absolute, 167 168 Their personal construction, 168 Their Verbals in impersonal construction, 169 The Supplementary Participle, 169 The Supplementary Participle in agreement with the subject
Infinitive (a Substantive),
tive),

153

3.

Teos,

tive,

-reos,

of Saying and of Perception, 169 Emotion, 1700. With Verbs of Beginning, Continuing, and Ending an Action, 170D. With Verbs of making

of the

Verb

A. With Verbs
of

B.

With Verbs

Digitized

by Microsoft


CONTENTS.

or becoming Manifest, and of escaping Notice, 170 Note on Special Verbs which take this construction, e.g. &px.o/iai, tpddvoi, XavB&vu, etc., 171 The Supplementary Participle in agreement

with the Object of the Verb

cease,

A. With Verbs
174
B.

of

making

to
of

finding,

detecting,

Tenses of the Participle, and time in the Participles, 175 The Future Participle, 176.

Perception, 175

The

overlooking,

With Verbs

PAET

II.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.

CHAPTER

I.

163-170.
.

Substantival Sentences.

The Indirect Statement, page 178 2. The Indirect Question, 178 3. The Indirect Petition, 178 The Indirect Statement, 178 A. The Infinitive in the Indirect Statement, 178 B. 8n and is with the Indicative and Optative in the Indirect Statement, 181 ft The
:

Participle in the Indirect Statement, 186

-The

Indirect Question,

188

Deliberative

or

Dubitative

Indirect Questions,

190

The

Indirect Petition, 191.

CHAPTER
171-206.

II.

Conditional Sentences.

The

Definite and Indefinite Sentences, 194ConDistinction of Conditions, 196 Division of Conditional Sentences, 197 Ordinary Conditions, 197 Ordinary Conditions in Greek and Latin, 200 General or Frequentative Examples, 200 The Negatives in Conditional Sentences, 201 Relative Conditional Sentences, 201 Participles in the Protasis, 203"Av with the Future 203 Repetition of 202Position of Indicative, 204 Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of the Verb, 205 Ellipse of the Protasis, 205 W and &v both in the Protasis, seemingly interrogative, 207 206 in Apodosis, 207 in Protasis, 208 Conditional seemingly Participle "Av with the
Particle &v, page 193
ditional Sentences, 195
*, &v,
A(?
'E<

Digitized

by Microsoft


CONTENTS.
.Particles

Sentences,
209.

and their Combinations, 208 Examples of Conditional (A.) el with Indicative in Protasis and Apodosis, 209

Ordinary Present Conditions, 209. {B. ) Ordinary Past Conditions, (G. ) Present and Past in Combination, 210 Ordinary Future Conditions, Mv (fy) with Subjunctive, 210 Less Vivid Future Conditions, el with Optative, 211 Most Vivid Future Conditions, el with Future Indicative, 212 Mixed examples illustrating the connection between and interchangeability of the Subjunctive, Optative, and Future Indicative in Conditional Sentences, 213 The Optative and Indicative with &v without a Protasis, 214

'

el with Historic Tenses of Indicative in with the same in Apodosis, 215 The omission of &v in Apodosis with the Indicative, 217 'E<c {tfv) with the Subjunctive, and el with the Optative in General or Frequentative Suppositions, 220 Mixed Examples, 222Examples of the Conditional Participle in a Protasis, 224 Examples of a Conditional Relative Sentence, 225 Relative Conditional Sentences expressing General Suppositions, 226 Examples of Infinitive in Apodosis with &v, 226 Examples of Participle in Apodosis with &v, 227 Supplementary Note on i&p with the Subjunctive, and el with the Optative,

Unfulfilled Conditions,
Protasis, &v

227.

CHAPTER

III.

207-224.

Temporal

Sentences.

"When" in Definite Time (Past),

iirel, eireiSi) (tylKa, tire), page 233 "As soon as," "Directly," in Definite Time, tirel {iweiSii), T&xurra, <lis, 234 " Whenever," "As often as," in Indefinite Time, iirel, iiveiSii,

T)vUa,

lire,
il-

mlrre, (Itt^v, iireiS&v, Srav, etc.),

06,

235

"Since" in Definite
&

Time,
&i>s,

236 "Whilst"
t

Stra, Strop

xp ovov ifixa

(p-typi),

in Definite Time, las, tare, to to 237 "Whilst " in Indefinite Time,

etc.,

with

&.v

and Subj., without &v and Opt., 237

tips, la-re, jui*xpi

"Until"

&xph 238" Until " in Indefinite Time, las, etc., with &v and Subj., without &v an Opt., 239 The Conjunction irplv, 240 Ttplv with the Infinitive, 241 Uplv with the Indicative in Definite Time (Past), 242 \iplv with the Subjunctive and Optative in Indefinite Time, 242 Uplv with the Infinitive after Negative Sentences, and with the other Moods after Affirmative Sentences, 243*-kv omitted with the Subjunctive, in Temporal and other Subordinate Sentences, 245-Av retained with the OptaThe Subjunctive instead of the Optative or co-ordinate tive, 246 with the Optative in Historic Sequence, 246 The Participle as a Substitute for a Temporal Sentence, 247.
in Definite Time,

Digitized

by Microsoft


CONTENTS.

ix

CHAPTER IV.
225-226.

Concessive Sentences.

Concessive Sentences, page

249 Note on d

kcu, koX d, etc.,

250.

CHAPTER

V.

227-239.

(1)

Final Sentences,

(2)

oVus with the Future

etc.

Indicative,

and

(3)

Verbs of Fearing with py,

Final Sentences, page 253

Optative, 253

Final Particles with the Subjunctive and Final Sentences with Past Tenses of the Indicative, 257 Final Sentences with the Future Participle, 258 Relative Final Sentences, 258 Final Sentences with the Infinitive, 259 "Ottws, Situs modal with the Future Indicative, and Variant Constructions, 259 Elliptical use of &rws with the
/itf,

etc.

Situs,

/}

Future Indicative, 262 '07rus, Uttus // with Verbs of Commanding and Forbidding, 262 Verbs of Fearing with /i) and jmj 01), 262 Verbs of Fearing, etc., with the Indicative, 266 Note on Dawes' Canon, 267.
:

CHAPTER

VI.

240-244,

Consecutive

and Limitative

Sentences.

Qcrre

with the Indicative and the Infinitive, page 270

tences in Greek and Latin, 273

1273

Limitative or Restrictive Sentences, 274.

CHAPTER
VII.

Consecutive SenRelative Consecutive Sentences,

245.

Causal Sentences.

(a.)

tences,

Causal Particles and a Finite Mood, page 276 [b.) Relative Sen 278 (c.) Participles, 278 (d.) Miscellaneous ways, 279.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CONTENTS.

CHAPTER
246.

VIII.

Expressions of a Wish.

Page 280

CHAPTER IX.
247.

Relative Sentences

Page 284

PAET

III.

PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO OBLIQUA,

AND

FIGURES.

CHAPTER

I.

248-252.

Prepositions.

Introductory Note on Prepositions, page 286 The Prepositions and their meanings with the three eases, 289 Collected Usages of Prepositions, 289 Prepositions and the cases they go with, 291.

/.

Prepositions with one Case only

253"255-

a
is,

With Accusative

only.

And, page

291Eis

or

292 is,

294.

256-264.
page
301

(i.)

With Genitive
it,

only.
heiccv,

dvrl,

294 dirb, 295 Ik,

>

297 vpt>, 300 fixeu, 301 hem,

fern, 301

w P' s 301

Old Cases

used as quasi-Prepositions

with the Genitive, 302.

265-268.
page 302
aiv,

(c.)

With Dative

only.

iv,

305

Note on civ and

fierd,

306

&p.a, 8/j.ov, etc.,

306.

II.

Prepositions
iirip,

with two Cases.

Genitive,
316.

269-272.
page 307

With Accusative and

Kwrd, 310

hid,

314

/icrd,

Ill Prepositions with

273-278.
&p.<pl,

all three Cases.

page

317 ftrf, 319irapd, 328 irept,

Digitized

332-7rp6s,

336 iird,

341.

by Microsoft

CONTENTS.

CHAPTER

II.

279-310.

The Negatives.

Introductory Note, page 345 0i5 Privative, 346 Oi and ni with Adjectives, Participles used as Adjectives, Adverbs, and Substantives, 348 0t) and jttj} with Participles, 350 Oi and nil with the Infinitive, 351 Oi) and frf with Direct and Indirect Statements, 354 Oi and fffi with Indirect Statements in the Participle, 354 Oi and firj with Direct Questions, 355 Oi and /m) with Deliberative Questions, 356 Oi and fi.ii with Indirect Questions, 356 Oi and /mj with IndirectPetitions, 357 OS and /?} with Conditional Sentences, 358 Oi and /} with Concessive Sentences, 359 Oi and fi.ii with Causal Sentences, 359 Oi and p.J\ with Consecutive and Restrictive Sentences, 360 Oi and fiii with Temporal and Local Sentences, 361 Oi and fi.ii with Pinal Sentences, etc., 361 Oi and fi.i\ with Relatives, 362 M77 with Wishes, 364 Mi} and Wr\ oi with the Infinitive, 365 M-)) oi with the Participle, 368 Mi} and fi.ii oi with the Subjunctive, 369 Oi /v/j with the Subjunctive and Future Indicative, 371 Further examples of oi /m} with: A. Subjunctive, 372 B. Future Indicative, 373 Repetition of the Negative, 375 Oidets, fi.-qdels, oitib, fofSiv, etc., 376 Mi} with Oaths and Assertions, 378 Mi} where oi might have been expected, 378 Miscellaneous instances showing the power of oi to make a downright Negative Statement, 379 Note on fi.ii, fify oi with the Infinitive and PartiNote on ftf and pA) oi with the Subjunctive, 382 Note ciple, 380 on oi fiAf with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative, 382.

CHAPTER
311-327.

III.

Oratio Obliqua.

Introductory, page 387 Rules for Sub-direct Clauses in Oratio Obliqua, 389 Types of Sub-direct Clauses in Historic Sequence, 390 Rules for Sub-oblique Clauses in Oratio Obliqua, 392 Types of Sub-direct and Sub-oblique Clauses in the Obliqua, 393 The Apodosis in the

Participle in Oratio Obliqua, 395

Relative

Sentences in Oratio

Obliqua,

395 Some

real examples of Oratio Obliqua analysed, 396

Stl
uis

The Infinitive, and or with Finite Moods in Sub-direct Sentences of Oratio Obliqua, 398Assimilation of Optatives, 402 Non- Assimilation, 403 Examples of Mixed Graphic and
Obliqua,

strict

404Virtual

Oratio Obliqua,

404 Past

Tenses of the

Indicative in Oratio Obliqua, 405 Apparently Abnormal Obliqua, 406 Long Speeches in Obliqua, 407. Digitized by Microsoft


xH

CONTENTS.

CHAPTER
328-347Alliteration,

IV.
etc.

Figures of Rhetoric,

page 410 Anakoluthia, 411 Antiptosis, 412 Asyndeton, Binary Structure, 413Braehylogy, 414Zeugma and Syl415 Constractio Praegnans, 415 Braehylogy of Comparison, 416 Cataehresis, 416 Ellipse and Aposiopesis, 416 Euphemism, 417 Hypallage, 418 Hyperbaton, Chiasmus, Hysteron Proteron, 418 Litotes, 419 Oxymoron, 420 Periphrasis, 421 Pleonasm, 421 Prolepsis or Anticipation, 422Puns, 422.
413
lepsis,

English Index,

Page 425
.

Greek Index,
Table of References,

....

.428

434

Digitized

by Microsoft

PREFACE.
Some
explanation, perhaps apology,
is

necessary for

publishing a

new Greek Syntax, when

so

many

similar

books by really great Greek scholars are in use.

My

object has been to write a Greek Syntax arranged on the

analytical

method,

i.e.

by

sentences,

simple

and com-

pound;
valuable

to

attempt for Greek what Dr. Kennedy's infor Latin.

Grammars have done

Dr. Donaldson's
:

once well-known Greek Grammars are so arranged

are the

they

works of a very able

man and

a ripe scholar, but

no one would now accept the

local theory of the Cases,

or the treatment of Conditionals as set forth in them.

may

perhaps be allowed to explain

how
it,

came
as the

to write this Syntax,

and the plan adopted in

book, such as

it is, is

not a mere compilation from other

Grammars.
jotting

have

for

many

years been in the habit of

down marginal
it

references to constructions.
to

When

three years ago

was suggested

me

that I should

draw up a Greek Syntax, I began by writing out these

examples, under their different headings.
outline of rules with

I thus had an

many hundred

examples, an outline
I then I

which has not been materially departed from.

'

read or re-read several books bearing on the subject.

Digitized

by Microsoft

xiv

PREFACE.

need hardly say that

my

views had to be modified on

several points of principle,

and

still

more of

detail.

With

regard to the examples I do not suppose that I have

used or referred to one quarter of the original supply.

For several of

my

own, again, I have substituted others,

either because these latter

were so familiar as to have

or

acquired

vested

rights

with teachers and learners

because they were handier.

My

original outline

began

with Homeric instances, but, as I proceeded, I cut these

out,
it

and confined myself solely

to

to Attic, chiefly because

was represented

me

that,

when boys

write Greek

Prose or Iambics, they have such a fatal perversity for

bringing in an Epic word or construction.
I

need hardly

say that, when I read Mr. Monro's masterly Homeric

Grammar,

I felt exceedingly glad that I

had suppressed

my own

attempt to deal with so

difficult a subject.

monumental Greek Grammar should

of course begin with

Homer, and end certainly not before the Hellenistic period,

proceeding with the grand march of the historic method.

In a book meant for boys or undergraduates the object

would, I think, be most practically secured by adding
appendices, Homeric, Hellenistic, and so forth.
suggestion need not be discussed here.

But

this

The analysis which

variations,

have followed

is,

with some

the logical

method made

familiar

by Dr.

Kennedy's Latin Grammars.

For instance, I begin the

:

Introduction with a piece of formal logic

Digitized

the Proposi-

by Microsoft

PREFACE.
tion contains three parts, Subject, Copula,

and Predicate.
have pro-

Had
cate

I introduced

Homeric examples,

I should

bably commenced with the Verb (Ziwj-o-t, BiSm-a-i, Predi-

Subject), connecting the thought with the form,

to trace thence the gradual

and have attempted

growth

and development of the Sentence. begun

earlier

Indeed I might have

with the blunt, but perfectly intelligible

:

expression of judgment

irfrrios,

fool (Predicate only).

is

But though the

scientific,

historical

method

unquestionably more
logical
for

yet

deliberately

adopted the

several reasons, chiefly

because teachers and boys are

it

already familiar with

in learning Latin:

double

advantage, for there

is

thus no

new method

to acquire,

and Greek and Latin can be worked together.

But, whichever method

we

pursue,

it is

equally unwise

and impossible to be rigidly consistent.

for instance.

Take the Cases,

The Nominative

is

used both as Subject

and as Predicate.
Verb, and so
cates.

The Accusative and Dative qualify a

be regarded as supplementary Prediqualifies a Substantive,
:

may

The Genitive

and thus

is

Adjectival or Attributive

but

it

may also
Cases,

qualify a Verb,
It

and

so

becomes a supplementary Predicate.

to split

would
their

however be absurd

up the

and range

uses under different Chapters.

When we come
is

to the
:

Compound Sentence one of two courses

(1) to treat all the usages of the

open

either

Moods

together, giving

one chapter to the Indicative, another to the Optative

Digitized

by Microsoft

PREFACE.
and so on
;

or (2) to take the different kinds of Subordin-

ate Sentences,
different

and show how they are expressed by the

Moods.

Most Grammars
is

adopt
it,

the former
the same,
it

method, and there

much

to

be said for

might appear, as

for the Cases.

This method brings to-

gether the different usages which often vary so slightly,

and shade

off into

one another

it

makes the learner

see

that there are

Optative.
of

not so

many

distinct Optatives,

but one

But experience convinces

is

me

that the

method

sentences

incomparably the most practical and

easily

remembered, while in the hands of a careful teacher

the unity of each

It is
far easier

Mood may

constantly be pointed out.

for a

boy to learn how to express the

different kinds of
all

Temporal Sentences by treating them

together than by dividing

them among the Moods.

and why

All grammars do

this for Conditional Sentences,

uot for other kinds of Subordinate Sentences which are

almost equally difficult?

However, in order

to supple-

ment the plan adopted

given
a full register

in the text, I have in the of

Index
I

the

uses

of

each

Mood.

have to a considerable extent adopted Dr. Donaldson's

theory of Predicates with some change of nomenclature.

His

division

into

Primary,

Secondary, and

Tertiary

suggests three progressive and co-ordinate stages, whereas

a Secondary Predicate
of the whole Predicate,

is

simply an extension and part

is

and a Tertiary Predicate

no-

thing but an ordinary Predicate (Adjective or Participle),

Digitized

by Microsoft

PREFACE.
not in the Nominative Case.
I prefer therefore the

terms

Supplementary, and Oblique (or Dependent).

ever names
gives the

But what-

we

use, I believe that there is

nothing which
passage

learner a greater grasp of a Greek

than a thorough assimilation of this doctrine of Predication.

Take the Participle

of

for instance,

one of the com-

monest forms
paragraph,
calls in

supplementary Predicates, in a Platonic

Carpenter

e.g.,

the

who

is

out of

sorts

and

the Doctor, or the Parable of the Captain and the

:

mutinous Crew

a knowledge of the exact force of the

Participle in qualifying the

main Predication

is

essential

towards picking our way through the paragraph, and

rendering the Greek into adequate English.

To come

to

details.

The treatment

of the

Cases

must

be unsatisfactory, in far abler hands than mine.

of

The usages

the Accusative

and Dative

fall

easily

enough under

fairly distinct heads.

But the Genitive

I

seems a wilderness of

cross- divisions.

do not see

how

it

is possible to assign its usages to the two distinct

heads of Connexion (Genitive), and Separation (Ablative).

To take only one case

who

shall decide
is

whether the

Genitive of Value and Price

the true Genitive dei.e.

noting Connexion, or an Ablative denoting Exchange,

Separation
less

Comparative Syntax often

is

quite power-

to

help us.

Thus the Greek Genitive Absolute

to be, as Kriiger pointed out long

seems unquestionably

ago, a real Genitive denoting " the sphere within which,"

Digitized

by

fiUcrosoft

PREFACE.
and so the
Class,
(e.g.
;

6eov SiSovros, within the sphere of

is

divine providence)

but in Sanskrit the Absolute Case

it

the Locative, in Latin

is

Circumstantial,

i.e.

Instru-

mental, in Old English

it

was

originally a Dative, and

subsequently a Nominative, in German a Genitive.

have with misgivings retained the familiar but unsatisfactory " Accusative of Kespect "
;

it is

anyhow

as intelligible

as Professor

Goodwin's

"

Accusative of Specification."
it

The Aorist requires more courageous treatment than

usually receives,
correct
if

we

are anxious to render

vice

Greek into

and idiomatic English, and

an act

versa.

The

Aorist- Stem denotes

up.

single, complete,

and summed
to

In the Indicative

this

act belongs

the past,

whether occurring a thousand years ago, or a moment

ago.

When
the

the past

is

not recent, the Aorist

tense, ?fk8ov,

is

trans-

lated

by the English past

act
is

T came.

But,

when

recent and bears on the present, the

Greeks could use the Aorist where

Od.
v.

we

use a Perfect,

e.g.

172, vvv

S'

evddSe a/3/3aXe

Balficov, but

now a god
TrapdSo^a

hath

cast

me on
we have

this shore:

Luke

v. 26, ei&a/u,ev

o-rjpepov,

seen strange things to-day.

Again, where

the act has occurred a

moment

ago, the

Greeks often used

Familiar instances

the Aorist where

we use a
s

Present.
1

occur in the Tragedians, eVjJveo-a,

I commend ;

^a-B^v?

I am pleased ;
1
8

eBe^dfM7jv,

I hail.

Once more the gnomic

a

Soph. Ai. 536.

Blektr. 668.
Digitized

PhU. 1314.
iwi}ica, etc., etc.

Similarly AiriirTvaa, f/nu|o,

by Microsoft

PREFACE.
or iterative Aorist is represented
Perfect, or Present Tenses.

by the English

Past,

And

lastly in similes
II. v.

we must
So

translate the Aorist

by a

Present, e.g.

161, *? Se
far

\emv dopmv
with

ajjy,

as

lion springeth

and

breaketh.-

regard

to

Principal

Sentences.
still

In Subordinate
elastic, as

Sentences our rendering must be

shall see if

more

we

we have

to turn into

Greek the following

when I come, have (am) come,

eTreiSav eX8co
:

shall come, shall have come,

:

if

gone, eTreiBr) airr[K6ov

I had known, el eyvmv when they had / do not believe what you have said,
:

a
he

e'Xefas,

not necessarily a

e'lpr}ica<;

(in past

Obliqua what
still

had

said, the Pluperfect in English,

but the Aorist

in Greek).

Thus, startling as
Aorist
is

the

statement seems, the Greek

translateable into almost every English tense

1 except the Imperfect.

Mr. M. Arnold's dictum

is

as

wise as
not

it is

witty

" the Aorist

was made

for

man, and

man

for the Aorist."

1 Our English narrative Past Tense is by no means parallel with the Greek Aorist. It often is the idiomatic and correct equivalent for a Greek (or Latin) Imperfect, i.e. it is descriptive as well as narrative. few minutes' attention to any ordinary conversation, or almost any page of a standard author, would prove this, e.g. Macaulay, History of England, vol. i. ch. 2. (fin.): "Still, however, the contest conHe [Charles] assured the Duke of York that Halifax should tinued. be dismissed from office, and Halifax that the Duke should be sent In public he affected implacable resentment against to Scotland. Monmouth, and in private conveyed to Monmouth assurances of unalterable affection." A boy set down to translate these tenses into Greek would probably use the Aorist, because he has been required to translate the Greek Imperfect by a clumsy, often unnecessary and

Digitized

by Microsoft

PREFACE.
In dealing with the Moods I have probably
(p.

133)

expressed myself too unhesitatingly that the Optative

cannot be a past form.

Its

Secondary endings, and the

possible loss of the separable augment,

make

it

at least If

conceivable that the Optative

this

was

originally past.

were

so,

a past form would (as in Hebrew, I believe)

be used to denote a wish.

I could not treat the Prepositions briefly,

and did not

conventional
instance,

wish to do

so.

Nothing seems

to

me more

than to pick out two or three uses of

717)09 for

and to make the learner believe that these are the dominant and typical usages.
great snare.

Such a course seems

to

me

I do not believe that the use of the Preposi-

tions can be taught in a

few formal

lessons,

they must be

gradually acquired, like those of the Particles, by constant observation.

In

the

Oratio Obliqua I have

introduced the

two

technical terms, Sub-direct and Sub-oblique.

I prefer

Personally,

names

to periphrases

when

dealing with facts of

constant recurrence, and I do not find the pupil puzzled.

But the teacher need not employ the terms

to

if

he objects

them

the treatment of the chapter does not depend

on the terms.
I had prepared a chapter

on

Particles,

but have sup-

imidiomatic, periphrasis,
etc.

"he was

Much more

correctly T.
all

" the dog howled

night "

affecting," "kept on conTeying," K. Arnold of old taught us on p. 1 that required an Imperfect in Latin.

Digitized

by Microsoft


PREFACE.
pressed
length.
It
it,

as the

book already has outrun

its

intended

only remains

for

me

to

acknowledge

my

special

obligations, to authors

and

to friends.

Of

books, besides old guides such as Jelf and Donald-

son, Liddell

and

Scott, I

have found the following most

useful
(1)

Kriiger's

Griechische

Spracfilehre.

This
I

is,

all

round, the most useful Greek

Grammar

know.

It is

a vast treasury of well-chosen

instances

covering the

whole

range
if

of

so-called

classical

Greek Literature.
his arrangement

Even

you do not always agree with

or conclusions, Kriiger always furnishes

for induction.

ample materials
for the

In substituting a better example

one which I had originally noted, I have found Kriiger

incomparable.
(2)

Madvig's Syntax of
It

the

Greek Language, especially

to

of the Attic dialect.

praise this

would be impertinent in me
scholar.

well-known work by the great

it.

There

seems to be nothing at second-hand in

(3)

Goodwin's Moods and Tenses, and Greek Grammar.

this accomplished scholar is of

The first-named book by

the greatest value.

He

has revolutionised the treatment

of the Conditionals; his treatment of Final

and semi-

Final Sentences is hardly less striking.

to

I have ventured
his papers in the
el.

embody the substance

Digitized

of

two

of

Journal of Philology in a note on lav and

by Microsoft

PREFACE.
(4) Curtius's Student's Greek
tions
to

Grammar, and ElucidaBoth books

Syntax
is

the

Greek

Grammar.

are

most

instructive; the great philologer's

vigorous, fresh,
(5)

singularly

and

suggestive.

Notes on Constructions in Mr. A. Sidgwick's Into

troduction
incisive.

Greek Prose Composition.

Most

practical

and

(6) Eiddell's Digest

of Platonic Idioms, in his edition

of the Apology.
this

must record

my
:

great gratitude to

lamented author.
is

No book

that I

know

of bearing

on Greek Syntax
our time seems to

so suggestive

no Greek scholar of

me

to combine, in so

marked a

degree,

fine taste, subtlety,

and sound judgment.

I wish also to express

my gratitude for the

help afforded

in Professor Jebb's editions of the plays of Sophocles

and selections from the Attic Orators.

I have sparingly alluded to books of reference, and

then only
Professor

to

such as

are

easily It

procurable, such

as

M.

Miiller's Essays.

would be useless to
(I suppose), to

refer boys, or
briick's

most undergraduates

Del-

Syntaktische

Forschungen for

the

comparative

treatment of Greek Syntax, and the probable evolution

of usages and constructions.
of this

But while the

latter part

Grammar was

in the press, Mr. D. B.

Monro pubIt is a

lished his long looked-for

Homeric Grammar.

book with which every teacher of Greek should be

thoroughly familiar, and to parts of which he
Digitized

may

con-

by Microsoft

PREFACE.

joriil

veniently refer his pupils for the origin and explanation

of

Greek constructions.

Mr. Monro has kindly per-

mitted me, in
in his work. I

my

Index, to refer to certain paragraphs

have

to

thank

several

friends

for

much

help.

Mr. A. Sidgwick has been kind enough to go through

the whole of the proofs. I

am

deeply sensible that in so

doing he has most materially added to any value which

this

book may
for

possess.

I have also to thank two old

friends

reading through

some chapters with me,

and giving

me

the advantage of their views,

Professor
to

Butcher of Edinburgh, and Mr. F. Storr of Merchant

Taylors. of

And,

lastly, I

am much

indebted

several

my

colleagues here for help and sympathy.

little slips,

Some

such as wrong accents, have inevitably

They, however, can be
If

escaped several pairs of eyes.

easily rectified,

and will cause no serious harm.

this

any

one

who may use

book cares

to point out

more

important

errors, I shall

be extremely grateful
P. E.

THOMPSON.

Cotton House, Maryborough.

August 1SS3.

Digitized

by Microsoft

NOTE.
The book
is

practically divided
I.

into

II.

An Elementary Syntax. An Advanced Syntax.

have (with a few unimportant
:

The following

distinctions

exceptions) been observed

In
I.

lstly,

Indly,
Zrdly,

The type is large. The headings are in Italics. The name of the author is given without reference
line or chapter, etc.

to

II.

lstly,

2ndly,
Zrdly,

The type is small. The headings are in

thick black type.

etc., ot

Reference is given to the line or chapter, author quoted.

the

Digitized

by Microsoft

1NTK0DTJCTI0N TO THE SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCE, AND DEFINITIONS OP TERMS

I.

THE STATEMENT, QUESTION, AND

PETITION.

sentence assumes three forms (1) the Statement (2) the Question (Interrogatio) (3) the Petition, i.e. a command, request, prayer, or wish (Petitio).
(Enuntiatio)
; ;

A sentence,

logically considered, connects (positively or

negatively) two distinct conceptions.

Thus

in the sentence,

" The rose is sweet," the conceptions of a certain flower

and a certain quality are connected positively. Two conceptions are connected negatively in the sentence, " The
nightshade
is

not wholesome."

A sentence,
more nor
less

logically

and

fully expressed,

may
not B.

he represented hy the formulas

is

B; A
The

is

sentence therefore necessarily

:

consists of three parts, neither

(1)
(2)

Subject,

i.e.

that of which the statement

is

made

the Predicate,

i.e.

the statement

made
is

of the Suhject

(3)

the Copula,
link,
is

i.e.

the connecting or disconnecting"

positive),
is

(when the sentence

it is

not

(when

negative).

These three parts are not always present in language. finite verb contains in itself a complete sentence The Copula is frequently aTpaT7]ya>, I am general.

The

omitted, being contained in the verb, or understood

He/a^?

fiacrtXevei, JEerxes is

king;

arfa6o$ 6 aw\p, The

man
be

is good.

Logically expressed, these sentences would

f3a<rikev<s, 6 avr\p eanv Digitized by Microsoft

Hep>79 eon

aya6o$.

SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.

The Statement, Question, and
Petition differ from one

another simply in the relation of the Predicate to the

Subject.

Thus we may

say, "

The door
;

is

shut " (State-

ment)
is

" Is the door shut ?" (Question)

"

Shut the door

"

(Petition).

In the Statement
;

we

say that the Predicate

applicable to the Subject

is

in the Question
;

we ask

if

the Predicate

applicable to the Subject

in the Petition

we

request or

command

that the Predicate

may

be appli-

cable to the Subject.

Whatever remarks

are here

made

with regard to a sentence apply equally to each of its three forms, the Statement, the Question, and the Petition.

2.

THE PREDICATE AND ITS SUPPLE-

MENTARY ADJUNCTS.
The Predicate
is

the whole statement

made

of the

Subject, whether that statement is short

long and composite.

sisting of

one word, as
Subject.
Eejof^s
6 avr]p

and simple, or It may be short and simple, conin the examples given above
Predicate.
fiao-ikevei,

(sc.

ecmv)

a<ya66<;,

or

it

may

be a composite expression

made up

of

many

words
Subject.
o ircus

Predicate.
^aipei
rejoices
j

VTrep<pva)<;.

The hoy
oi

exceedingly.
I

AOrjvalot

airrfkOov

Tpiraloi.

The Athenians
Digitized

departed

on the third day.

by Microsoft

THE PREDICATE AND ITS

Subject.

ADJUNCTS'.

SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.

Subject.

Predicate.
paullatim
erunt.
|

Saxa

anima mollia

calu-

Stones

gradually waxed
softness of life
fierent, so as to

warm
(ita

with the

ut mollia
soft).

become

Instances
language.

may

be found on any page of a book in any The first point to notice is that the whole

The second point compound Predicates to notice is that, on analysing such (generally a verb, but it may as the above, there is a word all rest which by itself, if the be a noun or participle),
expression constitutes the Predicate.

were away, might stand as a simple Predicate, and that this simple Predicate is further extended or qualified by an adjunct or adjuncts. Thus in the sentence, ol 'Adrjvaiot,
anrrfkdov
Tptraioi,

atrrfkOov

rpircuoi

is

the Predicate
its

airrikdov alone as a Predicate would, with

;

Subject,

have made a complete sentence but airrfkOov is extended by stating the time of departure. There may be many supplementary adjuncts which swell out the Predicate. It is most important in Greek to notice them, and discover their special force, for they often convey the real pith and gist of the predication, denoting manner, degree
cause, time, condition, purpose, the anticipated result, etc.
etc.

In Greek, adverbs,
1

adjectives,

and

participles (some-

times substantives) constantly occur as

supplementary

adjuncts, or, as they will be called throughout this book,

Supplementary Predicates.
Dr. Donaldson called these supplementary adjuncts secondary Predicates. Thus he would have said that atr^XBov was the primary Predicate, and rpmfi*
1

%^o^p%icrosom)


PREDICATE, EPITHET,

AND

APPOSITION.

3.

THE OBJECT, DIRECT AND REMOTE,

is

The direct Object is that which by a transitive verb. The remote,

interested
Beiea /iva<s,
object.

immediately acted on

or remoter Object is that

to -which the direct object is transferred, or that

which is and concerned in the verbal action. Awato I will give ten minae. Here p,va<s is the direct

Aumtco Seica fivas t$> Zi%a<ricak<p,

to the teacher.

will give ten

is

minae
object.

Here to ZihaaicaXm

the remoter

4.

PREDICATE, ATTRIBUTIVE OR EPITHET,

AND

APPOSITION.
will

The following instances

dyaOds, the
6

show the
:

difference be6 dvfip (eariv)

tween a Predicate and an Attributive

man

is

good good

dyados, good,
gives

dy

affix;

dvr\p, the

man dyados, good,

new

is

a Predicate:
is

an Attriof the

butive.

The Predicate

information

assumed to be known already, and thus forms one notion with a SubApposition does not form one notion with a stantive. Substantive, but is a further description appended to a Substantive, e.g. j(pdvo<;, 6 koivo? larpd'i, as Bepairevcrei,
Subject, the Attributive uses information

Time, the

common physician,

will heal thee.

5.

SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.

ffrparrjyS),

I myself am general, is a Simple made a statement, again, is a Nikias Sentence. NiKia<; efai, join the two together, thus But if we Sentence. Simple
Avtos
Digitized

by Microsoft

SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.

Niicta? e$T) ai/Tos crTpaTTjyelv, Nikias stated that he himself

was general,
Sentence
is

we have

Compound

Sentence.

Compound

thus a sentence consisting of two (or more) sentences compounded into one. Logically, i.e. so far as

thought goes, there

a

is

Compound

Sentence.

no difference between a Simple .and Each is an expression containing

e.g.

the three necessary elements of a sentence,

Copula, and Predicate

NtKia<! (Subject)

i.e.

Subject,

e<pr)

(Copula and Predicate).

auTo? (Subject)

<TTpaTr)ya>
e<pr)

(Copula and Predicate).

arpaTijyelv

Nucta? (Subject)

vtos

(Copula

and Predicate).
For the last sentence, so far, as thought goes, simply amounts to this Nikias stated something.
:
|

Xat,pecf>&v, 6(?
<ro<o>Te/3os.

AeTupovs e\9a>v, ripero

el

Tt?

etr)

e/ioy

Chaerephon, going

to

Delphi, asked if

any one were wiser

than

I.

Here we have three sentences compounded into one, of which Xaipe<pa>v is the Subject, and the rest is the Predicate, with the Copula contained in rjpero. So far as thought goes, it amounts to saying, ChaerepJwn asked a question on a certain occasion.
|

6.

PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.

there must be one on depend in construction. Such a sentence the Principal Sentence. Those which depend
rest
Digitized

In every

Compound Sentence

which the
is

called

by Microsoft

CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES.
in

construction

on

it

are called Subordinate Sentences.

e<prj

Thus, in the
Sentence.
easily
Tjyelv

first

example above, Nucleus

is

is

the

Principal Sentence, avrbs a-rpaTrjyelv

the Subordinate

then avros a-rparIn the second cannot stand alone as a sentence.

;

The dependence of the shown if we remove Nuclas

latter
etjyrj,

on the former

is

sentence, Xaipetp&v r)pero is the Principal Sentence the dependent question, el tis elr) e/xov <ro<pu>Tepos, and the temporal participial sentence, et? JeXcpovs e\6av, are the
;

Subordinate Sentences.

7.

CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES.
i.e.

Co-ordinate Sentences are of the same rank,

struction, as those to

conif

which they are

:

joined.

Thus,

a a

sentence

is

co-ordinate with a Principal Sentence,

if

it is

with a Subordinate Sensecond Principal Sentence same nature (whether and of the Subordinate, tence, it is Petition, Adverbial or Question, Statement, an Indirect
Eelative Sentence).
Seofiai,

(See below.)
firp-e

Kai irapiefxcu v/aup /mjt6 davfia^eiv

Oopvpeiv.

beg,

and

entreat you, neither to wonder, nor to interrupt.

Here

icai

vaplep,ai is
Beo/iai,

co-ordinate
is

Sentence Sentence
:

and therefore

while pjfre 0opvBe2v is Subordinate Sentence Oav/idgeiv (an Indirect Petition),

with the Principal a second Principal co-ordinate with the

and therefore

is

Subordinate, and an Indirect Petition.

8.

CLASSIFICATION OF SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.

relation in

Subordinate Sentences are classified according to the which they stand to the Principal Sentence.
Digitized

by Microsoft

SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.

Let the three following groups be taken.

A.
(a)
1.

Peincipal.

Subordinate.

ov paSiop earl
It
is

ravra

fiadelv.

not easy
6(f)T)

to learn this.

2. NuClCUS

arTparriyeiv.

Nihias said
(jS) 1.

that he
el

was

general.

a&ifkov ear iv

ravra

Jjvvitjs.

It is uncertain

whether
this.

you understand

2.

ovk olSa

o0Tt9 eort.

I do

not

know

who he

is.

(7) 1. TrepirjiyyeKKero

iravarparia Bor)6eiv.
to

Orderswere being sent round

2. Beofiai

march in full force.

fiaSeiv.
this.

aov

ravra
to

I
B.

beg you

learn

KctTeyvw/cas fiov

aSi/ccos.

You have condemned me

KareyvcoKas fiov You have condemned

unjustly.
Sloti 'xpverov e\a/3es.

me

because you took

rjv

bribe.

You
0.

will be fortunate
iroirjfiara

Tavra 77-01770-175. if you do this.

aveXaBov ra

eiroirjo-e

So^okXij?.

I took up
In group
supplies

the

poems

which Sophocles composed.

A
(1.)

it

will be seen that the Subordinate Sentence

(2.)

the Subject,

the Object of the

Object.

Compound
is to

Sentence.

Now

the chief function of a Substantive

express the Subject or the

Such Subordinate
called Sub-

Sentences as those in group

stantival Sentences.
Digitized

A are therefore

by Microsoft

CLASSIFICA TION OF SENTENCES.

In group B the Subordinate Sentence is a supplementary Predicate to the Principal Sentence (see above, Now an Adverb is the type of a Supplementary 2). Subordinate Sentences of this group are Predicate.
therefore
called Adverbial.

They

are

Conditional (the

Protasis or Condition), Concessive, Final, Modal, Consecutive, Limitative, Temporal, Comparative.

In group

the Subordinate Sentence stands like an

Attributive or Epithet to the

Principal Sentence.
relative,

noun (iroirnxaTa) in the That noun is the antecedent to the and the relative sentence is used like an adjective
Subordinate Sentences of this groitp
called are

used

attributively.

therefore

generally

Adjectival

Sentences.

This, however, as

we

shall soon see, is too

of the term, and too inadequate a

tences.

name

for

narrow a use Eelative Sen-

It

would be better simply

to call

them Eelative

Sentences.

distinction

For with regard to Eelative Sentences a fundamental must be noticed. Some are (1) Attributive,

others again are (2) virtually Adverbial.

(1)

Attributive (or really Adjectival)

dveKafiov

to. troirifiara

took

up

the

a eiroirjae 5o$OK\i5s. poems which Sophocles wrote

(or the

Sophoclean poems).
(2) Virtually

Adverbial:

ajvoet
?

Tt? ouTtos

evr]8r]<s bcrri<i

Who

is so

simple that he does not know

Here the Eelative Sentence San? dyvoet = tocTT6 ayvoelv

Digitized

by Microsoft

at

w
9-

SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.

We

thus arrive

the following Classification

:

and Table of Subordinate Sentences

A. Substantival.
The Subordinate
Sentence is the SubPrincipal Sentence,
/
1

a.
/3.

Indirect Statement,
Indirect Question.

ject or Object of the<(

I

7.

Indirect Petition,

whether

B. Adverbial.
Subordinate ( Sentence like an Adverb
is

The

1.

Introduced by a Subordinate Conjunction (such as el, e-n-eilrj,

coo-re, etc. etc.).

an adjunct
J

of the Predicate.

2.

Introduced by a Eelative.

C. Eelative.

The Subordinate Sentence is either an Attributive, or is equivalent to an Adverbial Sentence (see B Adverbial, 2).

10.

ORATIO RECTA.
Oratio Recta
is

By

meant the words of a person given

lips.
i"

at first-hand, as
Scocrto

from his own

e^eo.
;

will give

what

I have,

Xe-yet?

Koirre ti\v

What do you mean ? Qvpav. Knock at the door.

II.

ORATIO OBLIQUA.

By Oratio Olliqua is meant the words or thoughts of a person given at second-hand, by some one else.
eq>r)

owcrew a eypisaid
he,

He

would give what he had.

by Microsoft

Digitized

SUBDIRECT AND SUBOBLIQUE SENTENCES.

ripofj/qv

avrov ti Xeyoi.
he meant.
Ovpav.

I asked him what

elnre rat iraiol KoyrTeiy tt\v

He
12.

told the boy to knock at the door.

SUBDIRECT AND SUBOBLIQUE.

Subordinate Sentence
is

A
on
a,

Subdirect

when

it

depends

Principal Sentence in the Recta.

PEINCIPAL.
"

SUBDIKECT,

wcrco a/

if

e^co.

It is Suboblique

when it depends on a Principal Sentence

SUBDIKECT.
Sooo-eiv

which

itself is Subordinate.

PBINCIPAL.
e<fyr)

SUBOBLIQUE.

-6%ot.

In this last example Bwaeiv is subordinate to its Principal Sentence e<jyt], but it is the Principal Sentence to & e%o; See further under Oratio OUiqua.

13.

VIRTUALLY OBLIQUE.
Subordinate Sentence
it is

A
when

said to be virtually Oblique

alludes to the words or thoughts of another, the

actual verb of saying or thinking on which it depends having to be mentally supplied from the context.
iicdiaov tov Ilepiickea

on

ovk

e7refjayot.
(so

They were abusing Pericles because not lead them outi

they said) he did

verb like eXeyov

is

contained in iKaKi&v.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE
SUBJECT

AND PREDICATE.
a noun, or pronoun, or
the

ATTRIBUTIVE AND APPOSITION.

14. The Subject equivalent of a noun
(J3)

is (a)

(/3)

ol

ayaOot,

the

good;

to

Blkucov,

justice;

to

SeStevtu,

fear ; 6

<f>evya>v,

the defendant; to SeSios,

fear

ol vvv, the

present generation.
is

15. The Copula

link to join the Subject

a verb which merely serves as a and Predicate, without containing

in itself the predication.

The commonest Copulas

others,
Ka9io-Ta/j,ai.

are

elfii

and ylyvojuu.
vtrapj^w,

Many
iretpyxa,

however, serve as

Copulas,

Note.
oKcwft)

Tvyx^vb),
el[ii,

Other Copulas are ovop.d.^op.a.1, KaXov/tot, <f>aivop,ai and KvpG) (even without a participle), kAtJu and
t

may

(I am called, or, spoken, of), ireXio in poetry. expressing existence, may be more than a copula ; be a predicative verb, e.g. Stem 0eos, there is a God.

it

l6.

OMISSION OF THE COPULA.

is often

The Copula
clearly

omitted in Greek, in
it

fact,

whereis

ever the distinction between

Subject and Predicate

marked without
tribe

to fiavnKov yeVo? (pikapyvpov.

SOPH. Antig.

The

of

seers is covetous.

eydpwv aScopa 8a>pa kovk ovr\aiyM. SOPH. Antig. Giftless the gifts of foes, and profitless.
12

Digitized

by Microsoft

SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE OF AN INFINITIVE.

13

And sometimes the Copula, in a freer way, is omitted in dependent clauses where we might have expected it to be
expressed
eras

eV kv ocrcjkaA.e?, <j>v\daor6e. DEM. 19. 26. While you are still in safety, be on your guard.
ecos

sub. tore.
i.

Cf.

Eur. Hipp. 659.

Thuo.

91. 1.

17.

SUBJECT AND PREDICATE OF

AN INFINITIVE.
The Subject and the Predicate
the Accusative.
of an Infinitive are

But the Subject and Predicate

the Nominative
Principal Verb.

of

an

Infinitive are in

when they

refer to the Subject of the

The same two

of a Participle.

rules apply to the Subject

and Predicate

For further

rules,

and

for examples, see

Compound

Sentence, Indirect Statement.

l8. The Subject and Predicate of the

Participle)

Infinitive

(or

may

be in the Genitive or Dative,

cases.
<TO<$>WTa,Tti>v

if

the principal

verb governs either of those

rjcrdofi-qv

avrZv

olojxivmv

uvai.

PLAT. Ap.

vi.

I noticed that they fancied they were the wisest of mankind. The subject to etvai is omitted, croffxaTarav is the Predicate,
jravri Xjooo-ij/cei

ap^ovri

<f>povifi<p

uvai.

XEN. Hip.

7. 1.

It behoves every ruler to be prudent.

The Subject and

Predicate, however, in such a construction

may

stand in the Accusative.

XEN. Oik. U. 23. j-vptftepu avrois (piXovs uvai. It is expedient for them to be friendly.
Cf.

Xen.

Hell. iv. 8.4.

Digitized

jt ir by Microsoft


14

SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE.

Omission of the Subject.

19.

The Subject is omitted in the third person in a great number of indefinite phrases and impersonal verbs. (a) In terms of the weather, or natural phenomena. The
0eos). vei, it a vague indefinite agent {e.g. Zeus, it snows; jipovrq., it thunders; afrrpairrei, it lightens; x e '/*"^e{ H *s stormy; <rvo-KOT<iei, it grows dark;, ea-eure, there was an earthquake. Sometimes the agent is expressed vei p.h 6 Zevs. Alcaeus, Fragm.

Subject

is

rains;

vtfai,

when the action alone is well known. o-aXirifa, the trumpet sounds (i.e. 6 o-a\iriyKnfjs o-a\Triei, the trumpeter sounds the trumpet); (nq^aivei (sc. 6 rfpyg, or 6 ,o-a\wiyKTrjs:), the signal is given; Krjpvo-o-ei, (6 xrjpvg), proclamation is made; dvayvdo-erai (6 ypapiMTevs), the reading will follow,
(b)
is

The Subject

not expressed
is

worth noticing, and the Subject

Xiyerai, it (c) Passive Verbs avT<u, preparation has been made.

is

<Ls Xeyovo-iv, as men say, as they say; <f>ao-i, said; oiovrai, people think. Cf. Latin, ferunt, tradunt. Ti's, rtVes, avOpum-oi, in phrases like the last, may be expressed (like the French on) e.g. fjv tis dSixy, if one commits
it is

Active Verbs

said ; eiprjrai, do. ; 7rape<TKe6Cf. Latin, itur, ventum est.

injustice.

(d)

Ordinary impersonal verbs and expressions'

< ?x>

/tcAet, etc.

Note. The Latin rule that only transitive verbs which are followed by an accusative in the active can be personal in the passive does not hold in Greek. Thus we may say
KaTqyopiti 'EiOKparovs,

I accuse
we

Socrates;

and
(Socrati
credi-

Sftwcparijs KarqyopeiTai, Socrates is accused.

Tna-Tevop-ev

SaHcparei,

believe

Socrates

mus); and
EtoK/Dcmjs 7rt,<TreveTai, Socrates is believed (Socrati creditur).

20.

THE PREDICATE.

The Predicate is usually contained either (1) in a Verb, In the former case the or (2) an Adjective or Participle.
Digitized

by Microsoft

PECULIARITIES IN THE AGREEMENT.

15

Predicate agrees with the Subject in number and person;

in the latter case in number, gender,
(1) eviKTjdrjcrav ol
'

and

case.

Adrivaloi.
defeated.

The Athenians were

(2)
f)

a\7]deia eariv opBrj.

is

Truth

straightforward.

In the former case the Copula is contained in the inflection of the verb, In the latter the Copula is expressed
or understood.

21. Peculiarities in the Agreement of Subject and Predicate.

A neuter plural Subject takes a verb

to,

singular.

to, dvSpa/iroBa wrretyvye, the slaves: escaped.

koXm

Tr\v yfrv^riv ev<f>paivei,

good deeds gladden the

soul.

plural verb with neuter plural Subject occurs 22. In such rarely (chiefly in Thucydides, Xenophon, and Plato). cases (often when persons are implied) the distributive character Thus in Thuc. i. 58, there are of the noun is brought out. two readings, ret rkXir) otot-xeto and mrko-ypvTO. If inrco-xero,

following ordinary usage if wr&rxovro, he is thinking of the persons (the magistrates promised). evravda ^trav to. Suevi/etrios fituriXua. XeN. An. 1. 2. 23. There were the (several) palaces of Syennesis. Obs. The phrase 8of av ravra, When it had been thus resolved, which occurs as well as Sogavra ravra,, follows in the participle

Thucydides

is

the construction of Sokci Tamo.

may
up

23. An Adjective-Predicate in the neuter singular be used with a plural Subject. The Predicate sums
collectively the character of thet Subject.

KaXov Truth

rj

akrjdeia xai fiovi/iov*

PMT.

is

noble

and

abiding.

epcores ica/cov fieya.

Eukip.
by Microsoft ii i.

Loves are a great curse.

Digitized

t6

SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.

Cf.

Note.
U.

(fiavriKov ti

Eur. El. 1035 ; Ar. Ecc. 236; Plat. Phaed. 242 The stock quotation is from Hom. II. 17 4>vxq).

204, ouk ayaflov woXvKoipavorj, cts Kolpavos lo-no, No good thing the rule of the many, one ruler be there. Compare with this the use of the phrases, jravra thai, to be all in all (i.e. of prime importance) ; to. ir/xDra dvai, to be the

head and front of; wavr'

thing, all in all.

rjv

'A\eav8pos, Alexander was every-

Dem.

23. 120.

24. In the

poets,

and in Plato, a singular verb

is

occasionally found with a plural Subject. From the occurrence of this construction in Pindar it is called the Schema

Pmdaricum.
io-ri

yap epoiye
altars.

f3(ap.o[.

PLAT. Euthyd. 302.

in this construction.

I have
Cf.

The verb generally comes

first

Pind. Frag. 344; Pyth. x. 7; Eurip. Ion, 1146; Helen. 1358; Absch. Pers. 49. Compare in French, "il est cent usages;" and Bacon, Advancement of Learning, n. ii. 7, " a portion of the time wherein there hath been the greatest varieties." Shakspere, Macbeth, v. iii. " Serv. There is ten, thousand Mac. Geese, villain? Serv. Soldiers, sir." In some cases, however, the apparent singular in English is a

real dialectic plural.

25.

Agreement of the Predicate when there are

several Subjects.

The Dual Subject is considered separately. (1) The first case is where the Subjects are
(a) with regard to

persons.

Here

number, the Predicate

may be

either correctly

plural, or singular in
(6)

agreement with one prominent subject with regard to gender, the masculine is preferred to the feminine ; (c) with regard to person, the first is preferred to the second, the second to the third.
kcu
ij

yvvfj Kai 6 dvfip

the wife

Both

and

the

ayadol elcnv. PLAT. Men. 73. husband are good.

utok dva/??jcreTcu I'lA.Hnros kcu 'Avnyevrj^ kcu 6 dvnypafavs.

Dem.
Perhaps
there will
controller.

22. 38.

appear Philip, and Antigenes, and the by Microsoft

Digitized

PECULIARITIES IN THE AGREEMENT.

eitov veovs Kal vects opiXovvTas aXXr/Xous.

ij

PLAT. Leg. 835.

I saw young men and women

eya> Kal ol

associating together.

aXXoi

Trpear/3eis irepiijXdop.ev.

DEM.
ii.

129. 72.

1 and
(rv te

the other envoys

went round,

"EXXtjv et Kal

-qfiets.

XEN. Anab.

1.

16.

You and we
You
are Greek,

are Greeks.
(so are) we.
it is

and

Observe the emphatic position of the verb when

singular.
(2)
things.

in the

The second
Here

case is

where the several Subjects are

number, we frequently find the Predicate in the singular, in agreement with one prominent Subject; frequently also in the plural ; (b) with regard to gender, the Predicate, when plural, is generally neuter, when singular it agrees with the prominent Subject.
(a) with regard to T(ov ko.ku>v
r]

crracrts icai 6 iroXe/ws cutios icrnv.

DEM.
ipy-

Sedition
Xrjdv)

and war are

the cause of our troubles.

Kal SvcrKoXta Kal fiavia iroXXaKis els ttjv Sidvoiav

ttuttoiio-iv.

Xen. Ap.
and
discontent,

iii.

12. 6.

Forgetfulness,

and madness
ei>j.

often attack the

mind.
to vyiaiveiv Kal to voveiv dyaOa. av

Xen. Ap.
Health and sickness might be
blessings.

iv. 2. 36.

The

singular Predicate is not

unknown

in English

Destruction and unhappiness is in their ways. Ps. xiv. 7. So great an affinity hath fiction and belief. Bacon, Advancement of Learning, i. 4. 8.
(3) The third case is where, in the Subjects, there is a combination of persons and things. Here the person will generally in gender over-ride the thing; in number, as before, both singular and plural are used.

kirvOiTO rbv ^Tpop,/3i)([Sr]V Kal rai vavs direXrjXvdora.

Thuc.

viii.

63. 1.

Me
fj

heard that Strombichides and his fleet had sailed away.

tvx>] Ka ' ^iXanro's ?yo"av

tZv

ipyiov Kvpioi.

Aeschin.
Fortune and
g^vrcumstances. Phi^w&rf ma^fers s

12. 181,

SUBJECT A ND PREDICA TE.

Great variety
is

allowable where there

principles only

is

a plurality of

Subjects.

The leading

have been indicated in

the Predicate generally

the above rules.

With disjunctives, ovre agrees with the nearest Subject.

$%

ovre,

26. The demonstrative pronouns when used as Subjects to a Predicate, or

6Se,

oStos,

tKetvos,

as Predicates to a

Subject, either (1) are assimilated to the gender and number of their subject or predicate, or (2) are in the neuter singular or plural.
(1)
l/cetj/os

karw

e\.ey)(os peyianos.

LYS.

16. 6.

This
oTpcu

is the
i/xr/v

strongest proof.

ravT-qv Trarpifta. eTvai.

is

XEN. Anab.
est.

IV. 8. 4.

I
Cf.

think that this

vi.

my

country.

Verg. Aen.

129, hoc opus, hie labor

(2) toCt' elo~lv ot \6yoi.

DEM.

8. 7. to this).
ii.

The statements are

these

(come

ov Xoycov kojUttos raSe. This is no boastful talk.

ThUC.

41.

1.

Cf. the use of raSe : ovk "Icoves Ta.Se e'uriv, THUC. vi. 77. 1. Cf. Exm. These are not Ionians, we have no lonians here.

Androm.

"168.

Also cf. ri, on, (interrogative) Do you know what democracy is

ela-iv ol dioi.

Euk.

S-qpoKpariav ourda rl so-tiv ; 8ov\evop,ev deots S -n ttot' Or. 418, we are slaves to gods, whatever these
:

gods

may

be.

So the phrase tovto

dXrjdrj \eyeis,

what you say

is true.

27. Peculiarities of

NumberSingular,

Dual,

and Plural.
(a) The singular is used for the plural (a) with collective nouns, (5)'with nouns of material, (c) with nouns denoting nationality, (d) in several military expressions, etc. (a) 6 i)(6p6s, the

enemy ;

b itkhas, one's neighbour.

(b) i<epap.os, tiles ; ttXLvOos, bricks ; ap.weX.os, vines ; lo-drjs,

clothes.

Digitized

by Microsoft

THE DUAL NUMBER.

(c)

19

o 'IWvptos, the Illyrians, 6 XaA/a&ifc, the Chalcidians (cf. the Latin Poenus, Bomamis). But sometimes, as in Latin, of the general, king, or prince.

(d) 6

twos,

the cavalry ; da-iris (=6jtAit<u), hoplites, heavy-

armed infantry.
((3)

A collective noun singular (irXrjdos,

a plural predicate.

yevos, a-rpdrevfia, etc.)

is

may

agree with

Often there

a mixture of

singular

and

plural.

(itpos ri dvOpiinratv

ov\ ijyowrai

deovs.

PLAT. Leg. 948.

tovs /JoCs
ko.1 ovovs.
ii.

A portion of mankind do not believe in gods.

to
<TTpa.Tevfi.a eiropi^ero o-irov, kotttovtzs

Xen. Anab.
The army provided
itself

1. 6.

with food by cutting up the oxen

and

asses.

28.
1.

The Dual Number.

is

a kind of plural, an unnecessary kind. It it has disappeared in Modern Greek. The agreement between a dual subject and its verb or adjective is irregular. may say that the strict dual agreement is adhered to only where the idea of duality (of there being a pair of things) is prominent. The first person dual does not exist in the active voice. It is very doubtful whether it occurs in the middle. II. xxiii. 485, Soph. Phil. 1079, Soph. El. 950, seem to be about the only three places, and in all of them the plural may be the correct reading.
is

The Dual

not used in Aeolic, and

We

vu> 6ea<rco[icr6a.

Ar. Av. 664

Let us two
(2.)
is

see.

Dual of the Article and of Pronouns. The feminine dual defective, especially in the nominative and accusative
.

forms.

(See Rriiger, p. 235.)

to

is

the regular prose form for

all

genders, to

is

rare in

poetry,

row

is

much commoner than

toXv.

T<&8e is

used, not rdSe, but raivSe is used. not ravra. Both tovtow and ravraiv, for the feminine. avria and avrd ars both used for the feminine, also airoiv
rovT<o

and

avraiv.
Digitized

by Microsoft

SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE.

dXXirjXa and dW^Xa, dXXrjXoiv and dXXrjXaiv ere found equally with feminine nouns. Similarly ipm, p.6va>, paralw, dgiw occur with feminine nouns.
(3)

The

strict

dual agreement

is

shown

in the following

examples
rd) aSeA.c/>u> aurd) &7rep iyeveo-Orjv

apcp airatSe TeXevrrjO-aT7jv.

ISAEUS,

6. 6.

The two
Similarly

brothers themselves

who were born

:

both died childless.

when
Kal

there are two Subjects

rrj.

Awij kv Pleaswe and pain

rjSovr)

ttoXu /3ao-iXevo-erov.

PLAT. Mep. 607.

shall reign

m the State.

good instance occurs in Soph. El. 977-985, where the

heightened by the dual form.
li/os

effect is

Svo e

dyuvos

yeyivi)o-0ov.

ANTIPH. HEROD.

85.

Two

trials

have been made out of one.

(4) The following miscellaneous instances show the irregularity of agreement both in gender, and in number

dfi(f>w

rovTto to) fjixkpa.

these days.
dp,<f>otv

Xen.

Gyr.

i.

2. 11.

Both

KonqyopTfcriV

toIv iroXeoiv.

Is. xii. 9. 7.

He
TO)

accused both the

states.

Xe V e s

os

eiroayrev.

XEN. Ap.

ii.

3. 18.

The hands which God made.

T(av

avTWV SIovtcu Kal fj yvvrj Kal o dvqp. PLAT. Men. 73. The wife and the husband need the same things.
agrees with a dual or plural noun, or verb generally with the dual ; dpsfrorepos, more with plural than dual.
dp,<f>otv,

N.B.Svo
dp<fuo

and

commonly

e/3oi5AeTO ol T&) 7rc(5e dpcfiorepw irapdlvai.

XEN. An.
V. 7&. 2.

i.

1. 1.

He

wished both his sons

to be present.

direOavov ol orpaTrjyol dp.(f>6Tepoi.

THUC.

Both
(5)

the generals

were slain.
is

dual verb

several subjects,

when the

found joined to a plural subject, or subjects are arranged or contrasted

by Microsoft

Digitized

THE PLURAL USED FOR THE SINGULAR.

21

singly or in pairs. This construction occurs several times in Homer. (See Jelf, 388. 1.)
8vvdp.ei$

dp^orepai ko~rov Soa kcu Pl. Rep. 478, b.

iirurTrjfLr).

Both are faculties, opinion and certain knowledge.

So Aesch. Bum. 256,

qp.i)(opia.

Xevo-a-erov, of

the chorus divided into

29.

The

Plural for the Singular

is

used

ol 'HpcucAees re <cat Q-qa-ees, Plat. (1) With proper names Theaet. 169, B. Cf. Latin, Scipiones et Laelii; English, Our

Burkes and Chathdms.

Cf.

Aesch. Ag. 1439 ; Xen. An. iii

2. 31.

(2) Very freely with abstract nowns, i.e. names of qualities, denoting (as in Latin) instances or kinds of the quality e.g. uavtcti, fits of madness ; tvvoiai, instances of benevolence ; oracras,
instances of revolution ; dvSpiai, deeds of valour. Some words are repeatedly used in this way
(3ioi,

ddvaroi,

modes or forms of
virvoi, sleep, etc.

life,

death ; dupai, prime of

life (flos aetatis)

to?s fierpiois fijAoi re kcu <j>66voi ovk lyyiyvovTat.

Plat. Leg. 679.

Self-controlled persons are not subject to rivalry
fits

and envy

(or

of rivalry,

etc.).

(3)
if/veis,

Terms of weather and time

cold;
xa.Xafai, hail;
o/iftpoi,

6d\irq, 0epp.6Tr)Tts, heat;

rain; avxpoi, drought;

midnight, vvktss,

Tra-xvai, frost ;

epwt/3ai, mildew ; hours or watches of the night.

,

/tecrai vvktcs,

mipoi nal npidal, wheat and barley. (4) Material Nouns But here a distinction is commonly made between singular and plural, e.g. Kpeas, apiece of meat, Kpka,meat; gvXov, a piece
of wood,
the
stick, cudgel,
salt,

gvka, timber;
aA.es,

rjXios, the sun, tjXioi,

sun; dXs,

salt-works;

rays of Xoyurpos, a reckoning,

Xoyt.a-p.ol (also Aqyt<r/*os), arithmetic.

(5)

The

heighten the
tpovoi, blood

plural is often used for the singular in poetry to aipara, effect by the vagueness of the expression

or bloodshed; nXovTot, riches; dpovoi, royalty, royal

22

SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.

SaJ/iara,

commands ;

a house ;

jnJAae,

a gate ;

ai'Aaf,

yXwro-ai, the tongue.

(6) The neuter plural of verbals in dSwara, and irorepa, and many adjectives.
tives.
-tcos,

tinxeip^rka,

See Verbal Adjec-

30.

The

First Person Plural is used of a

Singular Subject

when

(a)

in the poets, often

the author of a book refers to himself ; (6) especially when a person speaks of himself as acting

with or for others.

(a) tovto Teipacrofieda SiTjyjjcracr&u.

XEN.

Cyr. viiL

1.

48.

This we will endeavour

(J)

to describe.

ovk av yvvaiK(ov

rjo-o-ovt<s

KaXotfied' av.

We should not

be called inferior to b,

SOPH. Ant. 680. women.

In Plat. Sympos. 186,

one physician speaks in the plural

as representing the profession.

In tragedy a woman may speak of herself in the plural masculine, sometimes in the singular masculine.
irea-ov/ieO', ci xprj, 7rarpl Tijj.wpoviJ.evoi.

We

will fall, if fall

SOPH. El. 399. we must, avenging a father.

is

(Elektra

speaking).
of her-

In Eur. Eippol. 1103, the female Coryphaeus speaks

self in

masculine singular.

3*
finite

Peculiarities of Person.
in Latin, in

The second person singular is used, as way bike an impersonal expression.

an inde-

8es av, you might have seen; ijyijo-a) S.v, you would (or might) have thought; rjyrjo-aio av, you would think (credideris).

For

peculiarities of the third person, see

Omission of the

Subject.

32. Supplementary Predicates

irokvs, aCT/iei>os, ku>v,

(Si ee

Certain adjectives are constantly so used. Such are (a) Ikowios, &ko>v (invitus) ; (b) adjectives of

number, wp&rym,

^TQ^f^po^v^o,,

glares, Sevrepaios


5 UPPLEMENTA R V PREDICA TES.

23-

(on the second day), rpiTaioi (on the third day) ; (c) words referring to time or place, opdpios, in the morning; xpowos, late; al<f>vi8t.os, suddenly ; tTKoratos, o-Ktmatos, the dark ; jroaraios, in how many days ?

6 'Acr(07ros 7roTa/ios ippvr) p.eyas.

ThUC.

ii.

5. 2.

The

river

Asopus flowed with a strong stream.

d<f>iKvovvTai ai(f>vlSioi.

THUC.

viii.

14. 1.

They arrive suddenly.

Ka/cos iKUiv ovScis.

Plat. Tim.
wicked.

86.

No

one

is deliberately

OTrovS&s Xvovcriv oi irporepoi oriiWes.

THUC.
p.

i.

123.

3.

The breakers of

treaties are the first aggressors.

Observe the following distinctions (Kriiger,

7T/0UTOS ^K-qOvjuvQ Trpocrif3a\e.

229)

He was
TpwTYj

the first

who

attacked

Methynme.

^li.'qOvp.V'g

rrpo(re/3a\e.

Methynme was
His first
act

the first place he attacked.

TrpSrov Mrjdv/J,vg TrpocreftaXe.

was

to

attack

Methymne.
freely used in this

The Greek

adjective is

more

way than

the Latin, but see Eoby, Lat. Gr., 1069.

33-

Peculiarities in the Construction of the

Attributive or Epithet.

A
(1) old

Substantive is sometimes used as

Substantive

an

attributive to another

Commonly with
soldier ;

dvrjp, avOpunros, yvvq, e.g.

dvr)p oirXirrjs,

a heavy-armed

dvyp rupawos, a despot ; ypavs ywr), an

woman ;

avOpwiro's 7roAtTijs,

citizen;

dvrjp Sira/mariys,

Spartan citizen. jurymen.

So avSpes

'AB-qvaioi, avSpes SiKao-Tat, Athenians,

(2) Many miscellaneous Substantives are thus used as Adjectives, especially in the poets, but some in prose also SXeOpos MaKeSdv (ypafijuarev^), Dem. 9. 31. 18. 127, a scoundrel of a Macedonian, or a pestilent Macedonian, a pestilent scribe; 07tA,itijs o-Tparos, Kocr/tos, EUK. Her. 699, 800. ; yepav 6<p0a\fios, eirawos, L Eur. Or. 529 ; irapdkvoi x*' P, Eur. Phoen. 838 ; \6yos

Plat. Phaedr. 260,

b.

Digitized

by Microsoft


24

SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.

for

"EAAijv
"EAAijva.

'EAAtjvikos
vi.

is 5.

often found,
26.

e.g.

ol "EAAjjves

jreAraoW, Xen. An.

/cat
fj

Euk. Her. 130, o-toA^

-

rvpavvov crx^p' ^X <ov

SOPH. Ant. 1169.

Substantive (3) When there are several attributives to one the adjectives may be added one after another without conjunctions (Asyndeton). aAAa Sopara eTxov irax*a, paKpd, oaa dvrjp av <pepoi fioAis.

Xen. An.
They had other
spears, stout,
long, such as
'

v. 4. 24.

man

could with

difficulty carry.

Kai, however, often joins two adjectives, especially ttoAvs with another adjective, where in English we omit the conjunction, as one combined notion is formed iroWa kcu x^Aom, iroXXa Kal Seivd, many difficult things, many dangers; dyadol Kal Cf. vaXaiol vofioderac, good lawgivers of old, Plat. Pro. 326. KaAos icayatfds (icakoKayaOos), an aristocrat (in a political sense), a perfect character (in a moral sense).
:

(4)

An

adjective or participle

may

agree with the sense rather

than the form of the word.

& Trepwo-a npyqOels tckvov. Euk. Oh son, honoured exceedingly.

Tot

Tro. 735.

peipaKia irpos aAAijAous StaAeyd/tevoi.

together.

PL. Loch. 180.

The lads conversing

Cf.

DEM.

21. 117, Ke<aAj, JeAi?Au0(us.

IS. 6.

49, <weo)s,

os.

34.
1.

Peculiarities of Apposition.

Sx^a ko.6' 6Aov Kal pkpt), i.e. the of the whole and its parts). In this construction the whole comes first, and afterwards in The noun which contains the apposition with it are its parts. whole should strictly be in the genitive, but it is desirable at once to state it as the Subject or the Object of the sentence. [The really logical construction with the whole in the Genitive is seen here
Partitive Apposition (or
figure, or construction,

rZv

iroXeuiv at p.tv Tvpavvovvrai, at 8k SrjfiOKparovvrai, at Se apurroKpaTovvrai. PLAT. Sep. 338. Of states, some are despotic, others democratic, others aristocratic.]
Digitized

by Microsoft

PECULIARITIES OF APPOSITION.
Xvirai at p,ev

25

xPWTa ^ elo~iv,
to

at Se KaKai.

PLAT. Qorg. 499.

1.

With regard
oCtoi aAAos

pams, some are

Xeyei.

good, others lad.

ii.

aXXa

XEN. Anal.

15.

These
iraxriv

men

say some one thing, some another.

To

all

epyov ri IkocttiJ) irpoo-TCTaKTai. PLAT. Rep. 406. and each some task is appointed.

KaOq/JieO'

aKpav Ik

Trdycav

iyeprl Kivtov avBp dvrjp kirippodois

KaKouriv.

Soph. Ant. 411.

threats.

were seated on the hill-top . . . eagerly provoking each his fellow with landied
Xeyerai foxy With a singular whole avoiav. Plat. Phaedr. 93.
:

We

*l

l^ v vo ^ v *X elv> V

Substantive (with adjuncts) either in the Nominative 2. or Accusative may be in apposition to the verbal action. This is known as the Nominative or Accusative in Apposition to the Sentence.
kuvto.1
to the
7Tcroi/TS, Trixrrvs

ov crpuKpa iroXu.
lie

EUR. Rhes. 415.

proof of loyalty
El. 231.

(Some) have fallen and

realm.
evSaipovoiijs,

buried,

no

slight

purObv ffiUntov \6yav.

EUE.

Blest le thou, the reward of sweetest tidings.

The stock example

is

'EAivijv KTav<np,V, MeveAiq) Xxnrqv iriKpav.

EUR. Or. 1098. Let us slay Helen, sharp pain to Menelaus (i.e the death of Helen will be a cruel blow to Menelaus).

substantive is very often found in apposition to a pre3. ceding pronoun, or pronominal phrase, which draws attention Certain idioms of this kind are of the to what follows. commonest occurrence
(a) tovto, eKeivo, avrb tovto, avro

preceding a substantive.

eKeivo KepSaiveiv qyeirai, rfjv ijSoviyv.

PLAT. Rep. 606.

This

it

regards as

gam

(namely) pleasure.

tovto ye avTO, fj tvfSovXta. PLAT. Rep. 428. This particular quality, prudence.

In the same way must be explained the usage of aXXo n,

to.vt'

apa, tovto fiev, wa ti, and many other expressions of constant recurrence ft^MPby Microsoft

26

SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE.

Some constantly
recurring Platonic phrases with avro.

avrb SiKaiovvvrj, ideal justice, or justice in the abstract; avrb /iye#os, abstract greatness as opposed to to kv fifilv
/jteyeOoi, concrete greatness.

(b)

The numerals,

eV, 8vo,

rpla,

Svoiv ddrepov (one of two),

Svotv ra 'irepa, Svoiv Sei ddrepov (one of two things is necessary).

SvoJv Set Odrepov,

rj

irpbiTeveiv

rj

dvrjprjo-dai.

Is. 6. 89.

One of two things we must

(c)

do, either be first, or perish.

to

T?js Trapoifikias

to Xeyopxvov (quod dicunt, quod dicitur), as the saymg is (quod aiunt), according to the proverb ; Kecf>dXatov

(denique,

ad summam)
proof of

to

an

inttance, in

this ;

sum up o-y\p,iiov 8e, reK^piov and many others.

.

Se,

as

to Xeyofievov, k<xto7tiv tt/s loprrji r/'/co//.ei>. PLAT. Gorg. We are come too late for the feast, as the saying is.
'Adrjvaioi 7repl 86t]S p,aXXov <T7rov8aov
r)

4:77.

rrepl xpr]p,dTO>v.

toc/m//" "
avrjXuxrav.

^*"

XPW aTa

DEM.

y-P 20. 10.

irXeurra

virep

(ftiXorijuai

The Athenians used to care more for reputation than money. As a proof of this assertion, they spent vast sums of money for a noble ambition.
is found in apposition to a genitive implied in a possessive pronoun or adjective e.g. to. vpirepa avrutv for to. vp.(av avrSv, o ep,6s tov TaXanrwpov Bios the life of me, wretched one, tov raXanrdpov agreeing with an kp,ov implied in eptbs.

(4.)

Sometimes a genitive

which

is

S apurre
(7roA.ecos

dvSplov, 'Adrjvatos

uiv,

7r6Xe(as t}s p,eyio-Tris

etc.

in apposition to 'AOrjvwv implied in 'AO-qvalos).

Plat. Ap.

xviii.

My excellent friend,
city, etc.

you an Athenian, a

citizen

of the greatest

Aesch. combined
Cf.

Pers. 162,

where a genitive and a possessive are

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE

II.

THE AETICLE.
35-

Origin and Development of the Article.

'0, ij, to (as well as 6s, ij, o) was originally a demonstrative. Besides being a demonstrative it supplied the place of the third personal pronoun, the relative, and the definite article. The first point to bear in mind about 6, fj, to, is its

essentially demonstrative character. In Homer 6, ), to is a demonstrative, both substantive

adjectmie

and

(a)

Substantive
putting

twv vvv /mv

o-e

fivrp-aa-a,

of those things now

that

him in mind.
:

(J)

Adjective
will

<f>6lo-ei

to o-bv

/uei/os,

thy courage

mar

thee.

It also takes the place of the third personal pronoun.

ov Xv<T<a, but that one (her) I mil not free. 5 tov Se Kkve 4>ot^os AjroAA.eov, and Phoebus Apollo heard that one (him).
rfjv 8' iyi)

It also does the

work

of the relative.
tc/ce

avaKTi, tov

ijwcojuos

Aijtu,

to the king,

whom fab-

haired Leto bare.

The following examples show the transition in the demonstrative to the definite article.
6
8' e)8pa}(e

Homer from

And he,
avrap

)(a\Keos "Aprjs. brazen Ares, roared.

is

Here the noun

6 toio~i

in apposition to the demonstrative

ijyo/ioveuev.

6.

yepuv 68bv

But

he, the old

Si)

man

(or the old man), was leading the

way

dW ore

rr/v vtjo-ov d<f>iKeTO.

to that (the) island.

But when now he came

TO T6 O-06VOS OjOMDJ'OS. And the might

c^^ byMicmsom


28

THE ARTICLE.
the rest;

So ot aAAot, and the future.

to

t'

eovTa ra

t' eo-ouei>a,

tffte

present

definite article is to

examples show that the use of 6, fj, to as the be found as early as Homer. It must be borne in mind however that such a use of According to old Greek 6, fj, to in Homer is exceptional. (Homeric) use, nouns stand without the article as in Latin.

The

last

Seivf] Se icXayyfj

yiver apyvpeoio

yStoto.

And

terrible arose the

fj

twang of the

silver bow.

In Attic Greek prose

Kkayy-q, tov /3ioto

would be required.

To sum up

therefore

(a) os, fj, o, originally demonstrative, became the relative (with occasional traces in Attic of its older use).
fj, to, originally demonstrative, became the definite (though instances occur in Attic of its use as a demonstrative and as a relative).

(b)

o,

article

(c)

oBtos, oSe, Ikeivos

stratives in Attic.

The

took the place of 6, ij, to, as demonthird personal pronoun was in Attic

expressed by
(d)

the oblique cases of aw-os and (when necessary) in the

nominative by the demonstratives.

Obs. The origin and development of the definite article from the demonstrative may be illustrated by English, German, and French. Thus in English the relatives wlw, what, which were originally interrogatives only. The demonstrative still is constantly used by us as a relative, e.g. I know the person that

you speak
relative.

of.

In German der

is still

demonstrative, definite

article,

and

le

In French the personal pronoun U and the definite both come from the demonstrative ille.

article

36. Survivals of the older usages of 6,

os,
o,
fj,

i\,

to,

and

?),

6,

in Attic
:

Greek.

to as a demonstrative I. With /iev and Se, 6, fj, to is freely used in all its cases, o jxkv 6 Se, the one, the others ol /lev oi Se, some, others; with Digitized by Microsoft

THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK.

tis,

29

tq

fx.lv

this

ii.lv to (to!) Se, to 8e ti, partly way, that way ; to Se, whereas ; tov ko.1 tov, one and that one ; to koX to, this and that.

6 fitv tis

Ty

6 Se;' to (rol)

Se, this

eSei

yap to
ought

ko.1

We
Of.

to

to iroifj&ai Kal to //.fj irbi}o-<u. have done this and that, and not

DEM.
to

9.

68.

have done

the other.

Soph. Ani. 557, Observe the constant use of

o (oX) ixcv at the beginning of

a sentence, instead of repeating the noun.

'Ivapojs 'A.6r)valovs eir-qyayero.
ol Se rj\6ov.

THUC.

i.

104.

Inarus invited the Athenians.

II.
6,
17,

So they came.

to as a personal pronoun (a rare use).

kou tov KeA.ewai

Sowou

(AeyeTai).

XEN.

Gyr.

i.

3. 9.

And
Cf.
III.

it is

said that he ordered.

Soph. Ant. 1199.

As a

relative (a not

uncommon
Ares

use in the tragedians).

loves.

SnrXy

fiao-Ttyi ttjv "Apijs <f>iXei.

AESCH. Ag. 642.

ko.L

With
IV.
os,

the twofold scourge that

17,

used as a personal pronoun with

ouSeis dvTeXeye' koX os rjyeiTO.

XEN.
phrase
S' os.
ij"

No

one opposed, and so he acted as guide.

It is rare, except in the

eori tis,
<j>rjv

common
^

S' os.

kyu>

Travu ye,

PLAT. Ap.

iv.

Is there any one 2 said I.

Certainly, said he.

THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK.

37.
1.

Two

points must be remembered

is

The

Article

essentially demonstrative.

2.

The

old usage

was to omit the Article with

.definite

objects

(see

35).

This old usage survived in

many

instances,

and hence

to a great extent the fluctuating use

of the Article in Attic.

The
definite

Article,

corresponds
It

generally

to.

the

English

definite article the:

marks

off objects as

known and

individuals or (B) whether (A) K

Digitized

classes.

by Microsoft

THE ARTICLE.
(A) The Article denotes individual persons or things which are definite, because
(a)
(b)
(c)

Already known
Already mentioned
Distinguished from other objects, often by some

accompanying description
(a)

rav eVra

o-o^xoTarot;

r\v ~%6\xov.

PLAT.
wisest,

Of
(b)

the seven sages Solon was the

Sovkevofiev

6eoh o

ti ttot etcrlv ol Oeou

EURIP.

We
(c)

are slaves to gods, whate'er these gods

may

be.

o irpecr/3iiTepo<; aSe\<f)o<;.

The
7]

elder brother.

7TO\t? J]V TToXlOpKOV/JbeV.

city

The

which we are
ttj? %wvr)<; toi>

investing.

eXafiov

'OpovTqv.

XEN.

They

seised Orontes by the girdle.

This last example shows

in English

how the

Article

is

used where

we employ
twv
e%eipyaero.

a possessive pronoun.
Srjfuovpycov
ttjv

eicaaTO<}

re^vqv

KaXw?

PLAT.
(just mentioned) used to

Each one of the artisans

practise his art well.
Obs.

The English

in old English.

article the was so used for the possessive See Bacon's Advancement of Learning, ed.

Wright; Glossary

The.

(B) The Article denotes the whole of a class, with

substantives or adjectives, in singular or plural.
6 pr\Twp, the
(professional)

speaker ; ol

'wireis, the

knights
the

ot,

aofyoX av$pe$, wise

men ;

<f>povi/jLO<;,

prudent

man;

ol irovrjpoi,

bad men.

Digitized

by Microsoft

THE ARTICLE WITH PARTICIPLES.

6
ttcu<s

31

iravToov 8rjpio)v Sva-fiera'^eipiiffTOTaTov.

Plat.

A
38.
,

boy

{i.e.

boys) is of all creatwes the most difficult to

manage.

The

Article with Participles.

The article used in this way with a participle has the force of a general statement, e.g. 6 (HovXopevos, any one who wishes (quicunque vult); 6 tvx<ov, any chance comer or person.
avavd' 6 rov

^towtos

evpi&Kei nwos.
all.

The
It is

toil

of one who seeketh findeth

synonymous with the use

6
fir)

of iras 6 (with adjective or

participle).
ttols

<f>pov)V

aXuTKerai.

MEN.

714.

Every one who does not think

39.

is exposed,

The

Article with Numerals.

to
.ra

The article may be used with cardinal numerals either mark a definite whole, or the definite parts of a whole, e.g.
Svo pepr), two-thirds (cf. Thtjc. etKoo-t, about twenty in all.
t<3i> iracrcuv
i.

10 and

iii.

15); apfa tous

The

state

Tpirjptav rag SiaKOtrias iq tto\i<s Trap&rx^To. furnished two hundred of the whole number of ships.

Article, 40. Fluctuating use and omission of the

Either (a)

The

ancient usage has survived when the use of the article had not become established
is sufficiently definite

Or

(b)

The word

by

itself

from

familiar reference, so that it does not need

the article.

Or

(c)

The

article is omitted because the vague and general conception of a word, the mere idea of a thing, is entertained apart from its manifestation in a person or event, or its relation

to persons, things, and facts.

The equally fluctuating use of the article in English will go and illustrate the Greek usage. far to explain r Digitized by Microsoft

32

THE ARTICLE.
The
Article with Objects of external nature.
rj

41.

ovpavos,

o ovpavos, q yrj, 6 ^Xios, yij, wneavos.

OdXacrcra, 6 wKeavos.

But

also

So

art OaXdrry, on sea (sur

mer)

vSwp ig ovpavov, rain from

heaven;

irepl rjXlov 8wrp,ds, at sunset.

42. PoM. 43.

The
303).

Article with Material objects.

also ydXa, xpufos (KaBaipeiv

to ydXa, 6

Xjouo-os,

xpwov, PLAT.

The

Article with Familiar places, things,

and persons.
Here the
K
article is generally

omitted according to ancient

5ToAe(0S,

'1(t8/jlov

dirb

WpoS &<TTV, tO tOVM (but also 7!y)OS TO WTTO) ) E^Cl) (and kv T<j5 'Io-^pu), kv aKponroXei. 8etas, e dpicrTcpas, on the right, on the left ; dpxq,
pfjicos, /3d6oi, /mjkos,

TeXevr-r], e$po?,

pkyedos, {!^os.

Many military phrases km 86pv, to the right (spearwards)

left

(shieldwards)

km

a-Tparos,

(rrpdrevfia,

km or Trap' dxnriSa, to the ; So backwards, facing the enemy. o-rpaTOTreBov, Kepas evu>vvp.ov, Setov, left
iroSa,

wing, right wing. Pao-bXevs is the (Persian) king; /Jao-iAcvs o /ueyas, ol xpoyovoi, ol (Sao-iXetos. So wpwdvevs, the Presidents of the
Council.

44.

The

Article with Abstract

is

and other words.

SiKaioo-vvrj, justice

Here the use

17 ij

very fluctuating.
r)

dpirrj,

virtue ;

dvSpeia,

courage ;

17

<r(D(f>po<Tvvr),

temperance; y JmetKaa, equity.

Eemark

terms often occur -without the article. above especially applies. In the same section in Plat. Rep. i. 354. we have
abstract
(c)

But

ovScttot'
.

Never, therefore,

apa Xvo-neXio-repov dSiKia SiKaioo~vvr]s, is injustice more profitable than justice,

fj

and
XvcrireXeo'Tepov apa.

dSiKia tjjs StKaioo"i3vijs.

Digitized

by Microsoft

WITH PROPER NAMES.

33

The Article with Concrete Words. 45So with concrete words, the article being omitted either because of the mere idea of the thing or its familiarity crwp.a., avOpamos, ifa>XV> body, soul ; Oeos, God (no special divinity) man ; 7tcu8es ko.1 yui/cuKes, women arid children ; irarpls, father:

land ; ttoXis, state or country.

46.

The
of

Article with
and
yvfj.va.a-Ti.Krj,

names of

Arts, etc.

Names

arts, trades,

sciences

Hovo-iKr),

do not take the article education, mental and physical;

\oyio-p.oi,

pr/TopiKrj,

rhetoric;

api9/j.r)TiKrj,

arithmetic,

numeration.
Similarly, S6a, vovs, Tex vr)> v6p.os, opinion, mind, art, law.

47.

The

Article with Proper and places.

names

of persons

Names of persons and towns do not require the article unless previously mentioned, or spoken of as well known. Sawcjoarqs, but 6 2a>KpaT;s, either Socrates already menSo 6rjf3au, tioned, or the well-known Socrates, Socrates ille. J 'AAeav8os 6 Ma/ceSwv, AAeav8pos 6 QiXittttov, ou QfjBai. Alexander son of Philip. Also in short business-like notices, 2<!>/a>aTjs 'Eaxppovio-Kov, Socrates, son of Sophroniscus. The same rule applies to names of nations, but 01 'EAAijves always when opposed to 01 Bdpfiapoi. When nationalities are opposed (as we say " French and English ") the article is not used e.g. ' kd-qvaioi, Aa/ccSou/joi/iot (so repeatedly in Thucydides).
01 Ariiwo-Oeveis, orators like

Demosthenes (as

we

say, our

Burkes, our Ohathams).

s 48.

The

Article with Geographical names.

geographical names the use and position of the article The following collocations are fluctuating. extremely are and may safely be employed. generally given as the rule, the river Euphrates ; to 2orJnov aKpov, the o Euc6paTJ?s iroTap.6s, ofSunium; g GeoTrpams yy, the land of Thresprotis ;

With

promontory
AriAos
Mendfl.

vrja-os,

the island of JDelos ;

Digitized

rj

MivSr/ n-dAis, the city of

by Microsoft

34

THE ARTICLE
But the following are given
as a caution against

dogmatism

o TTOTa/ios 6 Ev^pciTJjs, "AA/us TTOTap,6<s.

ThUC.
(

to AlyaXiiav opos (the hill of Aegaleum) ; Ilapi/ijs to opos, 0/30S, TO 6'pOS 17 'IoTaJvi;, TO OpOS TJJS 'Io-TUJVlJS, IltvSoS opos (all in Thucydides). So 17 1i)6vq to ovo/ia, to ovopa 01 Sai/*oves (PLATO) ; ovo/ta
fl

AlTVIj TO

Zay/cXjj,

Thug.
BovAi) oi n-evraKocrioi, the Council of the Five Hundred.
86.

Cf

1;

Thuc.

viii.

The preposition seems to exercise an influence on the omission of the article. Thus enl o-ki\vi')v yeo-dv, Xen. An. 7rcpi dpio-rov eiri PXafir) tijs iroAeus, THUG. viii. 72. vi. 4. 19. ev dpxfj tov \6yov, Dem. 37. 28. &pav, Thuc. vii. 81.
iVbfe.

49.

THE NOUN-MAKING POWER OF THE

ARTICLE.

The Article, when prefixed to any word or set of words, makes a noun of the word 'or words thus brought within
its

grasp.
(a)

Adjectives
ol

aryaOol,

good men, to dyadov, the highest good,

summum
ol ttoXXol, the ot

bonum.

popular party, populares. 6\iyoi, the oligarchical party, optimates, pptimus quisque.

(b)

Participles;
ol fiovkofievoi, all

who will, quicunque vult

ol

irpwTci

ep^ofievoi,, first- comers.

Observe the indefinite force which the Article gives to

a Participle.
(c)

Preposition and case

ol 67T4 tSiv "Trpay/jLarasv, the

government.

to to
(d)

eis
e<f>

t6v

tto Xep,ov,

fi/uv,

preparations for war. what is in our power.

Genitive;
to.

t^s Tvyrii, the dispensations of fortune

Digitized

to.

tt}?

by Microsoft

NOUN-MAKING POWER OF ARTICLE.

35

n-oXetas (without TrpdyfiaTa), the affairs of the state,

politics.

to tov &e/j.io-TOKMovs, the words of Thenmstocles, Themistoclis illud.

(e)

Infinitives;

to

[iicreiv,

hatred

to

Tayy XaXelv, rapid talking

tovto irpagai.

(tov
So

Tayy

~Ka\eiv, etc.).
e/ie

with a sentence, to

(/) Adverbs;
ol ev0aSe, the living ; 01 eicec, the

dead

01 nrakai, the

ancients, ol tote, ol vvv, ol oIkol

rj

= ol ev olkw tote.
rj

irapavTiKa

TjSovrj,

momentary pleasure;
letter
le

ayav kXtvdepia,

excessive liberty.

Note
tu to

1.

kyu>, the

So with a word or even a word I (similarly in French

used

materialiter,

moi

est haissahle)

aXfa (Plat. Crat. 405), the letter Alpha. to S' vpeii orav u/teis, 5 avSpes'Adyvaioi.

efiroi

r>)v iroXir

Aeyw. You, Athenians, and whenever

OTe/osy8ij

I say

you,

DEM. I mean the

255.
state.

4.

He

DEM. 23. 220. to koI eav aX< <}>6vov. omitted the words, " and if he be convicted of murder."
'o-ti \prjo-ipov.

to yvmOi trnvrbv iravraxov

Menandeb,
The adage, know
Note
2.

Fr. 730.

thyself, is useful ever.

it is

Instead of repeating a noun

enough to repeat

the Article.
oi tu>v iroXvrSiv iralSes ko.1 ol

The children of

the citizens

tZv aXX(ov (sc. jraiSes). and those of the others.

Note 3. When two or more terms are joined so closely together as to form one notion, or when they may be brought under one head the article is put only once.
oi o-Tparrjyol Kai Xo)(ayoi.

The chief officers, namely generals and captains of

6 tfXios Kal oreX-qvo koX wrrpa. The heavenly bodies, sun, moon, and stars. Digitized by Microsoft

companies.,

36

THE ARTICLE.

50.

THE ARTICLE DISTINGUISHES THE SUBJECT FROM THE PREDICATE.

Article, the Predicate is without

The Subject takes the

the Article.

6 fiev 8t<xtos evSaifiwv, 6 S a8iico$

a&\t,o<;.

PLAT.

The just

man

is

happy, the unjust

man

is miserable.

This function of the Article belongs to it in consequence of its demonstrative character. All demonstratives

mark the

Subject.

ev Tlepcrai's vofio<! etrnv ovto<;.

Among
Kivr]<ris

the Persians this is

law

(this Subject,

law

Predicate).

yap

avrr] /teytcmj

Si)

rots "EWtjitiv iyevero.

Thuc.
For
this

i.

1.

proved

to be quite the greatest

movement in

the Greek

world.

The Subject and Predicate, in whatever case they are, can always be detected immediately by the presence of the Article or Demonstrative with the Subject.
o

pavns to u? Xoyov? tyevSels Xeyei. The words which the seer speaks are false.
tovs \oyovs, Subject
;

TfrevSels,

Predicate.

Tavrr] (Subject) a-n-dXoyiq, (Predicate) xprjrai. He makes use of this as an excuse.

tov<s Be

Xoyovs paiepoTe'povs

firjicvvov/iev.

Thuc iv.
we

17.

We
Obs.

will extend our speech to

a greater

length.

With

a Superlative Predicate in English

not.

use the

Article

where Greek does

oStoi

e'uri jrovijporaTOi dvOpunrmv. These are the most worthless of mankind.

Digitized

by Microsoft

POSITION OF THE ARTICLE.

51

37

The

Article with the Predicate.

definite, or

Sometimes the Predicate itself is and in this case takes the Article.
oStoi 01 SeivoL

denotes a

class,

elcri fiov KaTtr/yopoi,

PLAT.

Ajpol.

ii.

These are those (really) formidable accusers of mine.

52,

POSITION OF THE ARTICLE.

A.
B.

THE PREDICATIVE THE ATTRIBUTIVE

POSITION. POSITION.

A. The
ticiple

Predicative Position.

An

Adjective or Parits

placed outside the Article and

is

Noun, whether

before or after,

a Predicate.

ao(po<s o avrjp \

or
6 dvr)p

V the

man

is wise.

ao^os J
Position.

B. The Attributive
(5) after

Any word

or set of words

placed either (a) between the Article and the Noun, or

the Noun, with the Article repeated,

the wise do.

is

an Attri-

butive.
6
ao<i>o<i avTjp,

man.

6 avTjp 6 cro^os,

The

first form is the most natural, and the most common. In the second form the attributive is often used as a further

explanation.

to Tet^o? "irepieikov to

icaivov.

Thuc.

They dismantled,

the wall, the

new one I mean.

attri-

Any word

or set of

words thus placed becomes

butive to the Noun.

6 irdvv IIepiK\r}<;.
1

Xen. Mem.

iii. 5.

(cf.

Thuc.

viii.

and

89.)

The consummatetiBarklMicrosoft


38

THE ARTICLE.
r)

irapaVTiKa

tjSovtj.

Momentary pleasure.
r)

a/yav ekevBepia.

Excessive liberty.
al avev Xvyribv rjBovau

Painless pleasure.
to Teixps to irapa tov irorafiov.

The wall alongside the river

6 iravTcov

(the river wall).

KaXkiGTOS icai traai ^tXraros am\p. The handsomest and best-beloved man in the world.
1.

Note
Article
oi

This attributive or epithet-making power of the

is

shown by the following examples

1

opaXoyovpevbi ; SovXoi. Those who confessedly are

Dem.
slaves.

29. 39.

to. ttjs

twv ttoXXwv

ij/vxrjs o/i/iaTa.

Plat. Soph. 254.

The

eyes of the soul of the

many.

SoA.ioi' e/uo-ei

Solon used
kv

to

hate

tovs otbs oBtos dvdpunrovs. men such as this person.

DEM.

19. 254.

T$

irplv Kal yeveo-Qai rjpas

XP V <$-

PLAT. Phaed. 88

a.

In

the time before

we came

into being at all.

such collocations as the following are found, ASikm f) aKpaTos, the Substantive, without the Article, is generally first used in an indefinite way and therefore without the Article ; the Attributive follows with the Article as an explanation.

Note

2.

When

avOpvnroi ol tote,

(TKtTTTioV 7TU>S 5T0TS

fi.Kpa.Tov e\ei.

1J

OLKpaTOS SlKaiOO-VVT] TTpb$ dSlKldV T7IV

viii.

Pl. Hep.

535.
is related to

We
Note

must consider how pure justice which is pure (sheer, unmixed).

3.

an

injustice

A Predicate may occur inside an

<j>vcreis.

attributive phrase.
4.
1.

al apia-'Tai SoKov&ai tlvai

XEN. Ap.

3.

Those natures which appear

be the best

to be the best,

or which appear

to

nati$$tized by Microsom

39

FORMS USED WITH GENITIVE.

So especially with
6 Xeyopevos, 6voiioi.6p.evos, Ka.ko-6/i.evos.

to KoTvX.aiov 6vofia(6/ievov opos. AESCHIN. 3. 86. The hill of Cotylaevm as it is called. Mons Gotylaeus qui

dkitw.

And

regularly ol 'AOrjvaioi KaXov/itvoi,

53-

WHEN'A GENITIVE FOLLOWS, SEVERAL FORMS ARE USED.

1. L.
,
r>
,

tov Trarpos oucia.

,

2. I. 3.

r)

oiKia tov 7rar/305.

L, > Lhe commonest forms.

.

r\

oucia

r\

tov TraTpos.
f

Less common.

This form

is

used when the

4.

tov TraTpos

Genitive has been used

17

oiKva.

just before, or is
sised.

empha-

ThUC.

In accordance with the last position, tov \iapiov iv. 29 ; irepl tov purOov ttjs diroSocrews. THUG.

r)

am-opia.,

viii.

85.

Note. Where there are two or more Attributives, or other of the above arrangements is employed.
(a)

some one

According to the

first

position

p.efJ.vrjo-de T)}s ev 2aA.<x/*ivi 717305

tov

ILepo-rjV vaiyzaxias.

Aesch.
(6)

2. 74.

According to the third position, which renders the

Attributes

more

distinct
ij

f) o-[ivrj

avTT) Kal davfUUTTT)

Trjs

T/jaywStas

71-04770-19.

Plat. Gorg. 502.

One

Attributive, however,

is

often put after the Article and

Substantive.
to,

K T?js 'Iao-ov /xeyaAa yprjp.a,Ta. Sldpirao-OeVTU.

Thuc.
o Ka.Tei\r]<pi)s
at n-oAAa

viii. 36.

KivSvvos tqv ttoXiv.

DEM.

18. 220.

Ppovg/ti&fnfiffensglf&H. 0.0. 1513.

40

THE ARTICLE.

54.
(a)

THE PREDICATIVE POSITION IS USED BY

ovrot, bBe, eweti/o?.

ovTO? 6 avrjp
or

V
.J

tfAis

man.

a^/3 ouTO?,
^Se
17

7roX(? \

or
??

V
fjSe,

^7iis state.

7roXt?

Kara tok?
kwt
i'b)

vofiov; e/ceuvowi

or
eiceivovs

\ according

to these laws.

tovs vop-ow;, )

eKarepos, afMJxo, ap,<porepo<;.

ev eicarepa rrj iroXei, in each state.
afi<f>a>

tSj %et/3e, both

hands.

eir

afj,<f>oTepoi<;

toi? Xofiecrt, off both harbours.

is

Note.

Where

there

an Adjective also the usage

varies.

17 0-7-evrj

avrr) 086s,

Xen. Anab.

iv. 2. 6.

This narrow way.

But

kKtlvq

rj

v^rjXordTfj TrXdravos.
lofty plane.

PLAT. Phaed. 229.

That most
(c)

eKaaTos
ev eKaa-TTj

is variable.

Ty iro\ei

Kara
or ica&

ttjv rjp,e'pav

eKdarrjv

or ev e/caaTT) 7roXet.

q/jue'pav iicd(TTr]v.

In each
Note.
the poets

state.

Bay

by day.

The Demonstratives,
without the Article.

especially o8e, are often used in

w
And

ywaiKos rrja-Se. AESCH. Ag. 1438. Ty8i xv'. Soph. Antig. 43.

also in their deictic use.

KjOiTWV KpiTofiovkov TovSe warrjp. PLAT. Apol. xxii Crito, father of Critobulus, here (in court).
Digitized

by Microsoft

'

THE ATTRIBUTIVE
55(#)
ij

POSITION.

41

THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION IS USED BY

TOIOVTOS, TOlOfhe.
Toiavrr) eirurrrj/Mj, such knowledge,

ev tj; roiaSe avdyicr], in such

Note. 6 toiowos, such

difficulty.

a person; kv t<J> toiovtq, such a case. with ttchos: t>}s ttoms pepiSos; Dem. 246, 10, of what division ? 6kX<o croi -rijs ywaiKos epya Sirjyrjo-atrdai, ra irota ; Xen. Oec. x. 1, 1 want to describe to you the deeds of the woman. What deeds ? So o toiootos, 6 roidsSe 6 tijAikoutos, 6 tjjAikosSe 6

The

Article

is

also so used

ToeroiJTos, 6 roo-osSe

e.g.

6 toiovtos avqp, such a

man ;

Aa/Jt to

toiovSc,

Plat.

Phil. 29, take

ip,6<;, cro'?,

case of this kind.

(6)

Possessives,

rjpeTepos,
d

vpeTepa,

<r<perepo<;.

e/u,os

Bov\o<;

or

SouAo? /lmw (pov 6 SovAos

when

My slave, servus meus.

o
r)/j,6Tepo<;

[words have preceded).

iraTi\p or o iraTr\p rjpav (jjpwv 6 var^p).

Pater

noster.

Note, epos SoCAos, a slave of mine, one of

servis meis.

my

slaves,

unus ex

For the position, pov 6 SoCAos, see Arist. Ach. 12, Neph. " ov 1368, Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 2, Andok. de Myst. 50. 6's e'xet t^v aSeA^v, who js married to your sister.
(c)

Reflexives.

6 epavrov
ocra
Sij

7r<XT7jj&,

my own father.
ARIST. Ach.
1.

SeSrjypai ttjv epavrov KapSiav.

How
Cf.

oft

have

I fretted

this heart

of mine.

Andok.

de Redit. 10.

56.

Words which
and
oAos.

vary their meaning according to the position of the Article.

(a) 7ras

o "

XmtfoeS b$m$boft&iPo1 xxxii

:
-

42

THE ARTICLE.
1.

7ra<ra 7rdAis, every state

(but in plural, Trdvres avOpwiroi,

all men).
2. 3.

7iwa
17

fj

ttoXis, all the state.

irao-a tt6\is, the

whole

state, the state

as a whole.

6 n-as dptd/ios, the

sum

total.

There seems to be and 3.

i. 5.

110

appreciable difference

between 2

to.

iravra

fiept), all

the parts together.

all,

tovs TrdvTas Ssa-x'Aious, two thousand in

gv/juravTes enraKocrioi dirXiTai, seven
all told.

or all

told.

hundred heavy-armed

6.

iv iraxr-Q troXepio. SiKeAip, in Sicily altogether hostile.

7.

A.W17 jras eAijAaTcu KaKrj,

SOPH. Ai. 275

(cf.

E.

Ae
'

&

xi. 65),

altogether harassed (all vexed) vrith

Ul

grief.

7)

" \ ' the whole state. 7TOAIS OA*?) r

J

jrdlts

w oA

whole

state, the state

as

whole.
states.

o\r) 7roA.t?,

a whole

state.

oAai

n-dAets,

wAoZe

(b) /i0"os, a/cpos, eV^cti-os.

17

^ecdj dyopd, the central market.

ij

pAarr)

Forum medium
in-'

dyopd, the centre of the market. for both in Latin.

arf

aicpois tois KdJAots,

the extremities of the limbs.

8,Kpos 7roAtTijs, the perfect (tip-top) citizen.

fj

Donaldson.

hrxdrq
ij

vrjo-os,
vr\cro<s,

the furthest island, the

krxdrri
(c)

end (or verge) of the island.

avroi.

avrbs 6

avr/p, the

man

himself, ipse vir.

vir.

o aurds dv-qp, the

same man, idem

Note,

ora-as, <n5/ra-as, all,

state, virtue

as a whole, or the whole

used in poetry).

Observe the predicative use of was

17801/17

the whole ; o-ijj.irao-a jrdAts, dperrj, the of, etc. (was is sometimes so

ov irav dyadov

km.

PLAT.

Phtt. 27. 28.

Kno^fgejhjpMMwm-


OBLIQUE OR DEPENDENT PREDICATES.
5743

Oblique or Dependent Predicates.

Oblique or Dependent Predicate is simply a Predicate is not in the Nominative case, but in the Genitive,

An
which

Dative, or Accusative, most often in the Accusative. This is an exceedingly common construction in Greek, and one which has to be rendered in many different ways into English. The essential point to notice is that the Predicate, in whatever case, is the really important statement, or

emphatic word.

The simplest case is where the Accusative is used with Transitive Verbs of making, naming, appointing, deeming,
etc.
01 KoA.a/ces
'

A\avSpov Oebv

iivojxa^ov.

Flatterers used to call Alexander a god.

ol

The Persians
6 tov ijTtco

Hepcrai rbv Kvpov eikovro f$acriX.ea. chose Cyrus king (to be king).

Aoyov Kpeifro)

ttolSv.

PLAT.

Who makes

the worse reason (appear) the better.

(i.e.

58. Very often the Greek language expresses a Prolepsis an anticipation of the result) by this construction.
Tra/oatr/ceuao-avTes tvTX.i)

iraaav tijv

Zvvafx.iv.

Dem.

Phil.

1. 9.

Providing all your force so that it shall be complete. (wore evtekrj eivai. Cf. ThUC. iv. 17, [laKporkpovs.)
Cf. Latin paullatimgue mollia fierent), Juv. i. 83.

anima caluerunt mollia saxa (=ita

Cf.

ut

So avgdvu riva. fiiyav. So SiSda-Kh) tii/<x nnrea

AeSCH.

(sc. eTvai),

I teach

Ch. 262, fieyav. one to be a horseman.

59 With the verb exM by an idiomatic usage, similar to the French, the properties of persons or things are described by this construction.
T0 ^S 6(j)6a\/J,01K. has fine eyes, his eyes are fine. II a les yeux beaux (so il a le front large, etc. etc.)
KCtA.OVS f'x 6 '

He

In such examples, e'x< (like xpStpmi. with Dative) is merely The use of * *e0 an alternative for tbg/^ojg^^X^cXg^'/*''
fl


44
in Latin is parallel;

THE ARTICLE.
{e.g.

cum haberet collegam

S.

in praetura

Sophoclem, ClO.

Off. 1,

when

was

his colleague in

command).

to alafia dvrjTov owravTes e\op.ev. We all home mortal bodies.

ISOCR. Phil. 134.

6o. Sometimes we must, in translating, make the Oblique Predicate the real Predicate, turning the rest of the sentence into a relative sentence, or using some such device.
d^tweraTe Sittow jxov tovs Kam/jyopovs yeyovevai.

Consider that
heads,

my
kpu>

accusers

Plat. Apol. ii. who have appeared fall under two

ov yap ipbv

tov \6yov,

dW

els

d^Lo^peuiv vp,lv tov

to

XiyovTo, dvoi<ra>.

The words which I

shall use are not

PLAT. Apol. V. mine: the speaker

whom I shall

refer you is trustworthy.

tKavbv irape)(op.ai tov pdpTvpa. PLAT. Apol. xviii. Competent is the witness whom I produce,

ov yap /Javaucov ttjv tkyytpi eK-rqcrdp/qv. SOPH. Ai. 1121. Ay, for 'tis no mechanic art that I acquired. (Cf. Electra.)

Tovpyov ov paKpdv Aiyeis,

The

task thou settest is not

SOPH. Phil. 26. far to seek

OI. Very often, especially in the poets, 58e is the subject to an Oblique Predicate. The Predicate is often an interrogative. may often translate this demonstrative in English

We

by "here," "herein."
dnropo) ye

T$8e vpireir\eype9a kvb>. EUR. Bacch. 800. Truly an unmanageable stranger this we have come across. (d-Tropif Predicate, T$8e Subject.)

iroiaio-i

roXpais TcusSe kou

<f>pevtav Opaxrei,

SOPH. Ai. 42.

With what hardihood

boldness of soul ? (iroiaio-L the Predicate, TatsSe the Subject.) Cf. Ant. 1295,

herein,

and

ToSe Sewepov.

So, like the last

ttoctov

ayei to o-rpdrevpa

How many
He
makes

battalions does he bring into the field?

Tavrij dirokoyia xprjrai.

this

DEM.

49. 63.

a^gjggj.^

Microsofm


WITH GENITIVE AND DATIVE.
Many
Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 84, 93; Ant. 1178.
45

excellent instances of the Oblique Predicate occur in. 10. 11, 1. a. 2, Herod. 1, 9, 11, 16, 18,

62. Oblique Predicates are found in Latin, but they can be detected only by the emphatic or artificial position of a word.

Omnem

crede diem tibi dihrasse supremum. Hor. Ep.

last.

1.

iv.

13.

Live every day as though thy

Compare the example below,

line in Propertius

65, afoearav rty Sokov,

with a

Fidaque suggesta castra coronat humo. Prop. He enrings a trusty camp by throwing up the soil.
63. Oblique Predicates in the Genitive
fjyovfievoi. avTOv6fj.a>v

v. 4. 8.

and Dative.
i.

At

the

head of

allies

who

THUC. to Trpwrov vfi[idx<v. at first were independent.

97.

rovTiov rurl <j>v\aiv ixprJTO. Some of these he was using as guards.

Cf.

Soph. Antig. 556.

64.

Free use of the Oblique Predicate.

it

Sometimes
[ieydXy

expresses a mere emphasis.

rfj <fxavy e/36a.

He

cried with

a loud

voice.
1.

PLAT. Rep. Having deluged us with a long sermon.

KaTavrfofjo-as ttoXvv rbv Xoyov.

344.

65. Sometimes we

shall

have to translate more

freely.

oV

opOrjs Kal d'lKcuas rrjs <^>X^S

Jravra

fioi irkirpaKrai.

Dm

18. 298.

With uprightness and integrity of heart I have done all {in the uprightness and integrity of my heart). THUC. ii. 76. aAiecrav rrjv Sokov x a ^ aP a ' s Ta ' s ^" eo"'They were lowering the beam by loosening the chains (with the
chains loosene^. gjtjzed by Mjcrosofm

46

THE ARTICLE.
Idiomatic Phrases with the Article.
many.
more,
ol

66.
iroXXoi,
7rX.eoves,

woXXoi, the many, the people.

Populares.
pars.

ol irkeoves, the majority. ol oXlyoi, the oligarchical

Maior

oXlyoi, few.

party or faction. Optimates, optimus quisque (also ot dyadoi, etc.)

Ceteri.

cUAot, others.

ol aXXoi, the others, the rest.

to
(6

(t<x) vvv,

to rqpepov, the present ; to avriKp,, the present.

avTiKa

cj>6(3os),

momentary

terror ;

f)

avpiov, the morrow.

to /xeXXov, to hrena, the future ; 6 eireira /Stos (PLAT. ), the

life to

come.
to.

to Xourbv,
to
Trpiv,

Xonrd,for the future, for the

rest.

to irpovBev, the past or former time (chiefly poetical phrases) ; to dp^aiov, to 7raXa,i6v, of old; Tct irapeXdovTa, to. irapeXrjXvdora, the past (in prose). to irdpos,

to tote, ev

tots, at that time ; kv

first ;

t<>

irpo tov, previously.

to irpZrov, at TO T/OlTOv).

to reXtvTatov, at last (so to Sevrepov,

to 7roXXd, for

the most part (so to irXkov, to, irXdui) to pkyuTTov, for the greatest part, or the chief point; to. p.dXio-Ta, in the highest degree ; <>s ri to ttoXv, for the to ttcLv, on the whole. most part ; to ttS,v,

to. tj}s

Tu^iys, Fortune

and her

dealings (a periphrasis for

to, tjjs TrdXetos, politics.

6 (ot) trdvv, the excellent, ot

Pericles.

famous;

ol

irdw tSv o-TpaTia-

rav, the pick of the troops; 6 irdw ILepiicXfjs, the admirable

iv tois TTpHsroi, first of all.

Omnium

primi.

in tou

Jn-t

OaTepa,

from
left.

the opposite direction; Ik

tov

jt'

dpio-Tepd,

from

the

ol wept, ol d/j.^, ol diro,

etc.

See Prepositions,

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE

III

PEONOUNS.
67.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Iy<4, ^iwts.
<ri>, |i,eis.

1st pers,, I, we.

2d

pers.,

Thou, you.

3d

pers., i?e, sAe,

..

,,

%t,

they.

<

( 1. eKetvos, oBtos, wAera emphatic. 01 8^, at 6 S, ot uiv, J 2. 6 uufv

beginning of sentence. 3. Oblique oases of afrnSs.

The personal pronouns

implied, or

in
is

the

generally used unless there

nominative are not a contrast expressed or

more

or less of an emphasis.
vfia<;

ewet 6avovTa<i avro^eip

eya
SOPH.

ekovaa.
Seeing
that

when ye

died, with

my own

hands I

bathed you.
iyay
<r<p'

aTreipiyw,

SOPH.

I, even I,
<Tv

withhold him.

Se fioi avrow; xa\ei.

ANDOK.

Clerk,

summon

the witnesses.
it,

Note

1.

o-e

him, her,

them (sing, and

do.
do.,

pi. accus.) is

used

in tragedy.
vCv (Doric},

ph
Note

(Ionic),
2. is

Do., Do.,
is

but only as accus.

fiov.

sing.

Zfiov

more emphatic than

it is

When
are,

the
Ifie

pronoun
Kai
ere.

emphatic

accented,

e.g.

(fie

kcu

not
47

Digitized

by Microsoft


48

PRONOUNS.

68.

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
1st pers.

my, mine,
his, her,

ours.

ipJs, {jptapos.

2d 3d pers.
pers.

thy, thine, yours.

its.

a-6% {i^Tepos.

Wanting
is

in Attic.
:

The

possessive of the 3d pers. 6? (eo?)

(suus).

Epic

o-^erepcx;

is reflexive

The genitive

of auTo? supplies the

possessive to the 3d person.

Besides the possessive pronouns there are the following

synonymous usages
(2) (3)

(1)

the genitives
efiavrov,

fiov, aov, clvtov

the

reflexive

genitives

aeavrov,

eavrov:

the Article.
" I sent

Thus, for
1.

my

slave,"

we may

write
efiov.

eirefitya
eire/A-tya

tov

e/iov SovXov, or
fiov.

tov SovXov tov

2.

rov SovXov

3.

eirefi-^ra

tov efiavrov SovXov, or rov SovXov rov

efiavrov.
4.

errefiyjra

rov SovXov.
e.g.

And
avrov.

so with the other persons,

eirefi^re

tov SovXov

my

After a preceding word the order may be tjkzi fiov 6 8ov\os, slave is come; e.g. cwroSeacr0e fiov ttjv diroXoyiav, Antiph.

Tetr. b. B. 2, listen to

my

defence.
is

Note

1.

The

personal pronoun

sometimes used for the

reflexive.
cyo) ii/ias KeA.ei5a> e/ie fiifieurdai.
i"

XeN.

Cyr. viii.

6.

13.

beg you to imitate me.

And

as the subject of

an

Infinitive,

with a reflexive object.

A.

Se? ij/tas cra<rai 17/tas avTOVS.

PLAT. Gorg. 514,

Sokw (S5oa).

We
And

must examine

ourselves.
:

often in the phrase

/*ot

or

Ifiol

Digitized

by Microsoft

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
Note
2.

49

which

The possessives are sometimes used for a genitive, usually subjective, but occasionally objective. Thus But r) e/iij ewoia (=17 evvoid fiov), the good-will which I feel. also eivoty. tq o~, from good-mil towards thee : 17 8ia/3o\ri 17 I/jwj, Plat. the prejudice against me. An adjective in the genitive may qualify a possessive agreeing with the personal genitive implied in the possessive To/not Sva-r^vov KdKci, the woes of me, wretched man, mea miseri mala. Cf. Latin, mea ipsius culpa; nostros vidisti flentis ocellos. Ov. Her. v. 43; (cf. Hor. Sat. i. iv. 23).
is

69.
.

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
1st pers. of myself,
>
)

CIUIVTOO, TJU.WV ODTIOV.

ourselves.

2d

pers. *

0/ thyself,

>
)

(TtOVTOV, (TOUTOV,
<

VUUV

O.VTMV.

yourselves.

0/ 3d pers. J Aim-, Aer-, r

_
.

'

afrroB > cavrov. CtVToO tCCtVTOV,

(
'

"t,a"

4 ,

<
(

and
iaxT&v.

Reciprocal pronoun

dW^Xov, of one another.

(ppovTjaiv aaicei.

fiaXiara

ttjv

aavrov

ISAEUS.

Above
icaff

all things cultivate self-knowledge.

icai

iavrovi fiovXevad/j^voi to birKa irapehocrav

avrovs.

<T(pa<;

THUC.

After deliberating apart by themselves, they surrendered their arms

and

themselves {their persons).

Note 1. The separation of the word in the singular makes the expression stronger, especially if awos comes first, e.g. airov fie.
ko.1 toiis

iraiSas tovs epovs yo-\vve Kal *F^ avrbv vflpurev.

Lys.

i.

4.

He
otto's

disgraced

my

sons

and outraged me

myself.

often strengthens the reflexives.

ttjv a-uTos

Kara\ekvKe

airov Svv'aaTeCav.

AESCHIN.

3.

233.

He

destroyed

Ms own power.

Ipse suas

^^%^ted by Microsoft


5o

PRONOUNS.
Note
2.

A
1. 2.

reflexive

pronoun

in a subordinate clause

may

refer

To the subject of its own clause. To the subject of the principal

so used it
is

clause.

When

called an Indirect Reflexive.

1.

Kvpos

Tra<ri iraprjyyeWev KadivTcurQai els rf)v eavrov rd^iv excurTOv. XEN. Cyrus was issuing orders to all that each man should stand quietly in his own rank

2.

o rvpavvos vofj,iei rovs 7roAiras iirtjpeTeiv eaVTaj.

The despot thinks

servants.

that

the

citizens

are

his

Plat. own

may also be used (1) the oblique cases of gujtos; (2) the datives ot, o-fao-i (oB and 2 are very they are found chiefly in poetry, and in rarely thus used poetical passages of Plato).
Note
3.

As

indirect reflexives

(1)

ov%

e^eiv vp.as o,ti x/DJjcre<T#e

aiJT<j> vop.i^ei.

DEM.

He He

thinks you won't

know what

to

do with him.

ANDOK. de Myst. 38. (2) et^ 7] elvai avSpaTroSov ot eirl Aavpiif. stated that he had a slave at Laurium.
ot 'Adrjvaioi ovSev cr<pi<Tiv
't(f>a.(rav

Trpoo-qKetv.

THUC.
theirs.

The Athenians maintained

that

it

was no concern of

Thucydides and Xenophon are partial to this use of

Note
4.

ot

and

eavrov, eavrSv are sometimes used of the first

and of the

second person.
rot

avT(ov

a/j.0.

eKiropL^(op.eda.

THUC.

Let us at the same time furnish all our own resources.

ouSe

yap

Why
Note
5.

rijv eauTOu o~& ye xpvyriv o/Djis. XEN. you anyhow do not even see your own soul.

Antiph. Herod.
The
reflexive
is

11.

sometimes

used for the reciprocal

dAA.77A.wv.

fiovXetrde Trepuovres

Do

you wish
1

to

be

avr&v irvvddveo-Oai ; DEM. running about and inquiring one of

by Microsoft

another

Digitized

1;

DEMONS TRA TIVE PRONO UNS.

Cf. S.

Luke
<r<j>mv

xxiii.

12, "for before they

were at enmity
se,

between themselves."
Note.
their

avT<ov is also used like suus

and not

meaning

own men,

their

own

side.

&pixrjVTO ot Iv 2</j^> 'Adrjvaioi

irXeiv hrl o~$as avrovs.

Thuc.
own countrymen.
So
rjiiwv (v/iuv) avrfiv partitively.

viii.

86.
their

The Athenians in Samos were bent on sailing against

to TpCrov juepos 17/icov avrwv. A third of our own numbers.

Thuc.

iii.

54. 3.

70.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
I
(

too-oBtos,

This
_,

gg |88e>
<

s'

So
So

great, so

many

tantus, tot.
TocrosSe,

old, so
,

young
,.

That

tKttvos,

( TijXficos. tiiXikoStos.

(so great)
fc

{
"

ti,Xik<S s S.

**{Sffl
toios
is

talis

Epic and poetical

For eVepos, see Indefinite pronouns.

6St,

ovToal are emphatically deictic forms,

this here;

ouTo? and oSe point to something near in space or time eKetvoi, to something more distant 6'Se points to something
;

present; ovtos, to something mentioned, though also has the deictic force of oSe.
r]

ovto<s

TpajmSia earl
is the

Trjs&e T77? 7ro\ea3S evprjtia.

city.

PLAT.

Tragedy
tovt

invention of this

eiceiv

ovyco '\eyov.

Ar.
speaking
of.

This is that which

I was

ovto? oiriaOev irpoa-ep^eTac.

PLAT.

Here

Microsoft


53

PRONOUNS.
tovt
e'oV melvo, tovt
eicelvo

= as

the saying

is,

illud

quod

dicitur.
.

oStos and oSe for first and second person. Note 1 used in poetry of the first person, dvrjp SSe is

6'Se is

often
in

common

Trag. for ky&.

oS' dp.' 'Opeo-TijS,

Z ami
et

Orestes,

EUR. Or. 374. MeveAews, ov IcrTopels. Menelaus, whom thou seehest.

rrj&e Kov<tets

rbv veKpbv vv
this

XV'-

SOPH. ^K<. 43.

(Consider) whether thou wilt uplift this corpse together with

my

hand.

Tts ovTocrl tis ovtoo-1;

Who's

this here i i.e.

Ar. Ach. 1048. who are you ?

rd.Se, TaSe iravra, ravra Tr&vTo. are used in prose and Note 2. verse of something near.

ovk "Iwves rdSe eicrlv ovSi 'EAAjjoTrovTiot. ThUC. The people here are no lonians or Sellespontines. Cf. Eur, Androm. 168.

vi.

77.

Note 3. oStos and 6'Se contrasted. oStos generally refers to what has preceded, 6Se to what follows. So with all demonstratives in -tos and -Se. But the rule is by no means
invariable.

to Se ovk eori towvtov dAAa toiovSe fidXXov. PLAT. However, it is not so as you think, but rather as follows.
, Too-avra } , , ) , ,, ' * ~ !% > he spoke as follows, > rwv, .,, ' roiaura J eAefe roiaoe, J speaking thus, are common phrases in Thucydides.

rotaSe eX.eev,

,,

after
^

ovtos (not 6'8e) and auTos (the latter especially in iVbfe 4. Plato) are the usual antecedents to the relative, like is in Latin. ovtos and 6Ktvos contrasted. Like hie and ille in Latin,

sometimes, but not always, oStos means this nearer (i.e. the latter), l/ceivos, that distant (i.e. the former), in space or time.

Note 5. oStos and Jkeivos in the neuter, like hoe, illud in Latin, often draw attention to and point the coming word or phrase. See Peculiarities of Apposition 3.

They
a.

also gather
tt'jrjjs

up and emphasise what has preceded.

tovtois.

av

e/x/teve

PLAT.

Whatever you

say, keep to that.

Digitized

by Microsoft

oStos, oSe, iKuvoi,

=
53

THE PRONOUN AirSs.

Note
6.

compared with -Latin,

oStos often denotes contempt like iste; eKetvos, praise (the famous or illustrious), like Me. oBtos
is the opponent (plaintiff or defendant) =iste, being the client, oS, the judges, the court, or

hie
the

oStos, as antecedent to the relative

ovT<xTt=:hicce, celui-ci, this
oS<=

is (qui).

is

much

like hie, this

man here. man here, marking

e.g. o.kti) fiev tfSe,

simply the
is the shore,

presence of something,
void la plage.

here

71.

THE PRONOUN Avro's.

which must be very carefully
pronoun, like

Avto<s has three usages

distinguished.
1.

It

is

a definitive adjective
self.

ipse,

meaning
2.
3.

With
In
its

the article, 6 avrds means the same, idem.

oblique cases

it is
it,

the pronoun of the third

person, him, her,

1.

them.
self,

Avtoi in
it

all its cases

may mean
It

myself, thyself,

himself,

herself, itself, themselves.

has this meaning

when

occurs

a.
b.

In the nominative case. In any case in agreement with a pronoun, or with a noun and article when placed outside the The pronoun or noun must often be article. supplied from the context, ai/ro? occupying an emphatic position. The pronoun to be supplied

may
avTol
B'

be the indefinite

Tt?.

orav a^aXaifiev ov yiyvaerKO/jbev.

EUE.

Whene'er we

t^ /M^W^M>mfirk if no&
it

54

PRONOUNS.
avros eyaye ererapayjiyv. PLAT.

myself was quite upset,

<re Set IIpofiTjdecas.

avrov yap

AESCH.
PLAT.

Thou

thyself needest

a Prometheus,

avrrj rr} tyvyfi deareov avra ra rrpayfiara. With the soul itself (i.e. apart from the body)

we must

behold things in themselves

(i.e.
/cat,

actual avrots

realities).
ff>i\os
tjv.

BpaaiSas ry eaaaXwv
Brasidas was friendly

yrj

to the

land of the Thessalians,

and
ovjg

to (the

Thessalians) themselves.
Of.

Xen. Anab.

vii. 8.

22.
iroielv

owv

re

eanv

a/j,e\rj

avrov ovra

aWovs

ernfiekels.

Xen.

It is not possible that one

who himself is

careless should

make

others careful.

"With a proper

name

the' article is not necessary.

avros Ilevdr)? aveicpayev.

Seuthes himself exclaimed.

XEN.

So avrot Bao-tXevs, the Great King himself.

2.

6 avro<s,

rj

avri),

to avro, and in Attic avros, aim),

etc.,

ravro and ravrov, genitive ravrov,

means
the

the same.

tous avrov; ireptrwv avratv Xoyovs Xeyovai.

ANTIPH.
things.

They make
3.

the

same statements about

same

Avrds in
her,
it,

its

oblique cases only, and never at the

is

beginning of a sentence,

the third personal pronoun,

Mm,

them.

aTTOTrefiirovo-tv

avrov rrp\v dtcovoai.

before hearing him.

ThuC.

They dismiss him

iroWovs avrav airefcreivav. They killed many of them.

ireipaaofiai ^vfi/ia^etv avrm.

Xen.
Xen.

1 will endeavour So we should

to

help him.

w^jpjAuj^, alrah.


THE PRONOUN AMs.
55

Note 1. Like the Latin is, avroi (1) recalls a noun which has been mentioned, and (2) it is used, instead of the more usual ofrros or eKetvos, as the antecedent to a relative sentence. This second usage is uncommon, except in Plato. In most instances the relative sentence precedes.
(1)

erpdirovro

iiri

tov SevcxjbaivTa.

;<ai

'iXeyov avrZ.
vi'.

Xen. Anal.
They turned
to

1.

21.

Xenophon, and said

to

him.

(2) aijTO ovk eipijTai o p,dXicrTa e'Sa pTjOyjvau.

Plat. Rep. 362.

The very point, which above

has not been
stated.

all ought to

have been stated,

vii.

dve\a/3ov avra otra virrjp)(V ormjSaa. ThUO. They took with them just whatever was necessary.
Cf.

74.

Eur.
2.

Tro. 662, /.

A. 1025.
self will

Note

Auto's

meaning

have to be rendered in

many
(a.)

different ways.

In

or by oneself, unaided.

to x<opiov avrb Kaprepbv virrjpxe. THUC. The spot in itself was strong (i.e. without artificial
fication).

forti-

avTos
(b)

iiroi-qa-a,

did

it

myself {without

help).

Voluntarily, sponte.
rjei

yap avra. SOPH. Words will come of themselves

auros.
ti's

{unbidden).

(c)

The great man

tls oStos
;

himself, the Master.

avros

Sw/cpaY^s.
the

Who's
auTos
{d)

this ? the
e^nj,

Master.
dixit.

Who's

Master i

Socrates.

Ipse

With

Ordinals.

ecrTpaTrjyei IlepiKAijs Terapros auros.

Pericles
{e)

was general with

is

three others.

The neuter avro

stantives of all

used by the philosophers with subgenders to express the abstract idea of a thing
or justice in the abstract; avrfi

hot

SiKauxrvvr], ideal justice,

aSiKia, avrb to KaAdv, avrb

In Aristotle a-uTo stantive aijToav0/>a>7ros, the ideal

good,

KaAdv constantly in Plato. forms one compound word with the sub-

man ;

avroayaO&v, the highest

summum

bonus^Yfifefr by Microsoft


56

;;

'

PRONOUNS.

72.

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
Who, what (Direct),
Whether of two (uter)
T fe,

(Indirect),

So-tis,

8.

irrfrepos

omSTtpos.
,
.

How How many

'

much, how great "

.

)
J-

ir<5oros

oir&ros.

(quantus).

Of what

sort (qualis) irotos

oiroios.

How

old,

how

great

irqXbcos

oirtjXCKos.

The pronouns in the second column are also relatives. The Direct pronouns are however constantly used instead
of the Indirect
{see

Indirect Question).
;

av

el Tt?

avhpav

offTts eo/i

eyco

Mereov.

AKIST.
Meton.

What man art thou ?

{ask you)

what man

am I?

See Ach. 106. 959.

Note

1.

ttoios; is often

used in a sarcastic repetition.

iroiov j3acriXe(as
;

ol Trpearfieis ol irapa ySacriAecus.

The envoys from

the

King ! King quotha I {King indeed !)

So

ir66ev,

Ar. Ran. 1455; Ach. 109; Nub. 366 (a good

article is generally

instance).

Observe that in asking a question the used with irolos when there is no noun.
oTfiai ere

bpoXoyqcrtiv to rotovSe.

to ttolov ;

think

Plat. Rep. 475, e. you will make the following admission. What
40.
Cf.

admission ?

So to rt; Arist. Batr.

Note
2.

Ar. Ach. 418.

Observe the idiomatic use of double interrogatives.

;

tis Trodev [Lokuiv croi paprvp-qo-ti

SOPH. Tr. 421.

c.

Who
So
ireus

is he,

whence comes
;

he,

who

will bear thee record ?

Tt tout" enres

Plat. Soph. 261,

Soph. Ant. 40'

Earely 09 is used like Sons in a question. eywS' os io-n, I know who he is, Ar. Ach. 118. The Greeks said oTSa (avrbv)
os eori or 018a Tts (ocrris) CCTTt.
Digitized

by Microsoft

RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ATTRACTION.

73.
.,

$7

RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ATTRACTION.

,
.

Who

8S

(qui)

whosoever

gems

(qmcunque).
/"(esp. poet.)

^7,,.. Of What
^

sort

olos, oirolos

(quails) \i /

/tv

Sore

of such a
,
-.,

< \

c i asSi often

\^ like 8<ttis.

How " great,

how many *
,

fSo-os,

6ird<ros
,

(quantus
ix

( -< 1

~,

>
(

So-irep,

one, exactly
J7
,

quotquot)
series
oir<5o-ros

\theonewho.
(quotus).
owoTepos,

What number in a
ffow

oW or
<jroa

1
J

...

which-

Aow

soever of two.

Obs.
arret,

8.TTa,

Attic (acro-a, Ionic) for ariva, neut. pi. of Sorts, Attic (acrcra, Ionic) for rivd, neut. pi. of rts.
ocnrep, oari?.

74- 0?
6's

is definite.

ecniv S/ktj?

o<\>6aX(io<;,

o?

There
oo-tk

is

an

eye of justice

ra iravff opa. MENANDEK. which sees all things.

is indefinite. ei?

dveXevOepos ?ras Sort?

Slavish the

So^av /6\e7ret. Cleanthes, the

to fame.

Stoic.

man

whoever looks

For other usages of

oo-rt? see Index.

aairep is particularly definite (irep adds this force to other pronouns and adverbs, e.g. (oa-irep, elirep, 7ret8?jtrep, etc.).

ravTOV eyovaiv

a/iapTr)fj,a oirep

Kai

ot iroiTjTai.

Plat.

They are

making

exactly the

same mistake which

the poettsfly/fega by Mlcrosom

58

PRONOUNS.
XvaiTeXel
It
is

fioi cocnrep e%eo e%eiv.

Plat.

good for

me

to be

just as

I am.
to relative pronouns,
do-no-ovv,

So
alters

frn-ep

Ar. Aeh. 364. 474.

Note.

oSi/ (&}, Sij7roT, SrjTroTovv),

added

them from relatives, and makes them indefinite,

any whosoever; ovS' otiovv, not even anything whatsoever, ne tantillum quidem; mroo-oo-ow, how great soever, quantuscunque; oiroioo-ovv, qualiscunque ; onwTocrovv, quotuscunque ; oi oirotoiSrjTrore <TTpari)yoi, generals of any sort whatsoever, no
matter who.

75.

A TTRA CTION.
would be in the Accusative
its

A Eelative which
cedent
is

is

often

attracted into the case of

Antecedent,

if

that Ante-

in the

Genitive or Dative.

This attraction
Eelative would

sometimes, but rarely, takes place

when the

have been in the Dative.

j(p5>ixai, /3i/37u'ot?

oh

e%w.

use the books which

have.

For a

exp).
icat

to?? ar/adols 01? e^pfiev /crmfieda

Ta? a\\a?.
ISAEUS.
possess

By means of the advantages which we

our other advantages
also.

we gain

The Antecedent
the Eelative.

is

often attracted into the clause of

Xpa/juai ots e^o) j8i/3\tot9 for ^pSifiai )8tjS\tot9

a e^m.

a/iadecTTaToi ecrre <ov eym oiBa EWtjvcov.

You
Note.
is

are the most ignorant of the Greeks

Thuc vi. 39. whom I know.

For EXKrjvtov ov?

olSa.

The attraction takes place even where the antecedent omitted. wpos $ eix e fweAeye a-Tparevpa. XEN. Sell. iv. 1. 41. He was collecting an army in addition to that which he already
had.

For

irpos

Digitized

Tovry o c^ 6 Cf. Eurip. Med. 753. by Microsoft

-

MISCELLANEO US INSTANCES OF A TTRACTION.

Adverbs of place are thus
8ieK0fi.i{pvT0

ft

attracted.

They now they had

oOev viregedevro TraiSas. ThUC. i. 89. conveyed across their children from the places where
sent

them for

shelter.
. .
.

For

evrevdev

oS.

76. Miscellaneous instances of Attraction.

ttjv overlay r\v

KaTeXnrev ov TrXeiovos

<xia etrriv.

Lys. 19. 49. The property which he left is not worth more. q ovo-ia, the subject, is attracted into the case of the
relative.

So ov

01 Oeol <f>i\ovo-i.v airodv-qo-Kti veos.

MEN. 128

(He)

whom

the gods love dies yoimg.

The demonstrative
So TroXXol

subject, oStos, is omitted.

<x

dvaXlo-Kovo-iv ovk ets

objects

Set.

XeN.

Oik. 3. 5.
(to

Many

spend money on

which they ought not

a.

spend

it on).

For
So
a(o vfias

cis

ravra eh

evda to Trpayp.a kyivcro. XEN. Oyr. I mil bring you where the affair took place.

V. 4. 21.

For
Several
Attraction.
(a) oiSels 6'0-Tis ov
(i.e.

eKEtcre ev9a.

common

idioms

come under

this

head

of

ovSefe ko-riv 00-719 ov) is declined as

one word in Ace. Gen. Dat.

Yopy'10,% oiSevl
6V(j>

ovk direKpivcTO.
to

PlAT. Men. 70.

Gorgias was replying

every single questioner.

In Soph. Ai. 725, oiVts

lo-ff 6s ov.

(b) Bavpao-rbs ocros, vTrep^vr/s 6'0-os are similarly declined, and their adverbs davp,ao-rZs, virepj>vS>s.

&U,oX6yrjo~e

ravra

/jetoi

ISpwros 0a,vp.mnov oo~ov.

He made

these admissions with

an

astonishing

Plat. Sep. amount

of perspiration.
virep'pvZ's (09 \aip(a.

PLAT.

am

surprisingly glad.

6p

PRONOUNS.
(c)

otos,

and aAAos

6'o-os,

ns.
'

avSpas roXprjpovs otbus Kat K.6yjvaiovs. Thuc. viL 21. j?e was speaking to bold men like the Athenians.
4'A.eye ttjOos

For
dvicrrr]

oioi e'uri Kal ' K6i]valoi.

/cat

'Aypiavas

aAAa

6'cra etfvij

IlaioviKa.

Thuc.

ii.

96.

He was

raising the Agrianes

and

all the other

Paeonian
el

eyyvu>p.eda
fiovXerai.

^/tets,

eyaJ,

<f>opp.itnv,

aWov
DEM.

Ttva

20. 100.

Let us promise,

I,

Phormio, any one he

likes.

For aAAos
exceedingly common.

xts el riva

aAAov

fiovkerai.

otos re for toioStos otds re in

is

the sense of " able," like Swards,

o?os re elp,l

ravra

7rottv.

I am

able to do

this.

ovx otdv te

ecrriv.
it

It is not possible ;

cannot

be.

are

In the same way, by the omission of the Antecedent, formed many indefinite pronouns and verbs.
eo-nv
ot,

commoner than
.
.

cio-tv ot

(sunt qui).

evioi (evi, there are

ot, those
ft,

eo-nv ov, somewnere;

emiv

who) ; eviore, sometimes. some way ; eoriv oVcos,

somehow.

The Eelative preceding the Demonstrative throws great emphasis on the Demonstrative (as in Latin).
a
jrotetv aicrxpov,

ravra vopue

p.rjSe

Aeyetv etVat /caAov.

ISAE.

1.

15.

Quae factu turpia sunt ea ne dictu quidem honesta habe.

Observe the phrases
oirep,
:

6 Aeyw, as I say, or as
efirov.

I was

or 8 apri eXeyov, oirep

Digitized

by Microsoft

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

6t

77.
Some, any,
)

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
none, nothing,
,

o*8es, oi&lv (o^n.i)poet.

kind or

S-ti S

n
8*

., s , |j.T)oeCs, |iT|oev.

sort of,

J
(

(wit Some hme (with

rnv
'ij

none (emphatic)
(less

68*

sts.

emphasis), emphasis)

eio-lv oi

common).

l"l SJ ts -

Any what
Sstis oSv.

ever,

Some

others,

JuJJ^_S\Xo"i.

uacii,
',

Ka(rT0Sj ottos,

tis, ita.% Tts>

iro T aS) awas (stronger than

was)

all,

J
<rv|tiras

(all together)

Other,'

I &\\os (alius) ol axXoi, Ae ra, ceteri.

another,

Owe cffaco 1
(different),

' Tp S

,.

)
7roTpos,

^
and

e^'

v.

neither one \ otoerepos.

wor

otfier

J |1&Psottotc/xjs,

JVofe 1.

its

indirect

form,

uter,

alteruter,_one, But they may also whether, or which of two ? In this latter sense 7roTepds is sometimes or either of two.

written oxytone.
ttoios, of some sort; the accents).
sroo-os,

of some size or number (observe

ere/Dos

but

it is

should perhaps be classed among Demonstratives, put here in contrast to a\Xos.

Idiomatic uses of
rts.

Note

2.

(a) T19

means sometimes many a

one.

auTii tis eKeivov, 5 avSpes 'AOr/vaioi, Kal SeSiev.

DEM.
There are those (there are many) who hate him and fear

^M^Wcrosom


62

PRONOUNS.
(b)

It

means, like
or thing.
r)V)(ei'S

aliquis,

some

great,

some important person,

Tts etVat, TOto"t xprjp.a.(ri (rdevaiv.

EUR.

El. 939.

Thou wast
to

boasting thyself to be some great one, trusting

thy riches.
Cf. S. Paul,

ad

Gal.

ii.

6.

So Spav
Si
(c)

ti, to

do some great thing.

Txrv.
i.

Soph. El. 305.

vis esse aliquis.

74.

It is constantly joined to adjectives, numerals,

and

pronouns, sometimes to strengthen, sometimes to weaken the expression, in a way for which, in English, we have frequently no equivalent
:

/xcyas tis,
Ttvls.
etc. etc.

tSs

tis,
Tt,

tKao-Tos

Tts.

ovSeis Tts, dAt'yoi

ti,

fipaxy

ovSev
;

Tt,

<r\eS6v

TpeTs Tives,

Trotos tis

ov TroAAot Ttves,
Thtjc.
(d)
fj

tiwos tis ; cr\^6v ti, iyyv Tt, TpiaKOVTa Ttvcs, rives Svo v?Jes,

viii.

100.
f)

Tts

rj

ovSek

ti

rj

ovSev,

hardly any one, hardly

anything.
oiiTot p,ev

oSv

i)

Tirj ovScv dA?j0es

tijOJj/cacri.

2%ese
()

mew

then have spoken hardly a

Plat. ^. word of truth.

person.

1.

Tts also covertly alludes to

some known

qS' oTiv davetTai /cat Oavovu' dAet Ttva.

Soph. Antig. 751. She then must die, and dying slay another (hers will not be the only death.)
(/) Ti's=here
Tiav ev

and

there one.
to-ios

oXiyap^ia dirodav6vT(i>v

Tts "qv Trovrjpos.

Lys. 30.
aAAos must often be rendered adverbially, moreover, as well, adding as well as opposing. This
Note
3.

13.

besides,
is

very

common

in Attic.

Tre/xiTTos TTOTa/j.bs

aAAos.

HDT.

V.

54.

Yet a fifth
Cf.

river.

Soph. El. 707; Aesch.

Sept. 481.

ou yap ?jv xfyTos ovSe ctAAo SevSpov oi5SeV. There was no grass, no, nor any tree at all.
Digitized

XEN. An.

i.

5. 5.

by Microsoft

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
Cf. Plaustra

63

iumentaque

alia.

Liv.

iv.

41.

Wagons and him

to

And

beasts of burden also. there were also two other malefactors led with

be

put to death. S. Luke, xxiii. 32. All these {vices) are portable, with other graces weighed.
6 oiAAog

may
to

Shakspeke, Macbeth, iv. often be rendered in general or usual.

rpoirov.

iii.

90.

n-apa tuv

S.X.X.OV

ANTIPH.

Tetr. B. B. 1.

Contrary

my

general disposition.
quidvis, quidlibet,

Note

4.

wav like

may mean

anything, no

matter what. ovSeva Sel jirj^avadOai 6V(us <wro<ei;eTai jrav

iroi5>v da.va.-rov.

Plat. Ap.

No man
Obs. to

should endeavour to avoid death by every means. ToiavTa. a.X.X.a, cf. alter idem. Soph. El. 337.
n-oio'/,

quality ; to jtoo-oV,

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE
THE
78.
Greek
is

IV.

CASES.

Preliminary Note on the Cases.

if

developed from a language which had eight cases, we regard the separate meanings of the last as belonging to two distinct cases. Of these eight or nine Greek retained only five, although comparative philology shows that traces of the others survived. The work of the lost cases was carried on by the remaining five, as the following table will
or nine,
explain,

Indo-European.
Nominative
Vocative Accusative Genitive Ablative Dative Locative Instrumental Comitative or Sociative
cases
cases. 1

Greek.
Nominative
Vocative Accusative
Genitive

Dative

The Greek Genitive and Dative have been

called mixed because they have assumed the functions of the lost

The

Schleicher, will

following declension of an Indo-European noun, taken from show the cases.

Stem

Vak

(voice, Foir(s), voc(s)

Singular

Nom. Vak-s Voc. VakAce.

i.e. vox.) the voice

O voice,
the voice, of the voice, from the voice, for the voice, at or by the voice.

with the voice.

THE NOMINATIVE.

65

The Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative form one group, the Genitive and Ablative a second group, the Dative, Locative, Instrumental, and Comitative (the latter being perhaps another aspect or shade of the Instrumental) a third group. The Nominative is the case of the subject. The Vocative is the case of the person or thing addressed. The Accusative is the case of the object. The Genitive is the case of the class (-ycvos, genus) to which a thing belongs. The Ablative is the case of that from which another thing is separated, the case of separation. The Dative is the case of the person or thing remotely connected with an action (the remoter object), for whom or which anything
is

done.

The Locative is the case of the place where an action takes place. The Instrumental is the case of the instrument by which an
action
is

performed.
(or Sociative)
is

The Comitative
circumstances.

the case of

the

accompanying

The details of each case will show that the five Greek cases retain their original meanings, while the mixed cases (Genitive and Dative) acquire in addition the'meanings of the lost ones. But nearly all the cases, especially the mixed ones, have assumed other shades of meaning and other uses, from analogies which we cannot safely trace now. In treating of any case
therefore

we may distinguish between (1) its primary and Attempts to explain and distinct use, (2) its freer, looser use. classify the freer uses must necessarily be more or less
arbitrary.

79.

THE NOMINATIVE.
is

The Nominative

the case of the Subject, and of the

Predicate or Apposition in agreement with the Subject. $iknnro<s KaQicrrarai fiacrikev;. is appointed King.
is

Philip

The Nominative
Come

often used for the Vocative.

Wt, fiev oSv (TV, 6 irpeo-f$vra.TOS.

XEN.

then, you, flfciM&bWi/crosoft

66

THE
oStos especially
is

CASES.

so used.

& oStqs Amis. Soph. Ai. What ho 1 Ajax !

Cf. Oed. Col. 1627.

89.

6 ' A.iroWoBwpo's ovros, ov TrepifievtU

PLAT. Symp.
?

Apollodorus, you Sir ! stop, won't you

80.

THE VOCATIVE.
is
<o

In Attic Prose m
o-fcoirei

generally added.
'XwicpaTe^,
e<pr).

toivvv,

PLAT.
he.

Consider therefore, Socrates, said

[1% Bopv^eire,

avSpes 'Adrjvaloi.

Plat. Apol.

Do

not interrupt, Athenians.

of the
a>

The omission

makes the address

;

curt, tart, or

businesslike, as d/coveis Alo-%ivr)

d'ye hear, Aeschines?

THE ACCUSATIVE.
8l.

Preliminary Note on the Accusative.

Accusative, unlike the Genitive and Dative, is formed with no suffix which in itself gives the case a special application. But it came to denote the object of the sentence, as the Nominative denotes the subject. In speaking of the object, however, we must very carefully distinguish between two distinct significations of the Accusative. Thus Antiphon writes, rvinti tov avSpa TrAijyas, he strikes the man Mows. Here 7rAijya5, Wows, is already contained in the meaning of the verb Tim-rei. This Accusative has been called the Internal Accusative. On the other hand, tov 'avSpa, the man, is not contained in the meaning of tott-ci. This is called the External Accusative. The Internal Accusative is of much freer and wider application than the External, varying from the Cognate Accusative, pd-xv v p<^xlJ a h I fight a fight, to any word which is substituted for the Cognate Accusative, such as, cnrovSas TroiovpAx.i, I make a treaty ; ejrtcrroArjv ypdcjuo, I write a command ; Digitized by Microsoft
'

The

THE ACCUSATIVE.
7rA.o

67

disappointed.

I sail the sea ; /ieya\a. a-<f>dXXop,ai, I am greatly The External Accusative is a natural extension, not of the meaning, but of the direction of the verb. The Accusative is naturally associated with a verb, and, when it is
QaXasTuav,

not an External Accusative, qualifies the verb almost as an adverb. Thus irai<rov SnrXrjv (Soph. El. 1415), strike a double blow, strike twice ; &Kr)v co-ay, or kyivovro (Hom. B.) they were or became silence, i.e. silent. Hence the many quasi-adverbs of Accusative form, apyrjv, aKfir/v, irp6<f>acriv, x *P lv> "7>' Ka, etc., and the wide use of neuter adjectives used adverbially, noWd, UpQrov, irpoTepov, again are Accusative irvKvd, to konrov, etc. Indeed we may say that all Accusatives fall under forms. two heads, either (1) the Internal Accusative, or (2) the External Accusative.
<

82.

Conspectus of the Internal Accusative.

Internal Accusative denotes
either

The

the

state

or the

operation of the verb (the state of neuter the operation of active verbs).
It is either

and passive verbs,

A. A word kindred in stem Cognate Accusative), e.g.

fjv filov.

or

meaning to the verb

(the

/j.dxr]V p.d)(erT6ai.

word substituted for the Cognate B. limiting or defining the verbal notion.
\pr)$urp.a

Accusative, and

vwav,

to

win,

i.e.

carry,

a measure.

Accusatives of this class denote

(a) That with respect to which the state or operation occurs, often the part affected (Accusative of Respect).
0cu;/xao-Tos tlvai to

KaAAos,

to

be remarkable in respect of

beauty,

foxr/v
(b)

vocreiv, to be ill

in mind;

The extent

of the state or operation in degree, space, or

<ro(f)6s elp,i.

time.

ovre p.kya oiVe (TfiiKpov

In no

degree, grmfjtH

68

THE CASES.
anteyei o-raSiovs ijihofi/qKovra.

It is seventy stades distant.

iro\vv )(povov

Tra.pep.eiva.

I waited a

long time.

Two
(1.)

further remarks

may be made
follows

The Accusative
e.g.

Adjectives (and Adverbs) as

well as verbs,

ayadbs Traaav aperrjv. aripoi 6/rip.iav ToidvSe.

(2) Adjectives, especially neuter Adjectives and Pronouns in agreement with the Accusative, are freely used instead of the Accusative, which is unexpressed.

peyaXa

KivSvvevei.

tovto KivSvvevei.

83.

THE INTERNAL ACCUSATIVE.

is,

The Internal Accusative

A.
This
is

called the

word kindred in stem or meaning Cognate Accusative.

;

to the verb.

tI n&yQov ovSev ovaa fw^delf

EUE. And. 134.

toil ?

Why, being naught,

j7<ret? (iiov

toilest

thou with

tcpdricTTOv rjv Ovfiov Kpdrrj^.

MENAND.

186.

Thou

wilt live the lest life if thou wilt control thine

anger.

irovelv, to

we4>vye fayr/v, he shared the flight, Pl. Ap. v. ; ttovov<s undergo labours, Pl. Ap. vii. ; dpxV tfp$ a I held office, Pl. Ap. xx. ; SveiSos 6veiSio-ai, to upbraid with reproaches, Soph.
,

Phil. 523.
voo-ets

$.Xyos, thou
SitoKeiv,
to

art

skh with

ypa^r/v

bring

grief, Soph. an indictment against

Phil.
(cf.

1326;
ypoujnjv

yp&feo-Qai, cognate in stem) ; ir6X.ep.ov o-rpareveiv, to engage in WOT, ThUC. i. 112 (cf. iroXepov TroAe/mv and o-rpareiav
q-Tpareveiv.)
Digitized

by Microsoft

ACCUSATIVE OF RESPECT.

69

B. A word substituted for the Cognate Accusative, and limiting or defining the verbal notion.
erepop -^(pio-fia viica Arifioa-Qevr]^.

AbSCHIN.
(or measure).

Demosthenes carries a second decree

r)ycoviovTo (ttoZlov, traX'qv,

km

irvyfnjv.

XEN.

They were contending in

the race-course, in wrestling,

and in
SiKrjv

ooxing.
to

o^kuv,

lose

law-suit; 'Okvpiria vik&v, to

to give

Olympic victory ; ydpovs hrnav,

Note.

a wedding

feast,

win an Eur. ;

fijtpur/M vik$, he carries (or wins) a decree,

Aesohin.
found in the Poets.

An extension

of this Accusative is

This Accusative denotes the result of the verbal operation. Practically the verb yields an epithet in agreement with the Accusative.
cAkos o-uiwou, Hom. II. v. 361, Goodwin compares "to break a
to stab

(and

so

make) a wound. a rout;

razceis

hole."

Tpoira<s KaTapptfywiri,

Soph. Ant. 675, breaks

olfuoydv,

to pieces

(and

so causes)

Soph. El.

123,

thou meltest

a (mdkest a melting)
Pers. 715, he

lamentation; irelpav
(ie.

i/j,d>pavev,

Aesch.

made a

foolish attempt; riyyeiv SaKpva,

Pind. Nem.

x. 141, he wetted

shed wet) tears.

In Soph. Ant. 973 the passive of this construction occurs. 4'A.kos Tv<f>\(i>dev, a blinded wound, i.e. wound inflicted which caused blindness ; the active form would be rv(j>\ovv 2A.kos, to inflict a blinding wound.

84.

ACCUSATIVE OF RESPECT.
Accusative
is

An

constantly joined to a verb, adjective,

noun, or even a sentence, to denote that in respect to which the state or operation of the verb, etc., takes place. Very often the Accusative denotes the part affected, e.g.

Ka^vm

or

aKyw ryv

ice$a\rp> (to, ofifiara, tous iroSas,

row
I

SaKTvKovsi).

have a

vai^Myhfifh&J<ms feet
>

>

Mff^rs).

70

THE CASES.
fSiknov
ecrri crco/jLa

r)

yjrv^Tjv voaeiv.

MENAND.
SOPH.

Better to ail in body than in mind.

ta r cora, tov re vovv, ra t o/j,jiar Blind art thou both in ears, and mind, and
tv<J)\o<s

et.

eyes.

'Egaicdo-ioi tov dpidfiov, six

hundred in number.

"EXXrjve<; to yevo'; (to ovo/ia), Greeks in race (in name).

Compare
stance.

this Accusative

with the Dative of Circum-

85.

ACCUSATIVE OF SPACE AND TIME.

extension of space

The Accusative denotes

of time.
ifKelv tt]v

and duration

Qakaoaav, Andok.,
yrjv, opt],

to sail the sea. to travel over

iropeveadai 6Bov,

Xen.,

a road,

land, mountains.
at,

airovBai eviavTov eaovTat.

be
(i.e.

Thuc.

The truce shall

aire^ei
57

last)

for a year.
e(3Bop,r\-

TlXaTaia t&v @r)@Ssv o-jaBiovs

distant

KovTa.

Thuc.

Plataea
ttjv

is seventy stades

from
teal

Thebes.
tj]v

TpiTTjv

rjnepav

eipya^ovTO

TeTapTqv.

Thuc.

They were working throughout

fourth.

the third

day and

the

KiXevdov 'ipirtiv, to crawl along a road, Soph. Phil. 1224; oSov <j>avfjvai, to appear on a road, Soph. El. 1274; tt)v &pav tov eVovs, Dem. Phil. i. 8, during the season of the year.
Note.

An

Accusative with ordinal numbers means how long

Tpirov eVos tovti.
three years ago

since or ago.
rj\do/j.ev

DEM.

54. 3.

We

came out

Cf Plat. Protag. 309.

Digitized

by Microsoft

ACCUSATIVE OF MOTION.
86.

71

ACCUSATIVE OF MOTION.
,

The Accusative denotes motion

preposition in
required.
oiijro) vei/do-nj/c'

Poetry

to a place, without a but in Prose a preposition is

oTkov.

Eue.

I. T.

534.

Not
Cf.

yet hath he returned home.

Soph.

Julius Caesar

Ere we could
to

Ant. 152, Phil. 244; Euk. Bacch.

arrive the point proposed.

1,

5.

Cf.

Very seldom motion

a person.
erri

Eur. Bacch. 847, 1353,

Thuo.

al vfjes afyiKvovvTai,

IIvXov.

The ships arrive against Pylos.

evrevOev e^eXavvei
ei? K.o\oa<ra<i.

XBN.

From
87.

this place he

marches

to Colossae.

ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT AND PREDICATE IN AGREEMENT OR IN APPOSITION WITH IT.

this construction,

For

a very common and easy one, see

Oblique Predicate.

Verbs of naming (/caAu, ovofid^o), addressing (irpoo-ayopevio), and distributing (vep.(o, Karavefia, Siaipa, tep,vi), take this construction both in the active and passive.
dividing

KaXova-t

fxe

They
6

call

me

tovto to ovop.a. (by) this name.

XEN.

Oik. 7. 3.

Kvpos to (TTpdrevuM

Kareveifie BioSeKa

p,ipt).

Xen.
Cyrus divided the army into twelve parts,
rj

Cyr. 7. 5. 13.

PL. Leg. yrj to. avrd p.kpr) Siaveperai. The land is divided into the same parts.

V. 737.

88.
Certain

DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.
classes

of Verbs in Greek regularly take

a double AcCUSativs/g/feed by Microsoft

THE
CASES.
:

72

Verbs of
ashing,
i.e. i.e.

interrogating

ipwrZ,

^pofi-qv.
irpdo-o-u>,

asking,

petitioning

atrw (and compounds),

Trpa(T<r(o,

*U-

Trpdo-<ro{Mi,

I demand,

exact.

concealing teaching

Kpuima

(dTroKpvTTTta).

SiSda-Ka.

putting on or
depriving
:

off:

ev&vm, IkSuw,
Xofiai.

dp.(j)iivvv[j.i,

nepifldX-

d<paipovp,ai, dvovTepto, o-vXw.

saying or doing anything dyadov (kclkov, n, tovto, ev, KaA<3s, KOKm), ktyto, ipG, thvv Spy good or ill:
'

7rono, epyaQop,a.i (rarely TrpacrtTa}).

Similarly

d5A.oyc3,

eiraLvZ,

xpevSofiai,

8iaf3dXXa>,

i/3pi<o,

dSu<5, dvTaroiZ, /3XdTrru>, KwXvia, dvajKafto.

ov tovto ae epcoTw.

AEISTOPH.

That's not the question I'm asking you.

iroKKoL

/Me

avrov avTovo-i, iroWoi Be cfiana.

Xen.

Many

are asking

me for food, many for

clothes.

aXkavs TavTa TavTa BiBao-Kto. PLAT. 1 teach others these self-same subjects.
ovBev ae
fcpvijrco.

SOPH.
thee.

Naught
iBov
"

will

I hide from

^pTjarTfjpiav eaQrrra.

'AiroXkwv avTO<; eicBvcov AESCH.

Apollo's self divesting
oracular.

efie

And

lo !

me

Of garb

aXkrjkov^ Ta eaj(aTa Xeyovcnv.

Xen. They say the most atrocious things of one another.

01 fiev irovTjpoi icaicov

epya&VTai tows avOpwrrovs,

good.

8 ayaOol ayadov. PlAT. Bad men do harm to others, good men

oi
Digitized

by Microsoft


DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.
Note
1.

73

construction of the Double Accusative is much Greek than in Latin. Almost any Greek transitive verb can take an Accusative of the External Object, and some one of the many varieties of the Internal Object. The

The
in

commoner

Internal Accusative is often a neuter pronoun, or an adjective agreeing with a suppressed substantive.

McAtjtos p.e eypdiparo Tqv ypa<j>^v TavTrjv. Meletus brought this indictment against me.

PLAT.

In the Passive
T<x9

aAAas

/ua^as, o<ras ILepcrau fjTTqdrjo'av,

eta.

IsOCR.

I pass
The

over all the other battles in which the Persians were

defeated.

poets, as

construction,

might be expected, use great freedom with from Homer downwards.

a,\firjv.

this

Xpoa vi^ero

Od.

vi.

He was

washing

the brine off his

:

224. sMn.
off

(He was washing

his skin

he was washing
rj

the brine.)

&W ovk
Na%

edo-ei

tovto

y'

Sikyj ere.

SOPH. Ant. 538.

this.

Justice will not suffer thee to do

TOIOVTOV
avrf) 6' 6ir\[ei.

8p6.(TOS

SOPH. El. 996.

Thou arm'st

thyself

m such boldness.

Note 2. In the passive Construction one accusative becomes the subject. E. g.

iroWol finrow

airevTep'qvTa.i.

Many
The
etc.

have been deprived of thevr horses.

e$, Ka/cciis, iroieiv is

passive of

not eS
erS,

etc.

iroieurdai

but

eS

iraiarxeiv,

and

of 5

etc.

Aiyctv not Xiyeo-dai but aKOveiv

[ityaXa,
iradeiv,

(cf.

bene,

male audire),

e.g.

koWo. KaKa

of these verbs take other constructions, e.g. two. Ttvos, oItZ ti irapa tivos, d^aipovpai ti tivos ayadbv iroiw <roi. XoiSopetv takes an accusative, \0180pelo-da1 a dative p,eiJ.<pop.ai an accus. of thing and dative of person, tovto of 0-01; also an accusative of person; also a dative alone

Note

3.

Many

avaiup,vi)<rK(j}

P erson

Digitized

by Microsoft


74"

THE CASES.

89.

THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE.

direct object of a transi-

The Accusatives denote the

tive Verb.
Tt]v fia%i)V

tow @apj3apovs

evtKijcrev. battle.

AeSCHIN.

He

conquered the barbarians in

fiax^v internal Accus., fiapfidpovs external Accus.

Note 1. The Accusative depends almost universally on aVerb. But there are few cases in which it depends on a noun (generally a verbal adjective, or a noun of verbal character).
kcu
<re <j>vipos

ovSeh aOavdriov.
is

Soph. Antig. 789.

And

none of the immortals

iropipoi.

able to escape thee.

voXepos airopa

AESCH. P. V. 904.

to 7rav ptfx aP ""/"'OS Zeus.

AESCH. Supp. 594.

to.

Perhaps

we may add

e^apvoi

&[ioXoyrjpiva,
Cyr. 3. 3, 9
;

Isaeus

v.

26

eiruTTtjpoves toL irpoa-qKOVTa,

XEN.

Sto/cpaTijs to,

pereapa ^/oovtktt^s, Pl. Apol. II. ; unless satives here as accusatives of respect.

we regard the

accu-

The

construction
tibi

is

not

unknown
est.

to Latin

Quid

hanc digito tactio

Plaut. Poen.

v. 5. 29.

Reditum

domum

in patriam.

Liv. xxx. 32.

On this construction see Peile,

Primer of Philology,

ch. vii.

5,

Note 2. An Accusative stands in apposition not to the object of the verb, but to the state or act jointly denoted by the verb and its object. Very often this Accusative in

Apposition has a proleptic force.

tion.

See Peculiarities of Apposi-

alal,

KaKUv v\pwra

Srj

kXvo) tcioV,

a '"X'? Te n^P" at S Kal Xiyia KOitvpara.

AESCH.

Pers. 331.

Woe 1 woe !
Shame
to the

the top of sorrow hear

I now,

Persians,

and

shrill lamentations.

Other instances occur, Aesch. Ag. 225, Oho. 200, Eur.

Bacch. 29, 250.
Cf.

Verg. Aen.

xi. 381, Proinde tona eloquium, Digitized by Microsoft

solitum

tibi.

THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE.

90.

75

VERBS WHICH TAKE

ACCUSATIVE.

AN EXTERNAL

The following classes of Verbs should be noticed as taking an Accusative of the External Object.
1.

alSovfiai,

Many Verbs I revere.

of.

of Emotion
I/otAijo-o-o/ku,
) \

lam alarmed
at. at.

aUrxivofiai,

I feel awe
confidence

or

shame

KarairX-qa-a-opai,
(frpio-o-w,

in the presence

OappZ,

I feel

m.

shudder Ant. 997.

Soph.

aur\vvopai tov TroXvvpvov deov. ElTR. Ion, 1074. I am abashed in the presence of the god renowned in song.
to toiovtov o-ayia
oi

k^Qpoi Oappovcriv.

PL. Phaed. 239.

The enemy feel

p,fj

confidence in such

body.

Svvap.iv

tv ' A6r]vai0)v KaTaTrXayrjre.

ThUC.

vi.

76.

Do
2.

not be dismayed at the power of the Athenians.

Many Verbs
)

of

Motion compounded with Prepositions,

piretpi,
)

such verbs taking the meaning of their kindred transitives.

StaySou'va),

j
'

pursue,
of.

go

in

Siep\opai,
SiairXtto,

p,eTep\opai,
kufSaivw,
Igto-rnpu,

quest

irepiep)(opai,

I sail across. I go about. irepiwke<o, I coast along.

iK8i8pd<TK(i>,
)

aTroSiSpdo-Kio,

r
'

I exceed. I avoid. inrepf3dXX<i), I cross over surpass. v<f>L(TTap.ai, / undertake (sus)

mroZvopai,
vTrocfievyto,

cipio).
shirk.
ii.

I avoid,

ra cirmjSeta k Sijcttod juenovTes. XEN. Hell. search of provisions from Sestos. Going

1. 25.

inrepe/BaXov ra

oprj.

XEN. An.

iv. 4. 23.

They
orav

crossed the mountains.

ol avSpes l/c/3<So-i ttjv rjXiKiav, d(])r]o-op.ev ttov

auTois
shall,

eXevtiepovs.

PL. Bep. 461.

limit of age

As soon as the men exceed the prescribed I presume, set them free.

we

olirpoyovoi ovSiva TrunroTe kivSvvov ernjo-av. Our ancestors never shirked any danger.

DEM.

20. 10.

CX Verg. Aen.
to
toiis

v. 438,

vim

viribus exit

(i.e.

evitat).

DEM. 418. 13. Tvpdvvovs elcrievau. To act the part of'tifm&lpy Microsoft

76

THE
3.

CASES.

Many Compound
He
He
/*')

Verbs, which in their composite form

are equivalent to transitive

Srjfiaytoyei toiis dvSpas.

Verbs
acts.

XEN. An.

vii. 6. 4.

wins men by popular

nurses

tov eavrov Trarepa

yrjpoTpocfiei.

DEM.
V.

24. 203.

Ms father
0(0

in his old age.

T Xe

'/

faXovumjcmi.

ThUC.

111.

Not through

contentiousness to choose the worse.

Cf. Soph. Ant. 994, Schneidewin, w. note. So oiKovofiS (tov /Siov), / manage, or regulate.
crvKo<l>avT(0 (tlvo),

Xojottoiw

(o-vfi<j>opds),

I calumniate, or accuse falsely. I make up tales (of troubles).

warfare.

KaTavavp,ax<i>,
KaTaTroXe/jio),
4.

I overpower in naval I overpower in war.

(nvd); SaKpva,

Special Verbs.

yeXZ,

I ridicule

I weep for

(cAous, friends),

Eur. Frag.
(j>9dv<D,
>]\<o,

I anticipate (rovs p.eXXovTas, those who are purposing). I emulate (rovs dyaOovs, the good).

Iiew 0f(rbv Kiva, the dog). tiX apavP!; } djj.vvQp.a.1, 1 defend myself against (rovs iroAe/u'ous). Tifimpovimi, I take vengeance on (tov (frovevo-avra, the murderer).
/3tao/xi,

/ force, win
vii.

by force (tov etnrXow,

the entrance,

Thuc.

22).

v. 17).
ol 'Adrjvaioi rovs t<3v HvpaKocriiov lirireas e<oy8ij0ija-av.

The Athenians were afraid of

the

Syracusan cavalry.

aSwaTa
It

r\v toiis

Aok/oous

dp.vveo-da.1.

THUC.

iv.

1.

was

impossible to keep off the Locrians.

;

Ti <j>vXdao-6ai

<f>rjp.i 8etv rjp.ds Dem. de Pace What do I maintain we must guard against ?

iv.

6 KA.ea>v virefavye

tov irXovv

ixpio-rarai tov ttAow.

Thug. Clem was

trying to back out of the expedition
Digitized
:

iv. 28. he undertakes

the expedition.

by Microsoft

THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE.

5.

77

"Op,wpu and expressions of swearing, pd, ov pd, vac

pa. Aia, nay, by Zeus.

pd,

v-fj.

or vat tov Aia, yea, by Zeus. ov tov Aia, ov pa tov Aia, nay, by Zeus. d/ia>/xoKai9 toijs deovs, having sworn by the gods, Dem. 301. ov pa tov At', ov (in answers), No, by Zeus, not, etc. ov pa. tov At', ov ph 8ij, No, by Zeus, not so indeed.
vf/

1.

Note

1.

The

poets use
toiis

great freedom in making Verbs

transitive.

yap

evcre/itis deol

dvrjcrKOVTas ov yaipovo-t.

At a
The gods

good man's death

rejoice not.

See Peile, Primer of Philology,^. 131.

brate the god

irdSa.

Soph. Ai. 44 (J ebb's note); xopei5a> 0e6V, I celethe dance, Pind. lsth. L 7, Soph. Ant. 1152; So /Satvetv (Trpo/3aiveiv) \opeveiv ydpovs, EUR. /. A. 1047.

So #ev

x*/ a >

Note

2.

An

Accusative

is

found

after a

compound

sion which, is equivalent to a Verb. poets may be thus explained.

KaJ 7raVwxot
Si)

Many

expresaccusatives in the

SimrAoov Kadio-racrav

vaaiv avaKTes 7rdvTa vairrtKov \e<av.

AESCH.

Pers. 384.

So

all night long the

captams of ships were keeping

the whole naval host (Stair.

sailing in

and out)

afloat (or

Ka0tb-Tao-av

=one

verb).

TtV det Ta/cets olpwydv 'Kyap.ip.vova ; SOPH. El. With what meltmg lament bemoanest thou Agamemnon
(torcis

ot/woyav=one verb.)
et Se

p' 58' del \6yovs

efjpX e S

(Myovs

l%>x=T/500-e<t6veis, Jebb).

Soph. El. 556.

If thou hadst been ever accosting me
Cf.
thus.

Aesch. Ag. 788 ; Soph. O.O. 583. See Schneidewin on Soph. Ant. 212.

Cf. Terence, Hauton, Prol. 41, iustam esse animumAmdudde.

Digitized

Mea

causa causam hanc

by Microsoft

78

THE

CASES.

Note 3. Poetical and comic use of the Accusative with verbs of looking (an Internal Accusative).

There are many Horusric phrases.

irvp 6(j>9a\[ioi<ri SeSopKoJs, Od. xix.

446 (looking,

i.e.

flash-

ing

fire).

So"Apr]v pXiireiv, 8epKeo-8ai, dXxrjv opav,

"Kpr) SeSopKoToiv.

Aesch.

Sept.

c.

Theb. 553.

Aristophanes
irpbs

is

very fond of this idiom.

vav<f>pa.KTOV fiXeireis.
,

twv 6mv, avdpbme,

Arist. Ach. 95.

'fore heaven, fellow,

thou looh'st

an

ironclad.

So
Cf.

fiXerrtiv volttv

(mustard), o/i<aKas (sour grapes).

"to look black," "look daggers," and Hamlet, "I will speak daggers." " He speaks holiday, he smells April and May," Merry Wives, iii. 2.

91.

THE GENITIVE.
Preliminary note on the Genitive.

is the case of Connexion and its op dis-Connexion or Separation. The Genitive propei denotes the class (yevos) to which a thing belongs. Thus v6p.io-p.a dpyvpiov, a coin of silver/ the coin belongs to the class silver. Both in etymology and signification the Genitive is akin to an adjective. (See Max MtJller, Lectures on the Science of Language, i. 105; second edition.) The Ablative, on the other hand, denotes that from which a thing is removed. The signification of the lost Ablative has passed into the Genitive. But in the Greek Genitive we can never, perhaps, be sure where we have a strictly Ablative meaning, for as the Genitive -denotes Connexion, by a natural law of association, it also denotes the opposite, dis-Connexion, i.e.

The Greek Genitive

posite,

Separation. Further, Connexion (or Kelation) is so elastic a conception, that the usages of the Genitive have, by a series of loose analogies, been almost indefinitely extended. This
is

unscientific
all

what we should expect when we consider the popular and growth of Syntax. It is not possible to tabulate
the usages of the Genitive, or to avoid cross-divisions. Digitized by Microsoft

POSSESSIVE GENITIVE.

79

The Partitive Genitive so-called is a misnomer, due to a confusion of thought. The Genitive denotes the whole, that on which it depends denotes the part. Lastly, as the Accusative essentially depends on a Verb or Verbal notion, *o the Genitive essentially depends on a Substantive or Substantival
notion.

92.

POSSESSIVE GENITIVE.
Possessor, that to which a
;

The Genitive denotes the

thing belongs

with
Adjectives, oikeios, iSios {own, peculiar, or

A. Nouns and
belonging to);
t/kos.

These
etc.

consecrated to; and their opposite, dAAoalso (Upos very rarely) take a Dative.
lep6s,

Nouns,
fj

tov Trarpos oitcia or The father's house.

TToki<s

77

oiKia tov ircnpo?.

f)

cnrdvT&v t>v ttoXitwv

koivt) eariv.

ANDOK.

The
lobs

city is

common
is

to all the citizens.

6eS>v.

yap ovrof twv Kara. ^6ovo<i

EUB.

Consecrated

that one to the nether gods.

B. Verbs.
Uep<rai ttjv 'Aaiav eavrav nroiovmeu. XBN. The Persians are claiming Asia as their own.
ol

tU

eo-ff 6

ycopos; tov

ffeasv

vop.l^erai; SOPH. 0. C. 38.

the gods is it held

What

spot is this ?

To which of
to

sacred (considered

belong)?
is

Note 1. The Neuter Article with the Genitive used ret tmv detov, to. tZv 'EWyvtiv (to, 'EAAiji/iKa),
:

freely

the affairs,

concerns, lands, history, etc., of the Greeks; to ttjs the nature of oligarchy, or oligarchy.

oXiyapx^,

In certain familiar phrases there is an ellipse of the which the Genitive depends Jv'AcSov, in Hades; es word on "AiSov, to Hades ; ehMao-jtaXov to tU master's (sc. house).
Note
2.
:


8o

THE CASES.

Note 3. The Genitive denotes the person or thing to which something is suitable or becoming (it is a sign of, a mark of*
it

requires, etc.).

tovto hrri ttclI^ovtos. PLAT. Apol. 14. This is (the conduct) of one who is jesting (this

is

mere

banter).

arriv apa SiKaiov dvSpbs fi\a.TTTiv koX ovtivovv

7s

avOpummv

part of a just one whomsoever 1

it

the

man

to (will

Plat. Bep. 1. 335. a just man) injure any

jtoAAtjs dvoias Kal to Orjpacrdai Kcvd.

It shows

(it is)

great madness even to engage in

SOPH. El. 1054. an idle quest.

In expressions of sonship the substantive on which the Genitive depends may be omitted Sco/cpaTTjs o H<a<$>povlo-Kov, NiKia.s 6 NiKTjpdrov, BovKiiSlSr/'s 6 'OXopov. More briefly, M.iXTidSrjs Ki/iuvos. Poet. , Aids "A/>Te/us, Artemis daughter of Zeus ; 'Oikrjos Taxvs Atas, Aias swift son of Oileus. Hom.
:

Obs.

This

is

sometimes called the Genitive of Origin, or

It is a genitive of the possessor, or of the

Descent, or Source.
class, for, as

points out, it is equally correct to say o vlbs tov irarpos, as to say 6 iraTrjp toC vlov.
jraTpos Aiyerai
It is said that

Max Muller

Kvpos yevkudai

K.ap,f3vcrov.

Xen.
Gyrus was the son of Cambyses.

Cyr.

1.

2. 1.

So

in poetry,

<f>vvai,

f3\ao~TUv, Tpa<j>r\vai twos.

93.

GENITIVE OF MATERIAL OR CONTENTS.

The Genitive denotes the Material of which a thing

consists, or the Contents of a thing.

With Nouns,

etc.

vofuafia apyvpiov

= voflio-fia

apyvpovv).

coin of silver (Old Eng. adj.

silvern coin).

op&ai acopov; crirov, Ijvktov, XtOmv.

Xen. Hell.
758.

iv. 4. 1 2.

They
or<Hp.a

see piles

of grain, timber, stones.

SeiXaias ottoSou.
Digitized

SOPH.

Elect.

body of pitiable ashes.

by Microsoft


GENITIVE OF AMOUNT.
B. With Verbs
:

81

01 <TT6<f)avoi, poBtuv r/crav

d\X' ov

yjpvcrlov.

DEM.

The wreaths were of roses, and not of gold.

THUC. The substructions were made of stones of all sorts. Free and poetical uses
:

Oe/ieXioi iravToiav \i6cav viro/ceivTai.

(jxovq

opOiwv

KUKu/ioTG)!/.

A
A

Soph. Antig. 1206.

SOPH. Antig. 1239.

voice of shrill laments.

ttvoyj <f)OLviov

(TTaXdyfiaros.

gasp of bloody dew.

'A0?jv<3i> voXis, the city

Expressions such as
trast with

"urbs Eoma");

of Athens (conT/aofys irroXkOpov, the city of Troy,

are poetical.

94-

GENITIVE OF AMOUNT.
is

denotes the

Another aspect of the Genitive of Material Amount of Space, Time, Money.

oktco arahimv re^os.

where

it

THUC.

wall of eight stades.

rptcov rjfiepav 6Sd<s.

XEN.

A journey of ten
rpiZv

days (a ten days' journey).

TpiaKovra raXavreov ovaia.

A property of thirty
iTrnrfitia
fjp.ep(av

talents.

eXa^ov.

XEN.

Cyr. V. 3. 35.

They

took provisions for three days.

fj

yap.eiv Set eireiSav erwv

ns

rpiaKovra.

PLAT. Legg. 721.

A man should marry when he is thirty years old.

Trvpapls \161vr] to [liv e3po<s evbs wXedpov, rb Se vipo? 860

iriedpwv.

stone

Xen. Anal. 3. L 9. pyramid in breadth one

<f>vyu>.

plethron,

in height two

plethra.

yi\l<av Spa)(pwv Sikyjv

DEM.

55. 25.

I am
1

defendant in a suit involving a thousand drachmae. 1

Genitive of

With the

Amount may be connected the

by Microsoft

Genitive of

Value.
Digitized

82

THE
95-

CASES.

GENITIVE OF PLENTY OR WANT,

of Material

With the Genitive

may be

associated the

Genitive after words of Plenty or Want.

A. Adjectives and Adverbs

Trora/io? irXrjprj^ i^dvasp.

pea-ros,

n-A^s,

e/ra-Aewsi

irXovo-ios, ei/Sojs, wevi/js, Kev6s, eprj/xos, yvp,vos,

Kadapos, aAts.

XEN.

A
to

river full of fishes.

rfj<;

Arjdt]'; irehiov

Kevov eari hivhpmv.

Plat.

The plain of Lethe

is

bare of

trees.

Tupa.wo'S 7roXX(av <d/3<ov

ko.1 ipturaiv /icords.

Plat. Rep. 579.

despot filled with

many fears and

:

desires.

So with a Substantive

airopla o-ltov, scarcity of provisions.

irAijpS,
ttXtjOw,

B. Verbs
jU(tt<3,

nlp.irXrjp.i,

ep/rri/arXrifii,

yep.to,

evTropio, Seo/xai, Set, o-iravltja (/ce^/jij/tai, /cex/o^/ievos,

Epic

and

poetical).

ra

fiifiXta

Ava^ayopov

yefiei tovtcov

t&v

Xoyasv.

Plat.

The boohs of Anaxagoras teem with

these statements.

ecnrdvtfyv Tpocprjs to?s 7roX\ot?. THUC. They were in want of provisions for the majority.
,

Travcrai, irplv opyrjs Kap.t p.e<rr(i><raL.

SOPH. Ant. 28.

Peace

I ere

thou fill

me

too

with wrath.

o Trapav Kaipos ttoXXt}s <f>povTi8os kolI fBovXfjs Selrai. The present occasion requires much thought and counsel

ov Trovmv Kexprmeda. EUR. Med. 334. We have no lack of troubles.

Obs.

XeKTpa m/nrXwrai SaKpvfmcnv. AeSOH. Pers. 100. Their couches are filled (watered) with tears.
is used. by Microsoft

Sere the dative of Instrument

Digitized


THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE.
Note.
83

The

constructions of

Set,

Sea

ov 7roAAov irovov p.e Set, I have no need of much trouble,

iroias /mh Set <f>povTi8os
;

Soph.

Elect. 612.

What

care need
Seat

Ii
PLAT. Apol.
17.

iroXXov

l/wvrov ye dSt/ojaeiv.

lam far from intending to wrong myself. Common phrases with Set are ttoXXov Set, far from it ;
ttoXXov
Seto

or,

(personally used), nothing of the sort; 6Xiyov Set, there wants Utile, all but ; oXlyov, (alone) almost ; oXCyov kfiavrov eTreXadofir/v, Plat. Apol. i., I wellnigh forgot myself (who I was). So [UKpov, within a little, almost,
292. Svolv Seovres TreVTr'jKovra^ 48.
6kt(o dnroSeoires T/otaKoo-iot

THUC.

iv. 38.

96.

THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE (SO

it

CALLED).
is

The
used
:

Partitive Genitive so called (the Genitive is the

whole, the word on which

depends

is

the part)

A. With any
ttoXXoi

part of speech denoting participation.

ABrjvaifov.

t&v

Many
rot

of the Athenians.

Bvo /J,ept] rfjs ot/jotmw. Two-thirds of the army.

/3ov\o/ji,evo<;.

'A6r)valav 6

Any
twv

one of the Athenians who wishes.

TTokefiioov ol fiev wrrmXovro, 01 Be e(pvyi p.

Of the enemy some fell,

T<OV TToXlTWV
TIS,

while others escaped.

SOPH. At. (twice.) One of the citizens, no one in the host. T6s). avr/p twv p-q-roputv (ARIST. Eg. 423, o-v-qp One of the speakers; so, Sfaov dvqp, a man of the people (Xen. Gyr. ii. 2. 22). n vavs apurra ?7rAet iravrbs tov crTpa.T07re8ov. LYS. the whole squadron. The ship was the best sailer
OVTLS (TTpaTOV.

'

Digitized

by Microsoft


84

THE

CASES.

B. Especially after adjectives denoting participation and their opposites yueVo^o?, a/teTo^o?, la-o/xocpof,
:

aic\7]po$, afioipos,

ayev&TOS.

/*6to^o? av 6M7S tov <j)ovov hpdaa<; rdSe.

Eue.
do

Thou wouldst
this

(particeps

this bloodshed share shouldst thou

sis caedis).

C.

With Verbs,

especially with those of giving or

taking a share.
/jerex>, pereo-ri (poi), fieraXafifiavto,

perawoiovpai,

I claim
(to

a share

I have, or take, a share; peraSiS(opi (tlvi), Koivcovco (rlvt),

Trpocnj/cet poi,

give

a share

a person, Tin),

I have a con

cern in.

avdpwrrov ^v^r) tov 8elov /xTe%et.

PLAT.

The

soul of

man partakes

of divinity.

ov p,eTaBwcrov0i Tjfup

rjjs <z/5%?7? Aa/ceSai/iovioi.

Herod. The Lacedaemonians will not give us a share in the

empire.

ovBev Trpocn]Kei pot

T have nothing

to

rfj<: ai/rla? Tavrr]<;. Antiph. do with this accusation (i.e. it does

not concern me).

D. Also Verbs of eating, tasting, or drinking, or any Verb' denoting participation in a thing irivw, iaQlw, yew*), yevopai.
:

ttivco

tov oivov, eadim tcpeav.

drink wine,

eat meat.

Tj;? <yr)$ eTSfiov.

They ravaged (some of)

7re/47ret

the land.

twv AvBwv.

He
oo-oi

sends some (of the) Lydians.

e^ayov tZv K-qpimv Travres

ate of

a<f>poves iyiyvovro.

All who

^jw^^spon^came- mad.

XEN


THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE.
The
partitive
85

may

be inserted,
source.

cf.

wirokaveiv tI twos, to

enjoy some advantage

from some

Note 1. Many of these verbs are used transitively and take an Accusative (denoting " an object completely overpowered," irivm oTvov, Aay^avw rt, I attain something, Tivds, J. Grimm), a share of something ; so ttXslo-tov pipos tivos perix uv to have
i

the greatest

part of something (where

p.ipos is

a whole).

Note

2.

Instead of a neuter singular with a partitive Geni-

tive the adjective of certain

words

(rj/uo-vs,

-iroXvs, 7rAeioros,
:

Aowrds) often agrees in gender with the genitive 6 rjpio-vs, or 6 Aomtos, toC XP V0V ; tov \povov 6 irXeurTos, iroWr] tt)s x&pas (XEN. Gyr. iii. 2. 2). Cf. THUC. i. 2, tt}s yrjs ij apurrq.

Note 3. Many Adverbs of place are joined with a partitive Genitive ttov yijs ; ubi terrarum 1 7ra.vTa.x0v yrjs, ovSafiov yrjr aAAot dAAg tjjs TrdAews, THUC. ii. 4 ; TrrjviKa ttjs ij/*e/3as ; at what time of day 1 Tr6pp<o t}s fjpepas, t>v wktw, 6^e tijs
:

(Spas.

Many

such phrases occur in the poets

<lT ;

7rov yvwp.rjs ttot'

Soph. Antig. 42.

?

What What
Trot

is

thy purpose
cjipevZv
;

nov wot' el
is

Soph.

Elect.
?

390 (see 404).

thy mysterious intent

X6y<ov ?A0&>;
shall

Soph.

Elect. 1174.

What words
Hiding
01
p.'

I utter ?
k.t. A.

yaiai opvgas evOa,

it

SOPH. Aiax 659.

etc.

m the earth where,

;

aTiplas ayets

Soph.

Elect.

1035.
?

To what infamy

art thou leading

me

Note 4. The neuter of a pronoun or adjective, or adverb, common as in Latin is not unknown to Greek, but not so (paullum sapientiae, parum sapientiae, aliquid diyitiarum, t oTao-iaer/joC, Thuc. iv. 130; quicquid deorum, etc.). ctrojra -rijs o-/K/)oAoyais, ap.r)X aV0V evSaipwca.'S, PLAT. Apol. ; Plat. Thaeaet. 175; eVi pAya. Swdpews x <a P" v Thuc. i. 118; iravTl ko.kov, PLAT. Bep. Irrl jrAeicrrov dvdpwrbiv, THUC. i. 1 ; ev 579; & tQ <rvipopfogitfjte8>fy Mfefei)229
>
-


86

THE CASES.

Note 5. The word on which a partitive Genitive depends has often to be supplied
:

ep,e

Set

dh t5)v irexewpivuv. PLAT. Rep. 424. me down as one of those who are convinced.

26X<ov rZv eTTTa a-o(f)i(rTO}V Zi<Xr)6r). ISOOE. Antid. 235. Solon was called one of the Seven Sages.

97.

GENITIVE OF CONNEXION.

The following Verbs denoting Connexion take a Genitive

:

A. Verbs
a-Tox-(o^ai,

signifying to

aim

at, hit or attain, miss.

aim

rvyxdvu,

KvpS,

at ; opiyofiai, reach out towards, strive for e<t>iKvovfiau, hit, secure, obtain, attain; <wro-

rvyxavia, afiapravw, miss, lose; ipevSo/xcu, a-<f>dXXo/xa.i, I disappointed, balked of. (N.B. Ki^avu generally takes Accusative.)

am
an

B. Catch hold
Xap.f3dvop.ai
l<a7TTO/*ai,

of,

touch, cling to (be separated

from, see

Gen. of separation).
(and

compounds

with

ri,

diyydvo),

catch hold of touch,

dim), avropai, grasp; exopai, I

to,

clmg

to, etc.

(see examples), avr^xopai,

/ cling

uphold.

C. Make
irdpws
e'xo),

trial of, begin,

have experience

in.

irapS, Treipw/icu,

I am

attempt ; apxw, apxopuu, experienced i/n.

:

/ try,

I begin, ;

ep-

D. Verbs
enjoy.

of the senses

hear, smell, taste, touch (see B.),

(But verbs of seeing take an Accusative.)

aKovu), I hear; aKpowpai, listen to, attend lectures; 6o-<ppatvopai, smell (trans.); 8fa, smell (neut.); yeva, give a taste of; ytvopai,
taste ;

drrokavo), enjoy.

(The

last

two verbs more often meta-

phorically than literally.)

E.

Perceive, understand, remember, forget.

alo-OdvoiMai,

I perceive; wwddvopat,

learn by inquiry;

w%u,

understand;

^^^K^^^f^fj^^Xavdivo^i, forget.


GENITIVE OF CONNEXION.
F. Care for,
pekei
(/iot),

87

long for, desire, neglect, despise.

eTrip.eXovp.ai,,

care

for;

ireivia,
;

SiiJ/to,

hunger,
;

thirst after (literally

and metaphorically)

epZ, love, long for

;

evrpen-ofmi, respect ; oXiyapio,

<j>pov<o, despise.

dpeXw, disregard, neglect

koto-

A. Examples
Bel

croyaaaaQai
ought
to

8iavot,a<s.

ISAEUS.

We
tov

aim

at intellect.

cr/coTrov

d/iaprav tov 7raiSo? erv%ev.

child.

ANTIPH.

Missing the mark, he hit the

efa/cveirat, ttjs aperrjs.

ISOCK.

He

attains unto virtue.

iravTes (Sore toot<u ctkottov rogeveT dvSpbs rovSe. SOPH. Antig. 1033. Ye all, as archers at a mark,

Cf. 1084.

Are

shooting at this heart.

Tt p.01

twv Swcfiopiov

i<f>Ui

Soph.

Elect. 141.
?

Why
<piXr)S

art thou aiming at the insupportable

yap Trpo^evov Kcmjvva-ai'. They met with a kind hostess. The

SOPH.

Elect. 1451.

(TTpaTos KvprjO-ei vo<nip.ov <ro)Tr)pias.

AESCH.

Pers. 793.
(i.e.

host shall meet with returning deliverance

a safe
in with

return).
Obs.
one,

eiriTvyxdvm, 7rpoo-rvyxdvo>,

to

come

across, fall

take a Dative.
:

B. Examples

N.B. XapPdvw, Kparm take an Accusative

of the per

son or thing seized, and a Genitive of the thing seized.

TOV \VKOV TCOV COTCOV
KpaTCi).

I get
So ayeiv
eXafiov

hold of the wolf by the ears.

%et/3o?, to lead
t>)9 ((avij'S

by the hand.

tov 'Opovrr/v.

XEN. An.

6.

10.

They

seized

OronfysJ^^dfo^


88

THE CASES.
C. Examples
:

Kvpos ?ipxe rv ^oyov Se. Xen. Cyrus began the conversation as follows
first to speak).

(i.e.

was

the

%evo<pa>v rov Xoyov Xenophon began his

rfp^ero wSe.

XEN.

speech as follows.

N.B.

apyeiv

\6ytov, to be the first to speak ;

ap^eadai

\6yeov, to begin one's speech.

airoTreipwfievo*; rj/j,av eypayjrco rrjv ypacprjv ravrr]v.

Plat.

You were making

indictment.

trial of

me when you

brought this

D. Examples

ftpovTr)? atcovcra<;

fir)Sa/ji,5>t;

iroppm

<pvyr]$.

Philemon.

When you hear thunder

Tt Brjra Xctet?
;

by no means run away,

oaippawo/xai.

tcpop,/j,vcov
?

Ae.

Why
So

are you weeping then

I smell

onions.

o<7<$>paive<T&ai Trjs rvpavvi8o<;.

Ae. Lys. 619.

evdvs Se Sescras kp.Trvp(av iyev6/J.rjv. SOPH. Ant. 1065. Straightway in terror I made trial of burnt-sacrifice.
o;roi

av

e'A.00),

Xiyovros

ip,ov

aKpoaarovrai oi

veoi.

Plat. Ap.
Wherever
Note.

xxvii.

I go young men

will listen to

my

words.

With
fifj

approve):
accept this

d.Kpowp.ai cf. the use of &iro8e)(o[iai (I accept from, Tavra airoSexeo-de 'Ayvpdrov (LYS. 13. 83), do not statement from (a Genitive of Separation) Agyratus.
O7ro\avii> rtvos

So d.ToSe)(cc6u.i Ttvo9 Aiyovros. and figuratively).

6(u>,

(I enjoy, literally

I smell

of.

a^rai /*ej> ofavar' dfi/3po<rias Kal veKrapos. These smell of ambrosia and nectar.

AR. Ach.

196.

Verbs of perception also mean

to

hear from, as well as

to hear.

TOiavTa toC irapovros zk\vov.

SOPH. El. 424. Thus much was I hearing from one who was present.
Digitized "by Microsoft


GENITIVE OF CONNEXION.
See Ai. 318.
89

So

eiSevai crov irptaTurra

XPV&-

SOPH. HI. 668.

thee.

Fain would I first and foremost know from So with a sentence

:

Tovrtav &KOVC Tt Xeyovcriv.

Sear from

these

men what

they say.
(irapd,
irp6<s,

But more usually a preposition

e) is

added.

E. Examples

avdpm-jro'i (ov fiefivrjao rrjs teoivrjs tu^i;?.

MENAND.

Being a man, remember the common

aiktyov e/iavTov eireKa6op.r]v.

lot',

PLAT.
was).

I almost forgot

myself (who

ovk rjcrdavovro irpoo-iovrmv t&v irdKefiuov. Xen. They were not aware of the approach of the enemy.
eirvOovTO
rr}$ IIvXov KaTeiXrjfi/jLevrji;. They heard of the capture of Pylos.

THI7C.

F. Examples:
Tt
r/filv t>}s

ra>v

iroWwv

So^jj? fie\et

PLAT.
?

What
weida

care

we for

the opinion of the world

v/ias fiTjre croDfiaTiov eirifieXeladai p/iyre %pi]fjt,a-

toov.

Plat.

try to persuade you to care neither far the body nor

for money.

XEN. dyaOiav, PLAT. I hunger after (i.e. long for) money, praise, good things. So Su/su, Plat. Bep. 562 c.
n-etvu xpripaTtoV, eiralvov,

tov Qavwrov koI KivSvvov ceiXpycoprjcre. He disregarded death and danger.

Note
1.

Plat.

p*Xu and

/iTa/A.ei

take a genitive of thing, and

dative of person.
fieXei [lot rovrov.

I care for I r&pent *

this,

hoc mihi curae

est.

uerafieXei p.01 tovtov.

of this

poenitet. ; huius rei Digitized by Microsoft

me


9Q

THE CASES.

Note 2. Adjectives with these significations are found with the Genitive
:

eSpav Travrbs evayrj (rrparov. AESCH. Pers. 465. throne in full view of all the armada.

kirrjjioXo's <j>pev(Hv.

Possessed of reason

Soph. Antig. 492. (compos mentis).

Note 3. In the following examples observe the various meanings of 1-xpp.a.i

:

t5>v

'Evvea 68>v eKparrjarav. They ohtained possession of the Nine Roads.

Thuc

Trjs /xev yviAfj.rj'S,

&

'

'

A.6r)vatoi, del Trjs

/ hold,

Athenians,

to

avnjs i\op.ai. THUC. the same unchanged opinion ever.

dp/tartov.

en-ovrau Jxo/ievoi

t&v

XEN.

They follow, coming next

to the chariots.

6 TrAijyets del t?js Trkrjyrjs e'xefou.

DEM.

Phil.

1.

10.

The boxer who has been

All

struck ever follows the blow.

iravTts koivq tjjs o-oiT-qpias e'xeo-0e.

together provide for your safety.
'iypp.a,i

XEN. Anab.

vi. 3. 17.

With
Gorg.

compare the

parallel
tale).

avTrji yv<&p.r)s avai,

THUC.

v. 46.

meanings of ei/u. t^9 twv avrtov Xoyoji/ eTvai, PLAT.

489

(to

keep to the same

98.

SUBJECTIVE
6
<f>o/3o<;

AND OBJECTIVE

GENITIVE.

T&V

TroXefuwv.

The fear of the enemy.

This Genitive of Connexion
It
is

naturally ambiguous.
feels.

may mean

either (1) the fear

which the enemy

Here twv

being equivalent to the subject of the verb, and the sentence ol woXe/juoi <f>oirdXefiicov is Subjective,

fiovvTai (hpai)

or (2) the fear (which

tc3z>

we

feel) of or

for

the enemy.

Here

iroXe/ilmv is Objective, being equi-

valent to the object of a transitive verb,

tovs vaiXefiiovi.
Digitized

^ets

cpo(3oviJ,e9a

by Microsoft


GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE.
ot avdptairoi Sia rb dxrrZv (Subjective

91

Gen.) Slog tov davtitov KaTaif/evSovrai, PLAT. Phaed. 85 ( avrol StSiores tov ddvarov). Men, by reason of their fear of death, tell lies.

Sia rr)v rov dvep,ov (Subjective) aTruxriv ru>v vavayttav (Objective). Thuc. vii. 34.

In

consequence of the

wind driving the wrecks into

the open sea.

represents usually an object in the Accusative or Genitive after a verb, more rarely a Dative.
Ace.
Slot

The Objective Genitive

Havcraviov

/xikros,

THUC.

i.

96.

irdflos

rov

airo-

OavovTOs.

Gen. hriOv/iia

Dot.

ep,p,ovr]

tov

jraT/ios

twv irpayp.d,T<av. PLAT. Gorg. 479. Cf. kp.p,kveiv T<$ ko,ku), Tip.<apos k&/j,ov raXaivrj?, SOPH. Elect. 811.
xpr)p.a,Tti)v, eirifieXiia.

kiikov,

The following may be regarded as free uses of the Objective Xvpr) /Jjov, Soph. Elect. 1195, outrage on life; 6WGenitive So ireipa, exOp&v, fievZv Bripa, Soph. Ai. 564, hunting the foe. Soph. Ai. 2, an attempt on, or against, one's enemies ; to twv Meyapkutv ifrf<f>io-p.a, Thuc. i. 140, decree against the Megarians (where the preposition irepi would have been more usual.)
:

99.

GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE.

takes place.

The Genitive denotes the time within which anything The Genitive is the whole, the time is
or recurring,
vvktoi,

either indefinite,
$fie'pa<!,

by night;

tt}?

by day

rov avrov

6ipov<s,

during the same sumIkolo-tov

mer ; tov
year
;

\017rov,

for

the

future;

ctou?, each

t/ws tov eviavrov, thrice in the year.

jy.5.

With the Article the Genitive

is distributive.

avTO i/iaTiop -r/ficfueo-TO depovs ts Kai Xen. j(ei/j.a>vo<;. Socrates wore the same mantle summer and winter.
tjcoKpaTr)? to

Spaxfiyv

eXcififiave

TJ79

^fiepas

(or

t^?

q/j,epa<s

&Kao~Ti}i).

He

used

to

retfwfcajrafhmi^ day

{each day).


92

THE CASES.
Note
1
.

or riy avTy rjfiepif (often with, small tov avTov depovs and iv tiJ> airy depei (Thuc. iv. 133) ; tov Xonrov or to Aomtov, /or the future. So aAAijs rj/iepas, Soph. El. 690, o another day: ov fiaKpov Xpovov, Soph. El. 478, within no long while : tov Xonrov xpovov, Soph. El. 817, for the future: apas wktos, Soph. ^i. 285, at dead midnight: t}s TrdpoiOev ei5</>6Vijs, Aesch. Pers. 182, during the past night.
Trjs avTrjs fijxkpai

difference,

MADVIG)

Note 2. The Genitive also denotes the space within which anything takes place (a very rare and poetical, chiefly an
Epic, usage).
fjIxepiiovTa.'s
p,a.Kpa<s

^kvovs
the

KiXtvdov.

Aesch. Ch. 705. Guests who have been spending

TreStoio Ikvai, Trp-qo-o-eiv, etc.

day

On a
Cf. the

long journey.

Homeric

Note
it

3.

The ordinary prose Genitive

:

of place

is

either the

possessive, or the (so-called) partitive Genitive.

Observe that

takes the Article

io-TpaTevcrav tijs 'ApKaSiat

Happao-iovs.

THUC

V. 33.

They marched against the Parrhasians in Arcadia.

Note 4. To the genitive of place, however, belong certain prose usages.
7reT<i)(yvov tiJs

6Sov tovs cr^oAaircpov TrpooiovTas.

Thuc.
slowly.

iv.

47.

They were hastening on the way those who were advancing

bropzvovTO toC
irpocra).

XeN. An.

v. 4. 30.

They were marching onwards, forwards.

etc.

Cf. irpoKoiTTeiv tijs o-pxfc ThTJC. iv. 60. inrdyeiv t^s 6Sov, TTpoXa^dveiv t}s <l>vyrjs, THUC. iv. 33.

IOO.

GENITIVE OF VALUE.
of

The Genitive
Buying, and

Value goes with Verbs of Estimating,

^^^^feo^mount).

GENITIVE OF VALUE.
Value or Estimate
value/
ti/*(3,
:

93

a3, judge worthy;

rao-o-io,

rate or

value, assess (ri/*(3pii).

dtvovfxai,

Buy
Sell
:

irplajxai,

I buy ;

I buy. I sell.

7r(oA5,

1 offer for

sale; diroSCSop.ai,
mvrjTrj.

Sot;a XprjfiaTmv

ovk

ISAEUS.

Reputation
ovk av

is

not to be purchased with money.

airehofirjv

iroXKov ras e\.mSas.

Plat.

/ would

not have sold

my

hopes for much.

Tifiarat /moi 6 avr\p davarov.

PLAT.

My
You

accuser proposes death as

my penalty.
C.

XpvcrS, xa\icei<ov Siafieifieo-dai voets.

are intending

to

PL. Symp. 218 exchange golden for copper.

Note. Verbs of buying more rarely, and only in poetry, take a dative of the price paid. See Eur. Hel. 885, Med. 233.

Free use of the Genitive of Value.

Tts 11.crajB6.X011' S8e criyav Xoyutv.

SOPH. El. 1262.

(Cf.

Aesch. P.
?

V. 987.)

Who

would change thus

silence

for words

dvTio-TaOfiov tov Orjpbs KOprjv.

SOPH. El. 571. daughter weighed in the balance against a wild

yet

beast.

KaiToi raXdvTov

And

raw' e/j.a6ev 'YirepySoA.os. AkiST. Nub. 876. Hyperbolus was taught this for a talent.

tort juoi dvydrrjp ydfiov iipaia.

XEN.

Gyr. iv. 6, t.

I have
their

a daughter ripe for marriage.

Under the Genitive of Value may come the Adjectives with

Adverbs
:

<xios,

dvdgios.

IOI.

CAUSAL GENITIVE.
(so called) goes

The Causal Genitive

tive of

with verbs (and

to,

other words) denoting emotion.

It is probably a Geni-

Connexion or Eelation, meaning with regard

Digitized

in connexion with.
by Microsoft


94

THE
6a.vp.dtu>,

CASES.

late; oiKTeipo),

or grudge

I felicitate ;

at or admire; ev8aip.oviv>, I congratuI pity ; opytfofmi., I am angry; <f>0ovZ, I envy fijA.5, 1 envy (in good sense) or praise ; fiaKapifa, ayapat, I wonder at, admire.

I wonder

r)\a> ere

tov

vox), Trj<;

Be Bei\la<s crTir/w.

SOPH.

I praise
thee.

thee for thy wit, but for thy cowardice

I loathe

evSaifiovi^co

ae tov Tpoirov. PLAT. I congratulate you on your disposition.

tjjs
1

<j>ev,

dvoias &s

o-'

iiroiKTtlpa> 7rdXai.

SOPH. El. 920.

Fie

how I have been pitying

(-rijs

thee this long while for thy

folly.

avoids

may go with

<eu.)

6pdo-ovs tovS' ovk dXveis.

SOPH. El. 627.

For

this

daring thou shalt not escape.

nXdeis
t<3j> 'O/oecrreicov

eiirep ti

KaKtav.

SOPH. El. 1117.

If thou hast a tear for Note

<f>ev

the woes of Orestes.

1.

A similar Genitive is used in

fie

exclamations

tov dvSpos, woe for, or,

on the

man !

& Zev

[lao-iXev

Ar. Nub. 153, Royal Zeus! what subtlety of wit I o'ipoi rijs TVX"t)S, & piandpiov Trjs <j>vo-uos, etc., o-xerXta ToX[ir]S, EUE. Al. 741. <5 TaXaiv' kyit o-edev, SOPH. El. 1210, ah, woe is me on thy account. o5/h yeXwTos, Soph. Ai. 367, ah me for the mockery. Curtius compares des Leides.
rijs Aejttotijtos

tuv

<j>pevwv,

Note
of

2.

an action

Tov, with the Infinitive, denoting the Aim or Purpose (Final), seems to be a Causal Genitive.

Mtvws to Xyo-TiKov

ck ttjs daXdo-crrjs tov ras Trpoo-oSovs /jaAAov ikvai air(p. ThUC. i. 4. Minos used to sweep piracy from the sea for the sake of his revenues coming in to him.
Cf.

Xen.

Cyr.

i.

6.

40; Soph.

Phil. 197.

This construction
T.)

occurs frequently in late Greek

(LXX. and N.

Digitized

by Microsoft


GENITIVE WITH JUDICIAL VERBS.
102.

95

GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF JUDICIAL

PROCEEDINGS.^
is

The Genitive

used with Verbs (and words) meaning

KaTTjyopZ,
the
(fjtvyo)

A. To

accuse

alriSfiai, Smokm,
;

(/

am

pro-

secuted)

<f>evymv,

defendant ; 6 Shokwv, the

prosecutor.

So also

irpoKaXovjuu, ari^eiju,
:

B. To acquit
t/.

a<f>t-qp.i,

I acquit ; aTofavyw, I am
I

acquitted.

To condemn :

alpS,

convict; KaraKpivat, Karayiyviia-Kd),

Karaipirjifrifaixai

(by vote),

am convicted; my smt.
8ia>/ea> fiev i~

6<p\io-Kavu>,

I condemn ; aX.'urKop.ai, I I am cast in or lose

LYS.

KaTrjiyopias, <povov Be (pevya).

libel,

am

prosecuting for

but

am

prosecuted for

murder.
iravre<; /cXott?}?
rj

Scopcov

eaXataav (or w$Kov).

bribery.
to be convicted

All were convicted of theft or

of desertion, perjury, passim.
(rvyyiyvacricm

So dXwvai Xnroral-iov, ^jrevSofiaprvpiav,

nvl

t?5? emdvp,ia<;.

PLAT.

I pardon any

one his desire.

<ypa$e<r8ai Tiva Trapavop,wv.

To indict a person for proposing unconstitutional

measures.

In the passive

to. p,ov if/evSfj Karr)yoprip,eva.

PL. Apol.

li.

The false
Note.
greatly.

accusations which have been brought against me.

The case in which the person The charge is generally in the

or thing is put varies Genitive, the accused

perhaps a Genitive of

1 According to Curtius, a Genitive of Cause Connexion.

Digitized

by Microsoft


96

THE CASES.
:

in the Accusative

e.g.

verbs

it

is

the reverse
o~oi

(Ka.Ta.Kpivu>) <f>6vov a-ov.

son, firicTKiJjrro/jcu

riva tj>6vov. But with some Kariqyopw tl two?, Karayiyvu>o-Ku> Other verbs take a dative of the per<6Vou, ly/caAai <f>6vov <roi. The suit or
8hx>k<o
:

sentence
murder.

is

in the Accusative.

^>euy<a Sik-t/v, eSiKafio tp-qfao-fia,

"Ei/o^os tov cpovov rots

eTTiTifiiots,

liable

to

the penalties for

103.

GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.
of a

The Genitive

noun with a

participle, not con-

nected with the main construction of the sentence, denotes

time, cause, condition, etc.

6eov Bi%6vto<! ovSev ta^yei,

(fidovos,

Kai

/it]

$i$ovto<; ovBev uxyyei irovo$.

MENANDEK.

If God

should grant, ill-will availeth naught

toil

Nor, if he grant not,

ovtos
yjrev^ov<;
is

availeth aught.

eariv airarrj.

PLAT.

Where

falsehood there

is deceit.
:

The

participle alone is

sometimes found
avTov)

etjrov, epco-njcrai/TOS (sc.

on

MoKpwi/es elmv.

Xen. An.
They

iv. 8. 5.

said, on his ashing them, that they were Maerones.

its

So layyeA0VTos, on
was raining
fievav
tell thee.
;

being announced;

vovtoi, while

it

o-uo-KOTafovros,
av,

eiTroifi'

was growing dark ; tsXovSoph. El. 1334, when the end is come I will
it

when

See Participle (Genitive Absolute). 1

It is difficult to decide whether this usage belongs to the Genitive or comes from the lost Ablative. comparison with Latin seems to favour the latter view. On the other hand, German uses the genitive Absolute (see Cuetius, Elucidations 197, note). In old English the Dative was thus used. Each language seems to have proceeded independently in its own way.

Digitized

by Microsoft


GENITIVE OF COMPARISON.
IO4.
97

GENITIVE WITH COMPARATIVES.

is

The Genitive
Trovrjpia

joined to Comparatives.
i.e. /j,ei<ov rj

E.g. fiei^mv rov aSe\<pov,

6 aSe\(f>o<s.

Oarrov Oavarov 6el. PLAT. Wickedness runs more swiftly than death than fate).

{flees faster

is

Note 1. The Greek Comparative, like the Latin, often rendered into English, " too great," " too good," etc. KpeiTTov fjv koyov to koAAos tijs yvvaiKos.

Xen. Mem.
The beauty of
Note
2.

iii.

11. 1.
(lit.

the

woman was

too great

for description

greater than words).

Adjectives in

-jrAacrtos, -ords

take the same cont^s

otlcrtas.

struction as Comparatives.
Jk <f>ei8(o\ias Karedero
/xttro? Si7rA,a<riov

In consequence of stinginess he incurred a hatred double

of)

(that

Ms property.
p.epo'S

iroWocrrbv

^v

to.

xpi^uara &v
little

vfieli irpoo-eSoKare.

Lys.

19. 39.

His property was a very

other

part of what you were expecting.

excelling, similarly

Sevrepos, second (pvSevos) to none ; vo-repos, later than ; Zrepos,

than; Sia^opos, different from or Genitive ; SO va-repahs, irpoTepacos.

take a

105.

THE GENITIVE WITH VERBS CONTAINING A COMPARATIVE NOTION?

is

The Genitive

used with

many Verbs which imply

less

letter than, worse than ; greater than,

than.

Such verbs are

irepieific,

KparS) (I prevail
(

over), irepiyiyvo/uii,

inrepex
1

am

superior

to), hia<f>epco,

Siacpepovrms

eyw

(excel, differ

from), viKWfiai, jJttgj/mm (am conquered

by, inferior to).

1 The Genitive used with Comparatives may be an Ablative use (cf. Latin} or it may denote a general connexion, "greater in regard to." Digitized by Microsoft
'

THE

CASES.

Verbs of ruling :$yov[A,ai (also with dative), ap%ui,

rvpavvevco, Tvpavvw, errpaT7j'ya>.

Many
itp>,

others

irXeoveicTa), /leioveKTa,

varepS), varep-

ekarrS), eXarrodfiab, Xei-irofiat.

Many
N.B.

take a dative (nvi) in respect of which the

superiority or inferiority is shown.

SicMpepo/jLai,

quarrel with, takes a dative.

epw<s

Tmv dewv
is

ftacikevei.

PLAT.

Love

king of the gods.

Plat.
(or
excel)

rovro 8ia<pep(o twv ttoWcov.

In

this respect

differ

from

the rest of

mankind.
yvvaiKO'; ovSa/iw? rja-arjrea.

SOPH.

We

must in nowise yield unto

a woman.

ryXcocrcrr]?

fiaXtara iravraj(ov ireipw Kpareiv. MENAND.

Strive ever chiefest to control thy tongue.

apxpvn

irpo<T7\K6i

Kaprepiq tS>v

i8i<ot>v irepieivai.

Xen. commander should in endurance surpass private

men.

106.

GENITIVE OF SEPARATION.
that from

Genitive denoting
is

which anything
and the
like.

is

separated

used with

many

verbs expressing removal,

distance, separation, loosing, delivering,

* The Genitive here is the representative of the Ablative. It is impossible to group the usages of the Genitive under two distinct headings Many Ablative (1) Genitive or Connexion, (2) Ablative or Separation. or Separative uses have already been noticed (e. g. Partitive d/jroxos, Any attempt at too rigid symmetry would Connexion Afrnprdvu). violently put asunder usages which are closely connected. See Introductory Note.

Digitized

by Microsoft

GENITIVE OF SEPARATION.
Such verbs are

99

/ am distant; yiopifa, I separate; I exclude ; <Mrex> (ex<), I withhold ; o-repicricopai, I am deprived of; ZXevOepQ, I set free ; ^iXa, I strip ; dtjiia-rqp.1 (with its intransitive tenses), I cause to revolt; nava, I make to cease (from) Tra.vop.ai, Aijyw, I cease ; dira\\do-o-<i>, I deliver from; dwaXXdo-o-opai, I escape ; eiVcoi, Trapax<apG>, I yield ; 4>ei8o/j,au, I spare.
(X<P>,(oimu), eipyco,
;

Sie^w,

r\

vrjaos ov -ttoXv Ste^et ttj? rjiretpov.

is

THUC.

The island

not far distant from the mainland.

EWrjviKov TrokepLOv ecr^ov ol 'Adrjvaloi. The Athenians desisted from the Greek war.
tyjTeiTe avrobv vvvi a7raXkayr)vai.

PLAT.

You
/teroL

are seeking

now

to he set free
'

from

them.
diroo-Tfjvai.

ravra

vvej3i) Qacriovs

tZv AOijvaiiov

i. 100. After this it happened that the Thasians revolted from the Athenians.

Thuc.

rjcrtus Tols 'Adrjva's Seivov irpoo-Tdyp.a.TO's -qXivdepuxrev.

ISAE. 10. 28.

Theseus delivered Athens from a terrible

eiTrov T<3

tax.

Uavcravia rov KTjpvKos

pr/ Xeiirccrdat.

They

told

Pausanias not

to leave the

THUC. i. 131. herald (see Soph. El. 479).

(ttovihv),

AvTijjOia <f>6vov, El.

Similarly with nouns, wavo-rqp rwvBe 447.

Soph. El. 384;

Many
yvfivos,

Adjectives
^rtXo9,

may

icadapos,

he brought under this head, as and all opcpavos, eXevOepo?

:

words compounded with a privative, dpLvrifiav, dfieX^, Most of these have already been a/Aoipot;, ayevo-Tos.
brought under other
rj

rules.

eTTiOvpua apwt\p,mv
is

twv

kivSvvcov.

ANTIPIL

Desire
evvfj<;

forgetful of dangers.
0eo<;.

SiKalas ovk avrjKOO<!

MENAND.

God

is

not de(g ^it o

jg

^Meom prayer. d

THE
107.

CASES.
Verbs. 1

Genitive with
is

Compound

The Genitive

used with

many Verbs compounded with

Sometimes Prepositions, especially cwro, !, irpo, vn-ep, Kara. the Preposition seems to demand the Genitive, sometimes the signification of the Compound Verb. Such verbs are aTTOTpeirw, 6K(3alvo>, l^ioTTTj/it, TrpoKeifjtai, irpoTiBivai, Trporifiui, virepopZ (also with Accus.), virepaXySi, KarayeXZ, Ka.Ta.<fipov<o, KarayiyvwcrKio, and many others.
Trpoo-Trjvai Tv^rji,

defence),

SOPH. Ai. 803 Soph. El. 188.

vweplo-Tao-dai (as, in whose

108.

Double Genitive.

Sometimes there are two Genitives in the same sentence. In such cases the first generally refers to the agent, the second to the object of his action.
toLs tu>v oIki(ov wpoTrrjXaKitreis

The

insults by relations

tov on old dge.

yrjpais.

PLAT. Rep. 329.

A.

Slo. to avroiv 8eo9 tov 8a.vd.TOV. PLAT. Phaed. 85 In consequence of their fear of death. avTwv Subjective, 6o.v6.tov Objective.

to kXclvov 'EAA.a8os
Kpoo-xqp-' aywvos.

The

glorious

Soph. El. 682. pageant of Greece, consisting in a

freer
;

contest.

Here the Genitives are

epexegetical.

'EAAaSos

is

possessive, ayZvos

109.

The Epexegetical

Genitive.

What
is

is called the Epexegetical (i.e. explanatory) Genitive a free application of the Genitive of Material.

dp.a$la avTTj

fj

iirovelSio-TOS

fj

tov

oteo~da,L

dSevai a ovk

oK5e.

Plat. Apol. xvii

This culpable ignorance of (which consists in) thinking on* knows what one does not know.
1 Some freer and miscellaneous uses of the Genitive are added. They have been brought together at the end of this Section in order not to

lengthen previous

^ad^^gjjh^no^g^go^gs common

constructions.

GENITIVE OF THE AGENT.

o 8e lyKe<aA.ds eariv, 6 rots ar0ijo-eis irapkyvyv to{! aKoveiv
(cat ojogiv

Kai

6o-<f>paiveo-9a.i.

Pl. Phaed. xlv.

the sensations of hearing,

22 s <Ae &rawi
sight,

wAwA fwnishes

and

and

smell.

IIO.

Genitive of the Agent (so-called).

In Poetry passive Verbs and passive Verbals sometimes take a Genitive which practically is like an Agent, and which in Prose would be expressed by a Preposition with vwo, or some such construction. It is not possible to refer these constructions to one explanation. Many look like a Genitive of the source whence, like the old English "of" (i.e. off) with the Agent (awo, ab). In some cases it is possible that the governing word is used like a Substantive on which the
Genitive depends.
airavTa.

yap

<roi

KCtv)jS SiSaKrd.

xd/m vov6eTrjp.(na SOPH. El. 344.

For all these thy admonishings of me are taught by her (come from her). So irAijyeis Bvyarpbs tijs ep,7js. Eur. Or. 497 (cf. Electr. 123).
Smitten by

my

daughter.

oiJxtos aTi/tos efyu

ort/i09 oiSevbs

=
the construction.

tov TeOvrjKOTO's Soph. El. 1214. dxi/tafo/wu wpbs tov xeflvjjKoxos.

a"6.

The connexion

of axi/jos

with words of value

(i.e.

may

influence

And am I thus
0.

dishonoured of the dead

by the dead)

Thou art by none dishonoured. T. 1437 irposrjyopos, and cf. Ai. 807,

<(otos rpraTrjfiivrj.

III. Free use of the Genitive of Connexion.

rj

K.epKvpa
is

xi}9

'IxaAias Kal St/ceAtas KaAtDs TrapairXov Kefxcu.

THUC.
Corcyra
Sicily.

i.

36.

well situated for

coasting voyage to Italy

and

a Genitive of Connexion, 'rraAtas a sort of Objective Genitive.

irapd.Tr\ov is

ti 8e

What

tWcov o'iei do you

rj

twv aXXav

aW;

PL. Hep. 459

(cf.

470).

^^i^h^mor^her animals ?

THE CASES.
In Plato a Genitive thus introducing a Subject is often thus introduced at the beginning of a sentence ; see Riddell,
Digest, p. 126.

tv^Xov rov fjieWovTos

S.vdponro'S.

PLAT.

Sol. 12.

Man
(is

is

blind concerning the future.

el TtS

avrZv

eXiricriv Kevats irapos

eloper' dvSpbs TOvSe k.t.A.

That if any of them

tov KacriyvrJTOv ri

hitherto

cerning (centred in) this

<pyjs
;

SOPH. HI. 1460. were buoyed up with hopes man, etc.

con-

SOPH. El. 317.

news of friends;
Antig. 633,

What

say'st thou of (about) thy brother ?

<f>iXmv,
cf.

Cf. Antig. 11 ; p,v9os 1182, 0. C. 317.

Se [/.eyicrr' e/3AacrT vofiifxa., raivSe <j>epop.evav

apio-Ta.

Soph. El. 1095.

But

as to the mightiest of ordinances that exist, in respect of these, prospering right nobly.

Trjs /irjT/oos r/Ka> tijs epiijs (frpdtrwv ev ots

vvv

etrriv.

Soph.

Tr. 1122.

I am

here to

tell

thee of

my

mother, what her present plight.

ouSajuaJs efiavrfjs oScr' aSeipavTOS <f>lXoi. AiSSCH. Pers. 164. Being by no means without fear for (concerning) myself, my

The a privative in dSelfiavros does not here take a genitive want or separation (like TreTrXiav a/iot/aos, without a share of But by a loose analogy common in all language, it robes).
of

may

help to account for the use of the genitive.

112.
Partitive,

The

Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs.

juo-oyos, dfieroxos
:

Ifrop.oipo's,

apoipos, aKXrjpos,

ayevaTos.
Perception,
(aKovoi)
:

dvijKOOs

/carqKoos, wdjkoos, IthJ/coos, o-vvrJKoos, inrrjicoov Se? eu/at tgSv yovkmv. :

Plat. Rep. 463.

These are also found with the Dative.

rrj

noXei KcmjKooi eyevovTO.

Digitized

PLAT. Rep. 499.

They became obedient

to the state.

by Microsoft

GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND AD VERBS.

Caring for,
remembering,
forgetting,etc,
\
, ,

103

>

emp.eA.rjS, a/teAijs: fivrip,(ov, afivrjfKiiv, eTTiXrj(rp.<av.

<f>ikofiadr)s,

fond of learning;

d^ipiflijs, late in

learning (serus studiorum).

epyireipos, Saretpos

Experienced

in,

eTrunr)p.u>v, rplj3u>v

(versed

in).

Aiming

at,

Swepus (perdite amans),

(compos), possessed
gaining.
of,

love-sick

for ; onJ/JoAos or having succeeded in

Plenty,

fieo-rds, jrAecus, irAij/Oijs

ttXovo-ios, a.irXrfrro'i.
eXXtirrjs,

irevqi, kevos,

evSeqs,

JjrioViys,

yv/xvos,

^tAds, Kadapos.
Separation,
eprjp.os,

6p<f>av6s,

eXevdepos, ayvos (pure from),

cj>ei8<j>\6s

(sparing of).
(Ivijtos

Value,

ri/uos,

aios,

(pv/rchaseable)

&paios,

ripe for

(Xen. Cyr.

iv. 6. 9).
:

Comparative
notion
than,

ZyKpaTrjs, aK/oanjs,

aKparup Kvpws, avroKpdrmp.

8id<j)opos, 8ia<pep6vTtas.
fiecrov,

aAAos, dAAoibs, erepos,

p,e(ros (e.g.

Better, stronger

eVos Kal irXr/dovs to dAtyov

and

the

reverse,

303, A), Ivairtbs nvds, tfAs reverse of a thing ; Ivavrfos nvi, opposed to a
Politicus,
thing.

PLAT.

Different from,.

generally,

Connexion some

vTrevdvvos (responsible for

nvi, responsible
liable
to

to

a thing, but virevdwos a person) ; vTroTeXyjs (<popov,

eiriKovpos, assisting
if/vxovs,
(e.g.

pay a

tribute);

or

serviceable

against

cold);

Tv<f>\bs (tov [iXXovtos, blind with regard to the

future)

; o-vyyvwpatv (ap.a.pTr)p.a.Tb>v, forgiving of wrongs); KaKovpyos (eawov), inflicting wrongs on; faXoSaipos (fond of giving).

Ending in

-kos,

irpaKTiKos, Trapaa-KeuacmKds, SiSaa-KaXiKos, n-opto-tikos, k(iiXvtik6s (rijs dperijs).

All words compounded with a

diratfijs,

d'Scopos,

dvr/Koos,
;

aQkaTOS,
dreX-js

ayvfivao-ros,

ao-Ktvos

(wnfurnished)

(immunis)

art/ios, etc. etc.

Others have been given under previous Rules.

Digitized

by Microsoft

104

THE CASES.

113. Free use of the Genitive with Substantives.

are given to show how the Genitive lends Some may be regarded as the loosest connexion. free Objective Genitives, some as Genitives of Separation, others can only be regarded as Genitives of Connexion.
itself to

A few instances

irposjSoAij StKeXtas,

road

to Sicily ;

SIkcu

Thuc. iv. 1, means of approaching Sicily, ttoWuv raXavrwv, a lawsuit involving many

Spu>p.ev(ov, Soph. talents (cf. Genitive of amount) ; /cpai-os El. 85, victory in our enterprise; Trarpbs Xovrpd, Soph. El. 84, libations in memory of a father ; ap>;ts Tvqp,a.Tu>v, Soph. El. 875,

tw

help in or against troubles

El. 811,

(cf. eiriKovpos) ; irarpos ti/jw/dos, Soph. an avenger whom a father has (Subjective), an avenger of a father (Objective) ; at rav kokui' o-wovo-iai, intercourse with

bad men (freely Objective) ; /?ta ttoXltZv, in spite of citizens (freely Objective) ; aVoorao-ts t5v 'Adijvadav, revolt from the Athenians (separation) ; Xvcris 6a.va.rov, deliverance from death
(separation); accustomed to
iJ0<xs
(cf.

fivduv,

Soph. El. 372,

schooled

to

words,

hritnr\p.<i>v,

etc.); r\o-vyia lyQpwv, rest

from
7.

enemies (freely Separative) ; dtpopfirj epyoiv, means of setting about, or stimulus to, deeds.

Xen. Mem.

ii.

11,

THE DATIVE

CASE.

Preliminary Note on the Dative.

114- The Dative denotes generally the person or thing more remotely connected with the action than is the AccusaIt thus denotes that to which the direct object is made tive. over or transferred (Dative of the Remoter Object) after verbs and adjectives which seem necessarily to require such a case in order to complete the information they have to give {e.g. 8iSu>p.i p.urdbv t a-TpaTLiory. By a natural extension the

Dative also denotes the person or thing, affected beneficially or injuriously, interested in the action (Dative of Interest), and can be added at pleasure to any verb whose meaning does not necessarily demand it (e.g. oi Kaipol irpoeivrai rrj n-dAa, our
opportunities have been let slip, to the injury of the state). Dative of Interest includes the Dative of the Possessor,

The
and

Next to the Dative of Interest, as akin to the Ethic Dative. it in sense, although probably the use of the case has beeD Digitized by Microsoft


DATIVE OF COMMUNITY.
105

transferred from the old Instrumental, may be placed the Dative expressing Contact with or Community, one of the most important and extensive rules belonging to the case. Further, the Dative has inherited the meanings of two lost cases, first the Instrumental, including not only the Instrument and Means, but also the Agent, Cause, Measure of Difference, and the accompanying Circumstances secondly, the Locative in its double reference to Place and Time. The Dative of Place, however, is used as a rule only in Poetry ; in Prose, to express motion to, not the Dative, but a preposition with the Accusa;

tive, is required.

115.

THE DATIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT TO WHOM ANYTHING IS SAID, DONE,

OR GIVEN.
ficopia BiBcoatv avOpanroii icana.

rj

MENANDER.

Folly bringeth troubles on men.

rj

yeyevrjfievT]

The

battle

XEN. pa^r) too fiaaiXel ayyeWerai. which had taken place is reported to the

king.

He gives pay
With

SiSmcn fucrdov rm ffTparevfian. to the army.

a substantive

Xen.

fir) egafidprriTe Trepl tt)v tov Qeov 860-iv vjj.iv. regard Lest you commit some great error

PL. Apol.
to

xviii.

the gift of the

god

to

you.

Il6. Miscellaneous examples showing certain verbs which in Greek take a Dative of the Kemoter Object.
oAtyapyta
tcjv klvSvviov rots 7roAAots fieTaoiowcri.

Thuc.
Oligarchy gives a share of
its

vi. 39.

dangers

to the

many.

Siave/xiu )(pr)fj.aTa Tots TroAtrais.

I distribute money among

the citizens.

SiaXXda-a-ei ILepBiKKav rots ' kd-qvawis.

Cf.

THUC.

ii.

95.

He

reconciles Perdiccas with (to) the Athenians. Digitized by Microsoft

io6

THE CASES.
Aayxavto
SiKtjv (eyK\r][m) Ar/pAxrOevei.

I bring a

lawsuit (accusation) against Demosthenes.

Demostheni litem intendo.

/ shall

Axipovri, wfifavo-w. Soph. Ai. 816. mairry Acheron. (Cf nuio in Latin.)
.

<rv 8' cik'

avayK-Q koX deoi(ri pvq p.d)(ov.

to necessity,

ECJRIP. Tel. Frag.

the gods.

Yield thou
Cf.

and war not with

Soph.
out

Ant

718.

ukciv nvl

tijs 6Sov.

To

get
to

of the anybody).

Herod, ii. 80. way for anybody

(or

to

yield the

way

117.

THE DATIVE OF INTEREST, INCLUDING THE DATIVE OF THE POSSESSOR, ETHIC DATIVE,
etc.

The Dative
modi).

of Interest denotes the person or thing

interested in the action

(Dativus

commodi

et incom-

7ra? avt\p avra> irovel.

SOPH.

Every

man

labours for himself.

[uaa> aofaoTriv oaTt?

ov% avra>
is

cro^os.

MeNANDEE.

I hate

a wise

man who

not wise for himself.

19. 8.

Kaupol wpoeivrai rrj irokei.

DEM.

Opportunities have been sacrificed, to the injury of the state.

Good instances occur in Soph. Meet. 66 (!xfy>ofs), 496 (ijA"v), 979 (!x0/w), Antig. 618 (8d), Dem. 18. 205 (t$ warpC).

Il8.
Kairot
o"

Free Use of the Dative of Interest.

eycu 'rip/qva Tots (ppovovcriv cS.

Soph. Ant. 904

(cf.

25).

And yet I did honour thee in the judgment

crxeSov

of the right-minded.

Belike

n pdpw I incur

^^g^Jr^he

[MOptav o<ATKava>.

SOPH. Ant. 470. eyes of a fool.

DATIVE OF INTEREST.
cr<t>(pv fxev

107

evToXrj Aios
12.
the hest of

X'

"Aos

Srj.

AESCH. P. V.
so
here.

For you

(i.e.

far as you are concerned)

v/juv irdXat.

Zeus

hath ending
ovftiv tlfiL kou

tWvtix'

SOPH.

Phil. 1030.

Naught am
(i.e.

I,

dead

to

you long

since.

you thought me dead.)

v7roXaft,/3dveiv Set

tQ toiovtq
rrj

oti

ei!i}6tys

We
Ee

must assume in

the case of such

rrt. PLAT. a person that he is simple.

kayxdvei tou KXrjpov

yvvaiKi.

ISAEUS,

3.

32.

claims the inheritance

m behalf of the woman.

virep tjJs
ii.

The usual construction would be

<rre(f>avovcr6ai

ywoMtos.

To

he

t$ 6e<j>. XEN. Ages. crowned in honour of the god.

<roi,

15.

So

Ktipea-OaC

to

he

shorn in honour of

thee,

Eueip.

Hip. 1425.
Note. Several idioms

with participles should be noticed

ijv

T$
'

TrX-qOei

tZv

IIA.aTcua)v ov /3ovXop.ev(i>

t(ov 'A6rjval(av

d^io-Tao-^ai.
to

The Plataean democracy did not wish

Athenians.

THUC. ii. 3. revolt from the

erat.

Cf TAC. Agr.

18, quibus volentibus

bellum

fiiiepai u,d\uTTa fjcrav rfj M.iTvX-qvr) eaXiDKViq. ore, K.r.X.

Thxjc.

iii.

29.
etc.

Seven days had passed since the capture of Mitylene when,

See Temporal Sentences, 211.

rep

owe ayav Oepphv fjv. Thtjc. To the outward touch the body was not very hot.

plv eo>dev

cwtto/mixj) <ru>[ia

ii.

49.

'EjrtSa/tivos cart ttoAis ev Set eo-TrXeovn

rbv 'loviov koXttov.

Thuc. Epidamnus So
is

i.

24.

a town on your right as you enter

threw, or

the Ionic Gulf.

to

(TvveXovri (o-wtejuvovti)

simply o-weXovTi,

speak shortly, concisely, in

brief, in short

Digitized

by Microsoft


io8

THE

CASES.

119.

THE DATIVE OF THE POSSESSOR.

elfil, ylryvofiai,
tj/miv.

Especially with

inrdpxp).

wye? ovk eiaiv

We

have no ships.
[lev

aXXois

yp^aTa
THUC.

eart TroXKa, r]fuv Se ^vfifiaypi

dyaOoi.

Some have plenty of money, hut we have good

oiiSev lp.01

allies.

kcu <&t,\nnr<p.
to

Philip
Tt efiol

and I have nothing

Kal uoi;
have

do with each
?

other.

What
120.

I to

do with thee

What have we

in

common

THE ETHIC DATIVE, DENOTING THE PERSON WHOSE FEELINGS SYMPATHISE WITH THE ACTION.
reicvov,
rj

o)

ftefirjicev rjfuv
(tell

6 %evo<;

SOPH.
?

My child,
Remember,
7r<3s rj/juv

say

me), is the stranger departed

/u6/ivijo-0e fioi

/jlyj

6opv/3eiv.

PLAT. Apol. XV.

I pray

you, not to interrupt.

How

?X ' S > are you ?

;

ey<b a-ionrZ rtgSe

What,
[irj fx.01

I hold my

Ar. Batr. 456. tongue at this fellow's bidding

So, elliptically

DEM. iv. 19. me of ten thousand mercenaries. Sometimes a mere interjection expresses the Ethic
fivpiovs evow.
to

Talk not

dative,

e.g.

Soph.

Elect.

272,

v\p.iv,fie

on'tl

THE DATIVE OF COMMUNITY OR CONTACT

WITH.
121. The Dative of Community or Contact with is words (Verbs, Adjectives, and Adverbs) which denote
likeness or wnlikeness ;

agreement or disagreement ; meeting,

by Microsoft

encountering, following.
Digitized

DATIVE OF COMMUNITY.
A. With
kclkoIs

109

Verbs.
K^t\o-t) ica/cos-

bpChwv KavTO<s If thou associate with

out had.

MeNAND.

the lad, thyself too wilt turn

em payzaQab
ovk

Setvov eari

'Tis terrible to fight with

teal Tv^rj. MENAND. Ood and Fortune.

He

e<j>r) ra epya to?s Xoyois 6/*oA.oyii'. THU.C. V. 55. said that their deeds did not correspond with their words.

ovk alo~xfi6v
It is not

Ictti rots irovrjpois Si-acfrepeo-dat.

Xen. Mem.
wrong
to

ii.

9. 8.

quarrel with (differ from) bad men.

Contrast the use of

8ia<f>epo>

with a Genitive.
PLAT. Ap.
iv. (cf. xviii., Iv-

ervxov irpoa-eXdutv KaAAip.

rvyyavui).

I chanced So

to

meet Callias.

irpocrrv\ya.v(o, iVTvy\avia, diravTto, irpoo-icpovaj, tlvi.

Tip 'AXKifiidSr} Ttves S

Xoyovs ^XBov.

THUC.

viii.

48.

Certain persons had a conference with Alcibiades.

So

SiaX.eyojj.ai tivi.

/3ov\ear8(o

eueXms

o/iocre ytopTJo-at. tois Ivairtois.

THUC.
Let him with good heart resolve
Cf.
p.d)(op,a.t, t iro\ep.(o tivi.

iv. 10.

to close

with the foe.

Xpfj eirecr&ai

T<j>

vojMi).

THUC.

ii.

35.

One must follow

the custom.

B. With Adjectives.
6 dya6o<s

rm ayadw

<t\o?.
to the

PLAT. good man.

The good

man

is

dear

togs Tvpdvvoi? ael Sicupopoi ea/xev. We are ever hostile to tyrants.

dv6pmiroi,<;

THUC.

ftXafiepbv fiev

iJret/So?,

^jOJjfft/to?

S aei

aXrideia.

To men falsehood

is injurious,

truth

is

ever useful.

no
Note
a.
1.

THE

CASES.

Constructions of 6 avros, idem:

<j>povel

TOVTO TO.VTOV ( to avro) koriv This is the same as that.

tKeiv(p.

Hoe idem
to.

est

quod

illud.

avra

<j>povS) Arj/jioo-deveb

(really

= ois

A.)
18. 30.

Dem.

I hold
b.

the

same opinions as Demosthenes. same as

ravTa

5rao"^ets airep Kal yu>.

You
This
is

experience the

I do.

a very

common

construction of 6 avros in Demosthenes.

el tii 8iur)(yp[oiTO TO) avT( \6y<$ Sxrirep crv.

If any one were to affirm positively (with) as you (that you make).
C.

Plat. Phaedr. xxxvi. the same statement

BovSTvoi 81 ov

rrj

airy

yA.coo-0-17

xpeiovxcu Kal TeXiovoL

Hekod.
The Budini do not use
Cf. the

iv.

109.

idem atgue (ac) in Latin. struction in Attic.

same speech as the Geloni. This is not so common a conciutos.

Brachylogy
(oVav)

is

very frequent in the construction of 6

ccr&j/iaTa

elcrbSb) 8'

<j>opovvr' CKetvft)

ram =
(

S.Trep

Kal IkeEvos

c<f>epe).

Soph.

Elect. 269.

Whene'er I behold hkn wearing the self-same robes as dead father (as those of my father).

my

Note

2.

i'cros,

irapaTrX-quio'i,

6/totos

have the same construc-

tions as o aTJTOS.

ov Kal

crv tvttth ras i'cras irX-qya^ ep.01; An. Ban. 636. Shan't you be beaten with the same number of blows as I?

122.

DATIVE OF THE INSTRUMENT, INCLUDING MEANS, AGENT, CAUSE, MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE.

in expressing these

The Dative
work

meanings has inherited the

or Means.

of the lost instrumental case.

A. Instrument

Xprjo-ros irovr]pol<; ov TiTpacrKeTcu \dy015.

MENAND,

good

man

is not wounded by bad Digitized by Microsoft

words.

DATIVE OF THE AGENT.

efiaWov avTovf Tu0oi<; re k<u roj-evfiacrt km ukovtior. THUC. They were attaching them with stones, and arrows, and
javelins.
6cr0 br<p

av tSots

r\

ocj)da\fi.oi<;

PLAT.

Is there anything you would

Note. xp<fy")

see

with but eyes

I use

(and sometimes vo/ufw in the same sense)

takes this dative.

(Cf. utor in Latin.)

Xp&S/iou dpyvphp, /8t/8A.tois, etc.

I use
lit. i"

silver, books, etc.

get service done (with), or,

I employ

myself (with).
ii.

dyoxri

ko.1 dvo-iaii vop,iopxv.

THUC.

38.

We use festivals

and

sacrifices.

Cf. d/it/3tav fiatpfj, a dat. of instrument, Aesch. Pers. 319. (per vim); dvdyKy, do., are instrumental datives. j8ft by force

B. Agent

(cf. vtto

with Gen.).

The Dative denoting the Agent is used in Prose chiefly with In Homer the same case the perfect and pluperfect passive. may refer both to things (Instrument) and persons (Agent). (Compare II. iii 428 with 436, and see Peile, Primer of In Attic, however, the so-called Dative of the Philology.) Agent oftener appears to be a Dative of Interest.
ravra
ct7TOTeTeA.rrcu croi.

XEN.
THUC.
by the Corinthians (Ifor).
(o-oi)
-.

Those things have been finished by you (tfor you).

rei8i) rrapecrKevacTTo KopivOiois.

When preparations had

Cf.

been

made

Thtjc

iii.

64

(EXXtjo-i).

Eur. Hec. 1085

be beaten by

Dem. 844
used as

1. (tovt(j>).

ficro-ao-dat,

vucao-Oal nvi,

to

any

one, are

well as

rjcrcracrdai,

viKOdOai twos, or

vtto tivos.

Verbals in -reos regularly take a Dative of the Agent

(see Participles).
Digitized

by Microsoft

112

THE CASES.
(This may, in

C. Cause.

some

cases,

be a Dative of

Circumstance.)
evrrpayiat,*;

ovk

e%v/3pio[iev.

ThUO.

We

do not break out into insolence in consequence of

prosperity.

ovk
hvo-Ovfio's.

elfil

Tots ireirpaypivoii

Soph. El. 549.

because of

Cf.

I am not despondent Thuo. i. 95, 2x0-

what has happened.

So (piXti}, through friendship ; evvola,, through goodwill (voluntate) ; ayvoia,, through ignorance ; t&> pio-eTv, through hatred (Dem.
45. 30)
;

and

4>va-ei,
<f>vcreL

naturally.

avdpunto's

itoXitikov (oov.

ARIST. Eth.
life.

Man

is

by nature

creature adapted to social

The Dative

of

Cause

is

joined to

many

verbs express-

ing Emotion (axdopai, / am vexed; xa-^aLvco, I am vexed; ddvpw, I am despondent; r/Sopai, 1 am pleased; ayaAAojuai, 1 emit; In-aipo/wu, I am elated; aio-xvvopai, I am ashamed (also with Accus.), o-repyia, ayaTrw, I am content). Cf. kirl with the Dative after such verbs.
o Oeos epyois Tots Sucaiois ^Berat.

Philemon.

God

is

pleased with righteous deeds.

tt) drifila.

AviravSpos ^apecof ejtepe

,

Xen.

Lysander was offended at the

rots crots a^eo-i KaOvfipifav.

affront.

SOPH. Ai. 153.

Mocking at thy
lira.ip6p.evos
7}

woes.
>)

ttXovtu)

ictxvi

17

a\\<i>

Elated either by wealth or strength,

t toiovtu). Plat. Rep. iv. 434. or some other such ad

So

xaWus

<j>epeiv.

Both phrases
Digitized

also take the Accus.

Med. 1018).
by Microsoft

(Eur v

DATIVE OF CIRCUMSTANCE.
D. Measwre of Difference,
One man
head
is taller

113

especially with Comparatives.

erepo? irepov K6(pa\rj pLeifyov eari.

PLAT.
(i.e.

than another by a head

is

taller).
ttjs ev

SeKa ervri irpo

Ten years

before the

^aXaptvi vavpaxlas, etc. Plat. Leg. 698. sea-fight at Salamis (before by ten years).

TCHTOVTtp rfiiov f5 ocra) paXXov KeKTrjpai. XEN. Cyr. viii. 3. 40. possess, i.e. by so much live the more pleasantly the more

I
So

the

more pleasantly.
oAtyft),
piKpiji,

7roAA<j),

panpiji

(peifcv,

fikXriov,

etc.).

neuter accusative

is also

ttoXv, dAiyov, oijScv, parative and Superlative.

used with comparatives, especially p-qBev (fp-rov, paXXov, etc.). See Com-

123.

THE DATIVE OF CIRCUMSTANCE.

The Dative expresses the accompanying circumstances.

The Dative has taken on the meaning of the lost Sociative or Comitative Instrumental Case. In mentioning details of military or naval forces this Dative constantly used ; e.g. eiKoari vavo-i, 7roA,A$ o-TanvpaTi, is
o-toAo), etc.

ecf>o/3ovvTO

fir)

(ieioiu irapao-Kevrj eirikQcaaiv.

ThuO.

They were afraid that they would come against them with a greater force.
oi 'A6r)vaioi

dreXei ry

vikt) avea-rrjcrav.

Tnuo.

The Athenians

retired with the victory incomplete,

SOPH. Ai. 474. KaKOuriv oorts pr]8ev e^aXXdcrcreTai. respect of ills. Whoso Jcnoweth no change

cktos e AiTaXlas Soph. El. 705 (see 1343). ^avQatvi irdXois. sixth out of Aetolia

with bright bay mares.

Cf.

Soph. Antig. 589

(irvoais). Digitized by Microsoft

U4
Note
1.

THE
The
and which

CASES.

construction,
e.g.

preposition which would be used in such a is sometimes used, is o-vv.

(TrXeov vv iravrl
2.

tw

(TTparevfiaTi.

ThTJC.

VI. 62.

Note

Many

adverbial Datives are thus used: Spofiy, at

full speed ; kvk\<p,

round about ;

criyjj, silently
181.$,

tovtw t$

t/o6V<j>,

in this way, thus ; S^oo-i'p, publicly ;

foot ; toot), thus ; y, in which

privately ;

7reij,

on

way

; t< ovti, in reality.

perd with Genitive,

(for the

a-vv
:

synonymous expressions

with Dative, or adverbs proper, are o-w oIk-q, /xera Siktjs, Si/caiajs e.g.
foots,

Dative of Circumstance).

In Soph. Ai. 767, 6eol<s=o-vv In Pl. Apol. xv. iv t dadoTi

Note
is 3.

deo favente.
in

Tpoiro),

my

usual way.

The use

of avTos

with the Dative of Circumstance

specially to be noticed.
p,iav

They captured one

vavv \af3ov avTois dvSpda-i. THTJC. ship, with the men themselves (crew and

all).

avTois itoipwltov rtOTaTcus.

SOPH. At. 27.

Together with the masters of the flocks.

Cf.

Eur. Bacch. 946, 1134.

o-vv

and

ap,a are rarely used.

to)

eiWro

Ao^ay^ vv avrZ tQ

6u>pa.Ki ko.\ rfj kottlSl.

Xen.

Gyr.

ii.

2. 9.
bill.

He
So

was following

the captain with breastplate

and with

afia,

Soph. Antig. 115.

124.

DATIVE OF TIME AND PLACE.

Locative, denotes

The Dative, as representing the defunct Time when and Place where.

A. Time. The Dative denotes a definite point of time when something occurs, in certain phrases without the
Preposition
It is
ev.

used chiefly of day, night, month, year, and

festivals.

T^Se

T7) rjfiepa

= a-^fiepov, rrifiepov, on this day, to-day.

by Microsoft

Trjhe TJJ

wart, cnreOavev, he died to-night.

Digitized

DATIVE OF TIME AND PLACE.

rrj

115

Trporepaia,

the

day

before.

(So

ri)

vurepaiq,

irporepq, Sevrepq.)
01 ev
Idcofir)

TeTapT<p erei ^vvefirjaav,

THUC.

The
new

(Helots) in

Ithome surrendered in the fourth year.

TpayuSois Kcuvofs, Dem. 243. 17, at the representation of the tragedies ; aOXouri HvdiKoi<ri, at the Pythian games, Soph.

El. 49.

So

Qe(Tpo<j>oplois, rots 'EmviKiois,

Aiovucrtots, Ilava-

dr/vaiois, etc.

of

So in reckonings of the month 'ivy kcu vegi, on the last day the month (see Lexicon) ; Bo^Spo/uGvos p-qvos Terdpry
:

unapevov, on the fourth day of the first decade of Boedromion.

prose instance of this Dative of Evag. 66.

Time

occurs in Isocr.

Ttva evprjaropev rZv Tots TpauKots xpovois yevopeviov

Whom
oiKTpa.

shall

we find of those who were born

in the Trojan age

A poetical A

one in Soph. El. 193.

woe on

pev vocttois aiSd.

the return.

voice of

Note. As a rule ev is added with other expressions, though sometimes it is omitted. Sometimes ev is found with the above expressions, except in names of festivals. 'Ev is more likely to be omitted when an adjective is used, e.g. kv wkti, but ply. wkti. In Thucydides ev is sometimes omitted where we should have expected it, e.g. ene'ivy rfj eo-fioXy, Thuc. ii.

So ry irpoTepp irapovalq., Thuc. i. 128, 20, in this invasion. during his first stay ; iy irporepg. (IkkAijo-^), Thuc. i. 44, at the former meeting of the assembly.
Xpowp, in time, or at last; Kcup$, in season,

= es Kaipov,
ev
;

(Iv

extremely rare) men in the prime of life.

KaipS
is

xelf1 vo s <"W without

'

01 ev wpp,

B.

Place.

This use of the Dative without the Pre-

position ev

is poetical.

en peyas ovpavQ
Still is

Zeis.

SOPH. El. 174.

Zeus

gretfA^epgerfa^^

n6

THE CASES.

Prose writers, however, use this case with names of towns.

MapadSvi kou

'ZaXap.ivi Kal IIAaTaiais.

PLAT.

At Marathon, and Salamis, and Plataeae.

N.B.M.apa6(ovi and

'ZaXap.lvi are real Locatives.

So

'

A.drjvqu-1, Qrjf3rjo-i, 'OXv/XTriacri, IIXaTaiao-t.

Veritable Locatives are ocoi, at home (domi) ; xa l 'h on ground (humi) ; aypouri, in the country (ruri) ; 6vpa.<n, at the door (foris) ; tlvdot, at Pytho ; 'lo-dpoi, at the Isthmus. These are all, except aypoio-i, used in Prose. In Prose
aypois.

125.

Lists of

Words which
Verbs.

take a Dative.

1.

Verbs of
tell.

telling,

promising, advising.

<t>Wh sayXkyu>,

vapaivS,

)
j

<Tvp.f3ovXevu>,

gMse

dyyeXXoi, report.
p.rjvv(o,

{nroj3dXX<o, dictate.

inform.

tm-<m0e/jai, suggest.
inruTxvovfiai., promise.

They take an Accusative

n-apaLvZ,

of the nearer object,

e.g.

ravTa, aoi

I give

you

this advice.

Obs. KeXevoi
2.

o- ikvai,

I
by,

bid you go, Aceus.

and

Inlin.

Verbs of

obeying, trusting,

and

the contrary.

Treidop.ai., be

persuaded

com-

airta-rui, disbelieve.

ply.
irujTevw, trust (also intrust).
a,irei8!i>,

viraKovm, serve (and genitive).

Xa.Tpeva>, serve iOeois).

disobey.

Obs.

ireidov p.01, be

persuaded by me, hearken

to

me ;

iridov fioi,

obey me.
3.

Verbs

of helping
)

and

hindering.
virrjpeTw, serve,

aixvvta (in Act.),

apr/yo) (poet.),

\help.

xapiop.ai, gratify.
efiirobwv tivai,

twiKovpa, help.
Tip.o>pu> (in

Act.), avenge.

Por

dfivvo/j.a.1

and tttnopoCuai see Middle

Digitized

Voice.

by Microsoft

WORDS WHICH TAKE A DATIVE.

4.

117

Verbs of
\ J

being angry with, blaming, threatening.

or
eTriTifiia,

dyava.KT<o,

censure.
revile.

a^dofiai,

koiSopovfuu,
/j,e/j.(j>opAj.i,

opytgo/xai, angry.

blame.

XaAeircuVto, angry, annoyed.

4>dov5>, envy.
fia.pea><s

eyKaXS, charge,
einjpedfyo,

accuse.

<pep<o (aegre, graviter,

<t>ipu,

threaten abusively, or

XaAe7rws

fero),

I am

treat despitefully.

indignant, annoyed, vexed.

N.B.

AoiSopu Act.

takes the Accus.

pApxpopal tivi, or rt tivi {rlva or rtVos), person or thing.

fiurw, hate,
5.

com/plain of a

takes the Accus.

Verbs.
Xva-ireXei pot,
it is

The Impersonal
pot.,

Sonet
(8oku>

mihi videtur. poi, mihi videor.)

pot,

profitable for

me.
pereo-Tt

ov pot Sokw,
irpiirei

I think me decet.

not.

pot tovt(0v,

have a

concerns me. ovSev pot wpoa-rjKn., nihil ad me

irpoa-rjKti pot, it

share of this. peXet pot dptrrjs,

virtue.

care for

Set

pot tivos, opus mihi est aliqua re, but Set pe eXOetv.
6.

peTapeXet pot tovtuv, I repent of this, poenitet me huius rei.

Likeness or unUkeness.

eoiKa,
laS>,

(impers. eotKe),

am

like.

a-vvaXXdcrcrO) tovtov
concile this

o-oi,

I re-

make equal. 0/xoi.l), make like.

7.

man to or with you.

Agreement, disagreement.
dispute.
TroXepS), at

dfi<j>io-/3r]T<j>,

war

with.

aTre^ddvopat,

am

odious

to,

o-Tacrid^<a, revolt,

hated

by.

politically.

eva.VTiovp.ai, oppose.

o-vpcpavlo, agree with (opp.

Sta<f>(av).

to to

eirtTtdepat, attack.

eplfa, quarrel with. opoXoyZ, agree with.

arvvaSo),

agree

with

(opp.

SlJlSw).

pd)(opat, fight.

Like iroXepZ,
Is

81a,

iroXepov levai

tivi, to

be at

war with one;

x e 'P as

eXdelv, or 6p6o-e

^lopetv ,tivi, to come to blows, close

quarters, with one.

dpst>io-fSi)T<a 0-01

TOBiffdembf' Mifijftli&fffith you about the food.

n8
8.

THE
Meeting, following.

CASES.

aKoXovdw,
eVo/tat,

I follow. / follow (also

TLViov).

(rvv tivi,

knock wp against. SiaXeyo/mi, converse with.

n-poo-Kpovo),

and perd
d-n-avTui,

ofiiXZ, associate with.

across,
7rp6o-ei/M,

meet with, come ivrvyxavu, iiwd with,

across.

approach.
with.

come

crvveip.1, associate

TrposTvyxdvia, meet with, come

across.

advance against. TrapardtrcropMi, stand beside in

kwkp\op,a.i,
battle.

9. Many verbs compounded with Prepositions, especially with hri, irpos, <riv, irepi, chiefly denoting contact. Some have already been given.

avi-exa),

hold out against.

dispute with.

dp,<f>uT/3r]T(0,

irapaf3d\\a>, set beside, compare (also Tt irapd, or w/ods ti).

irapa.TdTTop.ai, stand beside in
battle.

Sta/cei/mi
<iAik<3s TtVl

(or

irpos

am friendly disposed.

TrepidirTia,

fasten round.

riva) or
&La.Ti8ef>,a<,

n-epij3d\\op.ai, throw round, cir-

or

Trpos<j>epop,at,

cumfundere, circumdare, e.g. t vrjo-tp ret^os, or vfj<rov

TCi)(ei.

ep,/3d\\w, throw in.

ip.p,iv(j>,

abide by.

irepiTidr)p,i,
irepiirtTTTta,

place round.
before,
e.g.

Jproiai, introduce, produce,

iirdyta,

fall round or on.

t<

lead in.

irp6seip.i,

come

emo-Tpa,T<Eva>,
7riTciTT(o,

make war

on.

S^p,tj),

address the assembly.

tivi
assist

impose,

a~vyxaip(o, rejoice with.

bring up or against irpos^dXXm, put, apply to.

tirifyipu,
irpos<pep<a,
j.'

tTvWajxfSdvto

tivos,

(ti,

or

ts ti)

any one in

t
J

apply x J

anything.
to.

a-vvoiSa,

am

conscious;

epavTty

vvrj8eiv

ovStv eirurTauivo)

(or iTrio-ra/ievos)

I was

conscious that

I knew

nothing for certain.

Pl. Apol.
gwio-aai, MeX-JTCj)
tl/evSop.ev(f,

speaking falsely

(i.e.

they

know

they are aware that Meletus is as well as he knows). lb.

Digitized

by Microsoft

WORDS WHICH TAKE A DATIVE.

126. And
their cognate

119

Adjectives.

Adverbs and Substantives,

and

e.g.

/Gcnjtfos,

/3or)0eia, Trpeirov, Trpe-irovrtas.

Useful,

fit,

becoming, friendly,

ike,

near,

their contraries.

a8eA<ds (and Gen.),

d.KoX.ovOo's

akm

or

koivos (and Gen.), common.

6'/iotos, like.

answering to. (and Gen.), following after, agreeing with. oAAot/hos (and Gen.), foreign, or different. dvTto-Tpo^os (and Gen.), corresponding. 6 avTos, the same.
Std<j>opos
6/*/m>vos,

dvo/toios, unlike.
6/ttoviyjos

(and Gen.), called by

the

same name.

TrapairX.rjO'ios, similar.

71-iowos, relying on, fretus.

ottuttos,

not

to

be

trusted,

or

not trusting.
Trpos<f>iX.rjs, beloved.

(and Gen.), different. abiding by.

TroAiyiuos, hostile,
o-vp.jji.axo'i,

efupvros, im/planted.
en-iTrjSews, suitable.

in alliance, friendly.

<rvu(j>opo<s, \

exfyjos, hostile.
eiivovs, well-disposed.

&vp.<f>epov, 'J:
ao~6p.<l)opos,

inexpedient.

Sva-vovs, ill-disposed.
t'Sios

Xa.Aros, difficult, unfavourable,

(and Gen.), private, perequal,

iniquus.
X/)>)o-Tds,
1
'

ib-os,

Xpri<rifi.os,

j
1
i
'

avuros, unequal.
la-oppoTTos

axpijo-ros,

(and Gen.), equally

axpdos,

matched.
Obs. Several take also a

Genitive (especially those denoting

sometimes with a slight difference of meaning, Compare par, for which the Lexicon should be consulted
correspondency)
prqprius, sknilis, alienus, etc. in Latin.

Adverbs.
afia, generally

temporal.

Aot/ios ap,a irokkp^, pestilence at the

ojiov, local.
I<ei}s,

iiSmp op.ov t<$ Trqty, water

ra tovtois cijbe^jjs, eyyw, Dat and Gen. ; see Lexicon.

Digitized

same time as war. and mud what comes next to this.

together.

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE
127.

V.

COMPAEATIVE AND STJPEELATIVE.

is

The Comparative

followed by

A.

Genitive

7/eot?

to avyav /cpeirrov ecrrt rov \a\etv.

Menan.DER.

Silence is better for

young folk than

speech.

B.

By^:KpetTTOv aiwirav e&Tiv

\]

\a\eiv

fiarrjv.

MENANDEK.

'Tis better to keep silence than talk idly.

57700s,

Instead of rj the prepositions dvrl, irpo (with Genitive), or irapd (with Accusative), sometimes.
avri,
7Tp6,
jt/oos,

Soph. Antig. 182. Plat. Grit. 54, b.

Thuc.

iii.

37. 1

irapd,

Thuc. i
17

23. 3.

wkeov, e\a.TTov, pdov, minus, in Latin).

may omit the

(like phis, amplius,

dweOavov 6\iy($ eXducrovs irtVTrJKOVTa. There fell rather less than fifty.
of difference, iroXv may be used. dpcivwv or iroXv aptivutv, far, much

THUC.

i.

44. 5.

Instead of ttoWuS with a Comparative marking the measure Thus we may say noWy
better.

Note 1. The Comparative is constantly used, without the other object compared, to denote a degree too high or too low, a considerable degree or a degree greater or less than usual (very, rather, somewhat) ; not seldom it is used as a matter of idiom, where the Positive would be more natural
eX6e /ueAos dypoiKorepov ais epe \a/3ovcra. AEtlST. Ach. 675. Hie thee (Muse), and bring to me a right rural melody
(dypoiKorepov, countrified).
120

Digitized

by Microsoft

COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE.

/ietfoo-tv i-pyois
a-iv.

121

rixeipowTes ov [uKpots
iv. 2. 35.

kclkois irepiiriirrov-

Xen. Mem.
<3

By

attempting tasks too great they encounter no slight troubles.

StoKpares, yeyovev
;

tC veunepov,

PLAT.
1

What new
ov xelpov

thing has happened, Socrates

Tro\\.<XKis aKoveiv.

PLAT. Phaed. 105.

It is no bad thing to hear often.

Note 2. To denote too high or too low a degree, rj Kara is used with the Accusative, or r) cos, rj <3crre with the Infinitive.
(Cf. Latin,
ctSe

quam pro, quam

r)

ut,

quam

qui.)

veKpbv peifo

Kar' avdponrov.

PLAT. Rep. 360.

He saw a

corpse of

superhuman
peifa
77

size.

01 'Adrjvaioi. iv 'SiKeXiq.

Kara SaKpva

eireirovdecrav.

Thuc.
The Athenians
for
tears.
fir)

vii. 75.

Sicily

had endured

sufferings too great

pof3ovp:ai

Tt [ieTov

fj

&o-re <f>epew Bvvao-8ai

vp,f$rj.
iii.

Xen. Ap.

5. 17.

I fear
The

that

some

evil, too

great for us to be able to bear,

may

happen.

See Eur. Bacch. 840.

is

Positive

sometimes so used with

<3ore.

to vS<op \j/vypbv wore Xovo-ao-dai ecmv.

XEN. Ap.

iii.

13. 3.

The water
Cf.

is too cold for bathing.

THUC.

ii.

61. 2

eyKaprepeiv, without &o-re.

is

Note 3. fiaXXov rj (for which irXkov used after a Comparative.

alpertoTepov arroOvqcrKav
It is

ri

may

be substituted)

paXXov

rj

<f>evyeiv.

Xen,
more
desirable to die than to

Cyr.

iii.

3.

51.

run away.

BUi t6 xXebv fj <tAtp. Thuc. iii 12. Through fear more than friendship.

So with a
rnvrtrri

Positive.
rj

'AdnvaiZv

Swa/us uaXXov

ii

ooKeta.

Thuc. L 121.
The power ofthe^hggfic^^^jh^sed rather than

2.

their own.

122

COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE.

Note 4. Two adjectives or adverbs compared with each other may both be in Comparative.
Ttjv elprjvrjv

avayKaioripav

r]

KaXXiw

inre\dfj.{3a.vov eivai.

Aesohin.
They were regarding
honourable.
the peace

iii.

69.

as inevitable rather than

So

o-vvTOjidnepov

rf

o-a<f>eo-repov, cwrtly

rather than clearly.

Is. 6. 24.

ii)

o-rpaT-qyol TrXeioves

rj

fSeXrioves.

ArIST. Ach. 1078.

brave.

Ho !
Cf.

Generals,

more numerous than

Latin

Paulli

Aemilii contio fuit verior quam gratior populo. Liv. xxii. 38. The speech of Paullus Aemilius was more true than
acceptable to the people.

Note 5. Both the Comparative and Superlative may be used with a reflexive pronoun to denote a comparative or superlative degree reached by the person himself within his

own

experience.
iroAA.<p

\upov Javrav Xiyovo-iv. ANTIPH. V. 7. They speak much worse than they generally do (much below
their real powers, or their average).

o^vrara avros aiiTOu 6pp.

PLAT. Leg. 715,

His
Note

sight is at its keenest.

6.

The

Superlative

is

would

logically

be

correct, to

used, where the Comparative denote a supereminent degree

of superiority.

kolXXuttov twv wporepov <aos. SOPH. Ant. 100. Light most glorious of all former lights.
Cf. Antig.

1212;

Philoct. 1171.

eSedrjV Tra.pa.vop,<&Ta,Ta. &k6.vtu>v dvdptoirwv.

Antiph. Herod.
I was thrown
than ever
into prison in

17.

a far more unconstitutional way

man

was.
is

Note
iroXv

7.

The Superlative

strengthened by
iroXXui,
iroA.i5

8ij,

m>A.A$,

p,kyujTo<s

much

&j, the best.

quite the greatest;

Digitized

o/ho-tos-,

far,

by Microsoft


COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE.
us,
<us

123

on, and ohv strengthen the Superlative

pjctto, as easily as possible

(quam

facillime)

<bs

or 5ri

fiaXurra, TaxuTra

(quam maxime, quam

celerrime).

on
cos

kv fipayvTarm,

m as short a time as possible.

Thuc.

iii.

46. 50.

rjSvvavro dSijidrara, as secretly as they were able.

Thuc.
oiov adX-uoTwrov, in as miserable a plight as possible.

vii.

Arist. Ach. 384.

Note 8. The phrase s av-qp with a Superlative denotes an unique personal pre-eminence.
els dvrjp

irXeuTTOv irovov

AESCH. Pers. 329. eX^pote irapacrxuv. Wreaking, beyond all else, Most mischief to Ms foes.
(Or, with his single arm, what one
Cf.

man

might).
iii.

Soph.

0. T.

1380: Ai. 1340; Thuc.

39.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE
THE ACTIVE

VI.

VOICES AND MOODS.

128.
(1.)

VOICE.

The Active Voice includes transitive and intransitive On the other hand the Middle Voice includes deponent verbs which are active and transitive, such as o.l8ovfmi tow deovs, I reverence the gods ; of/jcu, I think.
verbs.
(2.)

Some verbs
eXavvo),
e^to,

are both transitive

and

intransitive.

drive,

and / ride

(sc. ap/xa, 'lttttov).

/ have,

irpaaam, I do,
$r)\a>,

I show,
I end,
i"

I am (with adverbs only). I fare. I show myself, am manifest

efiavrov).

(sc.

reXevTw,

I die

(sc. fiiov).

So in English

turn,

I join, I

move,

I change,

etc.

Both same verb.

transitive

and intransitive tenses are found in the

E.g. tarrifii,

I set

(up)

eorrjKa,
others.

I stand.

So
(3.)

$va>, fiaivco,

and

Some simple verbs become

preposition.
(

intransitive

when com-

pounded with a

fjLeTa/3aX\a>,

/3aX\w,

I I

throw.

)
(

eafiaWm,

1 change. I rush in,

attack, or

kottto),
,

cut.

(of rivers) flow in. ififidWei, j irpoKovTto, I make progress.

/ ( , c biad>epa>, -J' (.

1 bear. Aepco, r r
,

\ewra>,
124

Heave.

eWeiirm,
, , '

I differ P enor I fail

.

from,
*
t-

am

su-

>

'

\ 6/c\et7rft>, J
Digitized

die, faint.

by Microsoft


THE MIDDLE
(4.)

VOICE.
it

125

The Active

is

sometimes Causative,

i.e.

means

" I get, or allow, a thing to o

be done," not " I do

it

myself."

Kvpos Kareuavcre

to, ftao-iXeia.

Cyrus had

the palace burnt

down.

So in Latin
Verxes ad palum alligavit piratas.
Verres had the pirates bound to a
post.. Cic.

Ver.

iv. 29.

129.

THE MIDDLE

VOICE.

In the Middle Voice the action of the verb refers in some way or other to self. In some verbs, however, the notion of self is so much lost that the Middle differs from the Active only in giving a different meaning to the verb. The chief uses of the Middle Voice are

ATlJ1 Eeflexive A '{

.

f (1.)

Directly.
Indirectly.

(2.)

B. Causative.
C. Eeciprocal.

D. The notion of self is so blurred or lost that the Middle must be regarded as giving a new and
different

there
Note.

is

meaning to the Active no Active.

is

in

some

cases

The Aorist Middle The Future Middle is

o/Acu,
tj

never passive.
e.g.

(1)

sometimes apparently passive, but really middle,

\d\p-

will not leave (trov)

Xei<j>6^crofiai,
to

I shall

be left;

dp xtf Ka/raXvo-erai, will fall

pieces ; KaraXvO^a-erai, be

(2) really passive with certain verbs : Tt/t^cro/tat, I shall be honoured ; a-rvyi/ja-ojj.ai, I shall be hated ; Si8ao/t<u, I shall be taught ; ore/oija-o/iai, I shall be bereft; ^rjnida-o/xai, I shall

be fined;

d><f>ekrjcr6fi<u,

I shall

be helped ; aSuc/jo-opai,

I shall

be wronged.

In these cases the Future passive

Digitized

is

rarely or never used.

by Microsoft


126

VOICES

AND MOODS.

A. The Reflexive Middle

(1.)

1.

Directly Reflexive.
Indirectly Reflexive.

2.

The Directly Reflexive Middle.

Self

is

the direct

object or accusative.
Xovco,

wash.

\ovofiai,
(trans.).

rpeiro),

turn

Tpeiro/juai,

I wash myself. I turn (intrans.),

myself.

i.e.

/ turn
Srj\a>,

I show.

SrjXovficu,

I show

myself.

The Middle is very rarely used in this way. It is more usual to employ the Active with a Reflexive Pronoun
:

E.g.,

hire out myself, [uaQS) e/xavrop, not fiurOovfuu, hire for myself : so aireKTeivev iavjov, not

which means /
aire/CTeipaTo
(2.)
:

TraiveL<;

aeavTov, not

eiraivel.

The Indirectly Reflexive Middle.

Self is the Dative

of the Indirect Object, or of Interest.

Tropica,

I provide. I
put
off or

Tropl^opai (pifKa),
myself.

I provide for

aTTort,dr)/j,i,

airoTidefiai (jov vo/j,ov),Iput

away

away.

from myself,

i.e.

disregard.

awoTi0efiai, paQvjuav,

from myself,
habits.

i.e.

I put away / overcome, lazy

airoTi&efiat Tpo<f>rjv,

I put away
store

for myself,

i.e.

hoard or

food.

Xoua, I wash.
Trape^m,
sent.

Xovofiat,

ra

Ifiaria,

I wash my own
clothes).

clothes (i.e. for

myself my

offer

or pre

irape^ofiai (Bcnravrjv),

I furnish

my own

expenses,

from my own

resources; fidprvpa,

I bring for-

ward a witness for myself my own witness, in my support.

Digitized

by Microsoft

THE MIDDLE
The
chief notions are

VOICE.

127

(1.) (2.) (3.)

for

self. self.

from,

what

belongs to self.

But the notion

all

of for self pervades and easily explains

the uses.

B. The Causative Middle. the Active means I cause or allow others to do, so the Middle means I cause or allow others to do something for myself or on myself.

As

6 -rraTrjp SiSacrKerai tov viov.

The father has Ms son

ypdcpco,

taught,

write; ypd<pofia<, nvd, I get one written down,

i.e. i"

indict.

Latin cwo, Gerundive.

Cf.

perrrdtto,

with ut and subjunctive, or with

so the action is reciprocal

C. The Reciprocal Middle. Each agent acts for self, and Verbs compounded with hid

especially
dfieifia,

have

this force.

I change,

dpelPofieda,
BiaXeyo/j,e6a,

we answer each other. we converse together.

8iatce\evovTai, they encourage one another.

StaxTjpevovTai, they negotiate by

a herald.

D. See the following Miscellaneous

list.

miscellaneous list of Verbs for reference showing the Note. difference in meaning between the Active and the Middle. In some cases the Reflexive meaning of the Middle is obvious in some it is dubious ; in some it has practically disappeared.

ay 6.X A.U,
ay<i>,

For constructions with the Cases the Lexicon must be used. dydWofuu, Ipride myself, exult. I adorn.
ayofiat yvvaixa, I marry a wife, alpovpai, I choose.
dcj>aipovfiai''nva ti,

I bring, lead. I take. a<\>a.ipw, I take away.

alpw,

person of something (for

I deprive a my

own
Digitized

sake).

by Microsoft

128

VOICES
I take
up.

AND MOODS.
aipo/iai,

aipa>,

I take on myself, undertake (suscipio), begin, gain,

(Ace.)

dfitifiw,

I change
keep
off,

(trans.),

cni-exa), i"

deter.

to do by turns, answer, requite. 6.Trk-)(pp.a,l twos, refrain from,

dfielfieo-Oai,

hold aloof from.

I give back. (inirpdcrKto, I sell),

d7roSiSa)/ji,

dire.86p.rjv,

I sold. I de-

afivvta (see Tip.<j>pQ>).

d.TraX.Xd(T(Tia,

I set

free.

diraWdo-o-opMi, I escape,

apxo) (iroXep-ov), I am the first of two parties to make (war)

part from, I leave off. apypimi (ffoAe/iov) , i" begin warlike operations.

so with Xoyov.

but
o.p\(a,

ffovXevto,

I rule. I advise.

apxo/mi (Passive),
povXevopai,

/ am

ruled
cm<,-

deliberate,

yapM,

I marry
i"

(duco).

yap,ovpcu, (1) I marry (nubo) (2) I give in marriage, betroth.

yew,

give

taste of.

yevopai,
(cf.

I taste.
I
get written down,

ypd<f><o,

write

down

ts-

ypd<j>ofiai,

Orjiu).

I indict. I put
out at interest,
Savei(op.ai,

Savelfo,
SiSacTKio,

I borrow

at interest

(so xprjcrao-Oai).

1 teach.

SiSdo-Kopcu tov vlov,

get

my

son taught. SlSdlTKOpML VTTO

8u<du>,

TWOS,

I am
/ go
to

taught by a person.

I decide.

8iKdofj,a.L (SIkttjv crot),

iirdy(D,Iurgeon,hasten(tTms.).

law with you, conduct a case : especially of the prosecutor, opposed to favyew. Iwdyopai, 1 hasten (intrans.).
eKniQuxai,
e'xo/iot,

I put or place upon. I have (neuter, I am ox I am able). itfayyeXXw, I proclaim.

eTTiridrifii,

X<,

I attack, twL. I cling to, I come next to,

eKo.yykXXop.a.1,

eager for (with Gen.). 1promise, I profess, I denounce.

lam

eTri\pr)tf>[^co,

I put

to the vote

(of

m\p7j(f)^opM,i,

vote, decree

by

the President).
Digitized

vote (of the

Assembly).

by Microsoft


THE MIDDLE
6-ifo

VOICE.

129

(of the priest),

I sacrifice.

Qvofmi (of the general),

sacrifice
spices.

I get a
au-

offered,

take

177/tj,

I send.

i'epai,

I hurry,

rush.

KaTao-Tpecpto,
K01/J.Q,

overturn.

I lull

to sleep.

ko[i[o>,

I transport.

I subdue. I sleep. Kop.l^op.a.1, I recover, get

KaTa(TTpe<t>ojj.ai,

Koip.Zp.aL,

back

what was
Xap./3dv<o ti, I take.

lost.

Xap.fidvopai' tivos,
Xav66.vop.ai,

Hay hold of.

I

Xavddvu,
iravo>,

I escape

observation.

linX.avOdvop.ai,

I make

to cease,

stop

iravopat,

I cease, I

step (intrans.).

(trans.).
irddio,

I persuade. I do
or
'

TTtWopai,
Troiovp.ai,

obey.

(TvdOov,

be

persuaded;
Troiui,

iridov, obey.)

iroiZ Xoyov,

I compose a

speech.

woiovpai
speech.

I consider. Xoyov, I

deliver

68bv

Ti'otw.

/ make a

road.

I make a journey. Troiovpai o'TrovSd's, elprjvrjv, <rvv6Sbv iroLovpai,

d-fjKrjv, o-vpfiao-iv.

iroiito-Qai iraiSas,

to

beget chil-

dren.
irpoviroih),
n-ovrjpevta,

Crito, v.

irokiTtvut,
o-kottZ,

I hand over (trado). I am uiicked. I am a citizen.

Trpoo-iroiovpai,

wovqpevopai,
1roXt.Tevop.a1,,

I claim, I aim at. I behave wickedly. I act or live as a

[citizen.

I look at, examine. o-ocj>[ia, I make wise, I teach.

cnrlvSco,
t16t)<ti

o-KOTTovpai,
o-o<$>i(opai,,

I reflect.
I
act
tlie

sophist,

quibble, contrive.

I pour
vofiov

out a libation.
vop,o6iT7]S,

o-rrevSopai,

I make a

truce.

the

riderai vopov 6

Sijyiios,

the people

lawgiver makes a law. 6 dtk, the mortgager.

makes laws for

itself.

6 Oepevos, the mortgagee (also the depositor in a bank, etc.).

ripoypZ two.

tivi,

I punish

Tipiapovpai rivd tivi,

I revenge

for B's satisfaction. And so Tip<op(o 0-01, I avenge or

myself on
assist

A for wronging B.
o-e,

Tipiapovpal

I wreak
thee.

ance on or punish

Similarly

dpvvm ri tivi, I keep thing from B.

off

some-

(1)

self against

dpvvopat n, I defend mya thing.

Digitized

by Microsoft


130

VOICES

AND MOODS.
(2) d/j,vvop.at riva,

Hence
(1) apvvut TroXefjtov,

keep off

war.
(2)
a/xvvia
'

pumshaperson,
hd-qvalois,

requite or

rots o/johs,

I help

the Athenians.

rtva SUtjv, poenas do, pendo,luo,

I pay a penalty. I show (trans.). Xpw, (1) I give an oracle. (2) I furnish, lend.
<f>aivio,

wept, or wrip for a certain thing, tlvo/jml SUrjv, poenas swmo, I exact a penalty or vengeance. faivopai, I appear, am seen.

with retaliation,
Tiros,

xPlJ al xp^ftal
-

>

>

I ff6 ^ an I use
-

oracle given.

Note.
points.
1.

An

examination of the above

is

list will

bring out two

The Active
The Middle

often
often

transitive,

while the

Middle

is

neuter.
2.

is

used of mental rather than of

bodily actions.

130.

THE PASSIVE

VOICE.
is

The Syntax of the Passive Voice Greek than in Latin.

much

freer in

Thus, besides the constructions noticed in the Notes

below, Verbs which take a Genitive or a Dative can be used personally in the Passive, unlike the Latin.
E.g. KarcKppovS) avTov,

despise

Mm.
is

KaTaqipoveiTai vir

e/xov,

he

despised by me.

marevovai
by them.
7ro)5

t&3 fiacriXel, they trust the king.

o ftaatkevs iriareverai vir

clvtwv, the king is trusted

av

eTTifiovXevaaifii
;

avra>, ec

fir)

teal

eVe/3ou-

\evdr]v vir avrov

ANTIPH.
1

How
Note
1.
*!

could I plot against him, unless also

had

been

plotted against by

Mm

Neuter verbs can form passive

participles.

apX
This
is

I rule

>

apxp.evos, ruled over.

chiefly the case

rjo-e/3yp.ha

to

with neuter participles. aureus (vw' avT&v), impious acts committed by

Digitized

them.

by Microsoft


THE PASSIVE
To.

VOICE.

3l

KivSvvevdevTa, risks run.

committed. warlike measures.

Toi fnw.pTqfi.kva, errors

to. o-Tparevofieva,

to. croi TTTro\iTeviJ.eva,

your political

acts.

Or with impersonal

passives.

Trapeo-KevavTai, preparation has been made.

afiapTaverai, error is being committed. ovdev dcre^Sen-at, no impiety is being committed.

Cf. Lat. ventv/m
est,

erat; factum

est,

etc.

Note

Form,
arc
of

Deponent Verbs are those which have no Active I receive; oT/xai, I think. Passive Deponents those whose Aorist has a Passive (not a Middle form), e.g.
2.
e.g.

Seconal,

[3ovX.op.ai,

I wish,
I

i/3ov\r)dr)v.

The

exclusively Passive forms

sense,
e.g.

Deponents are sometimes Passive not Middle in

force ; ef3ido-6r)v,

fiiafapai,

I was

forced.

Even the Middle

form of a Deponent
I

may be
e.g.

am

forced, or suffer violence.

original Active form,

Passive in meaning, e.g. /Stafopxt In such cases there was an /3iafa>. See further, Jelf, 368.

-6i\v,

Note 3. It will be remembered that the Aorists in -)i> and with their corresponding futures in -qo-op.ai, -d-qo-opai, are The Middle forms, the only Passive forms of a Greek verb. except the Aorists, and as a rule the Futures, are of course Passive as well as Middle in meaning.
Note
4.

The

ject of the Passive,

direct object of the Active becomes the suband the subject of the Active, the agent, is

expressed by vwo and the Genitive.

6
(pi\.6cro<l>os SiSacr/cei

tov 7rai8a.

o 7ros Si8acrKTaj iirb tov <j)i\oo~o(f>ov.

The Agent
(a.)
(6.)

is

also expressed,

but

much

less

commonly
See these

By By

the Dative.

See Dative of Agent.

diro,
e,

the Prepositions

irapa,

Trpos.

Prepositions. The object of the Active may however remain the object of the Passive, and the dative of the Active become the subject This is an extension of 130. of the Passive.
oi eTTiTtTpappevoi. rrjv <j>v\aKrjV,

CT-orraA/xEvot,

and Eur.
left

Bhes.

5.

THUC. i. 126, cf. V. 37, ravra So in English, I leavt him a

fortune,

He

has been

Digitized

a fortune. by Microsoft

132

VOICES

AND MOODS.

13I.

THE MOODS.

Introductory Note on the Subjunctive and Optative.

tive

The Indicative is sharply contrasted with the Subjuncand Optative.

state-

The Indicative simply and directly makes a ment or asks a question without any qualification.
6 fiaaiKevs TeOvrjicev

The king
irodev

is

dead.

f]Kei<;

Where do you come from

It is

commonly

said that the Indicative states facts,

but the statement need not express a fact actually true

e.g.

00 Ilepaai,

evt/crjo-av

tou? 'AOijvaiowi MapaOmvt, the

Persians defeated the .Athenians at Marathon.

The Subjunctive and Optative, on the other hand,

make

assertions, not as real,

but as conceptions present

to the speaker's mind.

The Subjunctive and Optative are two aspects of one Mood. In the oldest Greek they represented originally the Willing or Wishing Mood, the Subjunctive being the more peremptory, Will ; the Optative, the fainter and more remote, Wish. This was soon modified into a second use, the Subjunctive expressing a more vivid, the Optative a fainter, remoter Expectation or Possibility. Hence they soon came to be used in Subordinate Sentences, expressing Purpose, Condition, Indefinite Frequency, etc. And though in Subordinate Sentences the general rule is for the Subjunctive to follow Primary, the Optative Historic tenses, yet there is no such fundamental distinction between the two Moods as to prevent the Subjunctive being used for the Optative, the two Moods sometimes alternating in the tame paragraph.
Digitized

by Microsoft


THE MOODS.
One
or
difference
133

two instances from Homer will illustrate the between the Subjunctive and Optative
:

Mr) Mr]

ere Ki%eia>, 11.

firjv a.K\et,a><}

i.

26, let

me

not find thee.

304,
let

dnoXoi^v,

II. xxii.

me

not

fall ingloriously.

ovk ea6 ovtoi

avrjp, ovtf

eaaerai, ovBe yevijTai.

Hom.
Lives not that man, nor
to be (born).

Od. xvi. 437.

e'er will live,

nor

e'er is like

Here the Subjunctive differs from the Future Indicative in stating what ia thought likely to occur, not positively what will occur.
peia deos 7 e6e\<ov
tcai

rrfKodev avBpa aawaai.

Hom. Od.
Lightly a god,
distance.

iii.

231.

an he

will,

might save

thee e'en at

The Optative gives a more remote representation than

the Subjunctive of a future possibility.'
Note. The Subjunctive and Optative (with two exceptions to be noticed in the Optative) refer to future time. The reference to the future, however, is more vague in the

Optative, so vague that the notion of time is often scarcely apparent in this mood. This, perhaps, may be why the Optative lent itself to a connexion with past tenses in historic But there is nothing in the form of the Optative, sequence. neither its connecting vowel nor its suffixes, which per se denotes past time. And the only two usages in which the Optative really refers to past time are: (1) in General Suppositions (see Conditional Sentences) ; and, (2) in Oratio Obliqua, where occasionally it represents a past tense of the Indicative (see Oratio Obliqua). The Subjunctive and Optative are both used (1) in IndeTheir uses in Subpendent, (2) in Subordinate Sentences. ordinate Sentences are given in the Syntax of the Compound

Sentence.

. ... Digitized

... _ by Microsoft
,


134

VOICES

AND MOODS.

132.

THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT

SENTENCES.
is

The Independent Subjunctive

A. In Exhortations.
xyere, Idi
(877

used

First person often with (pipe, aye,

or vvv added).

<f>epe Br/ eoirco irpo<; ifia<;.

Dem.

Come now,
aXX' Wi,

let

me

speak before you.

ito/iev.

Come

then, let us go (suppose

we

go).

In Soph. Phil. 300 the 2d Person (/*<%).

B. In Prohibitions (with
(a)

firj).

First person plural (singular very rare, cf Eur.

.

Hipp. 567, Herael. 559).

(6)

Second and third person with

let

aorist subjunctive,

(a)

fir) <f>oj3<!>fieda,

us not be afraid.

fir\

areXr] rov \oyov KaraXiTrafiev.

PLAT.

Let us not leave our argument incomplete.

(b)
fir)

ravTa
not do

Trotrjcrrj^.

Do Ne

this.

haec feceris.

fiw&evi

avfMpopav overlays.

ISOOR.

Taunt no one with a misfortune.

0. In

Questions

of doubt
(3ov\ei,

(Deliberative

Questions)
6e\ere

with the First Person.

fdovXeaOe

(0e\ei<;,

in poetry) are often added.

enrwfiev,

rj <7t,y>/iev, rj

n Bpdtrofiev
?

EUR.

Are we
or

to

(should we, must we) speak, or keep silence,

shall

what

we do

Digitized

by Microsoft


OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES.
tl fiovKeade Bpa&co
;

135

Quid
oijioi

vultis faciam

What would you have me do ?

ri Spdcrta;
ttoi

Ah
Note

me, what must

I do?

$vya> pTjTpog xepas; EUR. Med. 1271. whither escape a mother's hands ?

1.

The
ere

third person, however, occurs pretty often,

especially in Plato
TTorepov

and Demosthenes.
7rdA.eci)s

rts ttjs

eydphv

17

ipov etvat
state,

<j*rj;

Dem.
Should one
call

18. 124.

you the enemy of the

or

my enemy 1

iro&ev T4S ap^r/Taiy

PLAT.
?

Where
Tt
eiirrj

is

one

to

begin

Ttsy

What must
itch Tts

one say
tfrvyrj;

Plat, and Dem.

oSv

Trot

poXwv

p,evG>;

Soph. Ai. 403.

Here

this tis refers to the first person.

2.

Note
bility,

The
in

Subjunctive,

common

Homer,

is

expressing a future possinot wholly unknown, though

rare in Attic.
ovt' f(TTiv ovre trore yivqrai Kpeirrov.

PLAT. Leg. 942.

It is not, nor is

it

ever likely to get better.

133.

THE OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT

SENTENCES.
is

The Independent Optative

used

A.

To denote a

Wish (without

av).

m/wal yevoio iraTpof evyevearepos. SOPH. Boy, may'st thou prove more fortunate than thy
father.

In the

first

person a wish often conveys an exhortation.

See Subjunctive in Exhortations.

/; %<at\v fier
afj,ovaca<;.
Digitized

EUE.

Let

me

not

live

without culture.
by Microsoft


136

VOICES

AND MOODS.
may
be

In the third person a command or permission

conveyed.
epSoi t(?
rjv e/cao-ro? eiSeirj

reyyqv.

Let each
elSeirj is

man

keep

to his trade,

Ae. whateer he knows.

assimilated to the

mood

of principal verb epSoi.

:

Xen. An. iii. 2. 37, i?yojTo (al. r]yela6a)) Aesch. P. 7. 1047, where two Optatives are co-ordinate with preceding
Cf.

Imperatives.

B. In Deliberative Questions. The Optative differs from the Subjunctive in the same questions only in ex pressing a less vivid and more remote possibility.

Cf.

avBpwv Kwraa^oi ; SOPH. Ant. 605. Thy power, Zeus, what mortal man By 6'erstepping might control ? Aesch. Gh. 392 Ar. Pint. 438 Soph. 0. C.170; Plat.
reav, Zev, hvvaaiv Tt?
virepfiacrlq,
;
;

Rep. 352 C (aKova-ais).

Note.

Several places,

especially

in

the

Tragedians,

are

quoted where the Optative without av occurs in its Homeric In most of potential sense (e.g. Od. iii. 231, quoted before). these places, however, if not all, the reading is doubted. Jele (418, I. a) quotes two passages from Plato, Phaedo, 87 E, e7TLSei,Kvvoi Siot^otro, where Heindorf would insert av and Pep. 362 o, dSeXcfrbs dvSpl irapei-q, where to Aeyo/ucvov shows that the phrase is a quotation, probably from the Epic.

134.

THE IMPERATIVE.
is

The Imperative

used in

Commands,

Entreaties,

Prayers, and Prohibitions.

It denotes future time.

p,7\

In Prohibitions we must use

Present Imperative

either (1) with 2d Person

act),
:

(continued

or (2) 2d

Person

Aorist Subjunctive (single act), thus

pyr]

tcXeTrre,

or

/xrj

/cXe'i/fi??,

do not steal

but neither

p,r)

KXeTTTTj'i

nor

/cXeifrov.
Digitized

by Microsoft

THE IMPERATIVE.
Ae. Thesm. 877
(fir)

137

yjrevo-ov) is

a rare exception in Attic.

aTroKcofieOa.

Mr/, 7rpo5 Oewv, fiaivcoixeOa,

/mtjB' aio-)(pa)<s

Xen.
Let us not, by the gods, be mad, nor die shamefully.

But
sible

ftrj

with the 3d pers. Aorist Imperative

is

admis-

both in poetry and in prose.

/ttySet?

vfiwv

ravra vofiiaarm.
so.

Xen.

Let none of you think

Note Index. Note
1.

For the

Infinitive

used as an Imperative, see

2.

ola-0'

8 Spatrov.

in relative clauses

The Imperative is sometimes used depending on an Interrogative.

T<j>

dW ourd'

Spatrov/
to

crKekti 6eve rr)v irerpav.

Ar. Av. 54

Do you know what

do

Kick

the rock with

your

leg.

oTcrOd vvv a pot yeveo-Ow;

Seapa rots
be

^evoicri irpoo-Oes.

Eur.
Knowest tlwu what must
strangers.

/. T.

1203.

done for
<x

me ? put

chains on the

Logically

it
is

would be

Set yevio-Oai;

And

as the

Future

used in Greek as an equivalent for

the Imperative,
oicrd'

we

find
. . .

oSv 6 8/oacras

oSrj&ov
?

rjp.lv ctTtov.

EUR.

C'ycl.

133.

Dost know what thou must do

provide us victuals.

The Imperative in Greek is subordinate in the above idioms. As this is impossible in English, we have to substitute a Do you know what (you must do=do) 1 periphrasis.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEK

VII.

THE TENSES.
*35- Greek tenses

may be
to the

classified in

two ways.

A. With

regard to the Order of Time.

B. With regard
A.

Kind

of Act or State.

ORDER OF
must be

TIME.

The Time
1.

of a Tense

either

Past (Imperfect, Aorist, Pluperfect).

Present (Present, Perfect).

2. 3.

Future (Future, Future Perfect).

PRIMARY AND HISTORIC TENSES.

Tenses in Present and Future Time are called Primary.
Tenses in Past Time are called Historic.

SEQUENCE OF MOODS.
In

Compound Sentences

the theoretical rule

is

is

that

A Principal A Principal

Sentence in Primary Time

followed by

the Subjunctive in the Subordinate Sentence.

Sentence in Historic Time

is

followed by

the Optative in the Subordinate Sentence.

This sequence however

will be seen in the

is

purely theoretical;
in

for,

as

Compound

Sentence, a Subjunctive
Historic

constantly takes the

place of an Optative
by Microsoft

Sequence.
138

Digitized

;;

TIME OBSERVED THROUGHOUT MOODS.

136.
(a)

139

Time how

far

observed throughout the

Moods.
The only mark

The

distinction

of Past Time in Greek is the Augment. between Past and Present therefore is strictly

observed only in the Indicative.

Absolute and Relative Time.
ever, are observed in the

The
most

distinctions of Time, how-

Optative, Infinitive,

and

Participle,

when

these
i.e.

Obligua,

Moods are used in Indirect Discourse or Oratio when they represent indirectly the words or
is

thoughts of another. This Statements and Questions.

e<^>7]

clearly seen in the Indirect

ravra

iroietv

iroirjtrai

-Koirpruv.
this.

He
TToiilv

said that he was doing, did or had done, would do

=7tom3

in Eecta,

and therefore

is relatively present

xoirjcrai

=
i.e.

eiroi-qva.

,,

relatively

past ;

7roi7](reiv=7roi-qa-<i)

relatively,

to the Principal
ironjcrcu,
7roMj<re<.v

Verb
are

relatively future present, past, and future

all

but
e<prj,

Troietv,

absolutely past,

because

the Principal Verb,

is past.
/3ao-t,\evs.

e\eav

on

ire/j.xf'eie

cr^as

They said that

the king

had sent them. In Eecta hre^xj/^v ij/uSs.

rjpero el Kevos o <f>6f3os enj.

He

asked if his fear was groundless. In Eecta xevds io-ri;

yjcrdovTO

tow

TroXe/XLovs Trpoo-TrXiovras,

They discovered that

the enemy were advancing. Eecta, ol iroAijutpi Trpoo-TrXiovaiv.

relatively to

(b) The Aorist Participle denotes an action past the "principal verb.

BoiiUTOt oi e "A/opijs dvacrravTes rijv Boliotlclv wK-qo-av.

Tiiuc.
Boeotians who had been driven out of
itself

Arne

settled in Boeotia.

See further however under the Aorist Participle, which in does not denote time.

(c) With regard to the Future in the Moods it seems always express future time, for (1.) The Future Optative is only used to represent in the Obliqua a Future In^gJjg^f^r^^Discourse.

Ho
(2.)

THE TENSES.
The Futwre

Infinitive is most commonly used after verbs and thinking, and therefore like the Optative, represents a Future Indicative of the Recta. Whenever the Future Infinitive is used after other verbs, instead of the usual Present or Aorist Infinitive, the idea of futurity still seems

of saying

to be emphasised,

e.g.:

He

delays

to

do his duty,

peXXei

iroatv

or

n-oi'qa-ai

Seovra.
/jiAXXei iroirj<ruv

(with emphatic reference to the future).

avafidWeTai
(3.)

is

similarly used.

The Future

Participle denotes a future relative to the

principal Verb.
(rvXXajxfidvei K{!/3ov, u>s aTTOKrevlav.

He

seizes

Cyrus with the intention of hilling him.

B.

THE KIND OF ACT OR STATE.

to the

With regard
divided into
1.

Kind

of

Act denoted Tenses are

Continued (Present, Imperfect).

Finished (Perfect, Pluperfect).
Indefinite or Single (Aorist Strong

2.

3.

and Weak).
still

1.

continued Tense mentions an act as

going on,

or in progress,

whether in
is

past, present, or future,

an act

in which the agent

writing,
2.
I.

still

engaged,

i"

was

writing,

I am
is

shall be vjriting (the letter).

finished Tense mentions an act as one

which

perfect,

complete, in a finished state,

I have

written,

I had written, I
3.

shall have written (the letter).

An

indefinite

Tense mentions the mere act

itself,

a single act, without any such

limitation of its contvrite

tinuance or completion, I wrote, T write, I shall

(the letter).

Hence the
(i.e.

Stoic

grammarians called such a

Tense an Aorist

Digitized

adpia-rov or unlimited). by Microsoft

IDEAL DIVISION OF TENSES.

The
sal

141

distinction
all

throughout

the Moods, and

between the Kinds of Act is observed is therefore a more univer-

and abiding distinction than that of Time. The kind

of act
is

Note.

denoted in Greek by the Tense-

stem, AY-, AYC-,

AYCA-, AEAY-.

The Present Tense-stem (Present and Imperfect Tenses) denotes a continued act.
The Perfect
perfect,
{i.e.

reduplicated) Tense-stem (Perfect, Pluact.

and Future Perfect Tenses) denotes a finished The Aorist Tense-stems (Strong and Weak Aorist denote an indefinite or single act.

tenses)

The Future is ambiguous, denoting either a continued or an indefinite act.

137.
ideal

Ideal division of Tenses.

con-

An twofold division of Tenses may be thus structed, to be read horizontally and vertically.


142

THE TENSES.
,A very
rare poetical periphrasis occurs with Aorist
)

Note.

eao[J,ai \v7rr]dets ecrojucu, SOPH. 0. T. 1146,0. C. 816. This scheme, however, is purely ideal, and does not correspond to the Greek tenses, however well it corresponds with

Participle,

o-tftMnjeras

our analytic English tenses. In Greek the kind of act, as has been observed already, is denoted by the Present, the Perfect, and the Aorist Tensestems : the Future Tense-stem has to be left out. The most important distinction is that between a Continued and an Indefinite act.

I38.

THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT

INDICATIVE.
:

A. The Present Indicative denotes

1.

An
;

act in

which a person

is

engaged in present

time
2.

<ypu<f>a>,

am

writing now.
is

An

act

which

habitual or repeated, or a general

truth, without being limited to the present

pcofiT]

moment.
Euk. Frag.

a^aQ'ns 7roX.Xat? Ti/crei /3\a/3rjv.

Strength untrained oft brings forth harm.

Vis consili expers mole ruit sua.

Horace.

Note 1. The Present has also certain idiomatic uses of which the following are the commonest
:

(a) The Historic present denotes a past event. In Compound Sentences it reckons as an historic tense. This historic present seems sometimes equivalent to an aorist (narrative), sometimes to an imperfect (descriptive).

He
(b)

a-vkXapfiavu KSpov (is dwoKTCvC} v. XEN. seizes (seized) Cyrus with the intention of hilling him.

The

Present,

as it denotes
act.

an unfinished

act,

often

denotes an attempted

tow

AaKeScUiiioviovs avaipei,

tow

Se <3?a)K6as <7<6fa.

DEM.
save the

He

trying to destroy the Lacedaemonians, Phocians.

is

and

to

Digitized

by Microsoft

143

PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.

This
is

especially the case with

and
this

7ra'6><o,

I try

to

persuade.

SiSio/iL, I offer, i.e. try to give, The present participle also has

meaning.

(c)
1.

The Present as a Perfect With iraAcu or 178)7 (all this

:

while, this long while, not

now

for the first time), like iam, iamdudum, Present.

Zfj.ot.ye

in

Latin with the

vvv T

i<al

think so now,

irdkai Sokci. EUE. Frag. and I have long been thinking

so.

vocrei yjSrj Sc/ca &T1).

He

has been

ill

these ten years.

Esp. in the poets irdXcu may refer to a statement made only a moment ago (as we say hyperbolically ever so long ago). Cf.

Soph. El. 676.

2.

Certain presents have the force of perfects

ijkid,

I am
victo-

come,

adswm;

oi'xo/ucu,

I am

gone (quickly)

vikZ,

I am

rious; KparS),

I am

victorious; fjTrwixai,

I have done wrong, Iam I am lost, or undone.

defeated; ASlkw, unjust; oXXv/xai, d7rdAA.11//.at, in Tragedy,

I am

3. Verbs of hearing and learning, &kov(j> (kXvio, poet.), rrwOavoimi, alo-Odvo/xai, p.av6dv(a. dpn is often used with these verbs.

Have you

Qe/xuTTOKXea ovk aKoveis avSpa dyadbv yeyovora ; PliAT. not heard that Themistocles proved himself a patriot ?

(d) The Present Infinitive and the Present Participle represent the Imperfect Indicative in English.
oi o-vfnrpeo-ptvovTes Kal Trapovres Kcnajj-aprvprjo-ova-i.

may

Dem. de F. L. 381. 5. Those who were his fellow-colleagues in the embassy, and who were present, will bear witness.

B. The Imperfect
on along with other

is

the past
still
(c)

of

the Present.
(6)

It

describes a past action as (a)

going on, or

as going

actions, or

as frequently recurring.

For
c.

(a)

and

(6) see

Aorist.

SaKpaTi]? caaTrep eyiyvaiaicev, ovtco<s eXen/e. Xen. Socrates used to speak exactly as he used to think.
Digitized

by Microsoft

144

THE TENSES.

Note 2. The Imperfect shares most of the idiomatic uses of the present.
(a)

The Imperfect

of

an attempted
avrov

act,

like the present of

the same.
e/cao-Tos Tts eirudev

virotrrrjvai tyjv dpxijv.

XeN.

Each one was

(b)

trying to persuade

him

to

undertake the command.

The present participle

also often has this sense.

When

pluperfect.

the present has a perfect force its imperfect is a ?jkov, I had come; (Lxo^v, I was gone; ivlniav, I seen

had won
(c)

the victory, I was victorious, etc. The Imperfect is used for the present when what

is

now

to be the case has

been in the past inquired about, or

sought

for, or thought of. ov tout' fjv evSai/jbovia, kclkov d.iraX.Xayi] ; PLAT. Is not this happiness (which we were talking about or trying

to

discover) deliverance
6'6" Jjv

from
pe.

evils ?

apa o i)AAa/3(uv
see, is

SOPH.

This then, 1

To
(d)

this

who seized me (this was and is). belongs the famous Aristotelian phrase, t6 ti f\v eiWi
he
4'Sa,

In the use of the Imperfects

like the Latin debebam, oportebat, decebat,

XPV V ^eAov, ewcos );c, denote what ought

>

to

have been done, but what was not done.

ovSev

aWo

4'Sct

\eyeiv.

DEM.

He

need have said nothing else. Nihil aliud dicere oportebat.

It
rjv ovrous kav. Soph. 0. T. 255. would not have been right to leave it alone. Non decebat praeterire.

ovk ikos

On
139.

these constructions see Conditional Sentences.

THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT

INDICATIVE.
Perfect denotes an act which
act
is

A. The
state.

in a finished

must have been begun in the past, but it stands finished in the present. The Perfect therefore is reckoned as a Primary tense. yi^/pa^a, J }iam written, my writing is in a finished state ; SiSerai, he is in a state
of imprisonment.
Digitized

The

by Microsoft

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE.

Not only
in the Subjunctive

145

and Optative, but

also in the

[ndicative, a periphrasis with dp.1 is used for the Perfect. abiding nature of the result is then emphasized.
eis oSe

The

p.ovoyevqs ovpavbs yeyovtus

Itrri

re kgu It' Itrrat.

Plat. Tim. 31. This one sole-created heaven hath been created, and shall still
endv/re.

Cf

e'x'

w i^

Aorist Participle.
is

Perfect of many verbs redvrjKev, he is dead; KiKX-qfxai,

The

equivalent to a Present:

come, novi. dead,

i.e.

called; ykyova, I am beI am; /tEjuv^juai, I remember; olSa (o-vvoiSa.), I know, The Pluperfect is then an Imperfect, kredvrjKu, he was The Perfect Imperative of such verbs is a simple etc.

I am

Perfect.

Note.
etc. etc.

A great number of Perfects in Homer describe present

:

acts or states

avcoya, /3j3pi8a, KtKevda, pk/xrjka, p.ip,ova, eppiya,

time.

B. The Pluperfect is the Perfect carried back to past eyeiypaxjiT], T had written, my writing was in a

finished state in the past.

For the Future Perfect, see Future. The Perfect Imperative (3d singular Middle and
issues a decisive

command which
f]

is

Passive) to be executed at once,

and there an end.

piyfii TodSe wpicrdto vp.Zv
/3paSvrrj?.

ThUC.

i.

71.

At

an end). Hactenus progressa (terminata) esto (finem habeat) vestra tarditas. Poppo.
this point let yov/r slowness find

limit (come to

140.

THE AORIST.

1. The Aorist denotes the mere occurrence of an act in Apart from difference of time the Aorist is past time.

always distinguished from the Imperfect (and in the Oblique Moods from the Present) by noticing the mere doing of the act, and not describing the act as in proThe Aorist has been likened to a point, the Imgress.
perfect (and Preseirb^f/teea/lji'iicrosoft


THE TENSES.
Note.

As the

Aorist notices the mere act or state

the act,

itself,

three

aspects of this are observable.

1.

The commencement of

the beginning, not the con-

tinuance.

This has been called the Ingressive or Inceptive Aorist.

eftao-iXevcre,

he came

to the

throne (ifiaalXevev, he

was

king).

iirXovrrjaev, he became rich (en-XovTa, he

Ivoo-ijo-e,

was a

rich

man).

he fell

ill (evoo-ei,

he was

ill).

2.

The

act as done

and

over,

not as doing.
fact

AYCIII1IOC EnOIHCE denotes the simple Lysippus was the maker of the statue.

that

AYCinilOC EnOIEI
making.
eSeiirvrjcrav,

denotes the labour spent on the

ended supper.

they supped,

i.e.

ZSeiTTvow, they were at supper.

vv^ iyevero, night came on, i.e. it was night. vv\ kyiyvero, night was coming cm, i.e. it was twilight.
3.

The

act as instantaneous

and momentary, not as occupying

a long time.
eyui Se r)\9ov, eTSov, eviKrjcra.

" Caesar's brag of

2.
i.e.

'

came,

and saw, and

overcame.' "

Shak.

The Aorist
is

is

narrative, the Imperfect is descriptive;

we merely mention a past act having occurred, while the Imperfect is used when we wish to describe or paint (so to speak) past acts as still
the Aorist
as

used when

going on.
oi

pev

airrj\6ov.

K\eavSpo<; Be edvero,

ical

avvfjv

Uevo(pa>vTi

(f>i\,iKa><;,

kcu %eviav o-vvefiaXovTo. Xe.N.

So they went away.

gaged in

Meanwhile Oleander was en-

and in friendly intercourse with Xenophon, and they formed a friendship.

sacrificing,

Note

1.

Other uses of the Aorist

The Aorist is also distinguished from the Imperfect by the mere mention of an act without reference to other acts, while the Imperfect often describes an act as going on side by side
with another
act.

Digitized

by Microsoft


THE AORIST.

147

Havcravtas e AaKeSalfiovos (TTparrjybs vtto tmv 'EAA.iji/o)v eepera eiKocri veZv otto HeXoTrovvq&ov, vviir\eov Se Kal 'A.6r)vaioi rpiaKOvra vavo-l, Kal ecrTpdrtvarav Is Kwt/jov, Kal chjtijs ra iroAAa KaTco-Tpe^avro.
7refj.(ji9ri

Pauscmias was sent out from Lacedaemon by the Greeks as admiral with twenty ships from Pehpormese. The Athenians also accompanied him with thirty ships, and they proceeded to Cyprus, and subdued the greater part of it.
Note
2.

Present.

The Aorist is used (esp. in Tragedy) where we use a The moment of past time is but an instant before.
act.

Something an instant ago has evoked the

eTrrjve<r'

epyov Kal irpovoiav

the act,

rjv

Wov.

SOPH. Ai. 586.

I commend
Elect.

and

the forethought thou didst show.

668. 677, Eur. Hec. 1275* El. 248, Philoc. 1289, 1314.

gvvfJKa,

I understand, and

^a-drjv,

I am pleased,

are of constant

occurrence.
6$/h' epwrt, 7re/otx a/3 ')s
8'

dvcTTTOfiav.

Soph. Ai. 692.

I thrill
Here the
Note
3.

with love and flutter overjoyed.

act is instantaneous also.

the Aorist

English often uses the Pluperfect where G-reek uses ; this is especially the case in Oratio Obliqua
:

01 'IvSot e'Aeav

on

irefitj/eie

cr<as

fiacrikev's.

Xen.
The Indians said
that their king

Cyr.

ii.

4. 7.

had

sent them.
sent).

Eecta re/*^ev, where we should say " has sent " (not This in Obliqua becomes had. And with temporal and local sentences
hreiSr) heXevrrjare

Aapdos Kal

KaTecrrr]

'

Apraepr]s.
i.

Xen. An.

1. 3.

After Darius Jiad died and Artaxerxes had been established in the kingdom. Quum mortuus esset Darius, etc.
krpdirovro

Udvopfiov oOtv dvrjydyovro.

they

They turned towards Panormus whence

Note

ThUC. had set

i.

92.

sail.

4. The Greek Aorist and English Perfect. Though we have an Aorist in English corresponding

to the

Greek, yet Greek uses the Aorist even more constantly than We use a Perfect sometimes where Greek uses an English.
Digitized

by Microsoft


148

THE TENSES.
Thus

Aorist.

I am

shocked if these are the orders which you-

Here an have given, Setvbv Troi.ovp.ai, el roiavra Trap'qyyeiXas. act rather than a finished state is denoted, and the Greek Aorist is more correct than the English Perfect. See example above, Soph. Ai. 586, Wov would naturally be rendered into English, thou hast shown. Again a Gnomic Aorist in Greek

may be rendered by an English

Note
its
5.

Perfect.

The Aorist

Participle generally expresses time prior

to its principal verb, but not always so, and,

when

own
Thus

inherent meaning, but only from

yeXdo-as (ol/xw^as)
(i
eirotrjcra'S
e<p-q,

its

so, not from connexion with

a principal verb.

With a
p.e.

smile, laugh (sigh) he

said.

dvapvYjo-as
to

PLAT. Phaed.

60.

You did

well

remind me.

Here the two acts are contemporary and identical. So eS eirolrjcras d^iKo/wvos. HDT. v. 24.
Cf. Curtius, Elucidations, p. 211.

Note 6. The following verbs show the contrast between the Present and the Aorist in the kind of act denoted. It will be noticed that several are Ingressive Aorists.
voaretv, to be
<j>evyet,v, to
ill.

vocrijcrcu, to

fall

ill.

run away.

<f>vyeiv, to escape.

4>oj3rj9rjva.i, Seco-ai, to take fright, <fx>f3eio-8a.i, to be in fear. trp&jviiv, to be busy about, irpd^ai, to accomplish.
'

yeXSv,

to be

laughing.

yeXao-ai, to burst out laughing,

apxeiv, to rule.
ioxveiv, to be strong.

apgai, to obtain dominion or

office.

Kr^wrai,
"X e ' v

id

o-iyav, to be silent.

o-iyrjo-au, to
i

become strong, become silent.

become apparent. begin war. belluni inferre.

e'xav, to have.
<l>aLve<Tdai, to

t obtain.

appear.

cfaavfjvai, to

KoXcp,eiv, to be at war.

TroXep/qo-ai,

to-

belhim gerere.
fSao-iXeieiv, to be Icing.

/3atriAe{)crai, to

come

to the throne.

Note on the

Aorist.

The Aorist is often called the momentary tense. It is doubtful, however, whether momentariness is its essential should use the aorist if we translated The meaning.

We

Digitized

by Microsoft


THE FUTURE.
Pharaohs
Hijo-av
built the

149

pyramids,

Tas

Trv/oa/ttSas,

ol /Sao-iAas tuv AfyimriW <ko8othough the pyramids, like Eome, were

not built in a day.

He

should equally, use it in translating burst out laugfimg, kykXao-t, or He fell ill., ivoo-rjtre. And

We

again

should use it of such an instantaneous shiver of is contained in ?</h' epwn, I thrill with love. The mere mention of the act (or state) itself, without regard to its duration, seems to be the one description of the Aorist which suits it all through. Aorist and indefinite are not very satisfactory words, but they have been retained as familiar, for want of a better. Simple and Isolated have been suggested.

we

emotion as

141.

THE FUTURE.
will take place here-

The Future denotes an act which

after.

Its action is either continued or indefinite (see above).

Note

1.

Idiomatic uses of the Future

The second person of the Future both affirmatively and negatively resembles an imperative.
(a) Affirmatively (either

as a statement, or as a question

with ov Interrogative)
irpbs

ravra

ir/oaeis oTov

av

9eX.rjS.

SOPH.

0. G. 956.

Thou
oix

wilt do therefore (do therefore) whatever likes thee.

'*^-$* T ';

ov

iranjo-er',
is

ovk dprj^ere

Ak.

L/y.

459.

A suggestion is made,
is

not so abrupt in form as an imperative. or a permission given, which, however, an unmistakeable Imperative.

The expression

(b)

Negatively with ov
ci ti

<?'

key'

fiovXei,

xP'

ov

ipavcreis irorL

Speak if thou

wilt, but

with the hand thou must touch

EUE. Med. 1320. me never.

Observe (1) that in Euripides oi with the Future is a statement, in Aristophanes a question ; (2) that in both passages ov with the Future is <&r^M9ii^l9r^ofi% Imperative.


150

THE TENSES.

'periphrastic Future is formed by peXXia with the Note 2. Present or Future (more rarely the Aorist) Infinitive.

ptXXai ypd<f>av, ypdipeiv (rarely ypdipai). I am going to write, I mean or intend to write.
p,iXXo) vp.as clyav ts 'Acrtav.

am

going Asia.

to

lead you

(am on

the point of leading you) into

In Asiam vos ducturus sum.

SerjcreL

tou toiovtov

el

peXXei

fj

iroXiTua

<Tu>co-6a.i.

Plat. Hep. 412.

There will he need, of such a ruler if the constitution
is to

be

e/ieXXov in the

same way

is

used

epeXXov

cr'

apa Kivryruv ky&.

AE. Nub. 1301.

Aha ! I thought I should

tickle you.

evTavQa epeXXov KaraXvcrctv. XEN. There they were intending to rest. Ibi deversuri erant.

Sometimes
irm ov
2.

peXXo>,

epeXXov,
;

fjLeXXu, tC

ov

peXXw

mean Wlvy

means I am doomed, should I not ?

destined,

The Future Perfect denotes a

:

finished act or state

in the Future
r)

irokneia TeXew; tceKoafirjaeTai.

Plat.

Ov/r state shall have been perfectly constituted.

Note.

notes

The Future Perfect, like the what will take place instantly.

Perfect, sometimes de-

Compare
KO.V TOVTO VlKUip.V TtdvB' f)piv TTiTTOL-qTai. XEN. An. L If we secure this victory we have done everything. 8. 12.

with
4>pde ko.1 TreTrpagerai.

AR.

Plut. 1027.

Speak, and

it

shall be done instanter.

is

A periphrastic
We

future perfect active

formed with dpi

ra Seovra icropeOa

eyvtaKOTts, k.t.X.

DEM.

Phil.

i.

54,

shall haverjj^gffiBf4viierSkbmr duty.

GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.

Gnomic and

151

142.

Iterative Tenses.
as in English, can express a

Almost any tense in Greek,

customary or a repeated
1.

act, or

a general truth.

The Present

iroXXdius tiktu (3\a(3r)v.

ptapyq dfiadrjs

EUK.

(See above.)

Strength without science often causeth harm. Vis consili expers mole ruit sua.
2.

The Perfect iroWoi 81a 86av Kai ttoAitkJjv

.,

8vvafj.iv KaKaireirovdacriv.

Xen.

Many

have come to trouble (and do come to troulle) quence of reputation and political power.

m conse-

(This perfect alternates with presents in the text.)

3.

The Aorist

called Gnomic, as expressing

general truth

yvdiir], sentiment or

dOviiovvTes avSpes oviru rpoiralov e&Tiqcrav.

PLAT.
fair lady."

Half-hearted

men

So in English

" Faint heart never won

never yet

set

up a

trophy.

Seij/ftV t' arjfia Trve.vp.dTWV kKoljuare (rrevovTa ttovtov.

And
The

the breath of dreadful

Soph. Ai. 674. wimds husheth ever the moaning

deep.

present and perfect, the present and aorist, the perfect and aorist, often alternate in the same paragraph.

4.

The Imperfect and Aorist with av denote a repeated

dva\ap.j3dvo>v
ti Xeyoiev.
ov~v

act.

avTwv

T<x

Troi-qpara SirjpaiTUV av avTOvs

PLAT. Apol.
to

ch. viii.

Taking up their poems then I used them) what their meaning was.
ti rives iSoiev
S.

ask them (I would ask

Trrj

tovs <r<peripov<s eiriKpaTOVVTas avedap<rr](rav

Thuc.
their

vii. 71.

If at any point they saw

own

side

winning they picked

up their courage (as often as this happened). For an excellent pjpagg fprffaffi^hH. 289-297.

THE TENSES.
The Tenses
in the

152

J 43-

Moods.

distinction previously explained between the Present, the Perfect, and the Aorist, is observed in all the moods, the Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, Optative, Infinitive,

The

and

Participle.

Some

instances are given to

show the

differ-

ence, especially

between the Present and the Aorist.

firjSh <f>o/3ov, Don't be timid

jj.rjSev

<$>oj3-qdfj<s,

Don't have

any fear of
'

this.

"T7

*X e ' s dvnXeyeiv, dvrlXeye' Xeytov tov avrbv Xoyov.

el Se

[i-q,

Travcrai

iroWaids PLAT. Grit.

If you have anything to say in objection, say on {at length, in a continued speech), but if not, give over (at once) repeating the same argument.
Subjunctive or Optative

ZireicrOrjv dis
fj

ov tovto Trwirore
cr(o[iari,

>pvxtf, ecus fi.lv

ev

t$ dvyrai

y,

(rj,

orav 8e tovtov diraXXayy, reBvrjKev.

He

Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 19. never believed that the soul, so long as it exists in this mortal body, Jives, but that as soon as it is separated from
it

it,

dies

(fj

denoting continuance, aTraXXayfj the instant

act of death).
Infinitive

en &pa dXXa
moment
up.
j3ef3ov\evcr8ai.

ov povXevea-dai
It is no longer

PLAT.

Grit.
to

file

to be

making up

one's

mind, but

have

it

made

XaXeiruv to

Troielv

It is difficult to do (to be

to Se KeXevo-ai paSiov. engaged in doing), but easy

this
').

to

com-

mand

(to

say

'

do

So with the other Moods.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTER

VIII.

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

1.

The

Infinitive (a Substantive).

2. 3.

The

Participle (an Adjective).

in -tos and -reos.

The Verbal Adjectives

144.

Note on the
is,

Infinitive.

The
Dative

Infinitive
case.

in its origin, a Verbal Substantive in the

from

so widely this limited signification, yet its origin gives us a clue to its different meanings.

Though subsequently its uses diverged

Thus
airiivai would mean time for going away. oWai-ds yeveo-Oat, able for becoming. /jLavOdvctv t/ko/v, we are come for learning. irapex<0 epavrbv rijxvuv koX KaUiv, I offer myself for cutting

&pa

and burning. 6av[ia ISeo-dai, a wonder for the viewing.

For full information consult Inaugural Oxford Lecture.

Professor

Max

Miiller's

I45.

THE
is

INFINITIVE.

a Verbal Substantive denoting action. The Infinitive Compare to ttoiclv with r) ttoitqo-li. It has therefore points in common both with (1) the Verb, (2) with the Noun.
1.

Like the Verb

(a) It

has

tenses

and

voices

Xveiv,

Xvo-ew, Xva-ai, etc.,

Xvcrai, Xvcracrdai, XvtiTJvat,.

(b)

It takes a subject before and a predicate after it Digitized by Microsoft 153

54

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

(c)

It governs the

same case as

its

verb.
like

(d) It is qualified, like a verb,

by adverbs, and not

a substantive
(e)

by

adjectives.

It

forms subordinate sentences, the indirect statement, a temporal sentence (with irplv), a final sentence, a consecutive sentence, with &a-re and (is, and in connexion with av it is a substitute for the inThis last dicative and optative moods with av. use gives it a sort of right to be called a mood.

2.

Like a Substantive
(a) It
(b)

stands as the subject to a verb.

It is declined

with the

article as a

nominative, accusa-

tive, genitive, or dative.

(c)

It is connected

with Prepositions.

I46.

THE SUPPLEMENTARY^ INFINITIVE.

1. The Infinitive supplements the meanings of verba and nouns (especially of verbs) which in themselves are

incomplete.
hfiaOov tovto 77-0M70YU.

They learned
ov
"7re<j>vice

to

do

this.

SovXeveiv.
to be

He

is

not

bom

slave.
rjv

6rjfjLi<TT0K\rj<;

iKavwTaro<;

enretv kclL yvoivai. Kai

irpa^ai.

Lts.

Themistocles

was eminently

able to speak, to

decide,

and
Note
1.

to act.

Sometimes the

article is
e<f>vv

added.

to /?ta ttoXitwv Spav

I am

SOPH. Ant. 78. by nature incapable of acting in defiance of my fellowcitizens. Of. Track 545, 0. C. 442, Aesch. P. V. 865.
d/j?7xavos.

1 Also called the Complementary, or the Prolate, Infinitive. term Supplementary egpg^^njjjjgy^nteUigible.

The


THE SUPPLEMENTARY INFINITIVE.
The
object.
article

155

marks the
Infinitive
is

Infinitive

The

more distinctly as an not always the Supplementary

Infinitive, see

Soph. Ant. 265.

Note
verbs.

2.

They

It is impossible to give a complete list of all such are fairly the same as in English and in Latin,
is

though this Infinitive than in Latin.

much more

extensively used in Greek

The

chief verbs perhaps are those expressing

(a)
(b)

Wish and

desire (as in Latin), /3ov\o/j,ai, 6eXu>, kin6vfi.!o.

Caution, fear,
<j>oj3ov/jt,ai
t

shame,

iiXafSov/xai,

6kvZ, 6ki>os

eari,

SiSoiKa, ala-)(vvofj,ai.

For Verbs
(c)

of Fearing see also Index.

determination,

Intention,

4rn<f> ^Ctlal
v<j> e'x<o.

{I

vote),

ZSoge,

SeSoKTai, Siavoov/j.ai, kv

So

statuo, constituo,

with

infinitive in Latin.

(d) Ability, capability, fitness, Siva/Mai, 0T61 re dpi, escort,

irkt^vKa, as
(e)

in Latin.
compulsion,
Set, XP1> aviiyut) imi, in Latin, except that oportet and

Duty,

necessity,

6(j>uXm.

So

necesse est in certain senses take a subjunctive.

(/) Custom,

habit, chance, ei!u>da, vofios e<r, v[if3alvet, etc.

Many

of these in Latin,

mos

est,

consuetudo

est,

contingit, accidit, etc., take ut with subjunctive

soleo, consuesco, etc.,

an

infinitive

The

adjectives with which this Supplementary Infinitive

e.g.

goes are of a similar meaning,

eVmjSetos, aios, dvdio<s, etc.

Swaros,

Iko.v6s,

irp6dvjj,os,

Sometimes the Greek Infinitive with an adjective corresponds with the Latin adjective and the supine in u, e.g. x a ^ ilr v
Xegai, difficile dictu.

The Epexegetical (i.e. Explanatory) Infinitive is added verbs of giving and taking, and to adjectives. This Infinitive further explains the purpose of the verb, or the
2.

to

character of the ac^ian^gr^o^he^a^ective.

156

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

avrjp ;y;<xXe7ro? av^rjv.

PlAT.

A
/
this

difficult person to live with.

Trape%a> ep,avrov rat iarpa> re/Aveiv

offer

km

iccueiv.

PLAT.
(me).

myself

to the

physician

to cut

and burn

Note 1. Even where the construction is already complete explanatory Infinitive is sometimes added.

KdKov
It is

o'iopai 7tollv

a oStos
to

iroieX,

ajroKTivvvvai.

avSpa dSlKtoS eTTl^eipeiV Plat. Apol. xviii.

an

evil,

I think,

be doing
to

doing, trying, that

ttJs arrjs

is,

unjustly

what my opponent is now put a man to death.

ovk

epui Tiprji rv^eiv.

SOPH. HI. 364.

I am

not in love with thy honours

to

obtain them.

wore with this infinitive and adjectives helps out this explanatory force.
ipvxpov to vSoip &ctt Xova-ao-dat.

Xen. Mem.

iii.

13. 3.

The water

is

cold

Obs. This use should be compared with that of the English gerundive (or to with the dative of the infinitive), a house to let, a letter to write, etc. Both in Latin and Greek the passive infinitive is very unusual, and probably incorrect.

Note

2.

The comparative with

jtieifov
r/

rj,

or

wne

rj,

and

infinitive.

to voo-qpa

<f>epeiv.

SOPH.

0. T. 1293.

The plague
pei^ov

is too

great

to bear.

Pestis maior
-i)

quam quae

(ut) tolerari possit.

wore

<bepeiv Svvacrdai

KaKov

rrj iroAei (rvp.f3a.ivet..

A
Note

Xen. Mem.
calamity befalls the state too great for
3.
i>i, oSs

vi. 5.

17.

it to

bear.

ye,

with the

infinitive limit the application.

S.oirX.01 d>s

k
so

c 'PS

pd)(e<r6ai.

Xen.
to

Oyr. vi. 4. 16.

Unarmed
come

far as fighting hand

hand

goes

(i.e.

if they

to close quarters).

S Xeyei 6 dvrjp

& ye

ovrtucri

okowoi.

Xen.
to

Cyr. vi. 14.

6.

The

man

speaks well enough just to listen

in this

way

(i.e.

*/ that is all you consider). Digitized by Microsoft

THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE

To
WS
s

INFINITIVE.

157

this

head belong certain idiomatic

'\sotosay.

infinitives.

crvv 6e<p diretv, in God's

o-^eSoi/ el-new,

name.

17TIV. tv,

almost, so to say,

ri 7rav enreXv, speaking gento

J

paene dixerim.
eKiov

dvai

(in

us <x7rA<3s VetV, ws (rvveAovrt

direiv,

speak

tences),

willingly,

negative seneav is

I
)

briefly, concisely.

h
'

to

aKpifih

dire.lv,

strictly

speaking. ws eiK&aai, to

make a

guess.

the predicate to elvai. oXLyov Sdv, all but. itara rovro etvai, in this respect. ocrov ye fi' elS'evai, so far as 1 know.

147.

before and the Predicate after the Infinitive (commonly called the Accusative with the Infinitive).

The Subject

The Infinitive, like other parts of the verb, takes a Subject before and a Predicate after. The Predicate is, of course, in the same case as the Subject. The Predicate may often be the Supplementary Predicate, in which case the Infinitive is, of course, part of the Predicate. The following examples will explain this construction.
Indicative.

Subject.

58

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

Infinitive.

THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE

The explanation
is

INFINITIVE.

159

that the

mind has
f$07]6eiv.

inserted the Accusa-

tive Subject before the Infinitive, licet

eecrTiv vjjXv v/tas \af36vTa<s

mihi

me

esse beatum,

oVAa

personal passive construction is used in Greek impersonal passive followed by the Accusative and Infinitive, the former being the commoner.

Note

2.

The

side

by

side with the

Kupos

rryyiXd-q

vi/crjcrcu.

XEN.
irepl vofuov.

Cyrus was reported

to

have conquered.

AeytTcu 'A\Ki/3id8riv HepitcXei Sia\e)^8rjvai

Xen.
It is said that Alcibiades conversed with Pericles about the
laws.

This construction should

be

compared with the Latin

(traditur, fertur, dicitur, existimatur, videtur, creditor, etc., etc., with an Infinitive); e.g. existimatur errare, probus esse,

he

is

thought

to

be mistaken,

to

be

upright

(it

is

thought

that

he, etc.)

See
is

struction

Zumpt 607 and note. But the Greek much freer, and follows many adjectives.
;

con-

Certain adjectives, Sixcuos, agios, worthy

ri'8oos

e7rmj8eios

(fit),

take either a personal or an impersonal construction with the Infinitive. Thus we may say either Sikouos eif" ravra iroieiv or Suctuov ktrrw ifie TuJro iroietv, 1 am justified in so doing or it is right for
(probable),

dva-y/uos (necessary),

may

me

so to do.
ii.

Instances of Sikcuos occur in Plato's Apology Soph. Ant. 400.

1, Crito iv.,

Note

3.

Soku

is

generally personal

dS Xeyeiv juoi SoKelre, Cf.

I think

you speak

well.
to

rots 7rA.eio-Tois ISokow, most people thought, (they seemed

most).

eSoa aKoCo-at, I thought

I heard.

Soku) uoi tov ovov egdyeiv,

lam

determined
:

to

lead out the ass.

is

The impersonal oWi tivi, is rare With Sonm, Soku, cf. different.

Sonet,

ISoge, it is decreed,
'ioiKa,

the use of

seem,

mihi. varying with eWe, and the Latin, videor mihi, videtur

formal or Note 4. The Infinitive is used for the imperative in solemn language, in poetry more freely.
Digitized

by Microsoft

160

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

In legal orders or
X.(i
. . .

(a)

official

commands.
Ae. Ach. 1000.
to the
!

(XKOvere

irlveiv

mrb
t

T?}s (raAiriyyos.

Hear
(b)

ye,

good people all

drink
yes

trumpet's sound.

With

aKoveTe compare

In prayers.
deol woXtTai,
/*?; yue

SoiAeias ru^eiv.
let

AESCH,

Gods of

my

country,

me

not meet with slavery (grant

that, etc.).

Examples occur in Soph. speaks), Thuc. v. 9, vi. 34.

Note
5.

Elect. 9,

Ant. 1080 (where a king

(Of. Lat.

The Infinitive is used in expressions of 'Mene incepto desistere victam.')

to Ala
I to

surprise.

T7js ixmpia<s,

vo[iiC,uv, ovra.

Tr/XiKovrovL

Ar. Nub. 819

Wliat folly
thinh of a

man

of his years believing in Zeus

tenses of the Infinitive correspond to the tenses throughout in the character of the action (as continued, finished, or indefinite).
6.

Note

The

of the Indicative

They only express distinctions of time when representing the Indicative of the Recta in indirect statements or direct
questions.
fect

But the Present Infinitive sometimes represents an Imperand not a Present Indicative.

was
What
This
is

ovv cu^as VTroXa.fif3o.veT

zvyto-dai rbv QiXittttov

6V

tWevSev

de F. L. 381. 10. vows do you suppose Philip was offering when he was
libations 1

Dem.

making

me

dicere

scribit).

e<j>r]v. So in Latin, memini means / remember I was saying (also accepimus, See Zumpt, 589, note.

often the case after

Madvig first pointed out this, 171. 6, Rem. discussed in Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 15.

1.

It is fully

I48.
1.

THE INFINITIVE AS A NOVA.

Infinitive, like a Substantive,
Digitized

The

may

stand either

as the Subject or the Predicate of a sentence.

by Microsoft

THE INFINITIVE AS A NOUN.

Subject.
Predicate.
Predicate,
97

161

to oiktjv StBovat

irorepov nrdo-^eiv tL iariv

\ is it
J

iroielv

To pay a penalty Paying a penalty

,

( to suffer

or

( to

do something

suffering

doing.

Plato.

So in English "

to see is to believe," seeing is believing.

article, o-oxppovciv

Karely but sometimes without the Soph. Ai., discretion is a virtue.

2.

xaXov,

The

Infinitive

with the Article

Its cases

like a Substantive.

is declined throughout then follow the construc-

tions of the Nominative, Accusative, Genitive,

Its

and Dative.

oblique

cases

are

connected

with Prepositions.

the same case as

Unlike ordinary Substantives, however, it (1) can govern its verb, and (2) can be qualified by an It corresponds to the Latin Infinitive and adverb. Gerund.

Nom.

Ace. to KaXaq

a noble life, honeste vivere. a noble life, honeste vivere (with preposition), honeste vivendum. Gen. tov /ra\w? tfjv, of a nolle life, honeste vivendi. Dat. to3 KaXais rjv, for or by a noble life, honeste
to Ka\w<;
tp\v, %r\v,

vivendo.

So Sia to KaXwf
(epeica)

rjv,

ev (77730?)

*aXaJs

Zjrfv,

avTl

tov icaXax;

tftv.

Note, (a) Infinitive

Nominative

It is used like the Latin quod with Indicative (the fact or

circumstance that).

to

ILeXoTTOwrja-iovs

avrots

p)

{SoTjdrjo-ai irapicrxev

vp.iv
i.

Sa/Mtov

KoWtv.
chastise the

THUO.
Samians.

41.

The circumstance enabled you to

is

that the Peloponnesians did not help them

often a Dative of means, cause, or circumlb) The Dative stance, instrument, like the Gerund in -do.

DEM. KeKpdrrjKe QiXMnros 7<j) Tporepos yeve<r6ai. Philip has succeeded by being foremost in the field.
Digitized

by Microsoft

i62

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

The Genitive
is

(c)

very often Objective.

tov
irieiv emOvfiiq..

rjTrelyovro irpbs tov TOTa/xov

Thuc.
They were hurrying
to

vii.

84.

the river

m their desire to drink (of

The Genitive of the Infinitive sometimes expresses the aim The idiom or purpose (usually in this sense it takes eve/cot). is considered either a genitive of value or a genitive of cause. (See Causal Genitive.)
ereix"7"^? 'AraAai/Tij
t})v
17

vijcros totj /tij

Xyo-ras KaKovpyeiv

ii. 32 (cf. i. 4). The island of Atalante was fortified in order that the pirates might not injure Huboea (with a view to their not, etc.).

MBoiav.

'

Thuc.

not very common, but thoroughly estabThe only thing in Latin like it is the genitive with the Gerundive, a construction which frequently occurs in Livy haec prodendi imperii Bomani, tradendae Hannibali victoriae sunt, xxvii. 9 ; aeguandae libertatis esse, xxxviii. 50. See Zumpt, 662, note 2.

The

construction

is

lished, in Attic Prose.

I49.

THE PARTICIPLE.
Participle has three different uses.

The

A.

It is

an attributive to a Substantive.
6 irapcov
")(povo<s,

the present time.

B.

It qualifies the principal

Verb of a sentence

like a

Supplementary Predicate, or Adverbial Sentence.

ravra eirparre (TTpaTrffcov. He was doing this while he was general.

C. It supplements the meaning of a verb, the meaning (cf. the SuppleInfinitive).
Digitized

of which would otherwise be incomplete

mentary

by Microsoft

THE PARTICIPLE AS AN ATTRIBUTIVE.

(a.)

163

The

Participle agrees with the Subject.

jravofj.ai <j>i\o<ro<l>a>v.

I
(&.)

leave off philosophising.

The

Participle agrees with,

and

is

the Predicate

to,

the Object.

Travco ere tyikoaafyovvTa.

I make you

leave off philosophising.

ISO.

THE PARTICIPLE AS AN ATTRIBUTIVE.

The
Participle

A.

1.

when

joined to a Substantive cor-

responds to an Adjective, or more frequently to a Eelative

sentence.
al

Thuc. AioKov vrjeroc KaXov/ievai. The so-called islands of Aeolus (or,

Aeolus, as they are called).

the islands of

Ka,TeiXr]<f>a)<;

kivSvvos tt/v iroXiv.

DEM.

The danger which has overtaken

2.

the state.

The

Participle with the Article,

when

the Substan-

tive is omitted,

becomes

itself

a Substantive.

ol Xe'yovres, the speakers.

ol

hpdaavTes, the doers.

6 rtrjjw, the first-comer.

/3ov\6jj,evos,

any one who

will (see Article).

01 irpoo-qKovTes, relations,

propinqui.

Note 1. The Future Participle with the Article signifies, in a sort of final sense, one who is ready, prepared or witting, to do
so

and

so.

n Ywpa dyadn The

soil

fiv /ecu

evrjaav ol epyaaofievot.

Xen. An.
was
rich
there were people to Digitized by Microsoft

ii.

4.

22.

and

till it.

164

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

2.

Note

Many

neuter Participles are Substantival.

to o-v/jifapov, expediency, utile, utilitas in agreement, t<x pui<pa <rvp,$ipovTa, t?js

small interests of the state. ra Seovrci, duties or duty,
officia.

With an Adjective jrdAea>s, Dem. The

Thucydides and the poets use a neuter present participle as a Substantive, where an Infinitive would be more usual.
iv

tw

pr] peXerZvTi,, by

want of training

= !v T< prj pekerav).

fear=TO SeSievai, to #apo"OW = To dapcreiv=To THUC. Odpcros. SOPH. PMl. 674. TO VOO-OW=TO VOO-lV:=17 V0V0S.
to
ScSids,
ol tkovt6s, parents; 6 reKwv, the father; <5 l/ceivoimother (17 TiKrovo-a also, Soph.). to tttotjOcv cry faxfi: ^le wild fluttering in thy TCKuv, his father, heart, Eur. Bacch. 1269.

In the poets
riKovo-a,
the

r)

B. The

Participle qualifies the

Principal

Verb

like

a Supplementary Predicate or an Adverbial Sentence,

(Conditional, Temporal, Causal,
etc.).

These usages of the Participle are very common in Greek, and are most important to notice. The particles

which bring out the special significance of the Participle

in each case should be carefully noticed.

The

different

usages are given under the heads of the different sentences

in the Note
or

Compound
3.

Sentence.

(See Index)

The

Participle in a Sentence expresses circumstance

(/cat

manner

generally.
eira),

The

particles ovtioi, totc, eTra, /cpra

eVetra are

put before the Principal Verb. The sense hovers between that of time and of circumstance. To this head belong the phrases (as old as Homer), ri paOdv tI iradwv ; in the obliqua 6Vi paOwv, iradmv.
rl paOovres epapTvpeire v/tefs
;

DEM.

45. 38.

What induced you

'

to

give evidence ?

t'i

Tradovo-au dvrjrah eiacri

ywai^i;

Ar. Nub. 341.

mortal

What has happened women?

So
ti xa)i/
;

to (the clouds) that they look like

ti ySouAduevos ; Plat. Phaed. Digitized by Microsoft

236, E.

THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.

fiaOwv

165

All these phrases are periphrases for why? wherefore? tI ; learning what, on what inducement ? denotes an internal motive ; rl irad&v ; ailing or experiencing what ? denotes an external cause (on what compulsion ?).

Note

4.

Under

this

head comes

also the peculiar use of

e'xuf in colloquialisms.
irola vwoi-qfiaTa. (f>\vapeZs c'^cov
;

PLAT.
?

What

sort of shoes

do you keep on chattering about

ti Xrjpeis

ex lov

>

lit. ^

a ^ nonsense in
trifle ?

so behaving.

Why
Why
Note
5.

do you incessantly

to KVTTTa^us ex (0V Tepl rrjv

dvpav ;

ARISTOPH.

do you keep on poking about at the door ?

The

Subjective particles
SeStacri

Participle in a Comparative sense with the d>s and &mrep, as if, as though, as thinking.

Io-ti.

Men

tov Q6.vo.tov (is eS 6i8ot oti p.iyi(TTOV rwv ko,kuv Plat. Apol. xvii. fear death as though they knew for certain that it is

the greatest of evils.

151.

THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.

{i.e.

The Genitive Absolute

a Genitive which
sentence)
is
is

a Participle agreeing with

not in the main construction of the equivalent to an Adverbial sentence, either

Conditional, Temporal, Causal, Concessive, or expressing

Circumstances generally.

The same
ticiple

particles

which accompany the simple Pargo with the Genitive Absolute.

(TTpaTrj'yovvTO's.

{e.g. /juera^v, a>?, etc.)

ravTa

errpaj^Or)

Kovavos

ISOCfi.

These operations were carried out

when K. was

general.

I should
us 58'

ovu av tfkdov Sevpo vpjov jii) not have come here if you had not ordered me.
the understanding {as

KeXevovTUV.

On

SOPH. Ai. e)(6vT(av tuv8' iirbo-Taa-dai (re XPVknowing) that this is so, thou
thy

must
So)
-

form

J^9^zic<% k?rofM>
t

lcnm

that

is

evm


'

66

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

Note. The Participle alone, without the Genitive being expressed, occurs (see Genitive Case, Genitive Absolute)

(a.)

Where
ol Se

the Genitive
TroX.efii.ioi,

is

easily supplied

from context
'EAAiji/coi/

7rpoo~i6vTu>v (sc.

twv

men-

tioned just before), tews plv rio-v\a^ov.

Xen. An.
remaining
quiet.

v. 4. 16.

The enemy, as they were approaching, for a while were

Cf. iv. 8. 5, ZpwTrjo-avTos (sc. avTov).
(b.)

In certain impersonal expressions

outios e)(6vTa>v.

Xen. An.
quae

v. 4. 16.

Such being

the case,

quum

ita sint.

io-ay ye Xdevrwv

on

at vrjes irXeovo-i.

THUC.
i.

i.

116.

On

the

news arriving that

(sc.

the ships were sailing.

vovtos ttoXXQ

Atos).

Xen.

Hell.

1.

16

(cf.

An.

Vesp. 774).

Thuc. i. 74 (S}?A(o06j/tos), Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 18 (o-r/^oi/Compare the Latin Ablative Past Participle Passive (cognito, edicto, etc.) agreeing with the whole sentence.
Cf.
Oivrtov).

The

Participle
cos

is

very rarely omitted.

tpov

/xovijs 7reAas (sc. oi'crijs).

SOPH.

0. C. 83.

Since

I alone am

at thy side.

152.

The

Genitive Absolute in Greek and the

Ablative Absolute in Latin.

Great care must be taken not always to use one where we should use the other. The Greek has a perfect series of active participles, the Latin has no past participle active except in the case of Deponents.
Therefore in Latin

we may

write

His verbis editis egressi sunt So saying they went out. But in Greek this would be

and not
TovTtav Xe\6evTU)v eAietrctv, Digitked by MicWsoft

THE A CCUSA TIVE ABSOL UTE.

which would mean when
out.

67

this

had been said (by others) they went

Nor, on the other hand, would Latin tolerate such an apparently slovenly structure as the following
:

8iaj8e/3ijK0T0S ^8tj ILepixXeovs, rjyyeXdr] avT<ji.

After P. had already

crossed,

news was brought him.

In Latin we should write

Pericli

iam transgresso nuntiatum

est.

153.
Instead

THE ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE.

of
is

Absolute

the Genitive Absolute the Accusative used with Participles of Impersonal verbs and
1

certain other expressions.

A. Impersonal Verbs
B. Passive
elprjfievov,

Seov,

e^ov,

irapov,

irpocrrJKOv,

fieXov, jxerafiikov, Sokovv, tvj(ov,

So^av or Sogavra (ravTa).

:

Participles used impersonally

irpoara^div,

yeypa/ipevov, SeSojfievov, irpoffTerajfievov.

;

0. Adjectives with ov used impersonally

at(T%pov
ov, etc.

dSuvaTov

ov,

The
etc.,

particles ?,

mirep
the

(as though, as thinking that),

may accompany

Accusative

Absolute.

The

Accusative Absolute is equivalent to an Adverbial Sentence, Causal, Temporal, Circumstantial, and especially

semi-Temporal and semi-Concessive.

ovSelv (^ov^elp'qvr]y^ayetv iroKe/iov
aipr\<rerai,.

No
01

one will choose war

when

it is

in his power

to be

at peace.
tie

Tpiatcovra, <i? e^ov

rfir)

avrols Tvpavvetv aSew?

Kpoelirov.

Xen.

The Thirty thinking it was now in their power to play the despot with impunity, issued an edict, etc.
1

Obs.

This

is

doubtless an Internal Accusative, probably of respect.

Tjiitp

Compare

for instance rbv aiiriv rpbirov with Sdl-ow Digitized by Microsoft

ravra.

168

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

ovyi $ e ecraxra/Aev oiov re bv kcu hvvarov.

PLAT.

We

did not save you when (though)

it

was feasible and

possible.

Sofjavra vp.lv

Tama,

e'iKecrde

On

coming

to this resolution (decree),

avSpa? etcarov. ANDOK. you appointed a

hundred men.
cnamr) eSenrvovv, wsirep tovto TrposreraypLevov.

Xen.
They were
talcing their

meal in
so.

silence,

as though they

had

been ordered to do

For other examples see Thuc. i. 126 (86av). For passive participles see Thuc.
V.

(vTrdpxov),
i.

viii. 79 125 (SeSoypevov),

30

(elp-qpivov), v.

56

(yeypap.jj.ivov).

Sometimes a personal verb is found with the Accusative Absolute, but then usually with the subjective particles ios,
<Ss7rep.
'ivioi

t<3v

dScA^Gv dpeXovo-iv

&%irep ov yiyvopevovs <f>t\ovs.

Some men

neglect their brothers

under the impression that they

3.

do not become friends.

Xen. Mem.
Cf.

ii.

3 (quotation shortened).

Mem.

i.

2.

kcu irepavOkvra),

20. But Xen. Hell. iii. 2. 19 (SdavTa ravra THUC. iv. 125 (nvpviOlv ovSev).

154.

VERBALS IN

-Teo<s.

Verbals in -reos imply necessity.

case as the verb to

which they belong.

generally in the Dative (but see

They take the same The agent is below). The verbal has

two constructions, the Personal and the Impersonal.

155.

A.

THE PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION.

ecrri croi
rj

ao-Kwrea

apery.

You must

practise virtue.
tibi virtus.
Digitized

Colenda est

by Microsoft


THE IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION.
156. B.
169

THE IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION.

is
,

Here the verbal

acncwTeov,
j

either singular or plural.

) )

> eari aoi

Tim apeTwv.
'

acrKTjTea,

7ri9vu,t]Teop,l

> ' n C effTt TO 49 aVOOCOTTOlS TWS UOSTm. emOvfirjrea, )

' '

>

-p.,

DEM.

Men must
Note.

covet virtue.
is fairly

agent, however, in Attic, Accusative, instead of the Dative.

ovSevl rpoirtp
(jia/itv

The

often in the

e/cdvras dSiK-qreov elvai.

PLAT.

Grit.

We
And

maintain that

m no way must we deliberately commit intogether.

justice.

the Dative and Accusative are both found Eur. Phoen. 710, 712.

157. C.

THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.

The Supplementary Participle is used, much like the Supplementary Infinitive, to complete the meaning of many verbs and verbal phrases. It agrees either (1) with the Subject, or (2) with the Object of the verb.
158.

THE SUPPLEMENTAR Y PARTICIPLE IN AGREEMENT WITH THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB.

Participle
is

The
Verbs
:

used with the following classes of

* Verbs marked thus have peculiar usages which are explained in the notes.

A.

Verls

of Feeling

and Perceiving
differ

(see

Indirect

Statement).

These

verbs

from

the

following

because they can equally take a finite mood with on or &>?, thus showing the substantival character of the construction

which

&t%JBt^mosam

170

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

B. Verbs of Mental Emotion.

)(a.ip(n,

tfSofmt,

dx&opai, dyava.KT<a (I

am

vexed), x<*X7r<Bs <pepw

(I

am

vexed), pxTa.fieXop.ai,

perapeku

fioi

(I repent,

regret), dvk-

ypfiai (I endure), paStas <pepw (I easily bear).

^alpovcrip aKOVOVTe<s e%era%o[ievwv t>v avBpwrrwv.

Plat.

They

like to

hear people cross-questioned.

;

XpTj/J'O.TUiv

ovk alcrxyvei kiupeXovpevo'S

Are you
You

not

ashamed

to be

devoting yourself to

PLAT. numey-makmg ?
light of doing so).

paSliai <epeis fjp.as diroXelirtov.

don't

mind

leaving us behind (you

PLAT. make

(including persevering
*dp\opai, *vTrap)(w,

C. Verbs of beginning, continuing, and ending an action and growing weary).

(f>8dv(a,

SiareXw, 8idya>, Siayiyvopmi (I

Kap.v(o

continue), xavop.ai, aTrelp-qKa,

and

(I grow

tired).

top \onrov @iov KaOevZovres Zunekolr av.

PLAT.
lives.

You would go on
ov
fjut)

sleeping for the rest of your

tTavcTcofiai <pCKoao(pu)v.

PLAT.

Never will

I give

over the pursuit of wisdom.

I will

ovk dve^opai fwcra. not endure to

EUEIP.
live.

D. Verbs of being manifest, and of escaping notice.

*8ijXos
vvp.i,
ii/Jti

being detected (convicted),

(SrjXS, intrans.), *<avjOos eipi, *^>a.ivopai, SeiK-

Xavddvia, dXlo-Kop-ai (the active 897X0? el tcaTa<ppov>v.

form

is alpa).

PLAT.

It is clear that
Sei^co

you despise me.

avrov

afjiov bvra.
is

Dem.

7 will

prove that he

worthy.

ehei^av eToip,oi ovtgs.

Thuc. They showed that they were ready.

(fiavepOL eifftv aya)vt,%op,evoi iravTei}.

Xen.

It is evident that they all are contending.

Digitizeaby Microsoft

NOTE ON SPECIAL
JliyXew? yap a^ia

VERBS.

171

warpo? t

A%ik\ea)<i epya Spaiv

(pavricrerai,.

Eue.

He

shall he seen to do great deeds

sire Achilles.

worthy of Peleus, and his

<povea eKavdave fioaicwv.

He was

entertaining

Hdt. a murderer unawares.

PLAT.

eav Be a\q><; en, tovto irpaTTWV, airoOavel.

this pursuit, you shall die If you are caught again (if you are convicted of following it any longer).

556, and Ji. 472, Ant. 20 (in nominaexample above) may be intransitive, Euk. I. A. 436, Thug. 72. The above verbs, however, have several other constructions, for which see below.

So

SijAtS,

Soph.

0. G.

tive attraction).

SeiKw/xi (see third

159.

Note on Special Verbs.

1. apxaficu takes both the Infinitive and Participle, more The Participle seems to denote, more usually the Infinitive. than the Infinitive, that the act is going on.

rjpavTO olKoSofieiv.

They began They began

See Thuc.
2.
i.

to

build (of the intention).

rjp^avro otKoSojUoiWes.
the building (the act

going on).

107.

wrapx.
idv Tts
>7/Jas

eS ttoiZv VTrdp^r/.

XbN.

If any one first confers a kindness on us. Otherwise inrdpx< is used almost like Tvyxdvw.
vwdpxei. ex^/Oos
&>v.

DEM.
begin with).

He
3.

is

an enemy

(to

<f>6dvo>.

(a)

ecf>6acre (ecfiOr]) drputop.evo'S.

He was

beforehand in arriving.

ovk av <}>6dvois Xiyiov (gen. of 2d person). Make haste, speakor, quick, quick speak (Lit. you could speaking.) wish, or your duty) not anticipate

(^

172

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

Cf.

The phrase forms an urgent command.

Ale. 662, Arist. PI. 1133.
Cf. Aeye cfiOdcras, speak quickly.

Eur.

Or. 936,

Quin statim loquere

In the
last

example

<f>9dv(a is

in the Participle.

So
Cf.

dv6ft)as /*e <f>9do-as.

ARIST.

You opened

the door before

me

{got the start

of me).

Thuc.

iv. 8.

4.

dvvTU) (I achieve) is

used like

<j>ddv(o.

avvuov v7ro8vcrdjj.evos. ARIST. Look sharp and put your shoes on. avvvas dvoiye. Look alive and open
5.
aicr\vvo[i.ai.
o.ur)(yvo[x.ai Xkyiov.

the door.

am

ashamed of saying {while

to

I do

say).

aicr-^yvofiai Aeyctv.

I am ashamed
6.
dirondfjivu).
dirOKd/JLVIl)

say (and generally,

/ refrain from

saying).

TOVTO TTOMV.
this.

am

weary of doing

WTtOKdjlVlO

I
7.

tovto Troieiv, leave off doing this through weariness.

SrjXos eljM.

Several constructions.
construction with participle.

{a)

The personal
jJi/

SrJAos
It

oi6jJ.evos.

XEN.
u>s

was

evident that he thought.

The personal construction with

S'iJA.os

and participle.
SOPH. Ai.
some
ill

io-TW

(JS

ti Spacrelwv kixkov.

It is plain that he is craving to do

{Spao-dui, de-

siderative).
Cf.

Soph. Ant. 242

mood.

SjjXois (verb)

m.

(5)

The personal and

the impersonal construction with

on and

finite

SrjXoi elo~iv oti IjriKeiVoVTat. It is clear that

XEN.

^g^^^Mom

NOTE ON SPECIAL
SfjXnv icrTLV
077.

VERBS.

173

Trmxrofxai.

PLAT.

It is evident that
8.
<f>avepos ei/xi,

I shall
:

give over.
:

and <j>a.vepov eort dpKW (I suffice), dpKti, it is (Soph. Ant. 547) hcavos ei/u, Ikmov eort, are similarly constructed either with the participle (personally) or with on and a finite mood.
sufficient
9.

(paivo/xai

takes the Participle and the Infinitive.

(aii/Tou dvrjp

dyadbs
fortis.

tTvai.

He

seems

to be (is

considered) a brave

man.

Videtur esse

The appearance

or opinion

may be

groundless.

<cuveTcu dvfjp

dyadbs &v.
is)

He

shows himself (proves himself, manifestly

a brave man.

Cf. appareo in Latin.

Apparebat certamen fore. Lrv. It was evident there would be a struggle. Apparebat utilis. Suet. So ^euSijs faiverai (&v omitted).
ar/pteia (jiatvets (=<aii/ei) ycyeos.

SOPH.

El. 24.

You show proofs

10.

that

you

are.

Xavddvo).

XEN. XeXrjda efiavrov etSws. I know without myself being aware of

it.

Horace
this

Greek e.g. Hor.

(Od. hi. 16. 32) construction.

and Propertius

(i.

5) imitate

Fallit sorte beatior=Xav6dvei 6X/3t<arepa oStra.

is

Barely in Attic Xadwv

secretly,

used participially with a verb=

clam.

11.

Tvyxdva, and (in poetry) KvpZ. PLAT. I chanced to meet a man. SOPH. El. Trpbs rt tovt' ebTrwv Kvpeis ;
TV)(OV TrpotreXOutv dvSpt.

Why

is it

thou speakest thus

The notion of chance is often almost lost in both verbs. They often denote mere coincidence in time, just then. Both are used sometimes without a participle.
SOPH. El. vvv dypourt Tvyxdvei. At this moment he happens to be abroad. Digitized by Microsoft

174

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

o?xo/xa<.

12.

denotes rapidity and completeness.

otyero.1 favyiav.

ot)(0[j,ai <fiep(i)v.

Celeriter aufero.
oi'xetcu Oav<av.

He

is

dead and gone.

el/j,i,

13. StJXos el/M (above), <f>avep6s

Xav6a.vio are also con-

structed with

oVt

and

finite

mood.

For Xavddvu on

see

Plat.
14.

Crito, xii.

The Poets use

this

Supplementary Participle with

.

verbs, e.g. verbs implying superiority and inferiority (vikZ, qrroipai, lXXe.Lirop.ai) doing right or wrong (d8iKCo, dfiaprdvio, eS or KaAfis ttoiS>).

a great

many

l60.

THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE IN AGREEMENT WITH THE OBJECT.

Participle is the Predicate to the Object.
this Participle are

The

The Verbs which take

respondence
is

mostly the

active forms of those in the previous rule, but the cor-

not complete.
to cease),

A. Verbs
iravo)

of stopping (making
(i.e.

finding and

detecting, overlooking

allowing
cf.

to be done).

(I make

to

cease,

iravopai), irepwpS

and efopw, 1
<f>top>,

overlook (TrepieiSov,
Ko.Ta\ap,f3dvo),

en-etSov),

but not

l<3,

8uKvvp.i (I point out),

alpZ (see aXto-Kopat, in previous rule),

I detect,

catch, convict.

<yeXa>VTa<; e%6pov<; iravaopiev.

SOPH.

We

will check the merriment of our foes.

pvr) irepuScofiev vfipiadeicrav Trp> AaKehaifiova. ISAEUS. Let us not look on and see Lacedaemon outraged.

ov

)(aiprq<reis'

dXXd

are

KXeirrovd'

alprjo-to.

ARIST.

You

slian't get off scot-free.

No,

Digitized

by Microsoft

I'll catch s you thievina. *

THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.

175

B. Verbs of perception (see Indirect Statement, 167). Note \. Observe, however, that Verbs of Perception may be used with a Supplementary Participle which is not equivalent to an Indirect Sentence. Thus 6pZ <re x a l'PVTa may mean either / see you rejoicing, or I see that you rejoice.
yp-Oero
Qtrd-qa-ai

Kvpov ireirTWKOTa, he heard that Gyrus had fallen ; but w&troTe pov ctvkocjhivtovvtos ; have you ever noticed me

playing the part of an informer ? clkovo) o-e rjKovra, I hear that you are come; but &kovu) o-ov Sia\eyo[ievov, I hear you con2.

olSa, crvvoiSa, iTrio-rafiai

olSa TavTa iroiSv.

I biow

that

I am

doing

this.

otSa ravra ttokiv.

So with

lu-iora/itu,

I know how to do this. I know for certain

e(ia,VT(p

(scio)

e/iavTiy (rvvoiSa, ovSev brio-To.pv<p.

/ am
l6l.

conscious that

trwoiSa ov&lv rto"Ta/*6vos. I know nothing for

certain.

The Tenses

of the Participle, and

Time

in the Participles.

The Tenses of the Participle correspond with the Tenses of the Indicative always in the character of the act, and sometimes in time.
1. The Present Participle denotes an act in progress, the time of which is usually determined by, and therefore contemporary with, that of the principal verb. But the timo may be determined by some word in the sentence, such as vyv, totc. Sometimes the context, without such a clew-word, determines the time.

ttjv

vvv BoMtiTiav Ka\ov/j,vrjv

is

oyKrjcrav.

ThUO.

i.

12.

They occupied what

ol

now

called Boeotia.

KoptvOwi

(jiikoveiKLas.

p-exP 1 tovtov irpodvp.ui's Trpaxrcrovres dveivav tijs THUO. V. 32.

to that

The Corinthians, who up

at work,

time had been energetically

now abated

their vehemence.

Digitized

by Microsoft

176

THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.

ol <rv[nrpe<r/3evovTes Kal Trapovres Kara/j.aprvp'qcrova-LV.

Dem. de Fals. Leg. 381. 5. Those who were then his fellow-envoys, and were present, will testify against him.
Here
tote would, have

made the time

clearer.

2. The Aorist Participle generally refers to an act prior to that of the principal verb.

TavTO, enroVTK dirrjXdov.

They said

this

and went away.

But in many
eS

cases there is
dva/JVijcrds
to

no such priority
p,e.

of time.

iiroirjcra's

You did

well

remind me.

162.
1.

The Future

Participle.

The Future

Participle, as a rule, denotes

mere futurity

in time only after verbs of Perception.

oZSa Tavra Spd<r<av.

I know
rjSrj <re

that

I shall

do

this.

Tavra Spdcrovra. I knew that you would do

te

this.

Here the Latin future

future participle (me,
6avov/j.evr]

in rus is the equivalent of the haec facturum esse).

Greek

yap

erj8r).

SOPH. Ant. 460.

(or must) die.
esse)

I knew

well that

I should

Here the Latin gerund (mihi moriendum

better equivalent.
2.

would be the

But the Future

Participle often denotes intention,

(a.)

With
Is

a verb of motion.

ovk
Cf.

X.6yovs ik'qXvd',

d\\d

(re

KrevSv.

EUR.

Tro. 905.

I am not come to parley, out THUC. i. 18, 8ov\wo-6/j.evos.

to kill thee.

Here the Latin supine in -um after a verb of motion, rather than the future in -rus would be used. We should translate ?j\9e deao-opevos by spectatum venit, not by spectaturus venit.
3.

The

subjective particle

o>s is

Participles (as to

o^% ^^j^)bso^ denotes

g

often added to the Future the presumed

THE FUTURE PARTICIPLE.

intention (as though) the assumption that).
v\\a.p.[3dvei
;

177

or the motive calculated (as thmkmg, on

Kvpov

(us

diroKrevSv.

XEN.

Cyras with the intention of putting him to death. jxurObv aiTovtrw <Ss ovyl avrola-iv d><peX.eiav &ropAvr)v. Plat. Bep. 345, e. They demand, pay on the assumption (ground) that no benefit
seizes

He

will accrue to them.

uxpeXeiav Zo-ofievqv, Accusative Absolute.

4. With the Article the Future Participle denotes not only intention, but what is likely, able, or calculated to do anything.

rroWa

Set

He who

tov el5 o-Tparqyrjo-ovTa 4'xav. XEN. Ap. lii. 1. 6. wishes (means) to be a good general must have many
ovre 7r\oia

qualifications.

ovre (titos dgovra.

<j

6pcip6/j,e6a //.evovrcs,
-

&rn
vi. 3.
to

to,

crar-

Xen. An.
if

20.

We

have neither food

to eat,

we

stay,

nor ships
si

convey us

Neque frumentum

est quo vescamur, navigia quibus vehamur.

manserimus, neque
pAXXui.

The above may be expressed by a periphrasis with Thus 6 <TTpaTriyrjcni>v=6 jue\Xw 0-rparqyqo-a.v.
o-uS'

6 K(o\vo-<ov irapriv.

SOPH. Ant. 260.

could stay them.

Nor was there at hand one who Neque aderat qui prohiberet.
5.

The Future

Participle

may

take the place of a direct

sentence.

tov KacriyvqTov ti
tf^ovTos
7}

<gs,

p-eWovTos

Soph. El. 317.

What sa^st thou of thy brother, Will he be here, or will he tarry ?

=TTOTepov
rjei
rj

p.tk\ei;

will show how widely the Greek from the Latin future in rus, and how much more elastic the use of the former is. Mr. Paley first pointed this out in the Journal of Philology (viii. No. 15), from which number much of the above is derived.

The above examples

differs

Future Participle

Digitized by-Microsoft

PART
CHAPTEE
163.

II

THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.

I.

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
1. 2.

3.

THE INDIRECT STATEMENT. THE INDIRECT QUESTION. THE INDIRECT PETITION. THE INDIRECT STATEMENT.

164.

The Indirect Statement quotes words

at first-hand
rectly).
(i.e.

or thoughts not but at second-hand (i.e. indiIt therefore follows verbs and phrases of saying
directly),

and thinking.

The Indirect Statement

is

expressed in three ways.

A. By
B. By
C.

the Infinitive.
Sri,

or a>? with the Indicative or the Optative,

never with the Subjunctive.

By

the Participle.

165.

A. THE INFINITIVE IN

THE INDIRECT
of

STATEMENT.
1.

The

Infinitive follows

expressions

saying and

thinking.
178

The Subject before the

Digitized

Infinitive

and the

by Microsoft

INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT STATEMENT.

Predicate after
rule).
it

179

are in the Accusative (but see next

is

The usual negative

1.
tjytjfii

ov (see second example).

N.B.

and

c/xxovcu

regularly take the Infinitive.

2.

Xkyw
is

(active) generally takes

on

or

<!>s,

Xkyerai
<Ls

(it

said) takes either the Infinitive, or on,

with

a finite verb.
3.

ehrov takes 6Vi

and <Ls. (Observe that eh-ov, I said, introduces a Statement ; cwrov, I bade, a Petition. 1 told has the same double sense in English.
elvai,
<f>r)fii.

tov Slicaiov avSpa evSaifiova

i"

PLAT.

assert that the just

man

is

happy.
EUKIP.

ovSe'va ol/icu Sai/Aovav elvai ica/cov.

J
2.

think that none of the deities

if

is evil.
is

But

the Subject of the Infinitive

it is

the same as the

Subject of the Principal Verb,

at
all.

usually not expressed

The Predicate

is

in the Nominative.

This

is

called the Infinitive Attraction.

(prjal <TTpa,TT]ye7v.

He

says that he

is

general.

vo/il^et<s elvat, </)oz/i/>?.

You fancy
6
'

that you are prudent.

(fipovLpas the Predicate.

A\ei;av&po<; ecpacricev Aios uto? elvai.

to

Alexander used

pretend that he was the son of Zeus.

Alos vlos the Predicate.

Abler) elvai,
<jyr]tri.

AESCH.
is Justice.

She saith that she

If the Subject needs to be expressed, alro? is used in

the Nominative (in

KXe'cov ouk

all

genders and numbers).

ecf>7j

avro<;

aXK

eicelvov crrpaTrjyelv.

THUC.
Cleon declared that
it

was not himself but Nihias who

was

general.
Digitized

by Microsoft

180

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
vo/Mi^ere ovv clvtoi elvai <f>povifioi.

You fancy,

then, that it is

you who are prudent

(that

you yourselves are prudent).

The Subject however,

unless
it is

o,vt6<;,

must never be expressed

it

necessary to distinguish

from a Subject in
it.

the Accusative, or to throw a special emphasis on

In nine cases out of ten the presence of a Predicate in the Nominative is sufficient.
Note 1. Instead of a-ui-ds the personal pronouns eyw, cn5 occur (Dem. 52. 12, 9. 74,, Lys. 25. 18), and the reflexive cruets (Plat. Rep. 518).

used instead of the nominative This construction, more emphatically than the Infinitive Attraction, marks the Subject of the Infinitive as the Object of the main verb.
is
(ep.e, fie, ere,

Sometimes the accusative

e/mvrov, o-eavrov, eavTOv).

(j>7]fu

Seiv Iksivovs ojiro\k(rdo.i, epe Se crd^ecrdai.

to

ANDOK.

i.

30.
be

I hold that they ought

acquitted.

be

condemned

to

death,

and I

For other instances see Plat. Gorg. 474, Xen. (epavrov), Herod, i. 34 and ii. 2 (eiavrov).
Note
taking,
(like
2.

Cyr. v.

1.

21

Verbs

swearing).

of hoping and promising (expecting, underThey usually take the Future Infinitive

the Latin).
ij\iriev

pd^rjv

e(recr0o.i.

He

was

expecting that there

fijTijcretv.

would be a

battle.

vnr&T^ov ravTa

You promised

to

search into

this.

But with little or no change of meaning they also take a Present, or an Aorist Infinitive sometimes, the future time being expressed not by the Infinitive, but the principal verb.
e\iriei

Swarbs
to be /xoi

eTvai S,p\uv.

PLAT.

He

hopes

able to rule.

vn-eaxero

BovXeicraxrOai.

XEN.

He undertook toadvise

me. Digitized by Microsoft


Sn

AND
ovk

&>s

WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE.

av.

181

Also an Aorist Infinitive with

TJA-TTifov lK7recre?i/

av TlepiKXea.

ThUO.
be banished.
linricrot,

They were not anticipating that Pericles would

iKTreaeiv av is

the Recta.

an Oblique Apodosis, representing See Note 3.

av in

The
IA.jrtfa>.

sort of verbs that

^

come under

this

head are

vTTUTXvoviiai.
^

o/joA.oy<3,

eA.5rta (lAn-iSag) c^co.

S/wv/ii.
viroSexo/JLai

avvridifiai, j

"

&

Sokw,
Trpoo-SoKm,

\
j

(J

etc., etc.

'

undertake).
If the Indicative of the Recta

Note

3.

The

Infinitive with av.

had an

dV, the Infinitive will retain it in Indirect Discourse,

but not otherwise.

oijxai

I think
Note
4.

yap av ovk d^apio-Taig p.01 X etv it would not be a thankless task.

e^oi.

DEM.

In Recta, ovk av

of the Infinitive, in Indirect Discourse, represent the corresponding Tenses of the Indicative or Optative in the Recta, and therefore denote the same time.

The Tenses

See 147, Note

6.

166.

B.

on

AND w S WITH THE INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE.

'(1)

The

Indicative

(in

Primary

or

Historic Sequence).
ore or
a>? with-<

(2)

The Optative
Sequence).

(in

strict

Historic

N.B. Never the Subjunctive as in Latin.

is ov.

The Negative
first

To understand this construction what the Direct Statement is.

avToi
fidpTvpe's
e<r/jt,ev,

it is

well to see

we

ourselves

an

witnesses, is a

Direct Statement.
This, in

an Indirect Statement of Primary Sequence,

becomes \fyovaiv

^kfifM&o^k 6 """-

0bserve that


182

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
is

the person alone

selves

changed, "they say that they them-

are

witnesses."

The

tense

and mood

remain

unchanged.

In an Indirect Statement of Historic Sequence

it

may

be expressed in either of two ways, both being equally

common
,i

eXeyov
i.e.

&>? <

( (1) ;n ( I (2)

avTot ttacTvpe? elev (Optative)

avroi fiaprvpei
is

><./'/>
used,

eicriv

/T

...

,.

(Indicative)

either

the Optative

and
is

this is the

really

Indirect Statement, or no change

made

in the

mood

in

consequence of the Historic Sequence, the Indicative being

used.

This
is

retention of the

mood and

tense of Direct

Discourse
syntax.

a well-known practice, pervading all Greek

Again, a Direct Statement

is,

icparqa-opev t5>v Adrfvaimv,

'

we

shall beat the Athenians.

The Indirect Statement

(1)

is

Primary, Xeyovaiv

on
(
-l

KpaTiqaovcn tojv AOrjvaiwv,

the Athenians.

They say that they will teat

(2) Historic,

ekeyov

on

1.

KpaTriaoiev rwv'AdTjvaicov.

They said
that

they would beat the Athenians,

\ 2.

KpaTTjaovai ra>v 'Adrjvaiwv.

The two The

constructions, the Optative

are often found alternating in the

rules therefore in
:

and the Indicative, same paragraph. passing from the Direct to the

Indirect Statement are

1.

2. 3.

The Person is always changed. The Tense is never changed. The Mood may be changed from the Indicative
to the Optative when the Sequence is Historic, but constantly the Indicative remains unchanged^n Hi^or^c a| Primary Sequence.
Y

cr

on

AND

i>s

WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE.

difficulty as to tense

183

In case of a

and mood, the learner

should practise turning back the Indirect to the original

Direct Statement.

exOpov?

Thus in the sentence eroXfia Xe'yetv &>? TrdvTw; tov<; eviKTjirev, he made bold to say that he had conquered all his enemies, the original Direct was TrdvTas tow? The tense eftOpovs iviKTjara, I conquered all my enemies. and mood of the Direct Statement are retained. Again, ^/ee o ayyeXXmv Tt? to? 'EXareia KaTetXrjTTTai, there came a messenger announcing that Elateia had been The messenger said in the Direct, 'EXareia captured. In the Indirect KaTelXrjTTTai, Elateia has been captured.
therefore the original tense and, in this case, the
are retained.
\e<yet
a><s

mood

It

might have been

KaTetXrjfifie'vr]
<f>rjfir]<;.

e'lrj.

ovSev e&Tiv aSitcmrepov

that there is

AESCHIN.
unjust than

He

says

nothing more

rumour.

Eecta
Let him

ovb~ep eari k.t.X.

Xoyicrdo-dw tovto otc aypiiev vdre IluSvav.

reflect that

DEM.

we once possessed Pydna.

/C -

Eecta

etj(pP' ev
rj

T-^"
rjSrj.

(ftavepax; elirev oti

7roXis T6Tei%iffTai
city

ThuC.
been

He

told

them openly that the

Eecta

had already

fortified.
:

TeTet%io-T< k.t.X.

d,7reKpivdfir)p

I answered I am.

on fioi XvaVTeXoloicnrep s^we^eti'. PLAT. that it was good for me to be exactly as

Eecta
:

XvatreXel

k.t.X.

Kvpo<i eXeyev,

on

r\

0S05 eaoiTo vpos fiaaiXea /j,eyav

els BaftvXwva. Cyrus told them that the march would against the great King.

Xen.
be to

Babylon

Eecta

eaTai

k.t.X.

Digitized

by Microsoft

184

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
enrev oti o avrjp av aXwaifios
ir\.

Xen.
6
dvrjp

He

said that the

of course
eirj.

man

might

be captured.

The av

belonged to the Direct.

dXmatfws av

in the

The Indicative and the Optative are sometimes found same paragraph.
eXeyov
oti,

Kiipo? fiev reOvqicev 'Apialos Se ev

eir).

t&

araOfia

They said that Cyrus was dead, and that Ariaeus was in the camp.
It

might have been

reOvrjicws

e'lrj

and

earl.

eiyvto

oti eaoiTO nrepi t^? tov 'A\Ki/3td8ov

KadoBov

\oyo<!,

Kai

on

01 'Adrjvatoi evSe^ovTai, avTrjv.

Thuc.

He saw

that there

would

be

a proposal for
the

the recall

of Alcibiades, approve of it.

and

that

Athenians would

For eyvm

&ti see 3.

The

Participle in Indirect Discourse,

Note

1.

Note 1. on and u>s. <!>s being a subjective particle, i.e. expressing what is in a person's mind, is used, more than on, of opinions, of pretexts, sometimes of untrue statements, and with negative expressions, ov Aiyco a> s. <!>s is used rather than oti after verbs of thinking.
Tio-o-acfiepvrj's

Sia/JaAAet tov

Kvpov
to his

tt/oos

tov d8eA<ov

a>s

hrifiovXevoi (ivtQ.

Xen. An.

i.

3.

Tissaphernes accused. Cyrus was plotting against him.

e'Aeyov a>s

brother, alleging that

he

\P1

They were

telling

PLAT. Apol. 1. fy*"? ei3A.aj3o-0ai. you that you ought to be on your

guard

(against me).
vo/ii'fovcriv

Iki

The

local belief is that

us "H<aio-Tos x a ^ K<^"- Thuc. iii. 88. Hephaestus is working at his forge.

6Vi is
Digitized

In Soph.

Elect.

43

used of an untrue statement.

by Microsoft

ort

AND
2.

&>s

WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE.

185

Note

poetry,

6W

Instead of on and <5s other particles are used in ovvcko. (Soph. El. 1476), odovvtKa (Soph. El. 1308), (Soph, ^mt 685, PM. 169).
e.g.

ov yap alcrddvet irdXai

falvTas davovtrw ovvck' dvTavSq.s icra

And
1

hast thou not

SOPH. El. 1476. ; marked long since

dead
?

that thou hast been accosting the living as the

kX.VIS

odovveK Aiyurdos pkv ov Kara, crreyas.

SOPH. El. 1308.

Thou
That Aegisthus
offw9 also is used.
is

hearest

not beneath his roof.

ava, ip(o

p,lv

ov\

O7rtos

rd)(ovs vrro

Svo-ttvovs iKavo).

Soph. Ant. 223.

not say that by reason of speed

My
Cf.

liege,

I will

I come

scant of breath.

Soph Ant.

685, Phil. 169.

As the Watchman
translate, " I

is a clown won't say as how."

We

we might be tempted to use " how " just in the

:

same way.
So
ut is often used in Latin poetry

Quid referam ut volitet crebras intacta per urbes Alba Palaestino sancta columba Syro
:

Ut que,

etc.

Tibull.
dv with
the

I.

vii.

17,

and the poets passim.

If

aV is found with the Note 3. Optative in the Indirect Statement it is because it was there In such cases the Optative with av in the in the Eecta. Indirect is the Apodosis of a Conditional Sentence which in the Eecta was in the Optative with dv.
Optative.

eAegav

ojs

iravr av toot.
that he

They said
e'Aeav
<os

would
:

see everything.
3

Direct

irdvi

dv K5oi

(sc. el eXOot).

irdvr 1S01.
that he

They said

saw
:

everything.
etSe.

Direct

iravra

Note 4. If in the Direct the Imperfect or Pluperfect Indicative were used, they should be retained in the Indirect
Digitized

by Microsoft

86

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
is

(both Primary and Historic). The reason of course there is no Optative Imperfect or Pluperfect.
fy<ev

that

ayyeAos Xeyoiv on Tprfpeis rjKove 7rapaTrXeovo~as.

Xen. An.

i.

2. 21.

There came a messenger saying that he had heard that triremes were sailing round.
,

Direct

t/kovov,

I was

hearing.

For further
Note
grudge;
5.

rules see Oraiio Obliqua.

emotion,

Verbs and phrases of

Qavp.d(m t I wonder
do. ;

dyavaKTd),

I am

indignant ;

Setvov

iroiovpai,

cfrOovS,

I am ashamed; ko-ri, it is a shame); pep^o^au, I blame, lowed not by 6 but by the conditional
alo-xvvopat,

alo-xpov
etc.,
el.

(Seivov
fol-

usually are

roSe edavp.ao~a

el

iv apexes tiQrfi pepei tyjv dSiKiav.

Plat. Rep. 348.

I was

surprised at your setting injustice in the light of a virtue.

8et,vbv TTOiovvTai el pf/ eicrovTai.

ThUC.
are not
to

They think
as miror quod.

it

abominable

(if) they

know.
si)

These phrases

also take on,

Cf. miror si

(mirum

as well

l67.C. THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.

The Participle
of Perception
ber)
is
(see,

perceive, hear, learn,

used in Indirect Discourse after Verbs mark, know, remem-

and some

others.

opS,

I see.

The usual Negative is ov. oTSa, I know (o~uvoiSa epavrQ, I

alo-ddvopai, I perceive.

am

conscious).

I hear. irw6a.vop.ai, I
&kov(i>,

kirio-Tdp.a.i,

learn by in-

p.epvijpai,

quiry.

pavddvd),
ob

I learn.
E\\r]ve<; ovk tfSeo-av

I know for certain. I remember. eTri.Xav8dvop.ai, I forget, yiyvdio-KU), I get to know.

Kvpov

redvrjKOTa.

Xen.

TJie Greeks

did not know that Gyrus was dead.

jjSew? a/cova

IjWp arou?
Digitized

BiaXeyo/xevov.

PLAT.

love to

hear Socrates conversing.

by Microsofmr

THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.

e/jtaVTif fwijSeti'

187

ovBev

rio-Tot/4ev(j).

I was
ovre

conscious that

I knew

PLAT. Apol. nothing for certain.

viii.

fikya,

ovre crfiiKpov vvoi8a ifiavraj cro^os &v.

Plat. Apol.

vi.

I am

conscious that in no degree, great or small,

am I wise.

The

rales about the Subject

and the Predicate of the

Infinitive equally apply to the Participle.

THUC. They saw that they were not succeeding.

ewpcov ov tcaTopOovvres.
at<r8avofie6a yeXoloi
6i>Te?.

Plat.

We perceive

that

we are

ridiculous.

Note 1. The Indicative (and Optative) with 6Vt and <Ls are, however, often used with Verbs of Knowing, especially yiyv&ctku),

and
saw

018a (ur&' OTl).

ol 'AOrjvaioi

eyvco

on

ovSev evSuxrovo-iv.

THUC.

He

that the Athenians

would not

give in at all.

Note 2. If the Principal Verb itself is a Verb of Perception the Indirect Sentence will be in the Infinitive to avoid the clumsiness of two participles close together, if both Participles refer to the same person.
alo-86/i.evos

ovk av jreiflav avrovs.

THUC.
intolerable.

Perceiving that he should not convince them.

alo-66/j.evos

ovk dv

vdduv would have been

Note

3.

dyyeAAw, I report, sometimes takes a Participle.

irpwTOS /3a<7tAet

KCpov

kirijiovXcvovra rjyytiXa,
that C.

XEN.

I first
(see Eule),

reported

to the Icing
,

was

plotting against him.

ofioXoylo,

I agree, assent may almost be

Participle.

ee\eyx<, eiriSeiKw/ju, I point out regarded as verbs of statement.

These take a

Note i. The remarks made about dv with the Infinitive apply equally to the Participle.
Note 5. The Tenses of the Participle in Indirect Discourse represent the Corresponding Tenses of Jjjdirect Discourse, and therefore the time which they denote. Digitized by Microsoft

: :

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
l68.

THE INDIRECT QUESTION.

as the Indirect

The Indirect Question may be regarded

Statement put interrogatively.
person, tense,

All the rules given as to

and mood

for the Indirect

Statement apply

equally to the Indirect Question.

The Subjunctive must

never be used, as in Latin, in an ordinary Indirect Question.

(See Deliberative Questions.)

is ov.

The Negative

For the Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs see Pronouns. Their Indirect (or Eelative) forms are used in Indirect Questions, but it is just as common to use the Direct Forms. El, like the English */, is the regular
indirect interrogative, tion

meaning whether

(in a single ques-

=Lat. num).

Direct

rk earl Who is he I
:

Indirect Primary

ovk olBa oorts (or

r/s) earl.
is.

I do not know who he

2.

CfTf, eari.

I did not know who he was.

Direct

ravra

erroitjaa';
it 1

Bid you do
Indirect Primary
:

epmra avrov

ei

ravra

errolnaev.
it.

He
Indirect Historic
:

asks

him

if he did
'

rtpwrnaev avrov \
(

,'

2. ei
lie

TavTa '"'oiTiaeiev. ravra eirotrjaev.

it.

He
b,ri rreirovOare

asked

him

if

had done

ovk olBa.

PLAT.
not.

What you have felt I know

Digitizeaby Microsoft

THE INDIRECT QUESTION.

THUC. They ask them if they are pirates.
epcoraxTiv et "Kijarai eiatv.

Eecta
tore oios

\rjo-rat, eerre

r\v

o Xaipecfiwv.
sort of
;

Plat.

You know what

Eecta
SirjpatTWv
:

man

Chaerephon was.

oto<; rjv

/ used

to

av avTOVS ti \eyoiev. PLAT. ask them what they meant.

:

Eecta

ti

\eyeTe

ijpeTO, el Tts 6t7; efiov <7o<f)a>Tepos.

PlAT'.
I.

He

asked if there was anybody wiser than

Eecta
fjtropovv
ti,

eari, ts

7TOT6 \eyei 6 0eo?.

loss to
:

PLAT.

T was at a
Eecta

understand what the god meant.

ti irore Xeyet

e/3ov\evovTo nva KaTakevtyovaiv. DEM. They were considering whom they should leave behind.

Eecta

ti va KaTaXetifrofiev
et,

rjpanwv avTov
i"

avaifKevcreiev.

DEM.
set sail ?

was asking him

Eecta
:

if he

had
;

set sail.

ai/eVXevcra?

did you

Observe in examples 6 and 7 that Sequence is disregarded.

the

Historic

Good examples

will be

found in Soph. El.

32, 679, 974,

1348, Ai. 557, Ant. 239, 1190.

If the Direct uses the Imperfect Indicative, e.g. n's fy o ; what was the tale ? the Indicative will be retained in It
eTirov

p.v9os

Indirect Historic for reasons explained on p. 182.

become

Sorts

rjv

6 fivdos.

itirov Sorts

sir)

6 fiv0os

would would

represent a Direct tis kttiv 6 /ivOos ; See a good instance in Soph. Ant. 239. Digitized by Microsoft

190

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.

169.

DELIBERATIVE OR DUBITATIVE INDIRECT QUESTIONS.

These questions, when Indirect, are in the Subjunctive (Primary or Historic Time), or the Optative (Historic
Time).

The Subjunctive

is

retained in the Indirect because

it

was the mood of the Direct.

Direct
':

tI

<f>a>

What am I to say?
Indirect Primary
:

ovk e^co

o,ti (rt)

(f>a.

I know not what 1 am to Non habeo quid dicam.

Indirect Historic
T
:

say.

ovk elyov \ /V
(

'

'

;'/,'

2.

0,TI (Tl) p(U.

I knew not what I was to say. Eon habebam quid dicerem.

ovk
e%a>, 07j-<?

aoi eeirw a vow.

to tell

PLAT.

/ don't know how I am

Direct
:

you
;

my

thoughts.

7r<s croi eiirca

rjiropeb b ti %prjcrai,To t&> Trpayfiart.

Xen.

He was at a

loss to
:

know how

to

deal with the question.

Direct

ti xp7]o-co/x,ai

ejrr\povTO et KopivBioK irapaholev tt\v ttoKlv. They asked whether they were to deliver over
to the

ThuC.
the city

Corinthians.

Direct
rjiropwaav
birr]

-rrapaSaifiev

KaOopfiicrcovTai.
loss
:

THUC.
to

They were at a
Direct

where

to

come

anchor.
;

irrj

Kadopuiawueda
by Microsoft

Qigitized

THE INDIRECT PETITION.

to, Se

191

/ aW foww
Obs.
el

XEN. I am to #we the cups to with Subjunctive, and see Note.

eKirw/tara ovk 018' ei toi5t^> 85.

Cyr.
this

viii. 4.

16.

whether

man.

eA.eyes

on ow

av e^oii ee\.0iav

o,ti x/)$o o r <*vr$.

Plat. Oil

iv.

Pom were
to

saying that if you escaped you would not know what do with yourself.
e'ire ko.to.ko.v(tu><71v

!/3ovA.iWto

etre Tt

aAAo

xprj&mvTai.

Thuc.
TAey were
death, or do something else to them.

ii.

4, 6.
to

deliberating whether they should burn the

men

Observe the

eire

eiVe

with the Subjunctive again.

170.

THE INDIRECT PETITION.

(a

The Indirect Petition

advising,
efarav,

command, a

request, or a

prayer) follows verbs of commanding, requesting, praying,

and the
bade

like.

or

ordered

ayyeKkm,
dljia>,

bid.

(irpoel-irov).

Trapaicak5>,

I exhort.
upon,

iceXevco,

SiaKe\evofx,ai,

I order. I

request, call

order,

ex-

expect.

port, direct.

irapaivco,

TrapccyiyeWco,
struct.

I order, intake

cnrayopeva),

I advise. I forbid.
is

All these
tive is

the Infinitive, which

the

common

Greek construction
firj.

for the Indirect Petition.

The Nega-

The

difference

between the Greek and Latin construc-

tions here should be carefully noted.

elirov tc3

Uavaavia rov

Kr\pvico<; /mtj

XenrecrOai.

Thuc.

They ordered Pausanias not

to leave the herald.

1 d is interrogative as well as conditional, and so goes with the Subjunctive as well as with the Optative. 'Edit (fy) is not interrogative where it appears to be so, as in a few phrases with <ri<6irei (e.g. ovcixei but Vvirchance (si forte) i&r <roi doKia eS \iyuv).

/^fegfgW^c^o^g


192

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
eiceXevo-e tovs

"EXXrjva?

et? fia-XV 1'

Ta^drjvai.
battle.

XEN.

He

ordered the Greeks

v/j,a>v

to be

drawn up for
e%eiv.

Seo/Mai

avyyvafirjv

/jloi

PLAT.

I beg you

to

pardon me.
croi iretOecrOai

irapatvovftev

rot? j3eXTt,o<ri.

We
I

urge (advise) you

to listen to

your

betters.

a%i5> o-e aki]dri Xeyeiv.

call

ANTIPHON.
to tell the truth.

upon

(require)

you

The Subject

or Predicate will be in the

:

Nominative

if

necessary, as in the Indirect Statement

IIpo//,r]0ea irapaiTelTai Ewi/ATjOevs

avro^

veifiai.

Plat.

Epimetheus begs Prometheus that he himself

distribute.

may

("Let me distribute/' says Epimetheus.) For verbs of forbidding see Index.

Note 1. Some of these verbs take ottws (Situs pvq) with the Future Indicative and Optative. iia.KeXevop.ai, irapaKaXS, I exhort ; dyyeXXw, irapayyeXXia, I tell, order ; airayopevw, I forbid ; irpoetirov,

I proclaimed,

ordained;

di<o,

I beg,

call upon.

Sia.KeXtvovTO.1 oitojs Tifiu>pr)<Terai iravras tous tolovtovs.

Plat. Rep.
They exhort him
Keiv(p 8' epvtjv
to take
1

viii.

549,

e.

revenge on all such people.

oitojs

dyyeiAar evToXfjv

tov jraiSa

S'ei.

SOPH. Ai. 567.

that he

And

bear to

him my message

show the

boy.

d-irtjyopeve's 6Va>9 p.r)

toSto aTTOKpivoip/qv.

Plat. Rep.

i.

339, a.

You

told

me

not to give this answer.

after past tense in Rep. of ojtos, oirms
/tij,
i.

O7rcos /xijSei' l/oa

337,

E.

For the Construction

see Final Sentences, etc.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEK
171.

II.

THE PAKTICLE
kI,

"Kv.
were originally Demon-

strative

"Av (and the Epic kcv, Adverbs meaning

Doric

<)

there, then, so, in that case,

possibly, contingently.

They were Adverbs

tive

Statement of the Verb.

perchance, qualifying the PosiThis part of the subject belongs

to Philology rather than Syntax.

cally
1.

"Av in Attic Greek may be regarded two distinct uses.

as having practi-

It is joined to Verbs, the Indicative (Historic Tenses), It denotes a Conon which the fulfilment of the verbal action

Optative, Infinitive, and Participle.

dition

depends.
2.

It

is

joined to Pronouns and Particles with the

Subjunctive Mood.
ore, eirei,
eirettxr],
:

Such are

0?, oo-rt? (6? av, octtk;

av)

irpiv, ews, etc. (prav, eirav, eireibav,

el {lav, r)v)
:

irpw

sometimes the In this use av (but not in Final Sentences) makes the meaning of the Pronoun and Particle indefinite, who-sp-ever, when-so-ever, if ever (in one very common use of lav), though this meaning cannot always be expressed. When Historic Sequence requires a change from the Subjunctive to the Optative av must e.g. 6? av Bovkmrat but 6? Bovkono. be dropped, r rr *
av, e&>? av)

the Conditional

Pinal

&>?, 07T(9, ocfipa (ta?

av, etc.).

Digitized

by Microsoft

194

THE PARTICLE

&v.

172.

DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE SENTENCES.

Before dealing with Eelative, Conditional, and Temporal

it is most important to understand the difference between a Definite and an Indefinite Sentence.

Sentences

those

In the Sentence ravra a fiovKovrat, e^ovai, tlwy have things which they want, the antecedent rama is
{those particular

definite

and known

things),

and the
act.

Eelative Sentence which follows refers to a definite

But in the Sentence a av fiovXavrai e%ovaiv, the Antecedent is indefinite and the act is virtually Conditional
they have whatsoever things they want, anything they want,

anything if they want

This second sentence in Historic it. Sequence becomes a /3ov\oivto el%ov. Similarly in the sentence e7retS?7 Se o\t,yap%ia eyevero ol rpiaKovra fierejre/ityavrd
fie,

when an oligarchy was

established the Thirty

Tyrants sent for me, Socrates is speaking of a definite time (b.c. 404) and of a definite act. But eire&dv oTuy-

apyla

yivi)-rai,

whenever, or as often

as,

an oligarchy

shall
is

he established, or is established,

an indefinite time and act

spoken

of.

if ever, or

The sentence if at any time,

67T6iSrj

is

virtually conditional again,

thus, idv irore yevijrai.

etc., and might be expressed In Historic Sequence the sen-

tence would be
It will

yevoiro.
is

be seen therefore that when the Antecedent

Indicative
is
;

definite the

Subjunctive with dv,

e.g.

used where indefinite, the or the Optative without av

o\k elSev eirr)veae, those

whom

he saw he praised.
sees

ob? av
01/9

iSr)

eiraivel,
vet,,

whomsoever he
by Microsoft

he praises.
to

tSot stto
'

whomsoever he saw he used

praise.

Digitized


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Note. Further instances of
1.

195

Definite sentences.

Kvpov

/MTCure/ttreTCii

otto ttjs apx*)S>

^s

avrbv

o-aTpdirrjv

67TOirjO-.

XEN.
from
the province of

He
?<os

sends for Cyrus

which he had made

Mm governor.
egecrriv
it is

ravra

vp.iv emScif^ai deXca.

PlAT.
to

While

permitted

I desire

to

explain this

you.

eTroXiopKCL

tous "EXXrjvas /x/h oS ^rjpdvas rrjv SiWjOuva

ecXe rrjv vrjaov.

ThUC.
and

He was
2.

blockading the Greeks until he drained the ditch

took the island.

Indefinite sentences.
Heori 6Vt av /3ovXrjrai sinew.

ANTIPH.
likes.

He may
p-^XP Until
1

say whatever (or anything) he

^' " v

fy

^ Kfo, at a~irovSal pevovriov.

the armistice be observed.

XEN.

I return
av

let

ecus irep

ip,irve<a

ov

p.r)

Tra.vcruyp.ai (pi.Xocro(t>wv.

So long as I breathe I will never

give

PLAT. up philosophy.

KaTecrrrjcra &e kTriptXtirrdai citi Scot

T<j>

xPV ^avocrTparov. Antiph.

appointed
required.

Phanostratus

to

provide whatever the chorus

173.

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Conditional
the Protasis

Compound
and

Clause

consists

of

two

Correlative sentences, one of which contains the Condition,

is called
;*

the other contains the

means Premiss. Apodosis (iiridocris) means The Apodosis is tile Principal, the Protasis the SubWhether originally a clause with el was a Subordinate Sentence.
1

Protasis (irpdraais)

Consequence.

ordinate Sentence, is a point which need not be discussed in Attic How far the Apodosis, as being the Principal Sentence, Syntax. influences the construction of the Protasis-, is an interesting question, which is alluded to under the Oratio Obliqua. Professor Goodwin (Journhl of Philology, viii. 15, p. 33) strongly maintains the assimilating 6 force exerted by the principal verb on the subordinate verb, Digitfced by Microsoft

ig6

THE PARTICLE
is

S.

Consequence, and
reduced to
its

called the Apodosis.

Sucn a clause
:

simplest form
If

may

be thus expressed

or
i.e.

A C

is

B,
if

C is

D,

is I),

is

the fulfilment or truth of the Consequence depends on the fulfilment or truth of the Condition. This dependence of the Consequence (the Apodosis) on the Condition (the Protasis) is the essential point of a conditional
clause.

174.
I.

DISTINCTION OF CONDITIONS.

Time.

The most obvious distinction of Conditions is that of Some refer to the present, others to the past, others
This distinction
is

to the future. Conditions.

universally present in

all

II. second distinction concerns the opinion implied as to the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the Condition. In two forms, and two forms only, the expression in itself conveys information on this point. 1

third distinction is that between Particular and Particular Condition refers to a definite act or set of acts e.g. " If the windows up-stairs are
III.

General Conditions.

There is, as Professor Goodwin tells us, no special form implying that the condition is or was fulfilled. That is to be decided by the context. This is true, though of course a fact may be clearly implied, some and in cases narrated. Such is the case chiefly in past General Suppositions, e.g. et tis Avreliroi, eiBtis ireBrficei, Thuc. viii. 66, which is the same as saying, "Every one who spoke against them was at once got rid of." General Supposition may also be expressed in an Ordinary Past form. Thus, d ti fiXXo linidvSwov tytveTo avivrwu liertaxopev, Thug, iii. 54, which is only a way of saying, took part in every danger as it arose." Indeed a fact is narrated here under a, conditional form, though not by virtue of the form itself, which need only denote a connexion between Condition and Conseqnence. With regard to General Suppositions in present time, they may refer to facts, but usually are generalisations from observed facts

"We

or habits.
Digitized

by Microsoft

"

197

DIVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

open, the rain is coming in;" "If you receive a telegram send it on to me;" " If he had a five-pound note he would lend it me." General Condition refers to any act which may occur or have occurred any number of times "If ever a candidate is convicted of bribery he loses his seat;" "If (ever) he were left to himself he used to waste his time;" " If (ever) he had a shilling in his pocket he gave it to the first beggar he met.

175.

DIVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

:

Conditional Sentences accordingly may be divided into Ordinary Conditions ; II. General or Frequentative Conditions. Ordinary Conditions again may be subdivided into A., those with regard to which no opinion is expressed whether the Condition is fulfilled or unfulfilled, probable 01 improbable, true or false ; B., those in which the form oi expression implies that the Condition is unfulfilled. There is no form to express an opinion that the Condition is fulfilled. The context alone could suggest this. In General Conditions again no opinion is expressed concerning the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the Condition. Thus in Ordinary Conditions of the second class alone is any such opinion expressed.
I.

I76.

ORDINARY CONDITIONS.
For Real Examples
see further on.

A.

All that

is

stated is that a Consequence did, does,

or will follow from a Condition. The expression in itself does not tell us whether the condition was, is, or will be
fulfilled.

That
if.

is

beside

the

question

the

stress

is

wholly on the
forms

The

sole difference

between the three

(1, 2, 3) is <mit8Utipftncrosoft

rgS

THE PARTICLE
1.

&v;

Present. 1
of the Indicative.
aSi/ceis.

Any Primary Tense

ei

ravTa Troieis If you do this (strictly if you are doing this)

2.

you are doing wrong,

Past.
Historic Tense of the Indicative.
,

Any

et

ravra

ewolets

rjSitceis.
> ?. /

/ i > ^ 67TOM7t7as

rjdiK7]cra<;.

were doing this you were doing wrong.

this

^y
3.

\ did

you did wrong

single act).

(aorist,

Future.
in future time there are three

To express a Condition
pression.
(a)

forms, differing, but differing only, in distinctness of ex-

The ordinary future form.

eav ynv) ravra <
> aot/cncret?. , ^ iroii]<Tr)<; )

If you do

this (strictly

you will do wrong.

if t/ou shall do this)

1 There are endless varieties of present and past conditions, and the two are constantly combined. Present and future may be combined.

el

ravra

ire7ro(i)KOS

aSuteTs, ^5/fci]Kas.

If you have done

this

you are doing wrong, you have done wrong (the Apodosis might be an
Imperative).
irKe'ojfiev.

el

ravra

SoKei

trot

If you think
el

so

let

us set

sail,

ravra iroiels If you are doing this ei ravra iwoleis or ^7roh)tras If you were doing, or did this

dXy^treis.

you

will be sorry.

ASiKels

or

dSt/fi}<reis.

you are doing,

will do,

wrong.

And

so on.

" It is hoped that no difficulty will arise from the selection of the verb d8i/tfi in these special examples. 'ASikw, of course, means, I am wrong Minos, a an doerf^^go^ fafflgmi) injure.

ORDINARY CONDITIONS.
(6)

199

The
,

less vivid future form.

7rofOM??

aSiKoirji; av.

7f yoM should do
(c)

this

you would do wrong.

form.

The most vivid future

// 2/ow

sAffl^ cfo Ats

yow will do wrong.

B. Besides a
or in Past Time.

difference of Time, the form of expression

is

implies that the condition

unfulfilled either in Present

This

is

implied by the presence of av

of the

in the Apodosis,
Protasis.

and not by any peculiarity

1.

Present (but see

el

note).

rama

eiroieK

?7sk? av.

If you did this (strictly if you were now doing this)

2.

you

would

be

doing

wrong.

Past.

ravTa eVoM/cra? If you had done this

el

TjSt/n/cra? av.

you would have done

wrong.

JVbfe.

The

Imperfect,

however, very often refers to a

descriptive, habitual, or continued past.

eOav^d.^ofj.ev av ere. el raCra eirpacrcres If you had been acting thus we should have been admiring

you.

The

Pluperfect denotes a state or condition in the past.

if

e.g. el k\e\v[>.r)v,

I had

been set free

(m a

state

of

liberty).

Tr&\a.i

av
'

diroAtoAr;,

should long ago have been a dead

mm

Digitized

by Microsoft

THE PARTICLE
177. Ordinary Conditions in

&v.

Greek and Latin.

Apodosis.
d8lK?S.

A.
Protasis.
1.

Present.

el

TOLVTO, TTOIUS

Si haec facis

iniuste facis.

ravra

7rrot7jKas.

Si haec fecisti.
2.

Past.

et

raura
1

CTT0(1S
. /

rj&bKeis.
rjSlicqo-as.

<
[

67rojo-as

St haec

a-

faciebas J

iniuste faciebas. iniuste fecisti.

^,- IA

3.

Future,

(a) e&v (fiv)

/Si ,,>
,

ravra {

fr

dSi/ojcras.

haecfeceris (int. perf.)

(

iniuste fades.
aSutoii)? av.
d8iK7jcreta9 av.

(0) N
'

a rawa a
raCiTa

<
I

iroioins '
,

7roiij<7eias

S haec facias
(c)
irotijcreis

iniuste facias.
d.8iKr]<rei s.
l

#1 Aaec fades

iniuste fades.

B.
1.

PRESENT

(or

el

ravra

eiroieis

3 ' jjoiKis av.

Continued Past).
Si haec faceres
2.

iniuste faceres.
ijSiKiytras av.

PAST.

ravra eiroiijcras Si haec fecisses

el

iniuste fecisses.

II.

178.

GENERAL OR FREQUENTATIVE
CONDITIONS.

Observe the Apodoses, distinguishing these uses of the Subjunctive

The normal Latin equivalents of the Latin of Ciceko, Caesar, and Sallust are here given. The variety of Latin forms is far greater than the Greek, and varies more according to the period of the writer. The above are given only as a guide in comparing the two languages, not as an attempt at a full division of the Lfttin Conditional Sentences.
1

These are best taught by real examples.

NEGATIVES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES,

and Optative
Conditions.

zoi

(in the Protasis) from their uses in OrdinaryIn the Apodosis any frequentative tense

denoting respectively present

and past time may be

employed.
1.

Pkesent

(a generalisation true

now

or for

any future

occasion).
avrjp
-7rovr)po<;

A
2.

bad

man

is

SvaTV^el, kolv evTvxfj. in evil state,

MENAND.

Even
Past.
et

if he e'er is fortunate.

rt? avrenrot, evBvi eredvrjKet.

ThuC.

If

ever

any one
to death,

spoke against them he

was promptly

put
eredvrjicei is,

of course, a virtual Imperfect.

179.

THE NEGATIVES IN CONDITIONAL

SENTENCES.
of a Protasis is
/M7,

The Negative

of

an Apodosis
e%et.

ov.

ei fir; ravra Troiel? If you are not doing

ovk koXox;
this
it is

not well.

For exceptions

see the chapter

on the Negatives.

Relative Conditional Sentences.

Real Examples are given further
on.

explained, a Relative Sentence with an Inis equivalent to a Conditional Sentence. Any form of the Protasis with el or lav may be expressed by a Relative Sentence. Both 6's and 00-74? are used, but oo-Tis, as being the indefinite form, is preferred, especially in In negative sentences /iij is sufficient affirmative sentences.
definite

As has been

Antecedent

to

show that the Relative

is indefinite. Digitized by Microsoft

202

THE PARTICLE
A.
1.

S.v.

Present.

Protasis. a (a nva) fya

Apodosis.

= 6? ri
(3.

e\ei.
l

2.

Past.

S.

two.) [ l

*-

ev

3.

Future,

(a)

8,

(a

nva) &v
exV-

e'x27

= edv ti
(b)

a (a nva)

e'x"'

= i ri
(c)

exi.
fet

a (a Ttva)

=
1.

Tt eei.

B.
Present
Past.
a (a nva) a (a nva)
e?^6i/

(or Impf. Past).

2.

ot^v

POSITION OF
Note.

S.v.

203

present participle alone is given (except in B. course the aorist participle, denoting a single as opposed to a continued act, may be used in any of the forms, tvhile the present participle denotes an imperfect act {i.e. an act in progress).
2).

The

Of

l8l.

Position of av.

av of an Apodosis can never begin a sentence. Its natural position is after its verb, but, as it possesses a power of emphasising the word it follows, it often comes before the verb and after some word which is to be emphasised. Almost any word may be so emphasised, especially an interrogative or

a negative.
ovk av e^oi/xi y' ei7refv on oi Trpoo~ei~xov tov vovv. I could not say that I was not attentive.
tt(3s

PLAT.

av

rts,

a ye

pA) erritrrano,

ravra

cro<f>6s eirj

XEN.

How could

man

be wise in matters of

which he knew nothing

certainly ?

ttoXXy] av T6S eiSaipovia euy Trepl toi>s vkovs.

Plat. Apol. Great would be the good fortune in the case of the young,
ap oSv av
jj.e.

xii.

oi&rde TotraSe

cttj Siayevecrdai.

Plat. Apol. xxl

Think you then that I should have lived all av belongs to Siayevecrdat.
kirieiKr)

these years ?

av

fioi

SokQ

irpbs

tovtov Aeyeiv.

PLAT. Apol.
rieiKrj.

xxiii.

/ think I should

be adopting

conciliatory tone towards him.

av belongs to Aiyeiv and emphasises

As in the last two examples av when separated from its verb often comes near oiofiai, Sokw, 4>t}/xl, oTSa, so much so as But we must be careful to look as if it belonged to them. ovk 018a av el, or ovk to connect the av with its proper verb, av should be especially noticed, e.g. av otSa el for ovk otSa el ovk olS' av el jrei'crai/u (Eur. Med.), I know not whether I should persuade him, where av belongs to Trelo-aifii.

182.
"Av
is

Repetition of av.
For

often used more than once in the same sentence. this repetition there may be two reasons. Digitized by Microsoft


204

THE PARTICLE

&v.

1. In a long paragraph, which is complicated by interrupting clauses, av occurs at the beginning. It thus strikes the keynote of the whole so to speak, and gives warning that the whole coming statement is conditional. It occurs again later on near the verb.

2. It may be repeated, more than once, even in a short sentence, if any special word is to be emphasised.

Examples.
I.

In long paragraphs
vjxus
8'

t(us

Tax'

av

dyOofievoi,

Sxrirep

ol

vwTafovTEs
xviii.

eyeipopevoi, Kpovvavrvs

av

p.e,

ire.iQd[x.e.voi

'Kvirif, paSicus

av dTTOKTelvaire.

PLAT. Apol.

But you

N.B.

they are being roused from a nap, might listen to Anytus, and, with a tap, put me to death, and think nothing more of it.
Tax"., perhaps, often attaches

very possibly in annoyance, just like people

when

an av to

itself.

In Plat. Apol. xxxii., a good instance. The sentence begins with eyw yap av otp.ai then seven lines later on ot/mi av recurs, followed by av evpetv, (all the av's belonging to evpeiv).

II.

For emphasis
ovk av cwroSooyv
not give

I'll

no not a copper

oij8'

av o/3oA.ov ovSevi.
to

ARIST. Nub. 118.

any man.
ere
;

ti Srjr' av (is Ik twvS' av ti^icAot/tt

SOPH. Ai. 536.

How

then,

knowing what has happened, could

I assist

thee 1

ovt' av KeXevcrai/i' out' av, el OeXois

TrpacrcreLV, ep,ov

en
SOPH. Ant. 69.

y av

ijSews Sp(pr)s fj.era.

I would
Desire

not urge thee, no I nor shouldst thou

now

to

help me, would

I have

thy help.

Good

instances occur in Soph. Ant. 466, 680, 884; Aesch.

Persae, 431.

183-

Av with Future

Indicative.

Many

"Av with the Future Indicative, Infinitive, and Participle. critics have maintained that this construction does Many instances have been not occur in Attic Greek. removed by revision of texts. Mr. Riddell {Apology, p. "7, and Digest, p. 139) regards the construction as abundancly established, and cites, seven imitancesfrom Plato, e.g. Rep.

ELLIPSE OF THE APODOSIS, ETC.

615
d,

205

xvii., ,Leg-

av r/a Sevpo. Other cases are Apol. Symp. 222 A, etc. Also Xen. An. ii. 5. In Phaedr. 227 B, ovk av o'iu [i(. 13, av KoXatrecrde. iroirprtvOai. In Onto. XV., ovk oiei av (fraveicrOai., av with av occurs with the future partithe future infinitive occurs, ciple in Plat. Apol. xvii. (end of chapter), ovk b\v Trot^aovros. Madvig denies, Kriiger defends, the existence of this last

ovx

r/K,

ovS'

719

E,

construction.

184.

Ellipse of the Apodosis,

and Ellipse of
its

the Verb.
"Av of an Apodosis
is

sometimes found without

verb.

The verb however

oi 8' oiKiTai

(an Indicative or an Optative) easily supplied from the context.

may

be

The domestics are

so) once,

peyKovcriv dA/V ovk av irpb tov. Ar. Nub. 5. snorting, but they wouldn't (have been doing ovk av (sc. eppeyKov).

Where two verbs are connected or opposed, it is enough to use of once only, with the first, unless some lengthy complication of clause renders it necessary for the sake of clearness to repeat it, or unless some word is to be emphasised.
ovSets av
rjv 0-01

6s i/J-ov KaTe/x,apTvpi)o-ev (sc. av).

You would have found no

against me.
ti eiroirjo-ev av
;

one

Antiph. Her. 15. who would liave given evidence

yj

8r)\.ov oti &p.oaev (sc. av)

i

DEM.

31. 9.

What would

he have done
?

Is

it

not clear that he would have

taken an oath

185.
omitted.
ovSei/

Ellipse of the Protasis.

as

Sometimes the Protasis,

in

all

languages,

is

wholly

It can be easily supplied

from the context.

yap av ifiXafS-qv (sc. ei Tt/f)jo-ajinjr, from what has preceded). Pl. Apol. xxviii. I should liave received no harm (had I done so and so).

yap av Kareipydcrw. SOPH. El. 1022. So had-A thou compassed all (sc. el toioSc from a preceding wish.
irav
Digitized

fjo-9a),

supplied

by Microsoft

206

THE PARTICLE

S.v.

186.

Ei and av both in the Protasis.

In several instances el and av are both found in the Proalways an Optative). One of the best-known instances is from Plat. Protag. 329 B., koX eyta, eiirep aAAo) to> dvdp&Trwv Treidoipvqv dv, /ecu croi Treldop.ai, for myself, if I would trust any other man, I trust you. Here it is considered that av belongs to the verb ireidoifi-qv, which does double duty, both as a Protasis with el, and also as an Apodosis with av to another unexpressed Protasis, thus el irei6obp,T]v, if I ivould trust (i.e. 7ra6otiJ.rjv av, I would trust, el tiotiv S0117, if he should give me his word). This is an established Attic idiom, e.g. Dem. Phil. i. 18, ovtoi 7ravTeA.a>s, ovS el prj KOirjcran' av tovto, ei'KaTa(j>povr]tov o~n, it is not lightly to be despised, even if you should not do so
tasis (nearly
:
1

(do so

jj,r]Sels

Isoc. Archid. 120, el &e if the occasion should arise). av vjxZv d^iwreie ffiv diroo'Tepovp.evos iraTplSos, TrpocnjKei

k.t.A., if
it

none of you should care

etc.

to live

if deprived of his country,

is

behoves you,

In this

last

example the Second Protasis

given in the participle aTroo-Tepovp.evos, as it is also in Dem. Meid. 582, el oStoi xprjp.aTa ey^ovTes pvn Trpooivr av, if these men would not spend money if they liad it. Other instances occur (perhaps) in Aesch. Ag. 930, and Sept. 513. See also Eur.' Hel. 825, Dem. Meid. 1206, de Fals. Leg. 190 (with Shilleto's note), Antiphon, 6. 29, Xen. el av dxf>eX.rjo-eie). Cyr. iii. 3. 35 (davp.aoip! av An essential point to notice is that in all these instances (except Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 35) the Apodosis is in the Indicative, generally in the Present, sometimes the Future. The Optative with el and av, therefore, does not denote a remote future supposition except so far as it refers to the unexpressed Protasis. Hence in their notes to Aesch. Ag. 930 (reading el irpdrra-oip.' dv) both Mr. Paley and Mr. Sidgwick consider el irpdcrcroip.' dv a variant not for el wpa\ro-oi.p.i, but for el irpd^ut, translating not, if I should prosper, but, if I have a chance of

prospering.

Jelf ( 860) and Professor Goodwin (Moods and Tenses, 107) compare the Homeric el icev with the Optative. But in all the Homeric instances an Apodosis with the Optative and Kev
is

joined,

e.g.

II.
if,

v.

273,

el

tovto)

xe

\d/3oip.ev dpoifieBd Ke lake them,

kXcoi eardXov,
should,

in the case given,

we should

we

win goodly renown.

1 2 1 . 1 9 ei ov occurs with Digitized by Microsoft
,

In Dem. Timoth.

a Past Indicative

At

IN AP0D0S1S.
tfv

ao7

roivvv touto l(T\vpov

av

tovt(s> rtKp/qpiov,

Kajxoi yevktrdm
:

Observe the Apodosis in the Imperative if this would have been strong evidence for him (i.e. if he had been able to adduce it), let it be evidence for me too. Here, as Professor Goodwin explains (p. 101), the Protasis means if it is true that tMs would have been, so that reference is really to the present, and only to Dem. de the past so far as the unexpressed Protasis requires. Cor. 260. 2, is another instance if d emxdp-qo-' av is read ; only the Apodosis which follows is ti's ovk av airkKreivt ;
TeKixqpiov.
:

Note. There is no difficulty in connecting an Apodosis with more than one Protasis referring to different times, e.g. Dem.

de Cor. 274. 28, tirev^o/iat

cwroi/n kgu eiWov,

Tracrt

tovtois,

I pray

to

all these, if

d dkrjdrj irpbs v/ias I should speak, and did

speak the truth before you.

187.

Ae

in Apodosis.

8k sometimes introduces an Apodosis as if it were coThis is instructive ordinate with, or followed, the Protasis. as showing that the logical importance of the subordinate sentence (Protasis) may assert itself over the grammatical importance of the Principal Sentence (the Apodosis), Such cases, however, are very rare in Attic.
el
-

oSv kyio yiyvwo-KO) pyfjTe ra ocria jJ^re 8i8aaTe p.. Xen. Hell. iv. 1. 33.
is

to. StKaia, ii^ets Se

If therefore I know neither what you then teach me.

Cf.

holy nor what

is just,

do

Soph.

0. T.

1267

Suva

S' fjv.

188.

idv seemingly Interrogative.

interrogative as well as conditional, but kkv is only and must not be used in Indirect Questions. Where it appears to be interrogative, as in two places cited by Liddell and Scott, it comes after <tk6ttu or o-Kkfai, and
is

conditional,

clearly
o-K&f/ai,

means,
eav rdSe

"if
o-oi

by chance," e.g. Xen. Mem. iv. 4. 12. fiaWov dpko-Ky, consider if perchance you
Digitized

like this better (si

forte tibi placuerit).

by Microsoft

208

THE PARTICLE
o.v

Sv.

189-

Participle with av

with Participle seemingly in Protasis. must always be in Apodosis. But

crtyto.

sometimes examination and explanation are necessary.

7r6XX' av e)(wv e'artlv,

Though I have much

to say, yet

I hold my
and
is

tongue.

an apodosis, the sentence being equal to ex'M' " v (" PovXoifi-qv), a-iyla 8e av emphasises 7roXXd. (or ey> osjre/D ttoXX' av c'xot/u).
e\(av is a concessive participle,
itself

o~v8ds r' av ovk av aXyvvais irXiov. SOPH. 0. T. 446. If thou speed hence thou wouldst not vex me more.

Here

<rv9ek

is

itself

the Protasis followed by av, which

really belongs to aXyvvais.

awos ^X elv> t 'OXvvOiovs 7rapeSu>Kv. DEM. 23. 107. P. after taking Potidaea, and though he might, if he had wished, have kept it himself, yet handed it over to the
'fctXimros IIoTiSataj/ eXi)v Kal Swr/deli av
ifiovXTjO'i],

Olynthians.

8wr)dels av
participle

is the Apodosis (rfivvqdr) av having a concessive force.

IfiovXijOrf),

the

190.

Conditional Particles and their

combinations.
1.

Se

fx-q,

if not,

sin minus,
it is

sin

aliter,

has become so
Se prj

stereotyped a phrase, that

used where idv

would

be more correct.
eaj' <aiv)}T0U Si/caiov, Trnpil>p.t6a.

Se

p,-q

kS>p.ev.

Plat. Crito
If
2.
it

ix.

appears right,
it.

let

us

make

the attempt; but if not, let us

abandon
lav, d,

" if haply " (" in case," " in the event of," " in hope that," " thinking that "). It contains sometimes a virtual oratio obliqua (i.e. the thought of the subject). Cf. si forte in Latin.

meaning

'diiova-ov

Kal ipov, kdv

too,

croi,

Tavra

Sonrj.

PLAT. Rep. 358.

Hear me
jrpos

in case you

may

agree.

T^v iroXiv, d i7Tif$OT)0oiev, x(upow. Thuc. vi. 100. They were marching on the city, on the chance of the citizens advancing against them (thinking that they might, etc.).
Digitized

by Microsoft


(.

209

EXAMPLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.

3.

&o~irep

is

compressed from
av
el

&a~irep SxjTrep
4.

The phrase written ito-irepavit. dv (Apodosis) el (Protasis), e.g. euroi (Plat. Apol. ix.), just as if he were to say,
av
el
:

also

&o-irep

dv

ttoiolto el

eisiroi.

?raJs

yap dv

(sc. ei-q),
it

with a Protasis
were so
?

(el

with Optative)
is it possible 1

omitted. How so?

How

would

be, if it

Hpw

5. Kav el : vvv p.01 80/cet kw dtrefleiav el Karayiyvdo-Koi tis /cat av iroielv MeiStov to, irpoo-rJKOVTa iroieiv. DEM. 21. 51 i KaTayiyvwTKoi. But Kav el comes to be used for the simple koX el, even if.

6.

Kav=KaJ

lav.

191.

Examples of Conditional Sentences.

Ordinary Past Concombination.
See

(2) (1) Ordinary Present Conditions. ditions. (3) Present and Past in

177 A,

and

2.

Observe that the condition

particular.
1.

may be

general as well as

Present

ei Tt xf/evSofiai eecrriv ee\eyai

fie.

ANTIPH. de

Cher. 14.

If I am making any false statements, you

el

may

confute me.

Oeol ri Spwaiv altrxpov, ovk

elo-lv Qeol.

Eurip.

Bell. Frag. 294.

If the gods do aught immoral they are no gods.

el

oSv toiovtov 6 ddvaros etni, nepSos eyiaye Xeya. Plat. Apol. xxxiii.
therefore death is such
it

If

state as this,

I for my part

count

gain.

2.

Past:
el d-Troo-Trjvai

'Adr/vaCwv ovk rjOeX^rrafiev, ovk rjSiKov/iev.

Thuc.
If we refused
to desert the

iii.

55.

Athenians, we were doing no wrong.

ovk because ovk l0eAa>=no!o. Digitized by Microsoft

THE PARTICLE
el
/J.ev

Sv.

'AvKXrpribs deov rjv, ovk tfv alo-)(p0Kep8r)s, el 8' alo-xpoKepSrjS, '" K V v Geov. PLAT. Rep. iii. 408 C. If Asclepius toas the son of a god, he was not covetous ; if he was covetous, he was not the son of a god.
el

ti

aXXo

eyevero

evriKivSwov,
iii.

TravTUHv

irapb.

Svvap.iv

lx.eTia-xojJ.ev.

ThUC.

54.

If any other danger

arose,

we

took our share in all beyond

ow

strength.

(3.) <f>paeTe ofiv aAAijAois el TrdmoTe ti -qKoixre tis.

Explain then one

anything.
et irov Tt eirpa^a

to

another, if at

Plat. Apol. iii. any time any one heard

toiovtos

If

ever

I engaged

cfravoup.ai. PLAT. Apol. xxi. in any business, I shall be found to be such

as
el Se

I have

described myself.

Suo e Ivos dytovos yeyevrjO-Oov ovk eyio dtnos.

Antiph. de
If two
is

caed. Herod. 84.

it

trials

have been

made

out of one (or instead of one),

not

my fault.
Ordinary Future Conditions.
See 177 A, 3
(a).
(fjv,

192.
Protasis edv

av) with the Subjunctive.

o-taO-qtroiiai.

rjv dva.Trei<T(0

tovtovi,

AfilST. Nub. 77.

If I
edv

(shall)

persuade

this

person here,

I shall

escape.

ep.ol iretdrjo-de, (f>elcreo-8e p.ov.

If you are
eav
ep.e

(will be) persuaded, by me,

PLAT. Apol. xviii. you will spare me.

/jAd^ere
,

aTroKTeivrjTe,

ovk

ep.e p.eto)

rj

vp.as avrovs.

Plat. Apol.

If you put me to death, you will me than on yourselves.

kou
ira.18',

inflict

no greater injury on

edvTiep Sevp' ep.ov irpoo-dev p-oXr/,

imprjyopeiTe.

AeSCH.

Pers. 529.

And for my

son, if he return before

Digitized

me,

Comfort ye him.

by Microsoft

ORDINARY FUTURE CONDITIONS.

SiSaitr"

211

Ikuv
Phil. 1342.

K-rtivciv eavrbv, rpi

rdSe ipevcrOy keytav.

Soph.
To
ready,
the death
if,

Freely he offers himself speaking thus, he lie.

practically means, he says that he mil, future.
is

SiSoyari,

he

offers,

and thus implies a

go at once,

irapa tov dyadov deov, av Beos

/ must

to the

WeXy, avriKa Ire'ov. good God, if God mil.

PLAT.

10. kovk av ye Xi^aip! eir' dyaOouri erots KaKa. Ar. fjv psf) ye <f>evya)v iipvyr)S 7rpbs aldepa.

Eur. Phoen. 1215. Yea, and I would not speak of ill close on thy happiness. Yea, but thou shall, unless thou escape thy flight to the firmament.

Cf.

Eur.

Orest.

1593.

N.B. physical impossibility is here spoken of. Observe that it follows an Apodosis with Optative and av : fp/ with the Subjunctive realises vividly the impossibility of the
situation.
Tt abv,

av euxuKTiv

01 vop.01 k.t.X.

PLAT.
etc.

Grit. xii.

What

then, if the laws say to us,

is

physical impossibility again

brought home as a vivid

argumentum ad hominem.

!93'

Less Vivid Future Conditions.

See 177,

(b).

In English we render el with the Optative in a variety of ways el Tronjcrai/u, if I should do, if 1 were to do, should I do, were I to do, if I did, supposing I were to do. etc.
:

ov iroXXfj av dXoyia

eirj el

(pofioiTO tov

ddvarov 6 toiovtos. Plat. Phaed. 68.

Would
to

it

not be the height of inconsistency if such

a man were

fear death ?

dfaone, eirroip,' av vp.iv. PLAT. Apdl. xvii. If you should dismiss me on these conditions I would reply to
ei p.e ri tovtois '

you,
'

etc.

Digitized

by Microsoft

212

THE PARTICLE
oikos
8'

Sv.

av

avrb'S, el <j>9oyyrjV A.a/8oi,

<ra$6<TTaT' av Xe^eiev.

AESCH. Ag. 37
a
voice,

Nay,

the very house, if gifted with

would

tell

the tale

most plainly.

A physical impossibility represented as

Cat. 1,

supposable

cf.

CiC.

haec
o5v

si

tecum patna loquatur, nonne impetrare debeat 1

av
eirjv elpyatr/Aevos el

iyti)

Seiva.

XiTroifu ttjv ra^iv.

I should
sin,

then be in position of one

Plat. Apol. who has committed dreadful

were

I to

desert

my post.

The

perfect denotes the state.

194.
1.

Most Vivid Future Conditions.

See

177,

(c).

Et with the Future Indicative sometimes refers plainly to the future, and is used much as edv with the Subjunctive, only the latter is more common and less positively and
vividly future. 1
oTroKTCveis yap,
ei

pe

yfjs ea> (3a\ets.

Thou
ei
jj,t)

wilt slay me, if thou wilt thrust

me from

ElTE. Phoen. 1621. the land,

KaBe^eis yXtDcrcrav, eo-rai

croi

KaKa.

Eurip. Aeg. Fr. 5

If thou wilt not curb thy tongue
rjv

there will be ills

edeXwftev dTrodvrjcrKtiv
die

for

thee.

el

Se cpo/3rja-6fieda kivSvvovs.

If we are ready

to

Isocr. Archid. p. 138, A. 107. but if ive shall fear dangers.

Observe the co-ordination of the two forms.

tovto ;roi)j<ro/iV, paStais to. eTnTrjSeia e^o/xev. If we shall do this we shall easily find supplies.
el

2. But el with Future Indicative in Protasis is found with a present (or virtual present) in the Apodosis. el Troirjcreis then a /xeXXeis TroiTJcreiv, if you are going to do, if you mean to do, if you are for doing, and this el with the Future is used of a condition now imminent, and even existing, e.g. if you're for fighting, I'm your man, el fia^ei SSe eyu> o-oi-

1 Mr. Monro (Homeric Grammar, p. 239) considers that el with the Future (in Homer) generally expresses suppositions of an obvious or

familiar kind.
Digitized

by Microsoft

MIXED EXAMPLES.
alpe TrXrJKTpov,
el

213

/ta^e'.

ArIST. Av. 761.

Up
Cf.
ij

with your spur if you

mean fighting.

Akist. Ach. 316.

vw

eytt)

ju.ei>

oijk

dv-qp, afo-Jj 8' dVry/),

ravr' dvarl rfjSe KEicrerat KpaTq. 0, yo4 now ! I am wo man, hut she is
ei

SOPH. Ant. 484.

$g man, if with impunity

these

my commands
with

are

to

count as naught in her eyes.

cf.

Si iacebit

imperium nostrum,
/ilAAto

461.

The
Future)
sion

periphrasis
is

commoner in prose.
this

which recommends

and Infinitive (Present or There is a life about the expres with the Future to poetry.

195* Mixed examples illustrating the connection

between and interchangeability of the Subjunctive, Optative, and Future Indicative in

Conditional Sentences.
N.B.
Trois

This section

is

supplementary to

102

194.

oSv av 6p6o)s SiKacraiTe irefil avT<ov ; el tovtovs edcrere tov vojii^ofievov opKov Siop.ocra/j.evovs Karrj-yopijo-at, k.t.X. ttcos Se lacrere ; lav vvvl diroi^r](f)i(rr](T6e p.ov.

Antiph. de Gaede Herod.

90.

How

then would you rightly judge on these points ? if you shall allow my prosecutors to take the prescribed oath and
accuse me.

And how will

trial.

you allow

this ? if

you acquit me

tive,

el with the Future Indicative, and idv with SubjuncN.B. have a modal force, " by permitting."

on

this

present

Plat, de Rep. 359 C (of the ring of Gyges), etrj 6" av eowta r\v Afyw TOidSe p.aAi<TTa el avrols yevono f) o'iav tot! <j>a<rt, Svvap.iv T<p T^you tod A.v8ov irpoyovy
yevecrdat.

They would enjoy

this liberty

which
_

I am

completely, if they should possess such a power as told the ancestor of Gyges the Lydian once possessed.

speahing of most we are

Compared with
PLA.T. Bep.

612

B, Troirjreov etvai

airy

ra. 8'iKaia,

edv

t'

exV

tov Yvyov 8aKTv\iov, idv re

p,r\.

(we concluded, evpofiev) that the soul must do what whether it possesses the YifflFffifflkes or no.

is righteous,

214

THE PARTICLE
oijSets ij/ttSl' TVtv

&v.

v/iZv els airoiKiav levai,

ttoXis,
ottoi

vofiwv efiiroSdv ecrriv, edv re tis (iovXrjTai el /ir) dpecrKoifiev 17/ms re kou r)

edv T fieroiKetv aXXocre iroi eXdwv, tevou e/ceMre PLAT. Grit. Xlll. av /3ovXrjTai, fyovTa ii avTov. iVome 0/ our laws prevents any of you, if lie wishes to go to a colony, supposing we and the state should not give him
satisfaction, or if he wishes to go

(none prevents him)

his belongings.

and reside anywliere else,^ from going wherever he wishes with all

here, Professor Goodwin says, simply marks a less prominent clause. But, it is to be noticed that lav with the Subjunctive here, which is thus joined with el and the Optative, is a general supposition

The Optative

196.

The

Optative and Indicative with av without a Protasis.

The Optative with av is freely used without a Protasis in a variety of modified statements. In some cases it is easy to supply a Protasis in others no Protasis appears to have been thought of. (This is Madvig's Optatims Potentialis or Dubita;

tivus,

136.)

1. As a modified statement in present or future time, very often drawing an inference from what Ms preceded.

&pa av
Of.

rjp.iv

crvarKevd^ecrdai

ei'17.

XEN.

Gyr.

iii.

1.

41.

It is time for us then to be packing up.

Antiph.

Tetral. b.b. 6, eXeyxOelrj.

<j>rj[il

o eyd Serein then would

tovt' av

ei7]

<re

alv'meo-dai.

PLAT. Apol. XV.

your riddling.

consist

what

I hold
eirj.

to be

Cf.

Antiph. de

Chor. 15, oios t" &v

Often

/3ovXoLfj,rjv av,
fie6eifj.rjV

I could wish,
p.r)

I wish,
vovdkra.

velim.

ovk av

tov dpovov,

APJST. Ran. 830.

I'll not resign the- throne, don't counsel me.

Cf. Akist. Ach. 1055.

2.

modified

command

or prayer,

sometimes put as a quesSOPH. Ant. 444.

i.e.

tion.
crb fiev

ko/uchs av ereauTov

jj

BeXeis.

Thou mai/st

betake thee where tfj,ouJikest,

get-

thee gone.

"

UNFULFILLED CONDITIONS.
up' o$v e&A.Tjcrcus av
;

215

Should you feel disposed?

Would you mind? Please do

so

and
3.

so.

A
a

wish, expressed interrogatively.

wish.

An

interrogation equiva-

lent to

irois

How

av 6\olfM)V ; EURIP. could I perish? i.e. would

I might perish I
Indicative

Akist. Ach. 991.

Similarly, but not so freely, the Imperfect
is

used.

The time

is past.

kf5ovk6[Li)v av.

I could
qv
8'

have wished, vellem.

linrLKiav tis.

av oStos tv

PLAT. Apol.

iv.

This

man
is

accordingly would he one of those

who understand

horses.
(ijv

av

Apodosis of an unfulfilled condition.)

197.

Unfulfilled Conditions. 1
See 177,

and

2.

Et with the Imperfect Indicative. The time of the Imperfect Indicative is either present or a past of description,
1.

habit, or iteration.

Kal toS',

t'iirep

ztrdevov,

ZSpmv av.

Soph. El. 604

Had I the
I 'd
do the deed.
is

strength,

The time
1

present (/ should now have been doing).

have in English several ways of expressing an unfulfilled condition in present time, some of which resemble the Greek. Thus we may render, el raSra tTroleis ijdlKHS &v, if you were doing this (or, if you had been doing this), you would be doing wrong (or, would have now been doing wrong). These are not, however, the forms always used in everyday speech. E. g. tramp, meeting me on the road, asks me for a copper. hand in my pocket, but, finding nothing there, I shake I put head and say, "Very sorry, if I had anything, I would give it" {et ti Shaksperean unfulfilled condition, referring to a%ov iUSovv &v). " If thou present time, may be given. Constance says to Arthur: that bid' st me be content, wert grim," etc., "i" would not care, I then would be content, for then <T should not love thee," etc. "But thou art Digitized by Microsoft fair.

We

my

my

216

THE PARTICLE
t

3v.

evos krvyxavov &v, ^vveyiyvdo-KCTe Srprov av

p.01.

If I happened

to he

a foreigner (which I

am

Plat. Apol. i. not), you would

surely pardon me.

The time
ei prj

is

present.

tot' hrovovv vvv av ovk ev<f>paiv6p,r]v.

PfflLEM. 159.

If

I Iwd

not been toiling then,

I should

not be rejoicing now.

The force of the Imperfect Indicative (referring to both kinds-of time) is well shown in the above example.
eyib

odv (KaWvvoprjv Kal fjppvvoprjv av,

el

rjTrio-Ta.fj.rjv

TavTa.
iv.

ctAA' ov

yap

en-10-Tap.ai.

PLAT. Apol.

/ anyhow

should plume and pride myself if But you see, I don't possess knowledge. have been pluming, etc.)

I possessed this it (or, I should

The time

is

present, or it

may

refer to a habit in the past.

et p.rj Zirlo-Tevev

SijAov oSv

on

ovk av TrpoeXeyev

d\rjdevo-iv.
i.

Xen. Mem.
It is plain accordingly that Socrates

1. 5.

would not have publicly

felt confident that

made

these

statements

had he not

he

should speak the truth.

The Imperfect here expresses customary

the past.

or habitual acts in

Similarly in Latin the Imperfect

is

used, and not the

Pluperfect. The poets are fond of it as a descriptive past. Several instances, not much noticed, occur in Horace. Ille

non inclusus equo Minervae,

etc.
;

ureret

flammis

He

etc. ; falleret aulam, etc. ; sed, would not have been deceiving, but

burning.

Thou hadst not seen Achilles

deceiving, but burning.

Non

ego hoc ferrem calidus iuventa consule Planco. Iliad not brooked this in the heat of youth when Plancus was consul.

Sometimes av with the Aorist Indicative in Apodosis is joined to d with the Imperfect Indicative, not to denote a past unfulfilled condition, but a single act, e.g. Plat. Euthyph. 12 D, ei phi oSv av p.e ijpcoTas ti, eurov av, if you were asking

me any

refers to the present,

I sJwuld instantly say. Here erov av really and denotes the instantaneousness of the single act in a way ^hich^e Jm^erf^t could not express.
question

OMISSION OF

S.v.

217

is

2. Ei with the Aorist or Pluperfect Indicative. The time past, denoting a single act (Aorist), or a state (Pluperfect).

dweOavov av

el p.rj i\

t5>v Tpidnovra dp\rj KareXvdiq.

Plat. Apol. xx.

I slwuld have been put to death if Thirty had not been overthrown.
el p.fj dve/3r]

the

government of the

xiAtas 8paxp-ds. Plat. Apol. xxv. If Anytus had not come into cowrt he would evei\ have incurred afme of 1000 drachmae.
&<j>\e
el [irj vfieis

"Avvtos k&v

rjkOere eTropevop.eda av

eirl

fiatriXia.

Xen. An.
If you had not come (fast) we should
against the

ii.

1. 4.

now

be

marching

King

(or have been

;

now marching).

Protasis a single act in Past Present.

el

Apodosis a continued act in the

<l?sA.imros.

Tore

efiorjOrjcrapiev

ovk av ijvcuxAsi vvv 6

DEM.
If we had then given help Philip would not
us now.
be

30. 6.

annoying

Here vvv

is

added

to

mark the

present.

ovk av

Trapep.et.va el

eXeXvpvqv.

ANTIPH. Herod.
av

13.
bail.

I should
el,

not have stayed if

I had

not been set free on

ere ijjOWTtuv,

direKpivio, luavtas

qSij ep.ep.adr)Keiv.
c.

Plat. Euthyph. 14
If you had answered
finished

my

question,

should already have

my

learning.

The

pluperfect denotes a past state.

198.

The omission

of av in Apodosis with

Indicative.
1. Sometimes a past tense of the Indicative is found in Such a construction is necessarily Apodosis without civ. statement which would have been true if rhetorical. certain conditions had happened is spoken of as actually true. The instances are rare, and many are disputed, but some occur both in poetryj/p^ep^w/crosoft


2l8

THE PARTICLE
el Se prj

S.

ipvyuv
6'Se

irvpyovs Trecrovras ycr/iev 'EXAiji/wv 8opl

<f>6/3ov trapeo-j(ev

ov /tarws

ktvttos.

EUR. Hec. 1111.

(for Trapeo")(ev av).

Had we not known That Phrygia's towers had fallen 'neath the spear Of Hellas, no slight fear this din had caused.
Cf.

Nee veni

nisi fata

locum sedemque dedissent. Verg. A en.

xi.

112.

meaning without requiring an av. Indeed the intrinsic meaning of the Imperfect (e.g. in the following example, " I was not by way of
itself almost bears this

The Imperfect by

sending,")
e.g.

is

closely allied to a conditioned statement.

ko.t'

KaiTOL ov Srprov ye

ep.avrov p-qvvrijv hrepvirov elSds.

Antiph. de Coed. Herod. 24.

I surely was not sending an informer against myself with my eyes open (I should not have been sending). See especially a paragraph too long for quotation in Andokides
yet

And

de Myst. 58. 59.

Of. also

Eur. Bacch. 1312.

construction is commoner in Latin (cf. Liv. xxxiv. 29, Difficilior facta erat oppugnatio ni T. Quinctius supervenisset. Tac. Ann. iii. 14, Effigies Pisonis traxerant ac divellebant ni iussu principis repositae forent. Hor. Od. II. xvii., Me truncus illapsus cerebro sustulerat nisi Faunus ictum dextra levasset. Verg. Georg. ii. 132, Et, si non alium late iactaret odorem, laurus erat.

The

2. This omission of av is almost the rule with the Imperfect of verbs denoting necessity, duty, possibility, propriety,

XPV V or ^XPfyi <^ t *fy, * vfy, <s tfv, irpoo-rJKev, fjv or (it was possible), KaXbv fjv, alo-\pbv ?jv, KaXZs eivev, &<f>eXov, ep.eXXes, e/3ov\6p.r)v. Also with verbals in -reos, e.g. irpoaipereov fjv (satius erat). All these phrases denote an unfulfilled condition (present or continued past).
etc.
:

>

imrjpyev

cebat,

This construction is parallel with the Latin debebam, deoportebat, poteram, gerundive with eram, par, satis, aequum erat, etc. See Madvig, L. G. 348 E., and Obs. 1.

KaXbv
It

fjv TOtcrSe, et

kcu rjp.apTa.vop.ev, el^ai tyj rjperepa opyrj. '

THUC.

i.

38.

would have been well for them, even if we had been wronging iheti$jgi@6j$DMyctesem> anger.

OMISSION OF
e/3ov\6tn]v fiev ovk ipifav ivOdSe.

&.v.

219

ARIST. Ban. 866. / could have wished I was not wrangling here.
io-ov i)v

jwi pvq iXdeiv (as apodosis to

all the

ei p,rj8ev 8ie<epe).

Antiph. Herod.
It

13.

would have been

J

same

to

me

not

to

have come.

For
3.

wtpeXov, e/3ouAd uiji', see Wishes.

Observe similar constructions of

Xpijv
(e'Set) ere

e'Sei

and IxPW (XPV V )-

raura

7roteiv.

You ought

to be doing, or, to have been doing (but you are Compare eVoteis a, v. not, or were not, doing the act).
o~e

Xpijv (eSet)

ravra

iroifjo~at.

You ought

to

have done (but you did not do) the

act.

Compare
>

eiroirjcras av.

Oportebat and oportuit facere.

For XPV V w itn Present Infinitive and Aorist Infinitive, see Plat. Apol. xxii., Arist. Ach. 562. ISei, Dem. 112. 6. But Xpr) ere iroieiv (ti-omjo-cu), you ought to do this (of what can still be done), oportet te facere.
ovk
eSei ere toujto. iroieiv.

You ought
ei

not to be doing (what

,

Xpijv, Set, etc.

you are doing). however may take an av.

av eSet &v /xeAAio
Aeyeii/.

pXv

r)ino-Tap,eda, crac/>5s, n3c>ev

Xen. Anah.
If we had
all

v. 1. 10.

known for

certain, there

would

be

no need for

me

So in and not oportebat.

4.

I am going to say. Latin possem may be used and not

to

say what

poteram, oporteret

KivSvvevu), fieXXoi.
r)

776X11 eKivSvvevo-e

ircura. Siacfidaprjvai, et ctve/ios

eVeyeVero.
iii.

Thuc.
The city was in danger of being had not arisen (we might
periphrasis for Zie<p6dp-q av.
say,

74.

entirely destroyed if

a wind

but a

wind

arose),

In eo erat ut consumeretur urbs

iieXXa in the Imperfect
is

nisi, etc.

a periphrasis for an Aorist

with

av.

Dem. de Fals. Leg. 391. 11. ov o-vo-rpaTtvfiiv epeXXov. They would not have joined forces (ovk av o-weo-Tpdnvo-av).
Vires non

colla^uri^rant.^^^

220

THE PARTICLE

&v.

199. 'Edv (jjv) with the Subjunctive, and El with the Optative in General or Frequentative Suppositions. 1
See 178.

Many of the four forms already given may express general as well as particular suppositions, but to express a supposition which refers not to a particular act, but to customary acts, frequently repeated acts, general truths or maxims, there are two common forms which are given below. They are parallel with Indefinite Relative Sentences, and Frequentative Temporal Sentences (see Index). 'Edv and el here mean " if ever " (edv iroTe, et irore). 'Edv and el, however, in themselves, with the Subjunctive or Optative, are not Frequentative, but the Tense of the Apodosis (the Principal Sentence) makes the whole compound clause so. It is the Apodosis which distinguishes these uses of edv with the Subjunctive, and et with the Optative from their ordinary uses.
1

The Latin equivalents

to

Greek General Suppositions should be

noticed. Present.
'

Si quis

eorum decreto non

stetit,

sacrifices interdicunt. Caesar, B. 0. vi. 12.

If

yet

any one does not abide by

they exclude'
sacrifices.

him from
est.
i.

the

their decree,

Sin autem etiam libidinum internperantia accessit,

duplex

malum

Cic. Off

123.

But if ever in addition want of control over the

Past.

tliere

be desires,
is

the mischief is doubled.

(The Present Indicative

also

used in Latin.

Si a persequendo hostes deterrere

nequiverant,

If ever they could not deter enemy from pursuit,

Si

the

disiectos a tergo circumveniebant. Sallust, lug. 50. they kept inclosing them in the rear.
laeti adferebant.

quod erat grande vas, If they came across any large

vessel,
:

Cic. Verr.
it to

they used to bring

him

in

triumph.

Observe the tenses of the Protasis the Perfect Indicative in Present Time, the Pluperfect in Past. These are the commonest forms according to the Latin strictne^KrziiE^JSgaeMiiingjaS action as prior to another.

'Edv

{rjv)

WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE,

ETC.

221

I.

Referring generally to present or future time. Protasis. Apodosis.

'EdV, (fy, av)

with Subjunctive.

Present Indicative or any present Iterative Tense (gnomic Aorist).

Parallel with

and Subj.

II.

Referring to past time.

el

with Optative.
")

Parallel with
el rrore
6's,

Imperfect

Indicative,
Iterative

or

60-Tis

S-with Opt.

any past

ore, etc.

Tense (Aor. or Imperf. with av).

Examples of
f)V

I.

iyyis eXdy 6dva,TOS ovSets /JouAcrat EUR. Ale. 671. If (when) death draws nigh none wish to
OvryrKuv.
p,ey' ea-Tl

die.

KepSos

rjv

SiSdcrKe<r8ai deX-gs.

MeNAND.

*
'

vi
I

'Tis great gain if thou carest to be taught.

cwras Aoyos, av airy rot irpa.yp.aTa, p-araiov ti (fraiverai Kal

Kevov.

Dem.

01.

ii.

21. 20.

All

talk, if

deeds are wanting, seems idle and empty.

rjv 8'

apa o-cf>aXwcrtv, eirk-qpaxrav rr)v %peiav. THUC. i. 70. If ever by chance tliey fail, they always make good the loss.
enXripwrav,

Gnomic
ix.
;

Aorist.
oi'tu/iat.

Cf.

PLAT. Apol.

av Ttva

Ibid.

xxi.

cav Tts

fiovXrjTai.

Examples of
et.

II.

Se T6S Kal dvTeiiroi ev9vs eTeOvqKti.

THUC.

viii.

66.

If (as often as, whenever) any one did speak against them^ he was promptly put to death.
dXX'
et

ti pr) <j>epoipev,

wrpvvev
fetch
to

<$>epeiv.

EUR.

Ale. 755.

But

if ever

we did not

him a

thing, he

would order

(i.e.

kept ordering) vs

fetch it. Digitized by Microsoft

222

THE PARTICLE
ti rives iSoiev wr/

dv.

tow

o-faripovs hriKparovvra? dveddpo-qo-av

the

THuc/vii. 71. If any of them saw their own side winning in any part of battle, they would pluck up courage.
dv.

dvcddpcrrjo-av av, iterative. For the iterative (or indefinite) use of dv with the Imperfect and Aorist Indicative, see ^142. This use must be carefully distinguished from that of dv in

The iterative use of <xv_ may have being used without definite application, e.g. e'Aefe av, he came in any given case, whereas in an unfulfilled condition the dv may have been of special application, e\ee dv, he came in that case, i.e. he would have come.
unfulfilled conditions.

arisen

from

its

Obs. That here in connection with a past Apodosis, the It is only when thus Optative really refers to past time. used, and in the rare instances in oratio olligua where the Optative represents a Past Indicative of the recta, that the Optative denotes past time.

Supplementary Sections, 200

206.

200.

Mixed Examples.
For Examination and Reference.

Protasis and Apodosis do not strictly correspond. No one rule can be laid down for explaining all the irregularities. Sometimes the mind really shifts its ground in the passage between Protasis and Apodosis, making the conclusion depend upon a condition which the expressed Protasis only suggests. But mostly the irregularity is one of expression only. This is chiefly the case with the Optative with ay in an Apodosis, connected with a Protasis in the Indicative or Subjunctive. The Optative with dv may, as we have seen, express a modified Indicative drawing an inference, or an Imperative, or a Future. Sometimes again there are two Protases actually expressed (Ex. 9). Sometimes Preposition and Case, or a Particle supplies the place of the Protasis (Ex. 11 and 12).
1.

Not seldom the

[lev

yap tovto
is

Xiyoixriv, o/ioAoyoi-ijv av 4'ywye ov

Kara
orator

toutohs

If this
of

PLAT. Apol. i. what they mean, I must admit that I

efi/at p-qriap.

am an

afar higher

order than they.

Digitized

by Microsoft

MIXED EXAMPLES.
The
dosis
2.

223

Protasis,

is

el Xiyovo-iv, refers to the present ; the Apopartly a remote supposition, and partly an inference.

tovto ye pot SoKel KaXbv etvai, avOp&irovs. Plat. Apol. iv.

ei Tts o?ds

eli]

iraiSevew

This does appear to me to be a grand thing were able to teach men.

supposing one

like
3.

Here, Soicei, a verb of thinking, almost makes the Apodosis an Optative with av.
/cat

eyi)

Texvrjv.

tov E-ujjvov epaKapiara, Plat. Apol. iv.

I, if really

el

(is

dArjtfws

e\oi rrjv

Lucky Evenus, thought

the art.
el c'xoi is

and

truly he were to possess

the Protasis to an Apodosis implied in epaKapura.

. . .

4.

el

Seivovs aXiTYjpiovs rovs avaiTiovs SuaKOipev ei/oyot re tov <povov Tots esriTt/uois eupev. .
. .

eop.ev,

Antiph. T,
If we should indict
the innocent,

A. 4.

we

shall find dread avengers,

and we are

liable to the penalties

for murder.
presented,

A
5.

series of pictures

more and more vividly

passing from the Optative to the Future Indicative.

ttcos

Seivorepa pi)\avripaTa. el vp.lv Kareipyafnai a. Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 16. How could there be more terrible practices, if you have (a present ordinary condition) achieved your object ?

&v

elv\

ftovXeo-de;

6.

el

toIvvv peydkwv dyaOuv atria vpM$ eipyavavro eicetvoi, pepoi ey!i) ovk av |Aa)(i(rTov StKattos Taunjs rijs airtas Andok. de Bed. suo. 12. e'xot/xj.
those men accomplished what secured your great advantages (an ordinary past Protasis), / might justly claim not the least share of the merit (a future Apodosis,

If then

also
7.
el

marking an

inference).

Tivi, vputv yvdprj roiavrq TrapeurTfjKei -irporepov trepi epov, o-KOTreio-de eg airdv -rZv yeyevqpevwv. Andok. de Myst. 54.

o5v

If, therefore,

any of you previously used

to

entertain such

an

(an ordinary past condition in the Imperfect), examine the case by the actual facts (ie. now in the
opinion of

me

immediate

future).
Digitized

by Microsoft


224

THE PARTICLE
el r)v

&v.

8.

Svoiv to erepov kXeo-dai,

f)

/caASs &rroXeo-8ai

r)

alo-)(ptos

o~u)9rjvo.i,

e\oi av T69 ehrelv KaKiav eivai

to, yevofieva.

Andok.
If
it

de Myst. 57.

had been

an

possible to choose one of two alternatives, either honourable death or a dishonourable escape, then you

might stigmatize
filled condition,
9.

my conduct as cowardice (a past unfula future Apodosis with an inference).

. .
.

iyto

oSv Seiva av e'irjv elpyacrfievos, el, ore p,kv p.e ot ap^ovres tov oe eraTTOv tote fiev ov eKeivot erarrov efievov deov T(ttovtos PLAT. Apol. xvil. Xliroijj.1 rfjv to.iv. I accordingly should be in a position of one who is guilty of fearful sin if, when your rulers were assigning me a post, etc., if then, I say, I was remaining at the post which
.

they assigned me, but

post,

if,

when now God

elr/v

is

assigning

me a

I were
is

to desert

that post.
elpyao-fikvos,

Here there
Protases,

one Apodosis, av

and twc
the

el efievov, el Xiiroi/M.

The two Protases make up

combined conditions which produce the Apodosis.

Cf. also ch. xv.

10.

v/xas av ov xpewv ap^otre. Thuc. iii. 40. If they were right in revolting, then your rule is unlawful {it would follow that you are ruling).
ei

yap

oiyroi opdtos orjrecrTTjcrav,

11. Sia yeifias avrovs irdXai av djroA(uA.6tT.

DEM.

de Cor. 242.

So far as you yourselves were concerned, you would have been

ruined long ago.
Sid ye fyias
left to yourselves,

avTovs=el ifieis avrol fxovoi yre, had it depended on you alone.

Trdo-\oi,fiev

if you

had been

12.

ovTio

yap ovKeri rov Xonrov

av

KaKui<s.

Dem.
For in that we should never again ovr(o = el Tavra yevono.

Phil.

1.

44.

get into trouble.

201.

Examples
fj.fi

of the Conditional Participle in

a Protasis.
oXovfiai
fiadiuv.

ARIST. Nub. 792.

I shall

be ruined if

don't learn.

= eav

fir] fia.9u>.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CONDITIONAL RELA TIVE SENTENCES.

Set

225

yap Ivos 06

pfj

Tv\i>v

an-oXioXa.

Arist. Ach. 466.

Tm a lost
oS
/irj

One thing I need which, man.

/if)

if

I fail

to get,

rv)(<av=kav

tx>x<o

a7roA.wAa being a vivid future.

to aTrodavelv av xts eK<pvyoi SirXa d<f>els. PL. Apol. xxix. man might escape death if he were to fling away his arms.

a<j>eis=:ei d<peit].

peTayvovs yap

ei

p,eTayvoir))

en

av opdZs povkevcrano.
91.
to

Antiph. de Caede Eerod.

For
if he should repent he yet

might come
p.fj

a right

decision.
iji-pe/ufe

ov yap av
Kal

/3Xrj8r) aTpe/iigwv Kal

Siarpexiov

(=ei

A.NTIPH. 2 Tetral. B. B. 5. He would not have been struck if he had been standing and not ruwning across.

pj

Sierpexe).

still,

202.
a

Examples
not

of Conditional Relative Sentences.

/jlyj

otSa, ouSe oto/icu eiSevai.

What I do
=et Tiva
twv
p,fj

PLAT. Apol. vi. know I do not fancy that I know.

rjdekujare

oTSa.

Se

dkk(ov evmv ooris irunrori

Karao-nyo-ai
17.

eyyvrjTas, oiSeh TrunroTe eSedr).

ANTIPH. Herod.
any time

Of all

the other foreigners

who

ever at

chose to furnish

securities,

none ever was thrown into prison.

00-T19 rj6eX.r]<re=<ii tis ?)0eAijcre,

an ordinary past Condition.

a yap

tis

p,rj

irpocreSoKrjcrev, ovSe (f>vkd^a<r6ai ky\(j>pei.

Antiph. de Caed. Herod.

19.

What

one does not expect,

it is

not even possible

to

guard

against.

An

instructive instance

wpoo-eSoicrjo-ev is

a Gnomic Aorist, and

so this is a General Supposition in Present time. however, may here simply imply priority of time.,
ktijv

The

Aorist,

ye Svvap.iv e^ei
effect is the

Kal

6'0-Tts rfj ^i7<<j>-

The

rfj x elP^ diroKTeivy dSiKtos Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 92. same whether a man takes life with' his hand,
6'0-rts

re av

or with his vote.

A General

Supposition again in Present time. Digitized by Microsoft


226

THE PARTICLE

Sv.

203.

Relative Conditional Sentences expressing

General Suppositions.
(See also the last two examples in the previous section.)
I.

Present Time.
o-v/jt/ia^elv

tovtois ideXovo-iv airavTes,

to be

oijs

&v

oprno-i Traps
i.

o-Ktvaa/xevovs.

DEM.

Phil.

42. 1.

All men are ready

see prepared.

m alliance with those whom ever they

= edv rivas=OTav,
II.

ojrprav Ttvas.

Past Time.
ot Se, Ka.10fj.ivov

dWov,

eiriftaXovTes ov cpepouv, dirqeo-av.

Continually, while one body

Tmrc/ii. 52. was burning, they kept throwing

on (the funeral pile) any one they were bearing, and then going away.

Tiva=ei

irore

Tivd=oTr6Te tlvou

204.
el

Examples
Teyed
o-^tcri

of Infinitive in Apodosis with dv.

Trpoo-ykvoiTO,

ivopifav

aVao-av

dv

eyetv

Il6Xo7rdvvij(rov.

ThTJC.

V. 32.

They thought that, if they could get in addition Tegea, they would possess the whole Peloponnese.
dv 6)(iv=E^oiev dv.

But
e^oixev.

in the recta they

would say
/*ij

Zdv

fip.lv

Trpoo-yevrjTai

ouSels dvreiire Sid to

dvao-\eo-6ai.

dv

tji>

tK/cAiyo-iav.
i.

Xen. An.

4. -20.

No
el

one contradicted, because the assembly would not have permitted it.

avreiire

ovk dv

T)veo-)(TO

fj

eKK\r)o~ia.

dXX'

ei ireTravTcu,

Kapr' dv eirv^eiv Sokcu

SOPH. Ai. 263.

Nay, if he hath

ceased, methinks all

may

be well.

evTUYoin ay an Optatiye of inference. A r Digitized by Microsoft

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ON
205.

"Riv

AND

El.

227

Examples of
ei>ovs
ifal

Participle in Apodosis with dv.

u>s

cute?

purdov

ovTots irepiytv6p.evo<}
,

dv T(OV
i.

avTUTTaa-iwrlov.

XEN. An.

10.

He

asked for mercenaries and pay, representing that thus he

get the better of his opponents.

would

ovto) TrepiyevoiTo dv,

but as

it is

the original recta would be edv

yevqcro/Mai.

in Historical (Virtual) obliqua 8e<i)fiai evous owo irept-

opZv to TrapaTet\KTfia,

el eVtKjOarijo-ete rts,

paSiais av \r)<j>0ev.

Tguc.
would
=pa8ia>s av
easily be captured.
A,ij<0ij.

vii.

42.

Seeing that the cross-wall, if any one carried the heights,

Note the Participle

after optiv, a verb

of Perception.
<5

Trdvra roA/itSv, nairo iravros ay

(fiepiav

Xoyou SiKaiov p7ii)(a.vr)[ia iroiKikov. SOPH. 0. Bold wretch, who out of every cause wouldst bring
Shifty device of righteous argument.
<f>ipo>v

G.

761.

= os

<f>epois

av

(el

Kaipbv Xd/iots).

206.

Supplementary Note on idv with the Subjunctive, and et with the Optative.

'Edv with the Subjunctive is the ordinary form for stating a supposition in future time. By the term ordinary it is not meant that this form occurs oftener than et with the Optative, but that if, for instance, we had to say, " If it is fine to-morrow, we will go for a walk," we should naturally translate this by That is to say, edv rawa yevqrai edv with the Subjunctive. means if this shall happen. Modern English renders it difficult for us to grasp this very simple explanation, because we equally render <i ravra yiyverai and iav ravra y'evtyrai by if Ei ravra yiyverai should correctly be translated this happens. if this is (now) happening, and edv ravra yevijrai, */ this shall So in the instance first given we ought strictly to happen. say " If it shall be fine to-morrow." In older English it would have been "if it be fine to-morrow," which is an exact The difficulty is parallel to edv with the Subjunctive. the Apodosis is the aggravated by not bjpjgg,

m m^^it

228

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE

Principal Sentence, and, as such, sets the time of the whole Compound Conditional Sentence. 'Ecu- with the Subjunctive (in ordinary particular conditions) is regularly accompanied by an Apodosis in the Future Indicative, e.g. Tavra Troi-qa-m Sey thus edv ti 8%, / will do this if it is necessary; edv

refers to the future.

El with the Optative also refers to the future.

yevoiro

means

*/ this should happen, as

Ei ravra opposed to eav ravra

All scholars now seem agreed the difference between edv with Subjunctive and el with Optative is the same as that between */ I shall and Af I should in English. In opposition to long-received explanations Professor Goodwin has shown in a series of papers (see especially Journal of Philology, Vol. v. No. 10, and Vol. viii. No. 15) that edv with Subjunctive and el with Optative are interchangeable expressions, alternating sometimes in the same There paragraph, and when referring to the same condition. can thus be no fundamental distinction between them, nor, we must add, between them and el with the Future Indicative; -All these are variant expressions for a future condition. The most generally received theory hitherto of edv with Subjunctive has been that of Buttmann, according to which it denotes " an uncertain but possible case with the prospect of speedy decision." Professor Goodwin pertinently asks how we should turn into Greek the proverb, " If the sky falls, we Of course by edv with the Subjunctive. shall catch larks." But what is the " prospect of speedy decision " here ? Further he asks whether Demosthenes [Phil. i. p. 43, 11) implies any nearer prospect of decision about Philip's death when he first refers to it in the words av oBtos ti irdOy, than in the very next sentence, when he says eiti TrdOoi. Again, edv with Subjunctive has been stated (by Dr. Donaldson and others) to denote "uncertainty with some small amount of probability." This theory, however, is destroyed by such conditions as the following, all with edv and Subjunctive. In Plat. Crito, 50, In Euthyd. 299, of a man of the laws speaking to Sokrates. In Rep. 612, of the soul swallowing a cartload of hellebore. In Eur. Phoen. 1216, and Orest. wearing the ring of Gyges. 1593, of a human being flying on wings to the aether. How then do these three Future Conditions differ ? 'Eav with the Subjunctive gives a vivkLand distinct representation of
yevrjraL, if this shall happen.

that

ON 'Eok AND
a supposition in the future.
;

Ei.

229

El with the Future Indicative

is

more vivid still a condition is brought home as of imminent and immediate interest. Ei with the Optative, on the other hand, conjures up a future supposition less graphic, vivid, and life-like, a supposition less distinctly conceived, more faintly
sketched, a supposition of less immediate concern, one which may commoves the mind with a more languid interest. pare the three forms to three sketches or pictures differing in Or we may say that d greater or less distinctness of outline. with the Future Indicative moves the mind with the immediate interest of the next hour or minute, edv and the Subjunctive with the natural and lively interest of the morrow, el and the Optative with the fainter and remoter interest of next week. But the whole effect in each case is rhetorical, the expression itself does not imply that the fact denoted in the condition is to be decided, or that it is likely or unlikely ; it is all a question of realising a conception more or less vividly, or, as Mr. Monro in his Homeric Grammar puts it, the difference depends on the tone assumed by the speaker.

We

When,
than

therefore,

is

d with the Optative 1 there may be several reasons

pression.
1.

lav with the Subjunctive chosen rather Professor Goodwin shows that for choosing the more vivid ex-

The following instances are most instructive. The speaker may have an actual case present to his mind.

In Bep.
vii.

vi. 494, Sokrates is thinking of Alkibiades ; in Bep. In both cases lav with the Subjunctive 517, of himself. is the- form employed.
2.

Tlie speaker
i.

may
(p.

be dreading the fulfilment of his supposition.

Dem. Aphob.
3.

67

834), an adverse vote

fj.e

is

referred to in

these terms, eav

6.iro<f>vyrj

ctBtos,

prj yevoiro.

an improbable and ridiPlat. Bep. x. 610 A, of bodily depravity causing mental depravity (lav fiij I/mtoiij tovto ye oijSets ttotc 8eiei) Plat. Gorg. 470 c, of Polus convicting Sokrates of talking nonsense (lav fie eXeygys). There may be other reasons besides the above. Sometimes lav with the Subjunctive seems to single out a supposition for sometimes an unfamiliar conception has been special emphasis introduced by el with the Optative, which, when we have become familiarised with it, is expressed by lav with the SubThe speaker may
supposition
be

treating

culous

with

scorn.

junctive.

Or qSP*d^JjffyM&Bg/l&

^orth

further atten "

230

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTM

writers, from temperament or style, have a habit of using one expression rather than another. Thus Aeschylus very rarely uses kav with the Subjunctive in an ordinary future supposition. He oftener uses d with the Future Indicative ; thrice he uses d with the Subjunctive.

tion perhaps, different

But his partiality for the Optative is remarkable. ThucyDIDES again often uses d with the Future Indicative.
In all the above cases (1) the time is future, (2) the picture designedly conceived and drawn in a lively graphic manner. (3) In many cases such as the above edv with the Subjunctive alternates with el and the Optative. Thus in the example from Dem. Aphdb. the same condition is alluded to later on (ii. 18, p. 841) by the words d ifafoaaurde, then three lines further on by Zav 6'<Aa>/iev, and yet again ( 21, p. 842) by d yvtia-ecrde. Similarly in Plat. Bep. 517 A, where Sokrates is referring to himself, the Optative is used. The inferences from the above premises are inevitable.
is

(1) kav

with the Subjunctive, and both refer to future time.

with the Optative,

are interchangeable, differing only in greater or less clearness of conception and vividness of expression. (3) As expressions they can in themselves imply no opinion of the writer that the fact denoted by the condition is more or less likely to occur, the one and only thing stated being the dependence of the consequence upon the condition. The interchangeability of the Subjunctive and Optative is one of the regular and most characteristic features of Greek Syntax. "We find it constantly in Indirect Statements and Questions, and throughout the Oratio Obligua, in Temporal, Final Sentences, in Sentences with oVcos. In all these cases we do not hesitate to accept the explanation that one expression is more or less direct and vivid than the other, and that the two varieties are interchangeable. Conditional Sentences do not stand apart by themselves they follow the principles which rule Greek Syntax. Two points may be added 1. If it is asked whether the writer may not hold an opinion that the fact denoted is more or less probable, we may reply that of course he may, and that holding such an opinion he may cho^s^on^fojm^oyxpression rather than
(2)
: :

They

ON 'Edu AND

Ei.

231

another. But this covers only some instances and not all. Probability cannot be made the basis of a division, since the fact denoted varies from what is in itself natural and probable to what is physically impossible. (2) The notion of future time is sometimes very indistinctly marked by et with the Optative, the faintness of the conStill el ception being the chief effect intended in such cases. ravra oiVtos u-q cannot (as sometimes in Homer) be past, if this had been so ; it cannot be translated, if it were now so ; it can only be rendered, if this were to be so, were so, should be so.

The Apodosis

also

must always be examined in connexion

with the Protasis.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE
207.

III.

TEMPOEAL SENTENCES.

Temporal Sentences are constantly expressed in Greek by Participles in agreement with the Subject, by the Genitive Absolute, and by the Accusative Absolute.

When
Optative.

the time of the Temporal Sentence is definite the

is

Indicative
1

used

when

indefinite the Subjunctive

and

This

is

the one clew to the use of the moods

in Temporal Sentences.

See 172, Definite and Indefinite Sentences.

Time
1.

is indefinite

in three

ways
i.e.

Indefinite

Futurity,

when

the action

will

occur in the indefinite future.

2.

Indefinite

Frequency,

i.e.

recur an indefinite
3.

when the action may number of times.

when the
action

Indefinite

Duration,

i.e.

may

continue for an indefinite period.

All Temporal Sentences in the Subjunctive and Optaunder one of the above three heads, the first,

tive will fall

1 This principle of Indefinite Time may be most usefully applied to the Latin Subjunctive as opposed to the Indicative, e.g. Donee labantes consilio j>&tres firmwet (Hoe.). Indefinite Futurity. Opperire quoad scire possis quod tibi agendum sit. Indefinite Futurity. Dum Priami Paridisque busto insultet armentum. Indefinite Duration. It is usual to explain many such sentences in Latin (and in Greek) by saying that they express a purpose. So they do, but this is not contained in the Temporal Particle and its Sentence, but in the nature of the principal verb combined with the indefiniteness of time in view. So probably with Temporal Sentences which are described as Conditional (dum). Indefinite Frequency is so differently treated by Latin writers that

it is

not touched on
,

here,.

...

Digitized

... _ by Microsoft
,

"

WHEN" IN DEFINITE TIME

{PAST).

233

Indefinite Futurity, being the commonest, and the third, Indefinite Duration, being the rarest. More than one kind of Indefiniteness may be denoted by the same
expression.

The Subjunctive

is

used in Primary, the Optative in

sequence, and sometimes
is

Historic sequence, though, as in other Sentences, the Sub-

junctive occurs in Historic

co-ordinate with the Optative.

A A

Temporal Particle with the Subjunctive takes av

B? av, eweiBav, orav,
yevrjTat.
etc. etc.).

(jrpiv av,

Thus ews av

Temporal Particle with the Optative drops the av

(irplv, ews, 67Tt7j, ore, etc. etc.). e&>? yevoiTO.

For the omission of av in Subjunctive clauses see 221. For the retention of av with the Optative see 222.

208.
I.

"

WHEN" IN DEFINITE TIME

common), when,
with

{PAST).
after,

enet, ewet&j (r)vUa less

with

Indicative Aorist (an action prior to principal sentence), Indicative

sentence).

Imperfect

(contemporary

principal

Latin
tive,

cum, with Pluperfect and Imperfect Subjunc-

postquam with Indicative.

eireiSr)

Se oXiyapftia eyevero, 01 rpiaicovTa

/Lie.

fj,eT6Tre'/j,-

TJravro

Plat.

When an

oligarchy

had

been established, the Thirty

sent for me.

Cum

vero

paucorum dominatio

constituta

esset,

Triginta

ifcwt.

234

TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
eirei r/aOevei

Aapelos, efiovkero ol

tw

iralBe afi<f>orepa)

irapelvai.

Xen. An.
ill,

WJien Darius was

he wished both his

sons to

appear before him.

Dariu,s,

cum

moreretur,

filios

ambo ad

se venire

volebat.

For

ijvuca see

Plat. Apol. xxxi, Soph. El.

32, 423, At. 272.

Note, ore,
like CTet,

eTreiSrj.

"when," cannot introduce a clause in Attic Greek Being a relative it must be connected with
all

some sort of antecedent, though, like the clause in which it stands may come antecedent.
V)v irore )(povos,

relative sentences,

first,

rare

is its strict

ore Oeol fiev ^crav, dvrjra, Se yevr) ovk rjo-av.

Plat. Prot.
There was a time once when the gods were in existence, but when the races of mortal creatures were not.
ore
fie ol

ap^ovres erarrov, Tore ov eKeivoi erarrov

e/jtevov.

Plat. Apol.

When

the rulers were assigning

me a post,

then

I remained

at

the post, which they assigned me.

209. "AS

SOON AS," "DIRECTLY," IN DEFINITE TIME.

take rayiara
as,

E-rrel, 67retS?j

when they mean

directly,

immediately, as soon
&>?

no sooner-

than.

(Latin

rayio-Ta,,

ut) has the same meaning even without but more markedly with rayio-ra.
:

[Latin
ae (atque)
ro?

ubi,

ubiprimum;

ut,

ut

primum ;

simul, simul

postquam ; with the perfect indicative.]

Ta%t.o~Ta e<M? inrefaivev, edvovro.

Xen.
set

As

soon as

day began

to

dawn, they

about taking

the auspice

hgjtjzed by Microsofm

"

Whenever,"
01

etc.,

in indefinite time.
eirel

235

rpia/covra
Kadypeffrj.

tjpeOijaav

Twyiara
the

to.

reiyr\

Xen.
directly

The Thirty were appointed

rased.

walls were

6V<ds has this sense. Cf. Aesch. Pers. 200, Soph. El. 736, 749, on-ws dp$ (present indicative) ut vidit. For is (often with eidvs, evOms) see Aesch. Pers. 363, Arist. Ban.

In poetry

504.

210.

"

whenever;' "AS OFTEN DEFINITE TIME.

particles,
eire.1,

AS,"

IN
and

IN-

The same
o-Kore,

hirei%-f\,

qvlica,

ore,

also

denoting

Indefinite

Futurity, or Indefinite Fre-

quency, take the Subjunctive and Optative.

[Latin
:

usually a Temporal Conjunction with Future

Perfect Indicative.

But

for Frequentative Sentences see

the caution given 207, footnote.]

A. With Subjunctive
brav, oirorav (jjvuc av,

in Primary sequence)

e-n-eiSdv,

e-irrp/

and

eirav rarer).

N.B.

tos

av

is

Phil. 1330, Ai.

said never to be Temporal, but see Soph. 1117, with Jebb's note on the latter passage.

eireiSav Se Sunrpa^a>p.ai,

Seofiai,

r]l~(o.

Xen. An.

When I

have (shall have) accomplished

(Indefinite Futurity.)

my

object

will return.

Cum vero
So,

confecero quod in animo

Brj p,rj (T0eva>,

est, redibo.

ovkovv, brav

ireiravo-opiai.

SOPH. Ant. 91.

o'er.

when my power
rj

shall fail,

I will

give

(Indefinite Futurity.)
avTt)
(fxavr),

brav
voice,

<yevrjTai,aei aTrorpeireL

p,e.

PLAT.
me.

This inward

whenever

it comes, ever checks

(Indefinite Frequency.)
fiaivo/j,e0a iravrss, oirorav opyia>p,eda.

PHILEMON.

We are madmen all, whenever we (IndefiniteJ^encj^^

are angry.

236

TEMPORAL SENTENCES.

(Indefinite Futurity) Soph. El. 386, 1038, Note. For (Indefinite Frequency) Plat. Apol. xvi., xxiii., Soph. El. 267, (Indefinite Futurity) Soph. 293, Aesch. Pers. 602. All these part'icles may often be rendered, as soon Phil. 146.

6W

omW

as,

when

once,

but the time

is still

indefinite in the Future.

3.

o7roVav (Indefinite
av)
:

ZireiSdv

Frequency) Xen. Cyr. iii. (Frequency) Plat. Apol. xxxii. Soph.

El. 627.

26,

al.

ottov

For

eSre av, poetical,

With the Subjunctive expressing Indefinite Frequency compare idy (rjv) with Subjunctive in General Suppositions.

B. With Optative in Historic Sequence,

oiroTe (ore

evei, eVetS?),

very rarely).

ol ovoi, 7ret rt? oicokoi, irpoopajxovre'i

av evaTrjKeaav.

Xen.
The asses, whenever any one chased them, would gallop ahead and then halt. (Indefinite Frequency.)
ottot ev irpao-aroi 7roXt?
ej(aipe,

Xvirpas

B'

e(pepev, ei ti hvarvj^ol.

Eur. Supp. 897.

Whene'er the state fared well,

He would
071-oTe

rejoice,

and mourn

if aught

it suffered.

is

=d

7tot,

as

much

conditional as temporal.

PLAT. Apol. xxxii., 99 a good instance.

Note, eird,
to denote

ojtote evrvxotfu IlaAa/MjSet.

See In Thuc. i.

lirei&rj, ojtot with the Optative appear always Frequency rather than Futurity, except when they represent an ejnjv, tTreiSdv, ott6to.v, ordv turned from Primary

to Historic sequence.

Compare d with Optative

in General Suppositions.

211.
Definite

"

SINCE" IN DEFINITE TIME.

quo with Indicative),
since,

e% ov (ex

ever

since,

in

Time witl^Indica^v^^^

"

WHILST" IN INDEFINITE TIME.

to,

237

e ov

eviKa arpareverai, row; $1X01/9 vtKa.

DEM.
Ever
since mercenaries have been serving, he has been

conquering his friends.

Aesch. Pers. 761, for i>s (like 90 (Poppo), e Sv, acf> oC are also used.
e oSt6

ut in Latin) TfflJC. iv.

For
This
note.

ut in Latin

cf.

Ov.

Trist. v. 10. 1, ut

sumus in Ponto,

etc.

may be

expressed participially in the Dative, see

118,

212.
'

"

WHILST" IN DEFINITE TIME.

a>, ev bam, baov ypovov, r\viKa (rarely denoting Definite Duration with Indicative.

JEo)?,

ears, ev

fteftpt), whilst,

[Latin

dum,

donee,

quamdiu, quoad with Indicative.]

6(s en, veos ei/il, ti\v -tyvyvjv ryv/Mva^co.

While I
paSiw;

am
to

still

young,

train

my

mind.
ev
777

eiriTriSeia

kfjofiev,

baov yjpovov

"TroXefiia ecroiieOa.

We

shall easily find supplies so long as {during all

the time that)

we are in

the enemies' country.

dvrjp e/celvos, tjvik t\v ev rfj voa(p,

avTO?

/lev tfSero.

Soph. Ai. 271.

as he was
set i' the

Ton

chief, so long

plague,

Himself was happy.

Donee morbo
09!e<rTtv

versabatur.
iii.

lore with past tense, Xen. An.

1.

19.
e us I Air is

{dum

licet),

Plat. Apol. xxxi.

viii.

^v (past
10. 2.

tense)

dum

spes erat,

Thuc.

40.

/^xP'i

Thuc.

iii.

" WHILST" IN INDEFINITE TIME. 213. The same particles denoting Indefinite Duration take A. Subjunctive

*$^g%$g^ *

238

TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
ecotnrep

av epmveco, ov
as

fvq iravo-co/Mai <ptko<ro<pa)v.

Plat.
Just so long
philosophy.

breathe,

never will give

up

Dum
Cf.

spirabo

haud desinam philosophari.

Aesch. Ag. 1435.

av
av. os Icrov ej avro

B. Optative in Historic Sequence, without

^trjcro/Mv
jj,rjSi7T07'

p,eiov yevecrOcu,

lauToJ.

We
[Latin

shall

admit that
it

it

Plat. Theaet. 155 a. never would become either greater or

less, so

long as

should remain

equaHo

itself.

dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad, with Future In-

dicative, or,

when purpose

is

connoted, Subjunctive.]

214.

"

UNTIL " IN DEFINITE TIME.

1,

?, 6<7T6, /J-e^pi, axpi (p^XR 1 ov> &XP ing Definite Time with Indicative.

ov)>

un ^> denot-

evre poetical,

fie%ptfi,

a%pts before a vowel in later writers.

[Latin

donee, quoad,
eiroiovv,

with past Indicative.]

L

ravra

^XP

ctkotos eyevero.

XeN.

This they were doing until darkness came on.

quoad or donee nox

Cf.

oppressit.

Thuc.

i.

109,

iv. 4,

/xexpt ov

and

fie'xpi.

iraiovai rov SwrripiSriv, ecrre rfvar/Kaaav iropeveo-Oai.

They beat Soterides

till

they compelled

him

to

Xen. move on.

quoad progredi coegerunt.

Cf. Soph.

Ant. 415.
etas acjiiKovro Is

i^iapovv Sid twv 26KA5i/,

KaTavTiv.

Thuc.
They marched through
to

vi.

62.

3.

the country of the Sicels,

,

till

they

came

Gatane.

. Digitized
. .

by Microsoft

,^

"

UNTIL " IN INDEFINITE TIME.

239

7rcuowri, KpeoKOTrovcri Svo-rrjvmv /*eAij,

ecus

diravTtov e^mrk^Oeipav j3iov.

AeSCH.

Pers. 466.

They hack, hew mincemeat the poor wretches' limbs, Till they had crushed outright the limes of all.
eirw)(ii)V

av, ecus ol irXeiarroi r<av tltaOortov yvdptjv

&Tre<f>rji.

vavro, k.t.X., r)(rv){iav av rjyov.

DEM.

Phil.

1.

I should
In
this

have waited, until most of the regular speakers had expressed their views, and have been keeping quiet.

example the Indicative denotes Indefinite

Futurity thrown hack into the past, and consequently

now

Indefinite only to the original thought of the chief

subject.

This

is parallel

with a Final Sentence in the

Indicative (see Index).

215.

"

UNTIL" IN INDEFINITE TIME.

Futurity, take

The same Particles, denoting Indefinite A. Subjunctive in Primary Sequence.

/ie'^jOt S'

av 670a

r\KG>, at,

tnrovSal fievovTcav.

XEN. AESCH.

Until

I return,
ear av
till

let

the armistice continue.

67Ticr^es

icai

ra Xonra

Kpo^fiaQvp.

Pause

thou further learn what yet remains.

ecos

avdyKHj rauTa del Tape^eiv,

av \dpav

XdfSrj.

Xen.
It is necessary to furnish continually the {shall) take the country.
eSt'

Cyr. iv. 5. 37.

until he

same things

av Aesch. Pers. 366.

B. Optative in Historic Sequence.

Trepie/j&vofiev

eKaarore,

ea>s avoiyQeiri

to Bea/icorripiov.

Plat.

We

used

to

wait about on each occasion, until the

be) opened.

prison was (should

Trepiep.evop.ev is

Frequentative, but ?<os dvoixdelr] expresses Indefinite Futurity, and expresses indirectly the thought of the chief subject. Digitized by Microsoft

240

TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
airovSa<; ewoiryjavTo ea>? avrayyekdeii)

They made an armistice

(should he) announced.

(to

last)

till

ra Xey^Oevra. Xen. the terms were

Here again the thought of the chief subject is clearly seen. Their original words would be cnrovSas Troiovp,eda ecus &v aTrayyeXdrj. The moods in the two last examples are thus
due to Oratio Obliqua.
Note. It may be generally laid down that 4'us, etc., with the Subjunctive and Optative after Affirmative Sentences correspond to irpiv with the same moods after Negative Sentences. (os, etc., do occur, but very exceptionally, after Negative

Sentences.
ovk dvap,evop.ev,
eo>s

av

rj

r)p,erepa

X "P a KOKGrai, Xen. Cyr.

(

iii.

3. 18.

We do not remain until owr country is being ravaged. When Trpiv is used with any finite mood the action

of its

verb will not begin until the action of trpiv with the principal verb has occurred. The difference here consists in the meaning of the verb dvapAvto, to continue.

2l6.

THE CONJUNCTION

TLpiv.

TUplv with the Indicative, Subjunctive and Optative is used after Negative Sentences where !?, iore, pixpi, etc., are used after Affirmative Sentences.
JIplv
r)

is

used like

Trpiv.

-rrpoTepov,

irpdadev, Trdpos,

another irpiv (used as an adverb), frequently are used in the Principal Sentence as forerunners of -Trpiv.
JJpiv differs from other Temporal Particles only in being joined to an Infinitive as well as to other moods. The following table will show the ordinary Attic usage.

Exceptions are given subsequently.

A.

After Affirmative Prin- \ -rrplv with the Infinitive, cipal Sentences. J Digitized by Microsoft

Upiv

WITH THE

INFINITIVE.
(\.

241

When

the

Time

is

De-

finite, irplv

with the

Indicative.

B. After Negative Principal

Sentences.

2.

When the Time is Indefinite

(Indefinite

Fu-

turity), irplv

with the

Subjunctive and Optative.

The order
irplv is

in time of the Principal

and Subordinate
(1)

Sentences in irplv clauses should be noticed.

When

used with the Infinitive, the action of the Principal Sentence takes place before that of the Subordinate
Sentence (the irplv clause).
a Finite
(2)

When

irplv is

used with

Mood

(Indicative,

Subjunctive,

Optative) the

action of the Principal Sentence had to wait (in the past),

or has to wait (in the future) for the decisive occurrence

of the irplv clause.

217.

Uplv

WITH THE
irplv.

INFINITIVE.
Infinitive always

A. The
means

Principal action takes place before the Sub-

ordinate action with

before.

Uplv with

The

Infinitive in itself denotes the

fact, like

mere

verbal notion rather than a distinct

the English

gerundive in -ing (before coming, going, speaking).

the fact
is

But

often implied.

Cf.

mare with

Infinitive.

irpiv fiev iretvrjv e<rdlei<;, irplv Be SiTJrrjv irlveis.

You

eat before being hungry,

you drink

before being

thirsty.
eirefiyfre irpiv ev

He

sent before he

Teyeq auros elvai. XEN. was himself in Tegea.

by Mbrosoft

Observe the Nominative- attraction.

Digitized

2/12

TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
Trpiv ytvitrdai rjp,as i)v rjpZv
r)

^pv\r\.

PlAT. Phaed. 77.

Before we were created our soul was in existence.

fjpus M.eo-0-qvqv eiXopev Trpiv Hepo-as Xafjetv tyjv /3ao-iAeiai>. Isoc. Archid. 26.

We
6V

conquered Messene before the Persians took the kingdom.

Trpiv yevecrdai
ijjttas y^povti).

Tfc)

PLAT. Phaed. 88.

In

the days before

we were

born.

2l8.

lipiv

WITH THE INDICATIVE IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST).

Indicative.

1.

JJplv with Aorist

i.

(The

Historic

present occurs in Thuc.

TJplv

132, irplv rytyveTcu.)

may

equally be rendered before, until.

ov irporepov eiravaavto irpiv

01 AaiceBaifiovioi

Mea-

a-rjviov; efe/3a\oi> etc

t^s ^wpa<;.

ISAETJS 12.

The Lacedaemonians did not leave off until (he/ore) they had expelled the Messenians (and then they
did leave
oiJ

off).
tToA.ju.ijcrai'

Trpocrdev itveyi<dv

jiyjos

??|U.as

7r6X.ep.ov Trpiv

tovs CTpaTrjyovs f)p.dv <Tvve\a.f3ov. XEN. An. iii 2. 29. They did not dare to make war on us until {before) they seized our generals.

See Aesch. P. V. 481. In Isoce. Panegyr. 19,

irplv

ZSiSagav

where

Trpiv Si8a|eiav

would be expected.

219. UpCv

WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE IN INDEFINITE TIME.

2. nplv av with Subjunctive in Primary Sequence, Negative Sentences, denotes Indefinite Futurity. after

ov

yfir\

yite

atrekdelv irpiv av Sa>

Siicrjv.

Xen. An.
I must not depart
before
Digitized

v. 7. 5.

I suffer punishment.

by Microsoft

nptV

WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

243

Cf. also

Aesch. P. V. 165, Eur. Heracl. 179.

PLAT.

ovk airoicpivovfiat irpoTepov irplv av irv0a>/uu. / will not answer before {until) I hear.

trpiv alone with Optative may be described as irplv av with Subjunctive converted into Historic Sequence by

Oratio Obliqua, actual or virtual.

aTrriyopeve /irjSeva fiaXKeiv, irplv
dijpwv.

Kvpos ep,irXrjcrdecrj Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 14.

He
The

forbade every one

to shoot until

Gyms

liad

had

{should have had) his fill of the chase.

recta

would be prjdeh

/3a\\eTio irplv av epirXrjcrdy.

eireiytipovv exarrTOv ireiOeiv pr) irporepov Ttov lavrov prjSevbs

iTTipeXel&Oai, irplv tavrov

eirL[jt,e\r)deir),

Plat. Apol. xxvi.

I used
Uplv

care for any of the things belonging to himself before caring for himself.
to try to

persuade each one not

to

is also

used after another Optative (see Oratio

Obliqua, Assimilation of Optatives).

o\oio

p,r\ira>

irplv p,a6oip! ei icai iraXiv

yvcopuriv fieTot<ret<;.

Soph. Phil. 961.

Perish not ere

learn if yet again

Thou

will repent thy purpose.

220. Hpiv with

the

Infinitive

after

Negative
after

Sentences, and with the other Affirmative Sentences.

Moods

As

stated above, the general Attic rule

-is

Infinitive follows Affirmative Sentences.

But the

that irplv with rule is not

without exceptions. In Homer irplv with Infinitive regularly In the follows either Affirmative or Negative sentences. In Attic prose, Attic poets it very rarely follows a Negative. however, several instances occur of uplv with Infinitive after a Negative. Digitized by Microsoft


244

TEMPORAL SENTENCES.

Instances in the Attic poets occur in Aesch. Ag. 1067, Soph. Ai. 1418, Eur. H. F. 605, and Aeist. Av. 964.

In Thuc. some cases occur (i. 68, i. 39) in both of which the oi belongs rather to the Infinitive than to the principal verb; in v. 10 the Negative belongs to the principal verb clearly. In all these three cases the abstract verbal notion rather than the fact is stated, e.g. v. 10, irplv tov<s fiorjdovs

But in vii. 50 irplv with arrival of his allies. the Infinitive is found after a Negative where we should certainly look for an Optative, occurring- as it does in the reported words of Nikias.
f/KCLv, before the

ouS'

f/jxipa's p.eTva.1,

av SiafiovXtvcraadai en t;, irplv k.t.X., oVcos av irporepov Ktvrjdeirj.

until he

t/dis

evvea

He

declared that he would not even consider the

making of a
peivaipu

move

had waited

thrice

nine days.

Recta, ovS' av 8iaf3ov\ev<ral/j.riv or irplv av p.eiv(aj.

Cf. also
TLplv,

irplv peivai (for irplv

Antiph. Herod.

25,

Andok.

Myst. 43.

with a Finite Mood (Indicative, Subjunctive, Optafound when the Principal Sentence is affirmative in farm, but virtually negative.
tive), is

a<f>pwv vkoi

Jpi,

irplv to. irpa.yp.aT

Iyyij0ev

(tkottiLv IsefSov, k. t. X.

EUR.

I.

A. 489.

where d^>pu>vz=ovK

ep.cf>po)V.

irplv

Similarly in Thuc. i. 118. 2, oiire enc&Xvov, dk\' fja-vxa(ov Si) fj Svvafus twv 'AOrjvalmv ypero, where, besides the true negative oiVe IkcoXuov, rjcrvx^ov means, they did not bestir themselves.

See also Thuc.

irplv.

iii.

29,
vii.

Xavdavowi
71. 4, irplv

irplv

-.

viii.

105,

elpyov
tive

But in Thuc.
after

with the Indica-

irapairk-qa ta iiraa-yov, irplv

principal sentence truly affirmative ye Srj ol Supa/cdcriot irpetpav tovs 'Adrjvalovs, they were in the same state of excitement, until at last the Syracusans routed the Athenians (eWe Sij might have been

occurs

expected).

With

the Subjunctive and Optative irplv

:

is

very

rarely found even after quasi-negative sentences

Til av Siktjv Kpiveiev
irplv
Tt's
r)

yvolrj

\6yov,
cratjficos
;

av

trap' dp,<j>oiv

pvudov eKp,adrj

EUR. Herac. 179.

av, '

however,
'

is

almost a real negative. Digitized by Microsoft

"A*

OMITTED WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

LYS. 22.

245

ai(T)(pbv ijyoij/iat irporepov TTavo-ao-Qai irpiv av vy*eis,

fHovXrjo-de, \fnj<p(o-r]o-0e.
4.

oti av

Here
/*ij

alo-xpov is a virtually negative word, as its use before ov with an Infinitive shows. (See Negatives.)
r),

TLplv

irporepov

rj,

irpocrdtv

rj,

vcrrepov

rj,

are used like irpiv

with an

Infinitive.
urp,ev Trporepov

tov Mf}8ov avrol

irpoairavTrjo-ai.

ekdovra
i.

rj

ra. Trap' vi.

vjxwv
58).

Thuo.
see vi. 4.

601 (and

For

%0-repov

rj

oirja-(U

221- "Av omitted with the Subjunctive, in Temporal and other Subordinate Sentences.
In all sentences with the Subjunctive (Indefinite Relative, Conditional, Temporal), av is sometimes not used even in It seems quite a mistake to say Attic prose "and poetry. It is much more rational to treat this that av is omitted. construction (like that of the Optative without av), as a survival of the older usage, so constantly found in Homer, when the mood might or might not at pleasure be modified by the adverb av. Instances of all the constructions are here given, but it must be remembered that they are all- exceptional constructions in Attic, except, perhaps, in the case of
the Temporal Particles.
Indefinite Belative

1059;

opdovv (f>Xavpov os veos ireayj. SOPH. 0. C. 595. arixutpiOv ov r)p.iv ov pev ^pa^ii<s apK&o-t p/r) iroWois THITC. iv. 17. Xprjcrdai, Aoyots.

yepovra

S'

Of.

Soph.

El. 771, 225,

Ai

496; Ant. 323.

(el with Subjunctive Conditional: Pindar, several in Herodotus).

common

in

Homer,

8ixrTaA.an/a Tap' eyw,

el o-ov o-reprjOS.

SOPH.

0. C.

1441.

Cf. 509, Antig. 710, 0. T.

198 (Chorus).
^vo-tZo-w at iroAeis, according to

Once
the best

in

ThuC.

vi.

21,

el

MSS.

See Kriiger and Poppo.

Digitized

by Microsoft

246

TEMPORAL SENTENCES.

Temporal
irpiv

irporepov

py

diroKTivvvvai

8etv

irptv

avayK-qv Ttva o
vi.

0eos hriirkpipy.
prj <TTcvae irplv

PLAT. Phaedo,
Phil. 917, Antig.

pddys.

Soph.
p*XP l
?(os

619 (Chorus).

T " s o-jtovSols kcrtrewrdai.

Thuc.
ecus

iv.

16 (also
ko.1

iv.

p^XP 41 and

^ hvavkXQuto-iv.
i.

137),

Soph. Ai. 571.

764).

to yalpav

to

A.u7reto"0<zi

pdOys.

ra

J?r

8'

apdpry, k.t.X.

.M 555 (PM. SOPH, ^wt 1025.

Soph.

these Temporal Particles dv is commonly used in prose, They seem in themselves but it is fairly often omitted. sufficient to mark the indefmiteness of future time without the addition of av.

With

222.

"Av retained with the Optative.

In a few places dv is found with a Relative and Optative, and with a Temporal particle and the Optative, almost as if the writer in changing from the Subjunctive had forgotten to
drop the
cos

av. kXoyi^opyv ravra TTpodvpos (roi o-vXXdf3oip,i, oiKeios T6 o-oi e&oiprjv, kcu !ecroiTO poi 8iaXeye<r9ai croi oirocrov

av xp6 yov povXoipyv, Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 49. Here either birotTov av f3ov\<apaL or qttoctov fiovXoip-qv would have been expected. Of. Xen. Ap. i. 2. 6, Trap' &v av Xd^ouv. So ovSeis oo-Tts ovx r/yeiTO Siktjv pe XytpeaOat. 7rapa tZv kiriTp&irmv, iireiSav Ta^'oTa dv-qp ai/cu 8oKip,a<rOel-qv, DEM. Onet. i. 865. 24. Cf. SOPH. Tr. 687, os S.V dppoaai.pi.

223.

The Subjunctive
Sequence.

instead of the Optative, or co-ordinate with the Optative in Historic

pexP 1
till

kftovXeva-av Secrpots avToiis 4>vXdtrcruv

Tl ^/j/Jcucrt.
iv. 41.

Thuc.
They decided to heep them in prison was come to.

some arrangement

Observe that av
ti ^vp/Saicv.

is
i.

Cf.

omitted with the Subjunctive, for pexp 1 $ 91, irplv av Subjunctive after Historic time. Digitized by Microsoft

THE PARTICIPLE AS A TEMPORAL SENTENCE.

jraprqyytiXav
IttciSij

247

Seiirvrjcreiav

iravTas ava-rravtcrdai, kcu

hr&rOai ijvuc' av Tts wapayyeWfl, XEN. An. iii. 5. 18. They issued orders for all to rest as soon as they had dined, and then to follow whenever any one issued orders.

This principle of the return to the Primary Sequence

common in Greek
224.

that

it

is so requires no further explanation here.

The

Participle as a Substitute for a

Temporal Sentence.
The
Participle is a regular substitute for a sentence exliret,
ZireiSrj,

pressed by

rjv'iKa

with Imperfect and Aorist

Indicative, but is used

freely, for it is joined to Present and Future Time, whereas these Particles go with a past Principal Verb.
still
1.

more

The Present

Participle denotes an action contem-

porary with that of the Principal Verb.

afia

clearly the

and fieragv with the Participle bring out more contemporary time.
$i\nnrq> airiovrt. met Philip as he was going away.

aTT7]VT7](ra

afj,a TTpoiaiv evecrKOTreiTO.

Xen.
pe
eirecT^e

As

he was going forward he was considering.

<rr]/j,e2ov

to rov 6eov
/xeTafu.

iroWaj(ov

877

Xeyovra

Plat. Apol. xxxi.

The sign of the god very often has checked me in the midst of my talk (while I have been speaking while the words were on my lips),

to

enecrxt is here
2.

a gnomic

aorist.1

The Aorist

Participle denotes an action prior

that of the Principal Verb.

The Perfect Participle would express a completed state before the action of the Principal Verb.
1 Never forgetting that the Aorist Participle does not always denote an action prior to that of the principal Verb. See Participles. Where the Aorist Participle denotes a contemporary action it expresses Ch>

eumstance, not Time.

Digitized

by Microsoft

248

TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
r/Brj,

tote, Tore

elra, eirei,Ta,

accompany the Principal Verb,

is

ovtws often Participle with the evdvs

T7]viKavTa,

like Ta^ta-ra

with a Conjunction.

Tvpavvevcra<i krti rpla 'Iimta? e-^copei e? Siyeiov.

Thuc.
After
ruling
three
to

years

(when

Hippias retired
retired.

Sigeum, or

had ruled), he ruled and then

he

EWrjcnrovTov eiretra Xen. An. vii. 1. He induced him to accompany him over the Hellespont, and then withdraw {after he had accompanied
eicekevcre ovv

Biaffavra tov

a-rraXkaTTetrOcu.

him,
ev6v<s

to

withdraw).

yevopevoi (primo ortu), immediately after birth.

evOvs aTTo^e^irjKoTei, directly they landed, no sooner

had

they landed

than, etc.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTER
225.

IV.

CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.
chief Concessive Particle in Greek is km, with or
irep.

The

without the enclitic

Concessive Sentences are most commonly expressed by

the Participle, especially with
alone).
icalirep

The

Negative

is

0x1.

"Opax;

(more rarely kui (tamen) often

accompanies the Principal Verb.

tov KXewvos, Kawrep paviwBrj<; ovaa,
dire^rj.
rj

inroa^eo-K

Thuc.

Cleon's promise, insane though it was,

Cf.

was fulfilled,.
AESCH.

Soph. Ai. 122.

ireidov yvvai^i, icanrep ov arepyeov bpcoi.

Listen to

women though thou

like
it

them

not.
is

The

o/lmus

belongs to ireiQov, though

often

drawn

to

the Participle.
owtos oleTal ti elSevai ovk etSw?. PlAT. Apol. vi. This man thinks he knows something though- he knows
nothing.
Kayi}
<r

Invovpai, koX yvvrj irep

oScr' o/i(os.

EUR.

Orest. 680.

I too entreat thee, woman though I oe. Here kou and nep are separated, and opm
its

is

dislocated from

Verb.

Note 1. ovSe, ovSe irep, pr/Se, /j.rjSe irep are also found with Concessive Particles in Negative Concessive Sentences. ovk av irpoS'oLrjv, ovSe Trep irpdao-oiv k<xk<3s. EUK. Phoetl. 1624.
I'd not betray, not even though in woe.
yvvauKi
7ret'0<n>,

prjSe raX-qdi] kXvoiv.

EUR. Hipp. Fr. 443.

the truth.

Hearken

to

a woman, even if thou hearest not

250

CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.
fi,rj8'

ovS' d, oiS' kdv,

cessive sentences (ne

[tfj

quidem).

d,

/j8'

kdv are used in Negative Con-

flop'u/JjjoTjTe, ftr/S'

kdv 86u> ti

vjj.Iv

fiiya Aeyeiv.

Plat. Apol.

v.

Do
ovft d,

mo< interrupt, even if you shall think that

I am

speaking

presumptuously.

Apol. xvii. 29.

kyi> plkv

oSv ovk dv jtot1

tis oitrebv 8a>p'

oijS'

? juoi

Ta

<ra

/AAot

k<j>'

oiixi

vw

^AiSas,

tovtois vireiKaOoi/JU. SOPH. El. 360. Ne'er then would I, not e'en if one were like To bring me those thy gifts, wherein thou now Art glorying, submit to these.

Note

and 404

also,
b,

koX ravra, and that too, is also used with a participle, but very seldom, ko.Itoi. For Kai raxra, Plat. Bep. Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 16. For naCm, Plat. Prot. 339 o.
2.

ky> ovSev rovrtav iroirjcna, ko.1

ravra KivSvvtvwv. Plat. Apol. xxiii

I will
Note
sense.
3.

do none of these things, and that too though

risk.

I am

run-

ning a

The Relative

occasionally

is

used in a concessive
:

For
6'o-Tis

6'o-Tis,
:

Soph. Ai. 434, orov

os ee/fyv,

r/0eA

TruT-qp and Arist. Ach. Antiph. Caed. Herod. 25.

57,

Note 4. drrep, kdvrrep, bear a sort of concessive force, or perhaps rather a particularising force, that is to say, cf. if really, Eur. Her. Fur. 1345, Lys. 12. 48; kdvwep, Plat. Apol. xii. (a General Supposition).

Note on ei Kai, Kai el, etc. 226. Kai added to the Conditional particles el, kdv,

r\v gives the Conditional Sentence a concessive meaning. Kai is thus added to any form of Conditional Sentence, which will therefore follow the rules of Conditional Sentences. distinction is generally made between d Kai and koX d. Et ko.1 is said (by Hermann and Kiihner) to concede a fact, although, ko.1, d a supposition, even if (a supposition). It is impossible to support this theory. As /cat with d and kdv occur with every form of conditional sentence (Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative) with ordinary and general. suppositions, Kai cannot give

NOTE ON

el

Kai, Kai

el,

ETC.

251

the el or lav the power of turning any and every form of supposition into statement of a fact. Hermann's dictum at the most could hold good only of ei Kai and ;<ai el with the Indicative. And it is equally true here as with ordinary conditions (without Kai) that if a fact is stated it is only by virtue of the context. Madvig more cautiously states that el Kai sometimes inclines more to the affirmation of the condition, and that it is often only distinguished from Kai el by being less emphatic. This is the most we can say, the latter Kai in these phrases is part of his remark being very true. expletive, i.e. it emphasises the word it precedes (as in irplv Kai yeveo-Oai 17/ias, Plat. Phaed. 77. 6, before we came into bemg at all). It is further clear that Kai el with the Indicative often leans to the affirmation of the condition as strongly as Kai el, being more emphatic, may often mean that ei Kai. even in spite of, under extreme circumstances, the Apodosis holds
good.
el Kai,

with Indie, Plat. La. 182, Soph. El. 547,

0. T. 302.

Kai

el,

FjjAT.Apol. xxix., AESCH.Ars.297, Aesch. Cho. 290 (leans to the fact); Soph. Ai. 564 (do.); Soph. Ant. 234 (fut. indie.) Plat. Apol. xix. (koi el fieXkei).
in unfulfilled conditions, Isocr. de permut.
(33),

ei Kai,

from Madvig.
276 (Apodosis
eSei)
;

K ai

el,

Plat.
199.

Polit.

Dem.

21.

kavKaL, with Subj.,

koi lav,

Dem.

16. 24.

Menand.

Fr. 19 (a General Supposition); Plat. Symp. 185, Soph. El. 25 (a General

Supposition).
Kai
el,

with Optat., Xen. Sell.

is

vii. 1. 8.

ei

Kai

used concessively with an ellipse of

xviii.

its

verb in

Plat. Apol.
el

Though

Kai yeXoiorepov eforeiv. the expression be ridiculous.

is

el Kai, in Soph. Ant. 90, emphasises the el.

ei

not concessive at
epq.i).

all;

Kai

Kai
if

Svvrjcrei y'

'

(dAA' afir\xdvu>v

Ay, 3

thou wilt be able.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEK

V.

227. FINAL SENTENCES, FUTUKE INDICATIVE,

6W

WITH THE

AND VERBS OF

FEAEING WITH

rf, etc.

Introductory Note.
Three more or less closely connected constructions are here brought into juxtaposition. They are
A. Final Sentences.
B.

Modal Sentences with

Indicative.

6Vu>s

and the Future

C.

Verbs

of

Fearing with pj,

fir]

ov.

These three constructions sometimes run into one another, they widely diverge. Verbs of Fearing with pf) deprecate a result. Negative, Modal, and Final Sentences consider or adopt means to avert a result. The connecting The resemblance is strongest links, therefore, are /*iy and oVcos. ravra 7roi<3 6Vu>9 /mj in three such types as the following
at other times
:

dwodavo),
0.

do this that

I may
care

not die.
{strive

B.

7ri/jeA.oC/j<xi

ojtws /mj

6.irodavovjj.ai,
<o/3o{)/i<u

I p;

take

that

how)

shall

not

die.

diroddvu,

blance
or

is

juai oVcos

even stronger juij dirodavio, and of

I fear that I shall die. 1 The resemwhen the construction of B. is 4xiju.eA.ou0. <j>ofiov[mi oVcos

pj

aTrodavovfjuja,

the other hand the divergence is greatest between A. ravra. 7roi<3 6'mos ftij mrodavw (a true Final Sentence), and C. 4>o/3ovimii &$ cm-opijo-as, I fear that you will be at a loss,
airodavta.
1 The term Object Sentence is often applied to the second and third forms of these Sentences. If by an Object Sentence is meant one which stands as an Object to the Principal Sentence, then the term appears too comprehensive to be of practical value. It would include Indirect Statements, Indirect Questions, Indirect Commands, the Infinitive after such verbs as j3oti\o/mt (e.g. {Soi\o/iai iXdcTv), besides Sentences with Situs, etc. More would be lost than gained by grouping together con-

On

structions so different as

oUa

a/mfyniv, (3oi}\o/i eXfleie,

and

ckSttci Situs

Tavra yev/ia-erat. Further, if we use the term Object Sentence, why not also Subject Sentence? Syntax must be content sometimes to
sacrifice logical

system

^0^^mtrosoft

FINAL SENTENCES.
where ws
is

253

airoprjo-eis is

practically a Substantival Sentence of

<j>o/3ovp.ai

Indirect Statement, or

dwodaveiv (to an-oOavttv), which

the same as <j>o/3ov/j.ai 66.vo.tov. It is not easy to give the right name to sentences of class They correspond with the Latin construction euro, enitor, B. efficio, with ut and the Subjunctive, which Dr. Kennedy assigns to the Indirect Petition. By an extension of the usage of ottus, verbs of commanding and of requesting (which introduce a true Indirect Petition) may take 6V<os with, a Future Indicative, just as impero and poslulo, etc., take ut (or ne). "On-cos is a Relative Modal Adverb meaning as, how, 3s O7r<os, (Epic) or outos ottojs (Attic) thus as or how, 3s or ovrws being the Antecedents to 6'jnos. It is also used in Questions, /cara\eoy O7r(os ^vrijo-as (Od. iii. 97), tell me how thou didst meet with. But one of the most characteristic usages of oVcas is in Modal Deliberative Questions with the Subjunctive or Optative, after such verbs as <f>pdop,a.i, p.eppvr)pl{tn, e.g. cf>pdeo-6cu oTrirtos k p.vi]o-T7Jpa,s KTtivgs (Od. i. 295) take counsel how thou shalt slay the wooers. The connection between this and a Final Sentence

is
i.

obvious,

e.g. Trepi(j>pa,u>p,6a

7ravTes voo-tov, ojtids eXdyo-i (Od.

77), let us all take good counsel touching his return how (so that) The Future Indicative is used much in. he shall reach home.

the same
day.

way

as the Subjunctive,

e.g.

<f>pdfev oirias

d\erjo-eLs

icaKov ijp.ap (II. ix. 251), take counsel

how thou

wilt avert the evil

228.

FINAL SENTENCES.

achieve or avert a result.

of ways, chiefly
tive

Final Sentences denote an end, purpose, or intention to They are expressed in a variety

by and Optative

(1)
(2)
;

Final Particles with the Subjunc-

by the Future

Participle

(3)

by

Eelative Sentences

(4) in certain cases

by the

Infinitive.

229.

FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE

AND
The Final
and Lyric
Particles are
only).

OPTATIVE.
'iva, &>?,

and

oirmi (oeppa is Epic

'iva firj,

In Negative Sentences

&>? prj,

oTrm m> and sometimes /j only. In Primary Sequence the Subjunctive is used, in Historic Sequence the OptaDigitized

by Microsoft

254

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

but the
strict

tive,

Sequence

is

often disregarded, and the

Subjunctive used instead of the Optative.

PLAT. tov kclkov Bel KoXa^eiv \v dfielvcov f/. It is necessary to punish the criminal in order that he

may

be

reformed.

'ueeTevcre

tovs Sucao-rd? fiera

ttoWwv oaicpvwv

tva

eKerjOelt).

PLAT,

He

entreated the jury with

many

tears in order that

he might be pitied.
irapaicaXels ULrpovs owo)?
fit]

airodavr/^.

Xen.

You

call

in physicians in order that you

Sitcaicov,

may not

die.

Iva ol aXKot, Tv^coan tcov

dvt]XlcrKTe.

ra

vfierep

avrcov

In
For
4.

order that the rest might obtain their rights,

DEM. yon
i.

used
to?

to

spend your

own

resources.

see Eue. Tro. 714.

For

p,r\

only Xen. Gyr.

fir)

25 (Xeyerai enrelv

on

cnrievai fiovkoiro,

Trcm)p

ti axOoiro).

Mrj truly

final is

however

rare.

Note

1.

The Subjunctive and

Optative are sometimes found

alternating in Historic Sequence.

to ukoWvvo.1 av6pb>7rovs ^vppd-^ov^ ttoAAous Scipov e<cuveTo eTvai, pr) Tiva Sia/3oAr)v o-^olcv kcu ol o-TpariSnai Svcrvoi
&<ri.

Xen.
to

Hell.

ii.

1. 2.

To put

death a number of allies was considered a dangerous course, lest they should incur odium and the troops be
disaffected.

irapo.vXo-)(ov

<f>pvKrovs jroAAovs, 6V<os acra^ij to. o-rj/xtia Tots

o~<ftiov

7roAe|Utots y, (cat /mj fioriQoiev irplv

ol avBpes Sia-

THUC. ill. 22. They were hoisting many beacons,

(j>vyoi.etv.

in order that the enemies'

and that they might own men escaped (slwuld escape). Dr. Arnold in his well-known note on this passage explains that the Subjunctive expresses. the immediate, and the Optative
signals might be unintelligible to them,
not bring aid before their

the remote, consequence (? purpose), the second (Optative) being upon the first (Subjunctive). a consequence Such an explanaL H r
Digitized bj> Microsoft
'

FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC.

tion,

255

all cases, e.g.

however, clearly cannot apply, as Dr. Arnold thought, to to passages where the Optative precedes the Sub-

junctive (see

Xen.

Hell.

ii.

1.

2,

above, and Thuc.

vi.

96).

This interchange of moods, of the graphic Subjunctive and the remoter Optative, is allowable in every variety of Greek subordinate construction.

For other instances

vii.

cf.

Hdt.

i.

185

viii.

76

ix.

51

THUC.

17. 4; vii. 70.

1.

Note 2. &v is sometimes joined to cos and ottws with the Subjunctive (oc/>pa e Epic). It adds little, if any, meaning Possibly av may refer to an implied condition, like our English
so (in order that so).

av is not found with the Subjunctive in Negative Final Sentences. "Iva av, when it occurs, is not final but indefinitely local
r).
7rctTj0is

yap

lore- iracr' tv'

av irpdrry tls

ri?.

AEIST. Plut. 1151.

The fatherland

is

any land where'er a

man
ii.

is

prospering.

Examples of
cos

&>s

av with Subjunctive.

av

add-Q's, avroLKOva-ov.

XEN. An.

5.

Idsten in return, that you

\copei
(is

may

know.

irarepa rbv djxov,

8' evdairep KareKTaves av kv ravrcji ddvrjv. SOPH. El. 1496. On to the spot ev'n where thou slew'st my father, That so on that same spot thou mmfst be slain.

Cf.

Aesch. P.
A.
3.

V. 10

Soph. Phil. 825

Plat. Rep. 567

A,

Symp. 189
Note

When

av

is

in a Final Sentence,

cos

found with cos or cm-cos and the Optative and on-cos are Modal, and the Optative
\6yovs aueivov QiXlwirov av avrov djoycos e^T6.
irap-

with av
cos

is

an Apodosis.
av
CMi-ocre SiKaiovs

JU.6V

etrKevacrOe, cos Se KioXvcran'

Dem.

Phil.

ii.

66.

As

to

the

means by which you might

better

express just sentiments

to

you are
checking

him you
ottcos

prepared than Philip, but as are doing nothing.

means of
ii.

/3ov\eixr6ue6a
Cf. Cvr.
i.

av

dpuna

ayiavi^olaeda.
d.

XEN.

Cyr.

1. 4.

2. 5.

Plat. Symp. 187,

Digitized

by Microsoft

256

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

Hell. iv. 8. 16, o?ra>s av, ir\r]pa>6evTos vavriKov K.r.k., we must either explain that on-ws av wposSeoivi-o

In XEN.
irposSloivTo,
is

the Apodosis (m order that they might want), and irXripwdkvTos the Protasis, =ei Trki)p<i>deiri (if the fleet were manned) : or we must consider that Xenophon is using an Epic construction (<os oct-us av or Kiv in Final Sentences with the Optative, e.g.
Old. ii.

53, xvii. 362).

/*ij

The Optative with Thuc. ii. 93.

Note
4.

av occurs in Soph.

Track 631,

In a few places 6Va>s with a Future Indicative is than modal And as the verb of striving, or taking precaution, does not precede in these passages, they The Future Indicaare noticed here under Final Sentences. tive may be regarded as a vivid form of the Subjunctive.
strictly final rather

ov8e

8t' 'iv

d'AA.o T/oI<ovt<u

rj

ojnos p.a\ovvTai.

Xen.

Gyr.

ii.

1.

21.

And
e<prj

they are maintained for no other single purpose except

(lit.

for fighting
cnrcos

how

they shall fight).

e7rl

xprjvai dva/3i/3d^LV
firj

rbv rpo\bv tovs airoypafavras,

Trporepov vv ecrrai irplv 7rvdecr0ai tous avSpas

He

de Myst. 43. been informed against ought to be put upon the wheel (to the torture), in order to discover all
airavras.

Andok.

said that those

who had

the perpetrators before night-fall.

Soph. El. 955 ; Akist. Ecc. 495. It is doubtful whether the Future Optative, as the Obliqua The MSS. appear to favour other of the above, ever occurs. In Plat. constructions where it has hitherto been read. Rep. 393 E, /xij ovk kirapuko-oi occurs as a virtual, rather than cf. H. i. 25. literal, obliqua of pit] ov xpalo-py See Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 40.
Cf.
:

Note 5. In a few places the Optative is found in a Primary Sequence. The Optative carries back the purpose to its original conception in the past ; the action, though still continuing in the present, was begun in the past.
tVa
p,rj

TOVTOV &' 0^(0 TaXamuypoiTo. ArIST. Man. 23. I'm carrying him,

that he
i.e.

mayn't

be inconvenienced.

took

him on my back (and

Digitized

am

carrying him\ that he might

'

not

be, etc.

by Microsoft

FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC.

tovtov
e'xei

257

rbv Tpowov 6 vd/ios, 'tva p,r]8k ireicrdfjvai p,rj8' eayivon' 7ri T<j> S^/xy, DEM. 22. 11 (ANDEOT. 596, 17), i.e. the original intention of the law when first made was, etc. Cf. Xen. Cyr. iv. 2. 45 (tVa, e? ttotc Seoi, 8wa.ip.zQa, in Primary sequence). In the same way Cicero uses the Imperfect Subjunctive to recall the original intention Homines sunt hac lege generati qui tuerentur ilium globum quae terra dicitur, Oic. Rep. vi. 15. Sic mihi perspicere videor ita natos esse nos ut inter omnes esset societas quaedam, Cic. Lael. 5. Of. de Off. i. 152, ii. 1. Cf. Eur. El. 58, and Eec. 1138 (Subjunctive followed by Optative in Primary sequence).
TraTrjOrjvai,
:

230. Final Sentences with Past Tenses of

the Indicative.

A Final Sentence with ha (less commonly ois and 07nus) and a Past Tense of the Indicative expresses a purpose unfulin the Present (Imperfect Indicative), or in the Past (Aorist Indicative). The Principal Sentence is either an unfulfilled Wish, or an unfulfilled Apodosis.
filled either
et

yap

&cf>e\ov oloi re etvtu Tot

0106 Te ^crav Kal

dyada ra pkyuna.

peyL&Ta Kaa epydfecrdai, iVa PLAT. Crito, iii.

Would

they

had been

able to do the greatest evil, in order that

they might be able (or might have

the greatest good
icai

now been
;

able) to do also

(which they are not able to

do).

ti Sr/ piqv aj-wv y' tfv aKovcrai. PLAT. Euthyd. crotpwTaTot, eru

iv' rj/couonxs

dvSptav ol

304

E.

Well,
so ?

I assure

you

it

would have been worth hearing.

Why
say,

In order

that you might have heard the ablest men.

fjv,

&iov
It

ijv

of course =aiov av

similarly

we should

was worth hearing.

axpeXov Trdpoidev IkAhtciv fttov, k.t.A. SOPH. El. 1134, davibv e/cewo T# rod' r/pepa. Would God that I had first forsaken life, etc. That death had laid thee low on that far day.
a>9

orrtos

"wish)

Other well-known examples are Aesch. P. V. 152 (after a Soph. ib. 766 (after a question equivalent to a wish) 0. T. 1387, 1391 ; Dem. Aph. ii. 837. 11 ; iii. 849. 24.
: :

Digitized

by Microsoft

358

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

231.

FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE FUTURE

PARTICIPLE.
Sentence

is often expressed by a Future often added, denoting the thought, or the presumed intention in the mind of the Subject of the

Final
:

Participle

<a? is

principal verb.
7rpeV/3et9 e?

AcuceSalpova
to

eirefiyfrav

ravTa re epovvras
say
this,

kcu Avaavhpov alr^o-ovTa*;.

They sent envoys

ask for

Laeedaemon

to

XEN. and to

Lysander.
a>s

TrapecrKevd^oVTO

irposfiaXovvTe'; ra> Testerpari.

Thuo. They were making preparations for an attack on the

fort (with the intention of attacking).
Note.

Such a Participle
&pa
rnnivai, l/xol

is

especially

common

after a verb

of motion.
rjSij
fiikv

airoda.vovp.ivif, ip.lv Se fiiaxrofie-

vois.

Plat. Apol. xxxii.

It is high time to be going, for

me

that

I may

die,

for you

that you

may

live.

232.

RELATIVE FINAL SENTENCES.

Sentence
is

A Final
o?)

expressed by

oo-Tt? (less frequently

In Historic Sequence the Future Optative would strictly be used, but the Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is generally
with the Future Indicative.
\etained.

The negative
rots irpar/paaiv.

is pj\.

vpecrfieiav

nre/VKere ^Tt?

towt

epel

teat

irdpecrTai

Dem.
to

Send a deputation

tear this message,

and

to

be

present at the operations.

Legatos mittite qui haec nuntient rebusque se immi3ecant.

Digitized

by Microsoft

FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE INFINITIVE.

eSoge

259

To

817/ip

rpiaKovTa avhpas i\ea6ai,

to

ol vo/m>vs

^vyiypayfrovai,.

Xen.
appoint thirty

The assembly resolved

to

men who were

In

compile laws.
Cyr.
viii.
6.

Cf.

Xen.
vii.

An.

ii.

3.

6. (oi

agovcriv).

Thuc.

25, the Subjunctive occurs, olmep cppaa-eoai (in

Historic sequence).

233-

Final Sentences with the Infinitive.

Final Sentence is expressed by the Infinitive, chiefly after verbs of choosing, appointing, or assigning.
ISlevo(f>(av

to

fjp.io'v

tov o-rpaTev/MiTOs KarkXiirs <j>v\dTTtv rb

to

o-rpaTOTreSov.

XEN.
guard
the

Xenophon
ol

left

half his force behind

e'iXeo-de

camp.
xvii.

apxpvTes ovs
rulers
vi.

apxew
to

p.ov.

PLAT. Apol.

The
Cf.

whom

you chose

rule me.

THUC.
1.

50, TrXewral re, k.t.X.

we have

As the Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Dative, a natural explanation of this use of it jtvXarr nv, for may, of course, say that the Infinitive is the guarding. explanatory (epexegetical).
Note
:

We

Note Index.

2.

For tov with the

Infinitive in a Final Sense, see

234.

"Ottos, ottos

pvr\,

MODAL WITH THE

ETC.

FUTURE INDICATIVE,

Ottos, 07T0)? pr) are used with the Future Indicative

means to an end {considering, striving, and contriving). In Primary Sequence the Future Indicative is used; in Historic Sequence the Future Optative may be used, but the Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is much commoner.
(usually the 2d person) after Verbs of taking
Digitized

by Microsoft

260

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

:

Such Verbs are

/3ovXev<a
opca
(TKOiro} (o-K07ro{!/ittt)

peXet

(/tot)

wpdcrcrto

peXerht

pyq-^avSpai
irapaa-Kevafo
<rirov8dia

tvXaSovpai
irpodvp.ovp.o.1

4>povTi^(i)

itnp.iXovp.ai

(pvXdo-<ra>

d>vovp.ai

(I manage by bribery), Dem. de Cor. 236. 12.

etc.

And
Cf.

periphrases such as trpovoiav e^m, fi^av-fi ean,

impetro with ut (me)

Latin

euro, (curam, operam, negotium) do, studeo, id ago,

enitor, efficio,

and Subjunctive.
ISOC.

(ppovri^e 077(09 fiTjBev ava^Lov cravrov Trpatjei?.

See that thou do nothing unworthy of thyself.

Vide ne quid te indignum

agas.

6Tn/j,eXrjTeov oira><; t? apiari] o~oi

earai

rj

ifrvyn.

Plat.

You must
possible.

strive that

your soul

may

be

as good as

Enitendum

est ut tibi

quam optimus
aavroi

sit

animus

tuus.

eire/jbeXeiro 07ra>? firjTe

fir^re aTroroi,

eaotvro.

Xen.

He was

taking precautions that they should be neither without food nor drink.

eirpaa-crov

0Tra><; Tt? Boydeia tfjjei. THtTC. They were arranging for the arrival of reinforcements.
1.

Note
p.e9a).

The

1st

Chers. 99.

14 (oVus

and 3d person are very rare. In Dem. id^X-qo-ovo-i) ; in Ar. Eccl. (ottuk KadeSov-

Note 2. Instead of the Future Indicative the Subjunctive and Optative (Present and Aorist) less often occur, though not uncommonly.
bpa oVcos prj irapo. 6oav op.oXoyfjs. PLAT. Grit. See that you are not surprised into making an admission.
kp,tpiXr)Ki aijTOts oirios o

hnray pk-nys dSurj ovs

Scot, Trepwciv.

Xen.
knots

Hell, iii 3. 9.

They had taken care that the Cavalry-Commissioner should

who

shovfflgkitSWtfy Microsoft

Omar, Sjray

pi,,

WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE.

261

In Lys. 12. 44 an Aorist Optative is followed by a Future Indicative (eTrefiovXevea-Oe ojnos pr^re rj/rj^ia-aicrde, iroWZv re
evSeeis eaeo-de).

Note 3. Variants, of rare occurrence for oVais with the Future Indicative are 6V17 (Thuo. i. 65, yevrjo-erai.) ; 6Y<j> rpoinp (THUC. iv. 128, ^vfj./3-tja-eTai) ; eg otov rpoirov (DEM. Megal. 207). (is is found instead of fo-cos with a Subjunctive or Optative (Xen. Oec. xx. 8, Aesoh. P. 203), but seldom with a Future Indicative (Xen. Cyr. iii. 2. 13). Note 4. ai/ is sometimes found with oVcos and the Subjunctive, cf. PLAT. Gorg. 481 A (prjxavrjreov oVcos av Siacpvyrj), but never with 6Vos and the Future Indicative. The Optative (Present or Aorist) with av in this construction is an Apodosis.

9 (eTripeXeurOai 6V(os av yevoiTo). found, instead of oVws pr,, with the Subjunctive (rarely with the Future Indicative) after o-kottu, 6pS>, evXa/3ovpai, <pvXdo-o-opai, just as after Verbs of Fearing. Conversely oVcos pr,, instead of the simple pr,, is used after Verbs of Fearing. Cf. the next section, page 265. Cf. Soph. PHI. (opa pr. Trapes), 0. C. 1180 ; Plat. Symp. 213 d. In Xen. Cyr. iv. 1. 18 (opa pr, Serjo-ei), evXafieio-dai prj, PLAT. Prot. 321 A; evXa/3eicrdai to p.r), PLAT. Rep. 539 A; tf>v\aj-<recr6a.i pr, is fairly
Cf.
Oec.
ii.

XEN.

Note

5.

M-q

is

common.
found with an Infinitive in Thuc. vi. Appian, Civ. v. 73. So cwo occurs diligi with the Infinitive in Cic. de Fin. iii. 19. 62 (natura Poppo, Thtjc. vi. 54. So also <f>vXao-procreatos non curaret). crop.a.1. pr) iroielv, to pr, Troielv, I guard against doing, Dem. 773.
Note
6.

kinp.eXovp.ai is

54. 6,

Xen. Comm.

iv. 7. 1,

1,

313.

6.

Note 7. o-kottZ is followed by el interrogative (Soph. Ant. 41). See similar construction with Verbs of Fearing, Note, p. 266. Note 8. In one or two places Sei precedes oVws with the Fut. Indicative, e.g. Soph. Ai. 556, Set o-e oVws 8et'eis Phil. 55, Jebb (note to Soph. Ai. 556) quotes o-e SeT oVus eKKXexj/eis. Ckatinus (apud Athenaeum), Set o-' 6Va>s dXeKrpvovo's pr,8ev There seems to be a confusion between 8ioras tous Tpoirovs. two constructions ; Set with the Infinitive, and some verb like In Aeist. opa, a-Koitei with 6Vios and the Future Indicative. Eq. 926 we have o-irevarw o-e 6V<os av eyypa<t>rjs, which however may be regarded simply as an instance of Antiptosis, i.e. o-e, the Subject to eyypa<f>fjs, is made the Object to anrevo-o>, which is a Verb just like on-ouSaftu or jrpaWu.
:

Digitized

by Microsoft

362

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

235.

ELLIPTICAL USE OF onus, 6Vws fiij, WITH THE FUTURE INDICATIVE.

are used with the Future Indicative
prohibitions,

"Ottco<;, 07t<b9 /j-v

in

exhortations

and
is

when no

principal

sentence has preceded.

All three persons are found,

though the second

commonest.
Eue.
Gycl. 595.

aXK

07T&)? avrjp ecrei.

Come,

be

man
/j/r)

oVco? Se tovto

StSafet?

/jbr/Sevl.

Ae. Nub.

Mind you
<jf>epe hi)

don't

tell this to

anybody.

6V(os

/Jbe/J.vrja-6/j.eda

ravra.

Well, then,

let

us be swre

to

PLAT. Gorg. 495 D. remember this.

LYS.
i.

07T(l)S TCHJTOt, |.)jStS

dv6p(O7r0>V 7TlJO"eT0U,

21.

See that not a soul hears of this. Observe that this construction is generally introduced by a word, d\\d, oBv, Se, sometimes by aye vw (Ae. Nub. 490).
Note.

The Subjunctive
ye
jui)

occasionally
qfia.'S.

on-tos

e^om-oiTTjOTj

is found PLAT. Prot. 313

:

C.

Mind

he does not deceive

us.

236.

"O77-WS,

WITH VERBS OF COMoVtus MANDING AND FORBIDDING.

fJLT]

For this Construction, see Indirect Petition. It is, of same as oVa? after Verbs of taking means to an end, although an extension of it. There is a natural connexion between, " Take care to do so," and " I bid you
course, the

do

so."

But

for the sake of

convenience the rule and

examples are given elsewhere.

237.

VERBS OF FEARING WITH

jXTj

ju/jy,

AND

OV.

and

Verbs and phrases denoting fear are followed by /j,rj /m) ov with the Subjunctive (in Primary Sequence),
Digitized

by Microsoft


VERBS OF FEARING WITH
pij

AND

tf

oi.

263

tive

and the Optative (in Historic Sequence). The Subjuncmay, by the graphic construction, of course be substituted for the Optative.
Se'Souca
fjuq

ravra

yevr/rai.

I fear

this will

happen.
fiant.

Vereor ne haec
SeSoiKa
fir)

ov ravra yevi)rai.

I fear

this will not

happen.
fiant.

Vereor ut (ne non) haec

e&eSoliceiv fvq (prj ov)

ravra yevoiro or
fierent.

yevrjrai.

Verebar ne Observe that

(ut)

haec

yj\ does

not negative, the verb

it

expresses

Ov a surmise that the result will occur. hand is privative and negatives the verb.

on the other

I fear
For
firj,

Se&oiKa fvq ov% bcnov y. it will not be righteous

fjuri

(i.e.

unrighteous).
etc.,

ov and the Subjunctive,

without a

principal verb see the Chapter on Negatives.

Verbs of fearing are

(f>o@odfiai,

Seo? earl
Seivdv ecrri
fir)

rrifypLica
rpe'eo

(mostly poet.)

SeSotKa,

(mostly poet.)

SeSouca

hnXadafieOa

rr}<;

o'Uahe 6Bov.

Xen.

I fear we

shall forget the

way

home.

omen eirerWevro $eSoiicore<; fir] arrorfM]6elr)o-av.

cut
off.

Xen. They were no longer attacking from fear of being

S&ifiev

firi

ov fiefiaioi

r\re.

ThUC.

We fear you are not trustworthy. Digitized by Microsoft

264

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

6^>o/3etTO

to a-Tparevfia

fir)

eiri

ttjv

avrov j^rnpav

(TTparevTjTai.

Xen.

He was
his

afraid that the

country.

army would march

against

own
is

ovSev Seivov

pr) kv epol o-rr\.

PLAT. Apol. xv.

There

no fear
case.

(likelihood)

of the rule breaking down

in
Obs.
pr)

my

In Xen. Mem.
eoi,

i.

2. 7,

we have Wavpafc

d tjs

<f>ofioLTo

6 yevopevos /caAos Kayadbs pr) X/Hv *h instead of pr) ov

Xapiv

an abnormal construction not found elsewhere.

Note 1. As these Verbs of Fearing denote doubt and apprehension as much as downright fear, their construction is followed by many Verbs which in other senses take other constructions, but which when denoting apprehension, anxiety, suspicion lest or whether, are followed by pr\ and pr) ov. Such verbs are verbs of caution in the sense of anxiety
((f>povTca>,

evvoio,

6pm, o~kott&, ev\af3ovp.a.i,

<f>v\d<T<T<i)

(-0/j.ai)

6kvZ,

hesitate

or scruple (from fear,

cMricrTft)

viroTneuis),

I suspect,

(a7rixrTiav

of suspecting rather than disbelieving,

wroiTTevopev pr) ov koivoI

shame) e'x a > Trape^i) in the sense kivSwos lo-n.

or pity, or
iii.

We

suspect that

airo[3rJTe. ThTJC. you will not prove impartial.

53.

okvo) pr) pot 6

cfrpovTifo
fir)

Awtas
it

rajreivos 4"XV Vfj

PLAT. Pol. 368.

39.

KparuTTOv

poi cnyav,
be

I am
Cf.
Theaet.

thinking that

may

XEN. Mem. iv. 2. best for me to say nothing.

PLAT. Phaed. 70 A (aTria-Tiav 7rap)(ei pi) ovSapov) PLAT. 183 E (alo-xwopevos pr), a very rare construction with this verb) ; SOPH. Tr. 1129 (evX.a/3eur6ai pr) (j>avfj<s) ; Thuc. iv.
11
(<j>v\.do-o-eo-6ai pr) ^vvrptipaxriv).

Consult the Index for other meanings and constructions of

these verbs.

Note 2. Instead of the Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing the tenses of the Indicative are used.
(1)

The Future

Indicative as a graphic substitute for the

Subjunctive.
(j>o/3ovpai, prj

Ttvas ijSovas r)8ovais evprjaopev evavrt'as.

that

I apprehend
pleasures.

we

Plat. Phileb. 13 a. shall find some pleasures opposite to

by Microsoft

Digitized

VERBS OF FEARING WITH

pf,

AND

pi,

ov.

265

Cf. PLAT. Rep. 451 A (cpofiepov re /cat o-<paXepbv fifj Kelcrofiai). In Aesch. Pers. 112, the Subjunctive and Future Indicative are co-ordinate, p-q irvdrp-cu koX eWeron, ireo-fl (Se). See Ghoeph. 257. So Eur. H. F. 1054, Ar. Ecc. 493. (2) ojriDs fx-fj with the Future Indicative, Subjunctive, or Optative, as after verbs of taking means to an end in the previous section.

drap tov Saipovos

SeSoi^' 07T(os pfj rev^Ofjuu Ka.Ko8aip.ovos.

Ar. Eg. 112.

(Frere).
ill.

But
This genius will turn out
SeSoix' 07TO)S

Im afraid
my
evil

genius

p)

dvdyKrj yevr/Tat.

DEM.

Phil.

130. 14.

I fear

that

necessity

may arise.

o>s does not (like ott<os) (3) cos with the Future Indicative. appear to have a modal force, but to introduce an Indirect Statement, as if SeSoiKa or <po/3ovpai meant I fear, thinking that.

dvSpbs

prj <po/3ov d>s <Mroj0ij(7s dglov.

Xen.
2.

Cyr. v. 2. 12.

Do
Cf.
iv. 1.

not fear that you will be at a loss for a worthy man.

Soph.
141.

El.

1309,

Xen.
as

Cyr.

vi.

30,

Dem. PhU.

In Eur. Herod. 248

Indirect Discourse).

(o7ra>s,

on-cus is

occasionally used in

When on follows a Verb of Fearing it seems to introduce an ordinary causal (or rather explanatory) sentence. OTi 8e ttoXXZv dpx ovo~i py <j>o[3r]8r)Te. Xen. Sell. iii. 5. 10.
Do
not be afraid because they rule many.
translate, do not be afraid thinking that.

Though we jnight
Note
3.

The

Infinitive, Future,

Present or Aorist

is

also used.

THUC. V. 105. ov tpofSovpeda eAao-owecrflcu. We are not afraid that we shall be beaten.

The Future
Subjunctive.
(po/3ovp.<u

Infinitive is here

the more usual p; with

SieXiyx^v

ere

pj wroXa/Bys.

PLAT. Gorg. 457

E.

I am afraid to refute you lest you should suppose. The latter construction (with the Present or Aorist) is common enough, and is the ordinary objective construction common to verbs oMearing.with mara of the verbs mentioned


266
in Note
dSiKeiv,

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

1, e.g. <j>of3ovfj,a.t. dSiKttv,

I am ashamed
wrong ;

to

I fear to do wrong ; aio-\vvoixai do wrong ; KivSwevui dSinetv, I rim a

I
take care that no

risk of doing

<t>v\do-trw /trjSlva dSiKeiv,

one does wrong. Cf. Latin, culpari metuit fides; solvi, etc., in Hokace.

penna metuente

Note
1.

4.

Observe the following distinctions

dSiKeiv.
to

$ofSovjj.a.i,

I fear
2.

do wrong (and so refrain).

<f>of3ovp.ai p/q olSlkZ.

I fear
3.

I shall do wrong.

<j>o/3ovp.ai aStKTjcreti'.

I fear I shall
4.
<fiof3ovjji.ai

do wrong (very rare for 2).

to aSiKeiv. I fear wrong-doing (generally, by myself, or by another.)

Note
tive.

5.

Verbs

of Fearing are also followed

by

tl

interroga-

ov SeSoiKa
to

el 3>tA.nr7ros y.

Dem.

Fals. Leg. 434. 6.

I have no fear
Cf.

whether Philip

is alive (i.e.

I have

no fear as

that question).

Eur. Herac. 791, Xen.

6.

Hell. xi. 1.

(&roi).

Note

av

is

Fearing.

When

not used with the Subjunctive after Verbs ol the Optative is found with av it is an

Apodosis.

238. Verbs of Fearing,

etc.,

with the Indicative.

is

When the result has actually occurred, or verb with /j is in the Indicative.
Thus
But
:

occurring, the

SeSoiKa

fxr/

dpuxprdvys (or dp,dpTr)s).

will

I fear you
SeSoiKa
pvr)

make a

mistake.

afiaprdveis.

I fear

you (actually) are making a mistake.

/at]

SeSoiKa

^jxapTTr/Kas.

I fear you
So
SeSoiKa
firj

have made a mistake.

rjfidpTaves (you were
Digitized

making a mistake);

/mj

you riuapTss, that 3 lr r '

made a

mistake. by Microsoft


VERBS OF FEARING,
1.

ETC.,

WITH INDICATIVE.

267

The Present
<t>o/3ei<rde fir)

Indicative

SwrKoXdyrepov ti Sta/ca/tat. PLAT. Phaed. XXXV.

You

are afraid that

I am

ma somewhat more fretful

state of

mmd.
eiria-\es,
fir]

ws av

Trpovepevvrj<rio oti/Sov,

Tts TroXirlov kv rpifiip ^avTaferot,

EUR. Phoen. 92. fiev eXdy, k.t.X. Yet stay, that first I may explore the path, Lest any citizen now is visible Upon the road, and one shall come to me.
Ka.fi.01

Soph. El. 580. Similarly opZfiev fir) NWas PLAT. Loch. 179 B. elo-6fieo-8a fir) KaXvirrei, SOPH. Antig. 1253. Surrd^ofiev fir) rvyx^vei, Plat. Soph. 235 A. (TKJJ/(Ofie6a fir) Xavddvei, PLAT. Ly. 216 C.
Cf. Ion, 1523,
oterai,
2.

The Imperfect
opa
fir)

Indicative

Have a
3.

PLAT. Theaet. 145 B. rraifov eXeyev. care that he was not speaking in jest.
Indicative
:

The Perfect
<j>of3ovfiai
fir)

dfn,(f>OTGpo>v afia rjfiapTrJKafiev.

ThUC.

iii.

53.

I fear
Cf.
4.

that

we have missed
r>,

both objects at once.

19.

Plat. Lys. 218

Dem.

26

(Fate. Leg. 372. 1).

The

Aorist Indicative does not appear to occur in Attic.

v. 300.

See Hom. Od.

5.

indicative may be regarded as a 1 substitute for the Subjunctive {supra).

The Future

graphic

239.

Note on Dawes's Canon.

Dawes laid down the rule that after mrws fir] and ov fit], the First Aorist Passive, and the Second Aorist Active, Middle, and Passive may be used, but not the First Aorist Active or Middle. Instead of the First Aorist Active and Middle, he Subsequent said that the Future Indicative must be used.
the original force of the Subjunctive than future (a point on which it is impossible to speak dogmatically), the Subjunctive in the oldest Greek would mean shall rather than will, and would be more direct and vivid than the Future. See Monro's Homeric Grammar, pp. 231 and 238. Digitized by Microsoft
1 So at least in Attic. was imperative (denoting
if

But

will) rather

268

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

extended Dawes's Canon to oVws (without /j), and set about changing a First Aorist Active and Middle, wherever The sole they were found in a text, to a Future Indicative. ground for this arbitrary rule of Dawes is the resemblance in form between the First Aorist Active and Middle and the Future Indicative, e.g. KATOKNHCHIC (kch-okv^s, Soph.
critics

and KATOKNHCEIC (kotokv^is) ; SYAAESHTAI Naturally l&XXkfrrai) and KYAAESETAI (v\\%ertu). this resemblance of form might incline a Greek writer to avoid confusion by using a second Aorist (if it existed) rather than Dawes made no objection to a First Aorist a First Aorist. Subjunctive Passive, because it bears no resemblance in form to a Future Indicative. But Dawes's Canon rests on no solid foundation of grammar, and breaks down completely on examination. Instances of the First Aorist Subjunctive Active and Middle in which all the MSS. agree are oVcos /*i) iiriPor]6r)<r(jxTi (THUC. iv. 66) ; otto>s /mj /3ov\6vo"r)<r6e (THUC. i.
El. 956)
_

Secondly, in some cases 73); 07rws firj Ipyda-rjcrde, Lys. 138. the First Aorist Active does not resemble in form the Future E.g. Indicative, and therefore cannot possibly be changed. Soph. Phil. 381, ou ft) eKn-Aeuo-gs the Future is eKTrXeva-ovfiai, and the second person would be l/orAcuo-et not Iktt Aeixras. So Plat. Rep. x. 609, an-oAeo-g, the Future is a-rroXZ Soph. El. 1122, kAohjo-g), First Aorist Active, where the Future would be KXavo-ovftai. And, lastly, the change made would in some cases spoil the metre.
:
-.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE
240.

VI.

CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE

SENTENCES.

Consecutive Sentence

may

be expressed either by

A. mare with the

finitive.

Indicative, or

B. mare with the In-

A. mare (mare ov) with the Indicative states the consequence as an independent fact actually occurring.
eym
8r)

et?

iroiS).

roaovrov afiaOia? f/Ka mare Plat.

icaicov eiccov

/ it

seems have reached such a pitch of ignorance that

I deliberately do wrong.

ew rovro rjkdov mar ovk

yrjv apyi).

e^rjpKeaev avrolf

r\

Kara

IsOC.
their empire by land,

To such a pitch they came that

did not satisfy them.

B. mare (ware (tj) with the Infinitive expresses merely the consequence which would naturally result from the Principal Verb without affirming or denying
its

occurrence.
yvmfx/t\<i

yap ovk

cnreipos mad' dfiapravetv.

err.

SOPH.

He
ra

is

not void of wit that he should

ra>v

jrapaBeiy/j.ara

d/j,apr^/j.armv

iKava

ro2<;

aaxppoai mare

/j/r}Kert

dfiapravetv.

ANDOK.
sufficient to keep

Examples of
them from

errors are sufficient for sensible people

i.e.

that they should no longer err,

'erring.

see

Digitized

by Microsoft

'

270

CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES.

wcrre with Indicative

241.

and

Infinitive.

A.

wore with the Indicative is parallel

is

with

6'ti

and the

Indicative, that

a statement

to say, it introduces the Indicative as almost, sometimes quite, independent of. the
eyvu>Kas

Principal Sentence.

Thus

roaovrov

<ri>

i[iov iro^xoTepos

, (Sore
xiii.

<ru p.ev

its

Pl. ^4po?. So much wiser are you than

eya) Se dyvoai.

J, that
etc.

(and

so)

you have

discovered, while

I am

ignorant,

This introductory force of wo-te is best shown familiar usage at the beginning of a sentence where

by

it is

synonym

for oSv, roti/uv,

and may be rendered and

fJKev

so,

conse-

quently, therefore.
els rrjv vo-repaiav

ovx

1 urcracfaepvrjs'
3.

&crd' ol

EAA/qves

e<f>p6vTiov.

Xen. An.

ii.

25.

On

the

morrow Tissaphernes did not appear.

began
to consider, etc.

Consequently

the Greeks

So with an Imperative.
dvrjTos
8'

Orestes

was but mortal

'O/oamjs' Sxrre p.rj Xtav oreve. SOPH. El. 1172. Therefore grieve not too sore.
is

Occasionally this introductory force of (Sore

seen even

with an

Infinitive.
e/te

&t'

epavrbv dveptnTav (after a colon or full stop). Plat. Apol.

questioning myself.

viii.

And
As
e.g.

so

I was

wore, like on, is

merely introductory,
:

it

can be followed

by any construction which an independent sentence can

Imperative (supra) wore wore av with Optative, wore av wore dv krokpiqo-ev, Lys. 7. 28.
p-rj

a.iroKap.-Q%,

Plat.
Cyr.

Crit.
iii.

take, 45.
35.

SiSdcrKoiTc,

Xen.
*

3.

B.

Stare

with

Infinitive.

with the Infinitive is epexegetical, i.e. explanatory of the Principal Verb. It is doubly so, for Sio-re is an explanatory particle, and the Infinitive is in its own nature explanatory. Indeed wore with the Infinitive, as will be seen below, often
Sxrre

The consecutive use takes the place of the simple Infinitive. of Stare with the Infinitive is only one among several of these The result contemplated, i.e. the * explanatory purpose. J usages. c r ' Digitized by Microsoft?


fl<rr

WITH INDICATIVE AND

;

INFINITIVE.

271

may be denoted
advice.

the condition or limitation; the command or

definition will

The character of the explanation or depend upon the nature of the Principal Verb
1.

or Sentence.

Purpose, or Contemplated Result.

x&v

iroiovcriv iScrre

/jlyj

Sikjjv SiSovai.

Plat. Gorg. 479

They do anything
Cf.
to

c.

avoid punishment.

Plat. Phaed. 114,

<2ore fierao-xetv.
(cf.
e<j>'

2.

Limitation or Condition

$, <'

Te).
/tij

^v/ifiaxiav iTroirj<ravTO
5ri nEA.o7rovvijo-ioi;s.

kin. ToicrSe, <S(rT

o-Tpareijciv

THUC.

hi. 14.

They made an
not
3.

alliance on these conditions, that they were

to serve

against the Peloponnesians.

Petition or

Command.
THUC. "Apyei tTrixup^o-ai. them to attack Argos.
here.
0. C.
iii.

irelOovcriv fixne

103.

They

try to induce

The
Cf.

Infinitive alone

would be more usual

effect,

THUC.

viii.

45, Sxrre diroKTeivai.

SOPH.

969, <3ore

6aveiv, ordaining, requiring, to the

4.

that he should die.

The
is

definitive force

(denoting the character, degree, or

:

extent)

well

shown

in the following
ireurofini

roo~evTov ov&ev &o~Te

p.r)

yap ov ov koASs davtiv.

Soph. Ant. 97.
naught
(i.e.

I So great as not
will prevent

shall suffer

to die

a noble death
etc.).

nothing which

my

dying,

For
5.

fifj

ov see chapter on the Negatives.

is

wore

freely used with the Infinitive,

where the
3.

Infini-

tive alone

might be used.

jravu p,oi 1/ieAijtrev <5crre ciSevat.

i"

XEN.

Cyr. VL

19.

was

greatly concerned

to

know.

irorepa

fl-atSes crt <f>povt,ji,WTtpoi

wore p.a6dv

rj

avSpts

Xen.

Cyr. iv, 3. 11.

Are

boys

more

sensible at learning than

Digitized

mm ?

by Microsoft

272

CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES.

p,eiov
rj

(Sore

<f>epeiv.

Too great

to bear.

Maius quam quod

The water
p.rj)(aval
is cold

tolerari possit.

ipvxpbv vStap (Sore kovcrcurdai.

XEN. An.

iii.

13. 3.

for bathing.
t'uriv

7rohXai

wore Siacfrevyew Odvarov. Plat. Apol. xxix.

cf.

There are
<is is

many

shifts

for escaping death.

more
1.

rarely so used,

Xen.

Cyr. iv. 5. 15,

&

lyrcpcn-eis

iivai.

with the Infinitive state a fact? The Infinidenoting as it does the abstract verbal notion, cannot, like the Indicative, definitely state a fact. &o-re, with the Infinitive, is parallel with irpiv and the Infinitive, Sid with the Infinitive, or any similar substantival use of the Infinitive. The fact, though not stated, is not excluded. More than this, the expression may evidently be a variant for &cne with the Indicative, open for a writer to use. This occurs when there is no demonstrative in the Principal Sentence requiring definiIn this way irplv ainivai avrov, before his departure, may tion. practically mean, before he departed; Sta to pjSeva irapeivai, because of the presence of no one, may mean, because no one was
Note

Can

&a-re

tive, of course,

present.
i

K\ap)(os -ijXavvev
TreK\rjydo.i.

eirl

roiis
i.

Mevtovos, wore eicelvovs

Ik-

XEN. An.

5. 13.

Glearchus was marching against Menon's men, so that they were in a state of amazement.
dp,<f>l

Se

kvkXovvto
envoi

irdo~av vfjcrov, &(tt' dp.rj\aveiv

rpdwoLVTO.

Aesch.
isle, so

Pers. 460.

They round about

Encircled the whole
that the foe

Knew
Cf.

not which

way

to

turn them.

Euk. Hec. 730.

2.

wore with av and the Infinitive, wore with the (oblique) Apodosis, and therefore av will go with the Infinitive.
Note
Infinitive

may be an

kyio 7T4 tcwctSc iX(a acrre

av dvayiutirOyjvai,, k.t.X.

Xen.
For Sore ov with the

Cyr.

i.

4.

20.

Infinitive, see Negatives. Digitized by Microsoft

RELA TIVE CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.

Note
3.
d>s

273

is

sometimes used for &vre, generally with the

a>s

Infinitive.

o Trorapbi

rov /3a0ovs.

TAe
.

rimer

toowtos to /3a#os, Xen. An. iii. is of so great a depth,

Cf.

pijSk

ra Sopara

virepe)(eiv

5. 7.

that even the spears could not

reach the bottom.

(Lit. rise above the depth).

rf

Xen.

Gyr.

i.

5. 11.

More

rarely,

ever in Attic, with an Indicative.

242.

Consecutive Sentences

in

Greek

and Latin.
The nearest approach in Latin to the distinction between the Infinitive and Indicative is to be found in the use of the Imperfect Subjunctive and Perfect (Aorist) Subjunctive, e.g. cectdit ut cms frangeret (wore narayvvvai), and ut cms fregerit But the Latin distinction, even supposing it (fore Kareage). is always observed, a distinction expressed by two tenses of the Subjunctive, is a very different thing from that expressed by two moods, the Infinitive and the Indicative.
243.

RELATIVE CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.

are
also

Consecutive Sentences Pronouns, oios, 6'0-os with

expressed by Eelative

Infinitive.

For toiowos

coo-re

toctoCtov (Sore
is

are used toiovtos otos or ofos alone. toctovtov ocrov or OCTOV.

The Negative

p.rj.

toiovtos ei/M 010s

fir]Sevt aXXfi) irei,dea8ai

rj

\6ya>.

Plat.

/ am of such a character as to yield to nothing

Is
(or

hit reason.

eiusmodi)

sum ut

nulli alii rei nisi rationi

paream.
ovk
It

XEN. An. rjv &pa 01a apSeiv to ireSlov. was not the season for irrigating the plain.
tribe cultivating just

ii.

3. 13.

vep.6pxvoi to. eavriHv eKacrTOL ocrov mroffiv.

THUC.
to

i.

2.

Each

enough of

its

land

obtain a sub-

sistence

from

it.

Cf THUC.

iii.

49, too-ootov ocrov dveyvcaicevcu Digitized by Mcrosdft

274

CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITA TIVE SENTENCES.

TOiavra erarovres

om

koi toiis trapovTai a\ue<r6ai.. Plat. Gorg. 457.

Saying such things that even the company was annoyed.

"Oarii (more rarely

secutive (parallel to

6?), with the Indicative, is Conwore with Indicative). Negative ov.

t/s owTta? evrjdrjs earlv Vjxmv barns ajvoei

ravra

Dem.

Who

of you

is so

simple that he

is

ignorant of this

Quis vostrum tam stultus est ut (qui) haec ignoret?

ouSels av yevoiro owtos dSa/jLavrivo's
6's

av

fieiveiev.
ii.

Plat. Rep.

360

B.

No

one would prove so steeled against temptation as to remain

firm.

av puveiev is, of course, an Apodosis. 409, 444, Ai. 471.

For

6's

see Soph. Phil.

244.

LIMITATIVE OR RESTRICTIVE SENTENCES.1

ware

(oycrre fir]),

e<f>

a>,

e<f>

are

(jirj).

On

condition that, on the understanding that.

/*ij)

ao-re (mo-re
e<j>

with Infinitive.
/mj),

a>,

e<j>

mre with Infinitive (Negative

firj).

or Future

Indicative (Negative ov or
egrjp

avTois ra>v

viraicoveiv

tw

aWcov ap%eiv EWyvav Dem. 6. 11. fiaaiXei.

power to rule the rest of would obey the King.

w<tt avTovs

It

was in

their

the Greeks if

they themselves
1

With &<ne

Limitative compare the use of ut in Latin

Bonis viris ita fides habetur ut nulla

sit iis fraudis suspitio.

Cic. Off.

ii.

33.

Good men are

against them.

trusted only

when

there

is

no suspicion of disJionesty

D/g/feed by Microsofm


LIMITATIVE OR RESTRICTIVE SENTENCES.
aw^ie/AeV

275

ae ern tovt<p

e<f>

one fiTjKen

<pi\ocro<f>ei,v.

Plat.

We

acquit you, on the understanding that

you na

longer

pursue philosophy

(ita

ut

philosophari

desinas).
'BiVvefSriaav
ecjb

aire

efyaatv

etc

Ue\.oTrovvr\aov inro-

airovSoL (/cat n^heiroTe eTTi^Tja-ovrai avTr/i).

Thuo.

They surrendered on
set foot

the condition that they should

leave the Peloponnese

under truce (and never again

used in Historic

on

it).

Observe that the Future Indicative

Sequence.
Note.

is

The Nominative
thai,.

Attraction

is

observed

us av

oiStos kdkXoi tol

dXXorpia

ajroo-Teptlv

i<f>'

KaKo8oos

Xen. Ag.

4. 1.

Digitized

by Microsoft

245.

CHAPTEE VII. CAUSAL SENTENCES.

A. By Causal
C.

Causal sentences are expressed in a variety of ways.

Particles and a Finite Mood. B. By Belative Sentences.

By

Participles.

D. In various miscellaneous ways. A. Causal

Particles,
is ov,

Particles.

The common Causal Particles

e-rrel,

are also the

Temporal

eweihri, <? (cf.

is

Latin cum).

The negative

and the Indicative

the Mood.

TidTjfii ere 6fj,o"KojovvTa eirebhr]

I assume
e-ireo

that you consent, since

ovk airoKpivei. Pl. Ap. you do not answer.

rjSrj

ovk ehvvavro ~Xafi{3aveiv to %a>ptov airievat

eireyeipovv.

Xen. Anab.

v. 2. 5.

As

they were not able to take the place they were

now
see

trying to go away.

Eor eVet&j with Imperfect, Thtjc. i. 102. For Xen. An. v. 2. 5. For ?, Soph. Phil. 46, 914.

lirel,

Note 1. When, however, the sentence is explanatory of what These particles has preceded, 6'rt, Si<m, Stcnr^p are used. cannot introduce a Causal Sentence like r', etc. (cf. ore Temporal).
t/>7P?js
7]

fie

a-^a-ayixkvi]
7rA.ef;

a.vdpu>iru>v

Sid rt

aAAo

<f>o/3epov

otti
ot

on Taxy
tj

81a Se Tt

aAAo

aXvTrot, dXX-jXoi';
;

cpirXeovTes

Sloti kv

ra
is

KdOrjvTai

For what other reason

except because
those
it

a trireme full And for what other reason do who are on board occasion no alarm to one another,
sails fast i
sit still

XEN. Oec. viii. 8. of men dangerous,

except because they

27a

in their ranks ?

Digitized

by Microsoft

CAUSAL SENTENCES.
Note
2.

27}

in the Optative

Causal Sentence in Historic Sequence is found when it expresses the indirect words or
oratio obliqua).
Ikixki^ov, oti (TTparqyb<s

thoughts (virtual
tov IleptK-Aia

&v ovk

tiri^ayoi.

Thuc.

ii.

21.

They were abusing Pericles, because, though general, he did not lead them out into the field.

on ovk hregrjyev would have been the simple explanation of the historian. In Periclem invehebantur quod, cum praetor esset, non
educeret.
Of. Lrv. ii. luxerunt, quod
7.

tam

Matronae annum ut parentem Brutum acer ultor violatae pudicitiae fuisset.

is occurs similarly in Xen. Symp. iv. 6, oTo-6a erraiveo-avTa. avrbv tov 'Ayap.ep.vova, ois ftao-iXevs elrj dyaOos, because (as he said) he was. Both oti and ws may, however, be regarded as introducing an Oblique Statement, the verb of saying being But in Xen. Mem. i. 4. implied in eicaKtfov and ewaiveo-avTa. 19, we have eirctirep fjytjo-aivTo, which must be causal or explanatory. And in Xen. Hell. vii. 1. 34, we have e?x Aeyeiv J)S Sua tovto irokeprfjo-eiav, oti ovk kOeXrjO-aiev, where we have a real blending of on causal and oVt of the Oblique Statement. Note
is also
3.

oVe (just like

cum in Latin) besides being Temporal,

ex e 'i
9. 3.

Causal.
oijtcds

6Ve Toivvv tovQ'

aKOveiv.

^poo"fjKsi

irpodvfims

ediXeiv

DEM.

01.

i.

Since then this

listen.

is so, it

behoves you to be heartily willing to

Quae cum

ita sint, etc.

6t,

Observe that this Causal begin a sentence.

unlike the Temporal

6Ve,

can

6V o$v

ToiovSe xpr)o-p,bv elo-qKovcrapxv.

Cum

Soph. El. 38, Phil. 428, Ant. 170, Ai. 1231. vero huiusmodi oraculum accepissemus.
oti

Observe that

cannot be elided.

ottots is similarly used.

Thuc.

ii.

eSre causal is poetical (Soph. Ai. 715)

60, Pl. Leg. 895 b. ottov, causal only in

:

Ionic.

123 153.

oOovveKo. (otov evtKa) in a causal sense occurs in Soph. Digitized by Microsoft

Ai

278

CAUSAL SENTENCES.
are also expressed

B. Causal sentences
09, 6? ye, ooTt?, 00-7-49 ye,

by

relatives

with the Indicative.

Latin qui or quippe qui with Subjunctive.

7raj? cj>epei<;

yap

69 76 auTos oj(el

Ae.

Why how d'ye hear, when you're being carried yourself?

OavfjLaaTov 7rotet9 09 rjfuv ovBev
(.oa>9.

XEN.

You

are acting strangely in giving us nothing.

= on ovSev 818009.
Mirum
7r(0S 01J

facis qui nobis nihil des.

Jfwstf

KaKKTTOS OOTtS 7Tpi ffAttOVOS 7T0tl TOUS Ka/COUpyoUS J you not be a scoundrel since you are making much of

evildoers?
os ye,
iVbte.

Dem.

24. 107.
6'o-tis,

Soph. El. 911.

Soph.

4wi!.

696.

Other relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are similarly

ipaKapi^ov,
the

used.
njv [irjrepa

otW

T6KV0)V eKvpr)(re.

HDT.

i.

31.
blest

They were counting

with such children.

mother happy in having been

eKvpyarev.

on TOiovTtav =

evSaipwv pot iffyaivero, (lis dSeus ereAeura. PLAT. Phaed. ii I deemed him happy, so fearlessly did he meet death. oti oiVeos dSews, not an uncommon use of (is.

C. Participles are frequently used in a Causal Sense. The Negative is ov. are (are Sij), olov, ofa 8rj often accompany the
Participles in this use (also Sunt in Herodotus).
6 Kvpos, are ttcus &v, t^Seto
tjj <TTo\.rj.

XEN.

Cyr.

i.

3. 3.

Cyrus, boy-like, was charmed with the dress.

av evi vireiK&Ooipt. Sewras davarov. PLAT. Apol. XX. There is not a man to whom I would yield through fear of
01J8'

death.

Kkyia Se tovB' eWca, /3ovX6pevoi ooou o-oi oVep kpoi.

/ speak

for the following reason, because

Plat. Phaed. 102 d. I want you to think

just as

I do.

See also Genitive /a^zA*6pgwJ3#feo&J>solute.

CAUSAL SENTENCES.
D.

279

Causal Sentences are also often expressed by tw and

the Infinitive.
ravr' lirpa^ev dXXa T<j> StKaiorepa diovv Dem. ii. 13. It was not for sake of greed that he did this, but because the Thebans made ajuster demand than we.

ov irAeovetas
&r)f3aiovs

cVe/ca

tJ

ij/ias.

Causal Sentences are also very often and very simply expressed by a Preposition and its case, sometimes by a Preposition with the Infinitive, e.g.
Sia to <iA,ous avrovs elvai. Because they are friends. Cf. especially 810

and

Kara.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTER
246.
I.

VIII.

EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH.
Wish
that refers to the Future, and

which there-

fore

may be fulfilled, is expressed A. By the Simple Optative.

B. By the Optative with
elde, el

yap

(el

and

w?, 7tg>s

av

in poetry).
is

The Negative

always

p,r\.

iral,

yevoio irarpo's evTV^ecrrepo<;,

o/ioto9,

to, 8'

a\X'

Kai yevoi av ov

icaicos.

SOPH.

Boy,

maysi

thou prove more fortunate than thy father,

Like in all else, so shouldst thou prove not vile. Observe that yevoio alone expresses a wish, yevoi av an Apodosis.
/XT]

is

00971/

p,er

afiovcrias.

EUE.
!

May I not
el

live

without culture

yap

yevoiprjv, t&kvov, olvtI <rov veKpos.

to

EUK. Hipp. 1410.

SOPH. Ai. 1264,

Would

God,

my

child,

I were dead

in thy stead.

eW

vp.lv ap<f>otv vovs

yevoiro

crwcjipoveiv.

Would
el poi

that to you twain judgment were granted for discretion

ykvono

<fi06yyos iv fipayioo-i.

EUR. Hec. 836.

Oh, that a voice were given

cos

me

m these arms.

6 rd.Se iropiav oXono.

that he

SOPH. El. 126.

Ah,

who

contrived this might perish.

Cf.
7TC0S

Euk. Hipp. 407.

rpe<f>oiTe TijVSe ttjv vocrov

av dvT epov
that in

Soph.

Phil. 794.

Would

my

stead ye might

hug

this

plague.
iii.

prj 7rcos ey(a

Tocravras SiKas <j>vyoipi.

PLAT. Apol.

May

not

I be

289

indicted on charges so serious 1 Digitized by Microsoft

EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH.
)
.

,
'

H.
J

281
"
-

/'

-*

"
-

II.

Wish which
no longer be

refers to the Past,

fulfilled, is

and which there-

fore can

expressed

yjv

<

{Imperfect Indicative
bitual actions).

(of pre-

sent time, continued or ha-

Aorist Indicative (of single

acts).

B. m<pe\ov
from
o<pei\as,

(Aorist),

sometimes wfyeKkov (Imperfect),

the Infinitive (Present or Aorist).
w<j>e\ov,

I owe, with
(p,rj)

e'l0e, el

yap

may accompany

sometimes

in poetry.
e'bd'

et^e?,

reicovcra, /SeXTtous <f>peva<;.

EUK.

El. 1061.

Would

that thou hadst,

not).

mother, better judgment (but

thou hast
e'ide (TO(,,

Hepi/ckeis, Tore

crvve<yevofi-r}v.

Xen. Mem.

i.

2.

46.

I wish I had
to? w<f>e\ov

been with you then, Pericles.

irdpoidev e/cKnrelv fiiov.

that

SOPH. El. 1131.

life.

Ah, would
effi &<f>e\es

I had first forsaken

SOPH. El. 1021.

roidSe ttjv yviapvqv warpos

OvrjcrKOVTOs eivai.

Would

thou hadst been thus

mmded

on the day thy father

(irfTOT d>cj>e\eLV
ttjv 2/cijpov.

Would

that

Xvmiv Soph. Phil. 969. I ne'er had left

My Scyros !
(09 irplv

SiSacu y'

(3<eA.es fiea-os

Siappayrjvai.

Akist. Ban. 955.

Pity, ere ymi taught 'em, that you didn't burst asunder
the midst.

D g t/zed by Microsoft
j j


282

EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH.

Note 1. wish may be made to depend on a condition which Instead of the sentence which logically expressed by ovtw. should follow " so may I as," an Indicative or an Imperais
.
. .

tive is substituted.
ovrta
(is

viK-f)0-aip,i r' eyib

kcu vop,ioip.r]V cro<6s,

v/ias rjyovfiai etvai Oearas Serious.

Ar. Nub. 520.

So may

I win and
twv

be considered wise, as

hold you

to

be

clever audience.
oiircos

ovalpvqv

renviav, jxtsxm

So may

I be

blest

in

my
. .

tov avSp' enelvov. Ar. Th. 469. I do hate that fellovj. children
. . .

ovto)<$ ovaia-de tovtuiv, firj TrepuSrjTe p*c.

DEM. Aph.

ii.

842.

9.

So may you enjoy

Instead of saying
neglect me.

this

do not neglect me. namely, that you do not

on

this condition,

This

is

exactly like the well-known Latin idiom :

Sic te diva potens

Cypri

Ventorumque
Navis
.
.

regat pater
.

Finibus Atticis Beddas incolumem precor.

Sic venias hodierne
.
.

Hor.

Od.

1. hi.

1.

tibi

dem

turis honores.

Tibull.
Note
2.

1. vii.

33.

Explanation of expressions of a wish.

el, el

(1) Optatives and Indicatives with Protases with suppressed Apodoses.

el
el

ydp,

effie

are clearly

yap Tavra yevono yap ravra eyevero

parallel

(sc. (sc.

koAws av
caX5s av

eitj).

7jv).

Latin

is

si

haec

ita fiant, fierent, facta essent.

ut,

With

cus

compare

utinam in Wishes.

(2) t&<eXov (/ ought, or had ought), on the other hand, is an Apodosis with a suppressed Protasis; used like XPV V > 8 without an av. Digitized by Microsoft


EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH.
Latin again supplies a parallel

283

(Eum)

si

ulla in te pietas esset, colere debebas. Cic. Phil.

ii.

38.

Tunc ego debuercm capienda ad Pergama mitti Tunc poteram magni, si non superare, morari Hectoris arma meis. Ov. Met.

xii.

445.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTER
247.

IX.

EELATIVE SENTENCES.
by
either (1) Relative
el,

Eelative sentences are introduced

Pronouns, or
ocjjpa, etc.

(2) Particles of Eelative origin, cos, ore,

The chief

distinction

between Eelative

Sentences

is

that of Definite and Indefinite, a distinction explained in

172. It applies to Pronouns, e.g.

many

Eelative Particles as well as

A. Definite

avia^ei,
icai biroi

to"Te O7TO06V o rj\io<>

Sverat.

Xen.

You knew where

(lit.

(lit.

wlience) the

sun

rises,

and where

whither)

it sets.

m ycua

Sefjai Oavacrifiov /m

07rco9 e^ro.

SOPH.

Earth ! receive me, as I am, in death. Accipe me, ut sum.

B. Indefinite
ottoi

eK7re/ii|r^T6,

av a-Tparrjjov

ol

e%6poi icara-

<ye\u>(Ti.

Dem.

Wheresoever you send out a general, your enemies

ridicule you.

e^eari xprj&dai otto)? av fiovhunncu.

Xen.

You may make whatever

2g4

use (of

it)
'

Digitized

by Microsoft

you * please. a

RELATIVE SENTENCES.
Definite Eelative sentences present no difficulty.
definite Eelative sentences freely

285

tences

of

every kind,
etc.,

Inform Subordinate senConditional, Temporal, Modal,

Consecutive,
heads.
etc.),

and

will be found

under these several

(oiroi, 'tva,
is

Some

Eelative Particles denote Place

but a special chapter on Local Sentences

un-

necessary.

the Index.

Other uses of the Eelative will be seen by reference to Especial attention should be paid to the syntax of the Negatives with Eelatives see chapter on the Negatives, Part IIL
;

Digitized

by Microsoft

PART

TIL

PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO

OBLIQUA, AND FIGURES.

CHAPTER
248.

I.

PREPOSITIONS.

Prepositions in Attic are particles which have a double

use.

Verbs; or
case of

Either (1) they are joined in Composition with (2) they serve as links between the oblique

Pronouns and other words, especially As such links they denote Place, Time, and various figurative relations, Agency, Cause, Means, etc., more distinctly than could be done by the oblique cases alone. Prepositions also help to form compound adjectives and substantives. Philology and Epic Poetry, however, enable us to trace the origin and usage of Prepositions further back than their Attic uses, and to
or

Nouns

Verbs, in the sentence.

account for those uses.

2491.

Introductory Note to Prepositions.

Prepositions appear to have been originally caseforms. Thus wo (Ep. wrou) was Locative, meaning on the wider side ; inrep (Sanskrit upari), on the upper side ; Si< (Ep. and Poet. Stat), in the space between; dirt is Locative, ai/ra Accusative (cf. avTr/v, coram) ; irepi Locative ; wpos (trporl) Locative ; mxoa Itraoai) Locative ; vpo is Ablative. As cases Digitized by Microsoft 286

: ;

INTRODUCTORY NOTE TO PREPOSITIONS.

they must
all

287

have been
on
the

Thus
epelo,

viral x@vs,

capable of taking a Genitive. 1 wnder side of the earth; nap 71-0805

10. 97, on the newr side of the foot; dvr\ 481, on the opposite side of me. This is confirmed by the fact that all the quasi-prepositions, which are cases of nouns, are joined to a Genitive, e.g. dvpafa Euk. Bacch. 331. This stage, however, is previous to all written literature, and belongs to Philology rather than Syntax.
(rrapai),
II.

Pindar, P.
xxi.

Adverbs 2 independently of Verb or occur frequently in Homer, e.g. /teXaves 8' avb. fioTpves fjo-av, black clusters were throughout, II. xviii. 512 irepl Trpb yap eyx et Ovev, around in front he was raging with his d/z<i 8e ol fipdxe Ttvx a on either side for spe&r, II. xi. 180 him (or near him) clashedjiis arms : nepl rfpi faXeeo-Ke, exceeding much at heart he loved him. The Adverb qualifies the Verb, but stands apart from it.
2.

They were used

Instances

as

Noun.

still

>

3.

ceeds.

transitional period, that of the Homeric poems, sucOriginally the Noun went straight with the Verb;

the relation between the two might be more particularly Thus ayaye.iv 86p,ov, to lead home; defined by an Adverb. dyayetv So/iov, to lead from home (Genitive of separation or Ablative) <op.ois /3dX' alylSa, on his shoulders (Locative) he cast Compare these with dsfjyov detov SSfiov, Od. iv. 43 his shield.
:

tK
Se

8'

ayayc

kXktltjs, II.

i.

xa ?ral

w/iots dura-ovTai.

346 r\yzv is kAio-iijv, II. i. 89 ap.<j>l In the first two of these last four
:
:

examples the Adverbs ek and e/c further define the direction of the Verb, and form Compound Verbs which " govern " respecBut in the last two the tively theAccusative and Genitive. Adverb serves as a link between Noun and Verb, and becomes
a Preposition.
4. Prepositions thus come to furnish new analytic cases, the old cases with their blunted and confused suffixes being
1 This is Curtius' view (Elucidations, Ch. xvii. ) It must apply to Prepositions only when they do not denote separation (in which case they would be joined to an Ablative). Such a connection between Prepositions and. the Genitive is said not to exist in Sanskrit, and on this ground Delbruck (Syntaktische Forschungen, iv. ch. ix. p. 134) only partially accepts Curtius' theory.

3 No distinction is here intended in speaking of Prepositions as caseforms and as Adverbs. All oblique cases are, of course, adverbial, except the true Genitive^hich^s jjjjjeog^ or attributive.

288

PREPOSITIONS.

all the new relations between Noun and Verb which were suggested by the expansion of Greek thought and knowledge. When a Preposition links a case to any other word but a Verb, to an Adjective or Noun, a verbal meaning is readily understood. In determining the force of a Preposition we must carefully consider three points the meaning (1.) of the Preposition, (2.) of the Case, (3.) of the Verb (or verbal word). In the stereotyped phrases with Prepositions which have practically become Adverbs or Adjectives, it will be easy enough to supply the verbal notion which

insufficient to express

the phrase requires to complete

5.
a.

it logically.

A few instances may elucidate

The noun
linked

the foregoing remarks.

its

by a

preposition to

case has a

verbal meaning.

SiaWayal irpos Tiva, reconciliation with any compared with SiaWaxQqvai irpos two., to
any
one.
d<j>'

one, Isocr.

60

B,

be reconciled with

to^otjjs
b.

imrov,

compare with
its

ro^eieiv
is

defy'

Ittttov.

The Preposition with

Case

a fuller expansion of

the Simple Case.

Thus we may say, xprjo-Tov irpbs dvo^os eori, or xpijorou avSpos Ion', it is the part of a good man. Lysias writes nvTjo-Oijvau twos Thucydides, fivqo-Orjvai irepi twos Demosthenes, p,vrjo-6rjvai bwip twos.
: :

So we may
to

say, elprjo-eTai irpbs fyras, or vpXv,

f/

aXrjdeia, the

truth shall be told

fight

you; pa^eo-dai t$ Xipjf ko.1 tQ Stya, Xen., with hunger and thirst; p.dxeo-6ai irpbs eiridvplas, Plat.,

against desires. Similarly, rj irap' ep.ov evvoia=fj vvoio p.ov, my goodwill (Subjective Gen.); to Trap' epMv dSUrjjxa=Tb dSiK7]p,d fwv, the wrong done by me (Objective).
to fight 6. Improper or Spurious Prepositions are those which can be joined with Cases, e.g. avev, eveKa with Genitive, <5>s with Accusative, but which are not compounded with Verbs. 7. Tmesis is a late Grammarians' term to denote the separation between Preposition and Verb. The term is unnecessary, for, as we have seen, in early Greek it is not the separation, but the combination, which has to be accounted for. Tmesis in Attic is but a survival of the earlier usage
:

it is

practically confinejypj fyp&fcioswd a

few colloquialisms,


PREPOSITIONS AND THE THREE CASES.
289

e.g. 81' &p' oXmXafiev, Eur. I.T. 1371, dm' a-' dAu. It is seldom found except when a particle intervenes. Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 672 forms an exception.

8.

Dissyllabic Prepositions

are

oxytone.
:

They become

Paroxytone (i.e. Barytone) in certain cases (1.) stand immediately after their Verb or Case, e.g.
jravras
'Ap.<f>i,

When

they

oXeo-as airo

eraipovs,
dvri,

/".ax^s

irepi.

This

is

called

Anastwphe.

are not liable to Anastrophe. Monosyllabic Prepositions take the acute accent by Anastrophe, but only when they come at the end of a line. (2.) When they are equivalent to a Compound Verb, generally a Substantive Verb, dva=dvdo-T7j8i, /MTa=/i6Tecrn, similarly evt,
dvd, Sid
art, irdpa, ivkpi,

and perhaps

viro.

(3.) airo

and

irkpi

when used
e.g.

as Adverbs.

Oxytone Prepositions with

Tap'
vjp.kpav,
en-'

elision

lose

their

accent,

avrip.

250.

The

Prepositions and the Three Cases.

The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object of the Verb. This, however, implies direction to, or on, and thus Prepositions with the Accusative denote motion to, 1 extension along or over. The Genitive is the Case of Connexion and Separation. Prepositions with the Genitive denote connexion with, or separ ration from : in the former sense the true Genitive is used, in the latter the old Ablative use has been handed on to the
Genitive.

The Dative
locative sense.
to,

is

or

rest at, by,

connected with Prepositions chiefly in its Prepositions with the Dative denote nearness with, or near.

25l>
1.

Collected usages of Prepositions.

is

The Agent

expressed by the following Prepositions:

{nro

with Gen. (the regular expression to

the Agent
;

denote

the

others

which

follow are special.)

it must be remembered that the notion of motion must originhave come from the combined signification of Verb, Preposition, and Case. Digitized by Microsoft
1

But

ally


290

PREPOSITIONS

xpos (in poetry and Ionic prose) with Gen.

3

irapa,

d?ro (in

(the agent as the source) with Gen. some special prose uses) with Gen.

Sid (the intermediate agent)

2.

with Gen.

Means by
Sod

with Gen. (the regular expression to denote the Means; the others are special).

euro.

with Gen. with Dat. vv with Dat.

Ik Iv
3.

The usages

of certain Prepositions are closely parallel

a/Ko
6.VTI

vv dvd
virep
ap,cj)i

e/c

irpo

p.erd

ri
4.

Kara
Trept (in TrepC

certain senses).

wpos (in certain senses).

Prepositions are sharply con

The usages
:

of

certain
Ik

trasted

is

ev

wrep dvd
5.

vtto

Kara, etc.

Synonymous phrases
e.g.

are

formed by different Preposi-

tions with Cases,

Ka6' q/iipav,
ol
6._

p.kd' rjfi.epav, Trap' rjfxkpav.

dp,<j>l

ITAaTtoVa, ol Trepl IIXaTtuva.

Verbs

of

rest
is

are used with Prepositions

expressing

motion.

^This

known

as the Constructio Praegnans.

See

diro, i, els, ev.

7. Prepositions are used, (1) in their literal sense denoting place, or time, (2) in a figurative sense denoting various moral relations.

chiefly in

Attic use of Prepositions is marked off from the Epic two ways (1) by the disuse of the adverbial senses (2) by the developm^Y&fe#gpjtregoHanings.
:

The

PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY.

252.
I.

291

PREPOSITIONS
Accusative

AND THE
(Is),

CASES,

Prepositions with one Case.

a.
:

dvd, e

(d/ttfrt

practically in

prose).
6.

Genitive

avrt, airo,

etj

(e), irpd (avev, eveica,

etcan, ywpLi,
c.

&XP l

>

P-eXP

)'

Dative

ev,

aw

{a/ia, 6fiov).

II.

Prepositions with two Cases.

Accusative and Genitive

III. Prepositions
a/icpi, eiri,

Sid, /card, virip, p,erd.

with

all

three Cases.

irapa, irepi, wpos, vtto.

I.PREPOSITIONS
(a.)

WITH ONE CASE ONLY,

WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY.

'Avd.

253.
'Avd,

up

to,

through, opposed to

Kara (compare the two

'Avd related

throughout), Eng. on, Gothic ana, Germ. an.

to evl (ev) as on

and

in.

Lat. an-helo,

breathe up, CURT. Etymol. L 381.

Up

along

ra ifKola ava tov iroTafiov ov Svvavrai

The boats cannot
Throughout or
dolSi/ios
sail

7r\eeiv.

Herod.

up

the stream

(cf.

Kara).

Among
dvd
rrjv

'EWaSa

eyevero.

HEROD.
all Greece.

He

became famous in song throughout

dva

oiKciv

to. opiftidSiEStL htf.'MiaiiAs&mlG, to live

m the

hills.

: :

293

PREPOSITIONS.

Distributively

eiropevQriaav

ava

irevre

irapacadyyas

rrj<; rj/j,epa<;.

Xen.
They marched at
So ava
S.

the rate of five

parasangs a day.
centuries.

eKarov,

Luke
:

ix. 14, S.

bodies of a hundred, in Matth. xx. 10.

Cf.

Phrases
dva.

Kpdros

(<f>evyeiv),

with all one's might

SevSpa),

(cf.

Kara. (cpdVos
lix.

dva.

XSyov

(4>vop.eva

Plat. Phaed.
e'xetv, to

trees

growing) in proportion ; dva. crrd/aa mouth, at the tip of the tongue.

Cf.

have in one's

N.B. ava has the sense of dvda-rrjdi, up/ arise/ sursum! Soph. Ai. dXX' aW ! eSpdvav, come, up from thy seat /

Note, dvd is also used in Homer, in Lyric poetry (Pindar), and in Choruses of the Tragedians with the Dative (e.g. Eur. I. A. 754).

In Composition
(1.)

Up,

dvaf3\iir<a,

look up.

(2.)

Reverse action, lack,

dvavevo),

I throw
sight.

the

head back

(3.)

Again, dVa/8Ara>,

I recover
254.

Eis or
6?, into, to,

e*s.

Eh
Cf. (1)

perhaps

opposed to e' out of. Original form In Pindar iv means in and into. Latin in and inter with Accusative.
or
evs,

from

ivi-s.

Of Place:
to, into,

Motion

for

SV/eeXot ef lTaXla<; Siefirjaav e? HiiceXiav.

Thuc

The

Steels crossed over out of Italy into Sicily (or for

Sicily).

With

verbs of rest

KaraicXeUiv

h tjjv

vrjvov.

THUC.

i.

109.

To shut up in tbigMmehy Mt&owffluctio praegnans.)

PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY.

{To speak)
before
:

293

Xeyew eis to irXtjOos. To speak before the people.

Of. elcrievcu, dTrjvat
Is.

Looking towards

to Is Ua,XXrjvr]v T6ixSThe wall facing Pallene.

Thuc.

i.

56.

Phrases
To

els dicovTiov, els

Soparos rrXrjyfjv
eg.

(d<j!KVio-0ai).

get within javelin's throw, spear thrust.

Opposed to
(2)

Of Time :

Up
At

to,

until
ttjv ea>, till

eU

dawn ;

es efie,

up

to

my

time.

such a time, by such a date

els

ecnrepav, els Tpivqv (with or

vtrrepaiav {fjKuv),

come at three days), on the morrow.

to
:

even,

without fjiikpav), Is rijv on the third day (or

Phrases

Is Kaipov, in season ; els avpiov,

on the morrow ;

els etreira,
all, etc.

henceforward ;
(3)

els an-a

(or eraira), once for

With Numbers
limit, vav<; e?

Denoting

up

to,

amounting

to

ras TerpaKoaiw;.

THUC.

Ships

to the

number of four hundred.

THUC.
as

e? hpavfui]v BiaSovvat.

To pay each

man up

to (i.e.

much

as)

a drachma.

Phrases
One,
els

els eva, els 8i5o, els reo-uapas.

two,, four deep.
to the extent

Svvafuv,

of one's ability ;

els

mrep^oXrjv, in

excess.

Digitized

by Microsoft

PREPOSITIONS.

294

(4)

Of Belation to

d/iapTciveiv els riva, to do

wrong

to

any

one.

Purpose
Is

rdSe

7]KOjj.ev,
ffiv,

for

this

purpose we are come.

to live

eh KaAAos
(5)

Xen.,
:

for show.

Special Phrases
s
(to

avSpas ("EXXrjvas, etc.) rcAetv,

be enrolled

to

come

to

mom's

estate

among, belong
come

to Greeks).

Of. lyypd<f>(i>.

?s

(tv vto) TeXevTav, to

d<f>LKea-0ai,
to

end in a certain way.

to

h
as

wav

everything,

i.e.

to

try every

means.
'AttoXX.wvos, Ai6w<tov, to Apollo's, Dionysus' temple,

Apollinis,

ad Bacchi.

So

ets SiSaa-icdXov,

ad as kpavrov

(<poiTav), sc. oTkov or

some such word.

N.B.

cts is

sons ; jrpds or

not used in Attic of motion to individual per(is must be employed.

:

In Composition
Into.

Examples unnecessary.
J

255.
cos, to,

as

with Persons only, not with things, with 7rp6<s, els, eirl, and alone.

o?

Ayiv eTrpecrftevaavTO. THUC. They sent an embassy to Agis.

(b.)

WITH GENITIVE ONLY.

'AvtL
to),

256.

dvri (original sense, over against, opposite

instead

of,

in exchange for ; avra, Epic adv. and prep, over against, face
to

face

avrr/v,

Ep. adv. over against.

is still

Cf. ev-avri-o?

dvTi-Kpv.

In Homer dvrl
Lat.

preposition.

an adverb rather than a Mfetefl^rtftcf. Germ, ant-wort.

PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY.

(1)

295

Of Place,
Instead of:

opposite to
is

This sense
(2)

Epic.

icaica irpaTTei

avr aya9a>v.

PLAT.

He

does evil instead of good.

So /ietfov, ir\eov, dvri, instead of Comparative Genitive, Soph. Ant. 182, Tr. 577.
(3)

and Simple

In return for
Sel

ra

jiev

avTt apyvpiov dXXa^aadat.

PLAT.

We must

exchange some things for money,

the

avd' &v, wherefore (also because, cf. Soph. Antig. 1068). Rarely like 717)05, for the sake of (lit. over against, in presence of), with verbs of entreaty, see Soph. 0. C. 1326.

In Composition

Many

meanings,

(1) Against, i.e. opposite or in opposition,

the foot against, also I resist. (2) Reciprocity, substitution, or equality, <xvt<,/3oij0w, I help in twrn ; avOvrraroi, proconsul ; avriTviros, struck, or striking

avTifiaivw,

I plant

back, corresponding ; avTideos, godlike.

257.
'

'A.TTO.
off,

Anro, away,

from.
'A-iro

Sansk. apa, away, Lat. ab, Germ.

(Sansk. apa) connected with art

ah,

Eng.

off,

of.

(Sansk. api, further,

(1)

after).

Of Place

Away from
airo
ttj<;

avrcov opfiwvrai.
their

Thuc.

They advance from

own

country.

With verbs of rest {from

Shouted from the
towers ; dirb vcZv,
rock,
:

the observer's point of view)

ej36axrev airo 7rerpas a-radds.

EUR.
it).

standing (on
ol dirb

Hence many phrases

d<f>

tw irvpyutv,

the

men on

the

hnruiv ixd-^^Gai, to fight on board ship,

on horseback.

_. ... ..... ~ Digitized by Microsoft

296

PREPOSITIONS.
:

Phrases
dirb

dko-Kov, Kaipov, wide of the mark (cf. diib yvu>pvq% Soph. Tr. 389); dwb rpoirov (Plat.), unsuitably,

opposed to
6.T70

7rpos rpoirov,

Kara

rpoirov.

ShSpwv KaraSelv (Xen.),

to tie to trees.

(2)

Of Time :
After, since
airo ra>v (titwv SiairovelaOai.

Xen.

To work

after meals.

Phrases

to dirb rovSe, henceforth ; iraXaiov, dp^aCov, of old

at even.

d<'
;

oS,

dcj>

eo-7r/oas

ex quo, since , dirb (ThUC. vii. 29),

(3)

Origin
ol
fJLev

airo

6eav

tyeyovores, ol

&

el;

avrmv

tcov 0ea>v

Isoc.

Some descended (remotely) from

Material

gods, others begotten

(directly) by the gods themselves.

:

K/oao-ts <liro
A,i5?njs.

re T5js rjSovrjs 0-vyKeKpap.kvr} 6p.ov

ko.1

dirb rijs
ii.

Plat. Phaed.

combination consisting partly of pleasure

and partly of

Means
fijv dirb iroXijxov (yew/Dy^as).

THUC. and

XEN

To

live

by

war (husbandry).
IS. 15. 11.

IleptKArjs euro SiaKOcrioyv veSiv KareiroXefirjo-ev rr]V "Zdfiov.

Pericles with

200

ships reduced Santos.

Cf.

THUC.

i.

91, dirb irapiwKV7jS.

Cause, in consequence of or for

O7ro Ttvos 6avp,d^cr6ai, eircuveio-Qcu, 8iaf3dXXeo-8ai.

To
dir

be

admired, praised, slandered in consequence of anything,

airiov rZv tpywv o-Koiretre.

THUC.

i.

17.

Judge from

>&Jfefc

rosoft@

297

PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY.

Agent,
less direct

than inrd

iirpdy^dt] air' clvtZv ovSev.

THUC.

i.

17.

Nothing was achieved by them.

See Poppo's note.

diro

o mrb
x.

with a case is often a periphrasis for a case alone, e.g. rwv Boporpopmv (jbd/Jos, fear of the body guard, Xen. Hier.
t<3v dirb tSjv &r)p.ov Tts, one of the people, Thuc. iv. 130. partiality for a free use of dn-6 is remarkable.
:

3;

Thucydides's
(4)

Pheases
oi wiro

TLvdayopov, JlXarwi/os, the school of Pythagoras,

the

Plato.
ol a7ro -njs 'Ai<a.$r]fieias, Sroas,

Academics, Stoics

(the

Academy,
<X7ro

the Porch)'.

oi cwro 0-Kijvijs, actors.

cnrov&rjs, earnestly ; dirb

dirb

toG

i<tov (tjjs

"irr)<s),

air' tOTjs,

equally;

toC

Trpo<f>avovs,

openly;

diro

yXuxra-rj's

tnrilv, to state by word of mouth (Thuc. vii. 10), to repeat by heart (Xen. Symp. iii. 5), from hearsay (Aesch. Ag. 813); 6p.p.dn>v diro (Eue. Med. 216), with one's

own

eyes; dirb tov avTop-drov (Tavrofidrov), spontaneously,

sponte, casu

quodam

dirb <rr}p.dov, at

a given

signal.

In Compqsition

(1) Separation, hence completion, and ceasing, diroXovm, I wash off; direpydfrfiai, I finish off, i.e. I complete; aTroXrjyu), I leave off, desist. (2) Restoration, djroSiSaj/ti,

I give

back.

Separation
dimyopevta,

also

becomes

practically

privative,

e.g.

I forbid ;

dn-ox/cj/iaTos, without money.

258.
'Ek,
'Elj,

'E/c,

*E
Ik and a-ird run

out of; opposed to eh, into.

Lat. ex, e
(ec).

parallel throughout.
(1)

Of Place

Out of
eK ^Trdprris (pewyei.

He

is

banishedj^^^j^arta.

; ;

298

PREPOSITIONS.
;
(cf.

Denoting change

dvri).

TToXlV K 7T0A,e0>? GtXkaTTeiV.

Plat.

To change

city after city.

With

verbs of rest

k SevSpoiv dirdyf^crOai.

THUC.

iii.

8.1.

To hang themselves on

trees.

Phrases Hence many phrases

:

(observe that the first three or tows Ik tj/s four are instances of Constructio Praegnans) vavfiaxta-s (ovk dveXo/*6vovs), Plat. Apol. xx., those in the seafight ; 06 Ik vrfT<ov Kaxovpyoi, Thtjc. i. 8, the evil-doers in (of) the islands ; ol k tGiv irvpyav, those on the towers, Thuc. iii. 22 to e^'Ia-9/Mov Tetxos (opposed to to Is IIaA.Aijv5jv), Thuc. i. 64, the wall on the side of the Isthmus ; h< 8etas, on the right ; l dpurTepas, on the left; Ik v6p,u>v, in accordance with the laws ; opObi ! 6pQG>v Stypwv, Soph. El. 742, erect in chariot erect en rrjs ^vx'ijs (ex dvfiov, Hom.) with all one's heart ; Ik o-avrrjs (Alyeis), self-prompted, Soph. El. 344, cf. ora-d ; eK jtoAAoC, at a long distance, Xen. ; kn rogov pvp,a,Tos, Xen., at bow-shot ; tK x ePs f-d-x^v TToUurdai, Xen., to fight hand to hand.
:

(2)

Of Time :
Since, after:

ef v (XP V0V)> S4Mce > ex breakfast. (So d-iro.)

1u

e tov apiarav, after

Ik toijtov, after this (k tovtwv gen. in consequence of this). Ik tov Xoarov (tv Aoinw) for the future, Xen. and Plat.

After, denoting change

ex SaKpvmv yeXav.

Xen.

To laugh

after tears (weeping).

td</>Aos ck SeSo/DKOTOS Kai 7tto>xos dvrl irXovcriov.

Soph.
Blind
after seeing,

0. T. 454.

and poor instead of

(being) rich.

Ever since:

v kov,.U

v^dlWbflMbhJM

childhood.

PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY.

(3)

299

Origin

aya6ot
Good,

icai elj

aya&mv.
Plat.
(Of.

Soph. Ant. 466.)

and born 0/ good parents.

Material
to ayKtcrrpov kg a8d/j,a.VT0S. The hook is of adamant.

PLAT. Rep. 616.

Agent (Heeodot. and poetry, rare in Attic)

6
tu>i/6" S.pxofj.ai.

Soph. El. 264.

69,

By
Cf.

them

am

ruled.
iii.

Soph. Ant. 957. 973, Thuc.

Xen.

Hell.

iii.

96.

Cause, Consequence, or
K iroXe/xov

Means

eiprjvrj f3ej3aiovTO.i.

THUC.

i.

120.

Peace

is

secured by

means of war.

(Cf. Sta.)

Dependence upon
Trapprjaria kg dXrjdelas r\pTi)Tai.

DEM. 1397.
of).

1.

Plain speaking depends on truth (comes

Cf. aTrayx<xr6a.i Ik, above.

Mixed Phrases

01 kg 'AKaSrjjuetas, Ik tov TLepnr&Tov (cf.

o.tto).

The Academics,

the Peripatetics.

So N.

Test, ol in irto-Tctos, the adherents of the Faith.

6 kg vp.iov 7rd0os,

Soph. Tr. 631, your desire (like a gen.), Aesch so vp.vos kg 'Epivvwv, the song of the Ermyes. Eum. 344.
:

Adverbial Phrases

Ik /Sias, by force ; sk tov $avepov (irpo<fiavovs), openly (cf. ex improviso, ex consulto, etc., Latin) ; k tou cikotos,

Thuc. Thuc.

17, in all likelihood; &>s Ik t3v irapovrtov, 17, so far as present circumstances allow ; kg uroiv (tov 10-ov) equally ; *k tou avrofidrov, by chance, or
iv.

iv.

accident, Xejst.

Jegs^monjum

d*6).


366

PREPOSITIONS.
:

Periphrasis for a case

at ! 'AdrjvSv irapdivoi, the

maids of Athens.
go

In Composition

(1) Separation, removal, completion (cf. mro), Ik/3cuvo), i" out ; iiar'epdm, I sack utterly, out and out.

259.
JJpo, before,
(1)

U P 6.
in front
of.

Cf. irpos.

Lat. prod, pro.

Of

Pla.ce

:
ThUC. of) Megara.

Before, in front of:

M.ivwa r\ vrjaos Keirat irpo Meyapoov. The island of Minoa lies off {in front

Hence in

defence

of,

ijOeXe Oavelv irpo Keivov.

for the sake of. EUR. Ale.

(Cf. virip)

18.

She willed

to

die for him.

Phrase.
irpo 6Sov,

forwards, onwards.

(2)

Of Time :
01 irpo rjpbwv

yeyovores.

ISOC.

Those
6
(3)

who were born

the

before us {our forefathers).

wpb tov xpovos,

:

former time, aforetime.

Of Eelation
preference
irpo

In

to, cf.

dvro, -rrepl

twv fieXricTTav ra fipayyTepa alpeladai. PLAT. To choose more unimportant things in preference to
the highest things.

irpo iroXXov 7roiicr#at {ripacrdai).

To esteem

highly,
:

(lit.

in preference to much).

In Composition

(1) Forth, forward, in front, of place and so of pre-eminence, of substitution or defence, 7rpofid\\a>, I put forward;

xpodvpov, front door; irpoeSpos, president; Trp6p.axos, champion. (2) Before, of time, Trpoaurdavop.o.1, I learn
beforehand.
Digitized

by Microsofm

PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY.

260.
"Avev.

301

"Avev, without, opposed to

aw.

(1) Without the help of, or order of: ti fipoToU avev Aios teAtra6 ; Aesch. Ag. 1487, what comes to pass among men without the will of Zeus ? (miussu Iovis, love nolente). Cf. Thuc. viii. 52.

In Plat. Gorg. 518 D, without reference to. (2) Except, besides nav & vev XP vcrv, Plat. Grit. 112 c, all things (like x o,/HS ) except gold, omnia praeter aurum. In Soph. 0. C. 502 avev comes after its case.
:

26l.

"EveKa,

eveicev.
o'vveita.
its

"Eveica, eveicev (Ion. eiveica; eiveicev), Poet,

Generally after (Ar. Ecc. 105-6).

its case,

sometimes separated from

case

Lat. gratia, causa.

(1) For the sake of: KoXaiceveiv eveica jjiia-dov, Xen. Hell. v. 1. (2) So far 17, to flatter for the sake of {in order to get) a reward. twv concerned ; as concerns : epov ye eveica, so far as I

am

eWa

o^daXfimv, Plat., so far as depends on the

Note.

eyes.

dm

/Joijs

534 ;

Sometimes pleonastically with other Prepositions: dp^l crov eveKa, SOPH. Phil. eveKa, THUC. vii. 92 rti/09 Sij x-P tv VKa > I" 1^1 Le9- 701 D
;
-

262.

"E/cari.
of).

"Ekciti (Ep. with the help

enan, Soph. Phil. 670, (1) Because of, on account of: dperrjs on account of (i.e. as a reward for) valour. (2) So far as concerns irXrjOovs eWi, Aesch. Pers. 337, so far as num(like eveica)
:

263.
Xcopfc, without.

Xw/HS.

oiSev evTVxe?, SOPH. (1) Without help of: irovov roi x">/hs (2) Far from : x"V"s El. 945 ; without toil nothing prospers. (3) dvdpilnnov trriBov, Soph. Phil. 487, far from track of men. MP ari from -reputation Without considering, besides : xV>''s s6

Plat. Apol. xxiv.

Note, Y v>fe
is

(4) Different from,

Plat. Lack 195

alsfi^ed^Ad^erbia^.

302

PREPOSITIONS.

old Cases,

264. Besides the Prepositions, a greater number of which have become Adverbial, are used like

Prepositions with a Genitive.

I.

(1)

(2)

and axP l as far as Of Place ^XP 1 T ^ s \em, Thuc, as far as the Of Time ^XP L tovovtov, tovtov, so far, up to this
piyjti
>
-

city.

time.

(3) p.^xP l T0 ^ SiKatoi; (Swarov), so

II.

far as

is right (possible).
,

\api,v.

(1)

For

the sake of :

the sake of what, 01 wherefore? xAtSas ?KaTt, because of pride,

concerns: 8a,Kpv<ov
iVbfo.
e/xijv

x^P iv

tov x&P lv i=T ov evera; /or s== (2) Because of: x-P LV Soph. 0. T. 888. (3) So far as if tears could avail, Soph. JV. 501.

x^"

y sake, thy sake, not x < ty >tv xP' v ) <r ^" X-P lv f01 1/ioC, o-ov, mea, fea cawsa, gratia. wpb's x<^P iv is also redundantly used, with reference to, for the sake of, Soph. Ant. 30, 908.
"

>

after the fashion

Several old Accusatives adverbially used, meaning like, of: Slktjv (lit. usage) ; rpoirov (way) ; Se/xas (Epic only, form or body). Of. Lat. instar.
III.

IV.

oiA.is, 3.8tjv,

enough/ Stx a opart; \ddpa, Kpv^a,

>

secretly.

V.

Many

old local cases.

near (also takes Dative); eicr<i>, Ivtos, within; 'a>, Iktos, ivithout; fiira^v, between; Trpocrio, iroppui, airoOev, far from ; irpocrOev, ep.Trpocrdev, in front of ; OTri<r6ev, kutoiuv, behind ; dp.<j>OTepoi6ev, eKaTepudev, 'ivdev Kai 'ivdev, on both sides of; 7repa, irkpav, beyond, across ; dvTLTnpas, KaravrtTrepas, dvriKpv, KaravTiKpv, opposite.
lyytis,

(c.)

WITH DATIVE ONLY.

TSv.

265. 'Ev

(poet, eiv, evi, elvi), in, within,

and

ef,

out

of.

Lat. in, Eng. in,

opposed to eh, Germ. in. Cf. dvd.

into,

iv 81,

[The old Adverbial usage of ev still continues in the phrase and among, and therein, and besides. Several instances
Digitized

occur in Sophocles.]

by Microsoft

303

PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY.

(1)

Of Place

(see

Dative of Place)
:

At, near, by, on

Aemrv^iSrji; rjyelTo

twv

ev MvicaXr)

'EWrjvmv. ThuC.

Leoty chides commanded the Greeks at Mycale.

Tpaire&vs oucelrai ev t5 Ev^etvm TrovTtp. Trapezus is built on the Euxine sea.

Xen.

Among
vofioi kv 7rao-tv evSoKi/ioi xois "EAAijcriv.

PLAT

Laws famous among

Elliptically (supply

all the Greeks.

o'Um, or

some such word), mostly

with proper names in Attic.

iv

Cf. ety.

M8ov, in Hades. h'Aoitppovo's, Plat. Trot.

kv Aiovia-ov,

320 a, in

the house

m the temple of Dionysus, Dem.

of Ariphron ;
21. 8.

Iv TraiSorpifiov, kv KiOapurrov, at (the school) of the gymnastic -master, the cithara-player.

Also an Epic use (the complete construction sometimes occurs, e.g. elv AiSao So/holo-i, Od. iv. 834).

With Verbs of Motion (Constructio Praegnans).

el?,

Cf.

converse construction.
01 ev

'Hpai(j>

Those who had fled

(2)

KaraTefavyoTes. XEN. Hell. iv. 5. 5. to (and were in) the chapel of Hera.

Of Time
rah

(see

Dative of Time)
of,

Within a space
ev

during

(nrovSah, during the armistice, Xen.

;

ev Tovjm, meanwhile
(3)

ev

a>,

ev oata, whilst.

Of Eelation

Occupation, Condition
oi ev T015 irparfjxaai, ol ev reXei.

THUC.
affairs, those

Those who are engaged in public

who are

in

office,

i.e.

ministers of

state, the authorities, the

govemmen^g^ by Microsofm

::

304

PREPOSITIONS.
iv ^lAoo-oi^to;, iv Aoyots, iv
Trj

Te\vy.eivai.
im,

To

be

engaged in philosophy, in oratory,

an

art.

ivai iv

To

be

m a state of fear,
:

<t>6/3<p,

iv aicr)(yvrj, iv cruoTry, ev eA7Ttot.

shame,

silence, hope.

Phrases

iv opyfj 4'xetv or Trouio-Oai nva, to feel angry towards any one; iv alriq. 'ix ew > t blame ; iv 15801/17 etvai ap^ovres, ThTJC.
1.

99,

to

give

satisfaction

as rulers;

iv

aA<j>

etvai

well; iv SUy SiKaiws, in justice ; ev Trapao-Kevfj etvai, to be in a state of preparation, Thtjc. ii. 80 ; iv 6VAois elvai, to be under arms (so iv rogois, equipped with arrows; iv <o/DTtois Tpe\iv, to run with burdens on the back, Xen.).

(= ko. A<2?

'ix eiv)>

Eur. Heracl. 971,

to be

Dependent on
ev Tais yvvai^tv ecrriv
r\

awTr/pia.

ARIST.

The safety (of Greece) depends on

So,

the ladies.
etc.,

very often, ev
est,

7'

e/j,oi,

ev croiye,

penes me,
tJiee.

quantum in me
The
Cf.

so far as lies,
rjv,

depends on me,

iv T(p 0e(p to reAos

ovk iv

ip.01.

DEM.
me.

292. 21.

issue rested with God, not with

Soph.

0. G.

1443,

0. T. 314.

With

respect to or at

yeAwr' iv

croi ycAw. SOPH. Ant. 551. laugh a laugh at thee.

rare use, but found with

Compounds, iyyeXZ,

ivv-

fipl(<*>.

Instrument, Means,

Manner

(a

special use, originally

denoting Place)
ev 6<t>da\.p.ols (8/ifiacTiv) opav,

Hom. and

Attic.

To

see

with the eye (in

oculis).

Sophocles is fond of this iv. Cf. Phil. 60, 102, 1293, Antig. 691. Cf. also Eur. Bacch. 277, Thuu. i. 77 (vo/tots), vii. 11 (eVioroAats).

In Composition

(1) In, at, near, ip,/3dXXa>, I throw in ; iyytXw, I laugh at. (2) Of inherent qualities, 'ip^wvos, endowed with
voice, cf. eVvouos. Digitized

by Microsoft

PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY.

266. %vv.

305

Svv (w,
to avev.

old Attic form), with, together with, opposed

Lat. cum.

Compare throughout with

fierd.

Together with
eiraiSevero

aw

tw

a$e\<pw.

Xen.

He was

being educated with his brother.

Conformity with (opp. to irapa), with the help of:

aw
To

Tffl

vofitp yfrrjcpov rtdevai.

XEN.
(irapa,

vote in accordance

with the law

top vofiov,

contrary to law).

Phrases

avv 6e$, with God's

favente).
(avv,

blessing,
diretv,

Oey

or help, please God (deo Plat., Arist.)

Xen. 01 avv tivi, one's friends, party, followers. avv Ttvi p,d\ea9ai (etVat, yiyveadai), to fight on
(pera tivos

One's side

more

usual).

Xen.
with ships

Accompanying circumstances : avv vavai ?rposirAetv, Xen. Hell. ii. (commoner in Epic than Attic).
Expletive use.
Cf.

2. 7, to sail

Dative
1. 15.

avv to

at* dyadio, to yowr advantage,

Xen.

Gyr.

iii.

cum tuo commodo, Cp. Soph. Ant. 172.

avv ttj yStji, with violence (cf. 71-jods /?tav, /Jtaicos). avv r$ XP V V> ai length, Xen. Gyr. viii. 6.

Old Adverbial use

/j/rj

f-iiv

Ka/caJs iroiew avTovs.

(i.e.

ThUC.

1U. 13.

Not jointly
Cf.

together with the Athenians) to

mjwe

them.

Soph. Ai. 960, Aesch. Ag. 586 (fwthermore), Soph. Ant. 85 (moreover), El. 299.

In Composition
(1.)

(2o. Together with, awayopevw, I speak with another. Completely, avpirXrjpQ, I Jill completely, cf. complegr. With numerals, a distributive force is given, e.)

avvrpets,

thresj^kmifigtMmeim

three apiece.

306

PREPOSITIONS.

267.

Note on

crvv

and pera.
of,

crvv, together with,

juera, together with,

denotes mere addition, the midst of, in the company

denotes

participation with,

community of

action.

Thus

(in

Homer)
Od. x. 140. drinking and eating in the company of the slaves.
Sio)

/tei-a S/itocov itiv /cat fjcrdie.

He was He
So

rjkvde crvv

MveA.a<o.
god-like

II. iii.

206.
(i.e.

came with

Menelaus

both came).

Of.

Soph. Antig. 115, 116.

cri)AAa/*/3av(o,
soldiers).

take or get together (tovs o-TparMoras, the

together with others, i.e.

/teTaAa/i/Javw,

I take

I share.

ow6x&>,
/*T6xto,

I hold I have

together, comprise, contain.

with others, partake, share,

'imo-dai fiera' nvtov, to follow in the midst of others, eireo-dai <r,vv tuti, to follow with (as well as) others.

In Attic, it is to be observed, that uvv with the Dative is used in Poetry where ^rd with the Genitive is used in Prose. Xenophon, however, apparently following poetical, i.e. earlier or Homeric, usage, is the one Attic prose writer who uses crvv with the Dative.

268. One or two old Adverbial Gases, apa and

are joined like Prepositions to the Dative.

6(iov,

I. a/jux, mostly Temporal apa tip, afia 6<p yiyvofievri, at dawn, daybreak; but also of accompaniment, ol apa Qoavn,
:

Hdt.
II.

vi.

138, those who were with Thoas.

together with ;

Cf.

Thuc.

vii.

57.
84,

o^toC,

vSwp

6p.ov t< TrqXtp,

Thuc.

vii.

water together with the mud; deols 6[wv=crvv deois, SOPH. Ai. 767, with the help of the gods.
III.
ey-yus (see Genitive), near.
1.

When

used of Place

is

and takes a Genitive, but, in Eur. Herac. 37, a Dative. 2. Of Time or Numbers, iyyvs hiavrov, Xen. Hell. iii. 1. 28, near a year. In Thuc. vi. 5, eVeo-i lyyvs tiKoo-i, near twenty years ; iyyv% is Adverbial, as post may be in Latin,
chiefly Epic,
^

viginti post annis.

IV.

e<ej}s:

to.

TO^y^i^E-^,^

what follows.

PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.

II.PREPOSITIONS

307

WITH TWO

CASES.

WITH ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE.

269.
Ata.
(old

Aid
A.
1.

and poetical form

Genitive.
:

Siat), between, apart, through.

Of. Svo, 81$, Si^a.

With

Oe Place
Through

(right through,

and out

of)

eTTopevdrjaav Bia XaXvfimv.

Xen.

They marched through

the country of the Ghalybes.

A II

through, along

dopvftov rjKOVae Sta tcov Taf-ea>v iovtos.

XEN.

He

heard a din passing

all along the ranks.

Distributively, intervals of space

hid Se/ca eirdx^etov Trvpyot rjaav.

Thuc.
a great

At
So
Cf.
2.

every ten battlements were towers.

Sia ttoXXov, 81a irXila-Tov,
8t'

lAao-o-ovos, at

dis-

tance, greatest distance, short distance.

Eur. Andr. 1251

:

(S.XXov

Si'

S,XXov).

Or Time

Throughout,

cf.

tvapd with Accusative

ravra 8t oXov tov aiu>vo<; /jbo^Oovai. Thus throughout their whole life they
So
8ict

THUC.
labour.
reXovs,

vuktos,

St'
1

rjnepas,

etc.,

Sia Travrds, Sia

while.

continually ; Si oXiyov, for a

little

Of intervals

after

eoace Bid ttoXXov

^pdvov a

icopaicevai.

AEIST.

It seems that it is
Cf.
*

a long while

since he has seen you.

Soph. Phil. 285 {j(p6vo^ Bid ^povov, of succession in

Digitized

me

by Microsoft

308

PREPOSITIONS.

Distributively
Sia

erwv, every fifth year, Tj-e/xjrrou erovs, or Sid irivre quinto quoque anno ; Si' erovs, Si' iviavTov, every year,

yew
3.

by year.

Causal

The notion

is

that of a coining between or intervening.

of,

The intermediate agent, through the medium

agency of:
e\e<ye St
eppirjveu)^.

by the

XEN.

He was
Si'

speaking by means of
iroiziv tl, to

an

interpreter.
i.e.

eavrov

do a thing by oneself, all alone,

without the intervention of another.

Of.
cra-o, !.

Means or instrument. Cf. the Dative (which denotes more direct means)
fj Sid tZv 6fj.fia.Tuiv a-nk-ipis. Plat. Phaed. 83. Examination by means of the eyesight.

Sid x^/dos *X UV !

a /? "/ ",
:

to hold, to

take

m the hand.

Adverbial Phrases

are formed with Sia and the Genitive. In these Sid appears to be used sometimes in its local, sometimes in its causal sense.
Siot

A great number of Adverbial phrases

fiaxys levai, epxtvQa-i (nvi), to go to, engage in battle with ; St.' e'x0pas yiyveadai (tivi), to be hostile to; Sib. <iA.i'as levai (tivi), to be friendly with ; Sid Xoytav ikvai (tivi), to converse with ; Si' amas '^x elv t yv (riva), to hold guilty ;
to be
Si' opyrfs, <f>v\a.Krjs, oiktou %x elv ("vo, angry with, keep in prison, feel pity for.
> )

ti),

Sia o-To/taTos x ' v A""?/"'? 5 o"rkpvmv, to have on one's lips, in one's memory, in the breast.
Si'

opyfjs,

angrily
Sid

Sid ottovStjs, hastily ;

at

Sid

shortly;

paKpmv,

length

(e.g.

toi>s

Ppa\kmv, Aoyous

xoufaOai,

io^^cfb^%^mb

i^okly, shortly.

PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.

B. With Accusative
tiguity.
1.

309

generally

denotes close

con-

Of Place and Time

Throughout, during
:

Epic and poetical only.

867.
2.

Cf.

Aesch. Swpp.

15,

Soph.

0. T.

Causal

Of the Antecedent, not the Final Cause. Of the person or thing whose intervention helps towards a result.
Owing
note).
04
to,

because

of,

on account

of,

with the help of (see

A07jvaioi 81 aperr/v,

aW

ov Bta tvyrfv evitcijaav.

Isae.

The Athenians conquered through valour, not through

chance.
Sia Tovs $ p,a\op,evovs at p,d)^ai Kpivovrai.

Battles are decided by

fight well.
Cf.

(owmg

to the

Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 35. conduct of) those who

Soph.

0.

1129

(8id<re).

Through

the fault of:

ij

Sia tovs aSifcus TroXiTevofievovs Iv T SXiyapxlty

Srjfio-

Kparta yiyverai,.

Owing

to the

unjust administration of rulers

LYS. 25. 27. an oligarchy,

democracy sprmgs up.

el fir)

Sid,
juij

had

it

not been for, but for

810 tov Ii.pvra.viv evreo-ei> av.

it

PLAT. Gorg. 516

E.

Had

not been for the President he would have been thrown Cf. Thuc. ii. 18. into prison.
:

Phrases
Si'

ivSeiav, because of, owing to poverty (Xen. An. viii. 6) Si' a-yvoiav, Sia Kavpa, Sia x^'/""'"*, because of ignorance,
heat, winter piiitk^tfyffipmxem "<, because they were

3io

PREPOSITIONS.
allies.

wherefore
St' o,

Similarly the common expressions Sta ri, why 1 ? Sta ravra, on this account, because of this ; St' a, on which account.
final

Note. For the sake of this, denoting a would be rovrov eVe/ca, not Sta ravra.

cause or purpose,

For

the sake of, in order to

A very rare use

of St a with the Accusative.

iv.

It occurs

St' dx0j40, Sta rr/v crtfierepav 8o|ai>, for their own glory ; iv. 102, Sta. to irepiix^v avrrjv, im order to enclose the city; v. 103, Sta rov 6vp.aros rfv

seemingly four times in Thucydides,

86va, in order to vex ;
ii.

40,

hnpa^iv, in order
Note. It is difficult

to exact the sacrifice.

sometimes to distinguish between the causal uses of Sta with Genitive and Sta with Accusative. It is extremely difficult to account for the causal use of Sta with Accusative. Consult Riddell's Digest of Platonic Idioms for instances of Sta with Accusative in Plato and the Orators,

meaning with

the help of.

:

In Composition
(1)

Through, and so throughly or thoroughly, 8ta/3atvw, I go through ; Sta<eify<o, I escape thoroughly. (2) Apart,
Stao-KeSaVvu/u,

I scatter

asunder.

270.

Kara.
cf.

Kara, down, opposed to dvd. Old form Karat,

fiarrjs.

Karai-

A. With Genitive.
Note, firjvai Kara, jrerpijs originally

may have meant

i.e.

downwards with regard

down upon.
1.

to the rock,"

either

" to go down from, or

Of Place

Down from
Kara rfjs vrerpa?. Xen. Leaping down frmSgyWRifosofm
dkofievoi

PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.

Down, upon or over
:

311

fyipe rral ra%e'<o<;

Gome
Cf.

boy, quickly,
late use,

Kara %e<.po9 i/Scop. ArIST. pour water on my hand.

Kara Koppys irardgai,
to

LuciAN'S

box on the head,

for the earlier

Itti

Koppys.

Cf. Plat. Rep. 398 A. towards the vestibule).

In Soph. El. 1433

(war'

dvndvpuv,

Down
rj

into,

and under
vtJo-os

'ATAavris
isle

Kara

t>)s

6a\drrr)S Svcra

rifavicrdrj.

Plat. Tim.
The
2.

25.

of Atlantis sank under the sea and disappeared.

:

FIGURATIVELY
Against
ol icaO'

ri/jLtov

Xoyoi,

Dem.

15. 25,

arguments against

us.

Cf.

Soph. Phil. 65.

Cf. Karriyoptt),

Karayiyvma-KW twos,

yjrevSofiat

Kara

TWOS.
Concerning, with respect to : rovro eiprjTai KarairaoSiv rlov ttoXituZv. Ar. Pol. V. 7. 11. This has been asserted of all governments. So a-KOireiv, Xeyuv, fijTetv, Kara, twos, often in PLATO (see

Eiddell,
/car'

Digest, 163).
:

Phrases

a/cpas,

utterly

(Ep.

/car'
to

a/cpijs,

a culmine)

Kara
ko.6'

te/cvcuv 6p.vvva.i,

swear by one's children; 6'Aov (later KadoXov, see Lexicon), on the whole.

Dem.,

B.
1.

With
:

the

Accusative,

Kara

denotes

close

proximity.

Oe Place
ol

Motion down upon or after

'Adyvaioi Kara,
7r68a<s eirKeov ra>v AaKeSaifiovitov.

The Athenians were sailing in

icara.

the

Xen. wake of the Lacedae-

monians. poov, down stream r

Digitized

(cf. ava poov). b? Microsoft

: :

312

PREPOSITIONS.

After, in search of
ecrKe8acr/Mevoi icad' dpirayrfv.

XEN.

Scattered in quest of plunder.

Over against, opposite

61 'AOtjvaloi,

Kara Aa/ceSaifioviovs

eyevovro.

XEN.

The Athenians were posted opposite the Lacedaemonians.

Extension throughout
rj

evKafieia gkotov

'ij(ei

Ka& 'EWaSa.

EtTK.

Discretion is under a cloud throughout Hellas.

Kara

yfjv /ecu Kara.

ddXaao-av, by land and sea.

:

In, connected with, belonging to

Kar' dyopdv, in the market ; cu KGtTot to

tTridv/iCai, bodily

<ru>p.a (rr)v

^X ?")
1

public

(menial) desires; rd Kara rijv iroXiv, affairs, politics ; ia Kara tov iroX^ov, military

matters.
2.

Hence Figukatively

Of fitness, according

to

Kara vovv \e<yei<z. PLAT. You speak to my liking.

Cf.

Aesch. Ag.,
an oven ;

Kar' dvSpa crioffapova, like

;

discreet

man

(with a man's discretion)

like

Ar. Av. 1001, Kara

irvtyea,

(opposed Kara tov aKpifir) Xoyov, in strict statement ; Plat. Ap. i., ov Kara tovtovs pijTUjO, an orator of a different stamp from these men ; Kara vp,p.aylav, by
to irapd
<j>vcrt,v)
;

Kara. $>vo-iv, agreeably to nature

virtue of

an

alliance.

Especially with Comparatives

eiBev veicpov fieo^a
rj Kar avOpanrov. a corpse of superhuman size.

PLAT.

He saw
Cf.

ThUC.

vii.

75, /ietfw
Digitized

r)

Kara. Sdicpva TrexovdoTas.

by Microsoft

: :

PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.

3.

313

Of Time

Contemporary with
Bep,urroK\rjs 6
Themistocles,

rZv Kad' eavrbv

the

aTravroiv evSogoraros.

Dem.
most
illustrious

20. 73.
his

man

of all
/car'

con-

temporaries.
ol

Kara. UXdrtDva, Plato and his age; originally ; koit' elprjvrjv, in time of peace.
:

dpxqv,

4.

DlSTRIBUTIVELY

Of Place, Time, Money,

KaroiKovvTat
ol

etc.,

a common use
Kcofias.

MrjSoi Kara

Heeod.

The Medes

live

in separate villages.
1

Kad' eva, one by One ; Kara piav ko.1 Kara. Svo Xa/Selv, DEM. 20. 77, to take (ships) one and two at a time; kwt avSpa, man by man. ko.6' fjpkpav (in dies), day by day ; Kara. pr\va, Kar
kviCLVTOV.

Kara,

ra<s

irevre

nal

eiKocri

yuvas

TrevraKoo-las

Spa^/ias 815. 11.

dsfeptiv.

Dem.
500 drachmas on
every 25 minae.

To
5.

contribute

Miscellaneous Pheases, many adverbial

Kad' lavrov, Kad' avrovs,
little

left to themselves, Le. alone or singly ; Kara. pAvas, alone ; Kara, pixpov, Kar' oXlyov,

by

little ;

Kara.
//!,

8vvap.iv,

to

the

best
;

of

one's

ability; rb

Kar

so

far as concerns me

Kara, ravrd,
it ;

in the same

way ; Kar' AicrxvXov, as Aeschylus has Kara, \iopav, in statu quo, " as you were."
Kara,
tnrovSrjv, hastily ; Kad' rja-v^lav, quietly.
this

Kara, raxos, quickly ;

xparos (per vim), by force

rt

Kara

Kara tovto, on
wherefore
reason
of, ?

ground ; Kara,
rrjv

Kara,

da-deveiav, on the

on what ground, ground of, by

weakness.
:

In Composition (1) Down, Kara/3atv(o, I go down.

(2) Of isolation or abandonment, KaraXi'mia, I leave behind or abandon. (3) Against, KarrjyopZ, I accuse ; Karayiyvwo-KO), I condemn. (4) All over, i.e. completely, KaraK&rrrm, I chop up in
Digitized

by Microsoft

::

314

PREPOSITIONS.
"iWp.
(poet,
vireip), above, over,

271.
'Tirep

beyond.

Sansk. upari
uber.

(above), Latin super, English over,

for virept is a

German

'Tirep

Comparative of

vird.

A. With the Genitive.

1.

Of Place

Over, above

Beos

ed'rjKe

tov rjXiov virep

777s.

PLAT.

God placed
Motion over

the

sun above

the earth.

eK/cv/3i<TTav virep roiv

%i,($>a>v.

Xen.

To turn a somersault over In

the interior of

the swords.

a country

rjp^aro

ei;

AiBioiria<i t?}? virep

Avyvwrov.

ThTJC.
i.e.

It began in Aethiopia which is beyond Aegypt,

higher up, further inland.

2.

Figuratively:

To protect, in defence

of, cf.

irpo

vvv virep iravrwv aycov.

Aesch.
all.

Now
In

is the contest
71700,

in defence of our

Joined with

Eur. Ale. 690.

the interest of
01 virep

tov /JcAtmjtov Xeyovres. DeM. 9. 63. Those who speak in, the cause of what is best.

On

account of

KXavpara /fyaSvrijTos virep. SOPH. Ant. 932. Tears as a punishment for slowness.
Instead of:
diroKpiveo-dai virep twos,
one.

Cf.

Th^^wJ^toC.

Plat. Rep. 590,

to

answer for

::

: :

PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.

With a view
virep

315

to

tou prj irpdrreiv to irposraTTopevov, ISOO. 152 D, in order not to do what was bidden. Cf. Riddell, Digest,
p. 167.

B. With Accusative.
beyond,
1.
i.e.

Chief signification figurative,

in excess
:

of.

Of Place
Beyond

t&v ovpemv r&v

fiera^v.

xnrep Me/i<fnv iroKcv Keipevav to

Hdt.
the hills

The space between of Memphis.

2.

which

lie

beyond the

city

Figuratively

In

excess of:

ovk
This

ecxTiv inrep
is

avQpwirov rovro.

Plat.

not beyond the power of man.

wrlp eXirtSa, past, beyond hope; xnrep 17/ms, beyond our power ; wrlp Svvap.iv, beyond one's ability.

More than retrov imp

3.

Teo-vepaKOvro. avSpas.

HEROD.

V. 64.

There fell over more than 40 men.

Oe Time
Before

6 Trpbs tov klyivtjTWV virep ra MijStKa Tro\ep,ov.

Thuc.
The war with
the

i.

41.

Aegmetms

before the Persian wars.

As an

adverb

Very

rarely; cf. 26, inrep eyai.

:

Euk. Med. 627,

St.

Paul ad

Cor.

11. xi.

In Composition
(1)

Across

or

beyond,

hence of

excess or

transgression,

virepl3aiva>,

For, as by (1)

go beyond, I transgress, omit, surpass. (2) defence of, wrepaXyio, I grieve for (also exceedingly)

-^s^ffi^fo/

"

"

'

316

PREPOSITIONS.
Mera.
between, after.

272.

Merd, With, among,

{alternately),

Compare with
mit.

avv.

Cf. fiera-^v, between, fiera^e, afterwards.

Sansk. mithas
CrjRTltrs

mithu

(together),

German

258) denies the direct relationship between In Attic, fxerd is chiefly used with the perd and /ieo-05.
(Etym.
i.

p.

Genitive.

Compare with

avv.

A. With Genitive.
With,
7}

among
twv Oewv
Siayei.
the

ifrvxri ael fiera

PLAT.
society).

The soul
/heto.

lives for ever

with

gods (in their

viii.

^vfifidx^v KLvSvvevew, common with allies.

Thuo.

23,

to

run

risk in

On

the side of:

ovk eiKos to

rfjs

Tuxqi

OL(r6ai del

/J.ed'

vjxZv

'itrecrOai.

Thtjc.

iv.

18.

It is not reasonable to suppose that the influence of fortime will ever be on your side. Cf. Plat. Apol. xxii., /ieto
TOIJ VO/XOV.

Joined

to

to-^os tc Kal kciAAos /aero, vyieias.

PLAT. Hep. 591

B.

Strength

and beauty joined

avv,

to health.
:

Modal,

cf.

i/cerewe toiis SiKacTTas

and Dative alone /UEToi iroWQv

SaKpvutv.

Plat. Apol.

xxiii.

He

besought the judges with

:

many

tears.

Phrases
fiera

eft/at, to be 0% one's side ; companions ; per d\r]6das, truly.

1

twos

ol ^et<

nvos, one's

B. With Accusative
Next in order
Next
to the
to
:

(rare in Attic).

(iera deovg ^rvxv Oeidrarov.

Plat. Leg. 726.

gofyfae^u^mo^divine.

PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.

317

Other usages of fierd with the Accusative, going among, going in quest or search of, according to, are chiefly Epic. For them the Lexicon should be consulted.
1. With the Accusative /^era denotes either (1) motion midst of, or (2) extension- over the midst of. The idiomatic phrases with /jcto and Accusative will fall under one of these two heads. Thus (1) fiera ravra, next to, after this (lit. going into the midst of, and so succeeding, or coming next to); (2) fiW vmipav, interdiu, in the daytime {during, extending over the day); jiterci x"/as ex etv > f have *** hand.

Note

to the

Note. 2. In Homer and in poetry perd is also used with the Dative to denote presence among, one among others, without the close connexion denoted by the Genitive.
fitTa 8e Tpirdrouriv avacrcrev, II.
i.

252, he was ruler among

(in the presence of) the third generation.

Cf.

Eur.

Erechth. 26.

As an

adverb
128.

Among, amid, next, afterwards, often in Homer. In Herod, also afterwards, pera Se, &rXre k.t.X.,
In Composition
(1) Together (2) Goingto,
:

i.

have together with or share. over, or in the midst of: /teraix/ttov, the space between armies ; /j,e8ir)/ju, 1 let loose (among). (3) Of succession, alternation, change, juctuSo/o7rios, after dinner ; peTayiyvwo-KO), I change my mind; perdvota, repentance.
with, /ueTx*) ,

among, or extending

N.B, Coming among implies following some, and so sucThus if a bead is put among cession and alternation. or between others in a necklace, it comes after, and
alternates with, other beads.

III. PREPOSITIONS
273.
'Afi(j>l,

WITH ALL THREE

'A/t#.

CASES.

on loth

sides (about, around).

Cf. a/icpca, dfupo-

reoo?.

Sansk. abhi, Lat. amb, (am-, an-), amb-o, amb-io.

dfi<f>i<:

'AfMpi related in form to

as

e'/e

to

e'.

Compare

throughout With ^itized by Microsoft

: :

318

PREPOSITIONS.
dp.<$>L

Note. In Attic Prose Accusative only.

is

practically used

with the

A. With Accusative.
About
the time of, cf. irepi:

77S77 rjv

It

XEN. dfMJH ayopav irXTjdovaav. was now already about full market time {forenoon).
TrevTrjKovTa
6x57,

dpcj>l

about 50 years.

(Employed) about

aaKovai tcl afi<f>t tov irohepbov. They practise the arts of war.
dp<f>l ti
(e.g.

XEN.

cttttovs,

8taT/ot/3e6v, etc., to

dppara, Sewrvov, etc.) ex e ' v > e ' V<U ; engage m, set about, be concerned with

anything.

Phrases

04 dp<j>l

TLpuTayopav (IIAaTajva), the school of Protagoms The phrase (especially in later writers) is a periphrasis for Pythagoras himself. So 01 dpcju S<!/oea the army of Xerxes, Herod., but ol dp.<j>l Meyapeas kgu <f>Xia<Tiovs (HDT. ix. 69) the Megarians and Phliasians.
(of Plato).
;

Less

common

uses

(Epic and poetical) fj\9e<s a/ufA AaSwvrjv, Aesch. P. V., 830, thou earnest nigh (about) Dodona, cf. 419 ; pepipva. 8' d/x(f>l ttoXlv, Aesch. Sept. c. Iheb. 843 (care about the
city).

B.

With Genitive
and
cf.

(the uses are very rare

and wholly

Epic, Ionic,

Poetic).
irepi
iratSds,

Concerning,
dp<f>l o-ijs

Aeyw
Cf.

child).

Soph. Phil. 554.

Eur. Hec. 580 (7 tell thee of thy Aesch. Ag. 67, dp<j>l

yvvaiKos (in the cause of).

Round

about
viii.

Hdt.

ISl^^te&^r").

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

C.

319

With Dative

(wholly Epic, Ionic, and Poetic).

Among :
(dfKJil

KXaSots efo/tera, Euk. Phoen. 1518 (seated among

branches).

Concerning
a/KJi

6/mh o-TEveis,

Soph. El. 1180 (thou

sighest for, about

me).

PHKASES,
dfi<j>l

cf.

vepi:

T<ip/3ei (<o/3^>),

prae pavore, for fear.

In poetry.

As an
274.
'Eirl,

adverb, on

either side.

Homeric

use.

'Em.
on the surface
of,

upon, by,
ob.

to.

Cf.

en-el,

then.

Sansk. api, further, after, Lat.

See

anro.

A. With Genitive.
1.

Of Place

Upon, with verbs of

ira<{

rest

o t tti 777? icai vtto 777? ftpvcro?.

the gold
i7r7rov,

PLAT.

All

on earth and under

very often.
:

the earth.

So

(f>'

With

verbs of motion

eire/iyfrav

rpi^pov;. XeN. They sent them away on board a trireme.

avrovs

em

And
Xen.,
to

in Gonstructio Praegnans, dvafirjvai

em

wvpymv,

climb up, and be on towers.

(a

Towards
The
Cf.
i.

common

use)
olkov.

ol jjvfjL/Aa'Xpt, ave%a>pr}crav eir

THUO.

allies

returned homewards.
Qpa/fviDigitized

60,

em

by Microsoft

320

PREPOSITIONS.

In, by, near, at

7ri v-fja-ov,

in the island ; 77/5 cti fays (Soph. 0. C), in a foreign land ; iv ayopq. ri t!ov rpairetfUv, Plat. Ap. 1,

m
to
eirt

the

market

at (by) the tables

of the banks; kin

81-

Kcwrripiov, ISAE., in COwt.

Bp$Kys, Thuc. (see

Poppo and Kriiger)

(the parts

in) the neigh.be/wrhood or the district of

Thrace or Thraoelirl rfj's

wards.
fiivnv, to

So u t^s
remain in

AaKcovc/djs, v. 34.
their

auroJi'

own

country,

Thuc

iv.

118.

In presence
To
2.

of,

coram.
eirl

Cf. irapa.

k^eXkyyea-Oai

wavrutv.

DEM. 781.

4.

be convicted in presence of all.

Of Time
e7rt

(very

common)
apypvTos, in
in the reign of Cyrus ; the archonship
time
eiri

Kvpov

fiacriXevovTO*;,

@'e/MaToicKeov<;

Themistocles

; e-rri

twv
in

-Trare'pcov,

of in the time of our

to?
eirt,

fathers ;

eir

e/xov,

my

kivBvvov,

as in time of danger (Thuc.

3.

vi. 34).

Figuratively:
Set over, engaged in
e/j,vev

ewi

Trj<;

ap^r)<;.

XEN.

He was
Phrases
So
t(i>v
:

continuing in command.

peveiv

eiri

(tov iroA.6/*ov)
42. 4.

in
o

war ;

a thing ; liri tZv irpa.yp.6^ be engaged in business, hn, yv&pvqs ytyvarOai, to come to an opinion,
tivos, to abide by
etvai,
to
eirl

Dem.
e-irl

raiv ojtAitcov (ottXwv),

rmv

lirrrkw, the

commander

of the infantry, cavalry ; 6 iirl rrjs Skhktjo-ews, the controller of the treasury, paymaster-general.

Resting, dependent upon,

e<js

iavrov, etc.

ifi eavTov, of or by oneself, independently or separately, spontaneously, is a common phrase; ifi lavi-oS xAetv,

Thuc,

to

sail by oneself or alone; Digitized by Microsoft

id>'

eavrov otVeiv

'

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

Xen.,
to live

yi\

apart, separately; ifi vp,!ov avr&v /3aAHdt., to consider by yourselves ; i<j>' IwvtZv SiaXiyovrai, Hdt., they speak a language or dialect of their
\eo-6ai,

i.

own, a distinct dialect; hr' dyKvpeaw, at anchor, 188.

Hdt.

In

the case of

With
a
ttI

\eyai, alo-ddvofiai, o-kottS)

(I examine or consider),

Kpivw,

I decide

or judge.
e<j>'

rav aXkatv Spare, ravr'

vp.G>v

avTW

ayvoeire.
Is. viii. 114.

What you
So
or'

see in (the case of) others, that you are ignorant of in your own case.

case, to take

ipov keyuv, Plat. Rep. 475, as an instance myself "

i

to

speak in
iirl

my own

iravToiv 6p.o'w>%

in all cases

Galled after
KCKAijcrflat,

6vop.a<r8rjviU
f/

hrl Ttvos (HDT.), to be

rj

after

a person ;

dp-fjvq

eiri

'AvtoAkiSov, Dem., the

peace of Antalcidas.
hrl wd/jaTos eTvai, to bear a name,

Dem. 1000.

21.

Military phrases
tTa\6r](7av
iirl

Terrdpiov.

XEN. An.

i.

2. 15.

They were drawn up four deep.

Generally of the depth, sometimes of the length, of a
hrl irivrriKOvra ao-7rl8(ov crvveo-Tpa.p.p.evoi.
line.

Xen.
Massed in column fifty
to
shields deep.
jaeTQ)7rov hrl TpiaKocriwv,

Hell. vi. 4. 12.

to Se /3a#os
its

</>'

ckcltov.

Xen.
The length of the
ity evds,
line

Cyr.

ii.

4. 2.

was four hundred,

;

depth one hundred.

m single

file

hr 6Xly<av

Tao-o-eo-0<u, to be

up in a long

lime

(or a shallow column)

drawn (Xen. and

Thoc).
vXslv ri Keptos
wimg),
(cf.

Accus.),

to sail

in column (towards the

19,

(KardDi^mbk^yiimmsMvo.u.

m single

file).

322

PREPOSITIONS.
:

Miscellaneous phrases
arl tov
flanks.
tTrl

eiiavv/Aov,

iirl

rov

TrXevpuiv,

on the

left,

on the

irdvTwv,

Dem., on
last;

all occasions;

i<t>'

eKao-nov, Plat.,

on each occasion.
fort

TeXevrrjs, at
tVijs,

ri

<rxoA??s,

at leisure, leisurely;

?r'

equally (Soph.
eirl

Hdt., as a pretext ;
7rl

El. 1061); evl irpo<ao-ios, SpKov, on oath (Hdt. ix. 11)

TTposTroXov jUias, dependent on one

handmaid, Soph.

0. C. 746.

B. With the Dative.

[The uses should be compared with those of the Genitive. They often run closely parallel. 'E7ri with Dative, meaning upon, is commoner in Prose than with the Genitive; the poets 'E-n-l with the Dative use both cases indifferently. implies closer connection than iiri with Genitive.]
1.

Of Place
Over, on
oi

QpaKes akwrreiuhas

stti,

rals /cecpa\ai<; (fcopovai.

Xen.
The Thracians wear fox-shin caps heads. Of. Eue. Bacch. 757.
N.B.
ifi

(fitted to)

on their

tWoi must not be used for

e^>'

mi/.
TrefXTvovcriv.

toxis OTrAtTas ore vavcrlv 6X.tya.is

evdvs

Thug.
They

ii.

80

(cf. iv.

10).
ships.

at once despatch the hoplites in (on board)

a few

Against
The
Cf.

ai vrjes

<f>'

ij^iv Terdxarai.

ThUC.

iii.

13

(cf. iv.

70).

ships are

drawn up

against us.

Soph. Ai. 51,

:

r' Sfifiaa-t

fidXXeiv (Constr. Praegn.).

In, at, near, by

oi/ce'ovres
of,

eirl

Hrpvpovi, Hdt., living on the shores

or near, the Strymon. Digitized by Microsoft

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

of

323

twv

dpitTTtav IIepcr<3v irafSes eVt rats fia(ri\eu>s Ovpais

TraiSevovrai.

XEN. An.

i.

9. 3.

The sons of
Of.

the noblest Persians are brought

up

at (close by)

the king's gate (at the "

Sublime Porte

").

Soph. Tr. 1100,

Phil. 353.

Next after
to,

em

tovtok, the next

step.

Hom. Od. vii. 216, ov yap ri Kvvrepov aWo, naught more blatant
Of.
ot
IttI

arvyepr)

eiri

yaa-repi
belly.

next to (than) the

oAiyoi hrl 7racriv vwb tSiv \pi\Qv airidavov, few of the rear were slain by the lightarmed, Xen. Hell. i. 1. 34.
irao-tV,

the rear ;

2.

Of Time

(rarely)
:

Generally of succession, after, or following eKTfi hrl SeKary or rrj e/crg hrl 8hx.

On

the

Dem. 279. 18, 288. 29. lbth of the month (sixth after the tenth).
hrl Sw/ious.
(the

Near, about (very rare in Attic)

fjv fjXios

Xen. An.
sun was at

vii.

3. 34.

It
3.

was near sunset

:

his setting).

FIGURATIVELY
Set over

and

actively engaged in

Toils hrl rots trpa.ypjo.o-iv

ovtos airilavTai. DEM. They accuse those who are engaged in public affairs.

So oi hrl reus guard of the

Generally
hrl
t<>

/i5jx ava ' s i *""'

T0 ' s Ka A"7^-'Sj XEN., thcte in

engines, the camels, etc.

at, in,

of circumstances
ii.

irapovn, Thxtc.
;

speak)

hrl

t<JS

SetVv<j>,

Xen.,

36, on the present occasion (to at supper.

With

Of.

(by no means an infrequent use). Eur. Bacch., hr' evdo-pao-i, with joyous shouts (cf. 1368). Of. also Soph. Ant. 556, hr' app^ols Aoyois, with words kir' kfyupyo.o-p.kv.01% when a deed is done and unspoken, over, Aesch. Ag. 1379, Soph. Ai. 377, Eue. Bacch.
:

1039.

Digitized

by Microsoft

324

PREPOSITIONS.
reference
to,

In

in case

of,

connected with

vd/tov ridkvai iirl tlvi,

case of,

Plat., to make a law for, in the a person (for or against him) ; so vo/j.os kcitm

hri tlvi,

DEM.
kclXXo?, Plat., beauty of person.
to
:

to

i-n-l

t$ o-w/mTi

Upon,

i.e.

accumulated on, added

TrrjfiaTa

em

irrniaariv nrlirrovTO.

SOPH. Ant. 595.

Woes falling on woes.

So
itrl

Tovroif, thereupon, on. this, very frequently

,

in Attic.

Hence probably phrases connected with meals

<riT<p irlveiv vSuip,

ri

t<j>

Xen.,

to

drink water with one's food.

Dependent upon, in power

ei eirii toi<;

of,

with el/u and

rylypo/Mai,

7ro\e/Mot? eyevovro Tt av eiraQov

If they had fallen into the would have been their fate
to r'
'4fioi,

Xen. An. v. 8. 17. hands of the enemy, what

?

to

eirl o-oi,

so

far as in my,

thy,

power.

Cf. Ace. to

iri o-<j!>as etvai.

(Be named)
eirl rrj

after,

on the ground of

baum and

e'xfyp o-rao-ts K/cA?jTai, Plat. Bep. 470, see Stallreferences there, sedition is so called from (intestine) hatred.

Causal, with words of emotion,

at, for,

because of:

eiru tovi fiaXHTTa ayaWrj ; Xen. In what do you most take delight ?

So with x a V") I rejoice ; o-e/H/wo/mt, I pride myself oWxepcuvw, I am.mxed, etc., and corresponding adjectives, and substantives such as eiraivos, <tAoTi/ua, etc. So
fr/uofotfat

%f g

^^

6ro %Jfe

fmed for a

thing.

::

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

Condition
eirl

325

rovTip irwefyorapai Trjs ap^ryi.

this condition

HeeOD.
$
(tc), r* ovSevt,

On

resign

my command.

So very often
kirl

ri tovtq,

ihri toijtois, k(f>

rots

(ifyrjfitvoi's,

on the conditions expressed.

Motive
ifrevSerat re icah eiri tt}
efirj

SiafioXfj Xeyet.

Plat. Apol.

v.

He
eirl

is lying,

and

is

speaking with a view

to

prejudice

vfipitjzcrOai

37, for knavish purposes ; ovk ri rjyepoves elvai, THTJC. i. 38, not order to be rulers ; hrl t order to be insulted, but icepSei, Xen. for gain ; eirl vcxptq., to get wisdom, Plat.
i.

you against me. KaKovpyiif, Thuc.

aXX'

eiri

N.B.

0Jv, with Scott.

In Plat. Prot. 358 b, with Gen., IttI rov aAwws a view to living a painless life ; Liddell and

The reward or price

tvyyeve&dat Opr)pZ rt
L

ir6<T(f (sc.

purdSy) av tis Se<uto

Plat. Apol. xxxii.

For what price would any of you be willing to meet Homer? So eiri Spa\py Savdfav, DEM. 816. 12. To lend money at twelve per cent. See Diet, of Antiq.
iirl

dvSpaTroSois Savetfeiv.
slaves).

DEM.

822.

8.
(i.e. to

To lend money on
gage on the

the security of slaves

hold a mort-

Phrases
Xkyew

eVt rtvt, to speak in

any

one's praise

(perhaps over

the body of).

Aesch. Ag. 1400.

(1) Direction
to,

C.
over.

With Accusative
:

or (2) Extension,

Direction

Upon
Set dvafirjvai eirl rov Ittttov.

XeN.

He must

mu^n) jhisjiorse^

326

PREPOSITIONS.

To:
TrpoTpeirtTe toiis veaiTepovs
iir'

dperrjv.

IS. 3. 57.

Urge the younger

to (the

pursuit of) virtue.

As far
rj

as

V 'OSpvuwv IttI OaXacrcrav Kadr/Kei. THUC. II. The kingdom of the Oolrysae stretches as far as the sea.
a-px^)

97.

(See Phrases.)

Against
It

ovk eucos
is

apj(r\v eiri ap^tjv

arparevaai.

THUC.

not likely that empire will advance against

empire.

For, for purpose of:

eifkeov ov-%

THUC. <o<; 7ri vavp,ayiav. They were sailing not as though for of a sea-fight.

the

purpose

To fetch:
Trepyirovcriv eirl

Atjfiotrdevqv kcu oti tos eiKocri vavs.

Thuc.
They send for Demosthenes and for

iii.

105,

the twenty ships.

So KaAetv

J7rt

Sewrvov, to

summon

to

supper.

Extension

Over, in space or time

to ojxp,a Svvarai,

The

eye (sight)
eirt,

emTroWa cnahia e^iKvelcrdai. can reach over many stades.

XEN.

XEN.

e0vTO

Tjoets' rjfiipw;.

He was
Phrases
7ti
eirl
:

sacrificing for the space of three days.

(1)

Direction.
come
i.

77av iXBiiv, to

to to

an

to p.d^ov

Koir/jbetv,

extremity, try every means exaggerate (be extravagant in

(Cf. viii. 74.)

embellishing),

Thuc.

21.
:

To produce (of a purpose)

aurxiova
to,

r( to. yeXoiorepa, Plat., to raise

(i<a\Xloi,

a laugh.

So

Zirl

to.

to

fSeXnov, to aptivov), changing

resulting iih ijmffifMHmSfi(ketter, etc).

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

to

327

em
to brl two., tovtt' epi, romrl to iwl o-<as etvai, Thuc.
ere,

iv.

Trag., as regards me, thee; 28, so far as regards them.

Military Phrases
eirl

face to the spear (the right); r' face to the shield (the left) ; hrl iroSa dvaxmpelv, to retire on the foot (with the face to the enemy) ; eirl Kepas 7rAe?v, to sail towards or on the wing (in column). Cf. Gen. eirl Seid, eir' dpianepd, to the right, to the left; eirl rdSe,
to

86pv ava.<TTpk\p<u,

dcnriSa avao-rpexj/ai,

to

on
eirl

(eTreKeiva),

eir' dp^orepa, both ways ; ei? eKeiva. on the yonder side, beyond, ultra ; eirl to eTepa. ddrepa, on the other side.

this

side ;

Phrases

(2)

Extension.
:

Up

to,

as far as to

eirl

SirjKotna diroSiSovai, to yield two

ecf>'

hundred fold, Hdt.

i.

00-ov So., so far as is necessary ; eirl <rp,iKp6v, eirl fipaX", "' oXlyov, eirl irXeov, etc., to a slight, to a greater
extent,
eirl

193;

little

way,

etc.

iroXv

(eimroXv),

over

a large extent or space

to

; eirl

irXeio-Tov dvdpioTTiav (extending

or
eirl

over) the greater

part of mankind, Thuc.

ii.

i.

1.

Cf.

nXeurrov bpiXov,

34.

eirl

to ttoXv, for the most part, Aeistot.

Time :
eirl

rpk, Act. Ap.

CS TpJS.

woXvv xpovov, for a long time ; eirl xpovov nvd, eirl See Liddell and Scott, t/h's and x. -16.

In Composition
(1)

Upon,

over, en-licei/tai,

I lie upon;

eimrXeu,

I sail

over

go over, survey. (2) To, i.e. for, eirivevoi, I nod assent to. (3) To, i.e. against, eina-TpaTeva, I march against. (4) In addition, emSiStapi, I give in
eiroixofiai,

addition; eiriTpiTos, with a third added to one, i.e. 1|. (6) Of (5) Causally, over, at, eirtx^p^, I rejoice at. (7) time, after, hnyiyvop.0.1, I am born after, succeed. From the joint notion of advancing and addition such words as eiriyap.ta, right of intermarriage ; cf. nvopia,
eirepyacria.
Digitized

by Microsoft

328

PREPOSITIONS.
Ilapd.

275.

Ilapd (wapai, Trap), by the side of, to the side of (the primitive notion being that of going through or crossing). Sansk. parti, away and towards, Lat. per, Eng. from (Goth.
fra, fram).

Ilapd and

irepi are related

forms from the

root PAR, to fare or go through.

A. With Genitive, 1 coming

or proceeding

from

(but

originally aside, at the side, or sideways from).

Coming from
e%e~k6elv

vapd

twos,

to

come from a person's house,

Symp. 179
B, to be lorn of or

or country, or court.
yiyvso-Oai irapa twos, Pl.

sprung from.
e'xetv

wapd

rtvos (DEM.), to receive

to

from ;

ixavddvciv irapa

(Eur.),

learn from.
:

The Agent with passive verbs

irapa

twos

Sl8oo-8ai, \iyeo~6ai, o-vp.f$ov\.ev0-Qai, to be given,

said, advised by

any

one.

Periphrastically for the Genitive,

at irapa

etc.

tmv

Stj/jwv Scopccu.

DEM.

20. 15.

The

gifts of democracies.

So

17

srapa rtvos evvorn, to Trap'

e/jx>v

dBbeq/ui (the wrong

done by me), Xen.

Phrases :
oi irapa

twos, one's friends, dependants, messengers,

;

etc.,

Thug, and Xen.

to.

irapa

Ttvos,

one's

commands,

purposes, opinions ; trap' iavrov SiSovai, to give of one's resources, or spontaneously; Trap' Zpov, Pl. Prot. 322 D, by my advice.
1 The Genitive with irapa appears to represent the Ablative ; thus irapax^pew tou fSrlfiaros would first have meant to move sideways from

the tribune.

Digitized

. by Microsoft

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

B. With Dative, by
the side of, near,
by, with.
side.)

329

(Of

persons, seldom of places,

wapd

aoi, at

your

Among, with
trap vp.lv
you.
eTpd(f)7]v,

AESCHIN.,

I was brought up among

to

KardXveiv trapa nvi, Dem., chez quelqu'un.

Belonging
to
to :

lodge with

any

one,

p,ev xpvtriov Trapa

tovtw, ot 8e kivSvvoi Trap'

vp.tv.
iii.

Aeschin.
This

240.

man

gets the gold,

you the dangers.

In presence of:
eis Kpimv Kadta-rdvai riva Trapa, tivi. To bring any one to trial before another.

THUC, DEM.

In

the judgment of:

Trapa. rots (ppovovo-iv

ei8oKipuv.

Is. 9. 74.

To So

be in good repute with sensible people.

Trap' ipot,

me

iudice.

Trapa o-avT$, PLAT.

Phrases
01

Trap'

Ipoi (rjptv),

my own

people;

to.

Trap'

kp.01,

my

affairs.

1.

Motion
side),

to

(with perere,

sons, irapa

to

your
of

with verbs

motion.

C.

With the Accusative

2.
:

<

alongside,
rest.
3.

Motion or extension with verbs of

Parallelism and com-

parison,
Digitized

side

by

side,

by Microsoft

figuratively. c J

330

PREPOSITIONS.
:

I.

Of Place
1.

Motion

to

ewefl^rav Trap' 'ABrjvalow; 7rpe7/3et9.

XHUC
to

They sent envoys to the Athenians. ekriivai, </>oitoV napd rtva, to enter, go Cf. Genitive and Dative.
2.

any

one's house.

Extension along or beside

7]

Trapa daXacraav MaiceSovia.

ThTJC.
Cf.

The seaboard of Macedonia.

Soph. El. 183.
3.

Xen. An.

iii.

5. 1,

Parallelism and Comparison

Side by side (with verbs of examining)

aKkrfka ecrrai (paveparaTa. DEM. Set side by side they will be most conspicuous.
irap'
Trap'

oppa, before one's

eyes,

Eur. Supp. 484.

:

Compared with (often implying superiority)

peyaXt)
pOTrfj
ij

t v XV

va P a

ira.VTa

to.

twv avnpanrwv

DEM. 2. 22. itpay para. Fortune is a mighty makeweight compared with all human Cf. Xen. Apol. i. 4. 14 (so used especially influences. with comparatives).
Beyond and contrary
to,

opposed to /card

hvvapiv, beyond one's strength. Trapa to Sikoiiov, ras (nroi/Sas, tovs vopovs, <f>vcriv, yvu>pr)v, S6av (Adyov), contrary to, or in violation of justice, the

Many

phrases

irapa.

',

treaty,

the

laws,

nature,

opinion,

expectation

(praeter

opinionem, spem).
Note. Several peculiar and much occur with jrapa and the Accusative.

debated

constructions

Causal
Owing

to,

in consequence

of, cf.

Bid with Accusative.

Ka<rTO? ov 7rapd tyjv tavrov dpeXelav (Herat

tt6Xi.v,

/3Aa^av

tyjv

Thuc.
Phil.

i.

141, each

man

imagines that he will not

Cf.

in consequence of his

own

neglect injure the state.

Dem.

iDfelttmpfflWokm

P'W-

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

Besides, in addition to

331

ovk co-Tt irapa ravr' aXXa, ARIST. Nub, 698, there's nothing else besides this; irapa ravra irdvra hepov ti, Pl. Phaed. xix., besides all this something quite different
irXriyfj irapa irXrjyrjv,

Ar. Ban. 643, blow for blow (im-

plying alternation).
II.

Of Time
During
;

tov SoXtov avopa

<f>ev<ye

irap oXov tov ftiov.

Menand.
Avoid a cunning man thy whole
life long.

So irapa. iravra tov xpovov, irapa. ttotov, AESCHIN., potandum. Cf. Lat. per totam vitam.

inter

At

the

moment of :
toiovtov Kaipov, DEM., at such a

irapa.

moment ;

irap' avra.

TaSiKrjfiaTa,

Dem.

21.

wrong-doing, flagrante the very act.

26, at the wry moment of the delicto. Of. Zir' avTocjxipw, in

Note 1. trap' fjp.kpav is generally taken to mean on each alternate See Soph. Ai. 475. Lobeck and Jebb consider that it rather means day by day, as each day comes. The phrase occurs in Dem. viii. 70. In Soph. 0. C. 1455, irap' fjp.ap a3#ts appears to mean on the following day. irapa. pjva t/mtov, Aristot., every third month.
day.

Note
ence of

2. irapa.

(motion

to),

reached,

is

used of
things.

excess or defect,

in certain phrases denoting the limit and so describes the differ-

two

irapa to(tovtov

17

MutiAijvjj

^X9e

klvSvvov.

ThUC.

iii.

49.

Mitylene came within such a distance of danger.

Cf.

withm
the

THUC. vii. the mark

2, vi.
is

37

(irapa.

my

opinion); iv.

TotrovTov yiyvwa-Kio, so much 106, irapa. vvi<ra iyevero

i.e.

XajBeiv,

came within a night of taking,

one night only stood in phrases,

e.g. irapa.

way of taking.
this construction
within,

To
to

belong a great

many

p,iKpov, iroXv, oXiyov, f3pa)(y eXdeuv, yevktrdai, diro(pevyeiv, viKav,

come

a Uttie^i^^i^'Mffa'iBl^-

esca P e > io

w^n

a narrow

333

PREPOSITIONS.
Similarly
Trap' oiSev,
little,

or a hollow victory.

pinpov, oXlyov iroieurOai,

little

ayeiv, dicrdai, eTvai, to hold of no,

account, be of

account.

In Composition

(1) Alongside, Trapto-Tripi, / set alongside; irapa/3dXXop,ai, I expose or stake ; 7rapd\Xr]X.os, beside one another. Hence

(3) (2) of alternation, TrapaXXdo-o-o), I make alternate. Aside, beside the mark, amiss, irapa/3aiva>, / transgress.

276.
Ilepi,

Tlepi.

Cf. nrept-^,

ever

round about, beyond, over, very (cf. adverbial use). round about; mpto-a-os, excessive ; Trap, howmuch. Sansk. pari, round about, Lat. per(magnus).

See irapa.

Compare throughout with

dp.cf>L

A. With Genitive.
In prose the meanings are figurative and poetical (cf. Eur. Tro. 818).
:

the local use

is

Epic

The Object for or about which

aytovi^eade iravres irept
Strive all of

aperr}*;.

Xen.
("" e

you

after excellence.

So

dywv

(6 kivSvvos, etc.) rrepl

foxV*

P'

tSv peyicmov)

Zo-tl,

the struggle is for life (for the highest objects).

etc.

With verbs of caring, thinking, fearing,

a
thing.

peXei poi, {SovXevofiai, 4>of3ovpat rrepl tivos,

care

etc.

for

Also of saying and hearing

dyyXXu>, Xeyw, aKOVto, pep.vrjp.ai

rrept Ttvos.

of these verbs with Trepj. should be compared with the use of the simple Genitive in Epic and in Poetry.

The use

Phrases

iprrdpm ?xav mpi

thing.

tivos,

Aeschin.,

to

(Cf.

^^vy^L^enitive without P L)

be experienced in a

::

PREPOSniOtfS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

Periphrastically

333

at irepl 'HpaicXeovs irp&geis, Plat., the deeds of Heracles.

iroieuroai,
fiyeicrdai

ri

irepl

ttoXXov
etc.

((r/juKpov,
irepl

ovSevos,

iravros), to esteem

a thmg highly,
cf.

here contains

the old meaning beyond,

i.e.

irepiyiyvopai,

I get

beyond,

B. With Dative.
Comparatively rare in Prose in a local sense the Dative denotes a closer connexion than the Genitive, cf. hri with
:

Genitive and Dative.

Close round, around and upon on to the figurative
elSe irepl rij
;

the literal meaning leads

X^P 1

T0" venpov %pvcrovv SaicTvXiov.

Plat.

He saw round

the finger of the corpse

a golden

ring.

A good example in Xen.

Be
lieth

An.

vii. 4. 4, irepl

rots cn'epvois, etc.

Keirai Be i/e/cpos irepl veKpui.

SOPH. Ant. 1244.

dead, clasping close the dead.

:
dp,<j>i,

Transfixed by a weapon

Common

in

Homer

(so

Od. xii. 395).

ireTrrwra

rQSe irepl veoppdvrtp t<f>ei. Fallen upon this new-reeking sword.

SOPH. Ai. 828.

The Object about which, very rare in Prose

irepl

(cf.

Gen.)

The struggle See Poppo.

irepl

tq SifcsAip &TTai 6 dydv. will be for Sicily.

THUG.

VI.

34.

T<j> X""V ^eurav. They feared for (about)

THUC.
the place.

i.

67.

irepl

Cf. Plat. Prot. t$ crw/xcm.

314

a, wept rots

faX-rdms

-.

Phaed. 114d,.

The cause

(poetical).

Cf

dfi<f>l

irepl 4>6fi(j>, irepl rap/Sei, irepl xa/ytart.

F<f

m>fW %%U%cro om
S

(In Poetry.)

334

PREPOSITIONS.

C.

With Accusative.
the literal meaning sometimes running into

[Motion round about, Epic]

1.

Of Place,

the Figurative
Rest round about, near,
at, by,

in

ol ecj>j]/3oi Koi/j,a>vrat irepi

ra ap%e2a.

Xen.

The Ephebi
town-hall.
.

sleep

by (in the neighbourhood of) the

KaX tjs

Ke<<xA,ijs

Kareaye

Kepi,

XiOov

xe<ru>v.

Ar. Aeh. 1180.

And
Cf.

he fell on a stone and

21. 4, irepi

lias

cracked his crown.

DEM.

avrd Karappeiv.

So THUC.
rj

vii.

(lit. about themselves). 23, irepi dAA.77A.as Tapa,\deura.L. irepi, i<et, etc.

Fall in ruins

Cf. the Dative,

irepi

Aevjiov vavpa.\ia.

XEN.

Sell. iL 3. 22.

The
2.

sea-fight off Lesbos.

Time:

About or
rj&r) tjv

near, with

numbers

Trepi irKr]dovcrav ar/opav.

Xen.

was now near full-market hour. So irepc tovtovs toijs XP V0V? THUC.
It
-

About

this period,

or time.
54, about seventy.

irepi ej38ofi.riKovTa,
3.

Thuc.

i.

Figuratively

Be busied aboiot, engaged in. Cf. With eTvcu, yiyvecrOai, Siarpifieiv,

oi<ti auT(j) irepi

d/j,<f>l :

<Tirov8deii
vii.

ravra

o Jvpvp.eS<ov diravrq. this

While he was engaged in See Phrases below.

THUC. Eurymedon met him.

31.

Towards,
irepi

i.e.

with reference

to

tov debv dcre/3ov<riv. ANTIPH. They are impious with regard to (in their dealings with, or duty towards) the god.
Digitized

by Microsoft

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

With Verbs:
So
eucre/3eiv

335

auaprdveiv
'

trmtppoveiv

>mrpt or ' r riva,

(

T6.

orrouSafetv

W&A Adjectives
wourjpos,

dyaflds,
etc.,

> irepi ti

^
6orf

>
J

m
.

tfAe

matter

of.

oya#ds

7rept riji/ 7rdAtv.

i.e.

(rood as regards the state,

a patriotic

citizen.
:

With Substantives, Periphrasis for Genitive or Adjective

01 vo/J.01 ot irept tous yap.ovs,

Plat. Crito, 50 D, fe 2am wfeA. rgfofe fc> marriage, marriage laws ; ot wepl Awtav Myoi, Plat. Phaedr. 279 a, Ae speeches of Lysias; fi

wept <tA,Mr7rov rupavvt's,

Xen.

iZeK.
i.

v.
3,

4.

2,

Philip's

despotism ; ra
to.

irepl

ras vaSs, Thuc.

i.

waraZ affairs

mpl Kvpov, Hdt.

:

95, the deeds or history of Cyrus.

Phrases
oi TTcpi

nva, a person's retinue or suite ; ot 7rept 'HpaKAetTov, Plat., the school of Seracleitus ; ot irepl 'Ap\tav ?roAep> apXh Xen., Archdas and his fellow-polemarchs.
(j>iX.ocro<jiiav,

01 7rept ixovcriK-qv,
6'vres.

tyjv ttoitjo-iv,

tovs Xoyovs

Those engaged in music, philosophy, poetry, oratory ; musicians, philosophers, poets, orators.

6 irepl rbv hnrov.

XEN.

The groom.
wept, after its case (Anastrophe), is found in Thuc. and Plat. Once in Plato, Leg. 809 e, it is put far from its case, something like a German separable particle. (See Liddell and

Scott.)

In Composition
irepuriwTio,

Around, beyond,
yiyvo[mi,

exceedingly, Tre.p<,[ia\\u>, I put around; I fall around, embrace, fall foul of, into; irtpiI get beyond, excel, survive, escape; ireptxapTjs,
Digitized

exceedingly glad.

by Microsoft

336

PREPOSITIONS.
II/30S.

277.

U/30? (Ep. and Dor. 77730, ttotl), towards, to, in front Sansk. prati, towards, Eng. of, before, opposite, beside.
forth-with.

IIpo-Ti is formed from

77700'.

Cf. irp6cr-9ev, in front.

1 A. With Genitive,

generally of direction towards, or

with reference

to,

without implied motion.

Towards

In presence

or in sight of

o tl hUatov ea-rt

km

77730?

6ewv

ical 717309

avdpayrrcov

Xen.
Whatever
to
777309

is right

in the sight of gods

and men.
XEN.

Hacv5)vo<; rel^ps e^erei^iaav.

the wall

They completed

which faced Sicyon.

A very common usage in

So in
V

prose and poetry (the verb, such

as iivai or Kelo-dai, is readily understood).

entreaties

71730?

vvv

<re iraTpo<s, 777309

II

re (irjTpos,

19'
10

Teicvov.

mc6t7? licvovfuu.

Soph.

Now
Note.

by thy father, by thy mother, boy,

Suppliant

supplicate thee.

Observe (1) that ere is often use. inserted thus, 717)09 o-e Trarpos, cf. per te deos oro; (2) the verb is often omitted, 717)05 Aids, 71-pos deSv, pr) 71706$ ytvelov, jLiij Trpos tre yovvmv.
very

common

On

the side

of
\eyerai
said
71730?

A\iuj3i,aS'r]<;

irarpo^

A\Kp,aioiBa>v

elvai.

Dem.
is to

Alcibiades

have been descended

from

the

Alcmaeonidae on

the father's side.

1 Observe that the Genitive with irp6s is a genuine Genitive and not a representative of the lost Ablative, connection, not separation, being denoted.

Digitized

by Microsoft

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

Cf. Soph. Ai. 1305, tovs npos ai^aro's, blood Soph. El. 1125 and 1075 (ra irpos tkv<ov).
relations.

337
Cf.

Belonging

to (periphrastically for

Genitive alone)

ov 7rpo? tarpov
'Tis not

cro<fiov

8pi)veZv eTr(pBa<; irpo'i rofi&VTt irijfiaTi.

SOPH.

a wise physician's part

To mumble
So

spells o'er sore that needs the knife.

7rpos yvvai6<s, like

a woman,
71750s

etc.

And
SOPH.
59,
it

with

qualities,

Suojs, in accordance -with justice.

So'^ijg,

0. T. 1014; ov 71730s T>js fytT6/)(Xs does not accord with your reputation.

Thuc.

iii.

In favour of: 7T/30S t&v ej(pvT(ov <5ot/3e TOV VOflOV Ttdrjv. Thou makest this law in favour of the rich,

Eur.
Phoebus.

On

the part of, at the

hand

of:
e/iov.

hraivov rev^erai

717305

yovv

SOPH.

He

shall meet with praise at least

from me.

The agent with Verbs and Adjectives (very

common

in Ionic

and in poetry) KCpos ofi.oXoye.lTai

Cyrus
Cf. Cf. El.
is

irpos iravTiov KpaTto-ros yeveo~9ai.

Xen. An.
admitted by all
to

i.

ix. 20.

have been most

excellent.

Aesgh. P. V. 650, Soph. An. 919 562 (with a Substantive).

also, rarely, of things.

(ep^/tos 71-pos 4>i\a>v).

In poetry

Soph.

El. 1236.

B.

With Dative.
Near or
beside,

in rest
irrjr/al';

ol Trora/Mol 7T/30? rats

ov

jj,etya\oi eiaiv.

XEN

Rivers near their sources are not

big.

Soph.

0. T.

1169, 7rpos

t>

oWco, on the brink of horror.

In presence of : -pds tois ;<p<,tcs, in the presence of In Demosthenes jurymen: Trpos fr ^gSg^'feygfej^T""):

the

338

PREPOSITIONS.

Engaged in
Plat. Phaed. xxxv. 84
Socrates
0.

was absorbed in

the conversation held.

Cf. totus erat in sermone.

Hoe.
:

Sat.

i.

9. 2.

Note.
ttjv

A frequent
e'x ' v

prose usage

thai, ylyveo-6ai,

Sia.rpv/3eiv,

yvwp/qv

""P^s tivi.

In addition

to

7rpo? toZ? itapovcnv

aWa

irposXafielv 8e\eK.

In addition
other woes.
77/30?

to

thy present woes thou wouldst

Aesch. add

Tot?

aWof?, in addition
77730?

to the rest.

So constantly
to,

toutoi?, praeterea, in addition

777305

besides this,

seldom

tovtco.

C. With Accusative:
1. (i) (ii)

Direction towards, or

to,

implying motion,

Kelation to or connection with (a very free

and post-Epic usage).

Tmvards,
ecpvyov
to,

literally

777305 ttjv yr\v.

and figuratively Xen.

rh Ka\a.

They fled
r]

to the shore.

<f)ikoTi[ua Trapofjvvet, 77730?

to noble

Xen.

Ambition spurs

aims.

With

verbs of speaking

eiprjaerai 77730? u/i?

waaa

rj

aXrjBeia.

DEM.
before

The whole truth

you).

shall be told

you (spoken out

nva.

Very commonly, cnre.lv, \kyeiv, Soph. El. 640, irpbs <j!><3s

Xkyuv
irpos

<f>pdfciv,

airoKpiveo-dai

71-pos

(to

proclaim), publidy,

in

broad daylight, in luce.

nva,

to

Aiyeiv Kara tivos,

to

speak in reply, advorsus aliquem. speak against (in accusation of), in

aliquem.
Digitized

by Microsoft

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

With
verbs of considering
77730? vfia<;

339

"koylaaade

avrov<i

n avfi^aerai.
Cf.

Dem.

Consider with yourselves what will happen.

So

evdvpeTcrOai, dva,p.vr)<r9rjvai irepl twos.

avrrj irpbs avT'qv, alone by myself.

SOPH. El. 285.

Of dealings with
oirov8a<} (ffvvdqiatsi) iroiovfiat 71730?
truce, treaty with.

nva, I make a

So

^vftfiaxta, tpiXia, i\8pa, aTrunia, TroAe/Jos irpds Tiva.

tt/309 to-us SiKacrrd's,

in the presence of the jwry.

Against

7T/30S toiis

MijSovs kyivovro dyadot.

13.

THUC.

i.

86.

They proved themselves brave men against

Cf.

the Medes.

Xen.
jrpos

Cyr.

ii.

3.

Kevrpa

firj

Xanrifr.
to

Prov.

Kick

not against the pricks.

Generally, with reference

ovftlv avrif jrpos ttjv iroXvv cart.

DEM.

528. 16.

Re

has nothing

to

do with the

city.

ao-^aAoJs ex ' v ""pos Tt > Xen., to feel safe or comfortable about.

Miscellaneous Phrases:
With a purpose:
ypr) 777309 to irapbv uet fiovkeveaOat,.

Isoc.
to the present.
etc.,

We
So

should ever deliberate with an eye

eroi/jos,

xPV <TllJL0 s 'Ka^s

'

>

""pos ts, ready,

for a purpose.

According
irpbs

to
tfiv,

aXXov

Dem.,

to

live

according

to

the

standard

of another,

wpos

rrjv 5vva.jj.iv, according to one's ability

(pro viribus).

irpbs rets

tuxs (Eur. Hipp. 701), suited

of,

to one's fortunes.

In consequence

on hearing

yakeiraiveiv
a0vfia><!
77-po?

777309 ri.

THUC. To

be

annoyed on hearing.

exeiv

77730'? Tt.

Tavrriv *hv <bwr\v. Digitized by Microsoft

To be despondent. Hdt. Ad hanc famam.

34

PREPOSITIONS.
Tavra
:

irpos

irpo*;

t/; wherefore? 717)09 Tavra, therefore.

so then

Sometimes introducing a defiance or challenge,

e.g.

Soph. 0. T. 455.

Compared, with
iroXXfj av eh) diritTTia t}s Svva/jecos 7rpos to kAIos oiutwi'.

THUC.

i.

10.

There would be a strong disbelief in their power as compared with their reputation.
Of.
iii.

Hdt.

iii.

34

also

iii.

94 (implying superiority), and

between),
to three.

94 (to

jxko-ov Trpds, the

mean

irivre irpbs Tpia,

Aristot.

Five

Exchange

rjSovas irpbs ijSovds kch Ai;7ras irpbs Xviras Kal (f>6{3ov irpbs
<$>6j3ov KO.Ta\\aTTe<rdai. Plat. Phaed. xiii. 69 A. To exchange pleasures with pleasures, pains with pains, and

Of.
2.

Hom.
irpbs

fear with fear. II. vi. 235.

(a rare use), towards, near, about
:

Of Time

ko-rripav,

daybreak.

drawing towards evening Plat, and Xen.

irpbs ijw, towards

Phrases

to, irpbs to, irpbs

tov iroXtjxov, res militares, military

affairs.

tow few (Soph.

Phil. 1441); duty to the gods.

irpbs riSovfjv

Aeyav, to speak with a view to gratify or please ; so, irpbs x"-P LV Sij/iijyo/OEtv, to make a popular speech, talk clap-trap or "bunkum"; irpbs %x6pav iroieio-dai \6yov, Dem. (calculated to inspire dislike) ; airavTa
irpbs
rjSovrjv

^jTetv,

to

make pleasure
referre).

one's

sole

aim

(omnia ad voluptatem
Adverbial phrases
:

irpbs fiiav (irpbs

to fSiawv, Aesch. Ag. 130), violently, by force; irpbs dvdyKijv, of necessity (cf. vir avayK-qs, St'
avayKijv, e dvdyKTjs, crvv avdyicrj).

irpbs /J-epos, proportionately,

Dem.

irpbs evo-e/3eiav, piously,

Soph.

irpbs

opyqv, angrily, Soph,

and Dem.

irpbs

Kaipov, seasonably,

Soph.
by Microsoft

Digitized

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

7ifpos

341

ir/oos

x/"'/ twos, alicuius gratia, for the sake of a person. lo-xvos xP LV Eur. Med. 538 (laws not made) in
>

support of violence; cf. Soph. Ant. 30, 7rpds x"/"" /&>/>&, In such phrases, 7rpos x^P tv i s /or <A sa&e 0/ food. almost like cWa.
jt/oos

auAov, Euk.

,4Z.

346,

to

the

accompaniment of

the

pipe.

As an Adverb :
dAoyta
/cat

in addition, besides
dfiadla ye jrpos,
to

and unreasonableness
In Composition
(1)
,
:

PLAT. Meno, 90 E, absurdity boot. Cf. Eur. Or. 622.

Towards, irpo^pxop-ai, I approach. irposKeifiai, I lie near ; ttoosti&j/u,

(2)

Near, beside, be-

/ apply, I add.

278.

"Ttto.

'Tito (Epic. viraL), under,

Lat. sub.

= Sansk. wpa (thither,

to,

with).

A. With Genitive.
1.

Of Place.

Under
PLAT. ra vtto 7979 SiKaarijpia. The courts of justice under the earth.

From under

veocrcrbv toVS' vtto

Drawing from under

TnepZv cnrdo-as. EUR. And. 441. the wings this chick.

An

Epic but rare Attic use.

1 iirb, like the Latin sub, seems originally to have meant upwards, from below towards a place above. Compare vimos with supinus, facing upwards, ifi, aloft, surgo {i.e. sub-s-rigo), succedo. Hence iirb means going to meet (!ma,vTi&iu), supporting, and so agency or cause. More generally iirb comes to denote under the power or influence of, and even accompanying circumstance, sometimes almost like iirl with a Dative, With the Genitive virb denote.g. Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 821, iirb (pbvqi. ing separation from, the Genitive must represent the Ablative ; on the

hand when iirb means under, the true Genitive, denoting sphere within which anything occurs, whether of place or time, etc., is emother

poye
,

'

Digitized

by Microsoft

::

342

PREPOSITIONS.
;

2.

Figuratively

under the

influence, of.

Of Persons

the Agent, like Lat. a,

ab

With Passive Verbs

01

Hipaai evucrjOria-av vtto tSjv EXkrjvmv. The Persians were defeated by the Greeks.

Of

Tilings

virb

the cause

wdvTa
They

Sew? ^vviaraTai.

ThuO.

all hold together

through fear.
rjSovr/s, vir' opyrjs,

A very common use, virb voo-ov, vj>

by,

in consequence

of,

from, for,

disease, pleasure,

anger.
virb KijpuKOS evicts eiroiovvTO.

THUC.

VI. 32.

At

of a herald they were offering prayers, praeeunte praecone.

the direction

Hence of accompanying circumstances

Frequently of music
:

HdT. l. 17. ioTpareveTO virb (rvplyyiav. He used to march to war to the sound of the pipe.
Cf.

Soph. El. 711.

Eur. Baceh. 156.

Ar. Ach. 1001,
ev<$>rjp.ov

So

irlveiv virb craAirryyos,

to

drink
virb

to the

trumpet's
El.

sound.
to

vir'

/Joijs

dvcrai,

SOPH.
tfxivov

630,

sacrifice

with auspicious cry.

torchlight.

iropevecrdai, to

march by
ii.

iVo

jto/otjjs,

in

procession.

Hdt.

45.

Greek,

Note, vtto has this sense with the Dative in early and late e.g. Hesiod and Luctan (see Liddell and Scott) ; also

rarely in Attic with the Accusative, Plat. Leg.

opxrjo-w
k<xI (jSSijv
:

670

A, vir

Xen. Sym.

6. 3, virb

av\6v.

Phrases

vfi JauToC (iroieiv n), self, sua sponte.

do anything spontaneously, of onevp.(ov avrlov Kal p,f) virb rwv iro\ep.[u)v, Thuo. iv. 64, of your own free-will, and not viro here denotes the Agent. compelled by the enemy.
to
i<j>

Digitized

by Microsoft

PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.

B. With Dative.
u7ro

343

means under, in a

local sense, less frequently

in Prose than in Poetry.

Under
evK\er]<;
<yvvr\

davel

t apiarr) twv

ixj>

r]Xiq> /x,aicpw.

Euk. Al. 150.

Glorious thou wilt die,

Cf.

The noblest woman far beneath the sun. Xen. An. i. 2. 8, vwo Tr) aicpoiroXei etvai.
rt e'x"? virb t<

Covered by

IpariQ; Plat. Phaedr. 228 D.

2
ctko't(J).

JFiW
Cf.

k ^ow concealed under your cloak

-<4</.

AESCH.

1030, virb

Under power of persons or things

r\v

en vtro vo/jlois Kai irarpi. PLAT. He was still in subjection to laws and
v<f)

Rep. 574
to

E.

cf. iavrm iroi&aQai, to Hdt. vii. 157; Thuc. vii. 64 (and see Accusative).
:

a father. bring under one's power ;

Glassed under
to. virb

PLAT. Bep. 511 A. are speaking of what comes under the head of geometrical pursuits (various branches of geometry). More rarely with Accusative, see Lexicon.
Tats yeofieTpiais Aeyeis.

You

C.

With Accusative.
Motion under
:

dveywpr/crap viro to ret^os.

XEN.
court.

They retired under

the walls.

vtro hucao-Triphov, into

(under contrgl of) a law

Hdt.
Extension or position under : to UeXao-yiicbv to virb rrjv aKpoiroXiv ifyKrjOrj.

vi.

104.

Thuc.
The Pelasgicwm which
crowded.
to. virb rr\v
lies

ii.

17.

(extends) under the acropolis

v. 10, the northern districts.

was

apKTov.

Hdt.

Digitized

by Microsoft

344
Subjection to
ei/co?

PREPOSITIONS.

avTow; iravra Treipdcao-dai, viro

<r(pa<; TroielcrBai.

Thuc.
It is likely they will try to bring all under their power,
ol vtto

Tiva.
one.

Xen., those who are in subjection

to

any

Cf. Dative.

Of Time

near, about

V7T0 tov a-eta-fiov.

TlIUC.

At

the time of the earthquake.

viib vv/cra,

towards night, at nightfall, sub noctem.

wo

t?]v

KaraXvcriv tov TroXefiov, just at the end of the war.

Xen. Mem.

ii.

8. 1.

Phrases
vir

avyas opav n,
ti,

to

hold up

to the light (cf.

Euk. Hec.
ali-

viro

Plat, and Aristoph.,

to

certain degree,

quatenus.

In Composition
(1)

Up

to,

vn-avTidfa,

go up

accompaniment,
wrei/M,

vir,So>,

to meet, I face I accompany in song.

and so

of

(2) Under,

I am

under.

(3) Secretly, slightly, gradually,

little;

v7ro(j>aivh>,

I show

or shine a

virofZaWta,

I suggest,

suborn, substitute; vtripvdpos, reddish.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTER

II.

THE NEGATIVES.
Introductory Note.
279-

Ou
:

negat,

M77

infitiatur.

following are typical instances ravra ovk kykvero, these things did not take place of its use Tavra ovk av yivoifo, these things would not take place ; oil (p^fii, I do not assert, i.e. I deny. The statement may take an interrogative form, oi Tavra lyevero; did not these things take place? where an affirmative answer is expected, the person addressed being challenged or dared to say ovk iyevero. M?7 on the other hand deprecates or repudiates. The following instances taken from Homer are typical /u.i) ifie Aa/Jot xAos, o-e Ki\euo, let me not meet thee ! ?j /tij may not anger seize me ! sroTj <jf>ao-0e; what! say ye? {be it not that ye say!) a statement put deprecatingly or repudiated Surely no ! you don't say, etc. do you say ? Hence pj naturally expresses a prohibition, /x-q yJ epedifc It also naturally expresses fear, apprehension, provoke me not ! surmise jj.rj pe o-Ti/3rj Safido-y, I fear (or perchance) the frost shall overpower me. The surmise may be expressed independently, as above, or it may be attached to a verb, and so pass into a Sel8u> /j.tj yivafiat, I fear that I may Subordinate Sentence become. Again the surmise, or result deprecated, may prove true Sd8<a /ii) vrj/iepTea thriv, I fear she spake the truth?

ov contradicts or denies. 1

The

1 declines, Curtius. Oi denies, pri rejects ; oi is the Oi denies, negative of fact and statement, /j of the will and thought, Goodwin in Liddell and Scott Oi denies a predication, /ui} forbids or deprecates

(further on, disclaims), Monro's

2

Homeric Grammar.

identical with the Sanskrit ma. In Sanskrit md is used with the Conjunctive, Optative of wishing, and Imperative like ii-fi in Greek, Curtius, Etym. i. p. 415, For instances see Delbriick and Windisch, Syntahtische Forschungen, Der Gebrauch des Cnnjunctivs und Optativs Max Miiller, Sanshrit und Griechischen, p. 112 and following. Oxford Inaugural Lecture, Note G, gives an instance (from Wilson) of the prohibitive md with what may be equally well called an Infinitive or Dative : h&paldya, lit. not for unsteadiness, i.e. do not act This seems to trace back pfi as far as we can go.

Mij

is

md

Digitized

by Microsoft

345

34&

THE NEGATIVES.
all

the above instances ov contradicts downright a statewhereas /*ij deals with conceptions or thoughts. line is thus drawn between the two negatives a line, on the whole, clearly marked throughout Attic Greek, although subsequently blurred. 1 M17 is thus used with Wishes, Prohibitions, Conditions, and Purposes. negative consequence conceived (wore with the infinitive) requires /wj, a negative consequence achieved as a fact (&o-re with the Indicative) requires ov. Mij is used generally with abstract conceptions as opposed to known and definite facts. Thus ol ov Trio-TtvovTi<s means those particular (known) persons who do not believe / oi ftrj irLo-Tevovres, all or any persons who do not believe (if any do not believe); rei8^ ovk tfXdov, when, or since (as a matter of fact), they did not come; eTreiSfj fifj eXdoiev, whenever (the number of times not being specified) they did not come; 17 ovk ifaretpia, the inexperience (of some known person), the fact that some one is inexperienced ; 1) p) ifj,ireLpCa, inexperience in the abstract (without predicating of any particular person) ; 6 ovk &v, he wlw is not existing, the dead man ; rot /ui) ovra, all things whatsoever are not, a vast limbo outside of our actual knowledge. The construction of the sentence may change otj to fvq, yet even so, if it is necessary to contradict point blank a word or statement, ov may be used. See examples at the end of

In

ment

of fact,

this chapter.

Whatever

applies to ov
[i-qSeis
:

and

/vrj

applies equally to their com:

pounds, ovSds,

ovSe, [iijSe

ovts, ju^tc, etc., etc.

280.

Ov PRIVATIVE.
word deprives that word
of its affirmasense.

Ov
tive

prefixed to a

meaning and gives it exactly the opposite Hence it is called privative (privativum).

Especially noticeable under this head is the idiomatic use of ov with verbs of saying and thinking ov fa/At,, ov <baaK(0, oi vo/jh^co, ovk o'lofiat, ov So/ccb, ovk ew.
:

1 As Luoian (second century a.d.) is sometimes read, it may be observed that he uses where Attic writers use 01} (1) with Participles in a Causal sense, and after us, 8n, Slari Causal, (2) after Verbs of Saying and Thinking in Oratio Obliqua.

Digitized

by Microsoft


Oi

PRIVATIVE.

347

By

this idiom ov is used with the principal verb

where

in English the negative is joined

Infinitive.

with the following

its

Ov
nescio)

in fact almost coalesces with

word.

Compare
coalescing.

the use of the Latin negative (ne in nego (ne-ig-o), ne queo,

which has gone a stage further than ov in

<j)ao~i

ov

6e/MTOv elvcu.
it is

PLAT.

They say

not right.

negant fas

esse.

ovk aiero Seiv Xeyeiv.

AESCHIN.

He

thought that he need not speak.

ov hoi SoKcb.

Plat.

I think

not.

Note 1. This use of ov with the governing Verb seems more See Monro's Homeric Gramancient than with the Infinitive. mar, p. 262. Note
2.

This ov privative
/x?j.

is

sometimes retained where the

xii.

construction requires
eav ov

^T eav T cbrjre. PLAT. Apol. Whether you say no or yes. d p.ev ov iroWol tfo~av. LYS. 13. 72.

25 B.

If they were few. THUC. i. 121 (d ovk aTrepovo-L) ; XeN. An. i. 7. 18 (d ov fiaxehai); SOPH. Ai. 1131, 1242, 1268; El. 244: Eur. Med. 88. But generally the /mj required by construction is used. eav [irj <f>fj o hepos rbv erepov 6p8&s Aeyeii/. PLAT. Gorg. 457 D. Note 3. Ov exerts this privative or contradictory force on
Cf.

any word to which

(a)

it is

prefixed.

Verbs

ov u o-ripyw, 1 hate.

ovk
, ,

di<3,

consider

that

not

ovk ukIiS, ecu

ov i K

d ^J Ihinder ^orM
e

'u,.

,.,
'

(like ov SokZ),

I require

or ex-

ovk vTno-xvovp.a.1,

I refuse.

pect that not (Thuc. ii. 89), I disdain or refuse (Aesch.

ov TrposTToiovp.0.1, dissimulo.

P. V. 285). ov
o-vp,povXe6(o,
etc.

advise

one

not to, Digitized by Microsoft

Thuc. and Hdt.


348
(b.)
ret

THE NEGATIVES.
Other words
:

>

ov KaXd, immorality. ov KaXcos, immorally ; ovk opOZs, wrongly. ov% els, ovk 6XiyoL=T7oX\oi, many. ovk e\d)(i,o-TOS= fj.eyto~TOs, ovk TjKio-ra dAAa p,dX.LCTTa, HDT. iv. 170. tij9 Aeu/caSos 17 ov Trepirdxi-o-is, Thuc. iii. 95, the non-investment of Leucas. r) ovk k^ovo-U, Thuc. v. 50; r) ov 8tdX.vo-is, i. 137; r) ovk
CMrdSocrss, V. 35.

Iv ov Kaipii), unseasonably,

Eur. Bacch. 1288.

In some of these cases the negative doubtless is due to the Greek reserve and abatement of positive assertion (litotes), e.g. ovx rj/ao-ra, not least, i.e. (by implication) most.
Note
4.

28l.

Ov AND WITH ADJECTIVES, PARTICIPLES USED AS ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, AND SUBSTANTIVES.

fJL7]

(For Infinitives used as Substantives see

283.)

Ov.

M17.

When

definite

and known

When
class

the
are

members

of a
so
is

individuals or

members
of,

indefinite,

of a class are spoken so that a fact

is

that

the

expression
:

stated,

virtually conditional

(or

ov

is

used.

when
is

certain
of,
:)

attributes so that
it

are thought

consecutive

or
is

when
a mere

the expression

vague
thing

somethought of rather
conception,
^77 is used.

than known,
Instances with
ot
/j,rj

much outnumber
oi
fir)

those with oi.

ovk

aryado'i TroXirai.

icaOapol Tas %elpa<i.

Those

{particular)
good.

citizens

Antiph
All who are of impure hands.

who are not

Digitized

by Microsoft

Oi

AND

Mi}

WITH ADJECTIVES,
01
fir)

ETC.

349

0L

0V 7TK7T6VOJ/Te?.

Trio-revovTes.
i.e.

Those

who do not

believe.

Those,

any

(all)

who do

(Special

known
of.)

persons

not believe
believe.

= if any do not
TrocTTevovai.

spoken
ii

qui non credunt.

= oiTtves
ocrot,

fit]

si

av fir] irbarevcoat. qui non credunt.

oi
fir]

at

ovk
avrai.

opBai

TToXiTelai

twv (TTpaTMOT&v
fievoi.

Bvva-

Plat. Rep.

Xen.
the soldiers as are

These wrong forms of govern-

Such of
unable.
ra-

ment.
Here, as in many such cases, the ov is privative ; under which rule are given examples of adverbs and
substantives.

opara

icat,

ra

fir\

(opara).

Plat. Phaed.

The things which are seen and those which are not

fir]

tarpon

aveTricrT7]fia>v.

Plat. Oorg.

He who

is

not a physician

is inexperienced.

beivov eaTiv

r)

fir]

e/nretpia.
Alt. Ecc.

sad thing is inexperience.

Here no statement is made that any particular person

is

inexperienced, but the

is

mere conception
of.

spoken

Note on Substantives. When oi is used with a Substantive, is equivalent to a negative objective sentence. Thus 17 ovk eovo-la=quod non licet, the fact that it is not perWhereas 17 /} egovo-la simply means the not being able mitted. M-q however may be as an abstract conception, non licere.
the expression
said to be the usual

^j^S^^mUm with Substantives.

35

THE NEGATIVES.
Ou

282.

AND

/XT]

WITH PARTICIPLES.
Mr)
used

Ov.

Ov

is

used when the Parstates

is

when

the

An-

ticiple

a
is

fact

the Participle
Causal.

often

tecedent to the Participle is indefinite, so that

the Participle
tional.

is

Condi-

ov irioTevwv.
Since (as, when, etc.) he does

fJbtj

TTio-Tevcov.
believe.

If he does not

not

believe.

aicrxyvo/icu ov troiwv ravra.

aiaj^vvofiai,

fiT)

irouov rav-

I am ashamed I do not do

because (that)
this.

ra.

am ashamed
do
this.

if I do not

8rj\wo-(o 011 7rapayevofj,evo<;.

Antiph.

/ will
ko.v

prove that

I was

not

present.
<3<f>\e

fj,Ta\a/3(bv

xiAias Spa.'XjjLa's ov to Tre/nrrov pepos

ovk av Svvaio,
evhai/iovelv.

fir)

Ka/^mv,

EUK.
be

7(01/ xp-fjrfxov.

Plat. Apol. xxv.

Thou amidst not

happy,
toil.

He

would even have been conto pay a thousand drachmae, because he had not obtained a fifth of the votes.

unless thou shouldst

demned

ovk

evrv)(ovcro.i

Sd^er'

o^x'

8voTu\tiv.

Eur. Bacch. 1263. Although not fortunate, ye shall seem not to be unfortunate. Cf. 270, vovv ovk e'x(ov (void
as he
is

of sense).
Digitized

by Microsoft

01

AND

Uf,

WITH THE

INFINITIVE.

351

more usual with the Participle than pj appears to be used when the construction of the Sentence demands /*ij (e.g. when an Imperative or a Conditional particle precedes), though even then (is oi may be
Note, ws (&o-!rep) oi is
ju.17.

<is

<is

used

when a

plain statement of fact

is

intended.

i6opv/3eire ws ov iroi-qo-oVTis
&crircp otj).

rawa.

LYS. 12. 73
iv. 4.

(cf.

27. 16,

Cf.

Thuc.
(is prj

For
(is

6.

iv.

vi.

82. 2,

Xen. An.

15.

e/tov
C/r.

jUijSejrore
i.

d/*eA?jcrovTOS,

oiitws

)(

tijv

yvd/J.tjv,

Xen.

ct<ieTe /ie rj /iij dc^tere (is e/iov ovk civ Tronjcroi'Tos aAAa. But, fipaSew (3ovX.eveo-6e Plat. Apol. xvii. 30 B ; Thuc. i. 78. 1.
,

11.

us ov us

Ttepl f$pa)(e<tiv.
pvq,

with the Participle,

e.g.

teristics,

SCSao-Ke

p.'

(is

p.rj

may denote several characdSora, as one who knows not,

Soph. 0.

G.

1154.

283.

Ov

AND

fiT)

WITH THE

INFINITIVE.
M77.

Oi.
Mrj
is

the regular Negative with the Infinitive.

is

"When ov

found with an

Infinitive, it is chiefly in

Indirect Statements after verbs of Saying

and Thinking,

ov being the proper construction in Oratio Obliqua.

An
tyrj

infinitive

used as a Substantive with or without

fir}.

the Article regularly takes

ovk eicfirjvM
stated

fie etc

tov

alo-xpov

fir)

aXrjdeveiv.
to

ifKoiov.

Antiph.
that

It

is

wrong not

speak the

He

did not
e<pv

truth.

leave the

ship

= ovk

eK@rjvat.

e\eyov ovk eivat avTovofioi.

%pr)

fir]

Kara<ppovelv

tov

Thuc.
They were saying that they
were not independent.
Digitized

wXtjAows.

Isaeus.

We

should not despise the

multitude.
by Microsoft

352

THE NEGATIVES.
ovk dv hvvaadcu
to
fir) 8iicaia><;

evo'fucrev

airdKecrai.

fieveiv.

Xen.

Antiph.

He

thought that they would

An

unjust sentence of death.

not remain.
o/McofioKev

ov yapieiaQai.
o.

Plat. Apol. xxiv. 35

A
of

striking instance; verbs

swearing

usually

are

followed by
below.

pJ),

see note 4

For other instances,

Soph. Ant. 378, 755
Apol. xvii. 29
B.
;

of.

Plat.

Note 1. When ov is exceptionally used with the Infinitive, generally due either to the order of or emphasis on a word positive negation Sometimes ou is privative. or sentence.
it is

is

always made.
ovSevos a/iapreiv

SsWds
06

lo-rtv.

ANTIPH.
to

iv.

Tetr. T.

a. 6.

There

is

nothing which he deserves

miss.

= ovSiv
dAoi
Iva)

k<TTiv

ajj.apTe.iv.

Sv

o/ittj/JOKare -Kapaj3y)vai ovEkv.

Xen.
I leg you
to violate
d<,a>.

Hell.

ii.

4. 48.

no single point of

yow

oath.

= ovk
Observe that ov

is

used although a Petition strictly requires

/4
Cf.

Cf.

Thuc.

i.

39. 2.
4'^>w.

Soph. Phil. 88, ?<w ov8ev=ovi<

KtXevei ovk Iv ry eKKXrjaia

yiyvto-dai.

dW
204.

ev tu)

Oedrpw
be

-rijv

dvdp/jrjcm

AESCH.

3.

(The law) requires the proclamation Assembly, but in the Theatre.

to

made, not in

the

Emphasis on the parenthesis.

Digitized

by Microsoft

Oi

AND

Mri

WITH THE

INFINITIVE.
;

353

Sokeis

x al PW etv V vk
to rejoice,

airo6aveur0ai

ANDOK.
?

i.

101.

Do

you expect

or escape death

ovk d.Tro6avei<r6ai

is

perhaps privative.

Note 2. xprj (xpr\v, e\PV v ) are followed by both pj and ov with the Infinitive. xPU ^ may be considered to stand for
ov XPV-

Soph. Phil. 1363, xprjv

/i^re fioXetv, k.t.A,

/-

And. 607, XPV V PV K ", "

EUE. Androm. 100, \P1 8' oviror' enrov, Sipp. 507, XPV V v ~' /*<"pTavetv.
Jferf.

so 214.

294,

x/iij 8' ovttot'

eKSiSdu-Keardai.

Note 3. Mij is not seldom found with the Infinitive in an In some, but not all such instances, Indirect Statement. the Statement is general, and bears the character of a
Conception.
a/iTiKpivaro

pjSevos
i.

rjTTiav elvai.

XEN.

Hell.

ii.

3.

11.

Be

replied that he

was

inferior to none ;

cf. iii.

2.

31

iv.

4.

Mem.

2. 39.
/if)

ot fiavreis

Aiyovrai eavrois
said not
to

irpoopav to hriov.

Xen. Symp.
Prophets
aire

iv. 5.

foresee the futwe for themselves.

This

is

not, however, the strict Attic use,

often exceptional.

See Xen.

Mem.

i.

2.

and Xenophon is Ov and pj 39.

occur in co-ordinate clauses in Soph. Phil. 1058; Plat. Prot.

319

b.

Note

4.

Many Verbs which imply

pj with the
6p.o\oya>,

an
xlii.

effort of

thought or
f-

will prefer

Infinitive.

Such are Verbs of making

98 D, o-wyx^P"'
:

an admission,
conviction,

Plat. Phaed.
i.

xxvii.

1047, 1281 (also an Epic usage), epai=6p.oviJ,ai, Xen. Cyr. vii 1. 18; (For other constructions of kyyvwp.a.1, Plat. Pntf. 336 D.
:

ir'eKzwpai, Plat. 9. 8 wumwo, Xen. An. 37 A of witnessing, swearing, 6'pvp, Ae. Fsj.
;

^poZ.

6/M/xyu, see Lexicon.)

Infinitive in

Verbs of Perception, kir'una.p,ai, are found with Soph. Eb$9&dW$'crosoft

z

p.rj

and the

354

THE NEGATIVES.

284 DIRECT
Ov.

AND INDIRECT STATEMENT.

M77'.

The
takes ov.

Direct

Statement

ovk

efzefirjv eic

rov ifkobov.

Antiph.

I did
oTi or

not leave the ship.

Indirect Statement with

&>?

takes

ov.

For the Indirect State-

ment
supra.
/

in the Infinitive,

cf.

irape^ofiai fiaprvpas
egefirjv e

&)?

ovk

rov ifKotov.

Antiph.

I produce witnesses (to prove) that I did not leave the

ship
elirev

= ovk
he

efe'/S^.

on

ovSev avra. fieXoi

rov 0opvj3ov.

Lys.

He

did not care about the disturbances

ovSev
fioi fxekei.

said

285.

INDIRECT STATEMENT WITH THE PARTICIPLE.

ttoXiv ov
iro-

rjyyeiXe ttjv

XiopKi)8e2o-av.

Xen.

Note. But Verbs of Perception sometimes take /?. See

He

reported that the city

had

gJ

not been besieged.

l^

06

Uecta

ovk

eiroXiopKridr).
Digitized

similarly after Tro. 970.

sLvv^, EvV.

^" %'

by Microsoft

DIRECT QUESTIONS.
eyvoaaav ov irpayQ&laav
^vfifia^iav.
ttjv

355

Thuo.

They discovered that the alliance

cluded.

had not been conovk eirpa^dTj.

is

Eecta

Ov

in both cases

regular,

going with an Oblique

Statement.

286.

DIRECT QUESTIONS.
?).

Ov

expects the answer " yes " (nonne

Mr\ expects
associated
ficov (i.e.

the answer

"no" (num?).
:

They
;

are often
/u/jj

with other particles

/irj

ap ov
fj,r] ;

apa

;
rj

ovkow ;
ov
;

ovv)

fiwv ov
tcaK&i;

/j,a>v

fia>v
fuf\

ovv

rj

/mj

Tavr ovvl
ica~kS>s.

\eyerai

aoi ZoKOVfiev ryhe \eiQdrjvai /Maxy

;

Plat.
rightly

AESCH.
in-

Is

not

this

said?

Think' st

thou

we. were,

Yes, rightly.
rf>s 97

ov

Do

7^'

assent, or i/ou 9 '

.

Plat. iravv 76. j you .. * not do J

j.

ferior in this fight ? Note, p} in an oblique question, like

",.',

num

in Latin, loses
,.
'

(assent)

i.e.

Yes or no

this force of expecting a ne-

.Certainly (I do assent).

gative answer go Soph. 1253, Eur. Herac. 482.

Ant

Ov

interrogative with a

Future Indicative is equivalent to an Imperative.

ovk a%e#'
<o?

ra^io-ra

Soph. Ant. 885.

Will you not lead her

away

instantly?

(i.e.

lead her

away).

Followed by an imperative
Kal a<beT.
Digitized

by Microsoft

; ;

356

THE NEGATIVES.
Srjr

ovkovv KaOeSei

evOaSi,

jdarpcov
Sit ye
Cf.

Ar. Ran. 200.

down

there,

Paunch.

Soph. Ant. 244, Ai. 593,

Phil. 975, 0. C. 834.

Note. Similarly ovk av with

optative,

ovk

av

rf>p<ureias

which is a gentle 4>pdaov, Soph. Phil 122. But ov in combination with ttov and 817
(ov
srou
;

ov ti ttov
;)

ov

Sij

ov 8^ 7tou
not so ?

means

surely
Phil.

it is
;

Cf. Soph. Ar. Ran. 522, 526;

tion here is really words " surely not

the quesoutside the

eh ?"

900

287.

DELIBERATIVE' QUESTIONS.
Mr)
is

used in Delibera-

tive Questions.
fir)

(nrotepivcofiai,
to

PLAT.
?

Am I not
SpeaJe,
Cf.

answer
77 firj ;

Xeyere, eurio)

PLAT
or no ?
/at, ;

must

I enter

SOPH. Ai. 668,

288.
(a.)

INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
is ov.

Indirect Single Ques-

tion.

The Negative

rjpa>Tr)o~a,

Sz rt ovk k\6oi.

I asked him why

come.

he did not
Digitized

by Microsoft

INDIRECT PETITION
npcoTayopa? epmra
aio-yyvopai.
ec

357

ovk

PLAT.

Protagoras asks
not ashamed.

me

if

I am

Obs. el here is interrogative,

not conditional.

(6.)

In Indirect Double Questions the usage

p,rj.
r\

varies, but ov
yj\.

is

commoner than

There
ov.

is

generally a reason for

crKoirwixev, ei irpeirei

6 veos

ov%

oto? re Kpwe.iv o
pir\.

PLAT.
Let us consider whether
it is

T4 re virovoia teat b

Plat.

becoming or not.
v

child is incapable of de-

>

eir

evoov eir ovk evoov.

tj

>

oVtu? *&?s w s;' '

ddin9 what is and what iv** not.

alle9 ry

Soph.

That thou may'st

within.
Note.

see

Whether he be within or not

Ov

rather than

/mj

original direct double question.

seems to represent simply the Mr} seems to import a doubt

into the question, or to represent it as a conception. Professor Jebb, in a note to Soph. Ai. 6, and Antiphon (Attic Orators, Thus, he p. 161), draws a subtle distinction in every case.

says crKoirwfiev <l TTparei r) p.r] means, let us consider the question of abstract fitness : but o-KowZfiev el irpetrei r) ov ; let us see whether the matter in hand is fit or no. In this passage of Antiphon, el rj p,r) el r) oi occur in Similarly in Isaetjs, viii. 9, we have, in sequent clauses. kcu el r] p.f). koX el rj ov three sequent clauses, efoe efoe p,f]

289.

INDIRECT PETITION.
firj

is

always used wheis

ther the Petition

or Indirect.
Digitized

Direct

by

Micrd^76 * ^ KlJ*V*'

358

THE NEGATIVES.
a.
p,r)

Direct.
fie

dgoovre

ravra hpav-

Do

not require
o.

me

to

do

this.

Indirect.
fir)

eXeyov avrois

aSiieeiv.

Thuo.

They were
iKSTevov

telling

them not

to

do wrong.
fir)

aTpef3\a)0rjvao.

ANDOK.
They were hegging not
tortured.
Note. For exceptions see under ov and fir) with Infinitive. See also oVus fir) with Future Indicative (Index).
to he

29O.

CONDITIONAL.
Ov.
Myj.
or Principal
ov.

The Apodosis

The Protasis

or Subordinfvrj.

Sentence takes

ate Sentence takes

For Examples see Conditional Sentences.

Note
in
1.

Where

ov

is

found

a Protasis it is joined privatively to some special word. (Cf. supra, p. 347.)

Note

2. d interrogative, not conditional, takes ov not fir).

3.

Note

When ei is used like

verbs
of

on
eo-rt,

after

emotion
Setvov

(davfiafo,

KwroiKTelpu),
like), ov,

and the

not

fir),

follows, for

that a

either say statement of fact is

Digitized

we may

by Microsoft

CONCESSIVE, CAUSAL.
made, or that
causal. Cf.
el is virtually Isoc. 11 d. pfj Qavftdarys el ov Trpeirei, DEM. 197 D. ovk al(r\pbv el ov

359

Note
ov vvv
is

4. Also sometimes et found when a direct is

quoted, el, (is ov irapeo-Kevao-aTO, Dem. 1266. 2, so virtually Eur. Ion, 347.
<jyqo-ei,

statement

291.
Ov.
Kaiirep
(jcai,

CONCESSIVE.
M17.
tcai

ravra,

Ei, eav

(?)v,
fir\,

av), conces-

kuI

toi),

with a Parti-

sive, take

being truly

ciple take ov.

Conditional.
Seivoi fie/x-

Kanrep ovres ov

vrjcrOat, fwqfJLOvevere.

Dem.
Though you are not
ber.
,

quick, at

remembering, you rememCf.

Soph. Phil. 377

Era.

Ale.

352= even

being.

292.

CAUSAL.
Ov.
M17.
is
011.

The regular Negative

eireitiri

ovk

eSuvavro Xap-

fiaveuv to
77877

ywpiov
were

airievai,

Note. See Introduction on use of P7 in Causal Sentences in late Greek.

eireyeipovv.

XEN.
unable
they
to

Since they
take

the fort

now

were trying

to depart.
iv. 11. 2. Digitized

SoStoT*, Thuc.

by Microsoft

3<$o

THE NEGATIVES. CONSECUTIVE AND RESTRICTIVE.

Oi.
M77.
&o-re

293.

mare with the Indicative

takes ov.
obra) SiaKeifieda

with the Infinitive

fir).

takes

ware ovBev DEM. Trpafjai BvvafieOa. We are in such a mood that we are unable to do anything.

ovrca aXoyicrTos ei/M ware

fir/

SvvaaOai 'Koyl^eadat. Plat.

So unreflecting am,
cannot
reflect.

I that I
/j,7jKeri

acjiie/Mev <re e<p

re

<f>i\oaocpeov.

Plat.
under-

We set you free on the

standing
that

you
1.

no

longer pursue, philosophy.

Cf.

Thuc.

i.

103.

(Fut.

Indie.)
Note,

ov

is

found with an

For the rule of

see p. 274.

i<p'

S> re,

Infinitive.

SeiV kwqirziXti TeAetv Sxtt' oiVe vvktos vttvov oiV e rjfiepas

e/ie

(TTeya^eiv rjSvv.

Soph.
She threatened
to fulfil

El. 782.

a dread
shroud

revenge, so that, nor day, nor

night, did sweet sleep

me.
Of.

Eur. Eel. 107, Phoen. 1357, Thtjc. v. 40. 2, viii. 70. 6, Plat. Apol. xiv. 26 d.

to

Note. It is very important distinguish between the

regular and the exceptional use of wore ov with the InfiniThe regular use (e.g. tive. Plat. Apol. xiv.) is due to Oratio Obliqua. The example in Soph. El. 782 is excepDigitized

by Microsoft

TEMPORAL, LOCAL, AND FINAL SENTENCES.

tional.

361

But

in all cases
fact.

we
is

may perhaps
a negation of

say that there

294.

TEMPORAL AND LOCAL SENTENCES.

Ov.
M17.

When the Time or Place is

definite ov is used.

When
is
(e.g.

the

Time
firj

or Place
is

indefinite

used
etc.,
:

with

brav,

oirorav,

eiretBav,

hirov av,

with
o avr/p ovk etyaivero

Subjunctive

or

ore, etc.,
eireiori

with Optative).
fir)

ovkovv, brav e
ireiravcrofiai.

adevw,
strength,

wvofjbt}v ifKemv.

Antiph.

SOPH.

When the man was not forthcoming

voyage.

So,

when I have no
vnll give o'er,

I went on my

(orav

denotes

Indefinite

Futurity.)

6W? fiev ob
etvov

av/jt.fia^oi

ovk

07TOT6

fjurj

(palev

cnrcvyovTes

ottol

aTroaralev

aTTe/CTelvav.

THUC.

e/CpVTTTOV Tr)v 7T/30? ty-ia?

lyQpav.

Xen.
allies

Hell.

Whenever they said "no," they led them off and executed them.
Obs.

So long as the

did not
their

know what
to,

side to revolt

That
to

ottot(.

changes ov

they

concealed

<j)y]/ju

ix/q <f>T)/JU.

dislike to you.

295.

FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.

(a.)
(6.)

Final Sentences.
07T&)5

with Future

Indicative,
(c.)

Verbs of Fearing.
these Constructions
is

With
by MidMbft

the regular Construction

Digitized

362

THE NEGATIVES.
Ov and
Ov.
Eelative

296.
The

M17 with Relatives.

M77.

takes

ov
is

when
is

the Antecedent
so
of.

definite,

that a fact

The Eelative takes fj\ when the Antecedent is The use of indefinite.
/wj

spoken

same
tyyrovaa <f>apfia% evpov ov%

with Eelatives is the as its use with el.

010a ouoe ocofiai ei-

/j,rj

a a

'/3ov\ofi7)v.
'

EtJK.

Se'vai.

Plat.

(3ov\6/j,t)v, i.e.

efiov-

Whatever I know not

not think that

Xofvqv.

I I know.

do

In seeking drugs I found not what I sought. Cf. Xen. An. ii. 2. 3.
Note.
ovSets

Sorts

ov,

ovk

eWtv octtis ov take oij. Thuc iii. 39; vii. 87; Hdt. v. 97. Plat. Prot. 323 c. In Thuc. iii. 81, ol Si 7ToWol TOV ll<eT(l>V CHTOl OVK
the actual fact is perhaps emphasised. With a negative preceding toioCtos, ov always follows (Madvig, 203, note)
kiruo-6i)o-a.v,

61 efie

fir)

taaat.

Plat.

Any
octtk

(all,

such as) do not

know me.
fir]

avrapK7]<;

eo~TU>

ovtos ^a\67T09
rl.

<{>t\o<;
ii.

ea-

Xen. Mem.

6. 2.

Whoever is not self-sufficient is a dangerous friend.

Cf.

vojiov Tidefiev, oiktjo-cv /cat ralAieiov

jirjSevl

Soph.

etVcu

fj.7]8ev

tolovtov, ets o ov :ras fiovAo/ievos

eto"eto"tv.
iii.

Aesch. Eum. 618, 661, 0. T. 281 (with Subjunctive and Opta-

tive with av).

Plat. Bep.

416

D.

treasury which not every one

who

wishes shall enter.

This indefinite or generic use of pj shades off into a Consecutive or Final use.
if'tj^lo-ao'de

Cf. S. Matt. vii. 21,

tlcreX.vcreTai.

ov

ttoIs

Totavra !

8>v

art

Seirdre vpZv /TayiteA.7Jo-a.

ANDOK
will never repent
Digitized
of.

3.

41.

Pass such a sentence that you by Microsoft

Ol

AND

Mi)

WITH RELA TIVES.

evravOa
evda p/q

363

pkWovo-i yap
Tre/i^eiv

1'

irod'

fiXlov ^>kyyo<s irpocroxj/ei.

Soph. El. 380. They are pm-posmg to send thee where thou never more shalt
see the glory of the sun.

Cf.

Soph. Ai.

359,

470;

Phil. 408, 588.

Cf. the Restrictive 00-ov p.%

ocra
p/fj,

ku.0' ocrov prj,

on

pvq.

ov and
Sense.
that
oil

/*?j

are both used with the Relative in a Causal

to
is

The analogy of Causal Sentences seems must be the normal construction; prr\
is

show
used

where perhaps the fact

el

delicately put, as for instance

is

put for
its

on

after 6avp,da).

This use of pj\ arises

from

generic use.
bs

Oavjxao-Tov iroiels
BtSms-

ovBev

raXai-rrmpos

Speovos

el

tk av 76 m pyryre
pvryre

av6eot

Xen. Mem. ii. 7. 13. You are acting strangely in

giving nothing.

irarpwoi
k.t.X.'

eto-t

bepa

Plat. Euth. 302.

You

are

a miserable

sort

So Ae. Nub. 692 (fins ov Med. EuE. o-rpaTeverat),

589.

of being since you have neither national gods nor

sacrifices.
7T<?

av opdais

e/xou
<p

kclts-

yiyvwcr/ceTe,

to irapa-

irav 777309 tovtovl p,7]$ev

avfiftokcuov eariv

Dem. Apat.

903. 22.

How

could you have rightly

condemned
with
Digitized

me,

since

I
all

have no contract at
this

by MicrS&ftkP-

man ? Ba^ 1459

"

.364

THE NEGATIVES.
M77
is

297.

used

in

Expressions of a Wish.
MrjKen
%<pV v 6 7 <n -

Ak. Nub. 1255.

May I no
fir)

longer live

ttot oxpeXov ~Knreiv

TT)V 3/CVpOV.

Soph. Phil. 969.

Would I

ne'er

had
fi-q

left

My

Scyros.

=I
fir)

ought never,
after Set.

like

kyta

dpdcrvs ovt' elfu

/j.rJTe

ye-

voLfiTjV.

DEM.
so.

8.

68.

I am
iyo>

neither bold nor might

become

S' ojtcos &v fir) Xeyeis 6pdu>s T&8e ovt' av huvaljxrjv p.rjT

eirKTTai/xijv

Xeyeiv.

SOPH.
thou
to say.

Ant. 685.

But

that

these

words
learn

speakest are not right

I neither
an Apois reis

could nor

may I

ovt av
dosis,

SvvaifjLijv is

and therefore ov
:

quired

/irjT

iirio-Taifi,rjv

wish ; the

/mj

with

era-cos is

far

more
it is

difficult to explain, for

an Indirect Statement.
ottus
/x^

But observe that

depends on a verb
with
Infin.).

of percep[irj

tion, iirio-Tafiai (see note

4 Also 6Vws

/?

expresses doubt, and is much less positive than 6Vt ov. Moreover the wish /j.t)8' rrTaifi,r)v

may throw

its
line.

shadow

over the previous

Digitized

by Microsoft


MVi

'

AND

Mij oi

WITH THE

INFINITIVE.

36S

298.

M17 and

firj

ov with the Infinitive.

A. After
ing,
fir)

a Principal Sentence containing Verbs and

expressions of denying, hindering, forbidding, and avoidis

used with the Infinitive where in English

we

use no negative.

SOPH. <pri<; 17 tcarapvel fir) SeSpa/cevat, raSe Dost own or dost deny that thou hast done this ?
;

fjvaVTbw6r)v [W]8ev irpaTreiv irapa tow; vo/aovs.

Plat.

/ opposed

your doing anything contrary

to the laws.

airayopevm fit] woieiv eicieXrjcnav. AKISTOPH. I forbid your calling an assembly.

rpcitnovv prj etv<u
opoiovs.

tow
iv.

to,

okXo. ira.pab'ovTa.s tois TtOveSo-iv

their

Thuo.

40.

They did not

were

believe that those

like those

who had given up who had fallen.

arms

Ovryrov's y' hraixra prj irpo&ipKeadcu popov.

AESCH. P. Ay, I let mortals from foreseeing

Note
1.
:

V. 248.

their

doom.

Such verbs are

dvTiXeyai,

x<o

(and compounds),

"\

dpvovpai (and compounds),

a/t^Kr/J^TM,
atruTTio,
\
J

deny.

eipyw (and compounds),

ipTroSiov elvai,
KtoXvio,

'

hinder.

) \ forlidt
J

Aroyo/Kfa,
aireiirov,

O7ri\op.ai,

cvXa/3ovpai,
peXXo),
(jxvyto,
(jyvXacro-o/iai.

beware

of,

hesitate,

So

also

diroX.vop.ai,
viii.

ThUC.
;
...

i.

128;

drroKpvirropai,

ii.

dTrofrrpecfM),
'

108

vTreKTpamo-dai,,

SOPH.

0.

C.

53; 565 ;

(bvXdo-o-m, 0. C. 667._. "

Digitized

..... n~ by Microsoft

366

THE NEGATIVES.
Note
2.

M17,

however, as in the English idiom,

is

not seldom

omitted.

EUR. ov Oaveiv ep/Ducrapjv. Whom I from death delivered. Some

Of.

PLAT. rovro Tis etpyei Spav okvos. scruple prevents me from doing
Soph.
3.

this.

0. T.

129

Thuc.

i.

62

Plat. Phaed. 108

e.

Note

Other constructions are (1) wsre /*i) with the Infinitive, (2) to /ifj with the Infinitive, (3) toC or rov prj with the
Infinitive.
(1.)

dyyeXXoyv

on

ras vaCs

airoo-Tpetf'eie fixne

/x,rj

k\8elv.

Thuc. viii. 108. 1. Announcing that he had diverted the ships from coming. KaKovpyeiv. THUC. iii. 1. (2.) eTpyov to They prevented them from inflicting damage. Soph. Antig. 263. Of. Aesch. Eum, 691
//.i) ;

(3.)

iKcoAixre

Se

tov Koueiv eirioVTas. XEN. An. i. kept them from advancing and turning.
pjr)

6. 2.

e tov
Of.

KaraSvvai.

XEN. An.
;

iii.

5. 11.

It will keep

them from sinking.

49,
iii.

Thuc.

i.

76,

ii.

75

Xen.

Cyr.

ii.

iv.

23

or quasi-Negative,

B. But when the Verbs themselves take a Negative firj ov and not ^r\ alone is used with
Here
also in

the Infinitive.

English

we

use no negative in the sub-

ordinate sentence.

rlva

olei
;

WTrapvrjcreaBai

fjuq

ovj(i

eirlaTaaOai ra
is

Sucaoa

Plat.

Who

with justice
ov \t/co
fii)

do you think will deny that he ? ( no one will deny).

acquainted

ov irao-i irpocfxovelv.
to

SOPH.

1 will not cease

publish unto

all.

Digitized

by Microsoft

Mi)

AND

Ml, oi

WITH THE

INFINITIVE.
Xen.
to

367

ti efvrroStov

firj

ov%i airodavelv ;

What
(

is there to

hinder us from being put no hindrance).

V.

death

Cf. Aesch. P. Xen. Syrup, iii. 3

627
/*?)

('
ov).

/^Uets;); Soph. Ai. 540, 728;

(to

C. Also
ov

when

the Principal Sentence

is

negative, /t^

and the Infinitive is used after expressions denoting what is impossible, wrong, repugnant, and the like. Here
in English

we

use a Negative.

It

aBvvara -qv [ir) ov fieyaXa flXaTrreiv. ThuC. was impossible not to inflict great harm.
ov&eis
fi

av

Treiaeiev to

fir\

ovtc e\9elv.

AEISTOPH.

No

one shall persuade

me

not to go.
/j,ij

vxko-ypv ^qrrj<reiv
8iK<uoo-vvfl.

(us ovx oo-iov croi ov Plat. Rep. 427, e.

ov Barqdtiv
it

You
Cf.

'promised to search, on the ground that

to assist justice.

would

be

impious for you not

Plat. Symp. 218 c (avo^rov

^rj

o-i).

I).

Sometimes
is

//.->)

Sentence which

ov and the Infinitive follows a Principal not Negative in form.

pit]

aXo-^pov ecrn croqbtav

It is

ov^' iravTOiv KparurTOv

<j>avai.

Plat. Prot. 352

immoral not
to

d.

assert that

wisdom

is

the highest of all

In these cases the aurxpov is practically condemning, blaming, dissuading from a course.
<5o-T ttSxtiv

alo-xyvt]v eTvai

firj

o-vcnrov8a.eiv.

Xen. An.
So that
all

ii.

3.

11.

were ashamed not

to co-operate heartily.

Compare these two examples with Xen. Cyr. vii. 7. 16, p) <pi\elv rj t6v dSeA^oi/ where a quasi-Negative Principal Sentence is followed by i*rj only.
Tiva aio-x^ov
;

See Herod,

i.

187, Seu/oV /* o-i ko.Be.lv. Digitized by Microsoft

368

THE NEGATIVES.
Mr) ov with the Participle.
is

299.
M?) oi

found with the Participle denoting circumstance (conditionally, or restrictive^), after a Principal Sentence expressing M.rj ov

what

is

impossible or repugnant

is practically"
Zcttl <f>ikov

equal to
t<j>

unless. prf, except,

ovk dp'

<pt\ovvTi, ovSev, pr/

ovk dvTi<pi\ovv

Plat.

Iajs.
it

212

D.

No

creature

then

is

a friend

to

a friend, unless

love in

return, (without loving).

^Keis yap ov Ktvq ye, tout' lyo) cra<pios

eoi8a, prj oij^'
Bei/j,'

ipol <pepovo-d ti.

this

SOPH.
well,

0. G. 359.

Thou comest not empty,

I Jcnow full

mine ears. yap av eirjv, TOidvSe prj ov KarOLKTetpoiv eSpav. SOPH. 0. T. 11. hard of heart were I, Compassionating not so sad a session. (Cf. 0. T. 220.) Other instances will be found in Herod, ii. 110, vi 9. and 106. Isocrat. Laud. Eel. 47. So entirely was pr) ov eventually regarded as equivalent to d prj that in Dem. de Fals. Leg. 379. 7, we find it used without a participle expressed a'C t TrdAeis iroWal cu xaXeira). \af3elv pr) ov XP V V Kal noXiopKia, the cities were numerous and
Svo-dXyrjTO'S
:

unless thou bring'st some horror to

difficult to take except

by long waiting

and by

siege (sc. h^<j>8eio-ai).

Variant Constructions of B. C. D.

(pp. 336, 7).

After a Negative Principal Sentence are used sometimes the Infinitive alone ; (2) pr) alone instead of pr) ov with the Infinitive ; (3) to pr) ov ; (4) toij pr) ov.
(1)

(1) TatJTCt ovk i^apvovvrai irpaTreiv. They do not deny that they so act.

AESCHIN.
KioXCcrai.

iii.

250.

#iAunrov TrapeXOeiv ovk r/SvvavTO

They were not able
(2)
to

Dem. de Pac. 62. 10. prevent Philip advancing.

OV 7ToX.VV pe vavo-roXelv raxy.

\p6vov p'
they held

i7reo~xov pr)

SOPH.

Phil. 348.

Not long while

me from

quick setting

sail.

(Cf. Antig. 443.)

Digitized

by Microsoft

Mi,

AND

Mi, oi

WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

/*)

369

(3) ovk ivavTidcroixai to

ov yeyuiveiv nav.

AESCH. P.
Til not refuse
(lit.

V. 786.

oppose thee) to 4eclare the whole.

Xen. Symp.
(4)- tis

iii.

3.

M^Siov

o'ov aireXelcfrdr]

tov

fir)

anoXovdeiv ;

Xen.
W7io 0/ the Medes failed
to

Gyr. v. 1. 25.

follow you

Instances of omission of pj and p) ov are said to be There are however a good many.
1.

rare.

Mr)

Antiph.
70, 0.
v.

21.
2.

omitted after an Affirmative Principal Sentence, and 7. Thuo. iii. 39. 3. Soph. Ai. Eurip. Or. 263. Arist. Aeh. 127. Xen. Hell. T. 129. Plat. Apol. xix. 31 d, xxxi. 39 e.
Tetr. b. b. 4.
/tij

Mr) for

ou

after
3.

Antiph. Tetr. b. b. Isoce. Laud. Hel. 47.

a Negative Principal Sentence, Thuc. iii. 39. Soph. Phil. 34-9. (Infin. alone after a Negative Sentence.)

300.

M77 and

ju,^

ov with the Subjunctive.

sion, suspicion,

Mt; with the Subjunctive expresses anxiety, apprehensurmise, and so may often be translated
tovto
a\r)6e<;

perhaps.
1X7)
f/.

Perhaps

this is true.
rj

pi) ceypoiKOTepov

to a\r]de<s enrelv.

PLAT.

Perhaps

it is

somewhat blunt

to tell the truth.

The addition of ov gives the opposite or negative meaning

fjuj

ov tovto aXr/6e<;

rj.

Perhaps

this is not true.

aX\d

fir)

oi tovt y -xaKeiTov, OdvaTov

eK<j>vye2v.

Plat. Apol.
It looks as if this were not the real difficulty escape death.
Cf. Grit. ix.

to

48 a.

Digitized

Phaed.xi 67 B. by Microsoft 2 A

: :

370

THE NEGATIVES.
1.

Note

Mi} ov

is

found graphically with the Indicative in

wroAa/j/?avas

questions.

aAA' apa

pfj ov)^

',

PLAT. Prot. 312 A.

2

But perhaps then you do

not suppose

Note 2. 6Vu>s /j, oVws /iij o-u is similarly used with the Subjunctive and Indicative (Pres. and Future), Plat. Crat. 430 D, Meno 77 A, Phaedo 77 B; Biddell's Digest, p. 140.

Note 3. The same constructions of p.rj and /xi) ov occur even more commonly after a Principal Verb like <ppdop,<u, opZ,
(TKoiru), a.6pu>,

kwoov/xai, alo-^vvop-ai, okvw, klvSvvos

Ictti, <po(3ov-

pai, etc.
(a.)

With Subjunctive
<j>povTi!(<o p.r)

KpoTLo-Tov

p.01 a-iyav.
it is

I am

considering whether

not best for

Xen. Mem. me to be

iv. 2. 39.
silent.

Tavra aTTKTTcav

Trapeyei. irepl rijs

foxV^ f'V ov8ap.ov kri y. Plat. Phaed. xiv. 70 a.

it

This causes a doubt about the soul that possibly

no longer

(b.)
a.

With

Indicative
:

Present Indicative
opw/jLev pvq

Cf.

PLAT. Lack. 196. Soph. Ant. 1253; Eur. Tro. 178, Phoen. 92 (quoted p. 267).
Imperfect Indicative
opa
p,rj
:

NiKias oieraC ti Acyeiv.

b.

ira'iljtiv

4'Aeyev.

PLAT. Theaet. 145.

e.

Future Indicative
opa
pr/ Serjo-ei.
p.7]

Xen.

Cyr.

iii.

1.

27.

Cf.
d.

PLAT. Phileb. 13. A. SeSotxa cotcus p.fj rev^opat. ARIST. Eq. 112. Plat. Crat. 393 c, Rep. 451 A.
(pofiovpai
evprjo-opev.

Perfect Indicative
<j>o/3ovp.eda pvq ap,<f>oTeptov fipn.pTqKap.tv.

ThUC.

iii 53.

e.

Aorist Indicative
Sei'Sa) prj

TrdvTa vrjpepTea
Digitized

tTirev.

HOM.

Od.

V.

300.

by Microsoft

Oi rf

WITH SUBJUNCTIVE,

ETC.

371

301.

Ov fxr, WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE

INDICATIVE.

Ov fir] with the Subjunctive (generally the Aorist, but sometimes the Present) expresses an emphatic nega"A.
tive future statement.

ov

firj

iravatofiai. (j>i\.ocro^>a>v.

PLAT. Apol.

xvii.

will never give

<r

up philosophy.
fit)

ovrob

A%ai,(ov, olBa,

Tt? vj3pi<rr).

Soph. Ai. 560.

None of
thee.

the Achaeans,

I know

it,

shall ever insult

B. Ou,
meaning.

fir]

with the Future Indicative has the same

aXk

eiffi8

ov

(7oi /U9j fiedetyofiai rrore.

Soph. El. 1052.

Enter within.
elTrev otu
r)

ne'er will follow thee.

fir)

^irapTr) ovBev

kcikiov oacieuTai

avTOV

airo6av6vT0<;.

He

Xen. Hell. i. 6. 32. said that Sparta would be governed not one whit

the worse after his death.

Observe that the

Ohliqua.

example

is

in the Graphic Oratio

C.

1.

Ov

fjf Interrogative

with the Future Indicative

(second person singular) expresses a strong prohibition.

7roto?

Zevs

ov

fir)

\riprjaeK

ovB' earo Zevs.

Aeist.- Nub. 367.

Zeus quotha

don't talk twaddle.

fir)

There's no Zeus.

dvyarep, oi

fivdov

e 7roXXou? epeis ; Eue. Supp. 1066.

Daughter,

tell

miitt^tailMiwmoffipthe crowd.

372

THE NEGATIVES.
2.

Ov

fir\

with the Future Indicative (second person)

is

in the

first

clause

ing

(a.)

an affirmative command

followed by a second clause express(b.) a negative command

or prohibition.
(a.)

ov

fii]

BiaTptyjreL<;,

aXXa jewel

rrj<;

6vpwi

Abist. Ran. 462.

Don't shilly-shally, but taste the door.
(b.)

ov pr)

7T/30<70tcre(.9

yelpa,

firjS

ayfrei ireifKcav

Eur. Hipp. 606.

Bring not thy hand near, and touch not
3.

my

robes.

Ov with

the Future Indicative (second person), deis

noting an affirmative .command,

Indicative

followed by a Future

(with

/cat

fxr],

nrfe)

denoting a negative

command
Kai

or prohibition.
ovyj, trvyickritreu} aro/ia,
fXT) fieOrjO'ei,'}

avdii ato-yicnow; \oyov<>

Set a seal

Euk. Hipp. 499.

upon thy

lips,

and

let

not fall again most shameful words.

firjhe

ov acy ave^ei,

SeiXiav apels

SOPH. Ai. 75.

(Lit. wilt

Keep

silence,

and awake
T)

not cowardice.

thou

not silently endure

Some make
(nonne
?),

these two separate questions, one with oil the other with pr] (num ?), wilt thou not endure silently ?

and

wilt thou play the

coward

302.

Further Examples of ov
ixrj

^17.

A.

ov

with Subjunctive.
SvvrjraL f3ao-i\.vs
rjjj.a.'s

oukti

fir)

KaTaAa/?av.

Xen. An.
There
Obs.
is

ii.

2.

12.
us.

no longer any likelihood of the King overtaking

is

The Present Subjunctive

Digitized

here used.

So

also in

by Microsoft

FURTHER EXAMPLES OF

Oi ^.

373

otds re $s) Plat. Rep. 341 c. (ov and in Soph. (irevyv>vra.i, one MS. reads kirev^iovrai).
:

0. C. 1023,

to jxeyio-rov kolkov Ikiov

oijSets

fiTj

5tot \df3y.

Plat.
ov
ere Kpvi//(a

Zegr.

731
evil.

c.

^7b one is ever likely voluntarily to choose the greatest

fi/fi

Trpbs ovriva ftov\op,a.L atpweo'dai.

will not conceal

Xen. Cyr. vii. 3. 13. from you whom I wish to march against.
G.

See further Soph. 0. 67

;

Xen.
oi3
/jt)

Hell. iv.

2.

408, 450, 649, 1024, 1702; Thug. v. Plat. Rep. 499 b ; Ae. Av. 461.
airep ot Tpvyo8a.ijji.oves ovroi,

(TKUi^s,

jUijSe rrcurycnjs

dXX' cvcprjpei. ARIST. JTm6. 299. Dom'i you flout, and don't behave like your poor comedy hacks, but, hold your peace.
o-K<ofys of the mss. to o-Ktnipei, Fut. Indie. Similarly in Nub. 505, ov fir) XaXija^ has been changed See Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, pp. 186, 187. to AaA/170-eis. If o-K^tpy; is right, this is you won't jest, a possible way of saying dont jest : if o-K<oxpei, irotijo-ess, the construction is interrogative' like that of C. 1 above, p. 371.

Elmsley changes

Mid.

B.

ov

firj

with Future Indicative.

!yo> Trepio\pop,a.i direXOovra.

ov
I'll

u,rj cr'

AjRIST. Ran. 508.

not suffer you to depart.

cr'

ov toi pvqTrore

Ik tSiv eSpaviav,
tis a.

& yepov, anovrd

SOPH.

0. G. 178.

No

one, be sure,

from

these abodes,

Old Sir, shall drag thee hence.

2d person in the same meaning as the above, i.e. denoting not a strong prohibition, but a negative statement.
ovkovv
ttot' k

tovtoiv ye

p.rj

o-Kiprrpoiv

'eri

oSoiiroprjarus

(Schneidewin,
these

oSotTroprjcr^s.)

SOPH. 0.

G. 848.

Never henceforth, on
Shalt journey hence.

props leaning, thou

irore Troirjo-ere fieXriovi.

rows yap irovrjpovs ov

p.-q

Aeschin.

in Gtes. 177.

You

will never

make

the

Digitized

bad better. by Microsoft

374

THE NEGATIVES.
may
denote either a prohibition or
24.

The following example a statement.

ov yiyvdxTKia
o-e'

J ^o woi faww you,

lSABUS, ov p,rj etcret ets ttjv ot/ctav. you shall not enter the house ; or ov

Vlll.

p.rj eio-ei

C. ovk Is KopaKas ov pr) Trpocnrov 7o & crows with you. Be off!

;

ARIST. San. 609.

Observe here that the 2d person dual

is

used.

& piapunare,

to 7roiels

ov pr) KaTa/3ifo"t ;
at ? don't
vttv<

You

scoundrel,

what are you

ARIST. Vesp. 397. come down.

ov

p-q

'eyeps tov
Seivrjv
;

koto\ov

Ka.KKLvrjo-ei's

Kavao-Ttjo-ws

(pondSa
v6o-ov,

S TtKvov

Soph. Tr. 978.

/cat

Observe that eKKivrjo-eis joined by ately with egeyepets.

ov
p,}]

is

prohibitive co-ordin-

KaXeis

p.',

fi>v9pwir', iKtTevu), pyjSe KaTe/seis

rovvopa

ARIST. Man. 298.

Don't call me, Sirrah, I fray thee, nor blab out

my

name.

<iAots, 7ravcreL Se

ov pr) Svo-p.evrjs 4'crei dvpov, kol irdkiv o~Tpiipeis K&pa

;

Seet Se Satpa kgu 7rapauTtjo-ei irarpos

EUR. Med. 1151.

Be not wroth with friends, Forbear displeasure, turn thy face again, Accept these offerings, and entreat thy father.
ov
pr] Trpoo-o[o-ti<s

prjS'

X e V a > /SaK^e-utrcts 8'idv, k^opop^ei pwpiav T)jv <ri)v ip.oi ; EUR. Bacch. 343.
the bacchanal,

Lay not thy hand on me, go play Nor smudge me with thy folly.

ovkow KaAets avrbv Kal pr) acftrjo-eis Call him, and don't send him away.
ov dao-o-ov Give
oi'cras,

PLAT. Symp. 175

A.

pj8'

aTTio-T-qo-Ei's

kpoi ; SOPH. Tr. 1183.

me

thy

hand

quick,

and

distrust

me not.

Digitized

by Microsoft

REPETITION OF THE NEGA TIVE.

375

3. Ov px\ is found in the Obliqua with a Future Optative representing a Future Indicative of the Recta.
to. t' aAA,oi Train' ede&mcrev kou T07rt Tpoias irepyap, (is ov p,yj ttot Trefxroiev, el p.r) tovS' ayoivro SOPH. Phil. 611.

In the Recta this would be ov p,r) iroTe Tr'epo-ere kav pvq ayrjcrde. striking instance, for here the 2d person of the Future would clearly be a negative statement.

All

the rest he prophesied,

And how
ov
/iij is

they ne'er should sack the towers of Troy Unless they brought him with them. also

found with the Future

eure Teipecrias ov
jj/q

Infinitive.

<r<xc(os

yap

irore

0~0VTrjv8e yi)v oIkovvtos e irpa^ew tt6X.iv.

EUK. Phoen. 1590.

Eecta, ov

firj

7TOTE eS Trpdei

r;

71-oA.is.

Cf. PLAT. Lach. 197 D, kou yap /ioi Sokcis ovSe pr) yo-drjo-dai, unless for ou8e prj we substitute ou8o/*^ as has been suggested.

303.
I.

REPETITION OF THE NEGATIVE.

a simple. Negative follows a Negative in the two Negatives make one Affirmative, as in

Where
clause,

same

English.
ov8ei<s

ovk eTrao^e.

Xen.
(i.e.

No

one was not suffering

every one

was

suffering).

ov fiovov ov jreidovrai.

Not only do
ov Svva/iai

they not obey.

pur)

yeXav.
to

Ae.

/ am
II.

not able

keep

from

laughing.

tive in the

But where a Compound Negative follows a Negasame clause the first Negation is continued
Eue. Cycl. 120. S' ovBlv oiBeh ov8evo<;. one obeys anybody in anything.
Digitized

and strengthened.

Uovu
No

by Microsoft


376

THE NEGATIVES.
firi

XavQaveTO) ae

/ii?Se

tovto.

Xbn. Cyr.

v. 2. 36.

Let not even this escape you.

6eov<s (f>o/3ov/J-evoi fi/ifirar

acrefies firjBev firjSe avocriov

firjre Troirjarjre jxryre. {3ov\r)o-r/Te.

Xen. Cyr.

viii. 7. 22.

Fear the gods, and never do or intend anything either impious or unholy.

304.

OuSei's, M^Sei's,

OvSev, M-qSeV, etc.

A. OvSeis and pjSei's are used as declinable Substantives both in the Singular and Plural, with or without the Article,
of persons.

Much more
B.
O-uSev

rarely

o,

f/,

ovSev, 6,

ij,

firjSev.

and

fi-qEkv

are used as indeclinable neuter predi-

cates of persons.

C. to /j.TjSev, an indeclinable substantive, used both of persons and things.

is

very freely

All these constructions are chiefly poetical with the excepHerodotus also uses (A) tion of (B), which is also Platonic.

and

(B).

We may
(1.)

observe with regard to

ovSeis, ovSiv denotes

That

them what is known or proved

:

to

be actually non-existent or worthless.

ov privative.)
(2.)

(Of.

17

ovk eowia under

O-uSev is actually nothing.

is

MijSei's, fj.7]8eu denotes an indefinite conception of what anything non-existent or worthless. (Cf. 17 [xy igovo-la.) MrjSh is abstract nonentity, hence to furjSev.

(3.) The two sets often seem to be used indifferently, but though ovStls is plainer and blunter, yet /^Sei's may be really more contemptuous, " as nothing," " no better than a mere cipher." (4.)

The
Both

perative)
(5.)

may

construction of the sentence (with favour fnj rather than ov.

et

or an im-

sets of phrases are the reverse of tis (ti) eTvai,

tc

be

a somebody.
Digitized

by Microsoft

:;

Ot&ets, M^Sfir, Oi&cv, Mt)oVk,

ETC.

377

Examples

o vvv [lev

oijSet's,

avpiov

8'

iwipjieyas.

ARIST. Eq. 158.

Nobody now, exceeding great to-morrow.

<j>povovo~i Srjp.ov iLtitpv

6Vts OTjSeves.
;

Eur. Androm. 700

ayeTe
p,'

cf.

J.

^. 371.

ckttoSwv

tov ovk ovra /xaWov

?j

p,r)Seva.

SOPH. ^m^. 1326.

is

igffid

me

hence

Who am

no more than him that

ov yap rjiov tov?

as nothing.

/JTjSlvas.

SOPH. Ai. 1114.

tov? foivTas eS Spdv KarOavibv Se iras avrjp to /Mj8ev 6S ouSev peirei. EUR. Meleager. yrj Kal o"Ktd i.e. wAai was believed to be nothing now proves to be actually
-

nothing.

For the sentiment compare the Epitaph on Gay " Life is a jest, and all things show it I thought so once, but now I know it."
SOPH. El. 1000. and comes to naught. Compare the prjSev here with oiSev in the Meleager. ai/Spes rjixirepoi eicrh oi8ev. PLAT. Rep. 556 D. ; cf. 562 D. PLAT. Apol. xxxiii. 41 E. eav 8oko-i Tt etVou pySev 6Ves. when they are nothing. something, are they think they If Here eav favours /mjSIi/ rather than oiSSev.
(Scu/jcov) 17/xiv 8' aTroppei Kowrt jUTjSev epxerai.

Our future

is

at ebb,

6V

oiolv &v tov u?ySev dvTeo-Trjs

virep.
;

Soph. ^*. 1231

v/iSs to p,r)8ev ovras ev Tpoirrj Sopos

cf.

1275.

ippvo-aTo.
Ki

Soph.
Sc'^at
/i'

.4i.

1274

cf.

to

/AijSev ee/><3 </oao-(o 8' o>a>s.

o-i>

Eur. .K. 369. SOPH, ^ml 234.

o-Te'yos

roiyap

Is

to o"dv toSe

tj/v p,rjSiv ets

to

/xijSe'v.

SOPH.

-E7.
i.

1165.
vi.

Examples in Herodotus occur in

32,

137,

ix.

58, 79.

Note. ovSkv (p.r)8ev) Xiyeiv, to talk nonsense or idly.

to oi8' oiSev, Plat. Theaet. 190 A, the absolute nothing. 8vo-yevqs, SOPH. Ai. 1094. 6 firjSev &v yovato-i

oiSev
.

(ft'jSev)

Soph. El.

U^k.

vcu,

fo 6

doomed

to

death, as good as dead,

Androrr, 1077.

378

THE NEGATIVES.

305.
Mtj
is

M^

with Oaths and Assertions.

sometimes found with the Indicative after an oath or

'yio
it'
acf>rjcr<i).

a strong assertion.
/xa tt]v ' A<j>po8lTi}v
. . .

fj,rj

Akist. Ecc. 999,

Cf. also B. x. 330, xv. 41.

cf.

Av. 195,

Lysist. 917.

This use of Note

4).

^ should be compared with ^

prj

and the

Infini-

tive after verbs of

swearing and testifying (see pj with

Infin.

is found both with The construction is Epic. In Homer the Infinitive and the Indicative after an oath or protestation. M17 repudiates the charge.

mttu) vvv rdSe yata, k.t.A..,

/irj

Tt trot ko-kov fSov\evo~tjiev.

Be

witness earth to this

to thee.

far from

Od. v. 184.

me

be

it

to

contrive

harm

terra)

vvv Zeiis avros,

k.t.A.., p.rj dvrjp 7ro^rjo"Tai

aXAos.
II.

Be

witness Zeus himself

no other man shall

x. 329.

ride.

306.
Mij,

Mrj where ov might have been expected.

where ov might otherwise have been expected, is used where the structure of the sentence requires or has a natural Such cases are where (1) an Imperative affinity with fiij. precedes, (2) where the sentence is Conditional, (3) where the whole cast of the sentence is of th 1 nature of a conception, so that the statement denied is not 1 eal fact.
1.
ip7]<f>io-ao-6

rbv iroXefwv,

fir)

<j>oj3rj9evres

rb avriKa Seivov.

Thuc.
Vote the

i.

124.

war without fearing

the

immediate danger.
kylyveTO
rj

ravra

0"K07reiTe,

on
it

firj

Trpovoicj. p,oi\.\.ov

tvyti.
V. 21.

Antiph.
Consider
this,

that

happened not

so

much

designedly as by

accident.

exceptional use of pj, hardly explained by the preceding Imperative. Cf. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 37, Soph. Ant. 546, Dem. 27. 59
Digitized

A very

by Microsoft

MISCELLANEOUS INSTANCES.
2.

379

o irous eixep ecrnus <j>avepo'i vpXv ko-ri

/j,rj

/3\r]6eis,

SrjkovTai

Sia ttjv avrov afiaprlav airoBav&v.

Antiph.

Tetr. B.,

c. 5.

As

to the

child, if it is

proved

to

you that he was not struck

evident that he

when he was standing by his own fault.

3.

still, it is

was

hilled

oTjiai

.fx/q

av StKatws tovtov tv\uv ewaivov tov

p,rj

eiSora ti
i.

io-Ti vop.o<s.

Xen. Mem.
who does
not

2.

41.

think that one

know

the

meaning of law would

is

not deservedly receive this praise.

The
}

first

/xij

is

exceptional,

but the example

from

Xenophon, an exceptional writer.

So/cet crov oTov

tc elvai eVt iKeiVrjv tt/v iroXiv eivai Kat

fj

firj

avaTerpa<f)6a.i, kv

ai yevd/uevou Sucai /wjSev i&xvovfTiv

Plat,

Crit. xi.

50

b.

Do you

really think

it

possible for
1

state to continue to exist

and not

be overthrown, in which verdicts which have been

passed have no avail

This may he regarded as regular, the re and not after SokcZ

Eiddell,
instances.

pj coming
extreme

after oTov

Digest

135,

collects

some

Platonic

Instances 307. Miscellaneous

of ov to
352.
is

showing the power

make a downright Negative

Cf.

Statement.
p.

the use of ov in Emphasis,

This power
gvpfiaCvei
It is

very marked in contrasts

AESCH. Pers. 800. yap ov ra pkv, ra 8' oil not that some things are happening, while others are not
things are being fulfilled).
SevSpeo-t

(i.e. all

o Troxaiids Sdcrvs Kv 1

miYn

p.ev ov, ttvkvoii Se.

Xen. An.
trees which,

iv. 8. 2.
big,

The

river

was overgrown with

ov X i, dXX' kXve-q.

though not

were numerous.
dirwAeTO
8'

He was

not

Lys. vi. 27. condemned jo death, but acquitted.

Digitized by Microsoft


3 8o

THE NEGATIVES.
:

Of course the construction may change ov to pvq irpodv/xiav. cr/co5rtT ufi tovto, el Ta.Xa.VTOV eStaKe, dXXa tt)V Dem. 470. 26.
Yet even in
el

Consider not this point, whether he gave a talent, but his will. spite of the construction ov may assert itself
yv(o<j6r\o-6pe0a,

vveX06vTe$
to

p.kv,

dp.vveo-0at

Se
i.

ov
124.
to

ToXfiwTes.

Thuc.
protect ourselves.

If we shall be known
venturing
to

have met together, and yet not

is

be

This power of ov to assert itself under difficulties very strikingly in some passages PLAT. Euthyd. 307 B. prj o ye ov XP1 toiei. Don't do what is actually wrong.
:

seen

The

generic pj might be expected

ei

eym yap,
i.e.

fiiv

p.rj tpfirjv rji-eiv

irapa, Oeovs, rjStKovv

av ovk

dyava,KT&v

tu> OavaTO).

PLAT. Phaed.

viii.

63

B.

/ should
grieve.

be acting

wrongly in not grieving, as

m reality I do

In spite of the Conditional structure Cf. SOPH. 0. T. 551, el vopifeis ovx vcpe^eiv.
:

308.

Note on

prf, fir/ ov,

with the Infinitive and

Participle.

This construction is perfectly 1. M17 with the Infinitive. Indeed the Infinitive without it, natural and intelligible. though allowable in Greek as in English, may be somewhat ambiguous. Thus ov davelv eppvo-dpijv would in itself mean whom I rescued for dying. The addition of p? makes it perfectly clear that the net result is negative. The negative was thus used in our earlier English
:

Ton may deny

that you were not the cause.

Shakspere,
First you denied you

Rich. III.

1.

3.

had in him no

right.

Comedy of Errors, iv. 2. Precisely parallel in Greek is the use of ov with 6V1 and the dvTeXeyov on ovk eyx<i>pol.rj, Indicative after verbs of denying XEN. Hell. ii. 3. 16 ; dpvrjdfjvai (Ls ovk d7re8coK, Lys. XV. 1.
:

The double negative

is

uot

unknown even
by Microsoft

in Ciceronian Latin

Cf. Cic.

De

Ofic. in. 102, 118.

Digitized


NOTE ON
Mr;,

Mr) ov

WITH INFINITIVE,

ETC.

381

2. Mr) ov with. Infinitive. Here it is much more difficult to see the force of each negative, especially as in translating the Greek into English we make no difference between p) and p) ov. Thus we translate 6'o-iov p) fiotjdeiv, it is pious not to help ; ov\ oViov p) ov fiorjdeiv, it is impious not to help. But

we may be

sure that the force of each negative was, originally Observe that the double negative is only used with the Infinitive when there is a negative, actual or virtual, in the principal clause. Thus there is an additional negative over and above that in the preceding construction Just as pj with the Infinitive repeats (pj with Infinitive). and sums up the net negative result of the principal verb, so when the principal clause is negative, this additional negative is repeated with the Infinitive, and sums up the effect of the
at least, felt in Greek.

principal clause. 1

That

this

was not always

felt to

be necessary

is

shown by

the examples under B. 0. D.

Mrj ov with Participle must be explained in the same E.g. in Soph. 0. T. 12, (1) Affirmatively: I should (net result) in refusing pity (p) KaroiKTupuiv). be kmdly Negatively I should be unkindly (net result) in (2) The Participial connot refusing pity (p) ov Karoinrdpoiv). struction is required either because, as in the three instances from Sophocles, the Participle agrees with the subject of the
3.

way.

principal sentence, or because (as in Herod, vii. 106) it is in The Participle denotes circumstance the Genitive Absolute.
generally,

and more

specially condition, restriction, etc.,

which

are only kinds of circumstance. Wiinder (Excursus to SoPH. 0. T. 12, 13), while pointing out the above reason for the Participle, denies that it is conditional, although in 0. T. 221 he translates p) ovk e'xwi', unless
_

I had. In Soph. 0. T. 1 2, 1 3, he says that with an impersonal construction we might write Suvbv av ii-q or alo-xvvq av jxoi d-q p) o-u KaroiKrapeiv. It is true that we might thus give the sense of this one passage, but we could not so analyse the other passages, while the above explanation seems to suit this
as well as the others.
1

Spav the negatived infinitive gives the total effect of hindrance, the prevented act, so in 01) /cuXiiu 1^ oi) Spav the doubly negatived viz. r-' the total. effect, viz. the notprevented act. infinitive gives B

Mr
;

A. Sidgwick communicates the following note

Just as in

KuiMu

yu.7)

Digitized

by Microsoft

382

THE NEGATIVES.
this superfluous
offers
ju.tj

To

French

an exact parallel

after verbs of hindering, etc., the Emplchez qu'il ne se mile

:

after comque je ne le croyais. With verbs of doubting, denying, etc., used positively, the French idiom follows the English: je doute qu'il soit ainsi; but with such verbs used negatively the French ne corresponds to je n'ai jamais ni6 qu'il ne soit ainsi. the Greek p.r\ ov

d'aucune

affaire.

Compare too the redundant ne

paratives

: Ces

fruits sont meilleurs

309.

Note on

/aij

and

ju/r)

ov with the Subjunctive.

Attic construction is chiefly Platonic and Aristotelian (cf. Eth. N. x. 9. 6, Pol. iv. 4. 11, ii. 2. 8). But the construction is as old as Homer, e.g. Od. v. 467, p.r\ pe u-rifi-q re /cot*?) koX 6ij\vs eepcrrj Sapido-y, Perchance cruel rime and soft dew shall have here the original deprecatory force of p.rj, blast me. In a writer like Plato this pvq has become simply a let it not. suggestion put politely, and with a delicate irony. Closely allied to this is the interrogative use of pvq in the example quoted from the Protagoras (312 A). need not call the construction elliptical any more than p,rj yevono need be called ellipWhen a Principal Verb (such as 6pa>) is expressed, the tical. thought is more logically and fully stated, and the clause with pj has become subordinate but the two constructions are par-

The

We

We

allel

and synonymous.

Mr] ov after a Principal Verb is also found in Homer, E. xv. <j>paecr8<i> pr) p,' ovSe Kparepos Trep 4wv eirtovTa raXdo-o-rj p.eLvai, Let him look to it whether, stout though he be, he endure not Ov is strictly negative or privative here, to await my coming. as in the Attic examples. Thus in the construction of p.r) and pit) ov both particles exert their legitimate force. M77 ov with the Subjunctive occurs also in Herod, vi. 9.
164,

310.

Note on ov

fjut] with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative.

Both constructions are post-Homeric. It is impossible to them with historical certainty, and therefore any explanation suggested must be theoretical. 1. cm pf) with the Subjunctive. This construction is found both in Prose (Herodotus, Xenophon, Isaeus, Plato, Demosthenes), and in Verse (Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides,
trace

Aristophanes).
Digitized

by Microsoft

NOTE ON

Oi

p{,

WITH SUBJUNCTIVE,

ETC.

383

Both ov and /*/} appear to exert their proper force. The construction seems to be the negative of prj with the Subjunctive. (See note on that construction, 309.) Thus /mj ttipijtcu would mean /ar & * that lie obey ; ov negatives this apprehension it is not a case of such surmise, there is no likelihood of his obeymg, he will not obey. Such a construction in the second person is tantamount to a prohibition, as in the example from the Clouds of Aristophanes. If this view is correct, we need no more understand an ellipse of Seos or 6W6V between the ov and the ju.jj here than in (iq with the Subjunctive. ov Seos, ov SeivoV fully expressed occur often enough (Hdt. i. 84 ; Plat. Apol. ch. xvi. 28 b, Phaed. 84 B, Rep. 465 B Xen.
:

Mem.

25 Aeist. Ecc. 650). 2. ov pr) with the Future Indicative is far more difficult. In the first place the construction is almost wholly poetical.
ii.

1.

It

occurs

in

Hdt.

iii.

162,

Plato,

Aeschines,

as

rare

idiom in each.
Aristophanes.
(a) Is

It is very

common

in Sophocles, Euripides,

the phrase Interrogative ? x In favour of ov fi,rj with 2d person of the Future being A positive interrogative are the following considerations command is commonly expressed by ov interrogative with the Future, e.g. Aeist. Lys. 459, ovx'^^t', oiirorfo-ei', k.t.X. ; followed by imperatives iraveo-de, k.t.X. Sometimes ov pj with the Future (expressing a negative command) appears side by side with ov and the Future (expressing a positive command). The juxtaposition is very striking in Arist. Ran. 200-2, a passage which shows that in the time of Aristophanes the two idioms could be used as exact opposites. Professor Goodwin's objection to the Future being interrogative, derived from the single passage in the Clouds (296), where an Imperative and not a Future is joined by aAAa to ov [irj with a Subjunctive (v. I. a Future), is not convincing. The inference (supposing that the Future is the true reading) need only be that ov pj with the Future had become a stereotyped Imperative. And in Arist. Lys. 459 (above), Soph. Ant. 885 we have the Imperative immediately following ov with the Future used interrogatively, though not joined by a conjunc:

tion to
1

it.

Mr. A. Sidgwick writes " It is to me quite clear that ov y.i\ with the Future is usually interrogative ; when not, it is a form of 06 /4 with
:

the Subjunctive. "

Digitized

by Microsoft


384

THE NEGATIVES.

Against the phrase being interrogative may be urged that such a theory assigns a different origin not only to ov pyq with the 2d person of the Future from ov prf with Subjunctive, but This also from ov /xrj with the 1st and 3d persons of Future. difficulty is increased by the fact that ov p,r\ with the 2d person of the Future may, though rarely, express a negative statement, like ov pri with Subjunctive. If, in spite of this, the Interrogative theory is maintained, we should have to assign a different origin to this special idiom ; doubtless a serious but not perhaps a fatal objection, for the evolution of popular idioms is as manifold as it is
obscure.
/cat, dXXd, ko.1 pvf], pvqSk the explanation is simple. Ov throws its force over each connected clause which follows. The simplest case is Soph. Tr. 978, where ko.1 follows. The most complex is Eur. Bacch. 343, where the process would be

(b)

Oij

and ov

//.iy

followed

by

If ov prj is interrogative

ov f3aK)(evo-eis ; (joined by Si) ov pvfj eo; Will you not avoid bringing near ? Will you not play the bacchanal ? and will you not avoid wiping off? If ov u.-q is not interrogative each subsequent clause will have to be differently explained. Eur. Bacch. 343 would run thus Ov yu.77 irpoo-oLo-eis, you shall not bring near ; /Saic^evo-eis Se, but you shall play the bacchanal (like irpbs ravra irpdgeis, Soph. O.C. 956); l^'o^opjfa could only be explained on the assumption of \x.y\ with the Future being prohibitive, a construction which has yet to be established. The interrogative theory of ov jx-q finds decided support here, not only from the extreme abruptness of each clause thus made independent, but from the grammatical difficulty thus occasioned. oi
fx.71

Trpoo-oLcrei'j
;

fiop^ei

(c) Professor Goodwin (Moods and Tenses, 89) considers that in oi5 /*ij with the Future, oi is added (not interrogatively) to p.-r\ with the Future Indicative used as a Prohibition. But (1) p4 with the Future Indicative thus used is a construction of extreme rarity, if it exists at all. Some of the instances quoted (Moods and Tenses, 25, Note 5 (b) ), e.g. Soph. _Ai. 572, are probably not to the point, and in others, assuming the Future Indicative to be the correct reading, a

different explanation seems possible. (2) Assuming the existence of pf) with the Future Indicative as a Prohibition, it is
Digitized

by Microsoft

NOTE ON
difficult to see

04 p4

WITH SUBJUNCTIVE,

ETC.

385

how a Prohibition can be got out of oi juvf with the Future as a statement. An analysis of the phrase oi (you shall not) ju.17 iroiqo-ets (don't do) would land us in a meaning precisely opposite to that required. On the other hand, we get the right meaning if the phrase is interrogative, oi, won't you, pj 7row}cris ; abstain from doing ? In ov pj with the Subjunctive Professor Goodwin does not attempt to account for the pj. He considers the Subjunctive as "a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive used as a
weak Future."
(d) Mr. Riddell (Digest of Platonic Idioms, p. 177) explains the double use of the negative on the principle of " simultaneity of force;" i.e. both particles, like a double-barrelled It is quite true that gun, concentrate their fire on one verb. in course of time the two particles formed one strong redupSuch licated negative, their origin being quite lost sight of. cases as Soph. Phil. 611, Eur. Phoen. 1590, clearly show this. Still the question remains, How is it that oi5 and pj, differing

as

they do, combine their force

(e) Can ov and pj be separately explained It is pj which requires explanation, not theory exerts its simple contradictory force.

ov.

Ov on any

If oi pj with the Future is interrogative, oi p) irowyo-eis ; must mean, Won't you abstain from or avoid doing 1 It is always objected that this explanation gives pj the privative Not so, for pj n-onj'o-ets need not represent a force of oi.
_

The privative oi ttoiw, but rather a deprecated future act. use of pj with the Future Indicative would help us to understand

how the idiom might arise. Now the independent use of p? with the Future is extremely uncommon. ^It occurs, apa pj rarely, in questions (e.g. Plat. Bep. 405 A., is simply interrogative M)j Tepjpov). eeis \af3eiv pufcv It occurs after oaths and p; denoting an apprehension. But the similar assertions (II. x. 330, Arist. Ecc. 991). Future Indicative, graphically substituted for the Subjunctive,

is

fairly

common

(<^oJ3ovjj.o.i

p)

evprjo-opev,

Plat.

Phileb. 13,

and the Future Indicative

is

joined co-ordinately to the Sub-

junctive in several places (e.g. Aesch. Pers. 124; Soph. El. 43; cf. Arist. Ecc. 495). more vivid If oi pj is not interrogative then it will be a and graphic substitution oj oi u.^ for the Subjunctive. The
.

386

THE NEGA TIVES.

process would be ov p) jtomjo-^s, it is not the case (ov) p,y\ -ironqa-ys (of apprehending that you may do), or ov /j,rj won/jo-eis (that you really mil do). This readily passes into a command s^ia ^ mo ^ (cf. Eur. Med. 1320, x"P' 8* ov favo-wi 7roT ^

^m

touch, i.e. touch not).

list of passages in which ov pj occurs with the Future given for reference.

is

Hdt. Xen.
Soph,

iii.

162 (ov p? ava/JAacmjo-ei).

i.

Aeschin. de
Isaeus,
viii.

Cor. 79. 12.

Hell.

6. 32.

24

Plat. Symp. 175

(a.)

A.

(ovkow

ko.1

py).
:

ov pj, 1st or 3d person

0. C.

El.

1052;

177; Phil. 611 (Optative in Obliqua).

ko.1

(6.)

ov pj, 2d person:
. . .

637 (ou Ai. 75 (ov

0. T.
. .

pj)

0.

p;Se);

TracA.

(7. 847 (not a prohibition) kcu); 1183 978 (ov p?

.

(ov

pjSe).
.

Euripid. a>p. 213;

.
,

kcu pi}); lb. 1601 (oi /J. 496 (ov X ' pSI) ; Androm. 797 ; %>. 1066 ; Bacch. 342 (ou pj Se pSe). pj d\X.d) ; lb. 298 (ov pj Aristoph. Ban. 202 (ov pj p/Se); lb. 462 (ou p) dAAa); ^c/i. 166; Vesp. 397; JV6. 296, 367, 505 (the subjunctive of the MSS. in these passages has been changed by editors to the future
. . .

indicative).

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTER

III.

OEATIO OBLIQUA.
Introductory.
311'
of a

By Oratio Recta is meant the words or thoughts person given at first-hand, as from his own lips, e.g.

8t6o"a>

e'xo).

I will
is

give

what

I have.

meant the words or thoughts By Oratio Obliqua person given at second-hand by some one else, e.g.

of a

etj>rj

S&creiv

a a

*X 01"

or eXeyev

on

(us)

8clxroi

''

He
If the

said he would give what he had. in the following

words are reported

eXeyev

way

on

((is) 8dj(rw

He
original

said, "

I will
at

a e'xco. give what I have,"

all
:

we have no Obliqua

eXeyev

on

words just as in English we put them

fact.

introduces the in inverted

commas, as a quotation in
e.g.

irpocreXdovTes Se pot ry vo-repaio: MeXrjTos /cat EicjiiXrjTos eXeyov on, yeyevrjTai, S> 'AvSokiStj, koI irkirpaKTai rjfuv

ravra.

ANDOK.

de Mijst. 63.
said,

Next day Meletus and Euphiletus came to me and "It has taken place, AndoJcides, we have done it."

But the reporter

eXeyev

may
'i(f>r)

give the words thus

S&o-eiv

on

(<t>s)

Swrei

a a

X el

e)( 6 '-

Here we have a kind of Obliqua extremely common in Greek, and often alternating in the same paragraph with
Digitized

by Microsoft

3S7

388

ORATIO OBLIQUA.

From a love of what is graphic and the Obliqua given above. vivid the Greeks keep the original mood while only changing the person. Or we may say that they keep the mood which would be used if the Obliqua were in Primary Sequence
e.g.,

Xeyu

oti SaStrei

e'x l -

Observe then that

1. The person, whatever 3d in the Obliqua. 1

in Oratio

Obliqua

it

was in the Eecta, becomes the

If it did, the 2. The tense of the Recta never changes. Obliqua would not represent faithfully the time and act of the Eecta.
3.

The Mood may

(a.)

either
(of

be changed to the Optative in the Obliqua

Historic Sequence),

(5.)

be retained as
Sequence.

it

was in the Eecta, or

in

Primary

By

Oratio

Obliqua

Historic Sequence. involves (in Greek) Eelative Sentences,

is here meant reported speech in Oratio Obliqua in Primary Sequence no change of Mood in the Adverbial and and therefore can at once be dismissed

with one brief example by

Oratio Eecta
Siafievco

way

of illustration.

ecus 8-v

eiraveXdacriv

oiis irefi/KW.

will

remain

until they return

whom I am

sending.

Oratio Obliqua
tbntri

Aeyet ort

\,

,,

' \ > / . (o>s) ) oia/iEvei

Siaueveiv

,. n , e<DS o,v eiraveA-Obicriv

ous

~ ireturei.
he
is

He

says that he will remain, until they return,

whom

sending.
vo/ii'fa), civ

toCt' aK/oi/JaJs fidd-qre, fj.S.XXov

6yu,ot

v/j,a$

toijtois

/u.ev

<Mri(rnjo-6tv,

8c f$07]Qri<reLV.

DEM.

Onet. 870. 24.

consider that, if you learn the truth of this, you will be lilcely to distrust them, and help me.

more

Unless the speaker quotes his own words, or those of a person he is addressing, e.g. "I told you that I knew nothing of the matter :" " You stated that you would lend me ten pounds."
'

whom

Digitized

by Microsoft

RULES FOR SUB-DIRECT CLAUSES.

Sub-direct and Sub-oblique.

389

Eecta is changed to Obliqua, the Principal Sentence the Substantival Sentence, whether Oblique Statement, Question, or Petition), becomes itself subordinate to the Such a Sentence is reporter's verb (He said, asked, requested). technically called Sub-direct, i.e. subordinate to Eecta. What were the subordinate sentences of the Eecta, i.e. Adverbial or Eelative Sentences, become subordinate to a
(i.e.

When

Principal Sentence which itself is subordinate. They are now technically called Sub-oblique, i.e. subordinate to an Oblique For brevity's sake these terms, Sub-direct and Subclause. oblique (i.e. Adverbial and Eelative Sentences in Oratio Obliqua), will be used in this chapter. The terms have been explained in the Introductory Chapter,
p. 11.

312.

Rules

for Sub-direct

Clauses in Oratio

Obliqua.
Such clauses are either
or Oblique Questions. that their construction
us,

(1) Oblique Statements with oti and Oblique Petitions take an Infinitive, so is just like an Oblique Statement in

Sentences with ottcos and ottos /mj the Infinitive after ifafu. (with Future Indicative or Subjunctive) follow the construcThe Oblique Statement in the tion of the Oblique Question.
Participle presents

no

difficulty.

Co-ordinate Sentences follow the construction of those to which they are joined.
Principal Sentence A. In Primary Sequence, i.e. when the Tense of the Sub-direct and Mood the tense, Primary takes a Sentence undergo no change.

Sub-direct Sentence may either B. In Historic Sequence the in Primary Sequence, under(1.) be just what it was going no change (this is called the Graphic
Construction)
(2.)

or,

the Verb may be changed to the same tense of the Optative.

But N.B. The Imperfect and Pluperfect IndicaIndicative, and not tive must remain in the
Digitized

by Microsoft

39

O RATIO OBLIQUA.
be changed to the Optative. If they were changed we could not distinguish them from Present and Perfect Optatives. Historic Tenses of the Indicative with av must also remain in
the Indicative.

A few instances occur where the Present Optative represents an Imperfect Indicative of the Recta. In such cases however no ambiguity exists.
to.

Trerrpayfiiva

8iT)yovvTO,

on

avrol

jx\v

TrA.eoici'

ttjv
i.

Se

avaipecriv

tZv vavaySv

irpotTTd^aiev.

XEN.

Sell.

7. 5.

They were describing

the facts, explaining that they themselves

were sailing (against the enemy), and that they had commissioned (proper persons) to pick up the shipwrecked seamen.
Recta, avrol IjrAeo/xev kch
ideXoi, BovXevoiTO.
Obs. 1. The Tense of an Infinitive in a Sub-direct Clause is the same as in the Recta, e.g. eypaipa, I wrote ; e(j>V ypd<fai, lie said that he had written; A.eye, speak ; tKeXevev avrbv keyeiv, he was ordering him to speak The time of the Infinitive Tense may therefore be instantly discovered by turning it back to the Recta So with the time of a Participle.

Trpoo-erdap.ev.

Cf.

vii.

1.

38,

Obs. 2. No verb takes av because of its conversion from Recta to Obliqua. If in the Obliqua a Finite Verb, Infinitive, or Participle takes av, it is because it had an S.v in the Recta. The tables of converted Conditional Sentences will show this.

313*

Types of Sub-direct Clauses

Sequence.
A.
I.

in Historic

Original Recta (Statement).

1.

2.
3.

4. 5.
6.

ravra pMvddvuy. ravra /xad^cropMi. ravra [Aep,ddr)Ka. ravra e/idvOavov, TaCra efiefj,a6rji<rj. ravra ip.aOov.
by Microsoft

Digitized

; ;; ;

SUB-DIRECT CIA USES IN HISTORIC SEQUENCE.

II.

391

Converted to Obliqua in Historic Sequence.

Sub-direct.
1.
cos.

Principal.

e\eev on,

tclvto. jj.av66.vu.

2.

TavTa fj.avdd.voi. ravra jxaOrjo-iTai. ravra fj.a6ij(To<,To.

TaiJTU /jefiaOriKe.

3.

4. 5.
6.

ravra /j,e/j,adrjK(as drj. ravra efidvdave. ravra ijj,efj.a$rjKu. ravra e/iade.

Graphic. Strict Sequence. Graphic. Strict Sequence. Graphic. Strict Sequence.

ra
B.
I.

(iddoi.

Graphic. Strict Sequence,

Original Eecta (Question).

1.

ri

fmvddvus

2. 3.

Tt fiadr/uei ti /j.e[j.d0rjKas Tt e/j.avOave'S Tt ifj.efxadyjKWS

Tt

4.
5. 6.

/mdes

II.
^/3to.
1.

Converted to Obliqua
fjavdavei.

oti or Tt.

[mvddvoi.
2.

fiadrjo-eTai.

fjadrjo-oiro.
3.

fiefid9rjKe.
fj.efiadr]K(l>s

Graphic. Strict Sequence. Graphic. Strict Sequence. Graphic. drj. Strict Sequence.

4. 5.
6.

kfj.dvBa.vt.
e/tejuaftj/cet.
e/j.ade.

fiddoL.

Graphic. Strict Sequence.

preferable to the Optative

Note.

The Aorist

Indicative

is

whenever it avoids ambiguity. Thus ovk u\ov 6'ti 8pdo-eiav might mean either they did not know what to do (Recta, Tt Spdcr(i)fj.ev ; a deliberative Subjunctive), or, they did not know what they had done (Eecta, Tt iSpdo-afiev ). Almost always the
first

construction

is

intended. Digitized by Microsoft

392

ORATIO OBLIQUA.
Hirtos prj

C. Similarly with &s,

after verbs of

(a

much

rarer construction

commanding,

etc.,

than the

Infinitive).

Recta

6'inos /.) ecrecrde dvagioi kXevdepiai. See that you he not unworthy of freedom.
,

otovtcu

Graphic.

D. With Deliberative Questions.

Recta, Obliqua,
Trot <j>vyta

-qiropet, ttoi (airoi)

<pvyy

$iryoi j Strict

Graphic. Sequence.

314.

Rules for Sub-oblique Clauses in the Oratio

Obliqua.

A. In Primary Sequence they undergo no change of or Tense in passing from the Recta.
B. In Historic
1.

Mood

Sequence

By

the graphic construction they undergo no change, continuing to be what they were in Primary Sequence.
is changed to the same tense in the Optative, in Strict Sequence.

2.

The verb

But N.B. The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative must remain in the Indicative and not be changed c to the to
Optative.

Exceptions will be noticed further on.

315.

Note

to

accompany the following Tables.

construction of Sub-oblique as well as Sub-direct is shown in Conditional Sentences converted from the Recta to the Obliqua. The Recta will be found by referring to Conditional Sentences (page 198), and need not be repeated here. The Apodosis is the Principal Sentence in the Recta and the Sub-direct in the Obliqua. The Protasis is the Subdirect in the Recta, and the Sub-oblique in the Obliqua. The Protasis may be taken as the type of any Adverbial Sub-oblique Clause by substituting omS^, 6Ve, os, wpiv, etc., for el or iav. It may equally well stand as the type of any Relative Suboblique Clause, but for the sake of completeness a Relative Conditional Table is given converted to the Obliqua.

The

Clauses

Digitized

by Microsoft

TYPES OF OHA TIO OBLIQUA.

393

Observe that in the Sub-oblique Clauses, Adverbial or Eelative, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative of the Eecta are not converted to the Optative but continue in the Indicative.

The conversion
shown
Recta
Obliqua after
Xee

of

General Suppositions

may be

thus

rjv Jy-yus

eXdy ddvaros
p.rj

ovSels j3ovXerai dv/jo-Kciv.

dXX'
rjv

el ri

cf>epoipev

&Tpvvev

<f>epeiv.

on

el
ei

e<ij

rjv el

ei Tt

^ovXerai.Graphic, eXdoi fiovXono. eXdy ovSeva Graphics eXOoi ovSeva orpvvew

eXO-g

rl pr\

<j>epoiev

tinpvvev.

f3ovXeo-0cu

(3ovXeo-dcu.

p.i]

<f>epoiev

<f>epeiv.

He

said that, if they were not fetching anything, he was ordering them to fetch it.

316.

Types of Oratio Obliqua, showing Sub-direct and Sub-oblique Clauses in the Obliqua.

The

Protasis

is

the Sub-oblique, the Apo-

dosis the Sub-direct Clause.

If you do this you are doing wrong becomes, when reported by another person, He said that if he did it he was doing wrong.
I.

With
1.

Xeyrn on,

and a

finite
:

mood

Primary Sequence

Sub-oblique (the Protasia).

(el ravTO. woiei
ire-iroirjKe

Sub-direct (the Apodosis).

aSiKei

el

TaCra
(rjv)

eiroiev
eiroi,r)0~e

ySiKet
rjSiK'rjO'e

lav
Xeyei

Tamo

iroiy
TTOirjo-g

aStKfjcret

on

(us)
el

ravTO. iroiolrj or
Troi7)0-eie

dSiKOirj

dSiK-qo-eiev
dSiKrjcrei

av or av

el

Tavra.

TrotrjO-ei

el

ravTO. ewoiei.

rjSiKei

av
av

Vet raiiTa rotry<rt Digitized by Microsoft

r)SiKi9(TV

394

ORATIO OBLIQUA.
Historic Sequence
el
el
:

2.

ravra ravra ravra ravra

iroioirj
e-iroiei

abiKOi/q

eirofycre
el

dSiKrjareie
d.8lK7)(TOl

ttoioit)
TTOLrjcreie

eXe^e oti

((is)
el

ttoioit)
iroLYjcreie

dSiKoirj av
dSiKr/o-eiev
dSiKYjcroi
r/Siicei

av

el el

el

ravra ravra ravra

7rojcrot
eirota,
liroirjo-e

av

rj8iKr](TV

av

In the graphic construction the construction after eXee on The Future and will be just the same as after Xeyei 6'ti. Perfect Indicative (graphic) are commoner than their corresponding Optatives.
II.

With <f>t)fit and an Infinitive 1. Primary Sequence ei ravra f A. PRESENT

:

TTOicis
(
{

dSiKeiv
f
\

B.
^>-qfx.i

Past

eiroleis eiroieis

aSt/cetv

hrotrjcras eiroLri<ras
7r0
<
(

dSiKijcrai
dStKJJO"6ll>

or
a-e
\

0.

FUTURE a.

edv ravra
,

'^ s

oifiai
ei

iroi-qo-ys
'

ravra

TTOLOim
,

dSiKetv av
S.oiKrjiTai

<
[

TroirjO-eias

av

el

ravra

Trovqcrei's

d8lKrjO~etV

A. Present
II.

el
ei

B.

Past

ravra hroleis ravra eironjcras

dSiKeiv av
dSiKrjaai av

Note.

An

Imperative in Apodosis would of course depend

e.g.

on a Verb of commanding (Indirect Petition),

dvpav, knock at the door ;
etite

K&irre rrjv

K&wreiv rrjv dvpav, he told

him

to

knock at the door.

Strict Historic Sequence PRESENT el ravra t A.

B.
i.

7roHj)s
eiroieis

dBiKelv dSiKeiv
d8iKrjo-ai
dSiK-qo-eiv

Past

el i
77 IWoiijcras

4c/>tiv
(jijUlJV

or
ere
-j

0.

FUTURE

a. el

ravra
ravra ravra
i
v

TTOLOLTji

Troi-qcreias
7TOtOt77S
0. el

dSiKeiv av
dSt/djcrat
d8iKrj<rei.v

Tronjcreias

av

\C.Jel

Troiijcrots

Digitized

by Microsoft

THE APODOSIS IN THE PARTICIPLE.

(
\

395

A.
B.

PRESENT PAST

ei el

ravra eVoiets ravra eiro6ijtras

dStKeiv dv
dSiKijo-ai

av

Note. Et with the Optative in the Strict Historic Obliqua stands for three distinct forms. Thus el noiol^'s may represent (a) el n-oieis, a present condition ; (6) edv noty;, an ordinary future condition ; (c) el ttoiomjs, a less graphic future condition.

317-

The Apodosis
1.

in

the Participle.

Primary Sequence.
dSiKovvra,

otSd

ere, el

ravra

Troieis,

in each case being in the

Infinitive.
2.
rj8r) ere, el

and SO on, the Participle same tense as the corresponding

Historic Sequence.
and SO
el

ravra

jtomhtjs, dSiKovvra,

on.

Note,

el

raCra

7tok3 dSiKti

becomes oiSa

ravra izom aSiKWv.

318.

Relative Sentence in the Sub-oblique Clause.

Becta.

d 6Vt
a
ej"x e

SiSoxri

or ^"X e

eSiSov or
Scotret

t'Sw/ce

exoi
e'Afi

oiooirj
Sdjtret

av

a eixev a arvfv
Note.

ebibov av
eSoxKev

av
:

Observe that a, dv exV becomes in the Obliqua afxpi whereas d elxe remains a efye, and is not converted into a ex oi but 01 represents three forms, a ex e '> " " v X< *X'> a
-

?x the Apodosis
If,

ambiguity. is in each case sufficient to prevent Sov were cnan g ed to a ^'x ' 8{8o "7 the however, a efx e ambiguity would bea7abed by Microsoft

396

0RAT10 OBLIQUA.

: :

REAL EXAMPLES ANALYSED.

Principal.
4. icrKoirti

397

Sub-Direct.
TTOS
OHJTlji

Sub-oblique.
OCTTtS Q&IJJOI.

0"OtTO

He was
dering.

consi-

how he should find one

ttojs fx.oi

to

ISAE. ii. 10. bury him.

Eecta
5.

eorat
T
eii/ou
p,e
\

otrrts

Odipu
t'urrjXdov Sev-

"Avdtos

ttyf)

ov%

otoi>

to

fir)

eireiftr)

aTTOKTetvai

po.

Anytus said
that

it

Plat. Apol. xvii. 29 c. was impossible for you when once I had been
to

not

sentence

me

to

brought
court.
|

into

this

death

Eecta

oi)( olov re earn* to pA)

d/!roKTeivai 2(DK|0aT?j

eireiSrj e'urrjXOe

S(vpo.

Observe that the Aorist Indicative of the Eecta changed to the Obliqua.
6.

is

not

Xiyovo-i Se

o)S

eV Tij

yy as

a.7rida.vev 6

os

ou/c

e^ej3rjv

to

dvrjp, Kciyoi
eve/JaA.oj'

Xidov avrio
tijv Kt(a-

irapdrrav
TrAot'oi;.

Ik

toC

Aijv,
|

2%^

say

Antiph. cfe (7astf\ .Her. 26. that the deceased was though as a matter murdered ashore, and of fact I never left that I struck him on the the ship at all.
head with a
stone,

Observe here that the Aorist Indicative is kept in the Subdirect Clauses, and also (of course) in the Sub-oblique
Clause.
7.

ifa

yueXP' tovtov

8eiv fiav-

etus

iKavos tis

ye-

ddvuv

voito, curare Setfcrete, K.T.X.

Xen. Mem.

iv. 7. 2.

He

said

that

it

was necessary

to

until one became capable, if ever it should

go on learning long a time

for so

be necessary,
ecus

etc.

Eecta

p-eXP L tovtov Set {/.avOdvetv,

Digitized

av

yevi]Ta.i,

edv irore

Seno-n. ' "

by Microsoft

"

398

ORATIO 0BL1QUA.

320.

The Infinitive, and on (ws) with Finite Moods in the Sub-direct Sentences.

Both these Constructions occur

i.e.

in the Sub-direct Sentence, But the in the Principal Sentence of the Original Recta.

most common, as it is the most natural, simple, and easy mode of expression. Greek writers seem unconsciously to slide into it, even after an Obliqua has been introduced in the first instance by on or u>s. In consequence of this love for the Infinitive, one or two peculiarities should be observed.
Infinitive is unquestionably the

Obliqua (indirect words or thoughts) is often introduced without any introductory Principal Verb. A Particle is the only warning given, said he, he thought, it was said, or some such expression was in the writer's mind and can be easily supplied. And in such a case it should be noticed that the Predicate in the Nominative accompanies the Infinitive when referring to the Subject of the Infinitive and of the chief Verb. Latin and English have the same free and natural usage.
1.

An

suddenly

(a.)

*Ayis tous ?r/Decr/3e<,s h AaKc8aip.ova eKeX.ev<rev ievaf oi yap eivai Kvpios oujtos, k.t. A. XEN. Hell. ii. 2. 12. Agis recommended the envoys to go to Lacedaemon (explaining that) he was not himself competent,
etc.

(b.)

HXdriav

Kpirwv Kal K/dito/3ovAos Kal 'A7rok\68<opos KeXtvovcri fn.e rptdKovra p,v>v Tip.rjcrao-do.1, avrol 8' eyyvaadai.
8e
oSe,

& avSpes

'AdrjvaToi, /cat

Plat. Apol. xxviii. 38 b. Plato here, and Crito, and Critobulus, and Apollodorus, wish me to propose thirty minae (desiring me to say that) they themselves are the securities.
Svoiv Xprjcrip.0LV ov Stapj/DTijcrea-flai ttjv ttoXiv 'qyovp.rjv 7rAeucravTcov fj/xlov
cHroSaSo-en',
rj

yap QiXanrov, a
Se

fiev ?Ar/c/>ei rf}s TroAeios

rj,

twv

Aomiw

a<f>kecrdai,

p,rj

itoiovvtos

ravra, aTrayyeAeiv

rjfi.a's

tvQeas Sevpo.

k.t. A.

DEM. 388. 15.

lose.

One of two useful ends I considered the state would not Either Philip would restore the possessions of the
'

state

i English expresses this just as neatly, with still less warning Agis recommended the envoys to go to Lacedaemon. He himself was not competent, etc.
'

Digitized

by Microsoft

INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB-DIRECT SENTENCES.

399

which he had taken, and would hold his hand from the remainder, or, if he were not to do this, we should at once Iring back word here, etc.
2.

tive,

In the same way, but not nearly so often as an Infinian Optative may be introduced by an explanatory yap.
(a.) cA.yov

on

TraVTOs aia Aeyet 2ei50ijs" xfi(uv

vii.

yap

sty,

k.t.X.

313. They said that what Seuthes said was quite right : for

Xen. An.
winter,

it

was
carefully read.

etc.

The whole paragraph

1 3 is very instructive, and should be Observe that the Obliqua ends with a direct

indicative of the writer, !8oKa.

(6.) Or the Optative continues the Obliqua after a preceding Optative with on or <os.

aTTiKpiVaVTO
Aetrot
Trap'

O.VT(S,
'

OTl dSwaTO. (T<JMXIV

t'lTj

TTOLCIV

8,

TTpOKa-

AOrjvaitoV imZSes yap <r<$>u>v Kal yvvaiKes intivois eir/auv SeSievai Se nai, k.t.X. ThUC. ii. 72.

avev

That after the Optative the writer slides naturally into the Infinitive SeSievai.
Obs.

They answered him that

it was impossible for them to comply with their proposals without consulting the Athenians, for their wives and children were with them; moreover they

were afraid,

etc.

(c.)

In Soph. Phil. 615, an Optative

evOeaiS vireo-)(eTO

is still

more abruptly

introduced.
toi'

avSp 'Ax^'ofs TovSe

8rjkui<reiv

aywv'
ndpo.

oiWo p,lv p.dkio-0' etcovcriov \af3wv. d p,rj i)i\oi 8', aKovra' [xai tovtw
Ttpweiv etpelro TuJ

OeXovn p?

TV)(h>v\.

Straightway he promised

To bring and show this man to the Achaeans. Most like with his consent he thought to take him.
_

Should he

refuse, then in his spite, etc.

of vireo-xero is to be supplied (ekegev (us) before oiono. observe, as in the preceding passage of Xenophon, the Direct Indicative icpdro is resorted to, relieving the artificial Cf. also Plat. Phaed. 95 D, &? strain of the Optative. olttoWvoito Rep. 420 C, evaXt) Xipfievoi, eUv. With the last Digitized by Microsoft

Out

And

4oo

0RAT10 OBLIQUA.
,

XCiroi. instance compare Soph. 0. T. 1245, v<j> &v ddvoc Here, although in a Relative Sentence, the Optative crops up; it is equal to eXegev on inrb rovrtav Bdvoi, SO that the clause is virtually Sub-direct rather than Sub-oblique, being introduced by /wjj/mjv e-^ovo-'. The passage is discussed in
. .

Madvig's Syntax,
Tenses, 77, 1
3.
(e).

p.

116, note

2,

and Goodwin, Moods and

The

in the

Infinitive and on same Obliqua.

ehrov,
'Adrjvaioi,

(ws)

with a Finite
o-<f>uri

Mood

alternate

ol AaKeSai/idvtoi

on
8e

[lev

SoKotev aSiKetv oi
jrai/ras
^vfi[id)(<rvs

fBovXecrdai
tf/rjcfrov

Kal

tovs

Trapa.Ka.Xko-avTK
Obs.

errayayeiv.

ThTJC.

i.

87.

on

p,ev

SoKoiev co-ordinate

with

ftovkeo-dai. 8e.

The Lacedaemonians told them that their own judgment was that the Athenians were in the wrong : they wished, however, to

summon
&

all the allies

as well as themselves, and

to

put
keyeis

the matter to the vote.

o~6,

rrdrep, d>s ep,ol SokeT,

o(j>e\os,

on,

&o-7rep

ovSe yeu>pyov

dpyov ovSev

ovrws

oijSe

o-rpar-qyov dpyov oiSev

6'<eAos thai. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 18. You say, father, as I understand you, that, just as an idle husbandman is of no use, so an idle soldier is of no me.

Observe that the verb ko-n is omitted in the sentence introduced by Sxjirep, and the finite construction with on is not carried out at all.
4. And this is the greatest peculiarity. Such is the natural Greek yearning for the Infinitive, that Sub-oblique clauses, both Adverbial and Relative, instead of taking a Finite Mood, are actually followed by an Infinitive. In some cases the writer, after beginning with if, since, when, which, etc., seems mentally to throw in a "said he," "it was said," "it was agreed or thought," and passes to an Infinitive in others the preceding Infinitive seems to exercise an assimilating influence
:

over the Sub-oblique Verb.

(a.)
<??

8e. eireiSri

ov eKfirjvai ri)v i/^X 1?", Tropevecrdo.1 /nera

Plat. Bep. 614 b. He said that when his soul had gone out of him (i.e. his body), he was journeying with many. Several similar instances occur from 614 to end of the book
jroA.Xaii'.

after kv

<$,

o#s, ore, els o, o,

Digitized

(us.

by Microsoft

INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB-DIRECT SENTENCES.

(J.)

401

Aiyercu k.o.1 'AAk/Wcoi/i t<j> 'Ap.<pidpe(a, ore Sr/ aXacrdai avrbv fiera tov cpovov rrjs /mjt/jos, tov 'ArroXXai

There

ravrrjv Tr)V yr\v xPWat, o'lKelv. ThuC. ii. 102. is a tradition moreover that Apollo by oracle directed Alcmaeon, the son of Amphiaraus, when he
after the

was a wanderer
Strictly ore qXaro.
(c.)

murder of

his mother, to

inhabit this district.

TvyrjV

fSrjvai,

to xdcrpM i^al 9avfi.aicra.VTa, Karai8ew aXXa re 6avp.ao-Ta ai imrov X^Xkovv kolXov, OvpiSas c^ovTa, ko.6' as eyKvipavra
K.a.1

cpao-lv ISovra

veKpov, As <f>o.lveo-6a.i, pelfro 7) Kar' tovtov Se aAAo p.ev %x elv ovSev, Trepl Se TJ7 X 61/3 ' XP vcr0 ^ v SaKTvXwv, ov rrepieXopevov eK^iJvat. Plat. Sep. ii. 359 d. Gyges, the story runs, seemg the abyss and marvelling at it, descended and saw, among many other marvellous things, a hollow brazen horse, fitted with windows, through which he peeped and saw inside a corpse, so it seemed, of more than human stature. It had nothing but a golden ring on its finger, which Gyges
cSeiv

evovTO.

avdpuyirov

took
ko.6' as

eiSev

off,

and

so

made

his

way
plv

out.

<os e<f>atveTO

aAAo

tt)(e

ov

7repi.eX6p.ivoi

Though Latin has the same construction of the Eelative with the Infinitive, yet Cicero in translating this does not avail himself of the identity of idiom (see De Offic. iii. 38).
Note. Latin has, though very rarely, this idiom of the Eelative with the Infinitive the often quoted instance from Liv. xxiv. 3 appears to rest on an incorrect reading, but in
:

Liv. xxx.

42 an undoubted example

occurs.

Quorum

oratio varia fuit, partim purgantium, quae questi erant missi ad regem legati, partim ultro accusantium socios populi Eomani, sed multo infestius M. Aurelium,

quern

ex tribus ad

se

missis legatis,

dilectu habito,

substitisse et se bello lacessisse

contra foedus, et saepe

t

cum
to

praef ectis suis signis conlatis pugnasse.

They spoke on a variety of topics.

one time they endeavoured

clear themselves of the charges brought by the commissioners sent to faejikmg $y<fhim&lm> time they were bringing

402

ORATIO OBLIQUA.
countercharges against the allies of the Roman people, with greater rancowr however against M. Aurelius, who (they said), out of the three commissioners sent to them, had

much

levied troops, stayed behind,

against them contrary to treaty,

down/right battles with their

and had commenced hostilities and had fought several

officers.

321.

Assimilation of Optatives.

A. After an Optative in a Principal Sentence it is usual for another Optative to follow in an Adverbial or a Relative As the Optative is not Sentence as if in Historic Sequence. in itself past, but on the contrary almost invariably refers to future time, we can only explain this on the principle of
assimilation.
(a.)

TeOvai-qv ore fioi urjKeri

ravra

fxi\oi.

MlMNERMUS,
Then might I
die whensoe'er this is

i.

2.

no longer av
eirj

my

care.

For

oTttv

piXy.
av Tts, a ye
p,fj

(p.)

7r<3s

iirlo-Ta.no, cro<os

Xen. Mem.

iv. 6, 7.

How

could one be wise in what he does not

fifj

know for

certain ?

Instead of a hriararai, or a av
(c.) el

eVtcrnjTCH.
ocra

a.TrodvrjO'KOi

jj.lv

irdvra

tov
ov

fjv

peraXdBoi,
o)(rjp.aTi

iiruSr]

Se

dwodavot,, p.ivoi iv

toi5t<j) t<j

Kal

p)

irdXiv

dva/iido-KoiTO,

ap'

iroXXrj

dvdyKrj,

TtXevTuivTa irdvra redvdvai Kal pySlv rjv

Plat. Phaed.

xvii. 1. 72.

If all things whatsoever partake of life should die, and when they die, abide in this condition and not come
to life

again, does

it

not inevitably follow that in the

?

For But

60-a

end all things will be dead and nothing living av p.TaXdBrj iireiSav diroddvy.

Tts ovk av juitriyo-etev &iXnrirov,

<aivotTO tootois

iiri-

BovXzvwv,
KivSvveveiv

virep
;

&v 6 irpoyovos avTov

irpoelXero

ISOC. Phil. 77.

Because

7rpo6'AeTo

was Aorist Indicative in the Recta.

Who

would not detest Philip if he should be proved to be conspiring against those in whose behalf his ancestor deliberately decided to face danger ?
Digitized

by Microsoft

ASSIMILATION OF OPTATIVES.

403

Note. After an Optative denoting a wish, the sentence maybe assimilated.

dvfiov ykvoiro
lv'

X6 '/

5'

TrX-qptacrai irore
ij

al M.vitrjvai yvotev

'SarapT'q 6' ori

/wjt?j/>
'icj>v.

XV
For
is

2/cCpos dvSpZv aXmfitov

SOPH.

Phil. 324.

ha, yvwa-i. It is generally stated that a Final Sentence never assimilated. See Soph. Phil. 961, an often quoted instance. See also Soph. Track 955 ; Eur. Bacch. 1252 (and consult the note in Sandys' edition). In Eue. Bacch. 1384, we get both constructions, Assimilation and non- Assimilation combined
ekOoijll
8'

07TOV
/t'

p/qn

K.i8aip!liv piapo<s

ecriSoi

pvqre K.i8aipuiv' otrcrotcrtv eyto,

p!f\& 081 dvpcrov
fivrj/i'

avaictnai'

3aK\ais

8'

aXXauri

p.e\oiev.

322 B.
place.

1.

Occasionally this Assimilation does not take

(a.)

Tis

ai'

SiKrjv Kptveiev

f)

yvqii)

Xoyov
;

irplv

av

Trap' dp.<j>oTv pJodos eKp,d8y o-a<<3s

irplv

Eer.. 179. Of. Eel. 176, av eKfiddy, and not irplv eKfidOoi. Ion 672, Plat. Bep. ii. 359 c (0 T6 av /3ovXrjrai).

Eur.

(J.)

KD/OOS irpoo-KaXwv toiis <f>tXovs eanrovSaioXoyetro, &s Xen. An. i. 9. 28. SrjXoirj, ovs Tijua.
rip,(oy.

ous rt/ja, arid not

2.

Indirect Statement with 6'ti or <J>s, an Indirect Quesa Sentence with &s when following an Optative, is not so assimilated, nor usually a Final Sentence.

An

tion, or

(a

ov

S'

av

eis

dvTeiVoi ws ov trvficpcpei

rfj

7roA.

Dem. 202.
Not even one would reply

23.

that it is not expedient to the

Here av

dvretVot

is

a Principal Sentence in Primary Time.

by Microsoft

Digitized

404

ORATTU OBLIQUA.
(b.)
e'l

Tts Aeyot

avOpwrov IcmjKOTa, Kivovvra

Se ras \etpas

re

/cat rfjv KecJMXrjv,

on 6 auros

eo-rrjKe re /cat Kiveirai,

ovk av d^ioipev ovtw Aeyetv

Setv.

Plat. Rep. iv. 436 d. If one should say of a man who is standing still, but is moving his hands and his head, that the same man
is both

stationary

this to be
(c.)

correct
vea>s
.

and in motion, we should not allow mode of expression.

. .

6 irpwpevs

-rijs

Ketxat koI oirocra ecrriv.

(d.)

ai dirmv av enrol, birov CKacrra XEN. Oec. vili. 14.

ep/3aiveiv,

okvoitjv av ts
pvrj

Ta jrAota

K{!/50s rjp.LV Soirj,

rjpas

awats Tats

Tpirjpeo-i KaraSvo-g.

Xen. An.
323.

i.

3. 17.

Examples
vpiv
erf>

of

Mixed Graphic and

Obliqua.
pr)

Strict

(a.)

irpoeiTtov

on

el

jrapeo-op.eda

o-vo-rpao-evcropevoi,

eKeivoi

r)pas loiev.

XEN.

Hell. V. 2. 13.

/
(b.)

told

you beforehand that if we should (shall) not be present to join them, they would march against us.
KaKeSaipovioi
(refill's,

e(f>oj3eiTO p,r) ol

oirore (ra^jais aKoiareiav,

ovKeTi

dcjiSio-iv.

ThUC.
it.

i.

91.
let

He was
them
(c.)

afraid that the Lacedaemonians would no longer

go,

whenever they heard of

eurov
t<x

tij

fiovXfj

yevopeva
Si'

on on

eiSeir/v toiis ironjcravTas,

nal erj\eya
rjpiov TavTr/v

eio-qy-qo-aro

pev ttivovtuv

Tore piev ov de Myst. 61. told the Council that I knew who had committed the act, and I established the facts that Euphileius had suggested this scheme, and that I had opposed it, and that on that occasion
y'evovro
epe.

n)v j3ovXr)v Ei5<jf>iA)jT0S, dvTeiirov Se eyto, /cat

Andok.

it
. .
.

was not executed owing

to

my

opposition.

eio-ijyqo- aro Euc^tAijTOS, dvreiTrov Se

lyw, ovk eyevero.

324.

Virtual Oratio Obliqua.

Virtual Oratio Obliqua occurs

when

the words, thoughts,

and motives, not of the writer, but of the subject of the sentence, are given rather by implication or allusion than
directly introduced.
Digitized

by Microsoft

PAST TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.

(a.)

405

tov ILepiKXea eKaKifav

on

crrpaTijyos &v ovk erre^dyoi.

Thuc.
(The Athenians,
oi ttoXXol,

ii.

21.

grumbled thus :

<rrpaT>;-y6s

&v ovk

eire^dyei rjpas).
(6.)

ot

8'

Qicreipov, el aXuxroivro.

XEN. An.
to be

i.

4. 7.

Others were pitying them if they were

at the thought).

captured (felt pity

The thought was

(c.)
eli]

o'lKTpol eo-ovrai el aXucrovTai.

oio~da eiraivecravTa "Oprjpov tov

ayados.
that

You know
king.
Cf.

'Ayapepvova ws fiao-iXevs XEN. Symp. iv. 6. Homer praises Agamemnon as being a good
Panaetius

laudat Africanum
Offic. ii. rjv

quod

fuerit

abstinens.

Cic.
(d.)

De

76.

raXXa,

en vavpayeiv

el

'AOrjvaioL

roXprjvuxri,

wap59.
the

eo-KevaovTO.

THUC.
in

vii.

They were making all other preparations Athenians should venture cm a battle.
Here, observe, the graphic
el ToXprjcreiav. tjv

case

ToApjo-wo-t

is

used instead of

(.)

Compare
jrpbs rrjv iroXiv, el eirifioijOoiev, exiapovv.

THUC.

vii.

100.

They were advancing on

the city in case the citizens should

march

out against them.

0. 0.

El and edv often allude in this 1770, edv 7TUS SiaKwXvo-wpev

way
:

See Soph. to a thought. SOPH. Ai. 313, el pi] cpavofyv.

3 2 5I.

Past Tenses of the Indicative

Oratio Obliqua.
of the Imperfect

in

For instances

and Pluperfect Indicative

i.

in Sub-direct Clauses, see

Xen. An.

2.

21, Hell.

vii. 1.

34.

and Aorist II. For instances of the Imperfect, Pluperfect, Indicative in Sub-oblique Clauses, see Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 13; THUC. vii. 80 (oi)s pereirepxpav) ; DEM. 869. 9 (&v direSoerav) ;

Xen. An.

i.

9.

10 (wwk&S9<tiikrGmS- 2 9
-

('? v

tylM-

406

ORATIO OBLIQUA.

The Indicative may be accounted for on the same or analogous principles in the following passages
(a.)

expyjv tovs

aXXovs

firj

irporepov irepl
irepl

rZv 6/ioXoyovp.evoiv
ijpis

gvfj,/3ov\eveiv,

irplv

rSv

d/j<K7/3')jTOii/Jevu>l'

ZStSagav.

Isoc. Panegyr. 19.

Here
(b.)

irplv 8i8deiav

would represent

irplv

dv

SiSd^taa-i.
e'ws

ijSews av
'

KaXXiKXel en

8ieXey6p,rjv,

atrip

-rqv

tov

pifrlovos direStOKa prjcriv dvrt Trjs

tov Ztjoov.

i'ais

aireSwKa

and not ews

d,Tro8oi7jv,

Plat. Gorg. 506 b. which would represent

etas

av diroSw.

326.

Apparently Abnormal Obliqua.

,
,

Sometimes, but rarely, instead of either the Graphic or the An examination of real Obliqua we get an Indicative. passages seems to show that the writer throws in the mood and tense from his own point of view instead of giving the mood which would be required if he were quoting words 01
thoughts.
(a.)

K.vpos vir'eo-yero tois MiAijo-tois fyvyacriv,

npdeiev,
e<j>'

el ~k<xAu>s

ara-

a IcrrpaTeveTO,
oiKa.Se.
rjv

pvrj

irpocrdev iraveo~6ai, irplv

i.

avrovs Karaydyoi

XEN. An.

2. 2.

The Recta would be

iravo-ojxai irplv

av KaTaydyo). of the writer's narrative.

(b.)

KaraTrpdgu), efi a o-rparevopai ov e<$> a eo~TpareveTO is really a bit

avrbv (Tlavcraviav) pieXXovra vXXr)tf>drjo-eo-6ai TlIUC. i. 134. e<f>' la ey^tapei. It is said that Pausanias, when on the point of being arrested, knew for what purpose he (the ephor) icas coming,
Aiyercu
.
.

8'

yvuvai.

$ xwpoirj or xcopet would be the usual construction ; ixwpei the mood and tense of the writer rather than of the subject Pausanias.
etp,'

is

(c.)

eXeyov ov KaXGis

rrjv

'EXXdSa eXevOepovv avrbv,

ThTJC.
iii.

el

avSpas

Siecpdetpev, k.t.X.

32.

They

told him that he was not liberating Greece in the right way, if he was destroying men, etc.

Obliqua would require

vi.

SiacpOeipei,

or 8ia4>6eipot.

Of.

Thuc.

29, eipyao-To (taking Siecfrdeipev as Imperfect. Aorist).

Digitized

It

may be

by Microsoft


LONG SPEECHES IN OBLIQUA.
to

407

Precisely in the same way it is open in Latin for the writer employ an Indicative or a Subjunctive. Thus we might say, legati, mirante consule, quod morabantur, venerimt (or quod morarentur) ; morabantur would give the writer's statement (morarentur would express the consul's feelings).
(d.) The most peculiar instance perhaps is in Arist. Vesp. 283, Xeymv tos <f>iXaOrfvaios fjv kou Karetiroi, where the Xeyiav (is seems to necessitate a quotation of words (ais iu-rt or d-rj).

327.

LONG SPEECHES IN OBLIQUA.

Long Speeches in the Oratio Obliqua, such as we find in Livy, are rare in Greek. Greek is too lively, too anxious constantly to recur to the present, and cannot bind itself to the formal regularity which characterises a Eoman Obliqua. The introductory verb ?<ij, eXege, tfpero, elnev, is repeated, or the writer breaks away suddenly into the Eecta.
Rep. 614 b,

For longer specimens of the Obliqua see Plat. Symp. 189, Thuc. vi. 49, Xbn. Cyr. viii. 1. 10, 11.
very
instructive

example
is

occurs in

Andokides
:

de

Mysteriis, 38, etc.,

which

here given at length

e<ij yap AtoKAeiSijs e'lvai fv avSpdn-oSov 01 eirl Aavp[<j>, Seiv

Diokleides stated that he

had a

Se

Ko/ucrao-dai aTrocfiopdv. dvaSe

7r/ouj

eras
eiret

\peva-6eh t^s &pas

slave at Laurium, and that he had occasion to fetch Rising early a payment due.

the time and there was a full moon. Aiovvo-ov f)v, opav dv6 punrovs When he was by the gateway 7roAAovs euro tov d>8eCov Karaof Dionysus, he saw several /Baivovras els rfjv opx^o-rpav persons coming down from Seuras Se clvtovs, elo-eXdiav v7rb the Odeum into the Orchestra. rty a-Kiav Ka6eeo-6ai peragu Afraid of them, he withdrew rov Kiovos Kal rfjs 0-TiyA.^s ec' into the shade and crouched down between the column and 27 o aTparrjyoi eo-nv 6 \aXKovs. opav Se dvdp&Trovs rbv (iev the pedestal on which stands the Bronze General. He saw dpidfibv p,d\itTTa rpiaKcxriovs, some three hundred men eo-rdvat, Se kvk\w dva irevTe Kal Se/ca standing avSpas, rovs Se dva. round about in eiKoa-iv op&v Se awrav wpbs groups of fifteen and twenty he looked he reco S" -i)v o-eX^i/Tjv Ta vp&BlfflfkeSW Mffi^&mfi*
/JaSifeiv
elvai Se irava-kXrjvov.
Se Trapa to irpoirvXaiov

he

mistook
:

tov

started

408

RAT10 OBLIQUA.
nised most of their faces by the moonlight. Now in the
first

wXuo~to>v yiyvuxrKCiv. Kai wpGtov piv, & avSpes, rovd' -uire^cTO Seivorarov irpaypa, oipai, birois ev eKeivip eh) ovtivo. jiovXoiro
'A6rjv(u<j)v
<f>avai

place,

gentlemen,

this

t>v

dvSpwv
Se
fir)

tovtwv
tSuiv

etvai,

ovtivo.

story on which he bases his evidence is a most extraordinary thing; his object, I take it,

/3ovXoito,
Se

Xeyeiv
e<pr)

on
eirl

ovk

rjv.

being that

it

might

rest

with

TavT
-rr\

AavpLov

levai, ko.1
ot

vcrrepala, anoveiv oti

'Eppat

eTev

TrepiKeKoppevoi'

yvwvat, oSv evdvs

eis acrrv fijTJjTas

on
re

tovtiov

elt)

rSiv dvSplav to epyov.

rJK(ov Se

r)Srq

yprjpep-f)-

vovs

Ka.TaXa.pf3dvet,v

Kal

vvrpa. KeKTjpvypeva eKarbv juvas.

ISiav Se Eifc^juov tov KaAAtov tou TrjXeKXeovs dSeX(j>ov ev tijj XaA.Ket<i> Ka,6r)pevov, dvayayuiv avrbv ets to 'H^>aio-Ttov Xeyeiv

direp ip.LV lya> ei'pr)Ka }

<os

ISoi

ijpas ev skcwy)
Aa/Jeii/

Tg vvkti' ovkovv
}

SeoiTO irapa. tyjs 7roAews )(prjpa.Ta,

yuaAAov

Trap'

r/pStv,

&<rd' r/pas e'x eu/ ^>'Aow.

include in this list any Athenian he wished, or to exclude any he did not wish. After seeing this he stated that he went on to Lauri m, and next day heard of the mutilation of the Hermae. So he knew it was the work of these persons. Returning to town he found the commissioners of inquiry chosen and a reward of a hundred minae offered for information. Seeing Euphemus the son of Kallias and brother of Telekles sitting in his forge, he brought him up to the Hephaesteum, and told him exactly what I have said to you, how he had seen us that night. Now he did not (so he said) desire to receive money from the state more
to

him

than from
eiiretv

us, if his friends.

we would be

oSv tov

Eii<?jp,ov

on

KaAfis

7ronjo"eiei' eiTrcfiv,
el's

kc

vw

i)Kuv KeXevcrai ol

tijv

Aew-

Euphemus then told him that he had acted rightly in telling him, and now he asked
him
to come to the house of Leogoras, to meet me there,

yopov o'lKiav, iV licet vyyevg per' epov 'Av5o/aSiy kgu eTepois

oT'S Set.

ij/cetv <)} Tij vcrTepaia.,

koX
Se

Si)

KoiTTe.iv Trjv

dvpav, tov
txixeiv
aiJToV"
;

ira/repa.
(cat
ot'Se

tov

Ijuov

etdvTa,
ye

ei7reiv

apa

said he, with one Andokides and other needful persons. He said that he went next day, and just as he was knocking

o-

Keptpevovcri

at the door XP'? Digitized by Microsoft

my

father hapr

LONG SPEECHES IN OBLFQUA.

fievTOi, fir)
(j>[\oi's'

409

a7ro)0eKrdaL toiovtovs ihrovTa 8e avrbv Tavra

pened to be going out, and said, " Oh, is it you these

people are expecting 1 Well, one ought not to reject such
friends."
off.

oi'xcer^at.

So saying, he was

KCU TOUT(f>
a.Tro<jiaivo>v.

flV

T<J>

Tp07T(ff

TOV
6V1
/J6>

irarepa p,ov d7r(oA.Aue, crwetSdVa

ewretv 8e
r)p,iv
ei'rj

ijjtias

SeSoyfievov

Si5o

rdXavra dpyvptov SiSdvcu ot avri twv Ikgitov /xvcov t<3v ck

tov
/xev
Srjfiocriov,
ij/aeis

eav 8c KaT<xcrx<i>[3ovX6fie6a,
e6vcu,
ttlo-tlv
hia.

In this way he tried to ruin father by denouncing him as an accomplice. (According to him) we said that we proposed to give him two talents of silver instead of the hundred minae offered by the

my

avTov

r)fiiav

8e

Tovrui' fiovvat re Kai Seacr#GH.

(hroKplvacrdai
Se

avrbs
t/kv

irpbs
17/ias

ravra 0T6 /3ovXtvcroiTO.

8e
KeAtijetJ'

a-urov

as
tva

KaAAtov rod
Kcuceivos

T17A.eKA.60us,

ati rbv 8 KijSeo-Tijv /iot) o{!tms aTrdtWvev, kcu Ka.AA.tou, riKiiv i^rj 19

wapdrj.

KaOop.oXoyqa-a.'S

Tjfilv

ttmttiv

Sovvai kv aKpowoXei, (cm, ij/tas crw0e/*eVotJS ol to dpyvpwv as

Treasury, and that if we gained our object he was (should be) one of our number, and that we exchanged His own pledges of this. reply to this was that he would think it over we, however, told him to come to the of house of Kallias son Telekles whose presence we Again in this he desired. tried to ruin my relation. He came, so he said, to the
:

tov ciriovTa ju-ijva Sdkrciv Sia\ptv8eo-9ai kcu oi5 StSdvar r/Ketv oSv fir/vvo-wv
tu. yevofieva.

house of Kallias, and according to agreement he gave us pledges on the Akropolis, and we, after stipulating to give him the money by the next month, break our promise and Consegive it. refuse to quently he is present to inform of the facts.

Digitized

by Microsoft

CHAPTEE

IV.
Etc.

FIGUEES OF EHETOEIO,
328.
Alliteration.

Alliteration, or the repetition of the

e.g.

same

letter.
?

Who

shall decide

when

doctors disagree

Subdola cum ridet placidi pellacia ponti.

Luc.

ii.

559.

Tympana

tenta tonant palmis et cymbala circum Concava, raucisonoque minantur cornua cantu.
Id.
ii.

618,

6o.v6.tov 6S.ttov

6el

Plat. Apol. xxix. 39

fi.lv

A.

It (wickedness) fleeth faster than fate.

rj

t<5>

TravcoAti iraTpl tu>v

k^ k[iov

iraiSiov irdflos

irapuro

SOPH. El. 544.

I lore
rbv
S'

Or by thy felon father, for the family him, was all fondness flung away 1
ayplois oo~o~outi
Tra.TTT'fjVa.'s

6 7ra?s

7rn5cras Trpocranrip.

SOPH. Ant. 1231.

initial

Of.

Soph. Ant. 50, where an

a occurs seven times.

terative of languages. and beautiful examples.

Ours is the most alliabounds with natural As is well known, Early English alliterative poetry consisted of couplets, in which each section contained two or more accented words beginning with the same letter.
Instances
easily

may

be collected. Shakspere

In a somer seson, whan soft was the sonne, I shope me in shroudes, as I a shepe were, In habite as an heremite, unholy of workes,

Went wyde
4 10

in pis world,
r,*

wondres to

here.

-,<.,. Digitized by Microsoft

Piers the

Plowman

; 1

ANAKOLUTHIA.
Shakspere ridicules the abuse of Alliteration

41

Whereat, with blade, with bloody blameful blame, He bravely broached his boiling bloody breast.
" Hortatur

me frater,
iv.

of Accius (Cic. fuse.

ut meos malis miser 77) is little better.

mandarem

natos

"

329.

Anakoluthia.

Anakoluthia or Anakoluthon is the term used where the structure of the sentence is not grammatically followed out. It is either natural and unstudied, or artificial and rhetorical. It is natural and unstudied in Herodotus, whose irregular constructions arise from his writing just as if he were talking. It is natural and unstudied again in Aeschylus, whose thoughts and emotions are too big for his words, and in Thucydides, who thinks more of matter than manner. It is rhetorical in Plato, who purposely imitates the easy freedom of ordinary conversation. Sometimes Anakoluthia arises from mere slovenliness, as in Andokides. During the progress of a sentence a new idea strikes the writer ; a new expression is thus introduced and becomes a disturbing influence. Or an explanation may be necessary and a parenthesis, more or less long, is inserted. The sentence thus may wander far away from its original conGenerally the writer is aware that he has gone struction. astray, and goes back, not to the grammar, but to the sense of the passage, resuming often in a different construction with a particle Se, 817, ovv, so, then, as I was saying. There are many kinds of Anakoluthia, and the figure is One or two specimens are given just constantly recurring.
to

show what
dvSpoTv

is

meant
ddva.ro'S SS' ciutoktovos,
fjU(Wjj,aros.

8' bjxa.iii.ow

S.
c.

ovk &tti

yrjpa.'S

rovSe rov

Aesch.

Theb. 681.

Instead Here ddvaTos, the subject, has no verb of the verb the writer solemnly pauses, adding a second sentence nearly complete in itself.
(yrjpao-Kei).

But

blood of brothers shed by fellowly hands

is

There

no age

fm

such voUutwn.


412

FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.

"

tci

izdvTa yap tis ey^eas dv8' afyiaros

AESCH. Oh. 521. Pour all the atoning offerings in the world For one life spilt vain were thy toil. Grammatically ixdr-qv av /mjx^oujs.
eras, [idrrfv o fiof(do<s.

01 'Adrjvaioi

vocr(j)

riebvT0
oi'cr^s,

Ka-r' d/j.<f>0Tepa, tJs

fj

re &pas tov

iviavTOv rairnjs

iv

a.<r9evov<riv

Kal to x<apiov dfj-a, kv <J XaAeirov fjv. THUC. vii. 47.

avOpiowoc fiaXurra, io-TpaToireSevoVTO, JAwSes Kal

Grammatically
XaAtjroC ovtos.

it

should have been tov xaplov JAtoSous

suffering

ko.1

The Athenians were

is

from

sickness arising from two

causes, first, because this

most prevalent, and

the time of year when sickness next, the ground on which they were

was

encamped was swampy and unhealthy.

Cf. iv.

23, Kal 7repl ILjAov

T<

Tei^et.

Hl)T.

vii.

74, Kal

TToAAa

dfivvao-Oai.

One simple instance from Plato may suffice to imitates the freedom of ordinary talk:
^XOov
hrl Tiva t(ov 8okovvto)v o-o<pQv etvai
e'Soe
.
.

show how he
.

Kal SiaXeyoilvai croi^os

jitei/os avTiij,

poi oStos o

d.vrjp So/cetv filv

k.t.A., elvai S' ov.

1 went
wise.

to

see

Plat. Apol. vi. 21 b. one of those who had the reputation of being
talking with him, this

And

man

seemed

to

me

to be

As I thought.
330.

considered wise, without being really so. if it were SiaAeyojuevos avrtp cfio^acra, conversing with

him

Antiptosis.

of the Subordinate Clause is the object of the Principal Clause. The stock instance is " nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit " I know for " nosti quam tardus sit Marcellus."

Antiptosis.

The Subject

you not

whence ye
This
English.
is

are."

common

construction

in

Greek,

Latin

and
vii

iTeov ovv o-KoirovvTi tov xfy^o-fixiv tl Xkye.i. 21 E.

Plat. Apol
it

I must go m then exammmg emmvnmg what the oracle

oracle).

the oracle,

what

means

(i.e.

means, or the meaning of the

Digitized

by Microsoft

ASYNDETON AND BINARY STRUCTURE.

otoe p.ev ouSejs

413

rbv ddvaTov ovS'

to)

el

rvy\dvei ttovtcov (leyicrrov

xvii.

ov

tQv dyaduv.

Plat. Apol.

29

A.
it is

No

one knows (with regard

death, even whether

(not)

the greatest possible blessing.

We may say that the Accusative and the Subordinate Sentence together become the object of the principal Verb. Antiptosis is commonly explained as above, but the simpler and more rational account is that the Subordinate Clause expands and explains the Object or Accusative of the Principal
Clause.

33I
of

Asyndeton.

Asyndeton, or the omission of Conjunctions, stock instances

which are Shakspere's

Unhousel'd, disappointed, unanel'd
Cicero's
Abiit, excessit, evasit, erupit.

and

Cf. Milton's

Unrespited, unpitied, unreprieved. Unshaken, unseduced, unterrified. Exhaustless, spiritless, afflicted, fallen.
a<tAos, dw/ievaioi.

aKAawTOS,

SOPH. Ant. 877.

veKpov.

Unwept, unloved, unhymned.

&<j>i\ov, epr)p.ov,

dwoXiv, Iv
citiless,

faio-iv

SOPH.

Phil. 1018.

Friendless, lone,

midst the living dead.

The use

and pointedly.
unnecessary.

of the figure is to set forth each idea separately, It is so common that further instances are

332.

Binary Structure.
is

One conception
it

stated twice over, so that two aspects of

are given.

to

obtain

This double presentment enables the reader fuller view of the conception as a whole.

Mr. Eiddell aptly describes this artifice as giving a rhetorical "binocular vision." It is commonly employed in Similes.
av
icrraTO 8a.Kpv)(e<ov,
8' 'Aya/j.ejj,v(i}V
. . .

wore Kpr/vrj fieXdvvSpos ws 6 fiapvo-Tevdx<i>v ore" Apyeioicri fieTrjvSa. Cf. Soph. Ai. 840, 0. 0. 1239.
Digitized

II. ix.

13.

by Microsoft

414

FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.

ravra
Jya>

Sokw aKoveiv,
.

wcrjrep
. .

ot

Kopv^avTiCivTes T<av
ij

avXwv

8okov(tlv aKoveiv

K.a.1

hi c/iol avrrj

ijx 7}

/Soju/Set.

Plat.

Crito,

54

d.
.
.

ov ravrbv rovro irarovOao-iv,

e'urtv
;

aKoXaala

tivi o-bxppoves

Plat. Phaed. 67

E.
;

ovtukti croi Sokw, ovSeva vop,[u> debv etvai

Plat. Apol.

xiv.

26

e.

Binary Structure in giving two descriptions of the same object differs from Apposition, which gives hut one description, though in certain forms there is a resemblance between Asyndeta and Anakoluthia often occur in this the figures. The artifice is used by all Greek writers, but it is structure. employed in an almost endless variety of subtle forms by Plato. See Eiddell, pp. 196-209, whence the above examples
are taken. Antiptosis
is

a form of Binary Structure.

333-

Brachylogy or Abbreviated Construction.

Comparison.)

(Including Zeugma, Constructio Praegnans, Brachylogy of

Brachylogy is a kind of Ellipse ; but where Ellipse actually suppresses a word or sentence altogether, Brachylogy leaves them to be supplied from some corresponding expression in Brachylogy is thus more essentially artificial the context.
than
Ellipse.
^>pacras viriprepav rrji tote x-P lr s ( s(5. iiriprepav X-P Soph. El. 1265. X-P l v supplied from x/'tos).

>

the

Substantive, an Adjective, a Pronoun, a Conjunction, or a Verb may thus be supplied from the context.
rot p,ev

aXXa,

bo-airep Kal iravres vp,eis liroutre.

Xen.
i.e.

Gyr. iv. 1. 3.

to, p.lv

aXXa

(sc. iiroUi,

supplied from

eTroieiTe).

In the

common

different verb of

phrases ovSev aAAo 17, rt aAAo 17, 6IAA0 rj, a more general meaning is supplied from a

special verb in the context.

of.

Aai<eSaip,ovioi
.

aAAo oiSiv
-q.

rj

Ik t/)s yijs evavadyovv.

Thtjc.

iv.

14.

i.e.

aAAo

ovhlv eiToiovv

PLAT. Apol. 19
a 7rao"xa.

D.

ravra /cat ttouiv Kal supply Kal fl-oie?.

irdcrxeiv

PLAT. Phaed. 98 A

Digitized

by Microsoft

CONSTRUCTIO PRAEGNANS.
334.

415

Zeugma and

Syllepsis.

Zeugma is another form of Brachylogy. There is only one verb in the sentence, but more than one noun. The verb strictly applies only to one of the nouns, but suggests the verb required by the other.

dW

rj

7rvoartv

rj

fiadvcrKafai Kovei
cf.

Kpv\j/ov viv.

Soph. El. 435

No, or
them.
to the

winds

(sc.

El. 72, Ai. 632, Eur. Bacch. 142. /M0es) or the deep-dug soil bury

A violent instance of Zeugma

ecrdrJTa Se <f>opiovcri

rg ^KvdiKfj

6[M>ir)v,

ykHcrcrav 8e

iSirjv.

HDT.
They wear a dress
of their own.
Cf. the old
like the Scythian, but (speak)

iv.

106.

a language

Tyne

ballad

"

He

wears a blue bonnet, wi' a

dimple on his chin."

7rpo0ii/u'a xpw/ievoi /cat 7rapaKeXevcr/j..

ThUC.

iv. 11.

With energy and with mutual

X/HU/J6VOI

exhortation.

goes with both nouns not quite in the same sense.

This sort of
1 Cok. from the
i.

Zeugma
2,

iii.

ydXa

New

sometimes distinguished as Syllepsis. a stock instance Testament, In-oncra suiting ydXa only. Cf. L.
is

i/iSs eiroTura ov (3pwp,a, is

64.

335-

Constructio Praegnans.
of

Constructs Praegnans is a form Sentences are compressed into one.

oS
5ei

Brachylogy.

Two
17

KaKoiradeTv rS>
to

crco/xaTt

ivravOoi ovSev
2.

p,e h>(j>eX.rjO-tv

epTreipia.

Antiph. de Coed. Her.

Where I ought
(i.e.

here, whither they have

to

have endured personal ill-treatment hither brought me), my experience

me.
(eis, Iv,

proved no help

It is common with certain Prepositions Relative Adverbs.

e.g.

and with

rals iv Trj yrj KaTairefevyviais

(sc. vavcri).

The ships which had fled

Digitized

to the shore,

and were on

the shore.

by Microsoft

416

FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.

neivos
8'

oirov /3e[3r)Kev, ovSels otSe.

is

SOPH. Tr.

10.

Where (for whither) he

Swov for Snot.
Cf.

gone none hnoweth.

Phil 256.
'

Constractio Praegnans is very common in the New Testament. stock instance is "3?jAi7nros evpedij els 'A^cotov, Act. Ap. viii. 40. See 2 Tim. iv. 18, Matt. v. 22, evoxos els tt)v

ykevvav.

336.

Brachylogy of Comparison.
"

The stock example

the Graces.

Brachylogy of Comparison, or Comparatio Compendiaria. is from H. xvii. 51, Kofiai x aP^T(ra bV

^apiTtav Ko/xauri, hair like the (hair of)

5p,oiai, i.e. Kojxai 6/j.oTai

'H(j>a[<TTOv

8'

iKave So/xov

Gens

dpyvpoire^a

dcpdiTov dcrrepoevTa, p.eTairpeTre' ddavdrouriv.

i.e.

HOM.

II. XVlii.

p,erairpeirea 86p.oUTiv dOavdrtov.

[368.

Silver-footed Thetis

came unto

the house of

Hephaestus

Incorruptible, starry, conspicuous

among

the Immortals.

i.e.

yeipov dpcrevinv vocrov ravrqv vocrovp.ev. EtTR. ^eipova dpcrevuv vocrov vocrov vocrovp.ev.

Androm. 220.

Worse than men

this

plague we are plagued vnthal.

o/xoiav rats SouA.ais el-^e rrjv icrdfjTa.

XEN.

Cyr. V.

1. 3.

Cf.

REV.

xiii.

11, elye Kepara Svo op,ot,a dpvioi.

337-

Catachresis.
of a

The use

word not
expect;

in its strict meaning.

8aip.6vios,

vTroTTTevm,

extraordinary;

6avp.ao-T6s

funny, capital, excellent ; p,eyas (sc. Aoyos, Plat. Phaed. 62 b), puzzling ; virep<j>va>s u>s (6po\.oy>), I decidedly do (assent) ; a/Mjxav<3s ye &s o-<f>68pa, most decidedly.
davfidcrios, strange, eccentric,

See Eiddell, Digest,

p.

240.

338.
avpiov

Ellipse
of a

and Aposiopesis.
or sentence.

The suppression
e.g.
17

word

(sc. rjjj.epa).

Is Kopai<as (sc.

fidWere, eppere,

oi)(ecr6e).

To

the crows ! Djgjtjzed

by Microsoft

EUPHEMISM.

417

The suppressed word or sentence can, of course, be easily supplied. The figure is mechanically and unconsciously employed in many common every-day phrases. The object of
its artificial
fjp.iv

use

is

to give brevity

and pith to the expression. AESCH.

Cho. 142.

p\v

ciJ^cls racrSe (sc.

For us

these

prayers

ev\opat).

The omission

of the Subject with its Verb, of the copula tort, of the substantive with its epithet or genitive (ol dyadoi, 6 $iA.wr7rot>), are common instances of unconscious Ellipse. Instances of unconscious Ellipse of Sentences occur in the

phrases ov-^ on, pvq on, o^x ows, etc., and more or less so in the suppression of a Protasis, or of an Apodosis. .

In animated and excited Aposiopesis is a form of Ellipse. 1 expressions the speaker breaks off abruptly, leaving the lest of the sentence to be understood.
p,r)8ev

By Heaven 1

wpos opyrjv -irpos dtSiv (sc. naught in anger.

Spao-fls).

SOPH. El. 369.

pj\ rpifias It (sc.

iropi^n or some such verb). Antig. 577.

t

No No
/X17

longer tarrying

pj) p.01 irp6<pao-iv.

An. Ach. 345.

shuffling !

Ae. Vesp. 1179. pjol ye pvdovs. Come I no tales I Vergil's "quos ego: sed motos praestat componere ."Quid multa?" fluctus," is Quintilian's stock instance.
"

quid plura 1 " are

common

cases.

339.

Euphemism.

substitution of a colourless or an agreeable expression " or disagreeable one. It is the reverse of calling strong for a the mention of avoid carefully Greeks a spade a spade." The

The

death especially,
e.g.

e.g.

<UAo

n. TraOecv.

hrpa.% &irm erpae Plat. Cnto, iv. 44 E,

to suffer

something

'Airovubirr,.
Inst. ix. 2.

Reticentia, ClC.
Digitized

Obticentia,

Cblsus.

Interrvptio at.

Quint.

by Microsoft


418

FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.

So we say " in the event of anything happening."

ey<b yap eT/j.' eKetcr' oiroi iropevTeov. SOPH. Ai. 690. For I shall go thither where all must go.

Spoken by Aias when contemplating

SiSoiK eyi>
/iij jj.01

suicide.

PefirJKr).

SOPH. Phil. 494.

Where
alive.

Philoktetes fears that his father

may no

longer be

340

Hypallage.
case, so that a

change of

word does not agree with the

In such constructions the

case
is

which

logically it qualifies.

word agrees with a compound expression,

instance
is

so that the figure The stock a form of Synesis rather than Hyperbaton.

from Horace
sidere clarior

Nee purpurarum
Delenit usus,

where the adjective clarior, instead of agreeing with purpurarwm (purple robes) agrees with the compound substantive
usus purpurarum.

& irarpwov Icrn'as ftdOpov. Seat of my father's hearth.

SOPH. Ai. 860.

For 5rar/oi})as ecrnas jSddpov. So Antig. 794, veiKos dvSpwv

forms one word
tov
8'
:

vvaip.ov,

where

vei/cos

dvSpwv
26.

Track 817, SyKov dvd/xaros pvqrp^ov.

dSAiws OavovTa THoXwcCkovs vkuvv.

TloXvveiKows.

SOPH. Ant.

For davovTos

In' Lucretius, i. 474, we have an instance of true Hypallage Ignis Alexandri Phrygio sub pectore gliscens. Mr. Munro, in his note on the line, collects some striking parallels from other writers.
:

341. Hyperbaton, Chiasmus, Hysteron-Proteron.

The displacement
use
to
is

to give emphasis to a word.

represent catching up another word.

of the natural order of words. Its chief It also enables language the rapidity of thought, one word instantly
Digitized

by Microsoft


LITOTES.
Easy and familiar instances are
etVe,

419

&

n-pbs Aids, MeAijre.

Plat. Apol.

xiii.

25

c.

Like the Latin

Per
te

Deos

oro.

Certain words in particular are thus displaced, especially fievroi, av, 'in, tcrios, ovk in ov <j/x<, etc.
dp' ofiv

ye,

av

/(te

oiecrdt rocravra err/ 8iayeve<r6ai

Tts >Jv ev

rj fjun.rTOjj.i6a
i'crios

p.evroi

Plat. ^0/. xxi. 32 e. ra\cf>i.ra ; ARIST. Nub. 788. PLAT.

(/.

Ta^'

civ

opOtas

p.ip.<f>oiro.

640

D.
is

Chiasmus is a form of Hyperbaton. Chiasmus verse Parallelism of Clauses and Sentences

:

the In-

ttom p,h>

epyov irav

8'

eVos Ae'yovTas re Kal irpdrrovTai,

where the outside epyov belongs to the outside and the inside eVos to the inside AeyovTas.

Trpdrrovra's,

ovr dSiKet, ovr' dSiKeirai, ovO' mrb deov, ovre deov.

Hysteron Proteron (yo-repov Trporepov) reverses the order in

which events occur,

e.g. rp6.<[>ev -qS

;

kykvovro.
9.

EXetS rl Kel<rrJKOvo-as

SOPH. Ant.
<j>pdetv.

d\kyj\ovs SiSdo-Keiv re Kal

aio-^ai'd^evos
6avop,t]v.
p.ev

PLAT. Apol.
Kal
SeSiaig

iii.

19 D.
djnjX"

Kal

\v7rovp.evos
vi.

on

Plat. J^oZ.
its

21

e. p.

On

the Hyperbaton and

forms see Riddell,

228.

342.
Litotes

Litotes.

or Meiosis, smoothing or diminishing a stronger common enough figure conception by a weaker statement. ov X in all languages, but especially suited to Greek taste, e.g. much. p.S.X\ov, not so ov more; i.e. 0-0-0 v, not less,

el

av eytoye ov Kara. fiev yap rovro Xeyovcnv, op.o\oyo'ii}v PLAT. Apol. 1. 17 B. tovtovs eTvat p-qroip. am an orator, If this is what they mean, I must admit that I not as they are orators (i.e. an orator of a far higher order

Hum

they).
Digitized

by Microsoft

420

FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.

\alpov(TLV eeTao/xero<.s tois oio/ievots elvai (robots, ovo~i o
ov'ia-Ti

yap ovk

djySes.

PLAT. Apol.

xxii.

33

C.

They enjoy
(i.e.

the cross-examination of those who think they are wise, without really being so. It really is not disagreeable
it is

extremely amusing).

6avwv SeiXaios, ov fi&A.' evTV)(is. AJESCH. Pers. 327. Lies low in death unhappy, not all fortunately (i.e. all inKeiTcu
gloriously, because

unburied

an euphemism

also).

343.

Oxymoron.
is
e.g.

Oxymoron
conceptions,

the

contrast

by juxtaposition
:

of

opposite

from the Paradise Lost

hope
is fiat

Our

final

despair.

Dishonest shame

Of Nature's works, honour dishonourable.

A universe
Where

of death

all life dies,

death

lives.

In King John the despairing and passionate Constance

Death, death

cries

Thou

amiable, lovely death odoriferous stench sound rottenness

;
! !

i^Opwv aSiopa SZpa.

SOPH. Ai. 665.

Giftless the gifts of foes.

fiaiverai 6"
'

vcf>' ijSoi'tJs

p-qTrip dp.r)Tb,p.

Soph. El. 1154.

She is mad for joy, mother, yet no mother.

oo-ia wavovpyrjo-ao-a.

SOPH. Ant.
TpiO~KaXfwi

74.

Daring a holy

crime.

e^G(f>0tv0' at

vaeg avaes ava.

ships,

AESCH.

Pers. 680.

They are destroyed those three-banked ships no more, ships no more.

:

Cf. Catullus
Of.

funera ne funera.
x/'s

Aesch. P. V. 545,
Digitized

ax a /"s-

Soph.

0.

T.

1214

yau.os ayauos.

by Microsoft

PERIPHRASIS AND PLEONASM.

Oxymoron
is

421

well caricatured
of

by Shakspere

A tedious brief scene

And

young Pyramus
!

his love Thisbe, very tragical mirth.

Merry and tragical, tedious and brief That is, hot ice, and wonderous strange snow.

How
344-

shall

we

find the concord of this discord

Periphrasis.

Periphrasis or Circumlocution is a roundabout way of using two or more words instead of one, e.g. 'Ict/m^s napa, head of Ismene, for 'Ict/mjj^ ; dpi^ara NelXov (Plat. Leg. 953), children of the Nile,ie. Egyptians (cf. the Hebrew, children of Israel, sons of Belial, son of peace, etc.). The word a occurs in one or two phrases vbs jiiya XP^Jf,a i Hdt. ; to xPVtia

xPW

"

wktZv, Ar. Nub.

2.

Very often the Substantive is used for an Adjective or an apposition, e.g. HoareiSSvo's k/xitos, the might of Poseidon, for
the mighty Poseidon (Aesch. Eum. 27); vapQevla 'lovs, the virgin Io (Aesch. P. V. 898); fiypbs o-e/3a<?, a revered mother (P. V. So in Latin, mitis sapientia Laeli, prisci Oatonis 1090). virtus (Horace).

Periphrasis is employed in the use of Tenses, e.g. pk\ku> TOirpruv, fjteWai redvavat (Plat. Apol. xviii. 30 c and xix.

32 a),

drifida-as e'x", periturus

sum, fore or futurum esse with

a Subjunctive mood.
is

both in Greek and Latin, a periphrasis with 4'xw, e.g. kv v$ Ix * Zia.voovp.a.1 <povi/is ex"* 4>pv& OappaXews e'xi> Ba.ppm AwroC/tat (Soph. El. 766): (all in Plat. Apol.): \vrn)pm Zx>
often, again,
used, for a simple verb, especially
:

Very

'

rjSovrjV

$/>av

rep/ruv (SOPH. El. 286)

<t>(ovrjv

\aj3elv

(fxoveZv, etc.

In fact these periphrastic verbs are of constant use both prose and poetry.

ir-

345.

Pleonasm.

is the employment of words apparently superfluous. Apparently, for a second expression may often define or amplify a previous expression, e.g. 6 rrrpaTrj-ybs Trjs crTparia.'s, fiovov Ka6' avrbv KovSev' aAAov. Digitized by Microsoft

Pleonasm or Eedundancy


422

FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.

cognate accusative is a sort of pleonasm, r v l /*x ecr ^ a ' or an adverb with its adjective, //.eyas //.eyaXwo-ri (kclto). II.
xvi. 776, (he lay outstretched) huge with his

^x

huge length.
d)s

Adverbs are often thus combined

iraXiv aWis,
:

aX-qBCis

t<5

ovti

aS TraXiv adOis eVeira p.erh. ravra. The repetition of the negative and of av are cases of Pleonasm.
ti
Srj

keyovT<s Sie/3aXXov ol Sta/JaAAovres

ZirieiKrj

av

jioi SorcaS

Xeyeiv Xkyoyv.

Plat. Apol. PLAT. Apol.

iii.

19

b.

xxii.

34 D.

Periphrasis

is

a form of Pleonasm.

346.

Prolepsis or Anticipation.
is

intended, or expected to take place, as spoken by anticipation, as having already taken place. It occurs most commonly with a predicative adjective. good instance is found in Juvenal

What

of,

Paullatim caluerunt mollia saxa. i.e. caluerunt ita ut mollia fierent.

A stock instance is
evcj>r]p.ov,
i.e.

S T&Xatva,

KOtfiTjcrov crro/ta.

AESCH. Ag. 1258.

&<TTt

evcj^rj/jiov efvai.

JcJSa

Kiveb (bdkyjxaT

opviOSv

cracfrrj.

Awakes

to shrillness the birds'

SOPH. El. 18. matin songs. See v. 14, Ttp,b>p6v.

yovktav
Ikti/aovs 'i(T\ovcra irrkpyyai

dfurdviov yoiav. SOPH. El. 242. Restraining the wings of shrill-voiced waitings So that they honour not a parent. Cf. Antig. Cf. Eur. Bacch. 70, 183.

1200

347-

Puns.
(Paronomasia, Annominatio.)

Occasionally Greek writers indulge in them.

dXXa. yap, & MeAijrc cra^cos aVo^ai'veis rfjv travrox, dpeXeiav, on oxJSei' (rot /tejueArjxe irepi $>v ip,e eiVayeis.
. .
.

Plat. Apol.
(See xiv. where the

xii.

25 c

^ieW^^oft

PUNS.
Riddell,
p.

423

242, collects
rbv /?m>v

many
to,

instances from Plato.

aTreo-repijKas

to' eX<iv.

SOPH. Phil. 931.

/3iov (life).

where there

is clearly

a play on /3i6v (bow) and

instance of punning or playing on words at a solemn moment is in Shakspere. (Richard II., Act ii.), where the dying Gaunt dwells on his name
:

The grandest

Old Gaunt indeed, and gaunt

in being old, etc.

So of Helen
eXevas, eXavSpos, !ArToA.ts. AESCH. Ag. 689. Helen, the Hell of ships, the Hell of men, the Hell of towns.

Compare the pun made on the

Athenaeus
viii.

rock-built Assus recorded in

352.

"Asro-ov W', &<s Kev Oacrcrov

oXedpov mipaff

iKtjai.

M.

vi.

143.

Paronomasia

is

the combination of words of similar sound

iii. 2.

or cognate form.

utrum propter oves an propter owes; Varro,.R. R. Traume sind Schaume (lit. dreams are bubbles). AESCH. Pers. 1041. Soa-iv KaKav KaKwv KdKots.
<LpOovd' 6 TXrj[i<ov 6p6bs e

13.

opdZv

Sicfapwv.

SOPH. El. 742.

Aotos
instances.

eavToi/,

oms

v<j>'

eavrov,

etc.,

would be familiar

Digitized

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft

ENGLISH INDEX.
Reference
is

only

made

to subjects

which are not easily found in the Table of Contents.

The numbers

refer to the

pages of the book.

Dative of interest in Participial phrases, 107. of circumstance used adverbially (e.g. ciyfj),

Article, for Possessive, 30.

with words used maAblative represented by Genitive, 78-9. Accusative, see Table of Contents, 66-78. Absolute, 95.
with. Infinitive,! i 3] 158, 179. with Infinitive instead of Nominative, 180. in Apposition to Sen-

teria/iter, 35.

not repeated with second noun, 35.

114.

Asyndeton,

24.

with
as

Infinitive, 13, 158.

Attraction, 58. Attributive or Epithet, 5 ; Peculiarities in Construction, 23-4.

an

Oblique

Pre267.

dicate, 45.

Dawes' Canon, note on,

tence, 25, 74. with. Prepositions, 289.

Cases,

Preliminary

Note

Deliberative or Dubitative, see Questions. Definite and Indefinite Sentences, 194-5.

Active Voice, 120. Adjectives which

Genitive, 100.

on, 64.

Demonstrative Pronouns as
Subjects and Predicates,
18.

take

which take a Dative,

119.

Adverbs

which

take

Causal Sentences, see Table of Contents, 276-9. Causative Active Voice, 125 ; do. Middle, 127. Collective Noun with Plural
Predicate, 19.

Pronouns preceding a
sentence
25.

in

Apposition,

Genitive, 100.

which take a Dative,

Comparative
lative, 120-3.

and
too

Super-

Deponent Verbs, 131. Dual Number, 19, 20.

119.

Adverbial sentences, 9. Agent, how denoted, 131. denoted by Prepositions, 289-90.

great a degree, 97, 120, 121. Concessive Sentences, see Table of Contents, 249251.

denoting

Emotion,

Verbs
of,

of,

with
et
foi

Participles, 170.

Genitive

of,

101

Verbs on, 186.

with

Dative of, in. Anastrophe, 289.

Aorist, uses of, 145-9.

Conditional Sentences, see Table of Contents, 193231.

>

Epithet, see Attributive.

Sometimes the equivalent of the English, Present, Perfect, or Pluperfect, 147. Apodosis, meaning of the term, 195, footnote.

Sentences,
of, 209-231.

examples

Fearing,
/*)}, /xif

Verbs
ov, 262-8.

of,

with

Consecutive Sentences, see Table of Contents, 269275.

(i)WithSubj. or Opt,
262.
(2) With 264.
(3)

without av, 217-9.

Apposition, 5
of, 24-26.
;

Peculiarities

Co-ordinate Sentences, 7. Copula, 1 ; Verbs used as, 12 ; omitted, 13. Construction koto, ovvecrw,
24.

Fut. Indie,
o7ro)<r
fj.-rj

With

and

Article, 2 see Table of tents, ch. ii., 27-46.

Con-

Fut. Indie. Subj. or Opt., 265. (4) With cos and Fut.

as

Personal,

DemonRelative

D
Dative, see Table of Contents, 104-119.
I

and strative, in Attic, 28.

1 2

Indie, 265. (5) Withlnfin., 265. (6) With el Interrogative, 266.

For an explanation of this construction, see Monro's Homeric Grammar^ p. 158. See Monro's Homeric Grammar, where the uses of the Article are arranged under
Digitized

three heads.

by Microsoft

425


426
Figures of Rhetoric, see Part III., ch. iv., Table of Contents. Final Sentences, 252, 259.
(1)

ENGLISH INDEX.
Indicative Mood in the Indirect Question, 188. in the Indirect Petition

Infinitive,

with tou denoting a purpose, 162. in Indirect Statement,

178, etc.

With 'iva, o>9, o7ra)5, and Subj. or Opt.,

253-.

(Fut. Indie), 192. in Definite Sentences,

194-5. in Conditional Sentences, see Part II. ch. ii. (a) Present Conditions.
(b)
(c)

in
191.

Indirect

'

Petition,

with Verbs of Fearing,

265.

(2)

With, us,

ottos

av

and Subj. (not

255.
(3)

Opt.),

with tw, used

ally, 279.

caus-

Rarely with

Fut.
Itera-

Future Conditions.
Past Conditions.

Frequentative,
tive.

Indie, j 256. see

(d) Unfulfilled Past or

Present Conditions.
in Temporal Sentences to denote Definite Time, see Part II. ch. iii. in Concessive Sentences, see Part II. ch. iv. in Final Sentences of

Future Middle as Passive,

1 3-5.

Perfect, 150. Indicative, with otros Final, 256, n. 4 ; Fut. Opt., as Obliqua of above, 256.

Oratio Obliqua, a introduced without Principal Verb, 398. and Finite Mood alternating in Orat. Obliqua, 400. with Adverbial and Relative Sentences in Orat. Obliqua, 400. in Latin Orat. Obliqua,
in

Past Purpose, 257.

in Relative Final Sentences, 238. with SVws Modal (Fut. Indie), 259, etc., 262.

401. Indefinite Definite.

j

Tenses,

see
of,

Genitive, see Table of Contents, 78-104.

Time, three kinds

232. Iterative

Absolute, 1 96, 165-7. with Infinitive, 13,

158.

with Verbs of Fearing,

(Frequentative)

263.

Tenses, 151.

with Consecutive Senwith Limitative or Re-

See

Temporal

Sen-

as Oblique Predicate,
45-.

tences, see Part II. ch. vi.

strictive Sentences, 274.

tences.

in Apposition to another Genitive supplied in the Possessive, 26, 49. Gnomic Tenses, 151. Graphic (or Vivid) construction, i.e. the Substitution, in a Subordinate Clause in Historic Sequence of the Mood used in the Primary

with Causal Sentences,

see Part II. ch.
vli.

with Expressions of Wishes, see Part II. ch.

viii.

Limitative or Restrictive Sentences, 274-5. Locative Case, 64-5, 116.

with
ix.

Relative

Sench.

M
Middle Voice, 8
(and
125-130.

tences, see Part II.

Sequence, 138, 182, etc. see also Oratio Obliqua

substituted for the Optative by the Graphic

Active) Verbs. Alphabetical List, 127'

130.

passim,

esp. 386, 404.

H
Hoping
and Promising, Verbs of, with Pres. and Aor, Infin., 180-1.

Vivid Construction in Historic Sequence whereever the Recta or the Primary Sequence took
or_

Modal Sentences with oirws,

ottus
jlwJ,

259-262.

(1) Fut.

an Indicative.
Infinitive,

see

Table

of

Contents, 153-162. Epexegetical, 155-6.

Indie, or Fut. Opt., 260. (2) Subj. or Opt., 260. (3) ofj otw rpdiroj, ef
OTto TpOTTQ) for OTTtoS,

compared with Latin

Supine, 155.

261.
(4) oirws
(5)

with av and
JX17

Imperative Mood, 136-7. Imperfect Tense, uses of,

143-4-

after a Comparative with 77 or wsTe, 156. with (is, ws ye, Limitative, 156. for Imperative, 2 159. denoting surprise, 160.

Subj., 261.

With
261.

for ottws

jLiij,

Moods, see Table of Contents, 132, 137.

Indicative
states

Mood
facts

or

asks

questions, 132. in the Indirect State-

personal and personal passive

struction, 159.

imcon-

N.
Negatives, see Part ILL. Ch. ii., Table of Contents'

ment, 181,
1

etc.

See Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 167. 2 On the Infinitive as an Imperative see Monro's Homeric Grammar^ p 162. The whole of the chapter (see especially the Infin. as Subject, 157, Accus. with Infin ic8 "' Origin and History of Infinitive, 163), is worth careful perusal. 3 For the Middle and its uses, see Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 7. The Passive has grown out of the Middle, in fact was originally one of the uses of the Middle Digitized by Microsoft
'

ENGLISH INDEX:
Neuter Plural, with Verb
Singular, 15.
Plural, with
ral, 15.

427
Predicate, 1, 13^ contrasted with Attributive, and Apposition, 5. tary, 2, 22

Verb Plu-

Optative Mood the Optative with av, found in other Sentences, is always an Apodosis
^

Singular Predicate, with Plural Subject, 15. Pronoun, (Adj. or Adv.)

used subordinately.
Optative in Oratio Obliqua introduced without a Principal Verb, 399. Assimilation and NonAssimilation of Optatives,
402-3.

SupplemenOblique or ; Dependent, 43-5. agreement of, with

with Gen.

(like Lat. paul-

lum

sapientiae), 85.
65. Infinitive, 13, 158,

Prepositions,
etc.

several Subjects, 16-18, with Article, 37. see Table of

Nominative Case,
with
179.

Contents, Part III., 286,

with Participle,

187.

Oratio Recta and Obliqua, 10. Virtual Obliqua, 11,

etc.

Quasi

Prepositions,

288, 301-2, 306.

240,

243, 277,

Present Tense, uses of, 142. Principal and Subordinate,

see Sentence. Promising, see Hoping. Pronouns, see Table of Contents, Part I. ch. iii.
47-63-

see

Chapter on Oratio

Object, Direct and Remote,

5-

Obliqua. Oratio

Sentence,
note.

252, foot-

Obliqua, see Part III., ch. iii. (Table of Contents).

Optative Mood Introductory Note, 132. in Independent Sentences, 135, etc.

Participle,
see

Table
of

Personal,

for Reflex-

ive, 48.

Possessive, for a Genitive Subjective, or Objective, 49.

A. Denoting
(an

Wish
-

Command,
hibition).

Exhortation, or Pro-

Contents, 162-177. Fut. Part, with Article.

in Gen., agreeing

with

B. Deliberative Questions. in the Indirect Statement, 181. in the Indirect Question, 188. InDeliberative in direct Questions, 190. in the Indirect Petition (Fut. Opt.), 191, 262. in

163.

a Personal Pronoun imSubstan>

plied
49.

Neuter or

in

the Possessive,

tive, 164.

with Verbs of Percep^

Reflexive, for Reciprocal, 50.

tion, Emotion, etc., 170. etc. in Indirect Statement, 187, etc. Conditional Protasis.

as antecedent to the Relative, 52, n. 4, 55, n. 1. Protasis and Apodosis,

meanings of,

195, footnote.

224.

Conditional Apodosis.
227.

QQuestions,
190-1.

Conditional

Senii.

Temporal, 247-8.
Concessive, 249.
Final, 258.

tences, see Part II. ch.

(a.) In tions.
(.)

Indirect, 188. Indirect, Deliberative,

Future Condi-

In General or Frequentative Past Conditions.

in Temporal Sentences, denoting Indefinite Time (which is of three kinds), see Part II. ch..iii. SenConcessive in tences with et k<u, cat el,
250. Final in 252, etc.

Causal, 278. Passive Voice, 130-1. Voice, in Greek and Latin, 130. Perception, Verbs of, with
Participle, 186.

Deliberative, in Subj.

and Opt.

134-6.

R.
Recta and Obliqua, 10. Relative Sentences,9,284-5. 1 Restrictive, see Limitative.
S.

Verbs with on, or

187.

Verbs with Ace. and

Gen., 88.

Verbs with Preposition, 89.

Schema Pindaricum,
Sentence, parts
5-

16.

Sentences,

of, 1.

in Relative Final Sentences, 259, ,_ with owws Modal (Fut.

Verbs with Adjectives and Adverbs denoting

Perception in Gen., 100. Verbs with fiij, and
Infin., 353.

Simple and Compound,

Principal and ordinate, 6. Co-ordinate, 7.

Sub-

Opt.), 259.

with Causal Sentences

in Virtual Oratio Obliqua, 2 77. r

Verbs with
Particip., 354-

/j,

and

Subordinate
7-10.

classified,

See 3&4-

with expressions of a

Wish, 280. used in quence, 256.

Primary Se1

Perfect Tense, uses of, 144. Person, 2d pers. sing., used impersonally, 22. Petition Indirect, 191-2. Plural for Singular, 21-2.

Sequence of Moods,

138.

Singular for Plural, 18. Indirect, Statement, see Table of Contents, 178,
187.

On

Relative Sentence^, see Momo'sHoffi eric

"bW^W^oiZm

Grammar,

428
Subdirect and Suboblique, 11, 389 (and Orat. Obi., passim). Subjunctive J Introductory Note,i32. in Independent Sen-

GREEK INDEX.
denoting Indefinite Time (which is of three kinds),
(see Part II. ch. iii.). Subjunctive, in Concessive

Substantive used as Adjective or Attributive, 23. Superlative and Comparative, 120-123.

Sentences with edv

/cat

/cat,

tences, 134, 135.

A. In Exhortations. B. In Prohibitions. Deliberative C. In

Questions.

edV, 250. in Final Sentences of Primary Sequence (see Part II. ch. v.) in Modal Sentences

Swearing and Witnessing, Verbs of, take /xij, 353,

. 4, (see 352).

T.

with
260.

on-us, etc., as

a rarer

D. Denoting a future
possibility (a very

and variant construction,

with Verbs of Fearing,
etc., 263, etc. tive,

Temporal Sentences, see Table of Contents, Part

II., ch.
iii.,

232-248.

rare Attic construction).

Tenses, see Table of Contents, Part I. ch. vii.,

138-152.

in Deliberative Indirect Questions, 190. in Indefinite Sentences

alternating with Opta182-184 (see Com-

Time

in the

Moods,

139.

pound
and

Sentence
1).

and

with av, 194.

in tions
ii.).

Oratio Obliqua passim,

Tmesis, 288. Transitive Verbs

Intransitive, 124.

become

Conditional
(see

Quesch.

254, .

Part

II.

Substituted,

by

the

V.
Vocative, 80. Voices, see Table of Contents, 124-131.

(a.) In tions.
(&.)

Future Condi-

In General or Frequentative Present Conditions. in Temporal Sentences

Graphic or Vivid Construction, for the Optative in Historic Sequence whereever the Recta or the Primary Sequence took a Sub1

W.
Wish, expressions
of. 280-3.

junctive, see Graphic.

the Subjunctive and Optative see Monro's Homeric Grammar (Subjunctive in Principal Clauses, 196 ; in Subordinate Clauses, 201 ; Optative in Simple Sentences, 215 ; in Subordinate, 219 ; History of Subjunctive and Optative, 229, etc.).

On

GREEK INDEX.
The numbers
refer to the

pages of the book.

6 aAAoj,

oupu, with Gen. of Charge,

meaning in general,
aAAos etns,
Dat.
or
60.

,95-

Adjectives compounded with, take a Gen., e.g. afxvrjfj.mv,

privative,
avrJKOos, 98, 103. (e5, kclkov,
etc.),

tx.iaxvvofi.ai,,

ayaBov

Aiyw,

with double Ace, 72 (for Pas8p5>,

etc.,

with Dat., 112. with Infin., 155, 172. with 264. alvSavofMLi, with Gen., 86. with Particip., 169, 175,
fxri,

with Ace,

75.

aAAos

6 3"

.,

bo-os,

aAAdrpios,

Gen.,

79, "9- . Ajua, quasi-Prep., 306. a/xa, with Dat., 119.

afxaprdvoi, with Gen., 86.

dfxeCfSofiat,

l8 6 '
,

sive forms, see 73, n. 2). iydWofxai, with Dat., 112.

dyafiat.,

alriSifxaL,

with
^

Gen. Gen.

of or

d/xeXci,

with Gen., 93. with Gen., 87.

ayai'aKTto,

with Gen., 94. with Dat., 117.

87.
,

Charge, g5. amokovOos, with

Dat., 119.

afxvva, with Dat., 116.

ajuvi/ojuat,

with Ace,

76.

afxvvto
afitftt,

and

afJ.vvofJ.ai, 129.

dyetv

X lpS>

aKoKov8Si, with Dat., 118,

6.Kp0ti>iuxi> with Gen., 86. with Gen., 82. aAwTKo/Aai, with Gen. of charge, 95. aAAos, oAAotos, with Gen.,
a-K.ovto,
w

Prep., 317-319.

a.yvo<>,

aSektpos, IIQ>
,

with Gen. 103. with Gen. or Dat.,

with

afj.tfn4vwfu,

with
with

double

Ace,

72.

0A1?,

a.fi<l>Lo-{3r}Ttti,

afiiKw,
,

double

Ace,

Gen and

72Adip/wi/ ttoKk;, 81.

dflujLLw,

aiSovfiai,

with Dat., 112. with Ace, 75.

103.

withfiij, fiy) ov, 365. *Av, see Part II., ch. ii., Table of Contents, 193-

Dat., 117, 118.

aAAos, meaning &esidvs, 62.

231.

Digitized

by Microsoft

, ,

GREEK INDEX.
"&.v 7

429
yevta,

with Impen. and Aor. Indie, denoting a repeated act, 151. with. Aor. Infin., after Verbs of hoping, etc.,
181.

aTTOtcpvirTOfxat
airo\avtii tl

p.y),

p.-/}

ov,

yj7poTpo</it3,

twos,

85, 86.

Ypd^ojutat,

with Gen., 84, 86. with Ace, 76. with Gen. of

73. 82, 98,

with Infin.; in Indirect Statement, 181. with Optat. in Indirect Statement, 185. with Particip., in Indirect Statement, 187. with Aor. Indie, not
,

aVoAuojiuu p;yj, fiT) ov, 365. aVopia, with Gen., 82. oi7ro(rrepw, with double
72. a7TOCTTpe0CO fMJ, jLLTJ OV, 365. aTroTpe'ww, with Gen., 100.
dLTroTuvyai'ft),

95. with double Ace,

yujuwds,
103.

charge,

with Gen.,

Ace,

with

Gen.,

Saicpvbi,

with Ace, 76.

nvp,
"Aprji/,

86.
t

SeSotKa, with Infin., 155.

fie'picojU,ai

denoting

an

unfulfilled

omitted
,

condition, 216.

with the Subj. in Subordinate Sentences,

the Optat. in Subordinate Sentences,
246.
2S5-

a7ro^ev7u, with Gen. (of charge), 95. a.itTop.a.1, with Gen., 86. dpjj-yw, (poet.), with Dat., II6 , apKw, dpKel, construction,
apfov/xat
ou, 365. apTi, with Present, 143, apx<ii, apxop.ai, with Gen.,
jinj p-ij

etc.,

817,

8ij7roTc,

Sijirorow,

as

Suffixes, 58.
StjAos,
Set,

BqAo>, constructions,

245retained with with

- with
Final

and

172, 174. > constructions, 117. Set oirtt)?, 261, . 8. fievVepos, Sevrepaios,

with

Gen. ,97.
Prep., 307-310. Bia/3aAAw, with double Ace.
Atdi,

Sentences,

88, with Infin. and Particip.,

86,

98.

o7rai9

Modal,

261,

171,

72.
8taAAdo"o"fti Tiva. tlvl, 105.

with
272, .

cn-e,

Causal.

wore Consecutive
2.

avTOKpd.T<ap,

with Gen., 103.

of,

oi.aAt'yo/jiat,

with Dat., 109,

avTos, various uses

53-

Il8.
Bta.vip.bi,

'Avd, Prep., 291, 292. avayKa^bj, with double Ace.

73- . . eti/ayKatos, construction of,
,

*&

avap.Lp.vyjO'Kfo

Tiva

tl

ana

55with Dat. of Circumstance, 114. strengthens Reflexives, 49. subject to Infinitive, 179.
auTo-SiKoxoo-uirj, etc. (Plat-

with

Ace

and

Dat., 105. with Ace, 75. Sicupepta, with Gen., 97. Sieuf.epop.ai, with Dat., 98,
SiairAeto,

109.
ot(/>epoi'Tw5 e'xw,

nva twos,

73, n. 3.

with Gen.

Avev, 301. avrjp=Ti$, with Gen., 83. avTexfo, with Dat., 118. awTevojuaL, with Gen., 86. 'Am, Prep., 294.
avTi\4y(o p.r\ and 365avmroLSt, with double
72.
ai*Ticrrpo(pos,
p.r)

onic idioms), 26, 55. avTOs-and 6 auTos, 42, 53-4. 6 aiiTos, constructions of,

97. 103.
5ta<fopos,

with Gen., 97, with Dat. or Gen., 109,

119.

no.
a<paipovp.at
a^tij/Lti,

tlvo.

tl,

and
3.

SiSdo-Kto,

with double Ace,

ov,

Tiva twos, 72, 73, .

72.

with

Gen.

(of

Sie'x<o,

with Gen., 99.

construction
etc.,
of,

Ace,

charge), 95.
d4>t<m}ju.L,

Sikcuos,
159,.

with Gen. or

a.x6op.ai,

with Gen., 99. with Dat., 112,

St7rAcio"i.os,

with Gen.,

Dat., 119. avvrta, with Particip., 172. aios, construction of, 159. afiw, with Gen., 93, 103. airayopevb) (aireiirov) prf, fir)
ov, 365. airaWdtra-oi,
airai/Tto,

117-

97,

with i^peio? axpTJo-TO s, Dat., 119. "Axpt, quasi- Prep., 302.

8i\fj>,

StuKu),

with Gen., 87. with Gen. of charge

temporal

Conjunction

(6 SititKoiv), 95. Soieei, SokS), construction of,

{see p-e'xpO-Ofiai,

117, 159Svoti' Bdrepov, etc., 26.

6v(7e'pa)5,

with
paCvto TTO&a, 77.
jSape'ws ipe'pw,
/3<xo-iA.ev&),

Gen., 99. with Dat., 118. airei6S>, with Dat., 116.

airexOovofLai, 117.
aTre'xw,

Sugtvovs,

with Gen., 103. with Dat., 119.

with

Dat.,

/Stdjjb/wu,

with Gen.,

ov, 363. aTre'xo/xat 1*1), aviirrSt, with Dat., 116. irapexeu) (airtarttaf pA,

99.

p\diTTta,

with Dat. 117. with Gen., 98. with Ace, 78. with double Ace,

eaV,

ov, 264, 365Atto, Prep., 295-297.

fir}

72. p\a<rreLV, with Gen., 80. (SXeirta vchrv, etc., 78. fSoTjBSj, with Dat., 116.

never Interrogative, 191,

Conditional and jtf^ Concessive Sentences.

footnote, 207. eavrov, for 1st and 2d pers.,

twos, 88. ctTroSiSpacTKCo, with Ace, 75. diroSC&op.a.L, with Gen., 3. a'u-oKft/ii'w, with Particip.,
diroSexofJ-ai. tclvto.

povAeuw Indie,

ottws,

with Fut.

etc., 261-2.

Reciprocal,
_

50.

50.

eyyus, with
,

Gen and
with
p.r}

Dat.,

"9and
Infin., 353.

G.yyybip.a.1,

172.

yeAco,

with Ace. 76.

Digitized

by Microsoft

,,

43
eyw
(otJ) for avTo?, as Subject of Infin., 180. eyKokdi, with Dat 117. eyKparrjs, with Gen., 103. efiet, without av, 144, 218.
,

GREEK INDEX.
eWi/nos, with Gen. or Dat.
*3, evSvio (e/e5vw),
ecpefijs-,

with Dat., 119.

Limitative, 274.

ej'

(u re),

with double

ajx.Ki'ovp.ai,

with Gen.,

86,

Ace,

72.

87.

el.

Interrogative. See Indirect Question. Interrogative, with Subj. 291. Interrogative, with Verbs of Fearing, 266. for em with Verbs of Emotion, 186. with Subj., 245.
et

See Conditional and Concessive Sentences.

eveKa, eW/eei', 301. ivvoS) jLi], ju.i] oi', 264.

cvTpeirOfiai,

h(Qp6$ t with Dat., 119. with Gen., 86 exop-ai,

with Gen., 87.

Meanings of,
expyjv (xpw)> 144, 21S.

90.
dr,

evTvyxdvoi, with Dat., 109,

118.

without

e OTOV TpOTTOV, 26l.

with Ace. 75, with Gen., 100. eoiKa, with Dat., 117, cone^t<TTTjp.t.
,

ex<o,

with Gen., 99. as a Copulative Verb,

p.7), p.rj

43.

ov, 365. _

extav, in colloquialisms, 165.

structions of, 159.

eTroupw,

with double Ace,

with Dat., 112. with Gen. of
Dat., 118. Gen., go,
77S17,
fj yj

(edv)

K.aC,

/cat

et

(ear),

72. emxtpop.ai, eirefet^u,

yj-Vw,

with Ace, 76; with

Gen., 94.

ei t

elydp,

eit?e,

with Wishes,

el
el et
,

280-283. Se ju.7), 208. (edv )=si forte, 208. edv, in Virtual Obliqua,
40S-

95.^ ETTepxojLtat, with

charge,

e7njj3oAos,

with

H
with Presen- 143.
)

103.
'Etti,

et ou, 347, 358, 359.

Verbs compounded with,

eTTiSe'ij?,

eTnjpedfw, with Dat., 117. Prep., 318-327.

tis

oirSetV, 62.

earep (edvirep), quasi concessive, 250. elkos %v (without av), see

take a Dat., 118. with Gen., 103.

eTriSetKi/up-i,

with

Partic.
of,

KaTa, 7} d)S (tooTe), with Comparative, 121. TJ5op.ai, with Dat., 112. r}p.urv$ (6) toO xpo^ou, etc., .85.
jjp.wi' (vficov)

J&tt,

eiKWj with Gen., 99, Dat., xo6. ^

etp.t,

Gen. or

187 (see 174 a.). 67rt$oos, constructions

,

avrSiv, Parti-

tively, 51.
7jTTa>p.ai,

elpytti,

/?>

Ets,

M Prep.
,

with Gen., go. with Gen., 99.

"j 365* 292.

159. , eTrtKoupos, with Gen., 103. eTriKoupw, with Dat. 116.

e7rtp:eA.^s,

with Gen., 97-98;

with Dat, in.

7riA*Jo7X.wv,

with
ottcos,

Gen., 103.
etc.,
eirip.eAoi)p,at,

et? StSaovcdAou,

AtSou,

*?*:
*

et? dVijp,

with Superlative,
75.

I2 3*

etcreiju-i,

with Ace,

'Ek, 'E, Prep., 297. cieari, 301.

e/cStSpdovcw,
CK/Stupo),

with with

with Modal, 260-1. with Infin., 261, .

Oappia, with
(9av/j.du),

Ace,

75.

with Gen., 94.

6.

eirioTa/xat, Infin.
fiij

with Partic, 175. Partic, and with

(?aup.a<jTo? ocros, etc., 59. 0tYydi/<o, with Gen., 86.

and

with Ace. 75. with Gen., 100.

,

eiriTide/xtu,

with Dat.,

Infin., 353. 117.

IStos,
.

with Gen. or Dat., 79,

Gen,, 79. Constructions

cKecVo?, uses of, 52.

e/CTTA?j(rcrop.at,

etc.,

with with

Ace,
eXarrw,

75. eAdTTOV/Ltai,

Gen., 98. _ ^ eAeuflepos, 6Aeu0epcT>,

with Gen., 98, 99, 103. eAAHnfc, with Gen., 113. eAKoy ouracrat, etc., 69. ep.p.oi/os(ep.p.eVw), with Dat.,
eju,TrA.eco?,

eTrmjSeios, with Dat., 119, constructions of, 159. kwiTvyxdvui) with Dat., 87. eVojuat, with Dat, 109, see also 118. epy}fji.o$ with Gen., 82, 103. ep/<o, with Dat., 117.
t

I I 9' . , tepds, with

Ikovos,

of,

I73-. iva, Final

Conjunction, 253. iwx av, not Final, 255. 10-0p.01.p05, with Gen., 84.
ieroppOTros,
to-os,
,

with Gen., 87. with p-ij and Infin., 353. epioTti (qpop-jjp), with double
epS>,

with

Gen.
of,

or

Dat., 119. Constructions

no,

Ace,
etrOtw,

72.
84.

IQ

with Gen.,

to-w,

with

Ace and

Dat.,

with Gen.,
(diretpos),

82.

eo"Tti> oi, eitTLV oil, eVtoi.,

60.

117.

ep.7retpos

with

Gen., 103.
ep.TroSioiJi.ai(ep.iTcSu>v elvai),

Dat. 116.
p.j, p.))

ou, 365.

with Gen. ,97, 103. euSatjxoi>i<Jc<), with Gen., 94. etJAa^ovp-at, with Ace, 76. with Infin., 155. with onias, 260, with p.ij,
eVepos,
p.7i 01J, 264, 365. evAo-yw, with double

K
Kaflapoff,
jcot,

with Gen., 82,98,

teat

KatVep,

ep.(/>vTO?,
'Ei>,

with Dat., 119. Prep., 302.

115.
1

Concessive

ravra, see Sentences,

eV,

when used with Dat. of

Ace,

242.

Time,

72-

K
119.

joining two Adjectives,

ewous, with Dat.,

24.

See Monro's Homeric

Digitized

Grammar^

p. 93.

by Microsoft

;; ;

GREEK INDEX.
Kav, Kav el, 209. Keucovpyos, with Gen., 103.
KaX.bc;

431

p-axofiai, .with
ju,etoveKT(o,

Dat.,

109,
6 fiQvk6p.evos (6 Tvx<*"0f 31, o (birep) Ae'yw, 60. SSe, 66t, uses of, 51, 53.
6<Jw,

Kayaflos, 24.
71.

with Gen., 98.

Kakd, with double Ace, Kara, Prep.. 310-313. Kara touto elvai, 157.
KaTOKpivoi,

pJket

JU.01

p.4kei, p,eTap.4kei,

tovtov, 87. Construc-

tions of, 89, 117.

p.4kei

Ka.Tayiyvti)(Ttco),

etc., with Gen., 95. KaraTroAe/xco, with Ace, 76. Kara<l>povS) } with Gen., 87.

jaeAeTW, with OTrtus Modal, 260, 261.

p,ot t

with Gen.,

86._

jxe'Wco,

forming Periphras011 jU.e'AAa>

;

Ketpevdai, with Dat., 107.

Ke\euo>, with Ace. and Dat. also with Ace. and Inf., 116. kv6$, with Gen., 82.
KGiftakjcuov

tic

Future, 140.
150.

7tws (ti)

b&Qvi'aca, for brt in state* merits, 185 ; Causal, 277. otSa (tvvotSa), with Partic. with Infin., 175.
ol/cetos,

/mJ, fiij ov, 365. p.ep.<pop,ai, with

Ace and
117.

Dat., 73, n. also Ace,

3,

and
also

Gen.,

summam\
kCv8vv6$ eori
Ktxorco,

(denique t
26.
/jtij, juif

ad

,"7/xeVos, with Gen., 103. /xeords, with Gen., 82.

with Gen. 79. oucmpiu, with Ace. and Gen., 94. otjuot, with Gen., 94. otov, with Superlative, 123.
,

'ov, 264.

with Ace, 86. kXvco TauTa crou, 88. Kotvds, with Gen. or Dat,
79, 119. -Ko?, Adjectives
KQLviavS>,

Mera, Prep., 316-317. IxeraSiSuifit, with Gen. and

p\erakap.f$av<i} t

otos, in Attraction, 60. olos re, 60. olos, Consecutive, 275 Causal, 278.
olo"0'

Dat., 84, 105. with

84.

o Spao-ou

137.
;

Gen.,

oIyojllcu,

with Partic, 174.

6At-

ending

in,

6Aiyov, bktyov Set, 82

with Gen.j 113. with Gen.

[terai-v,

and

jaera7rotoi)fiat,

with Particip., 165. with Gen.,

yov

oeu', 157.

KparS),

Dat. 84. with Ace. and Gen.,

87, 97, 98.

84.
jue'retju-t, with Ace, 75. (xeTe'pxo/xai, with Ace, 75. /xe'reoTi, with Gen. and

oAiyupw, with Gen., 87. bpukm, with Dat., 109, 118. bp.vvp.i, with jj:q and Infin.,
, ojholos (apojuoios),
.,

3S 3-

K(*u7TTto,

with double Ace,

,,

72.

Dat,
with Gen., 86, 87
Particip.
;

84, 117.

Constructions
U/J.01.W,

of,

ng. no.
Dat.,

Kvptos, with Gen., 103.

KvpSt.

with
173KQ}kv(o,

(poet.),

/lerexw, with Gen., 84: with Ace, 85, w. 1. /xeVoxos (a/AeVoxos), with

with

Ace and

117.

Gen., 84.

with double Ace,

ov, 36s.

fuii

w
Vft) >

H-iXPh Conjunction, quasi- Prep. , 302.

M77, see
tives.
jj.t\

238

Chapter on NegafXT}

with Dat., 117, 119 ; with Partic, 187. bp.6tre x^pw, with Dat., 117. ojuov, with Dat, 119. bp,<tivvp,os, with Dat., 119. op.w5, * Concessive Sen6ju.0A.0yu,

p.-q

for

ov, 264.

pvq for oirois

p-r),

Modal,

261.

tences, 249. bvopd^oj, with double

Ace,

with Gen., with Xayx* Ace, 85 n. 1 ; with Ace

ju.ij,

omitted after Verbs of denying, and /uj for p-rj

ov, 369.
p.rfSeTrep,

and Dat,
kap.pdvw,

116.

with Gen.

and

yx7)5e

Concessive,
ear,
,,

Ace,

87.

249-,
jlwjS'

kap.pdvap.at., with Gen., 86. kav9avofX.au, (and Compds.)i with Gen., 86. kavddvw, with Ace!, 76.

et,

jlojo

Conces-

7* 07nj for ottws, with Fat, 261. 6tt6t, Causal, 277. 07rws, Final, 253 ; Modal with Fut., 259, etc. ; in

sive, 250.

Indirect

ju^pvu, with Dat.

and Ace,

for

oTt
;

Petition, 262 in Statements,

u6._
fj.yjXO-vSip.at,

kav8av(o }

kadiav

construc-

ornor, etc., 260,

Temporal, 235 ottws av, with Opt. not

185
final, 255. opytfo/xat, with Gen., 94, 117.

tions, 173, 174*

karpeHbif with Dat., 116.

keCtrofiat, with Gen., 98. Aijyw, with Gen.. 99. \oi5opw, with Ace, 73, n. 3. koiSopovp.at, with Dat. 73,

261. p,LKpov, 83.

p.ip.irrjo'Kop.ai,

Dat and

with Gen. 86.

,

p.ioS>,

with Ace, 117.

{ap.vrip.<tiv),

(i.vrip.(tiv

with

bp4yop.a.t, with Gen., 86. bpfyavog, with Gen., 98.

Gen., 103.

opci

p.77,

p-?}

ov, 264

OTTW?,

. 3,

and

117.

260, 261.

A.va-tTeA.ei (

with Dat., 117.

N
cat p.d (vy), with

Ace,

77.

M
jLtd,

vep.ta,

and similar words, with Ace, 77_

.

with double Ace, 71. viKtafiai, with Gen,, 97

bV. Personal, 29 ; Relative, Interrogative, 56 57 ; Conditional, 225, 226 Consecutive, 274 ; Causal,

Dat, in.
vop.L$o},

jLta/capt^w,

with Gen. (and with

with Dat., in.

Ace),
itaAXof

4'
?,

Compar.
IvT/tVjftt,

B
with Gen.,
86.

and

Positive, 121.

278. 6? ye Causal, 278. 5(tos, see olos. ye /x' etSeVat, 157. 5s ire'p, 57. bartS, Relative, 57 ;

Saw

In-

Digitized

by Microsoft

, ,

432
terrogative, 56 ; CondiContional, 225, 226 ; secutive, 274 ; Causal, 278.
oen^pcuVo/./Lcu,

GREEK INDEX.
take a Dat. of reference,
7repi/3aAA.o/A<H,
rrias

av;

in

Wishes, 215,

280, etc.

Ace,

72

with double Constructions

ore,

with Gen., 86. Temporal, 234 ; Causal,

-

of, 118.
Treptytyi/o/Attt,

with

Gen.,

a"rj/xetoi> fie,

26.

277* n 3ort (and ws), in Statements,

178, etc. ; difference between, 184. Causal, 276 ; with Verbs of Fearing, 265.
oTi,
OT(>

with Gen. 97. with Ace, irepiipxofM*-!;

Trepteifj.1,
,

97 /

757r6pL7rXe'&),'
TrCfLirKy}fj.i,
,

with Superlative, 123.

TpOTTW for OTTOJS, 261. Oil, oi/K, ovyt, see Part III. ch. ii. (Table of Contents), 345, etc.
011 ju.d,

with Ace. 75. with Gen. 82 Dat. 82. TTLvto, with Gen., 84 Ace,
, , ;

with Ace, 76. o-KOTTw el, Interrog., 261 ; ottu?, etc. 260, 261 ; [ty, p.7j ov, 264. a-TTOvSd^ia bntas, etc., 260, 261. o-Tao-taw, with Dat., 117. ore pCa-Ko fiat, with Gen., gg. OTetpapovjuai, with Dat.,
o-tco7r,

tTKTTevta,
irttrTevfa
\lt\

(7re7ret(ryxat),

with Dat, 116. with

Infin., 353.

"7;
irrox^ofJi.aL, with Gen., 86. o-TparriyS), with Gen., 98.

ov

ft.7},

with Ace. 70. with Fut. Opt. and

,

and

ovb" ei. 230.

Infin., 375. (eav),

(7rep),
e,

irlavvos, with Dat., ng. irXeoveKria, with Gen., 98.

Q-vyyiyvuHTKa},

with

Dat.

and Gen.,
o-vyyvoi fx.(av,
fin- 353_-

95.

Concessive,

ovSd

ov, 01,

Concessive, 249. Reflexives, 50.

with Gen. 103. 7rA7Jp7js, with Gen., 82. irkovo-Los, with Gen., 82. iroiov/xaL, with Gen., 79.
7rAe'fi)s,
,

with Gen., 103. cruyxwpui, with /at} and Ino-uKo<pai/, with

o-uA.\apv/3aVio,

Ace,

76.

oufieis b'sTt? ot>, 59.

ovk

av el, 203. ofiv, as a Suffix, 58. ovvsko. for on, 185.

016"

7ro)s ; ir69ev tions, 56.

irai6<s

in Repeti-

Construction,

118.

and

ttoo-os (indefinite),
7r0A.eju.ai,

61.
7roAe'jU,tOff,

oSto's,

ovrotTL,

Relatives,
66.
(sic

with

a~v^ovkevio, with Ace and Dat., 116. o-ujU./u.axos, with Dat., ng.
o~vfji<f>epov, o-i;/x<opos (dorip;-

57ofiroff,

A^ms tu
in

outw,
282.
o<f>pa

Wishes

ut),

Dat., 119, 109. rqs x&P&s, 85. ttoAAootos, etc., with Gen.,
ttoAAtj

(popos),

o-up-^ovw,

with Dat., 119. with Dat., 117.

97-

(Epic

and

Lyric),

ttoAAou Sel (Sew), 83.

irdrepoff
; and Trorepds, 61. ttov yijs etc., 85, n. 3. 7rpaKTtKd?, with Gen., 103.
;

with

Su^, Prep., 305. with Dat. of Circumstance, 114. o~vv Oeio eiTrelv, 157.
Suceo-t?,
kolto.

final, 253.
oi//tju.a0v]s,

with Gen., 103.

see

n
Ttako.1,

irpao-tra) (7cp6.o~o-op.aC),

o-i$veo-iv

Construction (English

double Ace. 72
,

irpatrcrta

with Present, 143.

ito.v=quidlibet, 63.
ttovto. etvai, 16.

Verbs compounded with,

take Dat., 118. jrapafidWbi, Constructions
of, 118.

Ilapa, Prep. 318-332.

on-cos, etc. 260, 261. with Dat., 117. Ilpd, Prep., 300. irpoOvfiovfiaL, with Ace, 76; ojrws. etc., 260, 261. wpoKaA.oCiU.at, with Gen. of
Trpe'iret,

Verbs compounded with,

take a Dat., 118. avv^Sto (SjSw), with Dat.,
117.

Index).

charge, 95.
TrpoKei/mi,
TrpostpiXijs,

irapairAiJo-tos,

119

Dat., Constructions of,

with

irpoTt^to,

with Gen., 100. with Dat., 119. with (Ace) and

0-ueaA.A.aWw, with Ace and Dat., 117. <r-6veifLL, with Dat., 118. avvek&VTi (<tvvt4ij.vovti) etTretp, 107. trvvoiSa* Construction, 118, *75-

no.
7rapacTKevatrTtK6s,withGen.
103. Trapao-Kevajjw 260, 261.
TrctpaTao-o'oju.ac,

Verbs compounded with,

take a Dat., 118.
irposa-yopevto,

Gen., 100. npds, Prep., 336.

o-0dA Aop.at, with Gen., 86.

o"xijp,a

oirws,

etc.,

o~xeSov eiffely, 157. koS' 6A.0V koX

24.

fieprj,

with double
118.

with Dat.,

Ace,
1

71.

118.

Trpdset/xi,
it pose
;

irapaxcopw, with Gen., gg.

iravta

with Dat., pxo fiat,, with

Dat.
tol irpSiTa. etvai, 16.

(Ace), and Gen., 99 iravoju.ai, Gen., 99 Travto and iravofiat, with Par;

log.

tovtov, 117. TTposKpovw, with Dat., 118,

7rpds77et /xoi

ticip., 163, 170.

Tre'irjs,

119.
82, 103.

withGen.,

7rposTV7x ai,u j
87, iog, 118.

with

Dat.

7ret0O|U.U,

with Dat., 116.

iridov (jxot), 116. Suffix, 57.

TdSe iravra, 52. with Gen., 93. TEKf^ptov fie 26. re/Afw, with double Ace,
Tafie,
Tao-o-fa),
1

71.
17?

ireCBov
7rep,

and

TVS avjrjs rj^epas

as a

n-poTepatos, with Gen., 97. irvvOdvofiat, with Gen. , 86.

7ra>A.w,

and

Ilepi, Prep., 332-335.

Verbs compounded with,

with Gen.,
;

auTfl rifJLepg, 92. Tt p.a0ui/; rt 7ra0ui/; M

eXt.ii/,

(rt

93.

ff9 -yap. aj/

Tt'(3ou\dj.ei'os), 164.

209.

rt/Aios,

with Gen.,

103.

Digitized

by Microsoft

; ;

GREEK INDEX.
TLfA,S},

433
XakenaCvaif x^^TTUff
;\a/ji^"ojU.at,

rtftibfMn,

with Gen.,
J

U7roj3aAAa),
viroo'v'o/iiu,

93TlfMopoUjLKU, With AcC, 76 see 129. Tt/Awpw, withDat., 116.

Tiy,

with Dat., 116. with Ace, 75.

p.?)

(pe'pw,

VTioTrrevoi \m,
u7roreA)}s,
uiroTiflejutai,

ou, 264.

withDat., 112-117. with Dat.,

116.

to

JU.TJ

idiomatic uses of, 26. (/Hi; ou), tou or tou

(jmi

with Infin., after Verbs of denying,

furj

ov),

TO

etc. ^366, 367, 368. TTOIOV, TO Tt J 56 TTOtoV, TO 7TOO-OI/, 63.

TO
ou,

with Gen., 103. with Dat., 116. viro(f>ev'y<a t with Ace, 75. vorepSt, v<rreplta t with Gen., g8 ; uorepds, uorepaios, with Gen,, 97. v4>CtjTCLfxai, with Ace, 75.

Xapu', quasi- Prep., 302.

Xopeva Gcav, 72. XP*J (xpf *i XpV)i with and ov 353.

,

fii?

XPW,

see exprjv.

Xpiio-tpof, (o-XPW tos) with Dat, 119. Xpw/i,<u, with Dat., in.

xwvfo

TOtouTos, 362.

followed

by

Xwp^co, with Gen., 99. Xpk, quasi-Prep. 301.

<pa.vep6s, ipavep6v t fyaivofiai,

To|euw, with Gen., 87.

tou, with Infin. Final, 94, see 366. tou Aoi7rov and to Kolttqv,
92.

Constructions, 173, 174.

(ei5wA6s), with Gen., 99, 103. <J>eO, with Gen., 94. <t>evyw SCkvjv, 81 ; with Gen. of charge, 95 6 fyevymv,
(petiSo/xat
;

ibevKofjM-t,

i/aA<Ss

ruy^aco), with Gen., with Particip., 173.

tout'
e/eeii'o,

86

with Gen., 86 with double Ace, 72. with Gen., 98, 103; ff/ikiS, with Gen., 99.

52.

95-

with Gen., 80. TpCfitov, with Gen., 103. rvpawevia, rvpavvia, with
rpoupqi'ai,

<pevyw

jut}, .Tj

ou, 365.
;

a
with
a)i/rrds,

4>0a.vot t

with Ace, 76 with Gen., 94

Particip., 171.
4>QovS) t
;

(ovou/jtai,

with^ Gen., 103; with Gen., 93:

260, 261.

Gen., 98.
ru(pAds,

with
with

with
(jipaLo;,

o7r(os, etc.,

with Gen.,

103.

Dat., 117.
<|)iAtK(Is Sidjceijbuu,

with Gen., 93, 103.

;

etc.,

ws,

Dat.
f/jtA66u)pos,

vfipCg<a,

with double Ace,

<l>LAofj.aftris,
(jjofiovft-a-i,

,73'
u7raKouw, with Gen. with Dat., 116.
u7rap^oj,
365Yn-e'p,

with Gen., 103. with Gen., 113. with Ace, 76:

for Situs Modal," "261, . 3 ; Final, sS3Svwith EinalPaitiap.,

tive, 27s
;

Modal, 253

(Gsl^for wsTeTConsecu&$ av, Final,

etc.

and
171, ov,

with
p.rj

Infin., 153; with/x^,

255 ; in Wishes, 280,

ou and variant con-

with Particip.,
p.rj,
ju.17

vnQKTpa.irecr6v.L.
,

Prep., 314.

vjrepa\yS), with Gen., 100. uirep/3aAAai, with Ace, 75.

vnepextti, with Gen., 97. U7rep<f>wjs oo-o?, etc., 59.

structions, 266, etc. $pitF(na t with Ace, 75. ^povTi^io ottos, etc., 260, 261 ; ju.1), jllv] ou, 264. <pvAdo~o~u, -oju.a,t ottus, etc., 260, 261 ; p.>j, |UJ7 ov, 264, 365.
(/iuAaf/CTO/xa(,
/xij, fti|

Comparative (also aiswep) with Particip., i&sZZ &s, with Superlative, 123. s (wsjrep) ou and /hJ, 357. o>s eVo? ftrrfii/, and similar
phrases, 157.
<Iij7rep ai/ ei,

209.

with Ace. 76

vvevQvvos, with Gen. and Dat., 103: umjpeTw, with Dat., 116. vtrt<rxvovp.at, with Dat. and with Ace, 116.
'Ytio,

ou, 365.

ust, Consecutive, 269-273 Limitative, 274. ciisTt p,if, with Infin. after

4>vvcu r

with Gen., 8c

tafakov,

Verbs of denying, etc., .366without avt see cffiei; in Wishes, 281-283.

Prep., 341.

X<upu> with Particip., 17a

Digitized bfifMzrosoft

TABLE OF REFERENCES.
Aeschines, B.c. 389-314 (?) Aeschylus, B.C. 525-456. Andocides, B.C. 440(1?) last speech

39a

Antiphon, B.C. 480 (?)-4io

Aristophanes, B.C. 450 (?) last play 388. Demosthenes, B.C. 384(?)-322.
Euripides, B.C. 480-406.
Isaeus, dates of speeches B.C. 389-352.
Isocrates, B.C. 436-338.

(?).

Lysias, B.C. 435 (?)-378. Plato, B.C. 429 (?)-347.

Sophocles, B.C. 496-406. Thucydides, B.C. 471 (?)-40i

(?).

Xenophon,

B.C. 4a9(?)-356

(?).

The

TABLE OF REFERENCES.
LINE
987, i47i

435

PAGE
93 136

Septem ad Thebas.
4S1, 53. 553, 672, 68i, 821, 843.

62 206 778 289

411

note 341 . 318

Supplies*.

'5,

594,

309 74

ANDOCIDES.
1.

De

Mysteriis.

30, 38, 43, 50, 54, 57, 58, 59, 61,

180 47 256 244,

5,

41 223 224 218

404
387 353

63, 101,

436
LINE

TABLE OF REFERENCES.

TABLE OF REFERENCES.
LINE

437

438
LINE

TABLE OF REFERENCES.

TABLE OF REFERENCES.
LINE

439

44
LINE

TABLE OF REFERENCES.

TABLE OF REFERENCES.
PAGE
Oed.
Col.

441

LINE
6s, 88, 102, 122,

PAGE
311 352 304

PAGE
31.

79 354 261 373 62 162 63 368 373 373 301 245 .171 36S 2 45 373 36S 62 322 227 356 373 49. 384 271 73 372 373 351 413 245 304 331 39 373

34
I,S

* 290, 297
23. 24, 36, 37. 38, 39. 41, 44. 45, 54. 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 65, 67, 68, 7, 7i. 73, 74. 76, 77. 78. 86, 87. 89, 91.

356
185 94 71 37 151 36S 369 323 359 363

169, 197. 244, 285, 289, 348. 349. 353. 377. 408, 409. 427. 444. 487.

326 120 107

101 325
244> 325
,

352

161, 315

"5
120 334 293
15

274 277 274

301 418 68 3i 318 363 375, 385 164 246 255 356 276 245 423 243 281

Oed. Tyr.
368, 38! 366, 369

245 368 144 362

251

494. 523. 534. 554. 588, 611, 674. 764, 825, 900, 914. 9'7. 931. 961, 969. 975, 1030, 1079, 1171, 1224, 1289, l=93>

319 366 298 261 333 244

221 >45 268 166
354. 366

304 35i
339

400 59 < 290, 404

112
60, gi

356
107
19 122

95, 96,
97, 99. TOO, I02,
T 03,

45 236 276 360

29 170
238, 292

1314. 1363.

1441

70 147 304 147 353 34

34 154 208 410 380 298 309 302 309 420

207 29S 123 257

Trachiniae.
389, 545, 577, 631, 687, 817, 978, 1 100, IT22, XI29,

'

296 154 295 256, 299 246 418 374. 384 323
102

"83,
J342,

264 374
211

104, 107, 109, 112, Il6, Il8, I20, 121, 123, 124, 125, 126, 128, J3 1 . 132, 134. 137. "4,
.

68 166
85, 244

299 347 23 373. 380

121,

168
131, 168

"5, 365
99 242 406 246, 348
'

257
101 405
Pkiloctetes.
26,
46, 60,

THUCYDIDES.
Book
1.

91

*i,

314. 330

Book
3,

36, 85, 327 85, 273

107

4, 5.

85, 191

44 276 304

3.

335
94, 162

4,

15,

293

23 19. 321 343. 354

Digitized

by Microsoft

442
LINE

TABLE OF REFERENCES.

TABLE OF REFERENCES.
LINE

443

PAGE

BY

THE SAME AUTHOR.

AN ELEMENTARY GREEK SYNTAX.

Crown
8vo, 2s.

HOMERIC GRAMMAR.
Forms
in Schools.

For the use of Upper

8vo, 2s. 6d.

Crown

LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. LONDON, NEW YORK, AND BOMBAY

Digitized

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft

Digitized

by Microsoft